Skip to main content

Full text of "CSUF Course Catalogs 1959-2007"

See other formats



1993 — 1995 University Catalog 

Available from: Titan Shops Bookstore on the University campus 
or by mail order to: 

Titan Shops 
CSU Fullerton 
2875 Orange/Olive Road 
Orange, CA 92665 

Price: $10.00 plus sales tax and shipping. 


University Address 

When corresponding with the university, write to the specific 
office, school or department — 

California State University, Fullerton 
RO. Box 34080 
Fullerton, CA 92634-9480 
Telephone information (714) 773-2011 


Changes in Rules and Policies 

Although every effort has been made to assure the accuracy of the 
information in this catalog, students and others who use this 
catalog should note that laws, rules and policies change from 
time to time and that these changes may alter the information 
contained in this publication. Changes may come in the form of 
statutes enacted by the Legislature, rules and policies adopted by 
the Board of Trustees of The California State University, by the 
chancellor or designee of The California State University, or by 
the president or designee of the institution. Further, it is not 
possible in a publication of this size to include all of the rules, 
policies and other information which pertain to the student, the 
institution, and The California State University. More current or 
complete information may be obtained from the appropriate de- 
partment, school, or administrative office. 

Nothing in this catalog shall be construed as, operate as, or have 
the effect of an abridgment or a limitation of any rights, powers, 
or privileges of the Board of Trustees of The California State 
University, the chancellor of the California State University or 
the president of the campus. The Trustees, the chancellor, and 
the president are authorized by law to adopt, amend, or repeal 
rules and policies which apply to students. This catalog does not 
constitute a contract or the terms and conditions of a contract 
between the student and the institution or The California State 
University. The relationship of the student to the institution is 
one governed by statute, rules, and policy adopted by the Legisla- 
ture, the Board of Trustees, the chancellor, the president and 
their duly authorized designees. 


Effective date: August 23, 1993 


California State 
University, Fullerton 



Accreditations and 
Associations 

Accreditation Board for Engineering and Technology 
Accrediting Council on Education in Journalism and Mass 
Communications 

American Assembly of Collegiate Schools of Business 
American Chemical Society 
American Speech^LanguagC' Hearing Association 
Commission on Teacher Credentialing 
Computer Sciences Accreditation Commission 
NAFSA: Association of International Educators 
National Association of Schools of Art and Design 
National Association of Schools of Dance 
National Association of Schools of Music 
National Association of Schools of Public Affairs and 
Administration 

National Association of Schools of Theatre 
National Athletic Trainers Association 
National Council for Accreditation of Teacher Education 
National League for Nursing 

Southern California Consortium on International Studies 
Universities Field Staff International 
Western Association of Graduate Schools 
Western Association of Schools and Colleges 


1 


Nondiscrimination Policy 

The California State University does not discriminate on the 
basis of race, color, national origin, sex, religion, sexual prefer^ 
ence, marital status, pregnancy, age or disability in the educa^ 
tional programs or activities it conducts. Such programs and 
activities include but are not limited to admission of students and 
employment. Discrimination is prohibited by Title VI and VII of 
the Civil Rights Act of 1964, Title IX of the Education Amend- 
ments of 1972, and Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 
1973, and the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, includ- 
ing all subsequent amendments and the administrative regula- 
tions adopted thereunder by the Department of Education. 

Inquiries concerning compliance with these Acts and imple- 
menting regulations should be addressed to: 

Rosamaria Gomez-Amaro 
Director, Affirmative Action, CSUF 
Langsdorf Hall 101 A 
(714) 773-3951 

Paul K. Miller 

Director, Disabled Student Services, CSUF 
Library 113 
(714) 773-3117 

Office of Civil Rights 
Regional Director, Region IX 
Old Federal Building 
50 United Nations Plaza, Room 239 
San Francisco, CA 94102 
(415) 556-7000 


This Catalog 

Within this catalog may be found general academic and adminis- 
trative information as well as specific descriptions of the depart- 
ments, their majors and the courses offered in each. The first 
major part contains orienting information such as the calendar, 
materials on the California State University, an overview of Cal 
State Fullerton and facts about student services and activities on 
the campus. 

The subsequent sections of the catalog are concerned with: ad- 
mission, registration, records and regulations; academic advise- 
ment; and university courses. The next sections describe the 
departments and the programs of study and courses they offer. 
The final part of the catalog contains a listing of the faculty and 
administration. An index may be found at the end to help the 
reader locate specific items. 


Because this catalog must be prepared well ahead of the academic 
years it covers, changes in some programs and rules occur. The 
class schedule and subsequent errata sheets are the final authority 
in regard to classes offered, instructors and revisions of regula- 
tions. This publication may be bought from the Titan Bookstore. 


Credits 

The California State University, Fullerton, catalog is prepared by 
the Office of Academic, Graduate, and International Programs; 
William W. Haddad, Associate Vice President for Academic Pro- 
grams. 


Editor/Project Coordinator Gladys Fleckles 

Catalog Design Shushan Wilson 

Photographs Michael Riley 


Patrick O’Donnell 

Additional photographs appear through the courtesy of the Of- 
fice of Public Affairs, the Daily Titan, and select department 
faculty. 

Editorial Assistants Donna Gwaltney Ridge 

Susan Lasswell 
Elaine Lekich 
Ken Moyer 
Marlys Rietman 
Janan Zonker 

Curriculum Editing William W Haddad 


School Deans 
Department Chairs 
Program Coordinators 

Typesetting Keyboard Network, Inc. 

Printing Sinclair Printing 

Los Angeles 


2 


President's Message 

Welcome to California State University, Fullerton. The universi* 
ty is here to prepare students to meet the challenges of their 
future chosen careers. Our undergraduate and postbaccalaureate 
programs are designed to help students reach their optimum 
personal and professional development. We are a caring campus 
that provides an environment whereby our students have oppor- 
tunities for learning, growth, service to society, and involvement 
in the university community. Through our programs, students 
will learn to be concerned with the pursuit of excellence and the 
importance of quality of life issues. 

California State University, Fullerton has awarded more than 
100,000 degrees since classes began in 1959, and we have played 
an integral role in the lives of students, almuni and the communi- 
ty at large. Our university provides the Orange County commu- 
nity, its surrounding regions, the state and the nation with the 
trained professionals in business, computer science, engineering, 
health, science and teaching, the arts and other service sectors 
with growing numbers of well-educated personnel. By providing 
access to professional careers for the broadest cross-section of 
Americans, including women and members of minority and im- 
migrant groups, our university represents a pathway into the 
American mainstream for individuals and families who otherwise 
would not have the opportunity to make this step, thus helping to 
ensure the stability of our free economy and our democratic 
government. 

As Orange County has grown and matured, so has the university. 
Enrollment now stands at approximately 25,000 students, and 
the faculty is made up of over 700 distinguished professionals, 
who are dedicated to excellence in teaching, scholarly and cre- 
ative activity, and service to the university and the community. 
Our faculty members are actively involved in giving each student 
the finest academic experience possible. 

We are proud that in the university’s relatively short history our 
curriculum has grown to include 47 undergraduate majors and 44 
graduate degrees, plus a variety of credential and certificate 
programs. 

The university tradition extends from our quality academic offer- 
ings, our cultural diversity, our extensive outreach programs to 
the personal, first-hand interaction with professors whose diversi- 
ty and backgrounds provide unsurpassed enrichment for a total 
university education. We support and encourage risk-taking, 
striving for excellence and the full development of human poten- 
tial. Our students can participate in or be spectators of intellectu- 
al, cultural and athletics programs and events. By the time stu- 
dents graduate, they will have received one of the finest educa- 
tions possible. They will be prepared for continued personal and 



professional development throughout their lives; they will be 
ambassadors of goodwill for the university and our surrounding 
communities will benefit from their contributions to society. 

California State University, Fullerton fosters a stimulating and chal- 
lenging environment where learning is preeminent. The campus 
community is dedicated to the development of humane leaders 
prepared to meet the opportunities and challenges of a changing, 
diverse world. As you become familiar with and involved in the 
campus and its activities, you will discover exciting opportunities to 
grow and contribute. 1 invite you to participate fully. 

a. 

Milton A. Gordon 
President 

California State University, Fullerton 




3 



Table of Contents 


President’s Message 3 

Academic Calendars 8 

The California State University 11 

California State University, Fullerton 15 

University Advisory Board 15 

Mission Viejo Campus 18 

Community Minority Affairs Advisory Council 19 

University Administration 20 

CSUF Alumni 24 

Community Support Groups ; 24 

ACADEMIC SERVICES 

Academic Affairs 28 

Vice President for Academic Affairs 28 

Academic Programs 29 

Academic Senate 29 

Admissions and Records 29 

Analytical Studies 30 

Computer Center 30 

Extended Education 30 

Graduate Studies 30 

Faculty Affairs and Records 30 

Faculty Research 31 

International Programs 31 

Television & Media Support Services 31 

Library 31 

Student Academic Affairs 33 

Academic Advisement Center 33 

Athletic Academic Services 33 

Center for Internships and Cooperative Education 34 

Educational Opportunity Program 34 

Mentor Program 34 

Student Academic Services 34 

Student Affirmative Action 35 

Student Study Center 35 

University Outreach/Relations with Schools 35 

Campus Tours 35 

Writing Center 36 

Honors Programs 37 

Dean’s Honor List 37 

General Education Honors 37 

Honors at Entrance 37 


Honors at Graduation 38 

Honor Societies 38 

President’s Opportunity Scholars 38 

President’s Scholars Program 38 

Institutes and Centers 40 

California Desert Studies Consortium 40 

Center for Economic Education 40 

Center for Excellence in Science and 

Mathematics Education 40 

Center for Governmental Studies 41 

Center for International Business 41 

Developmental Research Center 41 

Foreign Language Laboratory 41 

Humanities Institute 41 

Institute for Economic and Environmental Studies 41 

Institute of Geophysics 42 

Institute for Molecular Biology and Nutrition 42 

Institute for the Advancement of Teaching & Learning . . 42 

Laboratory of Phonetic Research 42 

Ruby Gerontology Center 42 

Social Science Research Center 42 

Southern California Ocean Studies Consortium 43 

Sport and Movement Institute 43 

Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary 43 

Twin Studies Center 43 

STUDENT AFFAIRS 

Student Affairs 46 

Vice President for Student Affairs 46 

Academic Appeals 46 

Career Development Counseling 47 

Financial Aid 48 

Disabled Student Services 48 

Health Service 48 

Housing Services and Residential Life 48 

International Education and Exchange 49 

School Based Student Affairs 49 

Testing and Research 50 

Women’s/ Adult Reentry Center 50 

Student Activities 51 

University Activities Center 51 

Associated Students 53 


4 


Child Care Center 53 

University Center 54 

Human Corps Community Service Program 55 

University Recreation Program 55 

Intercollegiate Athletics 56 

Conference Memberships 56 

Men’s Intercollegiate Athletics 57 

Women’s Intercollegiate Athletics 57 

Resources 59 

Anthropology Museum 59 

Art Gallery 59 

Dance Repertory Threatre 59 

Daily Titan 60 

Dining & Vending Services 60 

Fullerton Arboretum 60 

Herbarium 60 

Oral History Program 60 

Reading Clinic 61 

Speech and Hearing Clinic 61 

Theatre and Dance Department Productions 61 

Titan Shops Bookstore 61 

Undergraduate Reading Lab 61 

University Channel 61 

ACADEMIC ADVISEMENT 

School Advisement Offices 64 

Academic Advisement Center 65 

Departmental Academic Advisement 66 

Preprofessional Programs 66 

Health Professions 67 

Answers to Your Questions 68 

ADMISSIONS 

Undergraduate Students 70 

Freshmen Requirements 70 

English Placement Test (EPT) 73 

Entry Level Mathematics (ELM) Test 73 

Residency Requirements 74 

Application Procedures 76 

Admission Requirements 79 

First'Time Freshman 79 

Undergraduate Transfer Students 81 

International Students 81 


Summer Session 82 

Transfer Credits 83 

REGISTRATION 

Registration Information 88 

Schedule of Fees 90 

Financial Aid 93 

UNIVERSITY REGULATIONS 

Enrollment Regulations 103 

Grading Policies 104 

Administrative Grading Symbols 105 

Student Records 107 

Grade Changes 108 

Continuous Residency Regulations 110 

Stop'Out Policy 110 

Leave of Absence Ill 

Withdrawal from the University Ill 

Retention, Probation and Disqualification Ill 

Student Conduct Ill 

Parking 113 

Student Rights 114 

GRADUATE REGULATIONS 

Graduate Application Procedures 118 

Graduate Admissions 120 

Requirements for the Master’s Degree 121 

Graduate Enrollment Policies 124 

Graduate Academic Standards 127 

Theses and Projects 128 

Steps in the Master’s Degree 131 

ACADEMIC PROGRAMS 

Degree Programs 134 

Graduation Requirements for the 

Bachelor’s Degree 135 

General Education 139 

California Articulation Number (CAN) 140 

Teaching Credential Programs 149 

Extended Education 164 

International Programs 166 

Special Major Program 168 

Interdisciplinary Studies Program 168 

Course Numbering Code 169 

Cross-Disciplinary University Programs 171 

Library Courses 171 


5 


CURRICULA 


SCHOOL OF THE ARTS 175 

Art 177 

Music 191 

Theatre and Dance 206 

SCHOOL OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

AND ECONOMICS 221 

Accounting 224 

Business Administration Degrees 231 

Economics 239 

Finance 246 

International Business Program 250 

Management 253 

Management Information Systems 257 

Management Science 259 

Marketing 265 

SCHOOL OF COMMUNICATIONS 271 

Communications 273 

Speech Communication 282 

SCHOOL OF ENGINEERING AND 

COMPUTER SCIENCE 295 

Computer Science 298 

Engineering 305 

Civil Engineering 308 

Electrical Engineering 315 

Mechanical Engineering 323 

SCHOOL OF HUMAN DEVELOPMENT AND 
COMMUNITY SERVICE 333 

Child Development 335 

Counseling 338 

Educational Administration 343 

Elementary and Bilingual Education 347 

Health, Physical Education and Recreation 357 

Human Services Program 368 

Military Science Program 372 

Nursing 374 

Reading 378 

Secondary Teacher Education 381 

Special Education 384 


SCHOOL OF HUMANITIES AND 

SOCIAL SCIENCES 391 

AfrO'Ethnic Studies 393 

American Studies 397 

Anthropology 402 

Chicano Studies 409 

Conservation Program 412 

Criminal Justice 413 

English/Comparative Literature 416 

Environmental Studies 426 

Foreign Languages and Literatures 428 

Geography 449 

Gerontology 455 

History 457 

Latin American Studies Program 466 

Liberal Studies Program 469 

Linguistics 472 

Pacific Rim Studies 477 

Philosophy 479 

Political Science 484 

Psychology 494 

Religious Studies 503 

Russian and East European Area 

Studies Program 510 

Social Sciences Program 512 

Sociology 514 

Women’s Studies 521 

SCHOOL OF NATURAL SCIENCE 

AND MATHEMATICS 525 

Biological Science 527 

Chemistry & Biochemistry 536 

Geological Sciences 544 

Mathematics 549 

Physics 557 

Science Education Program 561 

FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATION 567 

INDEX 617 


6 




1993 '94 Academic Calendar 

Please note: This academic calendar is not intended to be construed as an employee work calendar. 


SUMMER SESSION 1993 


June 1 

Tuesday 

. Instruction begins; registration and 

July 5, 

Monday 

classes. 

. Independence Day observed — 

August 2, 

Monday 

Campus closed. 

. Initial period for filing applications for 

August 20, 

Friday 

admission to the following spring semeS' 
ter begins. 

. Instruction ends. 

FALL SEMESTER 1993 

August 23, 

Monday 

. Academic year begins; advisement and 

August 26, 

Thursday 

orientation begins. 

. Instruction begins. 

September 6, 
Monday 

Labor Day — Campus closed. 

September 9, 
Thursday 

. Admission day — Campus open. 

October 1 1 , 

Monday 

. Columbus Day — Campus open. 

November 1, 

Monday 

. Initial period for filing applications for 

November 11, 
Thursday 

admission to the following fall semester 
begins. 

. Veterans Day — Campus open. 

November 25'26, 
Thursday'Friday . 

Thanksgiving recess — Campus closed. 

December 10, 

Friday 

Last day of classes. 

December 13, 
Monday 

Examination preparation day. 

December 13-18, 
Monday'Saturday 

Semester examinations. 

December 20, 
Monday 

Winter recess begins. 

December 24'30, 
Friday'Thursday . 

Holiday break — Campus closed. 

December 31, 

Friday 

New Year’s Day observed — 


Campus closed. 


1994 

January 1, 

Saturday New Year’s Day — Campus closed. 

January 3, 

Monday Winter recess ends. 

January 3, 

Monday Semester ends; grade reports due. 


INTERSESSION - 1994 


January 3, 

Monday Intersession begins. 

January 17, 

Monday Martin Luther King, Jr. Day — 

Campus closed. 

January 28, 

Friday Intersession ends. 

SPRING SEMESTER 1994 

January 26, 

Wednesday Semester begins; advisement and 

orientation begins. 

January 31, 

Monday Instruction begins. 

February 12, 

Saturday Lincoln’s Birthday — Campus open. 

February 21, 

Monday Washington’s Birthday — 


Campus closed. 

March 28' 

April 1, 


Monday-Friday . . Spring recess — Campus open 
but no classes. 

April 4, 

Monday Instruction resumes. 

May 20, 

Friday Last day of classes. 

May 23, 

Monday Examination preparation day. 

May 23'28, 


Monday-Saturday Semester examinations. 


May 27'29, 

Friday-Sunday . . . Commencement exercises. 

May 30, 

Monday Memorial Day — Campus closed. 

May 31 'June 2, 

Tuesday' 

Thursday Evaluation days. 

June 2, 

Thursday Semester ends; grade reports due. 


8 


1994'95 Academic Calendar 


SUMMER SESSION 1994 


May 31, 

Tuesday Instruction begins; registration and 

classes. 

July 4, 

Monday Independence Day — Campus closed. 

August 1, 

Monday Initial period for filing applications for 

admission to the following spring semeS' 
ter begins. 


August 19, 

Friday Instruction ends. 

FALL SEMESTER 1994 


August 22, 

Monday Academic year begins; advisement and 

orientation begins. 

August 25, 

Thursday Instruction begins. 

September 5, 

Monday Labor Day — Campus closed. 

September 9, 

Friday Admission Day — Campus open. 

October 10, 

Monday Columbus Day — Campus open. 

November 1, 

Tuesday Initial period for filing applications for 

admission to the following Fall Semester 
begins. 


November 11, 

Friday Veterans Day — Campus open. 

November 24-25 

ThursdayTriday . Thanksgiving recess — Campus closed. 
December 9, 

Friday Last day of classes. 

December 12, 

Monday Examination preparation day. 


December 12- 17, 

Monday'Saturday Semester examinations. 


December 19, 

Monday Winter recess begins. 

December 26-30, 

Monday-Friday . . Holiday break — Campus closed. 


1995 

January 1, 

Sunday New Year’s Day — Campus closed. 

January 2, 

Monday New Year’s Day observed — 

Campus closed. 

January 3, 

Tuesday Winter recess ends. 

January 3, 

Tuesday Semester ends; grade reports due. 


INTERSESSION - 1995 


January 3, 

Tuesday Intersession begins. 

January 16, 

Monday Martin Luther King, Jr. Day — 

Campus closed. 

January 27, 

Friday Intersession ends. 


SPRING SEMESTER 1995 


January 25, 

Wednesday Semester begins; advisement and 

orientation begins. 

January 30, 

Monday Instruction begins. 

February 12, 

Sunday Lincoln’s Birthday — Campus open. 

February 20, 

Monday Washington’s Birthday — 

Campus closed. 

March 27-31, 

Monday-Friday . . Spring recess — Campus open 
but no classes. 

April 3, 

Monday Instruction resumes. 

May 19, 

Friday Last day of classes. 

May 22, 

Monday Examination preparation day. 

May 22-27, 


Monday-Saturday Semester examinations. 

May 26-28, 

Friday-Sunday . . . Commencement exercises. 

May 29, 

Monday Memorial Day — Campus closed. 

May 30- 
June I, 

Tuesday-Thursday Evaluation days. 

June 1, 

Thursday Semester ends; grade reports due. 


9 




H fib'E; j A ■' ?, ^ 




r >1^: 


. , 

. A ' ■ 


|'‘•''f:i 4 


; 't,<; ii. ■’■*•■;; V 


nf>'- ■-♦• ■ /''V*.;-, • •■>■>• *i • ■■ 

, /'• ■ ;. 'r-iy : '..rr''; ^^c^ ’fi 

•ifV:iA< '5 .•: 


m.A >i;irS3*e? jaah 




I . . •' 

A -if, I 

r-lt -M 

.] 

. M 


,Vt ;•. 

,, } 




■ -. •■' ’ Wa:.','< j- . {j* . . 

■"•'.1 . :*r 


V: A. 


.C TjCa: 

' u •<> 


'>C-. . 

I -v- . ■ -;• • ‘':i<‘':j’ VfS^l O . . 




•T V 3 -:* Iwtial V .A .... . v f,.;*: 

' ' - - 

f , 

. . -r • ^ • 

v>. ’tA' ‘ r, . . /fj 

' ■" 7 -..:: . 

■'- ■'!>• ■* /v'-M . /t'biXi'/’’ 


. r. : 

.-.A. 


:. ■ :. '■ -.m'/ 

.,;n;n: • ;• ; ir.f/ 


...K' 


r* . . V 




; :/ r-: • 




.... . 

h ii>ij ■ ^ bn I >:. ; 


’-’4 .ii ib M} , . .r , .. ^ ;•/( 


i* 


The California State University 



The individual California State Colleges were brought together 
as a system by the Donahoe Higher Education Act of 1960. In 
1972 the system became The California State University and 
Colleges and in 1982 the system became The California State 
University. Today, all 20 campuses have the title “university.” 

The oldest campus — San Jose State University — was founded 
as a Normal School in 1857 and became the first institution of 
public higher education in California. The newest campus — 
California State University, San Marcos — began admitting stu- 
dents in Fall 1990. 

Responsibility for The California State University is vested in the 
Board of Trustees, consisting of ex officio members, alumni and 
faculty representatives, and members appointed by the governor. 
The trustees appoint the chancellor, who is the chief executive 
officer of the system, and the presidents, who are the chief execu- 
tive officers of the respective campuses. 

The trustees, the chancellor and the presidents develop system- 
wide policy, with actual implementation at the campus level 
taking place through broadly based consultative procedures. The 
Academic Senate of The California State University, made up of 
elected representatives of the faculty from each campus, recom- 
mends academic policy to the Board of Trustees through the 
chancellor. 

Academic excellence has been achieved by The California State 
University through a distinguished faculty, whose primary re- 
sponsibility is superior teaching. While each campus in the sys- 
tem has its own unique geographic and curricular character, all 
campuses, as multipurpose institutions, offer undergraduate and 
graduate instruction for professional and occupational goals as 
well as broad liberal education. All of the campuses require for 
graduation a basic program of general education requirements 
regardless of the type of bachelor’s degree or major field selected 
by the student. 

The California State University offers more than 1 , 500 bache- 
lor’s and master’s degree programs in some 200 subject areas. 
Many of these programs are offered so that students can complete 
all upper-division and graduate requirements by part-time late 
afternoon and evening study. In addition, a variety of teaching 
and school service credential programs are available. A limited 
number of doctoral degrees are offered jointly with the University 
of California and with private institutions in California. 


In fall 1992, the system enrolled approximately 347,000 students, 
taught by more than 17,000 faculty. Last year the system awarded 
over 50 percent of the bachelor’s degrees and 30 percent of the 
master’s degrees granted in California. More than 1.2 million 
persons have graduated from the 20 campuses since 1960. 


The CSU 1 1 



The California State University 


California State University, Bakersfield 
California State Polytechnic University, 
Pomona 

California State University, Northridge 
California State University, Los Angeles 
California State University, Dominguez Hills 
California State University, Long Beach 
Office of the Chancellor, Long Beach 
California State University, Fullerton 
California State University, San Bernardino 
California State University, San Marcos 
San Diego State University 


Humboldt State University 
California State University, Chico 
Sonoma State University 
California State University, Sacramento 
San Francisco State University 
California State University, Hayward 
San Jose State University 
California State University, Stanislaus 
California State University, Fresno 
California Polytechnic State University, 
San Luis Obispo 




12 TheCSU 


Campuses of The California State University 


California State University, Sacramento 
6000 J Street 
Sacramento, CA 95819 
Dr. Donald R. Gerth, President 
(916) 278-6011 


California State University, Bakersfield 
9001 Stockdale Highway 
Bakersfield, CA 93311-1099 
Dr. Tliomas A. Arciniega, President 
(805) 644-2011 

California State University, Chico 
1st and Normal Streets 
Chico, CA 95929 
Dr. Robin S. Wilson, President 
(916) 898-6116 

California State University, Dominguez Hills 
1(X)0 East Victoria Street 
Carson, CA 90747 
Dr. Robert C. Detweiler, President 
(310) 516-3300 

California State University, Fresno 
5241 North Maple Avenue 
Fresno, CA 93740 
Dr. John D. Welty, President 
(209) 278-4240 

California State University, Fullerton 
Fullerton, CA 92634-9480 
Dr. Milton A. Gordon, President 
(714) 773-2011 

California State University, Flayward 
Hayward, CA 94542 
Dr. Norma S. Rees, President 
(510) 881-3000 

Flumboldt State University 
Areata, CA 95521 
Dr. Alistair W. McCrone, President 
(707) 826-3011 

California State University, Long Beach 
1250 Bellflower Boulevard 
Long Beach, CA 90840 
Dr. Carl Anatol, Interim President 
(310) 985-4111 

California State University, Los Angeles 
5151 State University Drive 
Los Angeles, CA 90032 
Dr. James M. Rosser, President 
(213) 343-3000 

California State University, Northridge 
18111 Nordhoff Street 
Northridge, CA 91330 
Dr. Blenda J. Wilson, President 
(818) 885-1200 

California State Polytechnic University, Pomona 
3801 West Temple Avenue 
Pomona, CA 91768 
Dr. Bob Suzuki, President 
(909) 869-7659 


California State College, San Bernardino 
5500 University Parkway 
San Bernardino, CA 92407 
Dr. Anthony H. Evans, President 
(909) 880-5000 

San Diego State University 
5300 Campanile Drive 
San Diego, CA 92182 
Dr. Thomas B. Day, President 
(619) 594'5000 

Imperial Valley Campus 
720 Heber Avenue 
Calexico, CA 92231 
(619) 357-3721 

San Francisco State University 
1600 Holloway Avenue 
San Francisco, CA 94132 

Dr. Robert A. Corrigan, President ■ . ■ 

(415) 338-1111 

San Jose State University 
One Washington Square 
San Jose, CA 95192 
Dr. J. Handel Evans, Acting President 
(408) 924-1000 

California Polytechnic State University, San Luis Obispo 
San Luis Obispo, CA 93407 
Dr. Warren J. Baker, President 
(805) 756-1111 

California State University, San Marcos 
820 West Los Vallecitos Blvd. 

San Marcos, California 92069 
Dr. Bill W. Stacy, President 
(619)471-4119 

Sonoma State University 
1801 East Cotati Avenue 
Rohnert Park, CA 94928 
Dr. Ruben Arminana, President 

(707) 664-2880 

California State University, Stanislaus 
801 West Monte Vista Avenue 
Turlock, CA 95380 i 

Dr. Lee R. Kerschner, Interim President 
(209) 667-3122 


The eSU 13 


Trustees and Officers of The California State University 


Ex Officio Trustees 

The Honorable Pete Wilson 

Governor of California 

State Capitol, Sacramento, CA 95814 

The Honorable Leo T McCarthy 
Lieutenant Governor of California 
State Capitol, Sacramento, CA 95814 

The Honorable Willie L. Brown, Jr. 

Speaker of the Assembly 

State Capitol, Sacramento, CA 95814 


Correspondence with Trustees should be sent: 

do Trustees Secretariat 

The California State University 

400 Golden Shore, Suite 214 

Long Beach, California 90802^4275 

Officers of the Trustees 

Governor Pete Wilson 
President 

Mr. Anthony M. Vitti 
Chair 


(Vacant at press time) 

State Superintendent of 
Public Instruction 

721 Capitol Mall, Sacramento, CA 95814 
Dr. Barry Munitz 

Chancellor of the California State University 

4(X) Golden Shore 

Long Beach, CA 90802-4275 


Appointed Trustees 

Appointments are for a term of eight years, except for a student 
Trustee, an alumni Trustee, and a faculty Trustee, whose terms are 
for two years. Terms expire in the year in parentheses. Names are 
listed in order of appointment to the Board. 

Dr. Claudia H. Hampton (1994) 

Mr. Roland E. Arnall (1991) 

Ms. Marian Bagdasarian (1996) 

Mrs. Marianthi Lansdale (1993) 

Dr. John E. Kashiwabara (1994) 

Mr. James H. Gray (1998) 

Mr. Terrance W. Flannigan (1991) 

Mr. Jim Considine, Jr. (1992) 

Ms. Martha C. Falgatter (1995) 

Mr. William D. Campbell (1995) 

Mr. Ralph R Pesqueira (1996) 

Mr. Ted J. Saenger (1997) 

Mr. Anthony M. Vitti (1997) 

Mr. Ronald L. Cedillos (1999) 

Dr. Bernard Goldstein (1993) 

Mr. Arneze Washington (1993) 


Mr. R.J. Considine, Jr. 
Vice Chair 

Chancellor Barry Munitz 
Secretary-Treasurer 


Office of the Chancellor 
The California State University 
4(X) Golden Shore 
Long Beach, CA 90802-4275 
(310) 590-5506 

Dr. Barry Munitz 
Chancellor — CSU System 

Ms. Molly Corbett Broad 
Senior Vice Chancellor, 
Administration and Finance 

Dr. Harold H. Haak 
Interim Senior Vice Chancellor, 
Academic Affairs 

Dr. June M. Cooper 
Vice Chancellor, 

Human Resources and Operations 

Mr. Louis V Messner 
Vice Chancellor, 

Business Affairs 

Dr. Fernando C. Gomez 
General Counsel 


14 The CSU 


California State 
University, Fullerton 



Governance 

Governance on the campus at California State University, Fuh 
lerton is the responsibility of the president and his administrative 
staff. Working closely with the president are a number of faculty 
and student groups which initiate, review, and/or recommend for 
approval, various university programs, policies, and prcKedures. 
Although the president is vested with the final authority for all 
university activities, maximum faculty and staff participation in 
campus decision-making and governance has become traditional. 
Students also are actively involved, with student representatives 
being included on almost all university, school, and departmental 
committees and policy-making hcxlies. 


Advisory Board 

The California State University, Fullerton Advisory Board con- 
sists of community leaders interested in the development and 
welfare of the university. The board advises the president on a 
number of matters, particularly those affecting university and 
community relations. Members are appointed by the president 
for terms of four years. 


Dr. Arnold Miller, Chair 
President, 

Technology Strategy Group Fullerton 

Evelyn E. Bauman, Vice Chair Fullerton 

Richard Ackerman 
Attorney at Law 

Ackerman, Mordock & Bowen Fullerton 

Robert F. Beaver Fullerton 

H. William Bridgford 
Chairman of the Board &. CEO 

Bridgford Foods Corp Anaheim 

C. Keith Greer 
President 

Irvine Community Builders Newport Beach 

Peggy Hammer Placentia 

Frederick T. Mason 

Attorney at Law Santa Ana 

William J. McGarvey, Jr. 

Business Development Director, 

Pioneer Bank Fullerton 

John Rau 

President, David Industries Orange 

Ruth Schermitzler Brea 

Richard j. Stegemeier 
Chairman of the Board, President &. CEO 

Unocal Los Angeles 

Irene E. Ziebarth 
Attorney at Law 

Paone, Callahan, McHolm & Winston Irvine 


CSUF 15 



Philosophy and Objectives 

Institutions of higher learning disseminate and advance Icnowh 
edge. The philosophy which guides an institution can limit or 
promote the successful achievement of these objectives. There- 
fore, from its inception, Cal State Fullerton has consciously 
endeavored, through its educational program, to enhance the 
fullest possible development of those it serves. For both professors 
and students this entails a commitment to high standards of 
scholarship, to a comprehensive rather than a narrow approach 
in major areas of study, and to a concern with research and other 
creative activity. 

The mission of CSUF, as articulated and adopted in the “Mission 
and Goals” statement of the campus is as follows: 

• TThe University will develop and challenge students intel- 
lectually to help them understand their leadership role in a 
democratic society and their responsibility to be informed 
citizens. In addition, the University will provide appropri- 
ate preparation for careers and professions. Strong under- 
graduate degree programs in the traditional liberal arts and 
sciences disciplines as well as pre-professional and profes- 
sional programs will be undergirded by a broadly based gen- 
eral education curriculum designed to educate every matric- 
ulated undergraduate student with regard to the history and 
diversity of human thought and culture. Postbaccalaureate 
work leading to degrees, credentials, licensures, and certifi- 
cates will provide students with the depth of advanced 
knowledge needed within major discipline areas and profes- 
sional fields. 

• As a principal component of the University’s mission, facul- 
ty emphasis must be on effective teaching sustained by on- 
going scholarly development, original basic or applied re- 
search, and other creative and professional activities. Thus, 
the University recognizes and nurtures the involvement of 
each CSUF teacher/scholar in the activities carried on 
within his/her disciplinary community. Furthermore, the 
University recognizes the importance of the collegial and 
cooperative intellectual atmosphere that exists on this cam- 
pus and will continue to foster this environment, thereby 
reinforcing individual effort directed toward excellent 
teaching and scholarly/creative endeavors. It also recog- 
nizes and supports the existence of diverse viewpoints in the 
University community and commits itself to defend the 
academic freedom of all faculty and students. 

• The University is committed to a variety of activities which 
enhance the learning environment and quality of life for 
students, faculty, staff, alumni, and the people of our re- 
gion. Thus, to further its missions, the University encom- 
passes the library, computer facilities, research institutes/ 
centers, the arts, athletics, recreation, and a variety of 
instructional, and student and alumni support programs. In 
addition, the University is committed to programs designed 


to enhance “town-gown” relationships and provide other 
public services. Above all, however, is the obligation to 
create an institution which values morally and socially re- 
sponsible actions and activities. The University is charac- 
terized by its dedication to the educational needs of a large 
and dynamic community, its balanced commitment to 
teaching and scholarly and creative activity, its concern for 
wide access to higher education, and its strong tradition of 
collegial governance. In the preservation and enhancement 
of these strengths lies the uniqueness of California State 
University, Fullerton. 

Academic Freedom and 
Responsibility 

The Academic Senate of California State University, Fullerton, 
endorses the 1987 Statement of Professional Ethics (University 
Policy Statement 230. (XX)) and the 1940 Statement of Principles 
and Interpretive Comments of the American Association of Uni- 
versity Professors contained in the 1984 Edition of Policy Docu- 
ments and Reports. 

Retrospect and Prospect 

In 1957 Cal State Fullerton became the 12th State College in 
California to be authorized by the Legislature. The following year 
a site was designated in northeast Fullerton. It was purchased in 
1959, when Dr. William B. Langsdorf was appointed as founding 
president, the first staff was selected and plans for opening the 
new college were made. Orange County State College started 
classes for 452 full- and/or part-time students in September, 
1959, using leased quarters for its administrative offices on the 
Fullerton Union High School campus and for its classrooms at 
Fullerton’s Sunny Hills High SchcK)l. In the fall of I960, the 
college opened classes on its own campus, where it occupied 12 
tempc^rary buildings. The name changed to Orange State College 
in July, 1962, to California State 0)llege at Fullerton in July, 
1964, to California State College, Fullerton in July, 1968 and to 
California State University, Fullerton in June, 1972. The first 
permanent building, the six-story Letters and Science Building 
(now known as McCarthy Hall), was occupied in 1963. 

Today, there is much dramatic evidence of additional, rapid 
growth. Several new buildings have been completed, and enroll- 
ment has climbed to 2 5, (XX). Since 1963 the curriculum has 
expanded to include low'er division work and many graduate 
programs. 

The Donahoe Higher Education Act of 1960 established the 
California State Colleges as a system under an independent 
Board of Trustees, redefined the functions of the State Colleges, 
and related them to both the community colleges and the Uni- 
versity of California system. 


16 CSUF 


In May, 1971, Dr. L. Donald Shields, who had served as acting 
president for seven months, was appointed the second president 
of Cal State Fullerton. Dr. Miles D. McCarthy became acting 
president in January, 1981; Dr. jewel Plummer Cobb took office 
as the third president in October, 1981; and Dr. Milton A. 
Gordon was appointed the fourth president in August, 1990. 

Environment of the University 

Fullerton, a city of more than 1 17,000 inhabitants, is located in 
northern Orange County, about 30 miles southeast of central Los 
Angeles. It is part of a new Southern California population 
center and within easy freeway access of all the diverse natural 
and cultural attractions of this region. 

Orange County, with an area of 782 square miles, is the 48th in 
size of California’s 58 counties, but it is the third largest county in 
population (2.4 million). Orange County has experienced during 
the last four decades almost unprecedented growth as communi- 
ties continue to occupy the diminishing expanses of open land. 

Today, there co-exists an interesting mixture of the old and new 
economic and life styles in Orange County. Underneath the soil, 
archaelogists and bulldozers uncover traces of the hunting and 
gathering Indian bands which flourished at least as early as 4,000 
years ago in what was a benign and bountiful region. More visible 
traces remain of the Spanish and Mexican periods and cultures: 
Mission San Juan Capistrano, which began the agricultural tradi- 
tion in Orange County, and subsequent adobes from the great 
land grants and ranches that followed. Additionally, both cus- 
toms and many names persist from this period, and so does some 
ranching. The architectural and other evidences of the subse- 
quent pioneer period are still quite visible: farmsteads, old build- 
ings from the new towns that then were established in the late 
18(X)’s, mining operations, and traces of early resort and other 
types of promotional activities. For about 1(X) years, farming was 
the main economic activity with products such as grapes, wal- 
nuts, vegetables, and oranges, replacing the older wheat and 
cattle ranches. Today, agriculture still is very impc^rtant. Orange 
County ranks high among California’s counties in mineral pro- 
duction with its oil, natural gas, sand and gravel, and clay mining 
and processing activities. 

The extensive development of the 42 miles of beaches in Orange 
County and the development of such attractions as Disneyland, 
Knott’s Berry Farm, the Laguna Festival of Arts and Pageant of 
the Masters, the Anaheim Stadium and Convention Center and 
the Orange County Performing Arts Center continue to make 
tourism an increasingly important activity. So does the Mediter- 
ranean-type climate, with rainfall averaging 14 inches per year, 
and generally mild days (either freezing or 100- degree tempera- 
tures uncommon) with frequent morning fogs during the sum- 
mer. Both downtown Los Angeles and the Pacific Ocean can be 
reached by car in half an hour, and mountain and desert recrea- 
tion areas are as close as an hour’s drive from the campus. 


The Campus and Its Buildings 

Once part of a vast orange grove. Cal State Fullerton’s attractive- 
ly landscaped main campus now consists of 225 acres Ix^unded on 
the south by Nutwood Avenue, on the west by State College 
Boulevard, on the north by Yorba Linda Boulevard and on the 
east by the Orange Freeway. 

The portion of Orange County immediately surrounding the 
campus is predominantly suburban; it includes housing tracts, 
apartment complexes, shopping centers, industrial parks, and 
undeveloped hills and fields. 

Other educational institutions also are part of the immediate 
environment. The Southern California College of Optometry, 
with its four contemporary buildings, opened in the spring of 
1973. It is just north of Cal State Fullerton. Cal State’s 
immediate south is Pacific Christian College, a liberal arts school 
with a Bible emphasis, where students started classes in the tall of 
1973. The Western State University College of Law, California’s 
largest law schcx^l, occupied its new campus to the immediate 
west of Cal State in January, 1975. 

The Cal State Fullerton campus itself has a high density urban 
layout of facilities developed to serve a predominantly commut- 
ing public. The university’s modern buildings were planned so 
that no student should need more than 10 minutes to go from one 
class to another. The campus is surrounded with landscaped 
parking areas. 

The first permanent building, the Letters and Science Building, 
was occupied in 1963. This imposing structure, master planned 
to serve ultimately as a facility for undergraduate and graduate 
science instruction and research, has been used to house other 
programs until they could warrant new facilities of their own. 
This building is now called Miles D. McCarthy Hall. 

Since 1963, growth has been rapid. The Performing Arts Center 
was completed in 1964, the Physical Education Building in 1965, 
the Library Building in 1966, the Commons in 1967, the Human- 
ities-Social Sciences Building and Visual Arts Center in 1969, 
William B. Langsdorf Hall (Administration-Business Adminis- 
tration) and the Engineering Building in 1971, the Student 
Health Center in 1974, the Education-Classroom Building and 
University Center in 1976, an addition to the Visual Arts Center 
in 1979, the Jewel Plummer Cobb Residence Halls and the 
Charles L. and Rachael E. Ruby Gerontology Center in 1988, 
and the Fullerton Marriott and the Computer Science Building 
in 1989. The Ruby Gerontology Center was the first building on 
campus financed solely by contributed funds; the Fullerton Mar- 
riott, a full-service hotel, resulted from a joint venture involving 
the Marriott Corp., the university and the City of Fullerton. 

An expansion of the University Center and a sports complex 
featuring a multipurpose stadium, baseball pavilion, track and 
tennis courts were completed in 1992. A two-story laboratory 


CSUF 17 


annex to McCarthy Hall and a five-story multiuse facility with 
classrooms, faculty offices and student and academic support 
services are due for occupancy in 1993. Major additions to the 
Library Building and the Physical Education Building are being 
planned as is a 1,200'Seat performing arts building. 

In the northeast corner of the campus is the Fullerton Arbore- 
tum, which was dedicated in the fall of 1979 in a joint venture 
with the city of Fullerton. Itincludesa 1 S-acre contoured botani- 
cal garden, a three-acre organic garden and a two-acre experi- 
mental plot. The ecologically arranged flora depicts habitats from 
the desert to the tropics. The Fullerton Arlx^retum also includes 
Heritage House, a restored 19th-century dwelling. Heritage 
House serves as a cultural museum for North Orange County as 
well as an Arboretum office. 

The ample freeway and surface street accommodations that ap- 
proach the main entrance to the university’s campus also provide 
comparatively easy access to the great and diverse learning re- 
sources available in Southern California; many other colleges 
and universities; museums, libraries, art galleries; zoos; and the 
wide variety of economic, governmental, social, and cultural 
activities and experiments that may be found in this dynamic and 
complex region of California and the United States. 

Information concerning the instructional, laboratory and other 
physical facilities which relate to the academic program may be 
obtained from the Office of Facility Planning and Construction. 


CSUF Mission Viejo Campus 

The California State University, Fullerton-Mission Viejo Cam- 
pus is IcKated on the lower campus of Saddleback College in 
Mission Viejo. As a satellite campus of Cal State Fullerton, it 
serves the higher education needs of southern Orange County. 
The Mission Viejo Campus offers coursework at both the upper- 
division (junior/senior) and pc>stbaccalaureate levels. Lower-divi- 
sion (freshman/sophomore) coursework, including the lower-di- 
vision General Education requirements must be taken at either 
the main campus in Fullerton, or at a community college. 

Students who plan to attend the Mission Viejo Campus (MVC) 
must be admitted to California State University Fullerton 
through the regular admissions process. Applications for admis- 
sion to the University are available at both the main campus and 
the Mission Viejo Campus. Registration for MVC classes takes 
place through the regular University paxesses and can be accom- 
plished at the MVC site. 

Information regarding the Universit>' or MVC is available to 
students and prospective students in the MVC administrative 
offices located in Building H. This facility also houses offices for 
the faculty, staff and the MVC director. 

Students enrolled at the Mission Viejo Campus receive all of the 
student services available at the main campus in Fullerton. MVC 
students are also eligible to use Saddleback College’s Student 


Health Center, Library, and recreational facilities. The Assistant 
Dean for Student Affairs at MVC provides information on all 
student services and serves as ombudsman for all student con- 
cerns. 

The University Library at MVC offers access to all materials 
contained in the main library at Fullerton. Students can access 
periodical articles through means of an extensive system of CD- 
Rom computer work station. The MVC library also has a collec- 
tion of more than 400 periodicals on microfilm. Through Interli- 
brary Loan and other library services, students at MVC can 
access most academic libraries in the United States. 

In one computer laboratory 18 Epson Equity-One computers are 
available for student and class use. In a second computer labora- 
tory, 20 Macintosh computers are available for class use. The 
MVC computer center is on-line with the mainframe located at 
the Fullerton Campus, so that students can access all University 
computer services from the satellite campus. 

For information, contact the CSUF-Mission Viejo Campus, 
28000 Marguerite Parkway, Mission Viejo, California 92692 or 
telephone (714) 582-4990. Office hours are 8:30 a.m. to 7:30 
p.m. Monday through Thursday, and 8:30 a.m. to 2:00 p.m. on 
Friday. 


Students of the University 

Much of the distinctive character and learning atmosphere of any 
campus comes from the nature and vitality of its students. Diver- 
sity, the synthesis of academic with work and family interests, 
strong achievement records, and relative maturity are some of the 
predominant characteristics of the student body at Cal State 
Fullerton. 

The university is primarily a commuter institution, with one on- 
campus residence facility which opened in the spring of 1988. 
Over 70 percent of the students work 20 or more hours per w'eek, 
and yet 56 percent of all students take 1 2 or more hours of course 
work each semester. The majority of students live in Orange 
County. Of the fall 1992 new' undergraduate students, 40 percent 
came from California high schools, 47 percent came from Cali- 
fornia community colleges, 7 percent from other Cal State cam- 
puses, 2 percent from other California colleges and universities, 
and 4 percent from other states or other countries. Tfre fall 1992 
new graduate students came from other Cal State campuses (56 
percent), other California colleges and universities (23 percent), 
and other states or other countries (21 percent). 

The student body is 9 percent first-time freshmen, 18 percent 
other lower division, 56 percent upper division, and 17 percent 
graduate levels. Fifty-six percent of all students are women. The 
median age of all students is 23; undergraduates have a median 
age of 22, while graduate students have a median age of 30. Ov'er 
40 percent of students take advantage of course offerings during 
the day and at night, in order to create a workable schedule for 
their multiple responsibilities. 


18 CSUF 


Many students already have clearly defined interests in a major 
field of study. Only 7 percent of all students have not yet declared 
a major, and are in the process of exploring different fields of 
knowledge. During 1991'92, 4,188 undergraduates received 
their baccalaureate degrees, and 762 graduates received their 
master’s degrees. 


The Faculty 

Central to the effectiveness of any institution of higher learning 
is the quality and dedication of its individual faculty members to 
teaching and scholarship. 

In the fall of 1991 there were 738 full-time faculty and adminis- 
trators and 507 part-time faculty members teaching on the cam- 
pus. Almost all the full-time faculty had some previous college or 
university teaching experience before coming to Fullerton. Fac- 
ulty members also have a wide variety of experiences and creative 
activities. Over 90 percent of the tenured and tenure track facul- 
ty have earned their doctoral degrees. 

Criteria for selection to the faculty include mastery of knowledge 
in an academic specialty, demonstrated skill and experience in 
teaching, and continuing interest in scholarly study and re- 
search. Retention and promotion criteria also include service to 
the university and community. 

Information concerning the faculty and other personnel may be 
obtained from the Office of Faculty Affairs and Records. 

Outstanding Professor Award 

Each year the University selects a faculty member to receive the 
CSUF Outstanding Professor Award. This individual becomes 
the campus nominee for the statewide Outstanding Professor 
Award, an honor conferred annually on two system faculty by the 
by the Trustees of the California State University. 

Below are the names of all professors who have received the 
CSUF Outstanding Professor Award. Those with an asterisk were 
also honored with the statewide award. 


1963-64 Donald Stanley Tull 

Marketing 

1964-65 Miles Duffield McCarthy* 

Biology 

1965-66 Giles Tyler Brown 

History 

1966-67 Gustave Bording Mathieu 

Foreign Languages & 


Literatures 

1967-68 Norman Tbwnsend-Zellner 

Economics 

1968-69 John Brown Mason 

Political Science 

1969-70 No award given 


1970-71 Loh Seng Tki 

Psychology 

1971-72 Richard C. Gilbert 

Mathematics 

1972-73 Herbert C. Rutemiller 

Quantitative Methods 

1973-74 Fred M. Johnson 

Physics 

1974-75 Willis E. McNelly* 

English 

1975-76 Donald E. Lagerberg 

Art 

1976-77 Sydney Klein 

Economics 


1977-78 Charles G. Bell 

Political Science 

1978-79 Bruce H. Weber 

Chemistry 

1979-80 Michael H. Horn 

Biology 

1980-81 Donald A. Sears 

Linguistics 

1981-82 Joyce E. Pickersgill 

Economics 

1982-83 Carl C. Wamser 

Chemistry 

1983-84 Corinne S. Wood 

Anthropology 

1984-85 Maria Linder 

Chemistry 

1985-86 Charles C. Lambert 

Zoology 

1986-87 Glenn M. Nagel 

Chemistry 

1987-88 Harris S. Shultz’ 

Mathematics 

1988-89 Warren A. Beck 

History 

1989-90 Roger Nanes 

Physics 

1990-91 Dr. Gerald F. Corey 

Human Services/ 


Counseling 

1991-92 Dr. Michael H. Birnbaum 

Psychology 


President’s Community Minority 
Affairs Advisory Council 

The President of California State University, Fullerton has estab- 
lished a Council to assist and advise the President on matters of 
importance in meeting the educational needs of the constituent 
minorities represented in the Community and on the Campus. 

The Council is comprised of representatives selected from the 
distinguished leadership of the Community who are from various 
ethnic groups, public schools, businesses, churches, local civic 
organizations, student organizations, parent groups, and Campus 


groups. 

Frank Dominguez, Chair 

Director, United Way Hispanic 

Development Council Irvine 

John Hobgood, Vice Chair, Programs 

Communications Consultant Laguna Beach 

Toni Miller, Vice Chair, Membership 

Counselor, John Glenn High School Norwalk 

Jo Caines 

Director of Community Relations, 

KOCE-TV Huntington Beach 

Maggie Carrillo Mejia 

Principal, Savanna High School Anaheim 

Tsu-Tsair O. Chi 

Owner, Chi Enterprises Anaheim 

Tina Fernandez 

Specialist, Orange County Human 

Relations Commission Santa Ana 

Ben Franco 
Assistant Principal, 

John Glenn High School Norwalk 

Marian Harloe 

Commissioner, Orange County 

Human Relations Commission Santa Ana 

Albert Perales 

Counselor, Kraemer Junior High School Placentia 

Chieu Minh Pham 

Educator : Orange 


CSUF 19 


University Administration 


President 

Staff Assistant Norma Moms 

Executive Assistant A. Anderson 

Director of Affirmative Action Rosamaria Gomer-Amaro 

Administrative Assistant F- Caroline Cosgrove 

Director of Athletics Bill Shumard 

Associate Director/Senior Woman Administrator Maryalyce Jeremiah 

Associate Athletic Director for Marketing and Development and Director, Titan Athletic Foundation Larry Zucker 

Director of Operations and Compliance Mary Ann Tripodi 

Assistant Athletic Director for Media Relations Franks 

Director of Budget Planning and Administration Sherri Newcomb-Hill 

Assistant Director B(^ltl 

Adrhinistrative Assistant Ruby Hamilton 

Budget Analyst Linda Erickson 

Budget Analyst Michele L. janiel 

Systems Analyst Keiko Takahashi 

Payroll Supervisor Vacant 

Vice President for Academic Affairs . • L)on A. Schweitzer 

Associate Vice President, Academic Affairs John W Bedell (Acting) 

Staff Assistant Marlys K. Rietman 

Coordinator, Faculty Affairs and Records Mary Watkins 

Associate Vice President, Academic Programs William W. Haddad (Acting) 

Assistant Vice President/Graduate and International Programs William W. Haddad 

Director of Graduate Studies Gladys Fleckles 

Coordinator, Undergraduate Studies Robert Belloli 

Coordinator, Health Professions Albert Flores 

Director of Athletic Academic Service Christine McCarthy 

Prelaw Adviser ^^^y 

Coordinator, Special Projects * Vacant 

Dean, Extended Education Harry L. Norman 

Director of Extension Administration James T. Mavity 

Director of Extended Education Program Services Vacant 

Director of Certificate Programs Shelley Bartenstein 

Director of Program Management Su^ng 

Director of Corporate and Public Education O Neill 

Director of Seminars and Teleconferencing Le Esta Bentley 

Associate Vice President, Information and Telecommunication Services Gene H. Dippel 

Director, Administrative Computing Bobbe Weber 

Director, Telecommunications L)ick Bednar 

Coordinator, Instructional Services Vacant 

Operations Manager Vacant 

University Librarian Richard C. Pollard 

AsscKiate University Librarian Patricia L. Bril (Acting) 

Collection Development Officer Patricia L. Bril 

Chair, Public Services Francisco Garcia Ayvens 

Chair, Technical Services Janice Zlendich 

Director of Admissions and Records James C. Blackburn 

Assistant to the Director of Admissions and Records Vacant 

Admissions Officer Nancy Dority 

University Articulation/Project Assist. Officer Barbara Hooper 


Registrar 


Carole Jones 


Assistant Registrar Lynette Housty 

Director of Analytical Studies Hope Vura 

Associate Director of Analytical Studies Robert Fecarotta 


20 CSUF 


Director, Faculty Research and IDevelopment 

Coordinator, Contracts and Grants 

Director, Center for Internships and Cooperative Education 

Director, Mission Viejo Campus 

Radiation Safety Officer 

Director, Student Academic Services and 

University Outreach 

Associate Director, Student Academic Services and 

University Outreach 

Coordinator, Student Academic Services 

Coordinator, Student Study Center 

Coordinator, University Outreach Services and Relations with Schools and Colleges 

Director of Television and Media Support Center 

Instructional Television and Media Production 

Audio Visual Distribution and Maintenance 

Vice President for Administration 

Insurance & Facility Use Officer 

Associate Vice President, Facility Planning & Construction 

Facility Planner 

Director, Design & Construction Services 

Controller 

Assistant Controller 

Supervisor, Accounts Payable 

Supervisor, General Accounting 

Supervisor, Student Aid Accounting, Receivables and Disbursements 

Supervisor, Student Aid Loan Collection 

Manager, Cash Management 

Supervisor, Cashiering 

Procurement and Logistical Services Manager 

Supervisor, Purchasing 

Supervisor, Shipping/Receiving/Stores 

Supervisor, Campus Mail Services Center 

Supervisor, Property/Recycling/Moving Services 

Director, Human Resources 

Associate Director, Employee Relations Manager 

Classification 

Employee Benefits/Employment 

Employee Relations, Grievances, Discipline, 

Performance Appraisals 

Workers’ Compensation/Employee Documents 

Recruitment 

Training and Development, Temporary Help 

Director, Physical Plant 

Associate Director, Plant Operations 6i Engineering 

Assistant Director, Operations 

Manager, Budget, Personnel and Projects 

Director, Public Safety 

Environmental Health & Safety Officer 

Manager, Transportation/Parking/Visitor Information 

Executive Director, Foundation 

Human Resources Manager 

Director, Finance 

Business Operations Manager 

Accounting Manager 

Director, Grants and Contracts 


Stuart A. Ross 

Elizabeth Gewin 

Carolyn Kubiak 

George Giacumakis 

John Elliott 

Silas M. Abrego 

Jeremiah W. Moore 

Vacant 

Fran Zaraeh-Smith 

Carmela Harvey 

Harry L. Norman (Acting) 
.... Lee Bentley (Acting) 

, James T. Mavity (Acting) 

Sal D. Rinella 

Martin E. Carbone 

Jay W. Bcmd 

Robin I. Moore 

Michael C. Smith 

Resty P Prospero 

Lydia L. Rodriguez 

Sandra L. Bracken 

Vacant 

Kathy S. Ip 

Roberta J. Wallstrom 

Carlos Navarrete 

Leslie A. Reed 

Holly B. Hall 

Jackie C. Campbell 

James E. Silvey 

Edward A. Flynn 

Caesar D. Eleasar 

David J. Losco 

Emily E. Gilbert 

Anne M. Megli 

Sandy N. Thompson 

Dorothy A. Edwards 

Denise Johnson 

Vacant 

Judy A. Presch 

Charles D. Stevens 

. . William H. van der Pol 

Gene W. Rawlins 

...... Joanie E. Donovan 

William D. Huffman 

Thomas J. Whitfield 

Roger B. Kays 

.... William E. Dickerson 

Patricia A. Byrd 

Shawn J. Farr 

Jean M. Tebbe 

Joan Simmons 

. Shou'Yinn (Pearl) Cheng 


CSUF 21 


Titan Bookstore and Titan Shops 

Assistant Director, Book Division 

Assistant Director, General Merchandise Division 

Assistant Director, Food & Vending Services 

Manager, Computing Technology 

Assistant Director, Food & Vending Services 

Director, Dining Services 

(Campus Focxl Services) 

Vice President for Student Affairs 

Associate Vice President for Student Affairs 

Assistant Vice President for Student Affairs 

Administrator for Associated Students 

Q)ordinator, Academic Appeals 

Director, Career Development Center 

Director, Financial Aid 

Director, Disabled Student Services 

Director, Housing and Residence Life 

Director, International Education and Exchange 

Director, Student Health and Counseling Service 

Director, Testing and Research 

Director, University Activities Center 

Director, Women’s Center 

Vice President for University Advancement 

Director of Alumni Relations 

Director of Individual Giving 

Director of Corporate and Foundation Relations 

Director of Public Affairs 

Director of Special Giving 

Executive Director of Titan Athletic Foundation 

Schools, Divisions and Departments 

School of the Arts 

Dean 

AsstKiate Dean 

Assistant Dean, Student Affairs 

Art Department 

Music Department 

Theatre Department 

School of Business Administration and Economics 

LTean 

AsscKiate Dean, Undergraduate Programs 

Associate Dean, Graduate Studies 

Accounting Department 

Economics Department 

Finance Department 

Management Department 

Management Science Department 

Marketing Department 

School of Communications 

Dean 

Associate Dean 

Communications Department 

Speech Communication Department 

School of Engineering and Computer Science 

Dean 

Associate Dean for Academic Affairs 


Hani F. Sayegh 

Jerry C. Olson 

Warren L. Corse 

Tom M. Pleickhardt 

Warren L. Corse 

. . . Anthony M. Lynch (Acting) 

Robbie L. Nayman 

Charles W Buck 

Vacant 

William G. Pollock 

Ralph Bigelow 

Roberta E Browning 

Cecilia Vielma Schouwe (Acting) 

Paul K. Miller 

Darlene Stevenson 

Robert Ericksen 

Charles B. Darke 

Lee Broadbent (Acting) 

Loydene Pritchard 

Barbara McDowell 

Harry Gianneschi 

Mary Jacobson 

Susan B. Smith 

Leo H. Cullum 

Jerry J. Keating 

Judy M. Mandel 

Walter F. Bowman 


Jerry Samuelson 

Frank E. Cummings, III 
. . . . Nancee L. Benson 

Darryl J. Curran 

Benton Minor 

Sallie Mitchell 


Ephraim P Smith 

Dorothy Heide 

Richard Stolz 

Gerald Hoth 

Anil Puri 

John Emery 

Frank Abdelwahed (Acting) 

Zvi Drezner 

Irene Lange 


Elizabeth W. Mechling 

Rick D. Pullen 

Terry Hynes 

Robert Emry 


Andy R. Bazar 

Karim Hamidian (Acting) 


22 csuF 


Associate Dean for Administration 

Civil Engineering Department 

Computer Science Department 

Electrical Engineering Department 

Mechanical Engineering Department 

School of Human Development and Community Service 

Dean 

Associate Dean 

Counseling Department 

Educational Administration Department 

Elementary and Bilingual Education Department 

Health, Physical Education and Recreation Department 

Nursing Department 

Reading Department 

Secondary Education Department 

Special Education Department 

Child Development Department 

Human Services Program 

Military Science Program 

University Recreation Program 

School of Humanities and Social Sciences 

Dean (Acting) 

Associate Dean 

Afro'Ethnic Studies Department 

American Studies Department 

Anthropology Department 

Chicano Studies Department 

Conservation Program 

Criminal Justice Department 

English and Comparative Literature Department 

Foreign Languages and Literatures Department 

Geography Department 

History Department 

Linguistics Department 

Philosophy Department 

Political Science Department 

Psychology Department 

Religious Studies Department 

Sociology Department 

Environmental Studies Program 

Gerontology Program 

Latin American Studies Program 

Liberal Studies Program 

Pacific Rim Studies 

Russian and East European Area Studies Program 

M.A. in Social Sciences Program 

Women’s Studies Program 

School of Natural Science and Mathematics 

Dean 

Associate Dean 

Biological Science Department 

Chemistry and Biochemistry Department 

Geological Sciences Department 

Mathematics Department 

Physics Department 

Science Education Program 


Demetrias Michalopoulos (Acting) 

Pinaki Chakrabarti (Acting) 

Edward Sowell 

Vacant 

Sundaram Krishnamurthy 


Mary Kay Tetreault 

Michael Parker 

George Williams 

Walter Beckman 

Carol Barnes 

Anne Marie Bird 

Julia B. George 

Ashley Bishop, Coordinator 

Paul Kane 

Leo Schmidt 

Judith Ramirez 

Soraya Coley, Coordinator 

Major John Sarnecky, Coordinator 
Ronald G. Andris, Director 


Chris Cozby 

Thomas P Klammer 

J. Owens Smith 

Wayne Hobson 

Jacob Pandian 

Isaac Cardenas 

. . . Imre Sutton, Coordinator 

Sandra Sutphen 

Joseph Sawicki 

Curtis W Swanson 

Robert Young 

Frederick Miller 

Merrill Ring 

Merrill Ring 

Sandra Sutphen 

Daniel W Kee 

Merrill Ring 

Ron Hughes 

. . . Dennis Berg, Coordinator 

Jessie Jones, Director 

Sheldon Maram, Coordinator 
Ronald Clapper, Coordinator 
. . William Puzo, (Coordinator 
. . . . Ron Helin, Coordinator 
. Frank Bagrash, Coordinator 
. . . Diane Ross, Coordinator 


Kolf O. Jayaweera 

Marvin J. Rosenberg 

C. Eugene Jones 

Glenn Nagel 

Gerald Brem 

James O. Friel 

Mark Shapiro 

Eric Streitberger, Coordinator 


CSUF 23 


California State University, 
Fullerton Foundation 

The California State University, Fullerton Foundation was estab' 
lished and incorporated as a notTor-profit corporation in October 
1959. The Foundation is an auxiliary organization of the univer- 
sity established to provide essential student, faculty and staff 
services which cannot be provided from state appropriations. It 
also supplements the program and activities of the university in 
appropriate ways by assisting the university in fulfilling its pur- 
poses and in serving the people of the State of California — 
especially those in the immediate Fullerton area. 

Some of the activities in which the Foundation assists the univer- 
sity are developing and administering research and educational 
grants and contracts; conducting bookstore, food service and 
vending operations on campus; accumulating and managing en- 
dowment and student scholarship funds; and administering var- 
ious educationally related functions and special programs such as 
the Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary. 

The Foundation’s overall policies are administered by a Board of 
Directors composed of members of the university faculty, admin- 
istration and students as well as prominent community leaders. 


Board of Directors 

David L. Palmer, Chair# 

Sal D. Rinella, Vice Chair* 

Gary R. Del Fium, Secretary# 

Shawn J. Farr, Treasurer* (ex officio) 

William M. Dickerson, Executive Director* (ex officio) 
Ted Bremner# 

Bert C. Buzan** 

Clare G. Carlson# 

Edward J. Carpenter# 

Robert F. Clark, Jr.# 

Donald B. Crane** 

Patti Ersekt 

Barbara Finlayson-Pitts* * 

Joyce Flocken** 

Milton A. Gordon* 

Kolf O. Jayaweera* 

Marc Mitznert 
Robbie L. Nayman* 

Robert Ostengaard# 

Walter J. Pray# 

Joe Purtellt 
Don A. Schweitzer* 


‘Administrator “Faculty tStudent #Community Member 


Administrative Officers 

William M. Dickerson, Executive Director 
Shawn J. Farr, Director of Finance 


eSUF Alumni 

Five students were first to graduate from Cal State Fullerton, 
becoming the Class of 1960. Since then, over 95, (XX) graduates 
have passed through the university. 

eSUF alumni have a vested interest in their university. They 
have been part of its past, belong to its present and are working 
for its future. Representing those alumni is the CSUF Alumni 
Association, a membership organization whose mission is to pro- 
vide alumni with opportunities for continued affiliation with the 
university. 

Since its inception the organization has served to advance the 
university’s interests through alumni talents, services, energies 
and financial assistance to nurture and enhance the academic 
setting in a way that directly benefits students. The group pro- 
motes alumni involvement on campus and honors outstanding 
student, faculty, staff and alumni achievement. 

Association members receive numerous benefits including access 
to the eSU libraries and career services; discounts to campus 
athletic events and the performing arts as well as invitations to 
special campus events. 


Community Support Groups 

California State University, Fullerton welcomes and encourages 
the development and activities of volunteer organizations com- 
mitted to enriching university life. The expertise and efforts of its 
dedicated volunteers are most appreciated for they enhance the 
quality of the educational experience for Cal State Fullerton 
students and help ensure the university’s academic excellence. In 
addition to their involvement in the programs of their own orga- 
nizations, support group members are invited to participate in 
university events. 

(Dal State Fullerton’s volunteer organizations form the (Coordi- 
nating (Council of Supp)ort Groups, w'hich assists members in 
promoting their individual group’s goals and in coordinating ac- 
tivities and communication between themselves and the univer- 
sity. Further information about support groups may be obtained 
from the (Dffice of University Advancement located in Langsdorf 
Hall 805 at (714) 773-2108. 


24 CSUF 


Art Alliance 

The Art Alliance encourages excellence in the arts, particularly 
through the educational curriculum of the university’s Art De- 
partment. Organized in 1967, the alliance assists in financing 
gallery exhibitions, administers the Art Gallery DcKent Pro- 
gram, participates in the acquisition of campus art works and 
annually awards scholarships and graduate reserach grants. Art 
Alliance members host special exhibit tours and receptions, in- 
formal talks by faculty members and trips to museums and artists’ 
studios. 

Continuing Learning Experience 

Continuing Learning Experience was formed in 1979 by retired 
and semiretired individuals dedicated to the pursuit of lifelong 
learning in a high-level educational environment. Entirely self- 
supporting, CLE offers study groups and discussion forums of 
educational and special interest to the community, as well as a 
Distinguished Lecture Series, classes and trips. Members alsc^ can 
participate in SeniorNet, a computer networking program, and 
the Wellness Clinic. The CLE office is housed in the Ruby Ger- 
ontology Center, a research and conference facility built with 
private funds in large part from CLE members. 

Emeriti 

Cal State Fullerton’s retired faculty and staff members belong to 
the Emeriti, which is dedicated to keeping its members involved 
and knowledgeable about current campus life. While providing 
opportunities to be involved in faculty governance, curricular 
programs and campus activities, the organization also offers re- 
newal of friendships between its members. Through affiliation 
with the systemwide CSU emeriti organization, ERFA, emeriti 
concerns are presented to all branches of the government and the 
Chancellor’s Office. 

Executive Forum 

TTie membership of the Executive Forum is composed of chief 
executive officers and senior executives in California, who advise 
and assist the university president on matters relating to improv- 
ing education and research at Cal State Fullerton. Its members 
recommend measures and actions to stimulate and promote bet- 
ter relationships with the business community, as well as improve 
California’s quality of life. 

Friends of the Fullerton Arboretum 

Friends of the Fullerton Arboretum support a 26-acre ecological 
preserve located on the northeast corner of campus. The friends 
host demonstrations, lectures and tours of the arboretum and 
Heritage House, a turn-of-the-century residence listed in the 
National Register of Historic Places and the Inventory of Califor- 
nia Historic Sites. TTrough plant sales, special activities and 
management of the arboretum’s gift and garden shop, the Friends 
contribute operating monies for the arboretum and fund student 
scholarships, grants and internships. 


Music Associates 

In support of the Music Department, Music Associates fund 
student scholarships; an annual award contest recognizing excel- 
lence in vocal, instrumental and piano performance; and pur- 
chases of equipment and instruments to enhance Cal State Ful- 
lerton’s music program. Associates attend campus performances 
and co-sponsor one of the biggest holiday events on campus, the 
“Christmas Carol Candlelight Dinner and Concert’’ featuring the 
University Singers. The Associates also hold an annual spring 
scholarship luncheon. 

Patrons of the Library '' 

Q)mmunity members, alumni and faculty and staff members 
interested in maintaining the quality of the University Library 
belong to the Patrons of the Library. The group sponsors exhibits 
and holds an annual book sale and luncheon. Funds raised 
thrt)ugh book sales, dues and donations support the augmenta- 
tion of library holdings and facilities. 

Patrons of the Museum of Anthropology 

Patrons of the Museum of Anthropology take a hands-on ap- 
proach to their university support. Members are often found in 
the back room of the museum, putting the finishing touches on 
yearlong exhibits. Patrons also regularly take tours and field trips 
to excavation sites and host lectures by leading archaeologists 
and researchers. 

President’s Associates 

President’s AsscKiates is an organization whose members are com- 
mitted to providing quality higher education at Cal State Fuller- 
ton. Membership contributions enable the university to offer 
cultural and educational programs, student scholarships, faculty 
research grants and recognition awards to outstanding students 
and faculty members. Annual activities include an October re- 
ception and a May luncheon, when President’s Scholars are 
named. The scholars program, funded by the Associates, recog- 
nizes a select group of students for academic and extracurricular 
performance. 

Reading Educators’ Guild 

Graduates who earn a master of science in education with a 
concentration in reading and other interested individuals are 
eligible for membership in the Reading Educators Guild. Work- 
ing in close relationship with the Reading Program, the guild 
promotes research in the reading field. Throughout the school 
year, the Guild holds various activities, lectures and conferences. 

School Advisory Councils 

Advisory councils are composed of community and campus lead- 
ers who are committed to sharing their expertise and providing 
support to individual schools within the university. Groups in- 
clude the School of Business Administration and Economics 


csuF 25 


Executive Council, School of Communications Executive Advi' 
sory Board, School of Engineering and Computer Science Indus- 
trial Advisory Board, School of Human Development and Com- 
munity Service Community Advisory Council, and School of 
Natural Science and Mathematics Advisory Board. 

Titan Athletic Foundation 

The Titan Athletic Foundation exists solely to aid the athletic 
program at Cal State Fullerton. The foundation is composed of 
individuals who have a genuine interest in athletics, the universi- 
ty, and the community and support athletics by providing funds 
for scholarships that ensure an effective recruiting program. 


Tucker Wildlife Society 

The Tucker Wildlife Society supports the Tucker Wildlife Sanctu- 
ary in the Modjeska Canyon in the Santa Ana Mountains. Its 
members assist the sanctuary in offering programs that support 
the environment, save wildlife and provide outdoor education for 
thousands of children. A research center for biological field stud- 
ies, the facility also offers continuing educational service to the 
community, teacher education in nature interpretation and con- 
servation education, and training of students planning to enter 
the public service field. 


• i \ 



26 CSUF 


n^ .Or^(i^ ^ SJ^ ,.e«^ 

pj>^7.eo^ :at^,,e<^,i 

6al>*' , . 6 eai>*' .^0^ 



, .(3al^ ) 

e«i>^ 




M"^'. Cal^ I 

/9,iW"^ e<3i^ I . c<*^ 

3ai>^^,..,e^ ,,..,e> 


jiM' 


Q(i^ L^.C 

eai>^ 








; 0,^ 




gcjia^ ..(3a^, 


i7“*rv7^t 


xM"', Cal>^ ,,G^ 
g(ilo^ gol*^ 

,,e«^ 

^r>i^ ,^.e- 

^ e<4>^ , 

">.777 




M 








0^ , «al>^ 

rTe^^ , i^e. 

gai<M |.e>^ ,- 


7>777*7^777777 




Academic Affairs 


California State University, Fullerton provides a diversity of edu- 
cational opportunities to satisfy the broad range of backgrounds 
and interests of its students and to meet the continually changing 
and ever growing demands of not only our local community and 
the state, but to accommodate the increasingly significant na- 
tional and global expectations as well. The academic programs 
available include 45 bachelor’s degrees, 44 master’s degrees, 47 
minors, 3 resident certificates and 13 teaching credential 
programs. 

The mission of the University is to provide excellent educational 
opportunities to its students to enable them to develop intellectu- 
ally, personally and professionally. To this end, the University is 
committed to attracting and retaining a diverse student body and 
faculty for all of its programs. Fundamental to these endeavors are 
excellence in instruction, actively involved faculty, and adequate 
support for the instructional mission. 

Academic excellence is provided in the various specializations 
offered by the University by encouraging departments and profes- 
sional schools to develop programs for their majors through a 
formal process that ensures careful and thoughtful review by 
various levels of the University. The General Education Program 
is designed to assure that graduates have made significant progress 
toward being a well-educated person by integrating into the ma- 
jor programs a relative balance in strength of required courses in 
the physical sciences, the social sciences, the humanities and the 
fine arts. These courses are planned to complement those offered 
through the major programs and electives. Articulation agree- 
ments with the local community colleges clarify the courses that 
will be accepted for credit in both general education and major 
programs. 

Vice President for 
Academic Affairs 

McCarthy Hall 133 
(714) 773-2614 

The Vice President for Academic Affairs is responsible for the 
leadership and c(X)rdination of all campus academic matters. The 
Vice President is the chief academic officer for the campus and is 
directly involved in the areas of curriculum development, faculty’ 
personnel processes and budget and resource allocation as they 
pertain to instruction and academic support. 



28 Academic Affairs 


The academic vice president works closely with the President, 
the academic associate vice presidents, deans, and program direc' 
tors regarding all instructionally related planning and operational 
matters. Related responsibilities include: (1) oversee the devel- 
opment and review of curriculum and educational and profes- 
sional policy; (2) instructional resource administration relating 
to staffing, operating expenses and equipment; (3) assuring that 
all faculty and academic staff personnel actions reinforce and 
complement the qualitative objectives of the university while 
meeting its strong commitment to the principles and spirit of 
affirmative action; (4) administration of academic support ser- 
vices such as the library, admissions and records, extended educa- 
tion, computer center, and student HOP and affirmative action 
programs. As chief academic officer, the Vice President reviews 
department and faculty Personnel Committee recommendations, 
in order to make final recommendations to the President on all 
faculty and tenure considerations as well as other academic per- 
sonnel actions as required by university policy. 

Information concerning the academic programs of Cal State Ful- 
lerton may be obtained from the Office of the Vice President for 
Academic Affairs. This information may include: 

1 . The current degree programs and other educational and train- 
ing programs; 

2. The instructional, laboratory, and other physical plant facili- 
ties which relate to the academic program; 

3. The faculty and other instructional personnel; 

4. Data regarding student retention at Cal State Fullerton and, if 
available, the number and percentage of students completing 
the program in which the student is enrolled or has expressed 
interest; and 

5. The names of associations, agencies or governmental bodies 
which accredit, approve, or license the institution and its 
programs, and the procedures under which any current or 
prospective student may obtain or review upon request a copy 
of the documents describing the institution’s accreditation, 
approval or licensing. 

Academic, Graduate and 
International Programs 

McCarthy Hall 129 
(714) 773^3602 

The Office of Academic, Graduate and International Programs 
coordinates the development of educational programs; provides 
an all-university perspective on educational activities at the cam- 
pus; and stimulates academic innovations. 

The Associate Vice President, Academic Programs, and the As- 
sistant Vice President, Graduate and International Programs, are 
responsible for administering university policies and regulations 


dealing with undergraduate and graduate curricula; fostering and 
administering institutional exchange programs with foreign uni- 
versities; preparing and publishing the university catalog; and 
serving as liaison to the Western Association of Schools and 
Colleges (WASC) and other accrediting agencies. 

The Office of Academic, Graduate and International Programs 
provides leadership for the Curriculum Committee, General 
Education Committee, Graduate Education Committee, Inter- 
national Education Committee and other groups and individuals 
concerned with changing and improving the educational pro- 
grams of this institution. Responsibilities relating to the Chan- 
cellor’s Office include regular review and updating of the Aca- 
demic Master Plan; coordination of program performance review; 
and staff reports for the Chancellor’s Office relating to academic 
planning. 

Academic Senate 

McCarthy Hall 143 
(714) 773^3683 

The Academic Senate is an integral part of the University gover- 
nance processes which encourage participation in collegial deci- 
sion making. The Senate develops, formulates and reviews edu- 
cational and professional policy which becomes university policy 
if approved by the President. Educational and professional policy 
includes: curricula; academic standards; criteria and standards for 
the selection, retention, and promotion of faculty members; aca- 
demic and administrative policies concerning students; and allo- 
cation of resources. There are 14 standing committees of the 
Senate and three general committees of the faculty. The Senate 
consists of 45 members including the University President, Vice 
President for Academic Affairs, two Associated Students repre- 
sentatives, and 41 elected members representing various campus 
constituencies. 

The 14 standing committees of the Academic Senate are: Aca- 
demic Standards Committee, Budget Advisory Committee, 
Computing Affairs Committee, Curriculum Committee, Elec- 
tions Committee, Extended Education Committee, Faculty Af- 
fairs Committee, Faculty Development and Educational Innova- 
tion Committee, General Education Committee, Graduate Edu- 
cation Committee, International Education Committee, Library 
Committee, Long Range Planning and Priorities Committee, 
and Student Academic Life Committee. 

Admissions and Records 

Langsdorf Hall Lobby 
(714) 773^2300 

The Office of Admissions and Records is responsible for the 
administration of the admission, registration, records, and ser- 
vices to undergraduate and graduate students in the regular ses- 
sions of California State University, Fullerton. These programs 
and services provide preadmission guidance to prospective stu- 
dents and current information about the university’s curricula 


Academic Affairs 29 


and requirements to school and college counselors; admit and 
readmit students within enrollment categories and priorities; 
evaluate the applicability of undergraduate transfer credit toward 
all-university requirements of the curriculum; provide liaison in 
the identification and resolution of articulation problems of 
transfer students; register student programs of study, including 
enrollment into classes; maintain academic records; administer 
academic probation and disqualification policies; provide enroll- 
ment certifications on student request, including transcripts of 
academic records, to the Veterans Administration and for other 
purposes; certify the completion of degree and credential require- 
ments; receive petitions for exceptions to academic regulations; 
and provide information about these programs and services. 

Analytical Studies 

McCarthy Hall 136 
(714) 773-2121 

The Office of Analytical Studies is responsible for the organiza- 
tion, analysis, and presentation of the information and data 
essential for the support of campus policy formulation, resource 
allcKation, and short- and long-range planning. The office par- 
ticipates in the development and enhancement of institutional 
information data base systems, and conducts descriptive and ana- 
lytic research on campus trends, program and policy effective- 
ness, and a variety of institutional characteristics, as required by 
the President and the Vice President for Academic Affairs. 

Among the institutional data with which the Office of Analytical 
Studies is concerned are student and faculty demography, student 
progress, enrollment, curriculum and scheduling, space and fa- 
cilities utilization, testing, workload, regional demography, affir- 
mative action, budget and program performance review. 

The Office of Analytical Studies produces and publishes regular 
campus repeats such as the Statistical Handbook, as well as rel- 
evant repi^rts required by the Chancellor’s Office and other agen- 
cies. 

Computer Center 

McCarthy Hall 38 
(714) 773-3921 

The Computer Center is located in the basement of McCarthy 
Hall. The campus has two separate mainframe computers: a DEC 
VAX 6430 for instructional purposes and an IBM 3090- 150E for 
all on-line administrative data processing for the University. Also 
available for instructional support are two AT&.T 3B2 UNIX 
machines. Instructional users have access to such software appli- 
cations as SPSS-X, SAS, SPICE, BMD, STRUDL, and a variety 
of other discipline-specific programming tools. 

Students have access to these central computing resources from 
over 1000 micro-computers and terminals connected to the cam- 
pus data communications network. Open-access satellite labs are 


located in each building, allowing students convenient comput- 
er-related services. Computer workshops are conducted to train 
and assist students in the proper use of computing equipment. 

University Extended Education 

Extended Education/Personnel Services Building 
(714) 773-2611 

University Extended Education offers the resources of the univer- 
sity to degree-seeking students and other lifelong learners 
through programs supported by participant fees, grants, and con- 
tracts. It is a self-supporting, not-for-profit division of the univer- 
sity which receives no state funding. Programs include summer 
session, intersession, extension credit and non-credit courses, 
certificate programs, adjunct enrollment, and contract courses. 
Many Extended Education programs incorporate computer and 
television technologies in the delivery of instruction and can be 
made available to off-campus locations. Courses are taught by 
university faculty, visiting faculty, and practicing professionals. 
Most Extended Education programs are open to any adult and 
selected high school students. Additional information concern- 
ing University Extended Education programs may be found in the 
Academic Programs section of this catalog. 

Graduate Studies 

McCarthy Hall 129 
(714) 773-2618 

The staff of the Office of Graduate Studies assists students in 
answering questions about admission, academic policies and pro- 
cedures, graduate programs, financial assistance, student ser- 
vices, and other matters of concern to applicants or graduate 
students. The office is also responsible for performing an evalua- 
tion of student programs at classification and completion of re- 
quirements for authorizing award of degree. 

TTie Assistant Vice President for Graduate and International 
Programs is the appropriate university authority for coordinating 
and administering all matters related to graduate degree curricu- 
la. This position is guided by the policy recommendations of the 
Graduate Education Committee. 


Faculty Affairs and Records 

McCarthy Hall 142 
(714) 773-2125 

The Office of Faculty Affairs and Records is the official repository 
for documents and correspondence concerning full-time teach- 
ing and administrative faculty. It has responsibility for retaining 
documentation pertaining to employment, reappointment, ten- 
ure, promotion, leaves of absence, grievances, disciplinary ac- 
tions and separations. 


30 Academic Affairs 


Faculty Research 

McCarthy Hall 112 
(714) 773^2106 

The Office of Faculty Research and Development provides assis- 
tance to faculty and staff in their efforts to obtain funding for 
research and other scholarly activities. The office offers pre-pro- 
posal consultation, information about funding opportunities and 
assistance with budgets, regulatory compliance, technical de- 
sign, and editing of proposals. It also publicizes and administers 
intramural research grants. A small library is maintained in Mc- 
Carthy Hall 1 12 to aid faculty in identifying grant resources, and 
agency/foundation grant profiles. 

International Programs 

McCarthy Hall 129 
(714) 773-2618 

The Office of Academic, Graduate and International Programs 
serves as the focus for all aspects of the University’s commitment 
to academic internationalization. It is responsible for overseeing 
and directing the internationalization of the curriculum. It also 
initiates and administers contacts with sister institutions 
throughout the world in order to foster the exchange of faculty 
and students. 

For more information on specific opportunities to study abroad, 
either through the CSU system-wide International Program or 
direct links that CSU Fullerton has with foreign institutions, see 
the section of this catalog titled “International Programs” on 
page 166. 

Television & Media Support 
Services 

Library 80 
(714) 773-2621 

The Television and Media Support Center (TMSC), located on 
the lower level of the Library building, offers a wide spectrum of 
media services and equipment. 

Audiovisual equipment available to faculty include projectors for 
motion pictures, 35 mm, slides, opaque materials and transparen- 
cies; audio and video tape players; and small sound systems. A 
wide range of film and video materials are also available. 

Design and production services are available for a wide range of 
media. Graphics design is supported by computer technology and 
offers top-level design of maps, charts, diagrams, technical draw- 
ings, flow charts, etc. , including camera ready copy and overhead 
transparencies. Photography offers studio and location photogra- 
phy, copy work, slide duplication, film processing, black and 
w’hite printing, and slide tape production. Video services in- 
cludes VHS recording of campus events and tape duplication. 
Audio services include audio recording and amplification, and 


audio duplication and editing. Television production includes the 
design and production of instructional and information modules 
for use in the classroom, on The Titan Cable Channel, and other 
video delivery systems. Pre- and post-production services are 
available. 

Instructional television delivery systems include Interactive Tele- 
vised Instruction (ITI), video teleconferencing, and the Titan 
Cable Channel (TTC) and video teleconferencing. Two class- 
rooms are designed and equipped for distance education and 
currently delivery university classes to the Mission Viejo and 
other off-campus locations including workplace classrooms in 
businesses and industry. Special telephone connections allow 
students not located in the classrcx)m on the Fullerton campus to 
interact with instructors as well as with on- and off-campus class- 
mates in a “live” exchange of information and ideas. 

Satellite teleconferencing is provided in conjunction with Dis- 
tance Learning in Extended Education. The Titan Cable Chan- 
nel network makes CSUF programming available in communi- 
ties throughout Orange County such as Comcast, Multivision, 
Century Cable, Seal Beach Cable Communications Foundation, 
and Paragon Cable. 

For detailed information, contact and Television and Media Sup- 
port Center. 

The University Library 

Library 229 
(714) 773-2714 

Chief among the learning resources on the campus is the Univer- 
sity Library. The six-story building located in the center of the 
campus houses a collection of over 700,000 btxDks and bound 
pericxlicals, as well as one and half million other items: goverp- 
ment documents (federal, state, local, and international); maps; 
microforms; and non-print materials such as kits, videotapes, 
phonorecords, compact discs, audio tapes, and film strips. Books 
and other materials are selected through the joint efforts of in- 
structional and library faculty to support the undergraduate and 
graduate programs of the University. In addition to these general 
collections, special and supplemental collections designed to 
support both the curriculum and instructionally-related research 
have been developed. 

The student identification card issued by the University serves as 
a library card for checking out books and other materials. Cards 
must be validated each semester at the library circulation center. 
The loss or theft of the student ID, as well as any change of 
address, should be immediately reported at the library circulation 
counter; early reporting of a lost ID will reduce the risk of misuse 
of the card. Library users are responsible for the return of all 
materials charged out on their ID cards. Since all library materi- 
als are subject to recall after two weeks, they should be returned 
to the University Library if there is need to be absent from 
campus for more than this length of time. 


Academic Affairs 31 


Primary access to the University Library’s holdings is provided by 
the electronic Online Public Access Catalog (OPAC). The 
OPAC provides access to books, government documents and 
other materials through author, title, subject and other indexes. 
The OPAC also provides a listing of materials required or recom^ 
mended for course-related reading and available for limited loan 
periods through the Reserve Book Room. General information, 
such as the hours the Library is open, is also available on this file. 
One can search the OPAC not only on terminals in the Library 
building, but also through dial-up access from remote locations 
on and off campus. 

Subject access to periodicals and similar types of literature is 
provided through printed indexes and abstracts, and through 
electronic CD-ROM databases housed in the Reference Section. 
Access to remote databases is provided through the Computer- 
ized Information Retrieval Service (CIRS), a fee-based service 
offered by the Reference Section. 

As part of the curriculum, the University Library offers courses in 
bibliographic research, including Library 200 (Elements of Bib- 
liographic Investigation). T)urs and lectures for individual classes 
are given at the request of the faculty. In addition to formal 
instruction in bibliographic research, general and subject- 
specialized reference and research services are provided by the 
library faculty. 


For the convenience of users photocopiers and microform reader- 
printers are available in locations throughout the University Li- 
brary. These are operable with coins or electronically encoded 
copycards that may be purchased in the Library’s lobby. Other 
specialized facilities include music listening rooms, videotape 
viewing equipment, group study rooms, and a microform reading 
area. 

In addition to the many resources available on campus, mutual 
use agreements make accessible to students and faculty the library 
collections of the nineteen other libraries in the California State 
University system, the closest University of California campuses 
(Irvine and Riverside), and neighboring institutions such as Ful- 
lerton College. Intralibrary services provide easy access to library 
resources both at and from the Mission Viejo Campus. Interli- 
brary borrowing arrangements with major university and research 
libraries throughout the country further expand the resources 
available to the CSUF community. 

More detailed information about the University Library and its 
services is available at the Reference Desk located on the first 
floor. 


3 2 Academic Affairs 


Student Academic Affairs 



Academic Advisement Center 

Humanities 112 
(714) 773^3606 

The Academic Advisement Center provides information and 
guidance in the choice of an undergraduate major, a school of 
interest, or selection of elective and general education courses. It 
is the administrative center for undergraduate students who have 
not declared a major or school of interest. Refer to the Academic 
Advisement section for additional information. 

Student Academic Services and 
University Outreach 

Library (lower level) 18 
(714) 773^2484 

The primary responsibility of Student Academic Services and 
University Outreach is the recruitment and retention of students 
at California State University, Fullerton. Inherent to this miS' 
sion is the strict attention that must he given to increasing the 
number and graduation rates of underrepresented students. 
Moreover, the unit is assigned much of the respcmsihility for 
ccx)rdinating institutional efforts in providing educational oppor^ 
tunity for all students. 

The Student Academic Services and University Outreach Office 
develops and coordinates a comprehensive program of outreach 
services and activities which assist to make the university more 
visible, attractive, and accessible to all potential students. A 
number of programs have been consolidated under this office. 
These are described on the following pages. 

Athletic Academic Services 

Physical Education 130B 
(714) 773^3057 

As an integral part of the CSUF student advising system, the 
Office of Athletic Academic Services provides advisement for 
student'athletes; provides referrals to campus academic support 
units; and conducts programs which are designed to assist stu- 
dent-athletes in meeting their academic goals. 


Student Academic Affairs 33 


Center for Internships and 
Cooperative Education 

Langsdorf Hall 210 
(714) 773^2171 

The Center for Internships/Cooperative Education was estab- 
lished to offer students the opportunity to formally integrate 
academic training with practical work experience prior to gradua- 
tion. The Internship/Co-op Program offers students an opportu- 
nity to expand their knowledge and skills in a “real work” situa- 
tion which better prepares them to select a career and successfully 
enter the job market. Through academic study and practical 
experience, students can enhance their academic knowledge, 
personal development, and professional preparation. Other valu- 
able benefits of an internship co-op are to: 

1. gain work experience; 

2. network and develop industry contacts; 

3. earn academic credit; 

4. solidify academic and career goals; 

5. earn money while learning; 

6. explore various career options within a major. 

The program involves the cooperative efforts of both faculty and 
employers in the creation of opportunities for students that fulfill 
academic and professional needs. Each internship/co-op is super- 
vised and monitored by the employer, while faculty coordinators 
provide guidance to students to insure the academic integrity of 
the work experience. 

There are two internship/co-op program options; parallel and 
alternate. Students can work part-time while attending regular 
classes or full-time for a semester and can continue classes the 
following semester. Most assignments are salaried positions and 
consequently assist the student to finance their educational ex- 
penses. 

CSUF currently has 39 academic programs that offer internships/ 
co-op in fields from the arts to the sciences. To participate in the 
internship/co-op program a student must: 

1. be at least in the junior year of study; 

2. be in good academic standing; 

3. receive approval from a faculty coordinator; 

4. enroll in the departmental intemship/co-op course. 

The internship/co-op must be consistent with the goals of the 
student’s academic discipline. In most departments up to six units 
of internship/co-op credit may be earned. With faculty coordina- 
tor approval, students may also be able to receive credit if cur- 
rently employed in a job relating to their academic major. Stu- 
dents should not wait until their final semester to pforticipate! 

For further information, contact the Center for Intemships/Co- 
operative Education. The Center is open 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., 
Monday through Friday. 


Educational Opportunity Program 

Library (lower level) 20 
(714) 773^2784 

The Educational Opportunity Program (EOP) is primarily a 
“Special Admissions” program available to California residents 
who meet the state residency requirement as determined by the 
CSU Office of Admissions and Records. EOP is designed to 
provide information regarding admission, financial assistance, 
and supportive services to prospective undergraduate students 
who have potential to perform satisfactorily at the university 
level, but who might be prevented from doing so because of 
economic, educational and environmental disadvantages. 

EOP gives each of the students individual attention. It uses 
knowledge of the students’ distinctive patterns of social behavior, 
learning styles, motivations, and aspirations to assist them in 
realizing their full potentials. 

Advisement Services 

The EOP advisement component, (See Student Academic Ser- 
vices), is one key to the effectiveness of the EOP. Peer mentors, 
working under the direction of professional staff, serve as impor- 
tant liaisons between each EOP student and the university as a 
whole. Assistance and guidance are provided to help the student 
resolve academic, social, financial and personal problems. The 
EOP component of the Academic Services Center also serves as a 
referral point to direct students to the appropriate support ser- 
vices, e.g. Financial Aid, Learning Assistance Resource Center, 
and Health Center. 

Mentor Program 

McCarthy Hall 157 A 
(714) 773^3709 

Tlie Mentor Program seeks to improve the retention and graduation 
of individual students with university personnel by matching a 
student with a peer, a faculty member or staff member in a mentor- 
ing relationship. Mentors provide encouragement to the students 
with whom they work in the following ways: (1) serving as role 
models, (2) helping to build self-esteem, (3) supporting the stu- 
dent’s educational and career goak, (4) providing general counsel 
and advice, and (5) providing feedback on the student’s progress. 

Student Academic Services 

Humanities 113 
(714) 773^2288 

An important component of the Educational Equity Programs 
(Student Affirmative Action and the Educational Opportunity 
Program) is Student Academic Services. These support services 
are designed to facilitate student adjustment, academic achieve- 
ment and persistence at CSUF. Through individual advisement, 
counseling, workshops, and social activities, students are encour- 
aged toward their educational goals. The center also provides 
referrals to other appropriate services and is an important liaison 
between each individual student and various university offices. 


34 Student Academic Affairs 


Student Affirmative Action 

Library (lower level) 22 
(714) 773^2086 

Student Affirmative Action (SAA) is part of The California 
State University’s systemwide Student Affirmative Action plan 
which was mandated by the California Legislature in 1984 under 
Assembly Concurrent Resolution No. 151. The intent of this 
resolution was to address the underrepresentation of ethnic mi- 
norities, women and economically disadvantaged students en- 
rolled in California postsecondary institutions. 

At Fullerton, the SAA program focuses on students from under- 
represented groups who are academically qualified to meet the 
system’s regular admission requirements*. The program’s major 
activities fall into two compiments: outreach and educational 
enhancement. 

Outreach Services 

Outreach services and activities to increase the enrollment of 
regularly admissible students from underrepresented groups to 
Cal State Fullerton is one of the responsibilities of SAA. 

High School and community college students seeking admission 
to the university are provided information on Fullerton admis- 
sions’ procedures, academic programs and student support ser- 
vices. Students are also provided individual advisement and assis- 
tance with application processes and information on financial aid 
and scholarships. Parents of prospective students are also invited 
to participate in outreach activities including a parent support 
group and information workshops to familiarize them with var- 
ious segments of the university and promote their involvement in 
the college experience of their offspring. 

The Intermediate Outreach Program works with ethnic minority 
students from local junior high schools in preparing them to 
enroll successfully and excel academically in college. 

Educational Enhancement 

Recognizing that students are more likely to succeed in an envi- 
ronment where they are treated with sensitivity and understand- 
ing, the SAA educational enhancement component works with 
faculty, staff and administrators to create a sensitive and support- 
ive environment for minority and underrepresented students. 

Student Study Center (SSC) 

Library (lower level) 38 
(714) 773^3488 

The Student Study Center is designed to help students reach 
high academic achievement. It is targeted primarily for students 
in equity programs. Other students can participate by signing up 
as Fullerton College adult learners. 

The SSC has three major components: strategies classes, tutor- 
ing, and computer assisted instruction. 


The strategies classes incorporate techniques for learning using 
the content of classes the students are attending. Examples in- 
clude taking and using lecture notes, organizing concepts, analyz' 
ing and synthesizing information, and managing time. 

Tutoring for individuals and small groups is available for some 
classes and is designed to help students develop gotxl study skills 
and improve grades. 

CAI Lab (Computer Assisted Instruction) The lab is available to 
help students learn basic skills in reading, writing, mathematics, 
and critical thinking, as well as content background in general 
education classes, such as history, geography, and political sci- 
ence. The lab also features word processing, desktop publishing, 
and statistical packages. 

University Outreach/Relations 
with Schools 

Library (lower level) 22 
(714) 773^2086 

The University Outreach Service Office develops and coordi- 
nates a comprehensive program of outreach services and activi- 
ties to make the university more visible, attractive and accessible 
to all potential students. An overall goal of the office is to in- 
crease the enrollment of students at Cal State Fullerton with a 
special emphasis on students from underrepresented ethnic mi- 
nority groups. 

To accomplish this goal, outreach staff make presentations to 
high school and community college students, parents and coun- 
selors regarding Fullerton admissions prcKedures (including ad- 
mission to the Educational Opportunity Program (EOP) and 
Student Affirmative Action (SAA), academic programs and stu- 
dent support services). Students are also provided individual 
advisement and assistance with application processes and finan- 
cial aid procedures. 

Special activities including campus tours, admissions workshops 
for parents and conferences for high school and community col- 
lege counselors are also sponsored by the office. 

In keeping with the university’s commitment to increase the 
representation of ethnic minority and underrepresented students 
at Fullerton, special efforts are made to incorporate the unique 
needs of these students in the development and implementation 
of all outreach efforts. 

Campus Tours 

Call the University Ambassadors’ Office at (714) 449-7058 for 
information on how to schedule campus tours as well as days and 
times of tours. Tours last approximately one hour, and are not 
available on weekends, evenings or holidays. 


Student Academic Affairs 35 


Writing Center 

Humanities 528 
(714) 773^3650 

The Writing Center provides tutorial assistance primarily for 
students who are enrolled in English Department writing classes. 
However, tutors will also assist students who need help in writing 
papers for other university classes. Tutors offer individualized 
instruction, helping students write the kind of clear, concise 
prose necessary for academic and professional writing. While 
they will not proofread or edit papers, tutors do offer constructive 


suggestions designed to help the student master the techniques of 
proofreading and editing. The goal is to increase the student’s 
competence, not to improve any given paper. 

Tutors are also trained to help non^native speakers of English 
improve not only their writing but their speaking skills, and 
students may make appointments for conversation. If a student 
needs intensive work on grammar, one-to-one tutoring in this 
skill is available and can be supplemented with study materials 
and computer programs. Additionally, the Center has sample 
topics for the EWP which students may write on and then receive 
tutorial feedback prior to the exam. 




36 Student Academic Affairs 


-CALIF. 


Honors Programs 

Dean’s Honor List 

Academic achievement is recognized with the publication each 
semester of a list of undergraduate students whose grade-point 
averages for the previous term are 3.5 or better for 12 units of 
graded course work. Students are notified in writing when they 
have earned this distinction. 

General Education Honors 

The General Education Honors Program offers students many of 
the educational benefits of a small college in the midst of the rich 
resources of a large university. The program’s small class sizes 
provide challenging learning experiences, individualized atten- 
tion from professors, and closer interaction with other students. 

The program also gives students the opportunity to earn recogni- 
tion for distinguished academic performance in general educa- 
tion courses. Students who successfully complete the require- 
ments for honors in general education will have a notation placed 
on their transcripts. 

In order to graduate with honors in general education, a student 
must: be accepted into the General Education Honors Program; 
complete 24 units of general education honors courses; maintain 
a grade-point average of 3.25 in all general education honors 
classes; complete the university’s general education require- 
ments. 

For additional information, please refer to the General Education 
section of this catalog. 

Honors at Entrance 

Honors at entrance are awarded to both freshman and transfer 
students who have demonstrated outstanding achievement in 
past academic work. For first-time freshmen with no previous 
college units earned, a grade point average of 3.5 on a four-point 
scale must be earned in the course work considered for admission 
to the university. Students who have completed fewer than 56 
transferable semester units of credit must meet the grade-point 
average criteria for first-time freshmen and must also have earned 
a 3.5 grade-point average on all transferable college work at- 
tempted. Students who have completed 56 or more transferable 
semester units are eligible if a grade-point average of 3. 5 is earned 
in all transferable college work completed. 



Honors Program 37 



Honors at Graduation 

Honors at graduation for baccalaureate recipients are based on 
overall performance and have been defined by the Academic 
Senate in three classifications: 

With honors g p a- 3.50-3.74 

With high honors g p a- 3.75-3.89 

With highest honors g p a. 3.90-4.00 

Honor Societies 

Chapters of eleven honor societies have been chartered at Cali- 
fornia State University, Fullerton to recognize students who dem- 
onstrate superior scholarship and leadership in specific academic 
fields. 

Alpha Kappa Delta — Promotes social research for the purpose 
of service and recognizes high scholastic achievement among 
junior, seniors and sociology graduate students. 

Beta Alpha Psi — Encourages and gives recognition to scholastic 
and professional excellence in the field of accounting. 

Beta Qamma Sigma — Encourages and rewards scholarship and 
accomplishment among business and administration students. 

Eta Kappa Nu — Recognizes students in electrical engineering 
distinguished by scholarship, activities, leadership, and exempla- 
ry character, and helps these students progress by association 
with alumni. 

Kappa Tau Alpha — Recognizes high scholarship and profes- 
sional standards among students of journalism in the better 
schools and departments of journalism and communication in 
American colleges and universities. 

Lambda Alpha Zeta — Encourages and stimulates superior 
scholarship and professionalism among students in anthropology. 

Mm Phi Epsilon — Promotes high standards in education and 
performance in the professional world of music. 

Omega Rho — Serves as a vehicle of recognition for outstanding 
students in the field of operations research. 

Omicron Delta Epsilon — Recognizes scholastic achievement in 
economics. 

Phi Alpha Theta — Recognizes and encourages excellence in 
the study of history. 

Pi Sigma Alpha — Recognizes and encourages productive schol- 
arship in the subject of government among junior, senior and 
graduate students. 


Psi Chi — Advances and maintains scholarship in the science of 
psychology. 

Tau Beta Pi — Promotes and encourages scholastic excellence 
and service among the top eighth of junior and the top fifth of 
senior students in all engineering disciplines. 

The following five societies also recognize specialized groups of 
people, but are not limited to a specific academic field: 

Qolden Key National Honor Society — Promotes and recognizes 
scholastic excellence and service among juniors and seniors at 
CSUF. 

Omicron Delta Kappa — Recognizes and encourages exemplary 
character and superior quality in scholarship and leadership. 
Open to students with junior standing. 

Phi Beta Delta — Honors excellence among international stu- 
dents, distinguishes faculty who have studied or done research 
abroad, and American students who have studied abroad. 

Phi Delta Qamma — Promotes the highest professional ideals 
among students in graduate school. 

Phi Kappa Phi — Recognizes and encourages superior scholar- 
ship in all academic disciplines in institutions of higher learning. 

President’s Opportunity Scholars 
Program 

California State University, Fullerton established the President’s 
Opportunity Scholars Program as a means of recognizing the 
academic and extracurricular excellence of a select group of stu- 
dents. Its special focus is outstanding students from the current 
year of high school graduates who are also members of minority 
groups which are underrepresented in higher education — pri- 
marily African-American and Hispanic students. Scholars re- 
ceive a stipend of at least $1,000 a year for four years while 
maintaining program eligibility. 

To be eligible for consideration, an applicant must: 

• Be a legal resident of California. 

• Have a grade-point average of at least 3.2 in all academic 
subjects for the 10th, 11th and first half of the 12th 
grades. 

• Earn a Scholastic Aptitude Test total score of 900 or high- 
er, or an equivalent American College Test composite 
scores. 

• Graduate from high school in the class year preceding the 
fall semester for which applying. 


38 Honors Program 


• Document significant contributions to school and community 
activities during the high school years. 

• Verify outstanding individual achievement. 

• File for admission to Cal State Fullerton before applying for a 
President’s Opportunity Scholars award. 

• Submit a completed President’s Opportunity Scholars applica- 
tion form and arrange for the Secondary School Report and 
Description and Evaluation of Student forms to be submitted 
by the high school principal or a counselor and by a faculty 
member. 

President’s Scholars Program 

California State University, Fullerton established the President’s 
Scholars Program as a means of recognizing the academic and 
extracurricular excellence of a select group of students. Funded 
by the President’s Associates, the program began in 1979 with 
the first 10 President’s Scholars. Each year 10 additional Presi- 
dent’s Scholars are selected with the potential eligibility of all 
chosen individuals extending for a total of four years. President’s 
Scholars receive a stipend of at least $1,000 a year for four years 
while maintaining program eligibility. 

To be eligible for consideration, an applicant must: 


• Be a legal resident of California. 

• Present a grade-point average of at least 3.75 in all academic 
subjects for the 10th, 11th and first half of the 12th grades. 

• Earn a Scholastic Aptitude Test or an American College Test 
composite score that is well above average. A minimum CSU 
eligibility index of 3850 is required. 

• Graduate from high school. 

• Verify outstanding individual achievement. 

• Document significant contributions to school and community 
activities during the high school years. 

• File for admission to Cal State Fullerton before applying for a 
President’s Scholars award. 

• Submit a completed President’s Scholars application form and 
arrange for the Secondary School Report and Description and 
Evaluation of Student forms to be submitted by the high school 
principal or a counselor and by a faculty member. 

Application forms for both Scholars Programs are available by 

telephoning (714) 773-2010 or by writing the President’s Schol- 
ars Screening Committee, President’s Scholars Program, Library 

20, California State University, Fullerton, CA 92634. 


Honors Program 39 


Institutes and Centers 

California Desert Studies 
Consortium 

Faculty Terrace 303 
(714) 773^2428 

The California Desert Studies Consortium membership consists 
of all 20 California State University campuses but is operated by 
the campuses of Dominguez Hills, Fullerton (the lead campus), 

Long Beach, Los Angeles, Northridge, Pomona, and San Bernat' 
dino. The primary objectives of the Consortium are to provide 
physical and academic support for undergraduate and graduate 
education in a variety of disciplines and to assist in the manage- 
ment of the biological diversity of desert environments. The 
CSU Desert Studies Center, located in the East Mojave Desert at 
Scxia Springs, provides living and laboratory facilities for 75 
individuals. In addition the Consortium serves as a desert educa- 
tional and research liaison for the region for both private and 
government agencies. 

Center for Economic Education 

Langsdorf Hall 530 
(714) 773-2248 

The Center for Economic Education is one of many such centers 
at colleges and universities in the United States working with the 
Joint Council on Economics Education at the national level and 
the California Council on Economic Education to expand eco- 
nomic understanding. Center programs include services to 
schtx^ls and colleges, individual educators, and the community; 
research and professional training; and operation of an economic 
education information center. The center is located in the 
Schcxd of Business Administration and Economics. 

Center for Excellence in Science 
and Mathematics Education 

MH 434 
(714) 773-2671 

The Center for Excellence in Science and Mathematics Educa- 
tion is a joint venture of the School of Natural Science and 
Mathematics and the School of Human Development and Com- 
munity Service. The primary functions of the center are; 

1 . Serve as a focal point and clearing house for all activities in 
science in math education on the campus. 

2. Coordinate and provide support for obtaining external funds 
for the improvement of Science and Math Education. 

3. Enhance outreach activities with area schools and educators. 

4. Publicize existing science and math education programs at 
CSUF. 

5. Promote increased access to science and mathematics to all 
students, espiecially underrepresented minorities, women, 
and bilingual speakers. 



40 Institutes and Centers 



6. Foster discussion and develop innovative ideas regarding cur^ 
rent issues and methods in mathematics and science educa- 
tion. 

7. Increase communication and coc^peration between NSM and 
HDCS faculty in improving science and math education and 
classroom teaching. 

8. Training/mentoring of graduate teaching assistants as part of 
the functions of CESME. 

A steering committee consisting of faculty from NSM and HCXDS 
oversees the center’s activities. 

Center for Governmental Studies 

Education Classroom 424 
(714) 773^3521 

The Center for Governmental Studies supports research, train- 
ing and publication which assist governmental, professional and 
civic groups. It is housed in the Political Science Department and 
draws upcm departmental, community and alumni expertise. The 
Institute publishes monographs and lxx)ks, sponsors training pro- 
grams, and supports theoretical and applied research which are of 
interest to public policy makers. Institute funds also assist in 
supporting the teaching mission of the department. 

Center for International Business 

Langsdorf Hall 626 
(714) 773^2223 

The need for an international dimension to business education is 
underscored by the importance of international business oper- 
ations to domestic firms and the development of multinational 
firms and agencies. Equally important is a growing awareness of 
the diversity among the world’s cultures and economies, and an 
understanding of an unavoidable interdependence among na- 
tions. The International Business Center has undertaken to meet 
these challenges in the international area by developing interna- 
tional business programs with the School of Business Administra- 
tion and Economics. 

Developmental Research Center 

Humanities 519 
(714) 773^2147 

The Development Research Center in the Department of Psy- 
chology supports the research and instructional activities of fac- 
ulty and students in developmental psychology. Unique opportu- 
nities are provided to students in both research training and 
applied developmental psychology. Programmatic research con- 
ducted at the center includes: (1) longitudinal assessment of the 
relationships between home environment, mental development 
and school readiness; (2) experimental analysis of perceptual and 
cognitive abilities; (3) life-span changes in memory and informa- 
tion processing; (4) learning disabilities in children and adults; 
(5) memory strategy instruction across the life-span; (6) develop- 
ment of cerebral hemisphere specialization; and (7) parent-child 
computer learning activities. 


Foreign Language Laboratory 

Humanities 325 
(714) 773-2153 

The Department of Foreign Languages has a state-of-the-art 36- 
station Tandberg IS- 10 audio tape lab. Attached to the audio tape 
facility is a 15-station laboratory for computer-assisted language 
learning. Here, students in selected classes use computer pro- 
grams to learn grammar, idioms, and vocabulary as well as to 
write compositions in foreign languages. Foreign Language video 
tapes and laser discs provide students with authentic and interest- 
ing supplements to classrcx)m instruction. 

Humanities Institute 

Faculty Terrace North 612 
(714) 773-3474 or (714) 449-7045 

The California State University, Fullerton Humanities Institute 
promotes scholarship and study in the humanities disciplines and 
encourages investigation of pedagogical advances in the human- 
ities. The Institute is engaged in an on-going series of projects 
designed to create instructional materials and programming to 
enhance humanities instruction at all levels of the educational 
system within the region served by California State University, 
Fullerton. 

Institute activities are planned and coordinated by an interseg- 
mental advisory board comprised of representatives of both pub- 
lic and private educational institutions at the K-12, community 
college and university level. The Institute has published an anno- 
tated resource guide for teachers of the humanities in Orange 
County which includes information on a broad variety of human- 
ities resources such as art museums, colleges and universities, 
consulates, historic sites, historical and cultural organizations, 
libraries, museums, and performing arts centers. Also included is 
a select annotated bibliography of other resource publications. 

Institute for Economic and 
Environmental Studies 

Langsdorf Hall 702 
(714) 773-2509 

The Institute for Economic and Environmental Studies promotes 
interdisciplinary research, education and study, and dissemina- 
tion of information concerning the environment. Particular em- 
phasis is placed on the examination of environmental problems 
for the purpose of providing information and analyses concerning 
policy alternatives. The institute seeks funding to support re- 
search, sponsor conferences and seminars and prepare environ- 
mental studies and reports of interest to the academic, govern- 
mental, and general communities. Whenever possible, the insti- 
tute’s activities are structured to allow the participation of 
graduate and undergraduate students. 


Institutes and Centers 41 


Institute of Geophysics 

McCarthy Hall 263 
(714) 7730882 

The Institute of Geophysics is an interdisciplinary organization 
currently comprised of faculty members from the Departments of 
Geological Sciences and Physics. It was established to foster the 
communication of ideas and information; encourage interdisci- 
plinary research; and improve instruction in geophysics. Mem- 
bership is open to all faculty members who are interested in 
aspects of geophysics. 

Institute for Molecular Biology 
and Nutrition 

McCarthy Hall 282 
(714) 773^3614 

The Institute for Molecular Biology and Nutrition is an interdis' 
ciplinary organization comprised of faculty members from the 
Departments of Biological Science, and Chemistry and Bio- 
chemistry. The mission of the Institute is the exploration of ideas 
and problems concerning cell and molecular life science with 
special emphasis on understanding the biochemical basis of nutri- 
tion by: (1) fostering communication of scientific ideas to its 
membership, affiliated departments, the University, and to the 
community at large; (2) promoting active research on cellular 
and molecular problems; (3) encouraging student research in 
affiliation with members of the Institute; (4) development of 
courses related to the Institute’s mission which benefit from the 
unique interdisciplinary approach; and (5) establishment of the 
Biotechnology Minor. 

The Institute sponsors a series of special seminars and symposia 
featuring distinguished scientists of national and international 
renown. 

Institute for the Advancement of 
Teaching and Learning 

McCarthy Hall 161D2 
(714) 773^2841 

The Institute for the Advancement of Teaching and Learning 
(lATL) was established to promote a preeminent learning envi- 
ronment at California State University, Fullerton. The lATL 
conducts activities which empower faculty to improve the learn- 
ing which goes on in their classrooms, to increase their owti 
learning about good teaching practices, to study issues related to 
learning in their own disciplines, and to conduct research related 
to teaching and learning in general. The lATL also advances 
pedagogical research projects, including those related to the ef- 
fects on learning of various faculty teaching styles and student 
learning styles in the classroom, and the role of outcomes assess- 
ment in the learning process. The lATL is the central coordina- 
tion unit for such activities on the CSU Fullerton campus. 


The activities of the lATL include: seminars, workshops, collo- 
quia, and Chautauqua-like programs; developing a library for 
faculty of information about teaching for learning; publishing the 
series “Creative Teaching* and ‘^Creative Teaching Tips/* and devel- 
oping internal and external faculty enhancement and learning 
improvement research proposals. 

Laboratory of Phonetic Research 

Education Classroom 630D 
(714) 773^2526 
(714) 773^2441 

The Laboratory of Phonetic Research is a research and training 
facility in the Department of Linguistics. It is equipped with 
electromechanical facilities for the study of human speech, re- 
cording equipment, and an extensive collection of tape record- 
ings of lesser known languages and dialects. Its objectives are to 
provide beginning students with teaching, training and experi- 
ence in phonological analysis and to provide advanced students 
and faculty with facilities for research in phonetics and phonol- 
ogy. 

The Laboratory also serves as the editorial home of the California 
Linguistic Newsletter. 

Ruby Gerontology Center 

Ruby Gerontology Center 8 
(714) 449-7057 

The Charles L. and Rachael E. Ruby Gerontology Center serves 
as a forum for intellectual activity and creative scholarship in the 
area of gerontology. The Center houses the activities of the 
Continuing Learning Experience, the Gerontology Research In- 
stitute, and is a resource center on aging for the Orange County 
region. The Center’s goals include: promoting educational pro- 
grams concerning adult development and aging, developing pro- 
ductive intergenerational activities in education and research, 
fostering cross-disciplinary research on topics related to aging and 
later life, providing opportunities for lifelong learning, and ex- 
panding opportunities for professional growth and development 
for those interested in gerontology. 

Social Science Research Center 

Humanities 512 
(714) 773-2202 

The Social Science Research Center supports the instructional 
activities and research of the faculty and students in the School of 
Humanities and Social Sciences. The SSRC has three broad 
mission areas: (1) Instructional Support, (2) Research Support, 
and (3) Community Service. The facility provides instructional 
support through courses and workshops offered in the Microcom- 
puter Teaching Laboratory. Students and faculty have access to 
computer workstations in an open computer laboratory during 
normal universit>' hours and on weekends. Research activities of 
the faculty and students are supported through consultation with 


42 Institutes and Centers 


the professional and graduate assistant staff of the SSRC. The 
SSRC provides community service to agencies and organizations 
within Orange County in the areas of survey research, program 
evaluation and statistical analysis. The community service ac- 
tivities also provide instructional and research opportunities for 
the faculty and students. 

Southern California Ocean 
Studies Institute 

McCarthy Hall 282 
(714) 773-3614 

The Southern California Ocean Studies Institute, which consists 
of seven State University campuses (Dominguez Hills, Fullerton, 
Long Beach, Los Angeles, Northridge, Pomona, San Diego), 
participates in training scientists and educating the general pub- 
lic by ccx)rdinating and facilitating marine educational and re- 
search activities. It provides facilities for introducing students to 
the marine environment and for intensive participation by stu- 
dents pursuing professional programs. The major facility is the R/ 
V Yellowfin (85-foot vessel) which is used by classes and research 
programs in biology, geology and ocean engineering. In addition 
the Institute serves as an educational and research liaison. 

Sport and Movement Institute 

Physical Education 134 
(714) 773-3316 

The purpose of the Sport and Movement Institute is to promote 
an atmosphere congenial to research, creative activity, and ser- 
vices concerned with human movement and its related phenom- 
ena. Specifically, the organization endeavors to: (1) provide ser- 


vices of evaluation, consultation and advisement; (2) foster and 
encourage the generation and communication of ideas and infor- 
mation; (3) interpret and facilitate the practical application of 
research findings; (4) provide opportunities for individuals and 
community groups to participate in activities of the Institute such 
as clinics, workshops, seminars, etc.; (5) promote and support 
research and other scholarly activities on the part of the member- 
ship. 

Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary 

McCarthy Hall 207H 
(714)649-2760 
(714) 773-3451 

The Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary operates as a nonprofit California 
State University, Fullerton Foundation agency. Located in Mo- 
djeska Canyon in the Santa Ana Mountains, the sanctuary pro- 
vides for a program of continuing educational service to the 
community; a research center for biological field studies; a facility 
for teacher education in nature interpretation and conservation 
education; and a center for training students planning to enter 
into the public service field of nature interpretation. 

Twin Studies Center 

Humanities 52 IJ 
(714) 773-2568 

The Twin Studies Center of the Psychology Department is de- 
signed to serve two purposes: (1) conduct research projects on 
twins that will contribute to knowledge concerning the rearing 
and educating of twins, and to our understanding of human 
development, and (2) provide information to the public con- 
cerning psychological and biological aspects of twinship. 


Institutes and Centers 43 


^^a!J>ii^bv:> io moi^ 
bffls noijsiaa^ 9 dr^ 5 ^tK>^rr^ 
drh /jsTiJrjRt bnc (Cj 

biUi ,] 6 ijiifj^;iiJbn^ 


.•--*■'■■’ .>.'S : ■• ’i ,. ■■ : • • ,- ^ 

yfui/iOTsS 'iiiiyiW *it»lD0T 

:jiv. V 


mm IhlT /<ljts>jM 

i-f 

RR-tt? (PIV) 


,i^u i| 9 * ylr.iwxueii i^jJ'juT ^HT 

( M 'lil rso^t^brjwoi ,y 1 imvinL) -jUJ^ 

■ , ^jii'jniJGrA £^j/^. naw^ iirfj; rrf 

‘Sifj mft‘/^i<j It -fcS^>. 4 yfv 

V t ; ' ;• if^r i. i^'^Slivefrh^' i-;V^WtttWAfe 

' ‘ • ^ ' •*' • ’ ' ' . i*^ ’{‘r.fiVj^^i'njri' 1 >BW' ' 

r,' ■ .'‘^■:.i ' )f^' i:^;,^,^"-' .h-j- .-w. ;:^v;^■^ ..^: f'.di ..><;>( ixiutrl; 

' w ••.;.vMf< ‘ I}]. JrrtS to 


^^> 

i--,’.!,vrvf.t.- .-■ , v: 'li 9 lbjJl 3 ‘-m''Air 


,'i»/v4' ’ 


>^fri}'Aronjl j!(w iwurij ^^^W 1 

nunun V gmbi^tcrvniirifxu. im 03 hrm Mmi >o ^^nVKjubiv bifis 



! ■ ) ‘-tit u te tor th^ Ad vyot^-'roefif ' 'df ., 
MeiH-ii i ■ ' 4 : , at^ L-^i^iill' 

iLCf- ' f'ji. icij :o priii.TK)r^ a precf' iAh-i? t'^.vj- 

^\<i^\ '<tkX iH C'vSi'il-Jtyit.* ■>iar(! Urjvw:'). VitUert,:.'' '^l\r lATI 

•:^)h‘ii£v,rv.^CT'V!(tt^ t^i.ii K empow^ ,f' ■ wnpr^/y . 5 !^ 

iu>; in ibartr cla3^^>nw> w imr-^^Tsv, uwo 

y f«!achir4|r, p^**r^t*'4r t' ''>udy rr UteJ-ro^ 
kifnlni; iti \Ucir <mtk i4is<;ip(ir^';>^ fo cojk^: 
u> tf ach«^ -n\!v:kacrU 4 ^^^ j;!ene.rHt .;1 ^/<r .uivasic^ ; 

jr-eJ jjrv^icAl :^ih incr.itjlmt ifk>^ :y; tf- 

on kaminjs of v^nov!.^ rac.u!r> airrf 

ieamvr^ ‘ rvt^ in m<* cl3%?^nx>5n, andd^ 

rMcnr 1 ?:{frr L'fO.:<*Av Thi: i^tKfc 

rion ;’'•.! fe sivb <>vi the rulWr *^^1:^1 » 


‘ ' . ' “ . .V;u’V- s -.mi;- 'o. vi' -T . 0 . * 1 '*, colk)' 

^ix'; 3 r;iii£iirto^;j£ /I?i|!^>iia^T f.Tv^.iiiftow fiLivoiq ock eobr/b 

.i£vnobui«; b/ia viJug^ »fi3 


rJ > 


, 9XuihtfnI esibui8 

lanisH vrimO^M 


^.es?»..tvr-h o 

mafiiuoG 


,c^^irx 

f ..-jH'- 4 .'i-i '.-A ^•-. L-'/i&L..';^ • 



OJ .«!< i I v'ffcll r\r • J' ?Wl ' n y^Tt| 

’ -uu 7 't k^Xhii 7 n^‘fK/iivho Vriif 

M o/fr y.mi»i;ioiq {K^oie^^^qan^u^lJLJ <5 ftiriai) 

4j?»o*5*i ijini; n.jK'^^h fi L'^^u ei d >irlvv {Iww xboWft) niWpibY V 

*<:K>viiM^ pi ft«s>o hiifi y^< 5 lraj 4 .f^ploirf Hi 

n i ;fi fTB itt 29 'mi ojuimnl s/fa 


ajibbahr,1^ bnis tioq3 

f f f I nobeoubH k!>t8YfN[ 

^ ^ dl££:€TT(MY) 

i 2 S 


.r\ 


^fi}iing ea\h: Tyt.}orrd- pf^. 


^ " 4 liginfil. de'‘elupr.i^ pror 

■ 4 :' - , .v 4 ??? 5 :^^cafton ;>i<d re«.e>iv.h, 

r-i^. ■=■ . '^c;; - related ;.»aginy:*jn<i 

kter life, p«llvil^ . :'jh .'fx t ’r???. t;ftk>rk§r , and cx- 

: »* " ’ growth ?n ‘ Jevelof'mcnf 

tbr d^ose iyvtefj^^ 


Social Science Research Center 

Hutiiirnttea S*^ 
f ■ t 4 )- 7 ' 73 ‘^ 2 l^C^' 

Si>c^i ^ imci a. scAuh Oimh the insmicnottal 

ii<riv*:ici^ and ?t‘«jiiicfa of thi ittvl <^uc}cr.r$ m the ScHdhf of 

Hoojgmticj^vand Soci-^ Setc^^ SSS^C ha* fhree bre^^ 
p’MS: u) (2V?lj&eirch 

i C&v>!.!iucv Cv,-c>f< >, v^ 'lir? provides inifruetksfMii 
rhjr.)u;;h ^ - •; a .r ' ;r«^ offeree* in die M*crooo^' 

‘b/jch^o,^ t:"' ''4-.1- . y co> and fscuiry acir^ to 
< &.npikt^ ^cAm -jv’ '14, ^ Nixn comi>».ner lahoriitixy duiing 
. hjiib 2 >e,Ht; >£ -sT.-c^^nds Re^rch ixtivicieiof 

’i&l^c:4»T^aiv3 it.wk tre ifax-ugii connxiianon 



















e» 




I ^ Student Affairs 




kf 


1^' 


M- 

^ Z(L<^ 

, . Qj<^ 

eai<M G»*^ 
txM 00^^ 


,0»^ 


e«^ iM 

i^(3< 








e>M e** 


M 







w^^p<^\ e> 


e« 










e 



Student Affairs 

Classroom activity is devoted to the academic development of 
the learner. Student Affairs offers programs which support the 
academic program and simultaneously provide students with set' 
vices and opportunities for personal growth. Some Student Af- 
fairs programs such as housing and financial aid emphasize their 
service and educationally supportive roles; others, like counsel- 
ing, accentuate their developmental aspects. The opportunities 
offered by the university’s Student Affairs program vary from the 
traditional social activities to lectures and concerts funded 
through the Associated Students. Developmental activities in- 
clude the exploration of personal and vocational life styles and 
leadership and training. 

Student Affairs are comprised of Academic Appeals, Career De- 
velopment Center, Disabled Student Services, Financial Aid, 
Student Health and Counseling Service, Housing and Residence 
Life, International Education and Exchange, School Based As- 
sistant Deans, Testing and Research, University Activities Cen- 
ter, University Center (Student Union), and Women’s/Adult 
Reentry Center. 

Vice President for 
Student Affairs 

Langsdorf Hall 810 
(714) 773-3221 

The vice president’s oflice coordinates and supervises all student 
affairs services and programs. The vice president is responsible for 
the quality of student life on the campus and works with faculty, 
administration and students to improve the campus environ- 
ment. This office is also charged with administering the universi- 
ty’s academic appeals procedure and the student disciplinary 
ccxles. 

Academic Appeals 

Langsdorf Hall 810 
(714) 773-3836 

Students who have grade disputes are encouraged to make every 
effort to resolve the issue informally by meeting with the instruc- 
tor, department chair, and dean of the school. Students who feel 
they have been unsuccessful at resolving the issue informally, 
should contact the coordinator of academic appeals, who will 
work to resolve the dispute informally and provide information 
and clarification about university policies. Students are encour- 
aged to contact the coordinator if they have questions about the 
academic appeals process. 



46 Student Affairs 



Career Development & 

Counseling 

Langsdorf Hall 208 
(714) 773--3121 

Career Development and Counseling provides career counseling, 
personal counseling and employment services. The center has 
designed many programs and services tailored to fit career explo- 
ration, planning and employment needs. One of the most popu- 
lar services is listings of local, part-time jobs for Cal State Fuller- 
ton students. 

Whether a student is just beginning to think about a major or a 
career or is ready to look for a job, the CDC has counselors and 
programs that will help define and achieve career goals. The 
CDC draws upon both on and off campus contacts and resources 
by working closely with employers and on task forces with faculty 
to plan career programs. In addition to career issues, some coun- 
selors are trained in personal counseling. An individual, confi- 
dential appointment can help clarify concerns and contribute to 
the learning experience. Make the time to get acquainted with 
and use the CDC’s services and programs. 

Counseling 

CDC professionals can help to identify interests, skills and values 
and their relationship to career opportunities through counseling 
and vocational testing. Students who encounter emotional or 
personal problems may come to the CDC for professional psycho- 
logical counseling. 

Seminars and Workshops 

Group sessions examine topics such as career planning, resume 
writing, job search techniques, interview skills and other career 
related subjects throughout the semester. Many of these seminars 
are designed for specific academic areas. In addition, workshops 
in personal development and life skills are offered in the center. 
See the CDC Calendar published every semester for current 
information. 

Career Resource Library 

The center has an extensive collection of company, career 
search, occupational and labor market information to help with 
career research. The library includes books, pamphlets, bro- 
chures, as well as audio and video tapes. 

Part-Time Employment 

The center has listings of part-time, summer and temporary em- 
ployment which are received each day from local employers. 

Career Employment 

Employment listings and recorded job information are available 
to students and graduates seeking full-time career opportunities. 
The jobs are found in government agencies, business, industry, 
manufacturing and service industries. 


On Campus Recruitment 

Several hundred employers send recruiters to the CDC each fall 
and spring to recruit graduating seniors, graduate students and 
alumni. 

Educational Placement 

The center provides complete services for candidates seeking 
employment in educational institutions including: placement 
counseling, placement file service, position listings and a pub- 
lished bulletin of administrative openings. 

Minority Services 

The CDC is aware of the career needs of minority students; 
counselors work closely with employers, clubs and professional 
organizations to provide services and opportunities that will help 
meet these needs. 

SIGI PLUS"“ 

SIGI PLUS™ (pronounced “Siggy”) is a computer-based System of 
Interactive Guidance and Information that will help make career 
decisions. The program will help examine values, explore career 
options and master decision-making strategies. It also contains 
Graduate School Selector, a program of information on 800 
graduate schools in the nation. 

Career Class 

Career Exploration and Life Planning (Counseling 252) is a three 
unit course designed to facilitate career and educational decision 
making. Specific objectives of the class include increasing aware- 
ness of self, the world of work, relationships between college 
majors and occupations, and job search skills. See the current 
Class Schedule for further information. 

Alumni Career Bank 

The Alumni Career Bank is composed of several hundred CSUF 
alumni who have volunteered to share their work experiences 
with students. Over 1(X) career areas and nearly every major and 
program are represented in the bank. 

Walk-In Counselor 

Throughout the day a CDC counselor is available to help define 
career needs and suggest appropriate CDC services. This is de- 
signed to answer short questions and provide information. 

(Certain services of Career Development & Counseling are avail- 
able without cost to currently enrolled students. Services are also 
available to alumni without charge for six months following 
graduation. After that period, alumni will be charged a nominal 
fee for services. 


Student Affairs 47 


The university will furnish, upon request, information concern- 
ing the subsequent employment of graduates from programs or 
courses of study which have the purpose of preparing students for 
a particular career field. This information includes data concern- 
ing average starting salary and the percentage of previously en- 
rolled students who obtained employment. The information pro- 
vided may include data collected from either graduates of the 
campus or graduates of all campuses in The California State 
University system. Copies of the published information are avail- 
able in the center. 

Financial Aid 

McCarthy Hall 63 
(714) 773^3125 

The Financial Aid Office is committed to providing eligible stu- 
dents with the necessary financial aid resources to ensure their 
academic success. The office provides financial assistance to ap- 
proximately 6,300 students annually and administers over $17 
million each year through the following student financial assis- 
tance programs: 

Supplemental Loans for Students (SLS) 

Parent Loan (PLUS) Program 
Perkins Loan (formerly NDSL) 

Stafford Loan (formerly GSL) 

Pell Grant 

Supplemental Educational Opptutunity Grant 
Bureau of Indian Affairs Grant 
State University Grant Program 
Educational Opportunity Program Grant 
College Work Study Program 
Cal Grant A (State Scholarship) 

Cal Grant B (Q^llege Opportunity Grant) 

Graduate Fellowship 
Private Scholarship 
Emergency Loan Fund 

For further information concerning financial aid programs avail- 
able at the university see the Registration Procedures section of 
this catalog or call the Financial Aid (Dffice. 

Disabled Student Services 

Library 113 
(714) 773^3117 

Disabled Student Services provides assistance and offers special 
services to all disabled students. The purpose of this program is to 
make all of the university’s educational, cultural, social and phys- 
ical facilities and programs available to students with orthopedic, 
perceptual and/or learning disabilities. The program serves as a 
centralized source of information and provides students with in- 
dividual attention. The professional and support staff are exper- 
ienced with the particular needs of persons with disabilities. 


The program works in close cooperation with other university 
departments in order to provide a full range of services. These 
services include classroom support services (readers, notetakers, 
tutors, interpreters for the deaf/hearing impaired, alternative 
testing) counseling, handicapped parking, application assistance 
and priority registration, academic advisement, career counsel- 
ing and job-placement, housing and transportation, health ser- 
vices for acute illness and advocacy. 

The program coordinates and provides diagnostic assessment, 
counseling, advisement, advocacy and supportive services for 
students with learning disabilities. 

TTe program needs and encourages involvement and input from 
the students it serves in order to maintain a responsive and 
quality program. 

Information regarding special facilities and services available to 
disabled students may be obtained from the Office of Disabled 
Student Services. 

Health Service 

Student Health Center 
(714) 773^2800 

The Health Service is staffed by physicians, nurse practitioners, 
registered nurses, laboratory and radiology technologists, a phar- 
macist, and a physical therapist. Most of the providers are prima- 
ry care clinicians. The staff also includes specialists in the follow- 
ing fields: gynecology, orthopedics, allergology, podiatry, health 
education, reprcxluctive health, and nutrition counseling. 

All medical records are confidential; no information will be released 
without the patient’s written permission, except in the rare case 
of a court subpoena. 

The cost of care provided by the Health Service, except for a few 
specific fees, has been paid through student fees and by the State 
of California. Every registered student is eligible for care. A 
voluntary augmented fee program (Titan Health Card) has been 
added to help reduce the cost of student health care. The Student 
Health Service cannot, however, meet all medical needs. Stu- 
dents are urged to obtain health insurance, if they do not already 
have adequate private insurance. A policy is offered on campus 
through the Associated Students, Inc. 

Housing Services and 
Residence Life 

Cypress House 101 
(714) 773^2168 

TTe University welcomed its first residence students in spring, 
1988. Up to 396 students are accommodated in 66 Residence 
Hall suites. Each 3 bedroom, 2 bath suite accommodates 6 resi- 


48 Student Affairs 


dents, is air-conditioned, carpeted and fully furnished. This is the 
first phase of a two-phase construction program that will eventu- 
ally house up to 800 students on campus. 

The housing complex offers a study lounge, computer and typing 
rooms, a weight room, a multi-purpose room and coin-operated 
washers and dryers. Barbecue grills, a picnic area, a basketball 
court, a sand volleyball court, video game machines, billiards, 
ping pimg, a large screen television set and VCR are also avail- 
able for residents. 

The Housing and Residence Life Office also assists students in 
their search for off-campus housing. TTe office provides updated 
listings of IcKal apartment complexes. Bulletin boards are avail- 
able for posting cards by students seeking roommates or accom- 
modations. Other listings highlight rooms for rent in private 
homes and rooms in exchange for work. Additional information 
is available on model rental agreements and on referrals for com- 
munity housing agencies handling landlord/tenant law. 

Residence hall space is available for summer session students and 
for educationally related groups sponsoring workshops and pro- 
grams on campus. 

Contact the campus Housing and Residence Life Office for fur- 
ther information. 

International Education and 
Exchange 

McCarthy Hall 79 
(714) 773^2787 

California State University, Fullerton is a community of people 
from many nations and cultures. The Office of International 
Education and Exchange is dedicated to promoting the exchange 
of knowledge and experience within the multicultural campus 
community and with the world at large. The office provides 
information and assistance for all international students attend- 
ing CSUF and for U.S. students planning to study abroad. 

International Students 

Over 1000 students from nearly 70 countries study at CSUF as 
international students, and the staff of the Office of International 
Education and Exchange endeavors to provide them with a home 
away from home. The office provides visa eligibility documents, 
pre-arrival information, and orientation to newly admitted stu- 
dents. The door is always open for students to meet with an 
adviser to discuss academic concerns, cultural adjustment, immi- 
gration matters or just to chat. 

Campus activities such as international dinners and discussions 
occur throughout the year. The office coordinates programs in 
the community, such as the Fullerton International Friendship 
Council. 


Study, Work and Travel Abroad 

A year or semester overseas can provide an invaluable educational 
experience. Cultural awareness, language skills and an in-depth 
knowledge of one’s field from an international perspective are but 
a few of the many benefits of studying abroad. A well planned 
program offers career advantages with the increasingly multina- 
tional and multicultural organizations and communities of south- 
ern California. 

The California State University International Programs is an 
academic year program with 25 centers in 15 countries. Interna- 
tional Programs participants remain enrolled at CSUF, earn resi- 
dential credit, and pay only home campus fees. All personal 
expenses are the student’s responsibility. 

CSUF has established campus-based direct exchange programs 
with universities in the Soviet Union, China, France, Japan and 
Mexico. Application and admission requirements vary somewhat 
by country. No overseas tuition is charged; students pay regular 
CSUF campus fees, plus international transportation, living, and 
related expenses. Semester programs are available. Detailed in- 
formation may be found in the “International Programs” section 
of this catalog. 

Information on the International Programs as well as a general 
library on study, work, and travel abroad are available in the 
International Education Office. 

Intercultural Development Center 

The Intercultural Development Center, located in the Library, 
R(X)m 4-B, offers educational support programs and services for 
foreign-born students, particularly recent immigrants and refu- 
gees. Students will be offered programs such as employment skills 
workshops, peer support groups, traditional cultural celebrations, 
and English Writing Proficiency Exam preparation sessions. 

The Intercultural Development Center builds cross-cultural 
awareness in the campus community by serving as a resource 
center with published materials and presentations on diverse 
cultures. The Center is well-equipped to assist Vietnamese stu- 
dents with academic and personal problems. 

School Based Student Affairs 

The assistant deans work in collaboration with the Vice President 
for Student Affairs and the deans in each school and the director 
of the Mission Viejo Campus, to deliver services which support 
student progress toward degree and professional objectives. In 
addition, the assistant deans design and coordinate programs 
with faculty, students and administration which enrich the aca- 
demic environment and enhance student development within 
the schools. 


Student Affairs 49 


Responsibilities of the assistant deans may include counseling 
students with personal and academic questions, coordinating ori- 
entation and retention programs, advising student groups, ad- 
ministering scholarship programs, and developing alumni and 
community support for the school. 

Testing and Research 

Langsdorf Hall 206 

(714) 773^3838 

The Testing Center provides a variety of testing and research 
services to the university. 

The center supports the counseling services available through 
the Career Development Center and the Student Health and 
Counseling Service by administering a variety of psychological 
tests designed to help students gain a better understanding of 
themselves and of their goals and interests. These tests are ad- 
ministered on an individual basis in response to counselor refer- 
rals. 

The center conducts ongoing research and evaluation of universi- 
ty testing programs and consults with members of the university 
community regarding the design and conduct of testing-related 
studies and survey research. The center also designs and conducts 
surveys of student needs, attitudes, and other characteristics. 

National group testing programs related to undergraduate and 
graduate school admissions and teacher certification are also co- 
ordinated by the center. Information on the following tests is 
available in the center: 

American College Test (ACT) 

Scholastic Aptitude Test (SAT) 

Graduate Record Examination (GRE) 

Graduate Management Admission Test (GMAT) 

Law School Admission Test (LSAT) 

Medical College Admission Test (MCAT) 

National Teacher Examination (NTE) 

California Basic Educational Skills Test (CBEST) 

Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL) 

The center also administers other group tests related to CSUF 
degree requirements. Information on these tests is available in 
the center: 


Women’s/ Adult Reentry Center 

McCarthy Hall 33 
(714) 773-3928 

The Women’s Center’s primary focus is to foster a greater aware- 
ness of women’s issues. Its goal is to promote gender equity 
through improved communication between women and men. It 
is open to all interested students. The center’s hours are from 8 
a.m. to 5 p.m. Monday through Friday. Evening appointments 
are always available. 

The Women’s Center is a place for all students — women and men 
— a place to get help with any problem you may have — a place 
to study, relax and make new friends. In short, an excellent 
center for students to receive support, information and resources 
to help them explore the many options available to them. 

Programs and services include individual counseling, speakers, 
films, skill-building workshops, developmental groups, resource 
information and referrals. 

The Women’s Center is closely involved with the minor in Wom- 
en’s Studies. The center houses a Women’s Studies Library of over 
800 bcx^ks and files with excellent research materials. A listing of 
film and tape titles round out the collection. The center also 
gathers and maintains information on local women’s events, 
news and networks. 

The Adult Reentry Center (ARC) serves adults who, after a 
break in their education, are considering beginning or continu- 
ing their college education. The center provides support and 
guidance for currently enrolled reentry students and others whose 
needs differ from those of the traditional university student. 

ARC offers a variety of programs which include support counsel- 
ing, workshops, support groups and referrals to staff and faculty. 
The center’s counselors and programs can help students and 
prospective students to clarify their goals and determine if a 
university education is the appropriate method for attaining 
those goals. The center also provides information and assistance 
with university application and registration procedures as well as 
personal, academic and career counseling. Special programs, 
groups, workshops, films and discussions which focus on the 
special needs of reentry students are presented each semester. 
Evening hours are always available. 


English Placement Test (EPT) 

Entry Level Mathematics (ELM) 

English Equivalency Examination (EEE) 
Examination in Writing Proficiency (EWP) 
Accounting Qualifying Exam (AQE) 
Mathematics Qualifying Examination (MQE) 


50 Student Affairs 


Student Activities 

The division of Student Affairs provides students with opportuni- 
ties to teach and to learn and are not limited to the classroom at 
California State University, Fullerton. Students taking full ad- 
vantage of the many educational opportunities at the university 
find themselves attending lectures, concerts and seminars offered 
as part of a well-developed co-curriculum on campus. Students 
not only attend events, but they participate in the planning and 
implementation of a full slate of activities held throughout the 
year. Through their participation, students experiment with new 
interests and broaden their experience with existing interests. 
Many clubs and organizations exist in the academic disciplines 
which encourage close contact between students and faculty. 

University Activities Center 

University Center 243 
(714) 773^3211 

From New Student Orientation through commencement the 
University Activities serves as a resource for students seeking to 
develop their management, leadership and organizational skills. 
New Student Orientation is coordinated by the center and held 
each June prior to the end of early registration. Since orientation 
is staffed by students, this program is an excellent way for new 
students to take advantage of training resources and become 
involved with the university. 

Opportunities for involvement in the center’s programs are open 
to all students according to their interests, abilities and time. 
Staff members at the Activities Center advise many student 
organizations and are available as resources in the formation of 
new groups and strengthening existing groups. Workshops on 
team building, organizational behavior, leadership styles, group 
dynamics and event programming are available by contacting the 
office. 

Leadership Opportunities 

Workshops and training programs are available to teach and 
encourage students who may want to learn or refine leadership 
skills. Practical application of these skills is available through the 
approximately 200 campus clubs and organizations. Academic 
and professional organizations are either closely affiliated with 
academic areas at Cal State Fullerton or have national profes- 
sional recognition. These groups offer students a chance to iden- 
tify with faculty and community members who have similar ca- 
reer interests. 

Councils and task forces are formed by representatives of other 
officially recognized organizations. These groups often have a 
specific purpose or are formed to solve a particular problem. 



Student Activities 51 


Cultural organizations seek to present ethnic, minority and cuh 
tural programs for the Cal State Fullerton campus. Many oppor- 
tunities are created for the development of leadership and pro- 
gramming skills in this area because of the diversity of the cub 
tures represented on campus. 

Greek letter fraternities and sororities with national affiliation 
also exist at Cal State Fullerton. With a choice from thirteen 
fraternities and eight sororities, Cal State Fullerton students can 
usually find a group with which they want to affiliate. Rush 
information is available at the University Activities Center. 

Many religious organizations have been formed at Cal State Fub 
lerton with representation from a wide variety of religious persua- 
sions. Groups which are predominantly political in nature and 
those whose goal is service to others also enjoy student support. 

Club sports, recreation and leisure groups in a variety of recrea- 
tional programs are very active on campus. Some are competitive 
as teams and others offer students a chance to develop individual 
skills which can be used as lifetime leisure activities. 

AS Productions 

University Center 267 
(714) 773-3501 

Entertainment possibilities are endless with Associated Students 
Prcxiuctions at CSUF. ASP consists of six committees composed 
of student volunteers whose common interest is to keep the 
campus alive with quality entertainment and educational presen- 
tations. 

Any student can apply to be a program director or assistant 
director. Candidates for these posts are appointed by the ASl 
president and are approved by the board of directors. Their re- 
spimsibilities include planning and implementing programs, 
managing budgets, and training committee members. 

Committee members are student volunteers who attend regular 
meetings, help in program selection and work at the actual 
events. Joining a committee is a great way to have fun while 
learning leadership, communication and organization skills, as 
well as making a lot of new friends. 

Students can join an AS Prc^ductions committee anytime during 
the year by contacting the ASP office. 

AS Productions coordinates the film series, lecture series and 
concert series committees. The film series presents a variety of 
contemporary, classic and foreign movies to students at a cost 
lower than that charged by most commercial theaters. TTie 
speaker series provides the campus with prominent speakers who 
create a forum for issues and topics that are of importance to the 
campus and to the community. N<x)ntime and major concerts 
provide a showcase of original music ranging from classical to 
rock. Major concerts are usually held indoors while all noontime 
concerts are performed at the Becker Amphitheatre. 


Pub entertainment features bands from local nightclubs in the 
afternoon as well as evening concerts in the University Center 
Pub. 

Special Events offers unique and memorable events such as fairs, 
theatre groups and other special entertainment. 

Association for Intercultural Awareness 

The Association for Intercultural Awareness is composed of the 
student cultural clubs and organizations at CSUF. It provides 
funds to student groups that represent ethnic programs and for 
educational programs that have cultural bases. For more informa- 
tion about the AICA contact the University Activities Center. 

Camp Titan 

University Center 259 
(714) 773^3036 

Camp Titan is a service opportunity for students who enjoy the 
special feeling that comes from sharing their time with children. 

CSUF students devote one week of their time each June to be 
friends and counselors to over 120 children attending Camp 
Titan, which is accredited by the American Camp Association. 

The children range in age from 5 to 13 years and are selected on a 
referral basis from community service agencies. Because all of the 
children are underprivileged, they attend camp at no cost to their 
families. 

Students enjoy a special time of helping these children develop 
positive attitudes about themselves. TTe week is as much fun for 
the counselors as it is for the children. 

Students who are interested in a week of hiking, crafts, sitting 
around a campfire, swimming and spending time with children, 
can obtain further information about Camp Titan from the Uni- 
versity Activities Center. 

Departmental Association Council 

The Departmental Association Council (DAC) is the organiza- 
tion formed by the Associated Students to represent the academ- 
ic associations at CSUF. DAC is composed of student delegates 
who represent all of the academic student organizations within 
each department. By being a member of his or her own depart- 
mental student organization the student is a part of the DAC. 

The DAC provides funding for programs originated by member 
organizations. Student departmental organizations can use DAC 
funds to provide speakers, films and presentations that enhance 
the classroom experience. 

Individual students can receive funds for use in conducting re- 
search. All CSUF students are eligible to apply for such funds. 


52 Student Activities 


The DAC provides a forum for discussion of student ideas and 
concerns. All students are welcome to attend council meetings. 

For more information on how to get involved in the DAC, 
contact the University Activities Center. 

Associated Students 

University Center 207 
(714) 773^3295 

The Associated Students, Inc. is a campus involvement connec- 
tion at California State University, Fullerton. ASl offers a variety 
of learning experiences through its government, programs and 
services. Many campus special events are the product of student 
efforts to bring students new educational opportunities, to teach 
them about the campus, and to provide them a friendly, social 
atmosphere at CSUF 

ASl is a non-profit corporation supported by the activity fee 
students pay through registration each semester. By paying this 
fee, students are automatically a member of the Associated Stu- 
dents, Inc. TTe purpose of the corporation is to provide academic 
and co-curricular programs and services for students. When stu- 
dents are involved in ASl they are a part of an energetic, produc- 
tive group, learning valuable organization and communication 
skills that can augment their personal and professional growth. 

ASl Government 

The ASl government controls the actions of the corporation; it is 
a powerful, active organization that has use for students’ talents 
and skills. To apply for a position or find out more about student 
government, visit the ASl government office in the University 
Center. 

ASI President and Vice President 

The ASl president and vice president are chosen through student 
elections each spring and manage the corporation and its employ- 
ees and volunteers. These officers represent students’ needs and 
interests to CSUF’s faculty and administration and to the sur- 
rounding community. They also participate in several commit- 
tees. Along with the executive staff, the president and vice 
president submit recommendations to the ASl Board of Directors 
on the corporation’s annual budget of more than $4. 1 million. 

ASI Executive Staff 

The executive staff works with the president and vice president to 
direct the programs and operation of the corporation. All execu- 
tive staff members are appointed by the ASl president. Students 
may apply for these positions in the ASl government office. 

The ASl vice president for finance coordinates the budget pro- 
cess. The vice president for administration recruits students for 
presidential appointments and implements special projects. The 
director of legislative affairs is the CSUF representative to the 


California State Student Association. This statewide organiza- 
tion influences decisions about education, fee schedules and re- 
lated topics. The public relations director is responsible for mar- 
keting the corporation and communicating with the campus 
community. Student volunteers are assigned specific duties ac- 
cording to the needs of the corporation. 

ASI Board of Directors 

The ASl Board of Directors is composed of three directors from 
each school who are elected to serve one-year terms. The ASl 
president, vice president, vice president for finance and adminis- 
trator, one faculty council representative and one appointee of 
the university president also sit on the board. Directors also sit on 
various board subcommittees and other university committees. 

These directors represent the student body and work with the 
executive staff to implement programs that fulfill students’ aca- 
demic and co-curricular needs. They deal with issues regarding 
the business and affairs of the corporation, including approving 
budgets and appointments, authorizing business contracts, and 
issuing policy statements for administrative purposes. 

The weekly meetings of the ASl board are held in the Legislative 
Chambers in the University Center. All students are welcome to 
attend. Board seats are open to all students. Election applications 
are available at the midpoint of each semester in the ASl govern- 
ment office in University Center. 

ASI Judicial Commission 

The ASl judicial commission decides cases for the Associated 
Students, Inc. The five justices, who serve staggered two-year 
terms, make decisions according to the ASl bylaws. Any student 
can bring a case to the ASl judicial commission. 

Child Care Center 

Buildings 200 and 400 
(714) 773-2961 

The Child Care Center is sponsored and funded by Associated 
Students, Inc. For a nominal fee, children aged 3 months 
through 5 years whose parents are CSUF students, staff or faculty 
can benefit from the services of the center. Trained preschool 
teachers offer a comprehensive curriculum which covers learning 
skills in several areas of education. 

Legal Information and Referral 

Annex Office on Campus, University Center 255 
(714) 773^5757 or (714) 870-5757 

The Associated Students contracts with the College Legal Clin- 
ic, a Fullerton-based corporation, to provide information on legal 
procedures and initial consultation on all types of legal matters. If 
desired, students are referred to Orange County attorneys for 
reduced fee services. A 24-hour hot line is maintained by the 
College Legal Clinic. 


Student Activities 53 


University Center 

The University Center is located on the northwest comer of 
campus and provides areas for club and organizational meetings, 
recreation, relaxation and study. Each semester a portion of stU' 
dent fees helps support the services available there. 

University Center Governing Board 

The University Center Governing Board establishes operating 
policies for the University Center. Board members include stu- 
dents, faculty, an alumni representative, administrative represen- 
tatives and an appointee of the university president. Additional- 
ly, the board also evaluates the programs and services of the 
University Center as well as space allocation and budgetary 
matters. 

Bedard members are involved in several committees. Among them 
are the Focxl Services Committee, Policy Committee, Interior 
Design Committee, Space Allocation Committee, Art Acquisi- 
tion Committee, and the Future Directions Committee. Any 
student may apply for a board position. 

Main Information Desk 

The information and service desk of the University Center has 
the answer to most questions. It’s the place to purchase CXZTD 
bus passes and ticket btx)ks; tickets for some campus events and 
IcKal movie theaters; receive vending machine refunds; retrieve 
lost belongings from “lost and found’’; and obtain general campus 
information. In addition, student clubs or organizations can 
place announcements of coming events on the building’s three 
video screens by filling out the appropriate request form. The 
nearby rideshare bc^ard contains the names and phone numbers of 
people seeking carpool companions for long-distance trips. 

The reservation office provides meeting/event facilities and relat- 
ed services in the UC for student groups, faculty/staff groups, and 
for the surrounding community. While specific room rental rates 
vary, some facilities are frequently available at no charge to 
eSUF chartered student organizations. 

Amphitheatre 

The Becker Amphitheatre was built by the Associated Students, 
Inc. in conjunction with the University Center. The amphith- 
eatre, located just southeast of the University Center, is used for 
ncK)ntime concerts, theatre productions and other live entertain- 
ment. 

Center Gallery 

The Center Gallery offers displays of student, graduate and facul- 
ty artwork. Exhibits usually feature the work of a single artist and 
are shown for three weeks. All exhibits are chosen by a student 
art gallery coordinator. 


Graphic Services and Photo Lab 

University Center Graphic Services develops quality flyers, bro- 
chures, logos, letterheads and posters. Services include illustra- 
tion, layout design, paste up, and desk top publishing. This area 
also offers a complete black and white photo lab. All services are 
provided at very reasonable prices. 

Music Listening Room 

The Music Listening Room has a living room atmosphere, with 
soft chairs, bright lights for reading, and a counter full of maga- 
zines. The Music Listening Room has a wide selection of the 
latest releases of rock, jazz, classical and country-western music. 
Headsets are available for personal listening. 

Round Table Pizza Pub, Food Court, 

Garden Cafe 

The Pub’s congenial atmosphere offers a place to relax selling soft 
drinks, beer and wine, and Roundtable Pizza. Major sporting 
events are shown on the Pub’s big-screen television, and music is 
played continuously. The Pub is located on the University Cen- 
ter’s lower level. 

The Ftxxl Court is located on the main level of the University 
Center and features logos Sandwiches, the Green Burrito, the 
Busy Bee and the Grill O’My Dreams. 

The Garden Cafe is located on the lower plaza of the University 
Center and offers a unique cafe menu in a pleasant outdoor 
garden setting. 

Student Typing and Word Processing Center 

Aside from the study lounges, this is one of the most popular 
services offered by the University Center. Here, students can rent 
typewriters and personal computers to give their assignments that 
professional look. 

UC Programming 

UC Programming is a committee of the University Center Board, 
the governing Kxly of the University’ Center. The committee’s 
purpose is to develop and present social, cultural and educational 
programs of interest to the University community. 

UC Recreation Area 

It’s mostly fun n’ games on the lower level of the UC. The 
recreation area offers a place for diversions that include a lounge 
with a large screen television, a billiard room, table tennis, video 
and pinball games, locker rentals, small table games and the 
Titan Btml. The CSUF community is invited to participate in 
the various bowling leagues and tournaments sponsored each 
semester. 


54 Student Activities 


UC Theatre 

The University Center Theatre is available to clubs and organiza- 
tions for meetings, conference lectures and other presentations. 
It can be reserved through the reservation office at the informa- 
tion counter. 

Human Corps Community Service 
Program 

Historically, the mission of American colleges and universities 
has included a strong commitment to community service. Cali- 
fornia State University, Fullerton, as a publicly-supported uni- 
versity, places a high priority on service to the community. A 
primary goal of the total educational process is to prepare stu- 
dents for responsible citizenship. Tlie University has encouraged, 
since its founding, an ethic of community involvement and par- 
ticipation on the part of its faculty, staff, and student body. 
Student clubs and organizations have carried out many social 
service projects, faculty have contributed their expertise to the 
solution of various civic problems, and individual students, staff, 
and faculty have all volunteered their time, effort, and abilities to 
fraternal, civic, and religious organizations and activities. 

Therefore, the university welcomes the establishment of the Hu- 
man Corps and the focus it places on service to the community. 
Under the Human Corps legislation, all students in publicly 
supported colleges and universities in California are strongly en- 
couraged to provide an average of 30 hours of community service 
activity each year. Community service includes, but is not limit- 
ed to: tutoring, literacy training, neighborhood improvement, 
job training, youth work, health-support services, mental health 
care, and assistance to the elderly, disabled, disadvantaged, and 
homeless. To support students in achieving this goal. Cal State 
Fullerton: 

1 . established a volunteer bureau and other systems of referral 

2. provides support to student organizations seeking service pro- 
jects, and 

3. rewards and recognizes service contributions by individual 
students and student organizations. 

Academic credit for certain class-related service activities is al- 
ready provided in some cases and departments are encouraged to 
expand such opportunities where academically appropriate. Pay 
may also be accepted for certain service activities, such as paid 
internships or stipends and work-study employment. 

Further information can be obtained from the University Acitivi- 
ties Center, Room 243, University Center. 


University Recreation Program 

Believing that recreation and leisure pursuits are an integral part 
of one’s total educational experience and achievement, the Of- 
fice of University Recreation strives to provide all students an 
opportunity to use their leisure time wisely in order to attain the 
highest degree of physical reward and mental relaxation. 

The benefits of the recreation program are numerous, and it has 
been proven time and again, that those who maintain good 
health and physical fitness, perform better in all aspects of life. 
These programs are free to all students. 

Informal Leisure Recreation 

An intensive program of unstructured recreational activities are 
available to all CSUF students. By presenting a validated, photo 
ID card, students can participate in the supervised use of numer- 
ous facilities including the racquetball and tennis courts, swim- 
ming complex, gymnasium and weightroom. These facilities are 
open seven days a week. 

Intramural Sports 

The Intramural Sports Program is a student funded recreational 
based program of competitive leagues and tournaments. The 
program is accessible to all CSUF students, faculty and staff. 
Students have an active participative voice in all operations of 
the program through student assistants as well as the Intramural 
Representatives who sit on the Intramural Sports Council. Ac- 
tivities such as flag football, ultimate frisbee, bowling, ping pong, 
basketball, softball and volleyball are scheduled at various times 
and days to accommodate individual schedules. 

Sports Club 

The Sports Club program at California State Fullerton is de- 
signed for individuals and organizations with similar athletic and/ 
or recreational interests who wish to compete against other teams 
outside the University. They meet on a regular basis to teach and 
develop skill, and to promote the sport or activity. While com- 
peting in leagues and tournaments with other colleges, universi- 
ties, and local clubs they are representatives of California State 
University, Fullerton. All competitions are on a non-varsity 
(Non-NCAA) level. Typical clubs include rugby, archery, cy- 
cling, bowling, skiing and badminton. 

Student Family Memberships 

Current CSUF students who are married may purchase a recrea- 
tion membership for their spouse and children (21 years and 
younger, living at home). Unmarried students living at home 
may purchase a recreation membership for their parents and 
siblings (21 years and younger, living at home). 


Student Activities 55 


Intercollegiate Athletics 


Physical Education 158 
(714) 773^2677 

Director of Athletics: Bill Shumard 
Associate Directors: Maryalyce Jeremiah, Larry Zucker 
Director of Academic Services: Christine McCarthy 
Director of Operations and Compliance: Mary Ann Tripodi 
Sports Information Director: Mel Franks 

Coaches 

Baseball 
Augie Garrido 

Basketball 

Brad Holland (Men) 

Deborah Ayres (Women) 

Cross Country /Track (Menl\//omen) 

John Elders 

Fencing (Men/Women) 

Heizaburo Okawa 

Football 

Vacant 


Gymnastics 

Lynn Rogers (Women) 

Soccer 
Al Mistri 

Softball 
Judi Garman 

Tennis (Women) 

Bill Reynolds 

Volleyball 

Mary Ellen Murchinson 

Wrestling 
Ardeshir Asgari 

Conference Memberships 
National Collegiate Athletic Association 
(NCAA) Division 1 
Big West Conference 



56 Intercollegiate Athletics 



The rise of academic prestige at California State University, 
Fullerton has grown alongside the development of one of the 
nation s impressive young athletics departments. The inter-colle- 
giate athletics department provides student-athletes the opportu- 
nity to compete against the country’s finest competition as well as 
providing a top-notch education. In an effort to ensure academic 
development, the university provides counseling systems de- 
signed specifically for student-athletes. Those services include 
academic advisement, guidance counseling and daily study halls. 

CSUF has also made a commitment to provide facilities that 
enable fans and athletes alike to enjoy first-rate competition. The 
long-awaited Sports Complex gives Fullerton fans a much-need- 
ed home ftx)tball and soccer stadium. The complex will provides 
a 10,000-seat stadium plus upgraded baseball facilities that will 
seat over 2,000. Also included are two lit softball diamonds and a 
lighted soccer field that enable fans to enjoy the university’s 
many night events. Titan Gymnasium already enjoys tremendous 
popularity among the local community with over 4,000 fans 
attending home basketball (men and women’s), women’s gym- 
nastics and women’s volleyball events. An outdoor swimming 
complex, racquetball courts, weighttraining facilities, a high- 
level gymnastics practice facility plus facilities for wrestling and 
fencing make the Fullerton athletic complex a step above. 

Men’s Intercollegiate Athletics 

Baseball 

Few NCAA Division 1 baseball programs have enjoyed the de- 
gree of success that the Titans have had over the past decade and 
a half. During that time, the Titans won 13 conference cham- 
pionships, seven regional championships and two national cham- 
pionships. Major League stars Tim Wallach (Montreal Expos), 
Jeff Robinson (New York Yankees) and Mike Harkey (Chicago 
Cubs) have developed at Fullerton. Year in and year out, the 
Titans compete against the nation’s finest programs and always 
come out winners. 

Basketball 

The development of Fullerton basketball has been one of college 
sports* finest Cinderella stories. Always in contention for the Big 
West Championship, the program has produced half a dozen 
professional prospects and made a pair of NlTappearances. 1984 
Olympic Team point guard Leon Wood is one of many fine ath- 
letes who has helped develop the Titans into a team that will 
continue to grow. The university’s commitment to basketball 
ensures that success in the years to come. 

Cross Country 

Men’s cross country is making positive strides. The program com- 
petes in the very competitive Big West Conference which is peren- 
nially in the spotlight for national attention. The campus and 
outlying community offer a beautiful setting which enable the sport 
to set new standards among local and national universities. 


Football 

After 18 seasons of successful Division 1-A football, the sport was 
suspended for budgetary reasons following the 1992 seasc:>n. Dur- 
ing its two-decade existence. Titans football gained national 
attention and rankings when it won back-to-back league cham- 
pionships and sent two dozen players to the National Football 
League. Plans are being formulated to reinstate the sport, perhaps 
as early as 1994, with a smaller budget in a new Division 1-AA 
conference offering minimal or need-based financial aid. 

Soccer 

Soccer is another of Fullerton’s many sports where strong coach- 
ing has turned the program into a West Coast power. Al Mistri 
developed one of Southern California’s finest soccer programs at 
Damien High School in Claremont before taking over at Fuller- 
ton. Through hard work and support from a summer soccer camp. 
Coach Mistri has turned Titan soccer into one of the NCAA’s 
most competitive squads. Fullerton shared the conference cham- 
pionship in 1986 and, with the help of the new stadium, expects 
to challenge for the crown every season. 

Fencing 

One c^f the West Coast’s few Division I fencing programs gives 
prospective athletes a chance to train in a traditional, unique 
sport. The team has enjoyed a great deal of success over the past 
few years competing against local universities in sabre, foil and 
epee. 

Track 

Reinstated for the 1989 season, a spring track program provides a 
complement to the fall cross country schedule and should attract 
greater numbers of athletes. A new running track is part of the 
new Sports (Z)omplex and will certainly accelerate the growth of 
the program that was one of the mainstays of Fullerton’s athletics 
department in the early 1970s. 

Wrestling 

Another sport that few West C)oast schools support is prospering 
in Orange County as CSUF proves that hard work and strong 
coaching can bring success. Prospective athletes will find an 
atmosphere that is unparalleled among California universities. 
Top-notch competition and an All-American environment are 
two reasons why Fullerton wrestling is so successful. The Titans 
compete in the rugged Pac-10 conference. 

Women’s Intercollegiate Athletics 

Basketball 

The rise in popularity of women’s basketball has its foundations 
tied to the success of Fullerton women’s basketball teams. Under 
former Coach Billie Moore, the Titans won one of the very first 
national championships given out in the sport and recent teams 
have continued to be competitive on a regional basis. Two of 
women’s basketball’s greatest names have risen from Fullerton 
including 1976 Olympian Nancy Dunkle and All-American 
Robin Holmes. 


Intercollegiate Athletics 57 


Fencing 

One of the West Coast’s few Division I fencing programs gives 
prospective athletes a chance to train in a traditional, unique 
sport. The team has enjoyed a great deal of success over the past 
few years competing against local universities in sabre, foil and 
epee. 

Gymnastics 

The consistent efforts of Lynn Rogers’ women’s gymnastics squad 
have made them a top-five national power for 1 1 of the past 16 
years. No other school in the nation has produced more All- 
Americans or finished in the top three for more years than the 
Titans. Potential scholar-athletes receive an opportunity to com- 
pete and win year-round. 

Softball 

The sport of softball continues to set new standards of excellence 
on the local and national level. Always a contender for the 
NCAA title, the Titans captured their first championship in 
1986. Coach Judi Carman’s teaching has brought the university 
countless All-Americans including former Broderick Award win- 
ners Kathy Van Wyk, Susan Lefebvre and Connie Clark. A newly 
finished on-campus facility now enables an even greater audience 
to enjoy one of the nation’s most successful teams face off against 
other national powers. The Titans compete in the Big West with 
such national powers as University of the Pacific and Long Beach 
State. 

Cross Country 

The re-birth of a spring track schedule has been a boon to cross 
country as athletes in the distance races can now train on a 
competitive level year-round. An outstanding setting plus the 
addition of some outstanding athletes make success a very strong 
likelihood in the years to come. 


Tennis 

One of the university’s many programs on the rise, Fullerton can 
take advantage of the beautiful climate of Orange County to 
attract the nation’s top athletes to Fullerton. The redevelopment 
of the tennis facilities in the future make Titan tennis a program 
that is bound to remain competitive in the Big West. 

Track 

Fullerton made its strongest showing in more than a decade in the 
1988 conference championship meet and optimism abounds that 
the Titans will become a competitive force in the Big West 
Conference. A new running facility and the advancements made 
in distance running by the cross country team combined with the 
climate in southern California should ensure Fullerton of a solid 
track program. 

Volleyball 

Despite playing in collegiate volleyball’s most competitive con- 
ference, Titan volleyball is proving to be a program to watch. The 
obvious attraction comes from competing against NCAA Cham- 
pionship contenders who are members of the Big West, the na- 
tion’s strongest volleyball conference. The acquisition of future 
athletes, plus the development of budding stars should create an 
environment that will enhance the program’s success. 


58 Intercollegiate Athletics 


Resources 

Anthropology Museum 

The Museum of Anthropology is an educational and research 
resource for the University and the commiifiity. It houses, spon- 
sors, and conducts a variety of activities as part of the CSUF 
Anthropxjlogy program. Exhibits of the Museum of Anthropolo- 
gy have included artifacts from California, the Middle East, Me- 
soamerica, the Southwest and Oceania. The well-equipped ar- 
chaeology lalxiratory, faunal collection and research library pro- 
vide facilities for research. Internships and classes in museum 
techniques are offered for students interested in museology. The 
museum publishes a series of Occasional Papers, administers an 
annual scholarship for archaeology students, houses the business 
office of the Society for California Archaeology, conducts studies 
on cultural resource management and is the clearing house for 
Orange County archaeology. The extensive collections are curat- 
ed by a certified museologist. 

Art Gallery 

Since 1963 the Art Gallery at California State University, Fuller- 
ton has brought to the campus carefully developed art exhibitions 
that instruct, inspire and challenge the student to the visual arts. 
Exhibitions of national interest and of museum caliber are pre- 
sented to the entire student body, faculty and to the community. 
These act not only as an educational tool but also create interac- 
tion between various departmental disciplines and between the 
campus and the community. In 1970 the Art Gallery was housed 
in its current permanent location within the Visual Arts Center. 
In the following years, the gallery has earned national visibility 
for its program in Museum Studies and Exhibition Design in 
which museum preprofessionals may obtain both conceptual and 
practical experience. 

Dance Repertory Theatre 

The Dance Repertory Theatre was formed in 1981 as a culminat- 
ing experience for selected students graduating from the Depart- 
ment of TTieatre and Dance. It offers recent graduating students 
in dance an opportunity to perform with a professionally oriented 
company, preparing them for their careers in dance. Dance Rep- 
ertory Theatre also permits the university’s distinguished dance 
faculty to continue their professional commitment through pub- 
lic performance. Dance Repertory Theatre members are carefully 
chosen, based upon their training in ballet and modern dance, to 
tour a repertory of established and original choreography. The 
company has toured extensively in southern California, the mid- 
west and Europe. 



Resources 59 



Daily Titan 

Cal State Fullerton’s Daily Titan is one of the largest college 
newspapers in California. In recent years, it has become one of 
the most critically successful, as well. 

The Titan earned first place among all college dailies in the state 
in 1987 and 1988 competitions sponsored by the California In- 
tercollegiate Press Association. In 1990, the TITAN won ClPA’s 
on-the-spot competition for the fourth consecutive year. 

The Titan is published every Tuesday through Friday throughout 
the academic year. It is produced, written and edited entirely by 
Cal State Fullerton students. All its photographic content is the 
work of CSUF students. 

The Daily Titan has a daily readership of more than 19,000. It is 
distributed at more than 40 locations on campus, as well as in 
newsracks near the University. 

Work on the Daily Titan provides intensive experience in news- 
writing, copy editing, page layout and the myriad other functions 
necessary to produce a modern daily newspaper. 

Dining & Vending Services 

Primary food service facilities on the campus are on the Universi- 
ty Center ground floor (the UC Food Court), and at the south- 
east corner of the campus, the campus Carl’s Jr. In addition to 
these primary facilities, there is a Pub serving Round Table Pizza, 
beer and wine on the basement level of the University Center. 
Catering for the university is the responsibility of Dining Ser- 
vices. 

Over 75 food and beverage vending machines are located at 
several areas on the campus to service the needs of the university. 
Prcxluct selection and prices are monitored by the University 
Food Service Committee. In addition, the vending program in- 
cludes payphones across the campus and laundry machines in the 
residence halls. 

Dining and Vending Services are operated by the California State 
University Fullerton Foundation. 

Fullerton Arboretum 

The Fullerton Arboretum is a 26-acre botanical garden — a 
living museum of plants — located at the northeast comer of the 
campus. It contains local historical artifacts in the Heritage 
House museum and horticultural collections that attract visitors 
from the University and the surrounding communities. The Ar- 
boretum is an island of serenity in an increasingly urban/metropo- 
litan environment. 

The Arboretum offers countless opportunities to study local his- 
tory and culture. Heritage House is the restored residence and 
medical office of Dr. George C. Clark, an Orange County pio- 


neer physician. The Clark home was built in 1894 and exempli- 
fies the Eastlake Victorian style of architecture. The house is 
listed in the National Register of Historic Places and the Inven- 
tory of California Historic Sites. It is also an Orange County 
Historic Site. It is open to the public by reservation. Trained 
docents discuss the period furnishings and memorabilia. Several 
student projects and studies have used this facility. 

The Arboretum grounds contain a recirculating waterfall, pond and 
stream system that is a focal point for migratory waterfowl and 
human visitors. Many plants are grown in groups according to their 
moisture requirements. Others form special collections such as co- 
nifers, palms and rare fruits. Special plant displays assist visitors in 
their selection of plant materials for urban landscaping. 

The CSUF Associated Students (AS) helped to initiate the Fuller- 
ton Arboretum by contributing*$ 10,000 in 1971. Since then, the 
AS have contributed support monies each year to hire students to 
help in the maintenance and operation of the Arboretum. 

The Friends of the Fullerton Arboretum, the community support 
group, also supplies operating monies, manages the gift and gar- 
den shop, propagates plants for plant sales and provides countless 
hours of volunteer effort in behalf of the Arboretum. 

The Fullerton Arboretum is open 8 a.m. to 4:45 p.m., seven days 
a week. The Arboretum is closed on Christmas, Thanksgiving 
and New Year’s Day. 

Herbarium 

The Faye A. MacFadden Herbarium is named after Faye A. 
MacFadden, who sold her extensive collection of plants to the 
university just prior to her death in 1964. The collection now 
includes over 2 5, OCX) vascular plants, about 12,000 bryophytes 
and nearly 800 lichen specimens. The plants are used as a re- 
search and teaching tool. 

Oral History Program 

The Oral History Program offers students courses, work experi- 
ence, and information about oral history. The program has con- 
ducted over 2,000 interviews on the history of Orange County, 
the western United States, and other areas of historical study. 
Either transcriptions or tapes are available for any student to use 
as they would use any library materials, at the Oral History 
Archive. 

Most of these interviews were done by students in the several 
classes offered at the (Dral History Program. The program also 
maintains a student staff through internships, work study or 
grant-supported positions. These staff receive experience in 
word-processing, editing, book production and organizational 
administration. They are credited with authorship or assistance 
on publications, and several alumni of the program now hold 
important professional positions. 


60 Resources 


Reading Clinic 

Education Classroom 24 
(714) 773-3356 

The Reading Clinic serves three major purposes. First, it provides 
a controlled, supervised setting for the training of reading spe- 
cialists and classroom teachers who wish to improve their skills in 
working with learning disabled and reading disabled students. 

Secondly, the clinic serves as a community service providing very 
low cost, high quality instruction in reading that is not available 
elsewhere in Orange County. TTe clinic works closely with the 
Southern California College of Optometry in order to provide 
broader services. 

The third purpose of the clinic is to provide parent education to 
community members whose children have reading disabilities. 
The clinic provides parent inservice sessions, a hot line for phone 
information, and a monthly newsletter of information, tips and 
examples of student work. The clinic is proud of its 20-year 
service to the university and community. 

Speech and Hearing Clinic 

The Speech and Hearing Clinic (SHC) is an integral part of the 
curricular programs of the university leading to a B. A. and M. A. 
Degree in Communicative Disorders. Since 1961 the Depart- 
ment of Speech Communication has provided speech, language 
and hearing services to the community in conjunction with its 
training program for professional speech pathologists. The gradu- 
ate program in Communicative Disorders holds the distinction of 
being one of only two academic programs in California to main- 
tain continuous accreditation by the Educational Standards 
Board of the American Speech-Language-Hearing Association 
since September 1969. 

The clinic is composed of a Speech Pathology Unit, an Audi- 
ology Unit and a Communicative Disorders Research Laboratory 
with special emphasis given to voice disorders. The clinic offers 
the services of a resident professional Speech Pathologist who 
holds the Certificate of Clinical Competence (CCC-SP), faculty 
supervisors who are clinically certified and, in addition, hold 
doctoral degrees in the field, and student clinicians who have met 
strictly prescribed standards for admission to clinical practicum. 
Referrals to the clinic come from a variety of sources including: 
physicians, teachers, rehabilitative centers, private speech pa- 
thologists and audiologists, and self-referrals. Services available 
at the clinic include: diagnostic evaluations, therapeutic inter- 
vention, audiometric testing, rehabilitative audiology including 
hearing aid evaluations, screening tests for students seeking state 
credentials, and family counseling relative to problems associated 
with communicative disorders. 

Theatre and Dance Department 
Productions 

The Department of Theatre and Dance produces six plays and 
two dance concerts each year on main stage along with theatre 
for young audiences, touring plays, master’s thesis productions. 


playwright workshops and original one-acts. CSUF students re- 
ceive rates to all Theatre and Dance Department productions. 
Ten of the last twelve entries in the National Kennedy Center/ 
American College Theatre Festival have been selected for pro- 
duction at the regional festivals, selected each year from over 75 
university entrants. In 1983, its production of The Bulldog and the 
Bear was selected from over 500 production entries to be pro- 
duced at the National Kennedy Center/American College The- 
atre Festival at the John F. Kennedy Center in Washington, D.C. 

Titan Shops Bookstore 

The Titan Shops Bookstore is located on the ground floor of the 
Commons Building directly east of the University Center and 
west of the Library. Its primary function is to service the textbook 
and school supply requirements of the students of the university. 
In addition to these items, however, the Titan Shops carries an 
extensive stock of office supplies, greeting cards and clothing 
items, a trade book department which encompasses 12,000 refer- 
ence and general interest books, a photocopy center and a gift 
department with an ever changing selection of items. Finally, the 
Titan Shops is engaged in the sale and repair of personal comput- 
ers at significant price reductions to encourage the use of comput- 
ers and development of computer literacy at the university. 

Titan Shops is operated by the California State University Fuller- 
ton Foundation. 

Undergraduate Reading Lab 

Education Classroom 249 and 18 

The Undergraduate Reading Lab/Professional Library is an essen- 
tial element in the Reading Program for both graduate and under- 
graduate students. It serves as a resource for materials and equip- 
ment by which undergraduate students can improve their reading 
skills and complete additional class assignments. The lab also 
functions as a liaison between faculty and students, as a diagnos- 
tic lab for required or additional assessment of student skills, and 
as a professional resource for graduate students and faculty. 

The lab has also offered services to special students from the 
Handicapped Center, Women’s Center and the Counseling Cen- 
ter. In addition, the development of a professional library and the 
recent donation of material from the Reading Educators Guild 
aids graduate students in their research and course work. Finally, 
a goal of this lab is to develop a base of software materials for both 
classroom and individual student use. 

University Channel 

As part of two local cable television agreements covering the 
cities of Fullerton, Placentia and Anaheim, the university pro- 
vides programming for dedicated channels on those systems. In 
January 1981, regular production of programs about Cal State 
Fullerton and Orange County in general was begun. Students in 
senior level communications and theatre courses participate in a 
variety of programming efforts for the university cable channel. 


Resources 61 



^ -V .;• i '.rr’^^^^;^.. !»d5 Jt mV'M) 



- • • - > ■ 'snaU’^^eM ''^<}orf0' 'f wtfF 

.'»(1J V,. ’■\.’|i'^#^'V^'‘,: ?:■' J"^' ■ A'''j^i>iii:irA^^^^<}Ak'^i!Tt^. 

L.rlii 1 A'j:;/)' t^fT^r x/lJ-ii'' ^tei^ldb wii t^^n^'frunS^ 
rioiiHuj} vii?mnq a! viKV'fU 5 H 1 

v'^irt^^inujfh >0 'jrft lip W'5rrrjjiyjp-n ^,'^.tf>^: Ijfjife 

\tf7^j'^(}Tf ,8rtiSV^Hf Vi) 

?fc\Ab- 

’•? r^^if^/ :jm/wr!<j<|r3fo slood abtiJ r .iin^ji 
f. t 'i.?> V<yr%oK»ffqt £ ,j*>tfKxf If-nsnag bnjii ^no 

. f!f iy V>.'fi^;hb'i>i*S»?.^ 

••^ yq;at<y ' i rM 

''^<fr'TT#y:)'^r^^^ ^ etp 

.pin's * am *j/ij in y%'.}t^iil laiUfinioD V.' hn£ n‘j 

Dining V<oTf:<iinj: 

ry C'4'v.. ■ ■/■ ;jr',>vy>^.-> ih->: {9^ - \ k vli. 

' J' ' •■' ;. ,■' ■’"•■ ■;: ri, '■ . ^ ■’,„>■* ;-'w>i\ 

^ ' ; d fe'il ;;giij^£JS '05 Ji»B 

'1, . ■ 

‘ /< yi£idij knoje^tor'l'td^d ^niihsfi ^fiT 

• iM:>in> tt/fi /bt id idi n snibe^JT :>H3 :ii irr^mal^ Ifiii 

c ’ -9r^,j[fO‘nj toi kn 



-iii^ Dr,6 ywdil iRf!Oif^k.‘'Kj Jourvnqribvsb -jfb .AOiJiiiHS nJ h*r^ 
pi'iivX^iMlitii.ibH iwrh khajEin.V* flon-inrab 

Jlili^liTwfc^rvS iv i>icii^,#6:^ ^bjfe 

•:^mj>iiy* ccuthhip l.x d vUU?i*rts n Ui'» - 

’ •.^^,- ..un ‘picisvi/tU 



:": ;■ r'^.' X- -'^ 

?V1^* ^“--V- ■ > „ ,-i /t„ a?,. 

try;-:: ;->A-.’ ■•A-Vi -.v- •• • ' |»6tii2(^'jt^{G^ 

^ ; ■^ r - . ■ '-fv- . .w 

'll) i » f? 

n?VdfH? brwj sJifileio 

Wd^i^Tf', fcvi£ Wd^ait yrtj^'rfir^ -litw gni3^iov/ 


■'.k! ;‘ ^ 


-•■ V-' /•jC’l.y -v,. '>-v'.Kvc;.-, .', ,.;,‘C^' .‘f -;.k!;‘ 

r^vT?^{W» 

A' ^i!i?;oBy?KW .:s^ith .yiniy|j ni '^iidw^dd 


V:J-v> ^ •■ -V'i-. 't :-::-I'- ■S4::;-‘<‘u...fe. yv ’M rf:.i;» Ij r\d?^ . _ 

cv ifTiiiinsjbts jnmq ^>b^aK| m ; .>inti!:-> to Odocfiui; L’t’d) a^fl* 
v-wi ; >^v.^d ‘nidjhdj' 

lod t ,ec»:i^w )aoi^4id siiT 

ku V •:. ' -rvv ^if i\>iJlkfmdWii 

vmyy h 1 , A: :> r!T >tfr;b*ri»«c i. *•;<!} qrrjftXiJi 

.73iTU/rj\^©:i biT3& yliftwinu aHj 05 $:>ivi3?. 

^aimoH batx lio^^qc 

\'ur^'^\sb^ Oft 

'/A *M Sdi; - c 'oi j:-\ :rt^ > ti'ib 'aifc q iakr->iT«i:> 

f rA:'i x.*>wH ^viJ«:>trtiumrnor) ni 

inWrt 

®ar /h>/r :> nr^r ^T'fed h?^ 

■■d)bj8^‘ iW ^r, '4 1 iotvxt'- hi iojf;’!»k?tq loi uisn^^ > iq jjtjtni£ih 

‘{Oi^oniTi b n^fcfiopiCi ^tvhfc^iaufijmiOnt 

j JfejjnvfK^r'TM^cQ n».«o,Wf«q ^/n5f)co<s fjvrJ y\no\y :»ftfy^mid 
^di fToi3filib^:f3:>c <.utAi/ibno^ 

\&h7sb6Q 

V K. . ^>r' -TV:* . • ' 1 »:i*tte 





v^jov 03 na»vt^ aJefi/fcfm^ iiiiVKj?‘r6)w 
odw AvirhiS fnsf/^ l4ti;.-» svjixtry^ -?Ji!»biwi s »om3« srb 
^3nuixtnKK> lfi>jniIO to m^iliiiO ^fb dblod 
^ 9ifi orfw rK><tf\rtiKii;« 


xnuomfciq or ncteriiT*? > ' aoiebas^ti t^in:^€Siq vn^jm. 

ii ido;! .^nco‘:imi::i‘3ji^?& 

dhjyrnoit^ii^ 

4}«^ j^oirmw ,?^obBL»l€‘/^ bffi 5ifJnfi9/i 

i>53isiix^ wc!ifdcnq C3 ^vbalan ^n:i9«nuo^yIi/nfc^ bi^a ,^i£h^5b9^:> 

V.! y^; o| vrwvic'.^? . v:. 


j'V-rcif -•^T 


rio^t^.r, 'i^x:,t\. 


tilsfiibfiqigQ biiK ^BdrfT 

jraiil- jiiiys itt.-. -r ;1 . • :-i,-' (■.•.;e! .- ::..i:>;r:.': ^ 

■viv>3i-t«>C«,5..-v^. K,;k , i,. •5 ,8ft0rt3ifib0*t^ 

'■5i)tiift'rG?^'|holfe‘!^Si^}kfn' ft</'iS;;V’‘rfSK9 KrSbiyift Swtt&'jiiJl 

,to:wisibufi 5jnii*)y lol 













e 






(^0^ i^M /: gc>*^ 

£ii<>^ ^ e«^ Academ ic Advi sement ^ ^ \M ^ 


e«^ i,^e<» 


0 ^^ ,,e^ 

eoi^^ 'i^e^ 


yU^*' 












eai>^ , , 6 ^*^ 


eat<M'"',...e<>^, 


t<M^ I .e«^, 












, Ca*^ ,>f' 
PrJi<M pjo^ 1^0^: 




e 


® e«iaM ,^G>^ 




Academic Advisement 


Academic Advisement Policy 

The CSUF Academic Policy (UPS 300.CX32) states that; 

— the responsibility for ensuring the availability of academ- 
ic advisement rests with each school dean; 

— every student should declare a major or school of interest 
as soon as pt^ssible after admission to the university; and 

— all students shall confer with an academic adviser on a 
regular basis. 

Choosing General Education 
Courses and Electives 

In keeping with the liberal arts tradition, the university requires 
its graduates to have sampled a variety of disciplines as part of 
their general education. The broad categories of general educa- 
tion courses are presented in the catalog section on “General 
Education.” 

All students are strongly encouraged to consult with major advis- 
ers or the Academic Advisement Center about choice of general 
education and elective courses. 

Advisement in the Major 

Students who have declared a major should consult their depart- 
mental adviser on a regular basis for academic advice. 

Advisement for Students Who 
Have Not Selected a Major 

Students who have not declared a major should consult one of 
the school advisement offices listed below or the Academic Ad- 
visement Center to discuss their academic goals. 

School Advisement Offices 

Students who have declared a school of interest or who wish to 
explore the majors offered by a specific school should contact the 
appropriate school advisement office: 

School of the Arts Office of the Dean 

Visual Arts 199 
(714) 773-3256 

School of Business Business Advising Center 

Administration Langsdorf Hall 700 

and Economics (714) 773-2211 



64 Academic Advisement 


School of Communications 


School of Engineering 
and Computer Science 


School of Human 
Development And 
Community Service 

School of Humanities and 
Social Sciences 


Office of the 
Associate Dean 
Education Classroom 46 
(714) 773-3355 

Office of the 
Associate Dean 
Engineering 100-D 
(714) 773-3362 

Office of the 
Associate Dean 
Education Classroom 325 
(714) 773-3311 

Office of Student 
Academic Affairs 
McCarthy Hall 103 
(714) 773-2024 


To help students, the University has available a number of useful 
resources: New Student Orientation conducted in June and No- 
vember; summary sheets on majors available from department 
offices or the Academic Advisement Center; a variety of counsel- 
ing and testing services provided by the Career Development 
Center; and brochures and manuals from school and department 
offices describing their programs of study and later work opportu- 
nities. There are student organizations with disciplinary and pro- 
fessional interests and a Career Development Center which has 
information on vocations and work opportunities to help in the 
selection of a major. 

The task of selecting a major (and often a minor or other comple- 
mentary specialization) becomes one of crystallizing ideas on the 
basis of experiences in specific courses, discussions with other 
students, faculty, the staff of the Academic Advisement Center, 
etc. The option to take a limited number of courses on a Cre- 
dit/No Credit basis often will help students explore new interests. 


School of Natural Office of 

Science and Mathematics Academic Affairs 

McCarthy Hall 166 
(714) 773-2638 

Academic Advisement Center 

Humanities 112 

(714) 773^3606 

The Academic Advisement Center provides guidance in the 
selection of elective and general education courses. It is the 
administrative center for undeclared undergraduate majors. All 
problems encountered by the undeclared major, which normally 
require the assistance of a department chair, are handled by the 
director of the Academic Advisement Center. 

No appointment is necessary to engage the assistance of an advis- 
er about various aspects of academic life at the university. For 
more specific information about the office, the student should 
consult the class schedule. 

Undeclared Majors 

Lower division students who are uncertain about their primary 
educational or vocational goals may enroll as undeclared majors. 
However, they should select the School which most closely re- 
flects their general interests and consult that Schools advisement 
office for academic assistance. During their freshman and sopho- 
more years, such students should explore their interests and po- 
tential by enrolling in a set of courses recommended by the 
School adviser. 


Students must plan freshman or sophomore programs which will 
permit them to enter or take advanced courses in fields they may 
want to pursue. They should be sure to begin or complete require- 
ments such as mathematics, chemistry or a foreign language early 
in their academic careers. Students anticipating graduate or pro- 
fessional study should exercise special care in planning under- 
graduate programs and seek faculty counseling in the field of 
interest. Advance examination of the possibilities of graduate or 
professional study will be helpful to students who have clear 
educational and vocational objectives. 

Those whose goals and objectives have not yet crystallized will 
have opportunities to take courses in various fields and make up 
their minds during their lower division work. They should, how- 
ever, take full advantage of the opportunities that exist on and 
outside the campus to learn more about available fields of study 
and occupational fields. 

Planning a Major Program 

When students have selected a major field, they should study all 
the requirements which are specified in this catalog under their 
chosen degree program. They should make a tentative semester 
by semester plan for completing the requirements including pre- 
requisites and discuss this plan with an adviser in the major. 

In addition to courses in the major department, related courses in 
other fields and supporting courses in basic skills may also be 
required. These should be included in the tentative semester by 
semester plan. 


Choosing an Undergraduate Major 

Every student should choose a major by the beginning of the 
junior year so that he or she may complete major requirements in 
an orderly way. 


Some departments require placement tests prior to admission to 
classes. The times and places for such tests are given in the class 
schedule. Students should purchase a copy of the class schedule 
at the Titan Bookstore when registration for classes begins. 


Academic Advisement 65 


Change of Major, Degree or 
Credential Objective 

To change a major, degree, or credential objective, obtain the 
required form in the Office of Admissions and Records and take it 
to the appropriate office(s) for signature(s). Such a change is not 
official until the form has been signed and filed in the Registrar’s 
Office. 

Departmental Academic 
Advisement 

Each department follows the advisement system which it finds 
the most appropriate for its majors. 

It is the responsibility of the student to obtain the assistance of an 
academic adviser. 

The adviser is a resource persc:)n who can provide information and 
suggestions and who can assist the student to find the most 
desirable ways to meet the requirements for graduation and for 
the major or credential. The final choice of courses and the 
respt^nsibility for the program lies with the student. Undergrad- 
uate students who have not yet decided upon a major (undeclared 
majors) or who are not seeking a degree will be advised in the 
Academic Advisement Center. 

Academic program advisers are able to offer better advice if 
students provide lists of courses they have taken and their own 
copies of transcripts from colleges previously attended (if students 
are new to Cal State Fullerton). 

Graduate students will be assigned a major adviser in their fields 
of specialization, except in education where all will have a profes- 
sional adviser from the School of Human Development and 
Community Service. Those students seeking a credential for 
teaching in secondary schoc^ls will be assigned both a professional 
and a major adviser. 

Preprofessional Programs 

The academic programs of the university provide appropriate 
preparation for graduate work in a variety of fields. Students who 
have made tentative decisions about institutions at which they 
may wish to pursue graduate work should consult the catalogs of 
those graduate schools as they plan their undergraduate pro- 
grams. Students planning to undertake graduate work should 
supplement their undergraduate programs by anticipating re- 
quirements at major graduate schools. 

The university offers a number of professional programs through 
the master’s degree. These include programs in the fine arts, 
business administration, communications, education, engineer- 
ing, health education and physical education and recreation, 
public administration, and speech pathology- audiolog>'. Students 


interested in preparing for professional careers in these areas, 
either here or at other educational institutions, are encouraged to 
seek assistance and guidance from CSUF faculty members in 
these fields. 


Prelegal Preparation 

It is recommended that prospective law students prepare them- 
selves in such fields as English, American history, economics, 
political science (particularly the history and development of 
English and American political institutions) and such undergrad- 
uate courses as judicial process, administrative law, constitutional 
law and international law, philosophy (particularly ethics and 
logic), business administration, anthropology, psychology and 
sociology. 


A distribution of course sequences among the social sciences, the 
natural sciences and the humanities is desirable. Students with 
interest in becoming lawyers should contact the Prelaw Adviser. 
Some faculty members in the School of Business Administration 
and Economics and Departments of American Studies, History 
and Political Science, also can provide advice and assistance. 


Pretheological 

Students who might be interested in pursuing careers in the 
ministry, the teaching of religion, and associated fields should 
take some courses in religion, psychology, anthropology, sociolo- 
gy, philosophy, education, communications, history, English, 
speech communication and a foreign language. Students desiring 
assistance and counseling regarding advanced work in religious 
studies or professional careers in the ministry or rabbinate may 
seek help from the faculty in the Department of Religious Stud- 
ies. 


Social Welfare 

Students who plan to seek employment in social work or social 
welfare should prepare themselves in the fields of human services, 
psychology (particularly child and adolescent psychology), soci- 
ology, anthropology, political science, economics and research 
methods in social science. 


Students who intend to enter a professional school following 
undergraduate training should learn about the specific prerequi- 
sites for admission to the graduate school of their choice. Ordi- 
narily a major in one of the social sciences, and some additional 
work in at least several other social sciences, are recommended. 
Students with interests in pursuing careers in the fields of social 
welfare should contact the Department of Sociology or the Hu- 
man Services Program for advice and assistance. 


66 Academic Advisement 


Health Professions 

Langsdorf Hall 203 
(714) 773^3980 

All health professions programs are seeking the best qualified 
applicants with a good command of communication skills, rigor- 
ous basic science preparation, and as broad a general education 
base as possible. 

The Health Professions Office assists students in preparing the 
best academic programs consistent with their former educational 
experience, interests and professional objectives. We continue to 
be concerned about the under-representation of minority stu- 
dents entering the health care professions. Thus, minority stu- 
dents are actively recruited, and every effort is made to assist 
them in achieving their goals. 

Student Responsibility 

All new students, both first-time freshmen and transfer students, 
interested in preparing to enter one of the following health pro- 
fessions, should register with the secretary of the committee, in 


the Health Professions Office: medicine, osteopathic medicine, 
podiatric medicine, veterinary medicine, chiropractic, clinical 
pharmacy, pharmacology, dentistry, and optometry. 

Related health professions include anatomist, dental hygienist, 
histologist, medical technologist, nutritionist, occupational 
therapist, orthotist-prosthetist, pharmacologist, physical thera- 
pist, physiologist, public health and physician’s assistant. 

Health Professions Committee 

The committee assists the student to (a) gain a clinical experi- 
ence with a practicing professional in the area appropriate to the 
field of interest; (b) select a list of professional schools to which 
there is a likelihood of admission; (c) prepare professional school 
applications; and (d) prepare for an admissions interview. 

Students who receive a favorable Health Professions Committee 
review of their academic records and personal qualifications, 
including commitment and motivation, have a committee letter 
prepared for them in support of their application. 


Academic Advisement 67 


Answers To Your Questions 


TOPIC 

Academic Appeals 
Add or Drt)p a Class 
Address Change 
Admissions/Applications 
Advisement: 

Undeclared Major 
Declared Majors 
Athletics Tickets/Passport 
Child Care 
Counseling: 

Personal 

VcKational 

Degree Application/Diploma Orders 
Degree Evaluation, Undergraduate 
Disabled Student Services 
Disqualification/Reinstatement 
Emergency Messages 
Employment: 

Business, Industry, 

Government 
Educational 
Minority Relations 
Student (Part-Time) 

Staff 

Enrollment Verification: 

Duplicate l.D. Card or Fee Receipt 
Letter Request 
Extension Class Information 
Evaluations/General Education 
Financial Aid 
Foreipi Student: 

Advisement 
Permits to Register 
Graduate Studies 

Graduation Requirements (undergraduate) 
Fiealth Insurance 
Housing and Transportation 
Internships and Cooperative Ed. 

Library Information 
Mentor Program 
Name Change 
Organizations & Clubs 

Outreach Services 
Parking: 

Fees 

Information 
Handicapped 
Readmission 
Records (Student) 

Registration Fees 

Residency 

Scholarships 

Student Academic Services 
(EOP/SAA/Retention) 

Summer Sessions, Information 
Test Information 
Transcripts 
Transpc^rtation 

(Employee Rideshare) 

Tutoring 

Veterans Certification 
Women s Center 


WHERE TO GO 
Academic Appeals Office 
See Class Schedule 
Admissions &. Records Counter 
Admissions & Records Cbunter 

Academic Advisement C^enter 
Major Department 
Athletic Ticket Office 
Child Care Center 

Counseling Service-Health Center 
Career Development Center 
Graduation Unit 
Graduation Unit 

Office of Disabled Student Services 

Admissions Counselor 

Vice President for Student Services 

Career Development (Denter 

Career Development Center 
Career Development (Center 
Career Development Center 
Personnel Services 

Cashier 

Admissions &. Records Counter 
Extended Education Office 
Evaluations Unit 
Financial Aid Office 

Major Department 
International Education Office 
Graduate Studies Office 
Graduation Unit 
University Center 
Housing Office 
Internship Office 
Library Building 
Engineering Building 
Admissions & Records Counter 
University Activities Center 
University Center 
University Outreach Office 

C^ashier 

Department of Public Safety 
Disabled Student Services 
Admissions &. Records (Counter 
Records Office 
Cashier 

Evaluations Unit 

Financial Aid Office 

Student Academic Services Office 

Extended Education Office 
Testing Center 

Admissions Records Counter 
Department of Public Safety 

Learning Assistance Resource Center 
Veterans Affairs Office 
Women’s Center 


LOCATION 

TELEPHONE 

Langsdorf Hall-810 

773-3221 


773-2300 

Landgsdorf Hall-Lobby 

773-2300 

Langsdorf Hall-Lobby 

773-2300 

Humanities- 1 12 

773-3606 

Physical Education- 122 

773-2783 

Temporary- 200 

773-2961 

Health (Denter 

773-2800 

Langsdorf Hall- 208 

773-3121 

Langsdorf Hall- 1 1 OB 

773-2300 

Langsdorf Hall- HOB 

773-2300 

Library- 1 13 

773-3117 

Langsdorf Hall- 107 

773-2370 

Langsdorf Hall-810 

773-3221 

Langsdorf Hall-208 

773-3121 

Langsdorf Hall- 208 

773-3121 

Langsdorf Hall-208 

773-3121 

Langsdorf Hall- 208 

773-3121 

Temporary- 14 

773-3121 

Langsdorf Hall- 108 

773-3918 

Langsdorf Hall-Lobby 

773-2300 

Temporary- 14 

773-2611 

Langsdorf Hall- 11 OB 

773-2300 

McCarthy Hall-63 

773-3125 

McCarthy Hall-79 

773-2787 

McCarthy Hall- 129 

773-2618 

Langsdorf Hall- 11 OB 

773-2300 

U.C. Lobby 

773-2468 

Cypress- 101 

773-2168 

Langsdorf Hall-210 

773-2171 

Library Lobby 

773-2724 

Engineering- 100 

773-3709 

Langsdorf Hall-Lobby 

773-2300 

U.C. 2-43 

773-3211 

Library-22 

773-2086 

Langsdorf Hall- 108 

773-3918 

Temporary- 12(X) 

773-2903 

Librar>’-113 

773-3117 

Langsdorf Hall-Lobby 

773-2300 

Langsdorf Hall-1 lOA 

773-2300 

Langsdorf Hall- 108 

773-3918 

Langsdorf Hall- 105 

773-2300 

McCarthy Hall-63 

773-3125 

Humanities- 1 13 

773-2288 

Temporary- 14 

773-2611 

Langsdorf Hall-206 

773-3838 

Langsdorf Hall-Lobby 

773-2300 

Temporary- 1200 

773-3082 

Library-38 

773-3488 

Langsdorf Hall-1 lOA 

773-2300 

McCarthy Hall-33 

773-3928 


68 Academic Advisement 




7atM , 
0al^ 



g(ii<M 







.jM . ,G<jl^ 

.<«*>• tVu 

3>Mf 

Gal^ I ,ea^ 


Admissions 






. Q,<^ .^( 








gal^M e«^ 



Pal>^ 


<,e«^;*M7 e^ ,M 


e*«“,:,^<*,>.< 










^ G<^ , L^e 




+ /J 


lix# 


/)> 





Undergraduate Students 

Freshmen Requirements 

You will qualify for regular admission as a first-time freshman if 
you 

1. are a high school graduate, 

2. have a qualifiable eligibility index (see Eligibility Index Table 
next page) and 

3. have completed with grades of C or better the courses in the 
comprehensive pattern of college preparatory subject require- 
ments: 

English: 4 years 

Mathematics, 3 years: algebra, geometry, and intermediate 
algebra 

U.S. History or U.S. history and government: 1 year 

Science, 1 year with laboratory: biology, chemistry, physics, or 
other acceptable laboratory science 

Foreign Language: 2 years in the same language (may be waived 
for applicants who demonstrate competence in a language 
other than English equivalent to or higher than expected of 
students who complete two years of foreign language study) 

Visual and Performing Arts, 1 year: art, dance, drama/ theater, 
or music 

Electives, 3 years: selected from English, advanced mathemat- 
ics, social science, history, laboratory science, foreign lan- 
guage, visual and performing arts, and agriculture 

Eligibility Index 

The eligibility index is the combination of your high school grade 
point average and your test score on either the American College 
Test (ACT) or the Scholastic Aptitude Test (SAT). For this 
purpose we compute your grade point average on your final three 
years of high school studies, excluding physical education and 
military science, and use bonus points for certain honors courses. 

(see “High School Honors Courses” in this section of the cata- 
log.) CSUF may offer you early, provisional admission based on 
your work completed through the junior year of high school and 
planned for your senior year. 



70 Admissions 


Eligibility Index Table for California High School Graduates or Residents of California 


A.C.T. S.A.T. 
G.P.A. Score Score 
3.00 and above 
qualifies with any score 


2.99 

10 

410 

2.98 

10 

420 

2.97 

10 

430 

2.96 

11 

440 

2.95 

11 

440 

2.94 

11 

450 

2.93 

11 

460 

2.92 

11 

470 

2.91 

12 

480 

2.90 

12 

480 

2.89 

12 

490 

2.88 

12 

500 

2.87 

12 

510 

2.86 

13 

520 

2.85 

13 

520 

2.84 

13 

530 

2.83 

13 

540 

2.82 

13 

550 

2.81 

14 

560 

2.80 

14 

560 


A.C.T. S.A.T. 


G.P.A. 

Score 

Score 

2.79 

14 

570 

2.78 

14 

580 

2.77 

14 

590 

2.76 

15 

600 

2.75 

15 

600 

2.74 

15 

610 

2.73 

15 

620 

2.72 

15 

630 

2.71 

16 

640 

2.70 

16 

640 

2.69 

16 

650 

2.68 

16 

660 

2.67 

16 

670 

2.66 

17 

680 

2.65 

17 

680 

2.64 

17 

690 

2.63 

17 

700 

2.62 

17 

710 

2.61 

18 

720 

2.60 

18 

720 

2.59 

18 

730 


A.C.T. S.A.T. 


G.P.A. 

Score 

Score 

2.58 

18 

740 

2.57 

18 

750 

2.56 

19 

760 

2.55 

19 

760 

2.54 

19 

770 

2.53 

19 

780 

2.52 

19 

790 

2.51 

20 

800 

2.50 

20 

800 

2.49 

20 

810 

2.48 

20 

820 

2.47 

20 

830 

2.46 

21 

840 

2.45 

21 

840 

2.44 

21 

850 

2.43 

21 

860 

2.42 

21 

870 

2.41 

21 

880 

2.40 

22 

880 

2.39 

22 

890 

2.38 

22 

900 


G.P.A. 

A.C.T. 

Score 

S.A.T. 

Score 

2.37 

22 

910 

2.36 

23 

920 

2.35 

23 

920 

2.34 

23 

930 

2.33 

23 

940 

2.32 

23 

950 

2.31 

24 

960 

2.30 

24 

960 

2.29 

24 

970 

2.28 

24 

980 

2.27 

24 

990 

2.26 

25 

1000 

2.25 

25 

1000 

2.24 

25 

1010 

2.23 

25 

1020 

2.22 

25 

1030 

2.21 

26 

1040 

2.20 

26 

1040 

2.19 

26 

1050 

2.18 

26 

1060 

2.17 

26 

1070 


G.P.A. 

A.C.T. 

Score 

S.A.T. 

Score 

2.16 

27 

1080 

2.15 

27 

1080 

2.14 

27 

1090 

2.13 

27 

1100 

2.12 

27 

1110 

2.11 

28 

1120 

2.10 

28 

1120 

2.09 

28 

1130 

2.08 

28 

1140 

2.07 

28 

1150 

2.06 

29 

1160 

2.05 

29 

1160 

2.04 

29 

1170 

2.03 

29 

1180 

2.02 

29 

1190 

2.01 

30 

1200 

2.00 

30 

1200 


Below 2.00 does not 
qualify for regular 
admission 


You can calculate the index by multiplying your grade point 
average by 800 and adding your total score on the SAT. Or, if you 
took the ACT, multiply your grade point average by 200 and add 
ten times the composite score from the ACT. If you are a Califor- 
nia high school graduate (or a legal resident of California for 
tuition purposes), you need a minimum index of 2800 using the 
SAT or 694 using the ACT; the table above shows the combina- 
tions of test scores and averages required. 

If you neither graduated from a California high school nor are a 
legal resident of California for tuition purposes, you need a mini- 
mum index of 3402 (SAT) or 842 (ACT). 

Applicants with grade-point averages above 3. (X) (3.60 for non- 
residents) are exempt from the test requirement. However, stu- 
dents are urged to take the SAT or ACT since campuses use test 
results for advisement and placement purposes. 

You will qualify for regular admission to programs not impacted 
(See “Impacted Programs” in the Application Procedure section 
of this catalog) when the university verifies that you have a 
qualifiable eligibility index and that you will have completed the 
comprehensive pattern of 1 5 college preparatory units. A unit is 
one year of study in high school. 

Transfer Requirements 

You will qualify for admission as a transfer student if you have a 
grade point average of 2.0 (C) or better in all transferable units 
attempted, are in good standing at the last college or university 
attended, and meet the following standard: 

(a) you will meet the freshman admission requirements in ef- 
fect for the term to which you are applying 


(b) you were eligible as a freshman at the time of high school 
graduation and have been in continuous attendance in an 
accredited college since high school graduation 

(c) were eligible as a freshman except for the college preparato- 
ry subjects and have completed appropriate college courses 
in the missing subjects and have been in continuous atten- 
dance in an accredited college since high school graduation 

(d) you have completed at least 56 transferable semester (84 
quarter) units and have completed appropriate college 
courses to make up any missing subjects in college prepara- 
tory courses. (Nonresidents must have a 2.4 grade point 
average or better. ) 

Transferable courses are those designated for baccalaureate credit 
by the college or university offering the course. 

High School Honors Courses 

Grades in up to eight semester courses, taken in the last two years 
of high school, that are designated honors in approved subjects 
receive additional points in grade point average calculations. 
Each unit of A in an approved courses will receive a total of 5 
points; B, 4 points; C, 3 points. 

International Baccalaureate Program 

California State University, Fullerton recognizes the high scho- 
lastic quality of the International Baccalaureate Diploma Pro- 
gram. High school graduates who have participated in the pro- 
gram are encouraged to apply for admission, and those who have 
received the International Baccalaureate Diploma will be given 


Admissions 71 



special consideration for admission. Advanced placement and/or 
university credit for International Baccalaureate subject exami- 
nations may be awarded at the discretion of individual depart- 
ments. 

For example for a grade of 4 or better, the Departments of Foreign 
Language and Mathematics award credit in the following man- 
ner: 

Foreign Languages. Subject to a successful oral interview with two 
CSUF instructors of the target languages, and upon their recom- 
mendation: 

Higher Level Language B: 

— Waiver of appropriate lower division requirements 
^ 3 to 12 units of upper division language credit 

Subsidiary Level Language B: 

— waiver of appropriate lower division requirements 

— 0 to 6 upper division language credit (if 0 upper division is 
awarded, a minimum of 6 units of 200 level credit is 
recommended.) 

Mathematics 

Higher level 

— two semesters of Calculus (Math 1 50A and Math 150B) 
Subsidiary level 

— one semester of Calculus Math 150A or equivalent 

Health Screening 

All new and readmitted students bc^rn after January 1, 1957, will 
be notified of the requirement to present proof of measles and 
rubella immunizations. This is not an admissions requirement, 
but shall be required of students by the beginning of their second 
term of enrollment in CSU. Proof of measles and rubella immu- 
nizations shall also be required for certain groups of enrolled 
students who have increased exposure to these diseases. 

Measles and Rubella Immunizations 

The campus shall notify certain students born after January 1, 
1957, of the CSU requirement to present proof of measles and 
rubella immunizations by the beginning of the second term of 
enrollment. At the beginning of the next term of enrollment, 
those so notified who have not presented acceptable proof of the 
immunizations shall be notified further of the need to comply 
before receiving registration materials to enroll for the succeed- 
ing term. 

Persons subject to these health screening provisions include: 
New students enrolling fall 1986 and later; 

Readmitted students reenrolling fall 1986 and later; 


Students who reside in campus residence halls; 

Students who obtained their primary and secondary school- 
ing outside the United States; 

Students enrolled in dietetics, medical technology, nursing, 
physical therapy, and any practicum, student teaching, or 
field work involving preschool-age children, school-age 
children, or taking place in a hospital or health care setting. 
(Campuses may modify the list of types of study in this 
reference as appropriate to their curricula. ) 

The Student Health Center shall provide immunizations without 
cost to those students unable to obtain acceptable proof of 
immunizations. 

Test Scores 

Freshmen and transfer applicants who have fewer than 56 semes- 
ter or 84 quarter units of transferable college credit must submit 
scores, unless exempt (See “Eligibility Index” section), from ei- 
ther the Scholastic Aptitude Test (SAT) of the College Board or 
the American College Testing program (ACT). If you are apply- 
ing to an impacted program and are required to submit test scores, 
you should take the test no later than early December if applying 
for fall admission. Test scores are also used for advising and 
placement purposes. Registration forms and dates for the SAT or 
ACr are available from school or college counselors or from a 
CSU campus testing office. Or, you may write to or call: 

The College Board (SAT) American College Testing Program (ACT) 
Registration Unit, Bt^x 592 Registration Unit, PO. Box 168 

Princeton, New Jersey 08541 Iowa City, Iowa 52240 

(609) 771-7588 (319) 337-1270 

TOEFL Requirement 

All undergraduate applicants regardless of citizenship who have 
not attended schools at the secondary level or above for at least 
three years full-time where English is the principal language of 
instruction must present a score of 500 or above on the Test of 
English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL). The TOEFL results 
submitted must not have been earned more than two years prior 
to the desired enrollment date. A minimum score of 500 on the 
Test of English as a Foreign Language is required. Individual 
campuses may require a higher score. 

Placement Test Requirements 

The CSU requires new students to be tested in English and 
mathematics after they are admitted. These are not admission 
tests, but a way to determine whether you are prepared for college 
work and, if not, to counsel you how to strengthen your prepara- 
tion. You might be exempted from one or both of the tests if you 
have scored well on other specified tests or completed appropriate 
courses. 


7 2 Admissions 


English Placement Test (EPT) 

The English Placement Test (EPT) is required of all entering 
California State University undergraduate students who are not 
otherwise exempt. Exemptions are granted only for those stu- 
dents who present proof of having met one of the following 
criteria: 

• a score of 25 or above on the ACTE (Enhanced) English Test 
(taken October 1989 or later) 

• a score of 3, 4 or 5 on either the Language and Composition or 
the Composition and Literature examination of the College 
Board Advanced Placement Program 

• a satisfactory score on the CSU English Equivalency Exami- 
nation that qualifies a student for exemption from the English 
Placement Test 

• a score of 470 or above on the Verbal section of the College 
Board Scholastic Aptitude Test (SAT-Verbal) 

• a score of 22 or above on the ACT English Usage Test (taken 
prior to October 1989) 

• a score of 600 or above on the College Board Achievement 
Test in English Composition with essay 

• completion of an acceptable college course in English compo- 
sition of four quarter or three semester units with a grade ofC 
or better 

California State University, Fullerton (CSUF) has established 
the following policy regarding compliance with this regulation: 

All new and continuing undergraduate students who have not 
taken the EPT and who are not otherwise exempt must take the 
test prior to the beginning of their second semester of enrollment 
at L^SUE Students can only take the EPT exam once. Students 
who fail to comply with this policy shall be placed on administra- 
tive probation in their next semester of enrollment at Fullerton. 
Students on probation for this reason who do not take the EPT 
prior to the beginning of their third semester of enrollment at 
CSUF will be administratively disqualified from enrolling until 
they take the EPT. 

Students who have taken the EPTexam but have not been placed 
in English 101 must remediate their English skills by taking 
Developmental Writing. Students who fail to comply with this 
policy will be placed on administrative probation prior to the 
beginning of the next semester of enrollment. 

Entry Level Mathematics (ELM) Test 

The (ELM) examination tests for entry level mathematics skills 
acquired through three years of rigorous college preparatory 
mathematics coursework (normally Algebra 1, Algebra 11 and 
Geometry). All new undergraduate students must take the test or 
be exempted from it prior to placement in appropriate university 
mathematics coursework. Specific policies regarding retesting 


and placement will be determined by the campus. Exemptions 
from the test are given only to those students who can present 
proof of one of the following: 

• a score of 3 or above on the College Board Advanced Place- 
ment Mathematics examination (AB or BC) 

• a score of 560 or above on the Mathematics section of the 
Scholastic Aptitude Test (SAT-Math) 

• a score of 27 or above on the American College Test (ACT) 
Mathematics Test (taken prior to October 1989) 

• A score of 28 or abcwe on the Enhanced Act Mathematics 
Test (taken October 1989 or later) 

• a score of 560 or abnwe on the College Board Math Achieve- 
ment Test, Level 1 or Level 2 

• completion and transfer to the CSU of a college course that 
satisfies the General Education-Breadth Requirement or the 
Intersegmental General Education Transfer Curriculum re- 
quirement in Quantitative Reasoning, provided such course 
was completed with a grade of C or better. 

The ELM test is offered only to admitted students and has no 
effect on admission decisions, but it must be taken and passed 
before the student can enroll in any course that satisfies the 
Mathematical Concepts and Quantitative Reasoning portion of 
the General Education- Breadth requirements. 

California State University, Fullerton (CSUF) established the 
following policy regarding compliance with this regulation: 

Requirement To Take The ELM Test: 

Effective fall 1986, all new and continuing undergraduate stu- 
dents who have not taken the ELM test and who are not other- 
wise exempt must take the test prior to the beginning of their 
next semester of enrollment at CSUF. Students who fail to com- 
ply shall be placed on administrative probation in their next 
semester of enrollment at Fullerton. Students on probation for 
this reason who do not take the test prior to the beginning of the 
third semester of enrollment at CSUF will be administratively 
disqualified from enrolling until such time as they take the ELM 
test. 

Students Who Have Taken But Not Passed 
The ELM Test: 

Students who have taken but failed to pass the ELM test must 
participate in a program designed to assist them in learning the skills 
needed to pass the test. The program may be one offered at CSUF or 
an appropriate program on another campus. New and returning 
students must participate in an approved program in their first 
semester of enrollment after the receipt of the test results. Intensive 
Learning Experience is responsible for monitoring compliance with 
this provision and for certifying the appropriateness of the course in 
which the student wishes to participate. 


Admissions 7 3 


Participation in a program to prepare for the ELM test must be 
continued. At least one attempt to pass the test must be made. 
Students who fail to comply with this requirement shall be placed 
on administrative probation. Students on probation for this rea- 
son must remediate their math skills before the beginning of the 
next semester or they will be administratively disqualified from 
enrolling. 

Failure to take either of these tests as required, before the end of 
the first semester or second quarter of enrollment may lead to 
administrative probation, which according to Section 41300. 1 of 
Title 5, California Code of Regulations, and CSU Executive 
Order 393, may lead to disqualification from future attendance. 

Information bulletins and registration materials for the EPTand 
ELM will be mailed to all students subject to the requirements. 
The materials may also be obtained from the Office of Admis- 
sions and Records or the campus test office. 

Determination of Residence for 
Nonresident Tuition Purposes 

The campus admissions office determines the residence status of 
all new and returning students for nonresident tuition purposes. 
Respt^nses to the Application for Admission and, if necessary, 
other evidence furnished by the student are used in making this 
determination. A student who fails to submit adequate informa- 
tion to establish a right to classification as a California resident 
will be classified as a nonresident. 

The following statement of the rules regarding residency determi- 
nation for nonresident tuition purposes is not a complete discus- 
sion of the law, but a summary of the principal rules and their 
exceptions. The law governing residence determination for tu- 
ition purposes by The California State University is found in 
Education Code Sections 68000-68090, 68121, 68123, 68124, 
and 89705-89707.5, and in Title 5 of the California Code of 
Regulations, Sections 41900-41912. A copy of the statutes and 
regulations is available for inspection in the campus admissions 
office. 

Legal residence may be established by an adult who is physically 
present in the state and who, at the same time, intends to make 
California his or her permanent home. Steps must be taken at 
least one year prior to the residence determination date to show 
an intent to make California the permanent home with concur- 
rent relinquishment of the prior legal residence. The steps neces- 
sary to show California residency intent will vary from case to 
case. Included among the steps may be registering to vote and 
voting in elections in California; filing resident California state 
income tax forms on total income; ownership of residential prop- 
erty or continuous occupancy or renting of an apartment on a 
lease basis where one’s permanent belongings are kept; maintain- 
ing active resident memberships in California professional or 
social organizations; maintaining California vehicle plates and 


operator’s license; maintaining active savings and checking ac- 
counts in California banks; maintaining permanent military ad- 
dress and home of record in California if one is in the military 
service. 

The student who is within the state for educational purposes only 
does not gain the status of resident regardless of the length of the 
student’s stay in California. 

In general, the unmarried minor (a person under 18 years of age) 
derives legal residence from the parent with whom the minor 
maintains or last maintained his or her place of abode. The 
residence of a minor cannot be changed by the minor or the 
minor’s guardian, so long as the minor’s parents are living. 

A married person may establish his or her residence independent 
of his or her spouse. 

An alien may establish his or her residence, unless precluded by 
the Immigration and Nationality Act from establishing domicile 
in the United States. An unmarried minor alien derives his or her 
residence from the parent with whom the minor maintains or last 
maintained his or her place of abode. 

Nonresident students seeking reclassification are required by law 
to complete a supplemental questionnaire concerning financial 
independence. 

The general rule is that a student must have been a California 
resident for at least one year immediately preceding the residence 
determination date in order to qualify as a “resident student” for 
tuition purposes. A residence determination date is set for each 
academic term. 

At the Fullerton campus, the residence determination date for the 
fall term is September 20, and for the spring term is January 25. 

Questions regarding residence determination dates should be di- 
rected to the campus admissions office which can give you the 
residence determination date for the term for which you are 
registering. 

There are exceptions from nonresident tuition, including: 

1. Persons below the age of 19 whose parents were residents of 
California but who left the state while the student, who 
remained, was still a minor. When the minor reaches age 18, 
the exception continues for one year to enable the student to 
qualify as a resident student. 

2. Minors who have been present in California with the intent 
of acquiring residence for more than a year before the resi- 
dence determination date, and entirely self-supporting for 
that period of time. 


74 Admissions 


3. Persons below the age of 19 who have lived with and been 
under the continuous direct care and control of an adult, not 
a parent, for the two years immediately preceding the resi- 
dence determination date. Such adults must have been a 
California resident for the most recent year. 

4. Dependent children and spouses of persons in active military 
service stationed in California on the residence determina- 
tion date. The exception, once attained, is not affected by 
retirement or transfer of the military person outside the 
state. 

5. Military personnel in active service stationed in California 
on the residence determination date for purposes other than 
education at state-supported institutions of higher educa- 
tion. 

6. Dependent children of a California resident who has been a 
California resident for the most recent year. This exception 
continues until the student has resided in the state the mini- 
mum time necessary to become a resident, so long as con- 
tinuous residence is maintained at an institution. 

7. Graduates of any school located in California that is operat- 
ed by the United States Bureau of Indian Affairs, including, 
but not limited to, the Sherman Indian High School. The 
exception continues so long as continuous attendance is 
maintained by the student at an institution. 

8. Certain credentialed, full-time employees of California 
school districts. 

9. Full-time State University employees and their children and 
spouses: State employees assigned to work outside the State 
and their children and spouses. This exception applies only 
for the minimum time required for the student to obtain 
California residence and maintain that residence for one 
year. 

10. Certain exchange students. 

1 1 . Children of deceased public law enforcement or fire suppres- 
sion employees, who were California residents, and who 
were killed in the course of law enforcement or fire suppres- 
sion duties. 


TTe initial campus determination of residency classification is 
made by the evaluations unit of Admissions and Records. The 
final campus residency decision is made by the Director of Ad- 
missions and Records. Written appeals may be made to the Direc- 
tor in Langsdorf Hall 102. 

Any student, following a final campus decision on his or her 
residence classification, only may make written appeal within 
120 calendar days of notification of the final decision on campus 
of the classification to: 

The California State University 

Office of General Counsel 

400 Golden Shore 

Long Beach, California 90802-4275 

The Office of General Counsel may make a decision on the issue, 
or it may send the matter back to the campus for further review. 
Students classified incorrectly as residents or incorrectly granted 
an exception from nonresident tuition are subject to reclassifica- 
tion as nonresidents and payment of nonresident tuition in ar- 
rears. If incorrect classification results from false or concealed 
facts, the student is subject to discipline pursuant to Section 
41301 of Title 5 of the California Code of Regulations. Resident 
students who become nonresidents, and nonresident students 
qualifying for exceptions whose basis for so qualifying changes, 
must immediately notify the admissions office. Applications for a 
change in classification with respect to a previous term are not 
accepted. 

The student is cautioned that this summation of rules regarding 
residency determination is by no means a complete explanation 
of their meaning. The student should also note that changes may 
have been made in the rate of nonresident tuition, in the stat- 
utes, and in the regulations between the time this catalog is 
published and the relevant residence determination date. 


Admissions 75 


Application Procedures 


Applications may be obtained from the admissions office at any 
of the campuses of The California State University or at any 
California high school or community college. Requirements for 
admission to California State University, Fullerton are in accor- 
dance with Title 5, Chapter 1, Sub-chapter 3, of the California 
Code of Regulations. A student unsure of these requirements 
should consult a high school or community college counselor or 
the admissions office at California State University, Fullerton. 

The CSU advises prospective students that they must supply com- 
plete and accurate information on the application for admission, 
residence questionnaire and financial aid forms. Further, applicants 
must submit authentic and official transcripts of all previous aca- 
demic work attempted. Failure to file complete, accurate and au- 
thentic application documents may result in denial of admission, 
cancellation of academic credit, suspension or expulsion (Section 
41301, Article 1.1, Title 5, California Code of Regulations). 

Prospective students, applying for part-time or full-time programs 
of study, in day or evening classes, must file a complete applica- 
tion as described in the admissions booklet. The $55 nonrefund- 
able application fee should be in the form of a check or money 
order payable to The California State University. The applica- 
tion fee may not be transferred or used to apply to another term. 
Applicants need file only at their campus of first choice. An 
alternative choice campus and major may be indicated on the 
application. An alternate campus and major may be indicated on 
the application, but applicants should list as alternate campus 
only a CSU campus that also offers the major. Generally, an alter- 
nate major will be considered at the first choice campus before an 
application is redirected to an alternate campus choice. 

How to Apply for Admission 

1. Submit a completed application for admission within the an- 
nounced filing period accompanied by the required applica- 
tion fee to: 



Office of Admissions and Records 
California State University, Fullerton 
Fullerton, California 92634-9480 

2. When asked to do so request required transcripts of record of 
all previous scholastic work from each school or college at- 
tended. The transcripts required at CSUF are: 

— for undergraduate applicants with fewer than 56 transferable 
semester units: 


(a) the high school transcript, and 

(b) a transcript from each college or university 
attended. 


76 Application Procedures 



— for undergraduates with 36 or more transferable semester 
units: 

(a) a transcript from each college or university 
attended. 

— /or graduates: 

(a) applicants for unclassified postbaccalaureate stand- 
ing with no degree or credential objective must sub- 
mit a transcript from the college or university where 
the baccalaureate was earned. Further, one tran- 
script from other institutions attended is required as 
necessary so that the university has a complete re- 
cord of the last 60 semester units attempted prior to 
enrollment at Fullerton. 

(b) applicants for a master s degree or teaching creden- 
tial, or both, must submit two copies of the tran- 
script from each college or university attended. 

Note: In addition, all students should have a personal set of 
college transcripts for advising purposes. All transcripts must 
be received directly from the issuing institutions and become 
official records of the university; such transcripts therefore 
cannot be returned or reissued. Foreign language transcripts 
must be accompanied by certified English translations. 

3. All undergraduate students who have completed fewer than 
56 semester or 84 quarter units of transferable work are re- 
quired to submit scores from either one of two national testing 
programs before eligibility for admission to the university can 
be determined. This requirement does not affect undergrad- 
uate students who have previously attended CSUF and who 
have submitted ACT or SAT scores at the time of their first 
admission. Registration forms and test dates for either test 
may be obtained from school or college counselors, from the 
address below, or from campus testing offices. For either test, 
submit the registration form and fee at least one month prior 
to the test date. 

ACT Address 

American College Testing Program, Inc. 

Registration Unit, P.O. Box 168 
Iowa City, Iowa 52240 

SAT Address 

College Entrance Examination Board 

Registration Unit 
PO. Box 592 

Princeton, New Jersey 08541 

Applicants to graduate programs must submit the scores of any 
qualifying examinations required in their prospective programs of 
study. 


Impacted Programs 

The CSU designates programs to be impacted when more appli- 
cations are received in the first month of the fall and spring filing 
period than the spaces available. Some programs are impacted at 
every campus where they are offered; others are impacted at some 
campuses but not all. You must meet supplementary admissions 
criteria if applying to an impacted program. 

The CSU will announce before the opening of the fall filing 
period which programs are impacted for the academic year. That 
announcement will be published in the CSU Review, distributed 
to high school and college counselors. We will also give informa- 
tion about the supplementary criteria to program applicants. 

You must file your application for admission to an impacted 
program during the first month of the filing pericxl. Further, it you 
wish to be considered in impacted programs at two or more 
campuses, you must file an application to each. Nonresident 
applicants are rarely admitted to impacted programs. 

Supplementary Admission Criteria: Each campus with impacted 
programs uses supplementary admission criteria in screening ap- 
plicants. Supplementary criteria may include ranking on the 
freshman eligibility index, the overall transfer grade point aver- 
age, and a combination of campus-developed criteria. If you are 
required to submit scores on either the SAT or ACT, you should 
take the tests no later than December if applying for fall admis- 
sion. The supplementary admission criteria used by the individ- 
ual campuses to screen applicants appear pericxJically in the CSU 
Review and are sent by the campuses to all applicants seeking 
admission to an impacted program. 

Unlike unaccommodated applicants to locally impacted pro- 
grams, who may be redirected to another campus in the same 
major, unaccommodated applicants to systemwide impacted pro- 
grams may not be redirected in the same major, but may choose 
an alternative major either at the first choice campus or another 
campus. 

At the time of the preparation of this catalog, no majors at 
California State University, Fullerton have been declared im- 
pacted. Such circumstances are liable to change so early applica- 
tion is advised. 

Application Filing Periods 

Terms Filing Period Begins Filing Period Duration 

Fall Previous November Until application 

Spring Previous August categories are filled 

Filing Period Duration 

Each campus accepts applications until capacities are reached. 
Many campuses limit undergraduate admission in an enrollment 
category because of overall enrollment limits. If applying after 
the initial filing period, consult the campus admission office for 
current information. 


Application Procedures 77 


Application Acknowledgment 

You may expect to receive an acknowledgement from your first 
choice campus within two to four weeks of filing the application. 
A notice that space has been reserved for you will also include a 
request that you submit the records necessary for the campus to 
evaluate your qualifications. You may be assured of admission if 
the evaluation of your qualifications indicates that you meet 
admission requirements. Such a notice is not transferable to 
another term or to another campus. 

Hardship Petitions 

Fullerton has established procedures to consider qualified appli' 
cants who would be faced with an extreme hardship if not admit- 
ted. Prospective petitioners should write to the director of admis- 
sions and records regarding specific policies governing hardship 
admission. 


Records Retention 

The university retains the admissions materials for those who 
apply, but who for whatever reason do not enroll for two years. 
For those who do enroll the university will retain the materials in 
student folders, including transcripts of the record of work com- 
pleted elsewhere, for five years beyond the date of last atten- 
dance. 

Records of academic performance at California State University, 
Fullerton, including individual student records, faculty grade 
lists, and graduation lists are kept permanently. 


78 Application Procedures 


Admission Requirements 

Admission Requirements for 
First-Time Freshmen 

High School Graduates 

You will qualify for regular admission as a first-time freshman if 
you 

1. are a high school graduate 

2. have a qualifiahle eligibility index (see previous chart), and 

3. have completed with grades of C or better the courses in the 
comprehensive pattern of college preparatory subject require- 
ments: 

English: 4 years 

Mathematics, 3 years: algebra, geometry, and intermediate 
algebra 

U.S. History or U.S. history and government: 1 year 

Science, 1 year with laboratory: biology, chemistry, physics, or 
other acceptable laboratory science 

Foreign Language: 2 years in the same language (may be waived 
for applicants who demonstrate competence in a language 
other than English equivalent to or higher than expected of 
students who complete two years of foreign language study) 

Visual and Performing Arts, 1 year: art, dance, drama/ theater, 
or music 

Electives, 3 years: selected from English, advanced mathemat- 
ics, social science, history, laboratory science, foreign lan- 
guage, visual and performing arts, and agriculture 

Subject Requirements 

The California State University requires that all undergraduate 
applicants for admission complete with a C or better a compre- 
hensive pattern of college preparatory study totaling 1 5 units. A 
“unit” is one year of study in high school. If you have completed 
at least 1 5 college preparatory units, you may offset a one unit 
shortage in one subject area by completing an extra unit in 
another subject area. This option is available from fall 1992 
through summer 1995. Although you will be granted regular 
admission under this option, you are strongly advised to complete 
all courses in the college preparatory pattern, especially math- 
ematics and English so that you will be adequately prepared to 
begin your university studies. Please see your high school coun- 
selor for further information. 



Admissions Requirements 79 


F(/reign Ixinguage Subject Requirement: The foreign language sub' 
ject requirement may be satisfied by applicants who demonstrate 
competence in a language other than English equivalent to or 
higher than expected of students who complete two years of 
foreign language study. Consult with your school counselor or 
any CSU campus admission or relations with schools office for 
further information. 

Making Up Missing College Preparatory Subject Requirements: Un' 
dergraduate applicants who did not complete the subject require' 
ments while in high school may make up missing subjects in any 
of the following ways: 

1. Complete appropriate courses with a C or better in adult 
school or high school summer sessions. 

2. Complete appropriate college courses with a C or better. One 
college course of at least 3 semester or 4 quarter units will be 
considered equivalent to one year of high school study. 

3. Earn acceptable scores on specified examinations. 

4. Applicants with 56 or more semester (84 quarter) units may 
complete, with a Cor better in each course, one of the following 
alternatives: 

a. 1987 or earlier high school graduates: the CSU general edu' 
cation requirements in communication in the English 
language (at least 9 semester units) and mathematics 
(usually 3 semester units); 

b. 1988 and later high school graduates: complete a minimum 
of 30 semester (45 quarter) units to be chosen from 
courses in English, arts and humanities, social science, 
science, and mathematics of at least equivalent level to 
courses that meet general education or transfer curricu' 
lum requirements. Each student must complete all CSU 
general education requirements in communication in the 
English language (at least 9 semester units) and math' 
ematics (usually 3 semester units) as part of the 30 unit 
requirement. 

Please consult with any CSU admissions office for further infor' 
mation about alternative ways to satisfy the subject requirements. 

Substitutions for Disabled Students 

Disabled student applicants are strongly encouraged to complete 
college preparatory course requirements if at all possible. If an 
applicant is judged unable to fulfill a specific course requirement 
because of a disability, alternative college preparatory courses 
may be substituted for specific subject requirements. Students 
who are deaf and hearing impaired, are blind and visually im' 
paired, or have learning disabilities, may in certain circum' 
stances qualify for substitutions for the foreign language, labora' 
tory science, and mathematics subject requirements. SubstitU' 
tions may be authorized on an individual basis after review and 


recommendation by the applicant’s academic adviser or guidance 
counselor in consultation with the director of CSUF’s Disabled 
Student Services. 

Although the distribution may be slightly different from the 
course pattern required of other students, students qualifying for 
substitutions will still be held for 15 units of college preparatory 
study. Students should be aware that course substitutions may 
limit later enrollment in certain majors, particularly those in' 
volving mathematics. For further information and substitution 
forms, please contact the director of CSUF’s Disabled Student 
Services. 

Provisional Admission 

The university may provisionally admit first'time freshman appli' 
cants based on their academic performance through the junior 
year of high school and planned for the senior year. California 
State University, Fullerton will monitor the senior year of study 
of those provisionally admitted to ensure that those so admitted 
complete their senior year of studies satisfactorily, including the 
required college preparatory subjects, and graduate from high 
school. 

Non-High School Graduates 

Applicants over 18 years of age, but who have not graduated from 
high school, will be considered for admission as first'time fresh' 
men only when preparation in all other ways is such that the 
university believes promise of academic success is equivalent to 
that of eligible California high school graduates. 

High School Students 

Students still enrolled in high school will be considered for en' 
rollment in certain special programs if recommended by the prin' 
cipal and the appropriate campus department chair and if prep' 
aration is equivalent to that required of eligible California high 
school graduates. Such admission is only for a given program and 
does not constitute the right to continued enrollment. 

Adult Students 

As an alternative to regular admission criteria, an applicant who 
is twenty 'five years of age or older may be considered for admis' 
sion as an adult student if the following basic conditions are met: 

1. Possesses a high school diploma (or has established equiV' 
alence through either the Tests of General Educational Deveh 
opment (GED) or the California High School Proficiency 
Examination). 

2. Has not been enrolled in college as a fulFtime student for 
more than one term during the past five years. Part'time 
enrollment is permissible. 


80 Admissions Requirements 


3. If there has been any college attendance in the past five years, 
has earned a C average or better. 

Consideration will be based upon a judgement as to whether the 
applicant is as likely to succeed as a regularly admitted freshman 
or transfer and will include an assessment of basic skills in the 
English language and mathematical computation. 

Admission Requirements for 
Undergraduate Transfer Students 

You will qualify for admission as a transfer student in a non^ 
impacted major if you have a grade point average of 2.0 (C) or 
better in all transferable units attempted, are in gotxl standing at 
the last college or university attended, and meet the following 
standard: 

1. you will meet the freshman admission requirements in effect 
for the term to which you are applying (See ‘‘Freshman Re- 
quirements,” in the preceding section). 

2. you are eligible as a freshman at the time of high school 
graduation and have been in continuous attendance in an 
accredited college since high school graduation; 

3. you were eligible as a freshman at the time of high school 
graduation except for the subject requirements, have made up 
the missing subjects and have been in continuous attendance 
in an accredited college since high school graduation. 

4. you have completed at least 56 transferable semester (84 quar- 
ter) units and have made up any missing subject requirement 
(See “Making up Missing College Preparatory Subjects sec- 
tion). Nonresidents must have a 2.4 grade point average or 
better. 

Transferable courses are those designated for Baccalaureate credit 
by the college or university offering the courses. 

Admission Requirements for 
International Students 

The university is pleased to accept applications from internation- 
al students. TTie CSU must access the academic preparation of 
foreign students. For this purpose, “foreign students” include 
those who hold US visas as students, exchange visitors, or in 
other non-immigrant classifications. 

The CSU uses separate requirements and application filing dates 
in the admission of foreign students. Verification of English profi- 
ciency (See the section on TOEFL Requirement for undergrad- 
uate applicants), financial resources, and academic performance 
are all important considerations for admission. Academic records 
from foreign institutions must be on file at least 8 weeks before 
registration for the first term and, if not in English, must be 
accompanied by certified English translations. 


Freshman applicants applying directly from overseas should have 
outstanding academic qualifications and meet TOEFL score re- 
quirements. Applicants who are graduates of foreign secondary 
schools must have preparation equivalent to that required of 
eligible California high school graduates. The university will 
carefully review the previous record of all such applicants and 
only those with promise of academic success equivalent to that of 
eligible California high school graduates will be admitted. Un- 
dergraduate transfers, who have completed a two-year program in 
an accredited institution of higher education, with a gcx^d aca- 
demic record and satisfactory TOEFL scores, shall receive priority 
for admission. 

Postbaccalaureate applicants who have completed a bachelor’s 
degree or its equivalent, with a strong academic record, and 
satisfactory TOEFL scores from an accredited institution may be 
considered for admission as graduate students. 

The university has established deadlines to insure the timely 
processing of all applications and to enable admitted applicants 
to make arrangements to reach the U.S. and the campus prior to 
orientation and registration. Early application is strongly advised 
due to strong demand for programs. Newly admitted students are 
required to take an English Placement Examination prior to 
enrollment in classes (mid-August for fall semester and mid- 
January for spring semester). 

Applications may be submitted according to the following schedule: 
For Fall Semester 

Apply beginning November 1 of the preceding year. Application 
must be completed with supporting documents by April 15.* 

For Spring Semester 

Apply beginning August 1 of preceding year. Application must 
be completed with supporting documents by October 31.* 

All international student applicants must declare a major field of 
study when the application is filed. Campus programs of study 
which receive more applications than spaces are available, have 
been declared impacted, and are not open to nonresidents, for- 
eign or domestic. 

All applicants whose native language is other than English are 
required to present scores for the Test of English as a Foreign Lan- 
guage (TOEFL) before they can be admitted to the university. 
Undergraduate applicants must achieve a score of 500; graduate 
applicants a score of 550, graduate music applicants 560, and MBA 
applicants a score of 570. Adequate performance on the TOEFL is 
mandatory for admission. 


'Please be advised that file completion deadlines may be subject to change. 


Admissions Requirements 81 


Applicants should obtain the TOEFL Bulletin of Information and 
registration forms well in advance. Copies of this bulletin and 
registration forms are often available at American embassies and 
consulates, offices of the United States Information Service, 
United States educational commissions and foundations abroad, 
bi-national centers, and several private organizations. TTose who 
cannot obtain locally a TOEFL Bulletin of Information should 
write to: Test of English as a Foreign Language, Educational 
Testing Services, RO. Box 6151, Princeton, New Jersey, USA, 
08541-6151. 

International student applicants must include a statement of 
financial support accompanied by a bank statement from their 
sponsor. Students sponsored by an international organization or 
home government agency must include a letter of scholarship 
suppc:)rt specifying this university and the students proposed de- 
gree and program of study. 

Transcripts of all educational documents in languages other than 
English must be accompanied by translation into English certi- 
fied by independent agencies. All academic records must be 
received directly from the issuing institutions and become official 
records of the university. 

International student applicants who are admitted by the univer- 
sity will be issued form 1-20 which is used to obtain an F-1 student 
visa from a U.S. Embassy or Consulate overseas. Students trans- 
ferring from a U.S. institution will use form 1-20 to apply for 
transfer authorization through the Immigration and Naturaliza- 
tion Service. Arrival, orientation and registration information 
from the Office of International Education and Exchange will 
accompany the admission materials mailed to new students. 

Admission Requirements for 
Postbaccalaureate and Graduate 
Students 

See admissions information in the “Graduate Regulations” sec- 
tion of this catalog. 

Cancellation of Admission 

A student admitted to the university for a given semester but who 
does not register in the specified semester will have the admission 
canceled. The student must file a new application form when 
again seeking admission and must follow the complete applica- 
tion procedure and meet the current admission requirements. 


Admission Requirements for 
Summer Session Students 

Although the quality of the program and most of the course 
offerings are the same as in the regular session, students who wish 
to enroll in summer session courses must register for them 
through the Office of Extended Education. Students normally 
must be high school graduates, however, and are expected to 
have satisfied the prerequisites for the courses in which they 
register. Admission to summer session does not grant admission 
to the regular session. 

Readmission of Former Students 

A student previously enrolled in the university, planning to return 
after an absence of more than one semester, must file a new applica- 
tion for admission. Unless a leave of absence was granted, catalog 
requirements at the time of readmission will apply. Please see the 
“Stop-Out Policy” section in the regulations subchapter of this cata- 
log for further information on applications for readmission. 

Former Students in Good Standing 

A student who left the university in good standing will be read- 
mitted provided any academic work attempted elsewhere since 
the last attendance does not change his or her scholastic status. 
Transcripts of the record of any work attempted in the interim are 
required. 

Former Students Who Were on Probation 

A student on probation at the close of the last enrollment will be 
readmitted on probation provided he or she is otherwise eligible. 
The student must furnish transcripts of any college work taken 
during the absence. 

Former Students Who Were Disqualified 

The readmission of a previously disqualified student is by special 
action only. Ordinarily the university will consider an applica- 
tion for reinstatement only after the student has remained absent 
for a minimum of one year following disqualification and has 
fulfilled all recommended conditions. In every instance, readmis- 
sion is based on evidence, including transcripts of study complet- 
ed elsewhere after disqualification, including transcripts from 
California State University’s Extended Education program which 
show improvement in the CSUF grade point average. If readmit- 
ted, the student is placed on scholastic probation. 


82 Admissions Requirements 


Transfer Credits 

Evaluation of Transfer Credits 

When a student is admitted, the Office of Admissions and Re- 
cords will evaluate previous college work in relation to the re- 
quirements of Fullerton. All degree candidates will be issued a 
credit summary during the first semester of attendance which 
serves as a basis for determining remaining requirements for the 
student’s specific objectives. The admissions office will convert 
quarter units of credit transferred to the university to semester 
units by multiplying quarter-unit totals by two-thirds. 

Once issued to a student, the evaluation remains valid as long as 
the student enrolls at the date specified, pursues the objective 
specified, and remains in continuous attendance. The student 
will not be held to additional graduation requirements unless 
such requirements become mandatory as a result of changes in 
the California Administrative Code or the California Education 
Code. If the student does not remain in continuous attendance 
and has not applied for and been granted a formal leave of 
absence, the evaluation issued upc7n readmission will specify the 
remaining requirements for the student’s objectives. 

In view of the foregoing regulations, the student should notify the 
Office of Admissions and Records immediately of a change in the 
objective specified in the evaluation. While the evaluation for a 
student remains valid, the student is held responsible for comply- 
ing with all changes in regulations and procedures which may 
appear in subsequent catalogs. 

Acceptance of Credit 

Credit for work completed at accredited institutions, other than 
course work identified by such institutions as remedial or in other 
ways as being nontransferable, will be accepted toward the satis- 
faction of baccalaureate degree and credential requirements at 
the university within limitations of residence requirements and 
community college transfer maximums. 

Transfer of Credit From a 
Community College 

Upper division credit is not allowed for courses taken in a com- 
munity college. Credential credit is not allowed for courses in 
professional education taken in a community college. This does 
not invalidate credit for preprofessional courses taken at a com- 
munity college, such as introduction to education, art or design, 
arithmetic, or music for classroom teachers. After a student has 
completed 70 units of college credit at a community college, no 
further community college units may be accepted for unit credit. 

Credit by Examination 

California State University, Fullerton grants credit to those stu- 
dents who pass examinations that have been approved for credit 
systemwide. These include the Advanced Placement Examina- 
tions, CSU English Equivalency Examination and some CLEP 
examinations. 



Transfer Credits 83 


Students may challenge courses by taking examinations deveh 
oped at the campus. Credit shall he awarded to those who pass 
them successfully. 

Credit by Advanced Placement 

Students who have successfully completed courses in the ad' 
vanced placement program of the College Entrance Examination 
Board (defined as receiving a score of 3, 4 or 5) shall be granted 
credit for each advanced placement course toward graduation, 
advanced placement in the university’s sequence of courses and 
credit for curriculum requirements. 

Cal State Fullerton grants credit toward its undergraduate degrees 
for successful completion of examinations of the Advanced 
Placement Program of the College Board. Students who present 
scores of three or better will be granted semester units of college 
credit as listed below. 


Advanced Placement 

Equivalent 

Semester 

Course 

Course: CSUF 

Units 

American History 

History 180 

3 

Art History 

Art 201A,B 

3'6> 

Studio Art 

Art 103 or 104 

Art 107 A or 107B 


Biology 

Bio Sci 101 

3 

Chemistry 

Chemistry 

120A,B 

6^ 

Computer Science 

Computer Science 121 

3' 


Computer Science 131 

3> 

English 

English 101 

3 


English 200 

3 

European History 

History HOB 

3 

French 

French 101, 102 

10" 

German 

Government and 

German 101, 102 

10" 

Politics (Comparative) 
Government and 

lower division elective 

3^ 

Politics (United States) 

Poli Sci 101 

37 

Latin 4 

Latin 101 

3 

Latin 5 

Latin 101, 102 

6 

Math A&iB 

Math 150A 

4 

Math B C 

Math 150A,B 

8 

Physics 

Physics 21 1 A,B 

6' 

Spanish 

Spanish 101, 102 

10" 


'Consult the Department of Art for applicability of advanced placement examina- 
tion credit. 

^Tb complete the requirement for Chemistry 120A,B, the student must successfully 
complete four units of Chemistry 12CA and 120B laK^ratory at Cal State Fullerton. 
'Consult the EVpartment of Computer Science for applicability of advanced place- 
ment examination credit. 

^No Credit for literature. 

'To complete the requirement for Physics 211A,B the student must successfully 
complete two units of Physics 211 A and 21 IB laboratcwy at CSUF. 

^msult the Department of Political Science for applicabilit>’ t>f advanced place- 
ment examination credit. These units do not count toward the major. 

To meet the state requirement, you must take Political Science 300. 


Credit for Extension and 
Correspondence Courses 

The maximum amount of credit through correspondence and 
extension courses which may be allowed toward the bachelor’s 
degree is 24 units, if otherwise applicable. 

Credit for Noncollegiate 
Instruction 

Cal State Fullerton grants undergraduate degree credit for suC' 
cessful completion of non-collegiate instruction, either military 
or civilian, appropriate to the baccalaureate, that has been rec- 
ommended by the Commission on Educational Credit and Cre' 
dentials of the American Council on Education. The number of 
units allowed are those recommended in the Guide to the Evalud' 
tion of Educational Experience in the Armed Services and the Nation^ 
al Guide to Educational Credit for Training Programs. Students who 
have at least one year of active military service may be granted six 
or 12 units of undergraduate credit. 

Credit for Prior Learning 

California State University, Fullerton grants up to 30 units of 
undergraduate credit for learning, knowledge, or skills-based ex- 
perience that has been documented and evaluated according to 
campus policy. Requests for Credit for Prior Learning will be 
evaluated individually. 

College Level Examination 
Program 

The university’ shall accept three semester units of credit for each 
of the following College Level Examination Program (CLEP) 
examinations, subject to achievement of the scores indicated, 
provided the examination was not taken previously within one 
calendar year and that degree credit has not been granted for 
previous course work at the equivalent or at a more advanced 
level than for the examination in question. 


Examination Passing score 

Mathematics General Exam 50* 

College Algebra-Trigonometry 49 

Intrcxluctory Calculus and Analytic Geometry 48 

Statistics 49 

General Chemistry 48 


Fullerton may grant additional credit and advanced standing based 
upon CLEP examination results using as minimum standards: 

General Examinations 

1 . That the student achieve a score at or above the 50th percen' 
tile, college sophomore norms. 

*On Kith parts of examination. 


84 Transfer Credits 


2. That no unit credit be granted for any test in the general 
examinations, but that up to six units of general education 
requirements be waived for each test completed with the 
appropriate score. 

Subject Examinations 

1. That the student submit a score at or above the 50th percen- 
tile of those in the norm group who earned a mark of C or 
better. 

2. That equivalency to Fullerton courses be determined by the 
appropriate academic department in conjunction with the 
Office of Admissions and Records. 

3. That university credit shall have not been previously earned 
in the courses in question. 

In no case will credit so awarded count toward residence credit. 

English Equivalency Examination 

Students passing the California State University English Equiva- 
lency Examination shall be awarded six semester units of credit 

(English 101 and 200) provided credit has not been granted 


previously at the equivalent or at more advanced levels. Further, 
those who pass this optional examination are exempt from the 
requirement to take the English Placement Test. 

Following are the categories of performance and scores which 
qualify for credit and/or exemption of the English Placement 
Test: 

1 . Pass for credit and exemption from the English Placement Test 
(EPT). 

A student receiving a minimum score of 14 on the EEE essay 
and a minimum multiple choice converted score of 51 shall 
receive credit and exemption. A student earning a minimum 
score of 15 on the EEE essay and a minimum multiple choice 
converted score of 43 shall also receive credit and exemption. 

2. Exemption from the English Placement Test (EPT) only. 

Students scoring at least 12 on the essay with a minimum 
converted multiple choice score of 36 or more shall receive 
exemption from the EPT, but no credit. Also, students with 
an essay score of at least 15 shall be awarded exemption, 
regardless of the converted multiple choice score. 


Transfer Credits 85 


.tr* ^ .1 ” ' : . ; ■ .m;.,]^ .’ii ;. . vjij t", '! ; 

; .; 'f ‘..., V ■ '•*:!; >n^ oUv. 

^ /i ' S'.*?.- /’ Jp^i 

- 'nv ^ / :^mwuil-v: 

rn )r.-:-- •sVi' ^!^■^ -.“.r : \ -'.l: ‘tft /t.l^.- 


•i/'Uco'JOf-- i r'i • r •> : (7<,vf.-r^/^^i(-:t bm? li'b7'7i)'501.t74;Hr .. I 

, . ■. -.v’ , ■xrm^ 

■/: > ..rrj/r-j fi ‘i'; mr.^H '‘u } ^>i^ii;\ s ■' /\ 

;■ 1' i.! /.- j :• ' •.• "rr; <> r 

;»o>';if:;» ,.:»)■ • ^ • ' u .j:.]':' ’jX'xtoCi k>vi>y!\ ■■ 

.' ■f(\i}i!*}::^1i).^n:ytl-.-:; t<j:> ■• 

. ' f'‘rU/ X'' Jfj/y r!‘-; •:i'it fii'i^' I " itt nohqri'jyJ .:. 

,i -r V. .. r:;, ». ft T,' H If. JaHCy: 

. ii *> '.' Y . >v s'.iV'iu/n t-inj^ni'y- 

; .-'iU '.i.-'.- ■■• ' '. '''f ■>' 

,, ■;:< ^ 1' /.; ■..■ A. '>'''■■■ '' ' f\h 

.'1 ^ i ,>^b lo ^vj 


;(/ .y .•<i y rHi.c 

■ ,> : ■" ‘f 

■' . - . -i - ir.cn.j : 


'{in, vA 'inij r>n nAlT S 

YQ:l»fjAiw!/ 7:7 i/' >1 qjJ ,y yfUJiirnttX9 

yh Ij* <irp^rj -mi j,i.‘y 'i3iiUfyi\ 

. , , * - j .,- 

. • ■ ■ - ' ■ 5 ' ’ ■ . ' 

; ,, i \ yinuZ 

;h?C yb yi 4t tc 1; j/- ':-;V li Jfindr^ i 

.^> trr4-'Ar ■ irf .V -^rvl: *■. vJt 

.rt}.i •" 

L-'' A':XT:i ‘’ a .Jh''^ . .* 

vy:: !^^■ .v .jx.ji : .L'-> '!■ .''■■■ ' :.iti.i-:':::y'q{ii\ , 

■ fih'. }. ■ i 

'.■/• .'•/j;*':''': r’i . • ^ 'Y •Va:-. - '' . isHl, .' 

. ,'.'i:r. 'n 

. )i. . * • . . '. vry b?>!M.:v;r Atf .:iv ii: * 

(»Of, i;7!iaii;^^d (igH.’.;73 

f , ; •,; j:!.‘j!’- M ; f 7;'4; ;Aj i i: v ' ‘■•/ii a .la i ;; A.rci 

, ;•• L : ; T-t>0-F»>'v ''y; \-.'S''YV:'!. 'Lj-ii'rtL, . n A.LI. 1 Vl'H'yi 

i. .;•• ':i' ^ihorj ^.'U^ tif-\ ‘'4 . 


C,Oi*vfJV / ' .il ?j .J‘- 

■ '• ;':i - 

■'be ‘'•'■;-x.' 

'■ . A L . . 

A t a;. , .■ , ^ 

■ A f: vu : - ••..■• 


■ ; ' ■ • ^■■ 

(axinO.H? Lvir.^ .>.-Ai;j.- _ .t • 

O f '\c ^C4 i' t » kJt *-• ;t i ' 

^ Yh- 7 'litrk-nr -v^vivc • A* . ■ - .A -- : . ;• 

’i-*:. ’^.T'-^ii MY-n- '\ yui 

' K ■^^: ■.-' • . .»’ f './r.. , 


•’t B ‘AlLfwt! 



Ci>’®i^ Resistration 

vi** „e^, i^e* 

eal>*' 






eoR^Tle*!**^ ,»**’ 




® .G«*^ 

‘*^.t.M , 0<ii>^ , .e«‘' 

<^ V0<*i>^ ,L 

iM^ gol^ ,^( 

0ai«^ , , e«^ 

0(il^ i..^G£ 


, 01 '*' 


Gol>^ .G«*^ 




<!*«S>!.,>40^. 



"^>1^ G^ i^G« 
otoM^ ,,...G<»*^, _i^e«^,i, 




e>M"',.a.G«i^,.,^Gai>: 




goi>^ Ga^, j,^G<i^ 






4 


y>^ 


.icM ^(jl^ 

g(jlaH , ,,g<>^, _i,^*Ga^ 




>o 


. Aflla^ , .Gal^ . 


IctCi' 


JrM 


. . G 





Registration Information 

Orientation 

Various opportunities are provided for new students to obtain 
information relating to academic programs, student services and 
activities, and other aspects of university life. Information about 
specific programs is published separately. 

Registration 

Class Schedule 

A complete listing of courses offered will be found in the class 
schedule published prior to the start of each semester. This public 
cation, which may be purchased in the Titan Bookstore, also 
includes detailed information pertaining to the semester includ- 
ing class enrollment and fee payment procedures. 

It is im|X)rtant that students familiarize themselves not only with 
the academic policies stated in this catalog but also with the 
requirements and procedures in the class schedule as both are 
used in the selection of classes for the semester. 

Registration 

Registration involves two steps — class enrollment and fee pay- 
ment, and may be accomplished through early registration by 
mail, walk-through registration during the month preceding the 
first day of instruction, or through late registration during the 
first three weeks of instruction. Most students should find early 
registration by mail advantageous. 

At registration, every student is required to file a study program 
with the Office of Admissions and Records. The filing of a pro- 
gram by the student and its acceptance by the university obligates 
the student to perform the designated work to the best of his or 
her ability. It is emphasized that registration does not become 
official until all fees have been paid. 

Computerized Records System 

The student records system, including the registration process, is 
computerized. It is a fact of life in a large institution such as Cal 
State Fullerton that computerization is essential. Thus, there are 
requirements for data forms, code numbers, student file numbers 
and for meeting precise criteria for recording data, which intro- 
duce impersonal elements in the student records system. Despite 
these conditions, every effort is made to provide courteous, effi- 
cient and iDerstmalized service to students and the entire universi- 
ty community. To assist in providing this service, students are 
urged to be careful and accurate in preparing forms, especially the 
course request registration forms and change of program forms. 

Accurate preparation of information will assure each student of 
error-free records. 



88 Registration Information 



Controlled Entry Classes 

In general, all courses listed in the semester class schedule shall 
be available to all matriculated students except for appropriate 
academic restrictions as stated in the schedule and the catalog. 
These restrictions, including special qualifications and other aca- 
demic limitations, on class entry shall be published in the class 
schedule as appropriate footnotes to the designated class or class 
section and shall be consistent with the catalog. 

Late Registration 

The last day to register late each semester will be announced in 
the class schedule. Late registrants will find themselves handi- 
capped in arranging their programs and must pay a $25 late 
registration fee in addition to regular fees. 

Changes in Program After 
Registration 

Each student is responsible for the program of courses listed at 
registration. Changes may be made thereafter only by filing a 
change of program form in the Office of Admissions and Records 
following prcKedures announced in the class schedule. 

Students may add classes to their programs of study during the 
first three weeks of instruction. They may drop classes through 
the first two weeks. After the second week of instruction the 
university expects students to complete all courses in which they 
are enrolled. If students must withdraw after the deadline for 
dropping classes published in the class schedule, they are subject 
to the withdrawal policy contained in the “University Regula- 
tions" section of this catalog. In all instances, dropped classes 
must be reported to the Office of Admissions and Records; stu- 
dents not attending class are not dropped automatically. 

Concurrent Enrollment Outside 
the CSU System 

A student enrolled at the university may enroll concurrently for 
additional courses at another institution outside the CSU system 
without advance written approval from the students academic 
adviser or the Office of Admissions and Records. Students are 
reminded that the study load in the proposed combined program 
of study may not exceed the maximum number of units autho- 
rized at this university. 


Enrollment at Other CSU 
Campuses 

Fullerton students may enroll at other campuses of The Califor- 
nia State University either while concurrently enrolled at Cal 
State Fullerton or as visitors. There are certain eligibility require- 
ments and enrollment conditions that must be met, including 
completion of at least one semester at Cal State Fullerton and 
being in good academic standing. Information and application 
forms may be obtained from the Office of Admissions and Re- 
cords. 

Visitor Enrollment 

Students enrolled at other campuses of The California State 
University may enroll at Cal State Fullerton while concurrently 
enrolled at their home campus or as visitors. Information about 
eligibility requirements, enrollment conditions and application 
forms are available from the Office of Admissions and Records at 
the home campus. 

Auditors 

A properly qualified student may enroll in classes as an auditor. 
The student must meet the regular university admission require- 
ments and must pay the same fees as other students. See the 
description of Audit in the “University Regulations” section of 
this catalog under “Administrative Symbols.” 

Disabled Students 

Disabled students who require assistance should consult with 
Disabled Student Services prior to the announced semester regis- 
tration pericxl so that special arrangements can be made. 

Veterans 

California State University, Fullerton is approved by the Bureau 
of School Approvals, State Department of Education, to offer 
programs to veterans seeking benefits under state and federal 
legislation. All students seeking veterans’ benefits must have a 
degree or credential objective. 

Applications for benefits should be filed well in advance of the 
semester in which the veteran plans to use these benefits to have 
the authorization at the time of registration. 


Registration Information 89 


Schedule of Fees 

1993^94 


Tuition is not charged to legal residents of California unless they 
are seeking a duplicate degree. The 1993-94 and 1994-95 sched- 
ule of fees will be published in the class schedules for those years. 
The following are the fees and nonresident tuition assessed at the 
time of preparing this catalog. 

Application fee (nonrefundable) 

Payable by check or money order at time 


application is made $55 

All Students (Per Semester Fees) 

State University fee 

0 to 6 units $378 

7 or more units 654 

Facilities fee 3 

Associated Students fee 26 

University Union fee 49 

Instructionally-related activity fee 10 

Student Services Card 2 


Duplicate Degree Tuition 

In addition to fees charged to 
all students not to exceed 


$2250 tuition per semester $150 per unit 

Nonresident and Foreign Visa Students 

Nonresident tuition fee (in addition to fees 

charged all students) per unit $246 

Summer Session 

Course fee per unit see current bulletin 

Assexiated Students fee $3 

University Union fee 5 



Extension Fees 
Per unit . . 


see current bulletin 


Other Fees or Charges 

Late registration fee (in addition to other fees 

listed above) 25 

Check returned from bank for any cause 10 

Transcript fee 4 

Graduation and diploma fee 40 

Failure to meet an administrative time limit 20 

Miscellaneous course fees Select courses 

list instructional fees for class materials as indicated in the 
class schedule and under the course description in the 
catalog. Students may purchase these materials through 
the university (information given at first class meeting) 
but are not required to do so. 


90 Schedule of Fees 



Consult current class schedule for further information. 

Auditors pay the same fees as others. 

Fees are subject to change by the Trustees of The California State 
University without advance notice. 

Alan Pattee Scholarships 

Children of deceased public law enforcement or fire suppression 
employees, who were California residents and who were killed in 
the course of law enforcement or fire suppression duties, are not 
charged fees or tuition of any kind at any California State Uni- 
versity campus, according to the Alan Pattee Scholarship Act, 
Education Code Section 68121. Students qualifying for these 
benefits are known as Alan Pattee scholars. For further informa- 
tion contact the Admissions Office, which determines eligibility. 

Waiver of Fees 

Section 32320 of the California Education Code provides for the 
waiver of certain fees other than nonresident tuition, for certain 
veterans’ dependents. Those who meet one or more of the follow- 
ing criteria should present to the university registrar a certificate 
of eligibility obtained from the Division of Educational Assis- 
tance, California Department of Veterans Affairs, on or before 
the date of registration. 

A. Children of veterans who have service-connected disabilities 
and whose annual income not including governmental com- 
pensation for such service-connected disability does not ex- 
ceed $5,000. 

B. Children of veterans killed in action or because of a service- 
connected disability, where the annual income of such chil- 
dren, including the value of any support received from par- 
ents and the annual income of surviving parents, does not 
exceed $5,000. No limitations on age or length of residency. 

Refund of Fees 

Details concerning fees which may be refunded, the circum- 
stances under which fees may be refunded, and the appropriate 
procedure to be followed in seeking refunds may be obtained by 
consulting Section 42201 (parking fees), 41913 (nonresident 
tuition), 42019 (housing charges) and 41802 (all other fees) of 
Title 5, California Code of Regulations. In all cases it is important 
to act quickly in applying for a refund. 

Information concerning the policy and appropriate procedure to 
be followed in seeking a refund may be obtained from the Office 
of the Registrar or the Cashier’s Office. 


Parking Fees 

Semester pass (nonreserved spaces): 

Regular and limited students 

(4'wheeled vehicle) $54.00 

Regular and limited students 

(2-wheeled vehicle) 13.50 

Coin operated gate per exit 1 • 50 

Summer session (4-wheeled vehicle) 36.00 

Summer session (2-wheeled vehicle) 9.00 


Typical Student Expenses 

Typical school year budgets for California residents living at 
home or making other housing arrangements will vary widely. It 
is estimated that, including a $4,700 yearly allowance for room 
and board, and $4(X) for books and supplies, the total cost will 
approximate $7,600 for an unmarried person. Nonresident stu- 
dents must also allow for nonresident tuition in addition to those 
fees listed above. 

State University Fee 

The state university fee provides financing for the following stu- 
dent services. 

1. Social and Cultural Development Activities. Provides for the 
coordination of various student activities, student organiza- 
tions, student government and cultural programs. 

2. Counseling. Includes the cost of counselors’ salaries and cleri- 
cal support, plus operating expenses and equipment. 

3. Testing. Covers the cost of test officers, psychometrists, cleri- 
cal support, operating expenses and equipment. 

4. Placement. Provides career information to students and faculty 
for academic program planning and employment information 
to graduates and students. 

5. Financial Aids Administration. Includes the cost of the counsel- 
ing and business services provided in connection with the 
financial aid programs. 

6. Health Services. Provides health services to students and cov- 
ers the cost of salaries of medical officers and nurses and 
related clerical and technical personnel, as well as operating 
expenses and equipment. 

7. Housing. Supports personnel who provide housing informa- 
tion and monitor housing services available to students. 

8. Student Affairs Administration. Covers 50 percent of the cost of 
the office of the vice president for student affairs, which has 
responsibility for the overall administration of student 
services. 


Schedule of Fees 9 1 


Associated Students Fee 

The law governing The California State University provides that 
a student body fee may be established by student referendum with 
the approval of two-thirds of those students voting. The Associ- 
ated Students fee was established at California State University, 
Fullerton by student referendum in December 1959. The same 
fee can be abolished by a similar two-thirds approval of students 
voting on a referendum called for by a petition signed by ten 
percent of the regularly enrolled students (Education Code, Sec- 
tion 89300). The level of the fee is set by the Chancellor who 
may approve a fee increase only following a referendum approved 
by a majority of the students. TTe Associated Students fee sup- 
ports a variety of cultural and recreational programs, child care 
centers and special student support programs. 

Duplicate Degree Tuition 

Effective Fall ’93 a duplicate degree tuition will be charged to any 
student who has earned a degree equivalent to or higher than the 
degree awarded by the program in which the student is enrolled. 
All students, new, continuing, and returning are subject to the 
duplicate degree tuition. 

The Duplicate Degree Tuition will be charged at $150.00 per unit not 
to exceed $4,500.00 per academic year ($2,250.00 per semester). 
This charge is in addition to the basic registration fees applicable 
to all students. 

Miscellaneous Course Fees 

For some courses an additional fee is collected for special course 
materials or, in the case of some music couises, for the use of a 
musical instrument. Students have the option of purchasing 
these items from another source if they choose to do so. For some 
laboratory courses a breakage fee is collected. The breakage fee is 
mandatory, but a portion or all of it is refundable at the end of the 


semester depending on what breakage has occurred. The materi- 
als fees and breakage fees are paid separately from the registration 
fees at the Cashier’s Office after classes begin. Notations are 
made by each course in the class schedule regarding the fee 
amount and individual footnotes explain the purpose of the fee. 

Average Annual Costs and 
Sources of Funds Per Full-Time 
Equivalent Student 

The 20 campuses and the Chancellor’s Office of The California 
State University are financed primarily through funding provided 
by the taxpayers of California. The total State appropriation to 
the CSU for 1992-93, including capital outlay and employee 
compensation increases, is $1,741,478,000. The total cost of 
education for CSU, however, is $2, 1 12,024,000 which provides 
support for a projected 247,194 full-time equivalent (FTE)“ 
students. 

The total cost of education in the CSU is defined as the expendi- 
tures for current operations, including payments made to the 
students in the form of financial aid, and all fully reimbursed 
programs contained in State appropriations, but excluding cap- 
ital outlay appropriations. The average cost of education is deter- 
mined by dividing the total cost by the total FTES. The average 
cost is further differentiated into three categories: State support 
(the State appropriation, excluding capital outlay), student fee 
support, and support from other sources (including federal 
funds). 

Thus, excluding costs which relate to capital outlay (i.e., build- 
ing amortization), the average cost of education per FTE student 
is $8,544. Of this amount, the average student fee support per 
FTE is $1,989. The calculation for this latter amount includes 
the amount paid by nonresident students. 


Source of Funds and Average Costs for 1992/93 CSU Budget 
(Projected Enrollment: 247,194 FTE) 

Average 
Cost Per 

Amount Student (FTE) Percentage 


Total Cost of Education $2,112,024,000^ $8,544 100.0 

State Appropriation 1,516,908,000^ 6,137 71.8 

Student Fee Support 491,678,000 1.989" 23.3 

Support from Other Sources 103,438,000 418 4.9 


• For budgetary purposes, full-time equivalent (FTE) translates total head count into total academic student load equivalent to 15 units per term. Some students enroll for 
more than 15 units; some students enroll for fewer than 15 units. 

** The total cost of education does not include the amount related to lottery arwl the capital investment of the (2SU. The estimated replacement cost of all the sy'stems 
permanent facilities and equipment on the 20 campuses is currently valued at S6.5 billion, excluding the cost of land. 

‘ This figure does not include the capital outlay appropriation of $224,570,000. 

^ The average costs paid by a student include the State University Fee, Application Fee, and Nonresident Tuition. Individual students may pay less than $1 ,989 depending on 
whether they are part-time, foil time, resident or nonresident students. 


92 Schedule of Fees 


Financial Aid 



Financial Aid refers to a wide variety of programs designed to 
assist students in meeting the cost of attendance at California 
State University Fullerton. These programs include gift aid in the 
form of scholarships and grants which do not require repayment 
or performance of work, student loans which require repayment 
over a period of time at a specified interest rate, and employment 
programs through College Work-Study or Student Assistance. 
TTe Emergency Loan program also provides students with re- 
sources to meet unusual or unexpected emergencies through a 
short-term loan. 

Students who have specific questions regarding financial aid or 
who would like further information should contact the Financial 
Aid Office. 

Eligibility Requirements 

The following eligibility requirements apply to all financial aid 
programs except emergency loans and scholarships. 

To be considered eligible for most student assistance programs, 
the demonstration of financial need is one of the primary require- 
ments. However, alternate forms of financial assistance such as 
scholarships, emergency loans, and parental loan programs 
should also be explored since many of these alternate sources of 
aid do not necessarily require the demonstration of financial 
need. Financial need is the difference between the reasonable 
and approved costs incurred by a student at CSUF and all of the 
resources available to the student, including contributions from 
parents, student (and spouse, if applicable), and other aid the 
student may be eligible to receive. The university uses a national- 
ly accepted formula developed by the federal government in 
determining the family contribution. In addition to demonstrat- 
ing financial need, all applicants for federal student financial 
assistance must meet the following eligibility requirements: 


1. be a U.S. citizen or national or permanent resident of the 
U.S. Eligible students also include citizens of the Marshall 
Islands and permanent residents of the Trust Territories as well 
as other eligible non-citizens who can document their status 
in the United States as other than for a temporary purpose. 
Students should be aware that the citizenship requirements 
apply to all forms of federally-funded assistance but may differ 
for State supported grant programs and private scholarships; 

2. be admitted to or enrolled on at least a half-time basis in a 
program of study leading to a degree, certificate or recognized 
credential offered by the institution. (Graduate students pur- 
suing prerequisites required to gain admission to a graduate 
program may be eligible for limited loan eligibility); 


Financial Aid 93 




3. maintain satisfactory academic progress in the course of study 
according to the standards and practices of the university; 

4. not be in default on any loan made from a student loan fund 
and not owe a refund on grants previously received for atten- 
dance at any college or university. 

5. complete a Free Application for Federal Student Aid 
(FAFSA) and submit all documentation requested by the 
Financial Aid Office; and 

6. be registered for the Draft with the Selective Service or certify 
that he/she is not required to register. 

Scholarships & Institutional 
Grants 

Scholarships 

Scholarships and awards should not be viewed as merely another 
form of financial aid, even though many scholarships and awards 
do take financial need into consideration during the review pro- 
cess. They are given to honor outstanding achievement. Many 
scholarships are available to all students and are known as general 
scholarships; other scholarships have special objectives may be 
awarded to students pursuing selected majors, underrepresented 
students, students with certain career goals, or to those living in 
certain geographic areas. 

Most scholarship applications are due the last Friday in February. 
Generally, the recipients are selected during the spring semester 
and the funds are awarded the next academic year. Full details 
regarding scholarship requirements and application deadlines are 
in the Scholarship and Awards Bulletin which is available the 
first week in December. The bulletins and applications can be 
picked up at the Financial Aid Office and all the Deans’ Offices. 

Educational Opportunity Program Grant 
(EOPG) 

The Educational Oppt'jrtunity Program Grant of the California 
State University system is available to disadvantaged undergrad- 
uate students who are residents of California and who are officially 
enrolled in the HOP (contact the EOF Office for program enroll- 
ment procedures). EOP grants range from $2(X) to $1,(XX) per 
year for a total of five academic years. 

State University Grant (SUG) 

The State University Grant is available for graduate and under- 
graduate students who are residents of California and who are 
enrolled in at least six units. All applicants who file a FAFSA w ill 
be considered for this grant. The maximum SUG for 1992/93 was 
$1098 for undergraduates and graduates. 


State Grants 

Cal Grant A & B 

The State of California, through the California Student Aid 
Commission, administers grant programs for undergraduates 
seeking a postsecondary education. To qualify for Cal Grant A or 
B, a student must be a California resident attending an eligible 
school or college within the State, must be making satisfactory 
academic progress, and must not owe a refund on any State or 
Federal grant or have defaulted on a student loan. Applicants for 
Cal Grant funds are required to complete a Free Application for 
Federal Student Aid (FAFSA) no later than March 2 prior to the 
fall semester for which the grant will be used. 

Cal Grant A is designed to assist low and middle income students 
with the cost of tuition and fees. Recipients are selected on the 
basis of financial need and grade point average. During the 1992/ 
93 academic year awards averaged approximately $940 at Califor- 
nia State University, Fullerton. 

Cal Grant B is designed to provide very low income students with 
a living allowance. In addition. Cal Grant B recipients may also 
receive assistance with tuition and fee cost. First year students 
receiving Cal Grant B will generally receive a living allowance up 
to a maximum of $ 1 , 196 for the academic year. During their 2nd, 
3rd and 4th year of postsecondary education. Cal Grant B recipi- 
ents will receive the living allowance in addition to tuition and 
fee assistance. During the academic year of 1992/93 the maxi- 
mum Cal Grant B award at California State University, Fullerton 
was approximately $2,136. 

Graduate Fellowships 

The Student Aid Commission awards approximately 5(X) Gradu- 
ate Fellowships annually. Candidates must be a legal resident of 
California, plan to pursue recognized graduate degrees at an eligi- 
ble California graduate school and must demonstrate their intent 
to become college or university faculty members. Teacher creden- 
tial or certificate programs do not meet the requirements of the 
fellowship program. 

The fellowships assist with tuition and fees at both independent 
and public colleges and universities. In 1992/93, awards averaged 
$777 at California State University, Fullerton. 

Applicants for Graduate Fellowship funds are required to com- 
plete a Free Application for Federal Student Aid (FAFSA) no 
later than March 2 prior to the fall semester for w'hich the grant 
will be used. Applicants must also submit a Graduate Fellowship 
endorsement form to the Student Aid Commission no later than 
April 10. The endorsement form serves to demonstrate the stu- 
dent’s intent to pursue a teaching career at the university or 
college level. 


94 Financial Aid 


Federal Programs 

Federal Pell Grant 

The Pell Grant program is the largest of all federal student grant 
programs and is the “foundation” of all forms of student assis- 
tance. Pell Grants are available to undergraduates who meet all 
eligibility requirements described earlier and who have not al- 
ready obtained a bachelor’s degree. The amount of the grant is 
based on financial need and ranged from $400 to $2,300 for 
students enrolled full-time during the 1993-94 award year. Part- 
time undergraduates are also eligible. Students may apply by 
completing a Free Application for Federal Student Aid 
(FAFSA). 

Federal Supplemental Educational 
Opportunity Grant (SEOG) 

The federal Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grant sup- 
plements other forms of financial assistance offered to an eligible 
student. Applicants must meet all other eligibility requirements. 
Although designed to meet the needs of undergraduate students 
with the greatest amount of need, SEOG funds are provided to 
schools and colleges by the federal government and awards to 
students are made according to the school’s awarding practices. 
Priority in awarding SEOG funds must be given to Pell Grant 
recipients. During 1992-93, award amounts to CSUF students 
ranged from $200 to $1,000. 

Federal Perkins Loans 

Perkins Loans are low-interest federal loans (5 percent interest) 
available to undergraduate and graduate students. Based on their 
demonstrated financial need, students may borrow up to $3,000 
each academic year and up to a maximum borrowing limit of 
$1 5,000 for completing an undergraduate degree. The combined 
borrowing limit for completion of undergraduate and graduate 
study is $30,000. Students borrow through the Perkins Loan 
program at their school or college and availability of funds is 
dependent on repayment of the school’s previous borrowers and 
annual federal allocations to the program. During the 1992-93 
award year, loan amounts ranged from $400 to $1,000 at CSU 
Fullerton. Interest does not accrue on the loan and there is no 
repayment while the student is enrolled at least half-time. Repay- 
ment begins nine months following graduation, withdrawal, or 
enrollment below half-time status. 

Federal Work-Study 

The College Work-Study program provides students with em- 
ployment opportunities both on and off campus. Eligibility for 
the program is determined by the school or college based on the 
student’s demonstrated financial need. Students awarded Work- 
Study receive an allocation of funds to be earned through part- 
time employment with an approved employer. The hourly wage 
will depend on the type of job and placement assistance is pro- 
vided by the school or college. Students can take advantage of 


this employment opportunity to work in areas related to their 
studies or career plan as well as to minimize their student loan 
borrowing. Undergraduates and graduate students are eligible to 
participate in the program. 

Federal Stafford Student Loan 

The Stafford Student Loan is a long-term loan made to students 
by banks, savings and loan associations and credit unions. The 
loans are guaranteed by the State of California and insured by the 
federal government. 

The federal government pays interest on the loan while the 
student is in schcxd. Six months following graduation, withdraw- 
al or less than half-time enrollment, borrowers begin repayments. 

Effective October 1, 1992, new Stafford Student Loan Ix^rrowers 
will be required to repay the loan at a variable interest rate set 
annually. The interest rate will be based on the 91 -day T-bill rate 
plus 3. 10% and capped at 9%. Borrowers with outstanding loans 
made prior to October 1, 1992 will retain their previous interest 
rate during repayment. 

Effective July 1 , 1993, first year students will be eligible to borrow 
up to $2,625 annually, second year students may borrow up to 
$3,500, and other undergraduates will be limited to $5,500 annu- 
ally. Students enrolled in a program of study for less than one 
academic year will have their loan eligibility prorated based on 
the length of the program. The aggregate loan limit for an under- 
graduate will be $23,000. 

Beginning October 1, 1993, graduate students will be eligible to 
borrow up to $8,500 annually with an aggregate borrowing limit 
of $65,500 including undergraduate loans. 

Federal Unsubsidized Stafford Student Loan 

Students who do not demonstrate sufficient financial need to 
borrow under the regular Stafford Student Loan program may 
borrow under the unsubsidized Stafford Loan. Students may bor- 
row within the loan limits and at the same interest rates as the 
regular Stafford loan program. With the exception of demon- 
strating financial need, borrowers must meet all eligibility criteria 
of the regular Stafford loan. 

Borrowers will pay a combined origination and insurance premi- 
um of 6.5% which will be deducted from the loan checks. Inter- 
est payments must begin immediately after the loan is disbursed 
or may be added to the principal balance. Regular repayment 
begins six months after the borrower graduates or is no longer 
enrolled at least half-time. 


Financial Aid 95 


Federal Supplemental Loans for Students 
(SLS) 

The SLS is available to graduate, professional and independent 
undergraduate students. The SLS program is designed to assist 
students who do not qualify for other forms of financial assistance 
and who can meet the additional burden of loan payments. 

Effective July 1, 1993, first and second year undergraduates will 
be eligible to borrow up to $4,000 each academic year while other 
undergraduates may borrow up to $5,000 each academic year. 
Students enrolled in a program that is less than one academic 
year will have their loan eligibility prorated. The aggregate loan 
limit for an undergraduate will be $23,000. Graduate students 
will be eligible to borrow up to $10,000 each academic year with 
an aggregate loan limit of $73,000 including undergraduate SLS 
loans. 

Repayment of the SLS loan begins within 60 days of receiving the 
loan. Bc^rrowers who are enrolled at least half time in an eligible 
program may defer payment of principal and pay the interest only 
or may also defer the interest which will be added to principal 
loan balance. 

Federal PLUS Parent Loans 

The PLUS program is a loan designed to assist parents in meeting 
the educational costs of their dependent. The parent is the bor- 
rower and is responsible for repayment of the loan. The PLUS 
program is designed for families who generally do not qualify for 
other forms of financial assistance and who can meet the addi- 
tional burden of loan payments. 

Beginning July 1, 1993, parents who do not have an adverse 
credit history may be eligible to borrow up to the total cost of the 
student’s education, minus any other financial aid received by the 
student. The PLUS interest rate is variable, up to a maximum 
interest rate of 10 percent. Repayment of the loan begins within 
60 days of the disbursement of the loan. Parents must repay both 
interest and principal and should check with their lender con- 
cerning deferment options. 

Application Periods 

The deadlines listed below are approximate and are subject to 
annual changes. Consult with the Financial Aid Office for cur- 
rent dates. 

Emergency Loans 

Emergency loans are available from the first day of classes until 30 
days before the end of the semester. 

Scholarships 

Applications for scholarships are due in the Financial Aid Office 
by late February. Students should contact the Financial Aid Of- 
fice for an application in mid-January. 


Bureau of Indian Affairs Grants 

Consult with the BIA for exact dates. The application deadline is 
usually in mid-June. 

Stafford Loans (Formerly GSL) 

Apply after June 1 for the fall semester and academic year, and 
after November I for the spring semester. 

Cal Grants and Graduate Fellowships 

First-time applicants must complete and mail the Free Applica- 
tion for Federal Student Aid (FAFSA) and the G.PA. Verifica- 
tion Form by March 2. 

Pell Grant only (no other aid desired) 

Apply by May 1 of the academic year for which aid is desired. 

All Other Aid 

Priority is given to FAFSA applications mailed between January 1 
and March 2 for the next academic year. 

Rights and Responsibilities of 
Students Receiving Aid 

Rights 

All students are entitled to and are guaranteed fair and equitable 
treatment in the awarding of financial aid. In addition, there 
shall be no discrimination of any kind. Appeals procedures exist 
for anyone who feels that a violation has occurred; consult with 
the director of financial aid for details. 

All students have the right to receive full and open information 
about various financial aid programs and the status of their eligi- 
bility. In addition, they have the right to know the selection and 
review processes used in awarding financial aid. 

All students have the right to know the costs of attending the 
institution, the refund policies in case of withdrawal from the 
university, the academic programs offered by the university, the 
faculty and physical facilities of the institution, and data regard- 
ing student retention at the university. 

The following information concerning student financial assis- 
tance may be obtained from the Director of Financial Aid, Mc- 
Carthy Hall LL-63, phone: (714) 773-3125: 

1. student financial assistance programs available to students 
who enroll at CSU, Fullerton; 

2. the methods by which such assistance is distributed among 
recipients who enroll at CSU, Fullerton; 

3. the means, including forms, by which application for student 
financial assistance is made and requirements for accurately 
preparing such application; 


96 Financial Aid 


4. the rights and responsibilities of students receiving financial 
assistance; and 

5. the standards the student must maintain to be considered to 
be making satisfactory progress for the purpose of establishing 
and maintaining eligibility for financial assistance. 

The following information concerning the cost of attending 
California State University, Fullerton, is available from the Di- 
rector of Financial Aid, McCarthy Hall LL-63, phone: (714) 
773-3125: 

1. fees and tuition (where applicable); 

2. estimated costs of books and supplies; 

3. estimates of typical student room and board costs and typical 
commuting costs; and 

4. any additional costs of the program in which the student is 
enrolled or expresses of specific interest. 

Responsibilities 

All financial aid recipients agree to carry and complete a specific 
number of units each semester, report graduation or withdrawal 
from the university and to notify the Financial Aid Office of any 
changes in their financial or marital status, or unit load. 

Recipients of financial aid must use the funds only to meet educa- 
tion costs. Any other use of the funds is prohibited by law. 

Students who are receiving financial aid must maintain satisfac- 
tory academic progress. See the section below for details. 

Satisfactory Academic Progress 
Standards 

The Higher Education Act, as amended, requires that students 
maintain satisfactory academic progress in the course of study 
they are pursuing according to standards and practices set by each 
college and university. 

Students should be aware that these standards must be the same 
or stricter than the standards for a student enrolled in California 
State University, Fullerton in the same academic program who is 
not receiving assistance under a Title IV program. 

Qualitative Standards (Measurement by 
Grades) 

All students, including financial aid recipients, must maintain 
scholastic academic progress as outlined in the California State 
University, Fullerton catalog. 

Students are expected to complete their educational objective, 
degree, or certificate according to the following schedule: 


Required for Degree Max. Completed Units 

Undergraduate: 

124 units (B.A.) 150 

Graduate: 

30 or more depending 50 

upon program 

A student who cannot complete his/her objective within the 
maximum attempted units outlined above according to his/her 
degree standing will not be eligible for any financial aid from any 
federal or state source. 

Successful Completion Requirement 

In order to maintain satisfactory academic progress, each student 
must have a cumulative C average or an academic standing con- 
sistent with the institution’s requirements for graduation by the 
end of the student’s second academic year. This requirement is in 
addition to the requirement that a student maintain scholastic 
academic progress at the end of each semester as defined by 
California State University, Fullerton. Since California State 
University, Fullerton academic probation and disqualification 
standards permit a student to enroll on academic probation with 
a cumulative grade-point average of 1.86 or better with fewer 
than 60 semester units, the equivalent of the end of the student’s 
second academic year, CSUF meets the provisions of the Higher 
Education Amendments of 1986. As a result, a student who 
maintains a 1.86 or better cumulative grade-point average at the 
end of the second academic year will be considered to be making 
satisfactory academic progress. 

Semester Grade Review 

Even though California State University, Fullerton will measure 
Satisfactory Academic Progress according to the number of units 
successfully completed at the end of each academic year, federal 
financial aid program regulations require each college and uni- 
versity to determine that a student is maintaining Satisfactory 
Academic Progress each payment period and each time it certifies a 
Stafford Loan or SLS. To meet this requirement, a student will 
have been certified as having made Satisfactory Academic Pro- 
gress for payment purposes at the end of the fall semester if the 
student meets the “qualitative standards” as outlined above. 

Determination of Units Completed 

The following grades will be counted in determining units suc- 
cessfully completed: A, B, C, D, CR (credit). 

SP (Satisfactory Progress) and RD (Report Delayed) will be tem- 
porarily considered as units completed provided these designations 
are replaced with an acceptable final grade within one calendar 
year from the beginning date of the semester. If the final SP grade 
is not posted within one year, the student must submit a written 
appeal to the Financial Aid Office. If a Report is Delayed beyond 
one year, the student must submit to the Financial Aid Office a 
statement from the faculty member explaining the cause for the 
extended delay. 


Financial Aid 97 


The following grades will count as units attempted but will not 
count as units completed: F, NC (No Credit), W (Withdrawal), 
AU (Audit), 1 (Incomplete), U (Unofficial Withdrawal). 

If a grade is changed after the official posting for a semester, it is 
the student’s responsibility to bring verification of the change to 
the Financial Aid Office. 

Repeated Courses: A repeated course in which the student initial- 
ly received a D or F will not count as units attempted or complet- 
ed since an improved grade will only result in a grade change and 
not additional unit credit. A repeated course in which a student 
withdrew or received an unauthorized incomplete will count as 
units attempted and completed. 

Remedial Courses will be considered as units completed for pur- 
poses of reviewing a student’s Satisfactory Academic Progress 
only when the university or department requires a student to take 
a remedial course(s) as part of his/her program whether or not the 
student receives unit credit towards graduation. 

Failure to Maintain Satisfactory Academic 
Progress 

A student who fails to maintain the qualitative or quantitative 
measurement standards will be defined as having failed to main- 
tain Satisfactory Academic Progress and will be ineligible to 
receive any federal or state financial aid. 

Reinstatement of Financial Aid Eligibility 

Students whose financial aid eligibility has been terminated for 
failure to complete the minimum number of units may have their 
aid eligibility reevaluated when the deficit units are completed 
and the student has demonstrated capability of making satisfac- 
tory academic progress in accordance with the incremental com- 
pletion rate. 

Appeal 

Students who fail to meet the Satisfactory Academic Progress 
standards and who are disqualified from financial aid eligibility 
may appeal their disqualification to the Director of Financial Aid 
by completing and submitting a written appeal within 10 days of 
receipt of the “Notification of Financial Aid Disqualification.” 
No appeal will be approved unless the mitigating circumstance is 
unique and compelling, e.g., documented injury which prevent- 
ed the student from attending classes, parental or spousal death, 
extended illness, etc. 

The “Financial Aid Petition” is available in the Financial Aid 
Office. 

Eligibility for Multiple Degrees 

Students will be eligible to receive financial aid towards the 
completion of their first bachelor’s degree and towards their first 
graduate degree. 


Refund Policy 

As stated in the appropriate CSUF Class Schedule, a student may 
be entitled to a refund of fees if he/she withdraws from the 
University or drops units. If a student received financial aid, fee 
refunds will be credited partially or completely to various finan- 
cial aid accounts according to the formulas below: 

Since financial aid is awarded to help meet educational costs, 
financial aid is considered to be used first for direct educational 
costs (fees). Therefore, if a student withdraws and is scheduled to 
receive a refund of fees, all or part of this refund will be used to 
reimburse the financial aid program(s) from which the student 
received funds. 

If a student received financial aid in excess of direct fees, a 
repayment of additional financial aid funds may be required. 

I. Refund to be returned to Title IV programs: 

A = Amount of fee refunded 

B = Total Title IV aid (excluding CWS) for semester Total 
aid awarded (excluding CWS) for semester. 

A X B = Amount of refund to Title IV 

II. Distribution order of Title IV portion of refund among Title 
IV programs: 

1. Perkins (not to exceed the amount disbursed) 

2. SEOG (not to exceed the amount disbursed) 

3. PELL (not to exceed the amount disbursed) 

4. Stafford (not to exceed the amount disbursed) 

5. SLS (not to exceed the amount disbursed) 

III. When the Stafford is the only Title IV aid received (exclud- 
ing CWS) the following distribution formula will be used: 

Refund to Stafford = Amount of Stafford Estimated 

cost of attendance for 
loan period 

IV. Any remaining refund amount not credited to Title IV pro- 
grams as per the above formulas will be distributed as follows: 

1. EOPG (not to exceed the amount disbursed) 

2. SUG (not to exceed the amount disbursed) 

3. Student (remaining amount of refund) 

Disclaimer: Federal legislation governing the federal student aid 
programs will likely result in a modification to the 
current refund policy and distribution order of funds 
returned to the federal student aid programs. Any 
modification to the current refund policy was still 
pending at the time of printing. Students may check 
with the Financial Aid Office for current informa- 
tion on the refund policy. 


98 Financial Aid 


Repayment Policy 

Since financial aid is awarded to help meet educational costs, 
financial aid is considered to be used first for direct educational 
costs (fees). Therefore, if a student withdraws and is scheduled to 
receive a refund of fees, all or part of this refund will be used to 
reimburse the financial aid program(s) from which the student 
received funds. 

If a student received financial aid in excess of direct fees, a 
repayment of additional financial aid funds may be required. 

Students who receive financial aid and later terminate their 
enrollment by dropping out or by withdrawing and who received 
cash disbursements of Title IV financial aid for payment of their 
non'institutional costs require institutional review to determine 
if there has been an overpayment, and therefore, if a repayment is 


required. Repayment designates the amount that a student must 
repay of the funds he/she received in cash that could not have 
reasonably been spent for non-institutional costs during the por- 
tion of the term that the student was enrolled. 

Total Title IV funds disbursed in cash to the student minus Stafr 
ford, SLS, CWS minus non-institutional costs paid by the stu- 
dent from the disbursement for the portion of the payment period 
during which the student was enrolled (room, board, books, 
supplies, transportation, miscellaneous expenses) = overpay- 
ment. 

Overpayment X Total amount of Title IV (minus CWS, Stafford, 
SLS) -r Total amount of aid (minus CWS, Staf- 
ford, SLS) = Title IV Repayment 

Order of distribution for repayment: Perkins, SEOG, then Pell. 


Financial Aid 99 


• : .4i ui,. a. i:^-',:: '/rh ,io 

rjdl ;.'1' '-'J.» ;*•/ }'.( ■_,■ 1 ;T3«:fTi-n()n Tf>i 

rr vr ,j;. n'i: Ol 'W;-' n ✓Vn/t ’/'! ^1 ; ! 

..>; .'if i' K*' { ffao !i.rr,-;) :tt5, •. ^'v^) ,■ : ,' 

h i'-ii ;i .. M in;^!- 

■'■ ;x. 'i A' I . { ■> >^A..sy -4i» -fiy.a'VJ 

, ' ’ ■ i ■ ,r.' 'KKjlfV 

aa'*‘n 


■*• • -‘a 'i 

I’L? • • \X- TC;t V -: - 

^>rl fl''^' L'!.,jtv; i ^ if 


s -fi *, •; Hf 


ti. -i ■■:• .f.-'--' <^-j.:.i\ '>■ 


i\- 



, 1“ ; .ii'T ■ 

v -.. h'' .‘v' '.iy‘ny>r 


'^: 'ft ijjoF K WU.,r, 

■■ !' - r 

1-' .1 '^1 

's tpi • '■•‘i; t* ' * ^ 


:c>7 •jvr *3 Ti'/'fi bf!»i 1 i; ij 
' v ‘-.r'iii ;gn jv.fr: ' , • ,’ 

■ v;^w\r»7 ‘ f L '■ 

. nil ,0i' >*■■>•'•.. n t-rrf t 




, V 


V .'F; 




^ 1 . 



.-<;••■ 





■ r 'vi";' 



'> <. i ' 

V 

! y. Ariv v u 

', . '■: 


• ■ ’ >:/ 7'^-: A 

■ ' * ) *■ 

:/ 

^T#Uv»A(;‘|?Ct.th;' ri '. 

-•;< •• • 1'. 

. ' 7, ■ ■ ■ ' 

■• . r ■:, ■■ 'r<^ !> 

i. EOK tw. 

A «.f !■' 

- .v: ■ . ;, ■ • ’. 

• *■, r r-'P'-' 

Sl.’0 ^ . c 



..;■ ‘ . , -:! .' ' ifl., 

3. $md<*nr (/ '^Tja-r. 




Disclsf^Atr: 



‘ '. ‘ 'ViJ 

• ■ ;v. ^ 








?•• •f'vK..' ’ 

1 i, ^ ‘ / i \ 

. : - -f:’ ^ 


r ■ -.■,•■;• -y;. 


V-; 

.• a ' irvF 



• •■ ■ . 1 . . . : 

'■ ■ ‘ . " !v :r * 





hit-^ VfiV.'iOiif r ‘i 


4 .;n i \ 

. ’■;> ‘i , j- A ki i*frui.fi ‘7 
■ ly' Hit ffh 

. '•■ . . ••'■ 

' il 

: - a; r > • upti-.f' • 

■; lif ./ hi.:.:.i 

t>. .'n»{rit: o;va’ .' ■ '?hiJlS 

■' • ; tw) ;^; 7rj-^fnl!‘na3 

1 /.i bi'f v : /iiMiO 

: " i : j ' * : oiinDfi 

. : » I'fvo niv ^ i ‘■7 j;ij1r 


' jv • • V -rtni* 

:. ‘ •■ -r't;,; :• 















University Resulations 


6a 


^ /p.aa--. , 6<^ 

,kM®, !J«“ , irte->^, 

f:>!^<!r 


y0^‘ 


(!<*», .0^,,J«< 




..eat^,. 1^0- 


g^ e>i^ i^e< 


M 




gcalal^ ,^eal>^ u 






e^"',..eai>^.,^eai> 


6‘ 


Vr 




^ ^ 6ai>^ K.e<^ ,> 


gotal^ ,,eat^ ^ 


gola^ U®^- 






6 ' 




,,iM pd^ i.ea^, 

' g^iiaH ,.,,6a^..i^6<^ 


Calais 6ala>^ 


University Regulations 

Each student is responsible for meeting the requirements printed 
in the university catalog and all published regulations of the 
university. 

The university establishes certain academic policies and require^ 
ments which must be met before a degree is granted. These 
include major and unit requirements and prerequisites. While 
advisors, directors, deans and faculty will provide a student with 
information and advice, responsibility for meeting these require- 
ments rests with the student. Since failure to satisfy these require- 
ments may result in the degree being withheld, it is important for 
each student to become thoroughly acquainted with all regula- 
tions. The catalog and the semester class schedule, available in 
the Titan Bookstore, are the best sources of information on 
current policy and regulations. 

The student also has the responsibility for securing the consent of 
the instructor before enrolling in a course with prerequisites that 
the student has not completed. 

To ensure receipt of timely information and accurate grade re- 
ports from the university, each student must keep the Office of 
Admissions and Records informed of changes in personal data, 
including changes in name, address and program of study. Enroll- 
ment corrections and changes must be reported to the registrar by 
the 20th day of classes each semester, using Change of Program 
forms. Between the 15th and 20th day of classes, a $20 adminis- 
trative late fee will be required to make such changes. Other 
corrections should be reported on forms provided by and returned 
to the Office of Admissions and Records. 


102 University Regulations 


Enrollment Regulations 


Unit of Credit 

Each semester unit represents three hours of university work per 
week for one semester. Courses are of three types: 

Lecture: one hour in class plus two hours of study. 

Activity: two hours of class plus one hour of study. 
Laboratory: three hours of laboratory activity in class plus 
one hour of study outside class. 

Some courses may combine two or more of these types. All 
required courses carry unit credit. 

Class Levels 

Undergraduate students who have completed 0-29 semester units 
of work are classified as freshmen, 30-59 semester units as sopho- 
mores, 60-89 semester units as juniors, and 90 or more as seniors. 

Maximum Number of Units 

Undergraduate students’ requests to enroll for more than 19 units 
must be approved by the student’s advisor and the department 
chair of the major. If such requests are denied, appeals may be 
made to the appropriate school dean. (Undeclared majors must 
receive the approval of the coordinator of undergraduate studies. ) 
The minimum full-time program is 12 units. 

A student whose academic record justifies a study list in excess of 
the normal may request to be allowed to enroll for extra units. 
Request forms may be obtained from the Office of Admissions 
and Records. In general, only students with superior academic 
records are allowed to enroll for more than the maximum. In 
addition, the need to enroll for the extra study must be estab- 
lished. Factors such as time spent in employment or commuting, 
the nature of the academic program, extracurricular activities 
and the student’s health should be considered in planning a study 
program. Students who are employed or have outside responsibil- 
ities are advised to reduce their program of study. 

The minimum and maximum units of a full-time program of study 
for graduate students are defined in the “Graduate Regulations” 
section of this catalog. 

Graduate Level Courses 

Graduate level (500) courses are organized primarily for graduate 
students. Undergraduate students may be permitted to enroll in a 
graduate level course if: 

a. they have reached senior status (completed a minimum of 90 
semester units) 


b. have the academic preparation and prerequisites required for 
entry into the course 

c. gain the consent of the instructor. 

Students wishing to use 500-level coursework taken during their 
undergraduate degree toward a master’s degree should read the 
section on postgraduate credit in the “Graduate Regulations” 
section of this catalog. 

Class Attendance 

While class attendance is not recorded officially by the universi- 
ty, regular attendance in class is often essential to success in a 
course. The policy on class attendance is within the discretion of 
the individual faculty member and shall be announced by the 
faculty member at the first class meeting of the semester. 

Initial Class Meeting 

It is especially important that students attend the first meeting of 
a class. Students absent from the first meeting and who fail to 
notify the instructor or departmental office no later than 24 hours 
after the class meeting may be denied admission to the class. 
Instructors may deny admission to absentees to admit persons on 
waiting lists. 

Instructor-Initiated Drops 

A student who registers for a class and whose name appears on the 
first-day-of-class list should attend all class meetings in the first 
week. If the student is absent without notifying the instructor or 
departmental office within 24 hours after any meeting missed 
during that week, the student may then be dropped administra- 
tively from the class by the instructor; however, ultimately it is the 
students responsibility to ensure that he/she has been dropped from the 
class and if not, to follow the appropriate procedures for withdrawing 
from the class. An instructor may also administratively drop a 
student who does not meet prerequisites for the course. These 
administrative withdrawals shall be without penalty and must be 
filed by the instructor with the registrar no later than the end of 
the second week of instruction (the specific date is published in 
the class schedule each semester). 


Enrollment Regulations 1 03 


Grading Policies 

Grading System 

Every student of the university will have all course work evaluate 
ed and reported by the faculty using letter grades or administra^ 
tive symbols. 

The university uses a combination of traditional and nontradi- 
tional grading options as follows: 

Traditional 

Option 1. Letter grades, defined as: 

A — outstanding performance 
B — above average performance 
C — average performance 

D — below average performance, though passing 
F — failure 

Nontraditional 

Option 2. CR (Credit) for satisfactory (equivalent to C or better 
in undergraduate courses; B or better in graduate courses) and 
NC (No Credit) for less than satisfactory work. 

When, because of circumstances, a student does not complete a 
particular course, or withdraws, certain administrative symbols 
may be assigned by the faculty. Grades and symbols are listed in a 
chart on the following page together with grade-point values. 
The chart also illustrates the academic Ixx^kkeeping involved for 
all grades and symbols used. 

Selection of Grading Option 

Selection of a grading option, with certain exceptions, is the 
responsibility of the student. Graduate students must use Option 
1 for courses that are on study plans leading to master’s degrees. 
Undergraduates must use Option 1 for major, minor and general 
education requirements. 

Exceptions are those courses designated by the faculty to be 
graded solely on either an Option I or Option 2 basis. 

These courses will be so designated in the class schedule (and 
shall not be changed by the faculty after publication of the class 
schedule) for each semester and may be included in major, core or 
special program requirements. 

Students shall inform the registrar up to the end of the third week 
of classes regarding the selection of grading options in designated 
courses. If a student does not do so, Option 1 will be used. 



104 Grading Policies 


The faculty shall grade all students using the traditional A, B, C, 
D or F grades except in Credit/No Credit courses, and the regis' 
trar shall make the necessary changes from A, B, C, D or F, 
converting A, B, C to Credit, and D and F to No Credit in 
undergraduate courses and A, B to Credit, and C, D and F to No 
Credit in graduate courses. In those courses offered only on a 
Credit/No Credit basis, the instructor shall assign grades of CR or 
NC or appropriate administrative symbols. 

Nontraditional Grade Option 

A nontraditional grading option is available to undergraduate 
students, nonobjective graduate students and to classified gradu- 
ate students for courses not included in the approved study plan. 
Any student attempting a course using the nontraditional grad- 
ing option must meet the prerequisites for that course. Each 
student shall be permitted to select courses in subjects outside of 
the major, minor and general education requirements for enroll- 
ment on a Credit/No Credit basis (grading Option 2). The phrase 
“major requirements” shall be taken to include core plus concen- 
tration (or option) requirements in departments using such 
terms, and professional course requirements in teacher education 
curricula. A student in any one term may take one course under 
Option 2. In addition, he or she may enroll in a required course 
offered only under Option 2; however, a maximum of 36 units of 
Credit/No Credit courses, including those transferred from other 
institutions, may be counted toward the baccalaureate. 

Under Option 2 the term “Credit” signifies that the student’s 
academic performance was such that he or she was awarded full 
credit in undergraduate courses with a quality level of achieve- 
ment equivalent to a C grade or better. In all graduate level and 
professional education courses Credit signifies academic perfor- 
mance equivalent to B or A grades. No Credit signifies that the 
student attempted the course but that the performance did not 
warrant credit toward the objective. 

Ordinarily, a student shall be limited to one nonmajor course per 
term using this option, exclusive of courses offered only on a 
Credit/No Credit basis. 

When an undergraduate student changes his or her major field of 
study to one where he or she has completed courses with CR 
grades, such lower division courses shall be included in major 
requirements. Upper division courses may be included at the 
option of the department upon petition by the student. 


ADVISORY CAUTION: Undergraduate students who 
plan to pursue graduate or professional studies later are 
advised to be selective in opting for courses on a credit/no 
credit basis. As a general rule (advisory only), course work 
that is preparatory or prerequisite to advanced specialized 
study should be completed and evaluated on a letter grade 
basis and not Credit/No Credit. 


Grade or 



Grade 


Symbol 

Units 

Units 

Point 

Full 

Option 1 

Attempted 

Earned 

Value 

Credit 

A 

Yes 

Yes 

4 

Yes 

B 

Yes 

Yes 

3 

Yes 

C 

Yes 

Yes 

2 

Yes 

D 

Yes 

Yes 

1 

No 

F 

Yes 

No 

0 

No 

Option 2 





CR 

• 

Yes 

None 

Yes 

NC 

• 

No 

None 

No 

Administrative 





Symbols 





1 (Incomplete 





authorized) 

t 

No 



U (Unauthorized 





incomplete) .... 

Yes 

No 

0 

No 

W (Withdrawal) 

No 

No 

None 

No 

WF (Withdraw- 





al)tt 

Yes 

No 

0 

No 

AU (Audit) .... 

No 

No 

None 

No 

SP (Satisfactory 





progress) 

No 

No 

None 

No 

RD (Report 





delayed) 

No 

No 

None 

No 

TOTALS 

Used 

Counted 

Used 



In 

in 

Toward 



GPA 

Objective 

GPA 



*Credit/No Credit course units are not included in GPA computations. 

tif not completed within one semester the I will he changed to an F (or NC). 

ttEffeciive fall 1991, this symbol is no longer assigned. 

Administrative Symbols 

Incomplete Authorized (I) 

The symbol 1 signifies that a portion of required course work has 
not been completed and evaluated in the prescribed time period 
owing to unforeseen but fully justified reasons and that there is 
still a possibility of earning credit. It is the responsibility of the 
student to bring pertinent information to the instructor and to 
reach agreement on the means by which the remaining course 
requirements will be satisfied. A final grade is assigned when the 
work agreed upon has been completed and evaluated. 

An Incomplete must be made up during the semester immediate- 
ly following the end of the term in which it was assigned. This 
limitation prevails whether or not the student maintains con- 
tinuous enrollment. Failure to complete the assigned work will 
result in an Incomplete being changed to an F or an NC. 

A grade of Incomplete may be given only when, in the opinion of 
the instructor, a student cannot complete a course during the 
semester of enrollment for reasons beyond the student’s control. 


Grading Policies 105 


Such reasons are assumed to include; illness of the student or of 
members of the student’s immediate family, extraordinary finan- 
cial problems, loss of outside position and other exigencies. In 
assigning a grade of I, the instructor shall file with the depart- 
ment for future reference and student access a Statement of 
Requirements for Completion of Course Work. The requirements 
shall not include retaking the course. The instructor will also 
designate a time limit (up to one semester) for completing re- 
quirements. Upon request, a copy of the document will be fur- 
nished to the student. The student should review this statement 
at the earliest opportunity. 

The statement of requirements will include an indication of the 
quality of the student’s work to date. This not only provides an 
interim evaluation for the student but assists the department 
chair in assigning a final grade in those instances where the 
instructor is no longer available. 

When the specific requirements are completed, the instructor 
will report a change of grade. The responsibility for changing the 
incomplete grade rests with the instructor. 

Withdrawal (W) 

Students may withdraw from class during the first two weeks of 
instruction. After that time students should complete all courses 
in which they are enrolled. 

The university authorizes withdrawal after the first two weeks of 
instruction and prior to the last three weeks of instruction only 
with the approval of the instructor and the department chair 
(and, in some cases, the school dean). All requests for permission 
to withdraw and all approvals shall be made in writing on the 
Change of Program form and shall be filed at the Office of 
Admissions and Records by students or their proxies. 

Prior to the 20th day of instruction, students may withdraw from 
classes without record of enrollment. After the 20th day of 
classes, students should complete all courses in which they are 
enrolled. Authorization to withdraw after census shall be granted 
for only the most serious reasons i.e. a physical, medical, emo- 
tional or other condition which has the effect of limiting the 
student’s full participation in the class. Such reasons must be 
documented by the student. Poor academic performance is not 
evidence of a serious reason for withdrawal. Signatures of the 
instructor and department chair are required for each course. In 
some departments, the signature of the associate dean is also 
required. Withdrawal from a class is signified by a grade of “W”. 
Such grades are not included in grade point average calculations. 

Students may not withdraw^ during the final three weeks of in- 
struction except in cases, appropriately documented, such as 
accident or serious illness, where the assignment of an Incom- 
plete is not practicable. Ordinarily, withdrawals of this nature 
will involve withdrawal from all classes except that Credit or 
Incomplete Authorized (I) may be assigned for courses in which 


students have completed sufficient work to permit an evaluation 
to be made. Requests for permission to withdraw from all classes 
under these circumstances, with authorizations as described 
above, shall be submitted with Change of Program forms by the 
students (or their proxies) to the registrar. 

Unauthorized Incomplete (U) 

The symbol U indicates that an enrolled student did not with- 
draw from the course but failed to complete course requirements. 
It is used when, in the opinion of the instructor, completed 
assignments or course activities or both were insufficient to make 
normal evaluation of academic performance possible. For pur- 
poses of grade-point average computations this symbol is equiv- 
alent to an F. 

Students may petition for retroactive withdrawal from individual 
courses or from an entire semester, provided they can document 
both the serious and compelling reasons or circumstances that 
required the withdrawal and the date of such withdrawal. Such a 
petition must be filed within 30 days after the first class day of the 
following semester. 


ADVISORY NOTE: Students who unofficially withdraw 
and who are receiving financial aid or benefits which are 
dependent on completion of specified course units are 
advised that they may have such benefits suspended and 
may be subject to repayment of allowances received after 
date of unofficial withdrawal. 


Audit (AU) 

The symbol AU is used by the registrar in those instances where a 
student has enrolled in a course either for information or other 
purposes not related to the student’s formal academic objective. 
Enrollment as an auditor is subject to the permission of the 
instructor, provided that enrollment in any course as an auditor 
shall be permitted only after students otherwise eligible to enroll 
in the course on a credit basis have had an opportunity to do so. 
Auditors are subject to the same fees as credit students and 
regular class attendance is expected. Once enrolled as an auditor, 
a student may not change to credit status unless such a change is 
requested prior to the last day to add classes. A student who is 
enrolled for credit may not change to audit after the third week of 
instruction. An auditor is not permitted to take examinations in 
the course; therefore, there is no basis for evaluation nor a formal 
grade report. 

Satisfactory Progress (SP) 

The SP symbol is used in connection with thesis, project or 
similar courses that extend beyond one academic term. It indi- 
cates that work is in progress, and has been evaluated and found 
to be satisfactory to date, but that assignment of a final grade 
must aw'ait completion of additional course work. Cumulative 
enrollment in units attempted may not exceed the total number 


106 Grading Policies 



applicable to the student’s educational objective. Work is to be 
completed within a stipulated period which may not exceed one 
year except for graduate degree theses or projects for which the 
time may be longer, but may not exceed the overall limit for 
completion of all master’s degree requirements. Any extension of 
time must receive prior authorization by the dean of the school 
(or the dean’s designee) in which the course is offered. 

Report Delayed (RD) 

The RD symbol is used where a delay in the reporting of a final 
grade is due to circumstances beyond the control of the student. 
TTe symbol is assigned by the registrar and will be replaced as 
soon as possible. An RD shall not be included in calculation of a 
grade-point average. 

Student Records 

Grade Reports to Students 

A report of the final grades assigned in classes is sent to each 
student at the end of each semester. Many students also leave 
self-addressed post cards for instructors of specific courses to send 
them earlier reports. 

Class Grade^Point Averages 

Beginning with the fall semester 1978, information is included 
on student grade reports and permanent academic records that is 
intended to depict the level of achievement of students in rela- 
tion to other students in a particular class. The information is 
displayed in parentheses before each course grade. The first set of 
figures indicates the number of students officially completing the 
course and the second set is the class grade-point average. In 
making the computations, marks of W,l, CR, NC, and SP are 
excluded. This same information is displayed for summer session 
classes, but not for extension or intersession classes sponsored by 
the Office of Extended Education. 

Examinations 

Final examinations, if required by the instructor, will be given at 
times scheduled by the university. Once established, the final 
examination schedule may not be changed unless approved by 
the dean of the school. No makeup final examination will be 
given except for reason of illness or other verified emergencies. 

Credit by Examination 

Students may be granted credit toward the baccalaureate and to 
meet curriculum requirements in certain designated courses by 
the satisfactory completion of challenge examinations in the 
courses. The examinations are to be comprehensive and adminis- 
tered by the sponsoring departments. Well in advance of the 
semester in which a challenge examination is to be administered, 
the student, using the appropriate university form, will secure 
written approval of his or her major advisor and the chair of the 
department in which the course is offered. In general, prior work 
or academic experience will be required. 


Courses to be offered as challenge examinations will be deter- 
mined by the academic departments. Matriculated students may 
either enroll in these courses during registration or add them 
during the first three weeks of the semester. The examination 
must be administered not later than the end of the third week of 
instruction. 

Upon successful completion of the examination, the instructor 
will report the grade of CR. Students who fail the challenge 
examination may elect to continue the course for credit or may 
officially withdraw from the course through the normal class 
withdrawal procedure. The challenge examination for any course 
may be administered only once. 

A maximum of 30 credits can be earned by challenge examina- 
tion, including those earned by advanced placement. Credit by 
examination may not be used to fulfill the minimum residence 
requirements. 

Grade-Point Averages 

The numerical grade-point values in the grading system chart are 
intended to give an exact determination t)f a student’s scholastic 
standing. To compute the grade-point average for course work at 
Fullerton, the grade-point value of each grade, with the exception 
noted in the “Repetition of Courses” section, is multiplied first by 
the unit value of each course to obtain a total of all grade points 
earned. The total is then divided by the total units attempted in all 
courses in which grades of A, B, C, D, F, U and WF were received. 
The resulting figure is the grade-point average. 

Repetition of Courses 

Undergraduate students may repeat courses at California State 
University, Fullerton for which D or failing grades were earned 
either at Cal State Fullerton or at other institutions; in repeating 
such courses, the traditional grading system shall be used. In 
computing the grade-point average of a student who repeats 
courses in which he or she received D or failing grades, only the 
most recently earned grades and grade points shall be used for the 
first 16 units repeated. Nevertheless, the original grade on the 
academic record shall not be changed or eradicated. 

In exercising this option, an undergraduate student must repeat the 
course at Cal State Fullerton and may request application of this 
policy when a course has been repeated. This should be accom- 
plished using the appropriate form, immediately following the term 
in which the course has been completed, so that the student’s grade- 
point average can be revised. In the absence of student requests, 
courses successfully repeated are routinely credited by the Office of 
Admissions and Records during disqualification cycles and degree 
requirement reviews at the time of graduation. 

This policy may also be applied to courses in which U or WF 
grades were assigned, as a means of eliminating such marks from 
grade-point average computations. 


Grading Policies 107 


In the case of any repetition beyond the Ib'unit limit or in 
courses for which a C or better grade was awarded, both grades 
are considered in computing grade-point averages. Successful 
repetition of a course originally passed carries no additional unit 
credit toward a degree or credential except for certain courses 
such as independent study, practicum, or other courses specified 
in this catalog as “may be repeated for credit.” 

Students transferring from other colleges where courses were 
taken and repeated may be eligible for consideration under this 
policy. In general, the policy of the college where the course was 
repeated shall be followed; however, units for the courses taken 
and repeated at the transfer institution are included in the lb- 
unit limitation. 

Subject to the following restrictions, if a graduate or postbacca- 
laureate student (excluding students with a second bachelors 
degree objective) repeats courses for which a grade of U (unauth- 
orized incomplete) was received, only the most recently earned 
grade(s) and grade points shall be used in computing the grade 
point average; however, the original U grade(s) will remain on 
the permanent record. This policy may be applied only to grades 
earned during the first semester in which U grades are received. 
Repeated courses must be taken at Cal State Fullerton using the 
traditional grading system. Students who have successfully re- 
peated U-graded courses must notify the Admissions and Records 
office using the appropriate form if they wish adjustment to their 
grade p<^)int averages. 

Grade Changes 

The university recognizes the long-standing prerogatives of facul- 
ty to set standards of performance and to apply them to individual 
students. The university will seek to correct injustices to students 
but at the same time believes that the instructor’s judgment at the 
time the original grade is assigned is better than a later reconsi- 
deration of an individual case. Equity to all students is of funda- 
mental concern. The following policies apply to changes of 
grades except for changes of Incomplete Authorized and Unauth- 
orized Incomplete symbols. 

1. In general, all course grades are final when filed by the in- 
structor in the end-of-term course grade report. Each student 
is notified by mail of the grades earned during the term, and 
these grades become a part of the official record. 

2. A change of grade may occur only in cases of clerical error, 
administrative error, or where the instructor reevaluates the 
original course assignments of a student and discovers an error 
in the original evaluation. A clerical error is an error made by 
the instructor or an assistant in calculating or recording the 
grade. A change of grade shall not occur as a consequence of 
the acceptance of additional work or reexamination beyond 
the specified course requirements. 


3. A request for a change of grade shall be initiated by the 
student affected and shall be directed to the instructor within 
60 calendar days of the first day of classes of the regular 
semester following the award of the original grade. If the 
instructor determines that there is a valid basis for the change, 
a Change of Grade form shall be used to notify the Office of 
Admissions and Records. These forms are available in depart- 
ment offices and are not to be handled by students. If the 
instructor determines that there is not a valid basis for the 
change, and denies the student’s request, the instructor’s deci- 
sion is final. TTie student may file a petition with the Academ- 
ic Appeals Board on the basis of capricious or prejudicial 
treatment by the instructor. 

4. The Change of Grade form completed and signed by the 
instructor, noting the basis for the change, shall not be ac- 
cepted by the registrar unless approved separately by the de- 
partment chair and school dean. 

5. If a request for change of grade is initiated after 60 calendar 
days into the following semester, it will be approved only in 
extraordinary circumstances. An explanation of such circum- 
stances must accompany the request and must be approved 
separately by the instructor, department chair, and the dean 
before acceptance by the registrar. 

Academic Dishonesty 

Academic dishonesty includes such things as cheating, inventing 
false information or citations, plagiarism, and helping someone 
else commit an act of academic dishonesty. It usually involves an 
attempt by a student to show possession of a level of knowledge or 
skill which he or she does not possess. 

Cheating is defined as the act of obtaining or attempting to 
obtain credit for work by the use of any dishonest, deceptive, 
fraudulent or unauthorized means. Examples of cheating include, 
but are not limited to: using notes or aids or the help of other 
students on tests and examinations in ways other than those 
expressly permitted by the instructor, plagiarism as defined be- 
low, tampering with the grading procedures, and collaborating 
with others on any assignment where such collaboration is ex- 
pressly forbidden by an instructor. 

Plagiarism is defined as the act of taking the specific substance of 
another and offering it as one’s own without giving credit to the 
source. When sources are used, acknowledgment of the original 
author or source must be made following standard scholarly 
practice. 

TTe initial responsibility for detecting and dealing with academic 
dishonesty lies with the instructor concerned. An instructor who 
believes that an act of academic dishonesty has occurred is obligated 
to discuss the matter with the student involved. The instructor 
should possess reasonable evidence, such as documents or personal 
obseiA'ation. However, if circumstances prevent consultation with 
the student, the instructor may take whatever action, subject to 
student appeal, the instructor deems appropriate. 


108 Grading Policies 


An instructor who is convinced by the evidence that a student is 
guilty of academic dishonesty shall: 

1 . Assign an appropriate academic penalty. This may range from 
an oral reprimand to an F in the course. To the extent that the 
faculty member considers the academic dishonesty to mani- 
fest the student’s lack of scholarship and to reflect on the 
student’s academic performance and academic integrity in a 
course, the student’s grade should be adversely affected. Sug- 
gested guidelines for appropriate actions are an oral reprimand 
in cases where there is reasonable doubt that the student knew 
that his or her action constituted academic dishonesty; an F 
on the particular paper, project or examination where the act 
of dishonesty was unpremeditated, or where there were sig- 
nificant mitigating circumstances, or an F in the course where 
the dishonesty was premeditated or planned. 

2. Report to the student involved, to the department chair, and 
to the vice president for student affairs the alleged incident of 
academic dishonesty, including relevant documentation, and 
make recommendations for action that he or she deems 
appropriate. 

The vice president for student affairs shall maintain an academic 
dishonesty file of all cases of academic dishonesty with the appro- 
priate documentation. Students shall be informed when their 
names are inserted into the file and provided with copies of any 
appeals or disciplinary procedures in which they may become 
involved. The vice president for student affairs or his or her 
designees may initiate disciplinary proceedings under Title 5, 
California Code of Regulations, Section 41301, and Chancellor’s 
Executive Order 148; when two or more incidents involving the 
same student occur, he or she shall do so. Opportunities for 
appeal regarding sanctions resulting from disciplinary proceed- 
ings are provided by Executive Order 148. 

A student may appeal any action taken on a charge of academic 
dishonesty under the University Policy Statement 300.030, “Ac- 
ademic Appeals.” If the Academic Appeals Board decides that a 
student is innocent of academic dishonesty, then no entry shall 
be made in the academic dishonesty file. 

If the Academic Appeals Board decides either that a student is 
innocent of academic dishonesty, or that a faculty member has 
acted arbitrarily or capriciously towards a student, it shall instruct 
the faculty member to meet with his or her department chair and, 
if appropriate, the dean of the school for the purpose of reassess- 
ing the student’s performance. If the faculty member refuses to do 
so, or if the Board’s recommendation does not specify a particular 
grade as the one to be assigned, the matter shall be referred to an 
ad hoc committee, to be established by the department, which 
shall have ultimate authority to act in the case. 

Academic Renewal 

Under certain circumstances, the university may disregard up to 
two semesters or three quarters of previous undergraduate course 


work taken at any college or university from all considerations 
associated with requirements for the baccalaureate. These cir- 
cumstances are: 

1. that the student has requested the action formally and has 
presented evidence that work completed in the terms under 
consideration is substandard and not representative of present 
scholastic ability and level of performance; and 

2. that the level of performance represented by the terms under 
consideration was due to extenuating circumstances; and 

3. that there is every evidence that the student would find it 
necessary to complete additional terms to qualify for the bac- 
calaureate if the request were not approved. 

Final determination that one or more terms shall be disregarded 
in the determination of eligibility for graduation shall be based 
upon a careful review of evidence by the Review Committee for 
Academic Renewal and shall be made only when: 

1. five years have elapsed since the most recent work to be 
disregarded was completed; and 

2. the student has completed at Fullerton, since the most recent 
work to be disregarded was completed, 1 5 semester units with 
at least a 3.0 grade-point average, or 30 semester units with at 
least a 2.5 GPA, or 45 semester units with at least a 2.0 GPA. 
Work completed at another institution cannot be used to 
satisfy this requirement. 

When such action is taken, the student’s permanent academic 
record shall be annotated so that it is readily evident to all users of 
the record that no work taken during the disregarded terms, even 
if satisfactory, may apply toward baccalaureate requirements. All 
work must remain legible on the record ensuring a true and 
complete academic history. 

This policy is not intended to merely allow students a means by 
which they may improve their overall grade-point averages. 

Transcripts 

Official transcripts of courses taken at the university are issued 
only with the written permission of the student concerned. Par- 
tial transcripts are not issued. A fee of $4 for each transcript must 
be received before the transcript can be released. 

Normally, transcripts are available within three working days, 
except at the end of the semester when the student should allow 
about 10 days after the last day of the semester. 

Transcripts from other institutions, which have been presented 
for admission or evaluation, become a part of the student’s per- 
manent academic file and are not returned or copied for distribu- 
tion. Students desiring transcripts covering work attempted else- 
where should request them from the institutions concerned. 


Grading Policies 109 


Continuous Residency 
Regulations 


Good Standing 

Good standing indicates that a student is eligible to continue and 
is free from financial obligation to the university. A student 
under academic disqualification, disciplinary suspension or disci* 
plinary expulsion is not eligible to receive a statement of good 
standing on transcripts issued by the university or on other docu* 
ments. 

Choice of Requirements 

A student remaining in continuous attendance in regular sessions 
and continuing in the same curriculum at any campus of the 
California community colleges or in any combination of Califor- 
nia community colleges and campuses of The California State 
University may, for purposes of meeting graduation require- 
ments, elect to meet the graduation requirements of such cam- 
puses from which he or she will graduate in effect either at the 
time of entering the curriculum or at the time of graduation 
therefrom, except that substitutions for discontinued courses may 
be authorized or required by the proper university authorities. 

Stop-Out Policy 

With certain exceptions, undergraduate students and postbacca- 
laureate unclassified students may be absent for one semester and 
maintain their continuing student status. This includes election 
of curriculum requirements for graduation and eligibility to regis- 
ter for the next semester. The exceptions are as follows: 

Disqualified Students — Students who are disqualified at the 
end of a semester and have not been reinstated will not 
receive registration materials; they must apply for readmis- 
sion, and if admitted, may be subject to new curriculum 
requirements. 

Foreign^Visa Students — Students with foreign visas are re- 
quired to maintain continuous enrollment. The stop-out 
policy is not applicable. 

Students absent for more than one semester must apply for read- 
mission should they wish to return to Fullerton. In some cases, 
however, election of catalog requirements will not be jeopardized 
for certain students. Students should consult an evaluator in the 
Office of Admissions &. Records. 



110 Continuous Residence Regulations 


Leave of Absence 

A leave of absence may be granted based on certain documented 
extenuating circumstances and normally is granted for not more 
than one year. 

Such an approved leave of absence authorizes the student to 
return without reapplying to the university and continue under 
the catalog requirements that applied to the enrollment prior to 
the absence. 

Undergraduate and postbaccalaureate unclassified graduate stu- 
dents on approved leaves of one year (two academic semesters) or 
less are eligible to register for the semester immediately following 
the end of the leave and will be mailed registration materials 
automatically. 

The leave of absence policy for conditionally classified and classi' 
fied graduate students and credential students is defined in the 
“Graduate Regulations” section of this catalog. 

Withdrawal from the University 

A student who wishes to withdraw from the university during a 
semester must complete a Change of Program form and obtain 
the required approvals. See the section on refund of fees for 
possible refunds. No student may withdraw after the date shown 
on the university calendar as the last day of instruction. Com- 
plete withdrawal from the university is accomplished by follow- 
ing the procedures for dropping classes. 

Retention, Probation and 
Disqualification 

For purposes of determining a student’s ability to remain in the 
university both quality of performance and progress towards the 
educational objective will be considered. 

Academic Probation 

An undergraduate student shall be placed on academic probation 
if in any semester the cumulative grade-point average or the 
grade-point average at Fullerton falls below 2.0 (grade of C on a 
four-point scale). The student shall be advised of probation status 
promptly and, except in unusual instances, before the start of the 
next consecutive enrollment period. 

An undergraduate student shall be removed from academic pro- 
bation and restored to clear standing upon achieving a cumula- 
tive grade-point average of 2.0 in all academic work attempted, 
in all such work attempted at Fullerton, and is making satisfac- 
tory progress towards his or her educational objective. 

A postbaccalaureate student (credential, unclassified or unde- 
clared status but not second baccalaureate degree students) shall 
be subject to academic probation if after completing 12 or more 


units his or her postbaccalaureate cumulative grade-point average 
for units attempted at California State University, Fullerton falls 
below a 2.50 average. The GPAwill determine whether a student 
is subject to probation only after the student has completed 12 
semester units. 

A graduate student enrolled in a graduate degree program in 
either conditionally classified or classified standing shall be sub- 
ject to academic probation if he or she fails to maintain a cumula- 
tive grade-point average of at least 3.0 (grade of B on a four-point 
scale) in all units attempted. 

Academic Disqualification 

An undergraduate student on academic probation shall be sub- 
ject to academic disqualification if: 

1 . as a lower-division student (fewer than 60 semester units of 
college work completed) he or she falls 15 or more grade 
points below a 2.0 average on all college units attempted or in 
all units attempted at this institution; or 

2. as a junior (60 to SWi semester units of college work complet- 
ed) he or she falls nine or more grade points below a 2.0 
average on all college units attempted or in all units attempted 
at this institution; or 

3. as a senior (90 or more semester units of college work complet- 
ed) he or she falls six or more grade points below a 2.0 average 
on all college units attempted or in all units attempted at this 
institution. 

A graduate student enrolled in a graduate degree program shall be 
subject to disqualification if while on probation sufficient grade 
points are not achieved to remove probationary status. Disqualifi- 
cation may be either from further registration in a particular 
program or from further enrollment in the university, as deter- 
mined by appropriate campus authority. 

A postbaccalaureate student who is on probation shall be subject 
to disqualification if he or she fails to earn at least a 2.50 grade- 
point average each term after the completion of 12 units at 
California State University, Fullerton in postbaccalaureate sta- 
tus. Disqualification may be either from further registration as a 
postbaccalaureate, credential or certificate program student or 
from enrollment at California State University, Fullerton, as 
determined by the vice president for academic affairs or designee. 

Student Conduct 

The university properly assumes that all students are in atten- 
dance to secure a sound education and that they will conduct 
themselves as mature citizens of the campus community. Compli- 
ance with all regulations of the university is therefore expected. 
If, however, on any occasion a student or an organization is 
alleged to have compromised accepted university standards, ap- 


Continuous Residence Regulations 111 


propriate judiciary procedures shall be initiated through the es' 
tablished university process. Every effort will be made to encour- 
age and support the development of se Indiscipline and control by 
students and student organizations. The vice president for stU' 
dent affairs, aided by members of the faculty, is responsible to the 
president of the university for the behavior of students in their 
relationships to the university. The president in turn is responsi' 
ble to the chancellor and the trustees of The California State 
University, who themselves are governed by specific laws of the 
State of California. 

Students have the right to appeal certain disciplinary actions 
taken by appropriate university authorities. Regulations govern- 
ing original hearings and appeal rights and prcx:edures have been 
carefully detailed to provide maximum protection to both the 
individual charged and the university community. 

If the issue cannot be resolved informally, students should consult 
with the coordinator of academic appeals. 

Inappropriate conduct by students or by applicants for admission 
is subject to discipline as provided in Sections 41301 through 
41304 of Title 5, Code of Regulations. These sections follow. 

Article 1.1, Title 5, California Code of 
Regulations 

41301. Expulsion, Suspension and Probation of Students. Fol- 
lowing prcKedures consonant with due process established pursu- 
ant to Section 41304, any student of a campus may be expelled, 
suspended, placed on probation or given a lesser sanction for one 
or more of the following causes which must be campus-related: 

(a) Cheating or plagiarism in connection with an academic 
program at a campus. 

(b) Forgery, alteration or misuse of campus documents, re- 
cords, or identification of knowingly furnishing false infor- 
mation to a campus. 

(c) Misrepresentation of oneself or of an organization to be an 
agent of a campus. 

(d) Obstruction or disruption, on or off campus property, of the 
campus educational process, administrative process, or 
other campus function. 

(e) Physical abuse on or off campus property of the person or 
property of any member of the campus community or of 
members of his or her family or the threat of such physical 
abuse. 

(0 Theft of, or non-accidental damage to, campus property, or 
property in the possession of, or owned by, a member of the 
campus community. 

(g) Unauthorized entry into, unauthorized use of, or misuse of 
campus property. 


(h) On campus property, the sale or knowing possession of 
dangerous drugs, restricted dangerous drugs, or narcotics as 
those terms are used in California statutes, except when 
lawfully prescribed pursuant to medical or dental care, or 
when lawfully permitted for the purpose of research, in- 
struction or analysis. 

(i) Knowing possession or use of explosives, dangerous chemi- 
cals or deadly weapons on campus property or at a campus 
function without prior authorization of the campus presi- 
dent. 

(j) Engaging in lewd, indecent, or obscene behavior on cam- 
pus property or at a campus function. 

(k) Abusive behavior directed toward, or hazing of, a member 
of the campus community. 

(l) Violation of any order of a campus president, notice of 
which had been given prior to such violation and during 
the academic term in which the violation occurs, either by 
publication in the campus newspaper, or by posting on an 
official bulletin board designated for this purpose, and 
which order is not inconsistent with any of the other provi- 
sions of this Section. 

(m) Soliciting or assisting another to do any act which would 
subject a student to expulsion, suspension or probation 
pursuant to this Section. 

(n) For purposes of this Article, the following terms are de- 
fined: 

(1) The term “member of the campus community” is de- 
fined as meaning California State University trustees, 
academic, non-academic and administrative person- 
nel, students, and other persons while such other per- 
sons are on campus property or at a campus function. 

(2) The term “campus property” includes: 

(A) Real or personal property in the possession of, or 
under the control of, the Board of Trustees of 
The California State University, and 

(B) All campus feeding, retail, or residence facilities 
whether operated by a campus or by a campus 
auxiliary organization. 

(3) The term “deadly weapons” includes any iiistrument or 
weapon of the kind commonly known as a blackjack, 
sling shot, billy, sandclub, sandbag, metal knuckles, 
any dirk, dagger, switchblade knife, pistol, revolver, or 
any other firearm, any knife having a blade longer 
than five inches, any razor with an unguarded blade, 
and any metal pipe or bar used or intended to be used as 
a club. 

(4) The term “behavior” includes conduct and expression. 


112 Continuous Residence Regulations 


( 5 ) The term “hazing” means any methtxl of initiation into 
a student organization or any pastime or amusement 
engaged in with regard to such an organization which 
causes, or is likely to cause, bodily danger, or physical 
or emotional harm, to any member of the campus 
community; hut the term “hazing” does not include 
customary athletic events or other similar contests or 
competitions. 

(o) This Section is not adopted pursuant to Education Code 
Section 89031. 

(p) Notwithstanding any amendment or repeal pursuant to the 
resolution by which any provision of this Article is amend- 
ed, all acts and omissions occurring prior to that effective 
date shall be subject to the provisions of this Article as in 
effect immediately prior to such effective date. 

41302. Disposition of Fees: Campus Emergency; Interim Sus- 
pension. The President of the campus may place on probation, 
suspend, or expel a student for one or more of the causes enumer- 
ated in Section 41301. No fees or tuition paid by or for such 
student for the semester, quarter, or summer session in which he 
or she is suspended or expelled shall be refunded. If the student is 
readmitted before the close of the semester, quarter, or summer 
session in which he or she is suspended, no additional tuition or 
fees shall be required of the student on account of the suspension. 

During pericxls of campus emergency, as determined by the Presi- 
dent of the individual campus, the President may, after consulta- 
tion with the Chancellor, place into immediate effect any emer- 
gency regulations, procedures, and other measures deemed nec- 
essary or appropriate to meet the emergency, safeguard persons 
and property, and maintain educational activities. 

The President may immediately impose an interim suspension in 
all cases in which there is reasonable cause to believe that such an 
immediate suspension is required in order to protect lives or 
property and to insure the maintenance of order. A student so 
placed on interim suspension shall be given prompt notice of 
charges and the opportunity for a hearing within 10 days of the 
imposition of interim suspension. During the period of interim 
suspension, the student shall not, without prior written permis- 
sion of the President or designated representative, enter any 
campus of the California State University other than to attend 
the hearing. Violation of any condition of interim suspension 
shall be grounds for expulsion. 

41303. Conduct by Applicants for Admission. Notwithstand- 
ing any provision in this Chapter 1 to the contrary, admission or 
readmission may be qualified or denied to any person who, while 
not enrolled as a student, commits acts which, were he enrolled 
as a student, would be the basis for disciplinary proceedings 
pursuant to Sections 41301 or 41 302. Admission or readmission 
may be qualified or denied to any person who, while a student, 
commits acts which are subject to disciplinary action pursuant to 
Section 41 301 or Section 41302. Qualified admission or denial of 
admission in such cases shall be determined under procedures 
adopted pursuant to Section 41304. 


41304. Student Disciplinary Procedures for The California 
State University. The Chancellor shall prescribe, and may from 
time to time revise, a code of student disciplinary procedures for 
The California State University. Subject to other applicable law, 
this code shall provide for determinations of fact and sanctions to 
be applied for conduct which is a ground of discipline under 
Sections 41301 or 41302, and for qualified admission or denial of 
admission under Section 41303; the authority of the campus 
president in such matters; conduct-related determinations on 
financial aid eligibility and termination; alternative kinds of pro- 
ceedings, including proceedings conducted by a hearing officer; 
time limitations; notice; conduct of hearings, including provi- 
sions governing evidence, a record, and review; and such other 
related matters as may be appropriate. The chancellor shall re- 
port to the Board his actions taken under this section. 

Parking on Campus 

Parking is enforced seven days a week, 24 hours a day. This 
includes weekends, holidays. Intersession, summer and spring 
break. This enforcement also applies to 15 and 30 minute zones 
(green curb), red curb, handicapped, state, maintenance/service 
vehicle and special permit designated areas. In addition, all pro- 
visions of the California Vehicle Code are enforced throughout 
the campus 

Parking regulations are enforced during walk-through registra- 
tion, change of program, and orientation. During this period of 
time immediately prior to classes, the summer and fall decals are 
valid in student decal lots. If you are not a continuing student but 
have received your notice of admission, and your student I.D. 
number is on file, you may purchase a student decal. If you do not 
plan to buy a decal, please purchase a daily permit and park in 
Lots A or G, or use the coin lot (six quarters to exit) located 
south of the campus and Nutwood Ave. just off Titan Drive. 

Parking decals are required in order to park in all parking lots on 
campus other than daily permit lots. Student decals may be 
purchased by mail, at the Office of the University Cashier or at 
the registration fee payment station if purchased along with pay- 
ment of the registration fees during walk-through registration. 
Only one decal will be issued to each student. Student parking 
decals are valid only when displayed on the rearview mirror while 
the vehicle is parked. By California law, if the decal interferes 
with driver vision it must be removed from the mirror when the 
vehicle is in motion. 

Motorcycle decals are required for all motorcycles and mopeds 
and may be purchased only from the University Cashier. Motor- 
cycles must park in designated areas of decal lots. Mopeds may be 
parked in designated motorcycle areas of decal lots or in bicycle 
racks. 

Parking decals for the handicapped are available for purchase 
only from the University Cashier. A signed authorization form 
must be obtained from Disabled Student Services (Library Room 
113) and must accompany the decal application. 


Continuous Residence Regulations 113 


Daily permit parking is available in Lots A and G at the north 
end of campus (daily, year round) and Lots B, D E West/J and 1 
after 4 p.m. (see map) Mondays through Fridays, and all day 
weekends and holidays. A permit may be purchased from any 
permit machine and is valid in any other available permit lot but 
only on the date of purchase. 

Parking decals are not transferable. Decals are valid only when 
purchased from the University Cashier and officially recorded in 
that office. 

Debts Owed to the University 

Should a student or former student fail to pay a debt owed to the 
university, the university may “withhold permission to register, to 
use facilities for which a fee is authorized to be charged, to receive 
services, materials, food or merchandise or any combination of 
the above from any person owing a debt” until the debt is paid 
(see Title 5, California Code of Regulations, Sections 42380 and 
42381). For example, the institution may withhold p>ermission to 
receive official transcripts of grades for any person owing a debt. 
If a student believes that he or she does not owe all or part of an 
unpaid obligation, the student should consult the business office. 
The business office, or another office to which the student may 
be referred, will review the pertinent information, including 
information the student may wish to present, and will advise the 
student of its conclusions with respect to the debt. 

Student Rights 

Right of Petition 

Students may petition for review of certain university academic 
regulations when unusual circumstances exist. It should be not' 
ed, however, that academic regulations when they are contained 
in Title 5, California Code of Regulations, are not subject to 
petition. 

Petition forms are available in the Office of Admissions and 
Records. The university petitions committee will take action on 
the petition based on recommendations provided by appropriate 
officers and the student w ill be notified of the decision. Results of 
the action will be placed in the student’s folder in the Office of 
Admissions and Records. 

The petitions committee members shall consist of the associate 
dean of each school, or designee, a professional staff member 
appointed by the director of admissions and records, the coordin^ 
ator of undergraduate studies, one faculty member of the Univer- 
sity General Education Committee, and the assistant registrar, 
who will serve as the secretary. 

Right of Noncompliance 

Certain university activities either within or outside of the class- 
room may involve varying degrees of risk to the participants. It is 
university policy that the instructor directing such activities fully 


divulge to all potential participants the specific nature of such 
risks and obtain from them their expressed or implied consent 
prior to undertaking activities. 

The student who at any time comes to believe that the risks, 
whether physical or psychological, are excessive has the responsi- 
bility to withdraw from participation at the time and to inquire of 
the instructor if there are alternative means of fulfilling the re- 
quirements without penalty. If there is none, the student may 
petition for withdrawal from the course without penalty or appeal 
for an appropriate modification of the activity. The appeal may 
be made either to the chair of the department concerned, or to 
the chair of the Committee on Activities Involving Human Sub- 
jects, or both. 

Right of Academic Appeal 

The right of due process, appeal and peer judgment is established 
by the Student Bill of Rights and Responsibilities for students 
who feel they have been treated capriciously or with prejudice by 
faculty or administrators. Students should make every effort to 
resolve the issue informally by consulting the individual con- 
cerned, and if necessary the department chair and dean of the 
school. 

Students who still believe the problem has not been resolved 
should consult with the coordinator of academic appeals. Upon 
the student’s request, the coordinator will convene the Academic 
Appeals Board to hear the student’s complaint. Students must 
initiate the appeals process by contacting the faculty member 
and/or the department chair within one academic month after 
they could reasonably be expected to be aware of the action in 
question. 

Copies of the governing documents are available in the Academ- 
ic Appeals Office. 

Privacy Rights of Students 

The federal Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act of 1974 
(20 U.S.C. 1232g) and regulations adopted thereunder (34 
C.F.R. 99)and California Education Code Section 671(X) et seq. , 
set out requirements designed to protect the privacy of students 
concerning their records maintained by the campus. Specifically, 
the statute and regulations govern access to student records main- 
tained by the university, and the release of such records. In brief, 
the law provides that the university must provide students access 
to official records related to them and an opportunity for a hear- 
ing to challenge such records on the grounds that they are inaccu- 
rate, misleading or otherwise inappropriate. The right to a hear- 
ing under the law does not include any right to challenge the 
appropriateness of a grade as determined by the instructor. The 
law generally requires that written consent of the student be 
received before releasing personally identifiable data about the 
student from records to other than a specified list of exceptions. 
The institution has adopted a set of policies and procedures 
concerning implementation of the statutes and the regulations 


114 Continuous Residence Regulations 


on the campus. Copies of these policies and procedures may be 
obtained from the vice president for student affairs. Among the 
types of information included in the campus statement of policies 
and procedures are: (1) the types of student records and the 
information contained therein; (2) the official responsible for the 
maintenance of each type of record; (3) the location of access 
lists which indicate persons requesting or receiving information 
from the record; (4) policies for reviewing and expunging records; 
(5) the access rights of students; (6) the procedures for challeng- 
ing the content of student records; (7) the cost which will be 
charged for reproducing copies of records; and (8) the right of the 
student to file a complaint with the Department of Education. 
An office and review board have been established by the Depart- 
ment to investigate and adjudicate violations and complaints. 
The office designated for this purpose is; The Family Educational 
Rights and Privacy Act Office (FERPA), U.S. Department of 
Health, Education and Welfare, 330 C Street, Room 4511, 
Washington, D.C. 20202. 

The campus is authorized under the Act to release “directory 
information” concerning students. “Directory information” in- 
cludes the student’s name, address, telephone listing, date and 
place of birth, major field of study, participation in officially 
recognized activities and sports, weight and height of members of 
athletic teams, dates of attendance, degrees and awards received, 
and the most recent previous educational agency or institution 
attended by the student. The above designated information is 
subject to release by the university at any time unless it has 
received prior written objection from the student specifying in- 
formation that the student requests not be released. Written 
objections should be sent to rhe vice president for student affairs. 

TTie campus is authorized to provide access to student records to 
campus officials and employees who have legitimate educational 
interests in such access. These persons are those who have re- 
spoi\sibilities in connection with the university’s academic, ad- 


ministrative or service functions and who have reason for using 
student records connected with university or other related aca- 
demic responsibilities. Disclosure may also be made to other 
persons or organizations under certain conditions (e.g. as part of 
accreditation or program evaluation; in response to a court order 
or subpoena; in connection with financial aid; to other institu- 
tions to which the student is transferring). 


Use of Social Security Number 

While a social security account number is required from financial 
aid recipients and university employees, the use of the social 
security account number is optional for all other applicants and 
students. Applicants are requested to include their social security 
account number in designated places on applications for admis- 
sion pursuant to the authority contained in Title 5, California 
Code of Regulations, Section 41201. The social security account 
number is used as a means of identifying records pertaining to the 
student as well as identifying the student for purposes of financial 
aid eligibility and disbursement and the repayment of financial 
aid and other debts payable to the institution. 

Students who are neither financial aid recipients nor university 
employees and who prefer to be identified by an alternate CSUF 
ID number may submit a written statement indicating this prefer- 
ence to the Admissions and Records counter in the lobby of 
Langsdorf Hall. Upon receipt of the request, an appropriate ID 
number will be assigned. The new number will be communicated 
to the student in writing. 

Applicants for admission may request an alternate CSUF identi- 
fication number by simply omitting their social security account 
number from their application for admission. An alternate ID 
number will be assigned and included in the application ac- 
knowledgement, which is mailed to the applicant. 


Continuous Residence Regulations 115 


^/’li '; 7*,: '»« 40 /'JUli ri/atij 

•l,;/li! Vi ‘v I :! 0 ,\;)^r^ ^\,iu ,'f‘<. VxUa/ja') . ,?>. 

;V-H> >1 . ,%.! •.?.; .a iur.'A^ 

0 »t ; /L •.. , )i;it*«c>7 r^i rij.. • ,„i uiBur.k k, 

isb };»J* .ttQj X :io ‘jjj;.. '.. 

i.Mtt' iL i .-j '\ 7 ', 1^4V‘ •'.<•■•> ';; / r.j,.j . , 7 ; ;<<ri-.. »/, 

^’ ;*.v' -/If ’ it ip'b'.j- >.*■■ J I ,(;/ •♦ ?.fi< 


/^IfJ , ^ :,r!V . > PC 

'it*i >nchj)? •</) >4 7,»|, •?s'>r/ r^rjiV 

V> ;: ’•%<■-;.'•:> .' jVjfrtfc.:! ',,p ' p rto ’..;a?ryrJ Jo 

“ril ti 'i/j:;.' ify.!.;f;7 t. . : ^ 4 } > • v;i> • i'if;b i . aq 1^x18 

r -M ;'ri ' v 7 M h . •'trvjD f:‘ /I 

PO.’/.y-y! ' ■ '} .'" I i.* V'I i. ■ '■»i/" I 

)fS «rfiviv;j 7 '- 'jj-. yhrf} 


/TCfl: ;,., 4 ) . .V, .mH M,f.j .. . , 

tOi' • . (; 1< .'"D'y ’ j.-T i, 

'* ' . »^ I / l<->nfv. ‘ i; :■' 

r.'iu.yy. ■ : tc.’. > »• ■>« 


Cl.' ♦f/- 




' i^r ^•’J • ‘ i'.* a . 


*fll»->.’' jf/4 >.'11 l,(; ^1 ;■;,/• .f^ 

' < J«. • ' !r. '■' • y.. )•■ *, ■ .t «r’-y^| V • >f , 

■ ■ ■• *• >; ..*« ,. •:/*). 7 A I - . ; . 7 . ., 

' ’■ "• ■ -f' ' • ^*•t! ’ -• 

• ■ ■ .. ; i . 1 - . ••■n. * ., 



J y.i: '‘yi; '.‘, j >7 ■ .' ') n ifi jl 

7 ■* . y Hjin iKsbvM- 7f!j - ?7 

^ 

■ •'i ilrw/ :hhr^ .'>, , y , v - 

1'* j.rjTT)'; 



0 v!,'y : j- '-V f.iir: .• ;- 

’ '• •■ j-X/Hpi Vyi 

:Bfiz 


cr -.ffbti ■ , ^... »r, ...y) ,. 

A3,y.irj: f. 'ifi) cn rnv 

U) J' 

• ' ' ' 

■ .-'ijr* d -> <• . ■' 

1 7' 7 *-.5 y'.-tif 

rtA 

' ; <H .' • 

i'7' . r • , yn ,jv. Vl» J }. r: .,. 

7' .;. tp !i 

ri . ri 

"'.J^ • 

1 . ■ : • I iLr! V m.:*4 

* • • 1 . 

■' ».-••■ 7 7.7 1 

'vH r 

} 5i'r 

"’uy. y ’y : c.' f i .'.‘i , » 5 v^vi 

• 7 V ^ .'■■■ i ; V. rl. 



• '• ’7’ ' ' J ..y., ■ '7 

brf.: ii.»' ,,!il 



■i >. ; 'jI •;?.' 


m ’Vlfi.' ; 




^ ''*■ ' '"•• . - : -i.r ' .' .,V I r, 

' ' J tjM < ■»' .:t ■! r '. .i;- n ■ ' . . » .. .,.,i.. .. 

■ . '■ »i ■ • . : .1^;-) o'l •: « / .1; 

‘ 'J >U y ■• .• • V. ^ / ./!>.■ , 

''•• H ' K ’ ■'•'i ■ yjXI ; f' . , . : t ;/ I y '•-'; r; 

I / ^.. T-y y, ■ 11 , jj 

^ -— !• ’VK. ■• . ...: 

‘ ■ ' • • ''■• Iv'^ , • ■ : 1,;:. . .. •.,» 

' ' ■ ' ■•' '.. • ., V.: . •'•!? > „,7 , 

‘ .* ■' ■ !■ .»»>«''..■; l^..- i,. -‘;.; .. > ■< ?. •. ; 

• - ' • ■ ■ ' '-'v \ 


V . . ca ,,y 

* > '•>•: -. . ■■ >: f\ . 

_ ' ' .i. ‘ . i •ufj*: 7,;^ '.fqjK ‘; 'oiiii 

.•>: •■:•; .■ >». , . ■;• • 7 ' ■ 7;'' "j-vf/iv*- ;^i'i ■ 

'■^' ■ '*■ ' ‘ . ‘ ^ -t'.- . ». v: , 1 . .r 7 > ,,!';-rl u 

• ■•> 'C yi ’■ ■ •.•I<ii ; t J yjv 'svx 7 i'; II. L 

; /p V.-J, t . . . .0 L /.rr^'.yi 

.. 7 . iy„. 

•■ •'‘‘^' ‘7',' -1^ 7V. j- 

;■■..•.'• ij-- ’ • -! 1 - /. 1 C, .7 

‘ V’’ - .v.rv.^ :r}j 

■ •: In !’•, J. r i! ••.' .1 , I • 1 , 

' ' i ' '’ ' C' -• J'!..' 77K.r,7piiJ*^>|aO 


V VI •« 


Ski 1 ^ . V 

J • ‘ >;* 


" ' ' ■'''' •■' ■ 'l '■>> -.Y, r^Y^iUR:) }' 

'• ^''' *’ •■ )<■•■. :.-ii. 7., 51,. -W.,^ 

■’ * ' ' ' ■' >' ■ fii *::;aijni 

” ' ■■ ^ ' - i ..'l.'; y a; ?>l<' -t ;;.aT(xi- 


:‘ t i, -.-t, ;. 




>7 n. , 4 I 




galxM^I ,0«1^ JrM^ 

' fiait^ 1 r c 

goia^ Graduate 



e*M” e*" 




e< 




Resulations ^ ,...,6a^,_i,^G 


eai^ , . ^ 






M 


<^«tre^: 


P.<^^ I^Ca^, k 






r eai>^ 


Gat^ i . Ca^ 


gGll^ 

Gal^ 




Gflt*'' 


riaM^ eai>^ ,«,ea^ J 
1*1^ 


M"', eJ^ 

0at«^ ^ 




e 






(3 


..<i»*2>'£ 



gflia^'^ K^,6a*^ t.M® nJtM^ , 




I 


Graduate Applications 


All applicants for any type of postbaccalaureate or graduate 
standing (e.g., masters degree applicants, those seeking creden^ 
tials, and those interested in taking courses for perstmal or profes- 
sional growth) must file a complete application within the appro- 
priate filing pericxi. Second baccalaureate degree candidates should 
apply as postbaccalaureate students with an undergraduate degree 
objective. A complete application for pt^stbaccalaureate or gradu- 
ate standing includes all of the forms and fees described in the 
application Kx)klet, including the supplementary graduate ad- 
missions application. Applicants who completed undergraduate 
degree requirements and graduated the preceding term are also 
required to complete and submit an application and the nonre- 
fundable application fee. In the event that an applicant wishes to 
be assured of initial consideration by more than one campus, it is 
necessary to submit a separate application (including fee) to 
each. 

Applications may be obtained from the Office of Admissions and 
Records or the Graduate Studies Office of any California State 
University campus. Instructions for completing the application 
forms are included in the material supplied. Since some programs 
require the completion of an additional form as part of the appli- 
cation pRKess, students should inquire concerning this possibil- 
ity at the office of the academic unit offering the particular 
program. 

Transcripts 

When an applicant for graduate standing, with a master s degree 
objective, a credential-only objective, or a master’s degree and 
credential objective, receives the application acknowledgement, 
requests should be submitted to all of the institutions of higher 
learning in which previously registered, requesting that tu'o offi- 
cial transcripts from each institution be sent to the university 
Admissions and Records office. 



One copy of each transcript will be forwarded to the academic 
unit offering the degree or credential program specified by the 
student as the objective; and the other official transcript will be 
retained for use by bi^th the Admissions and Records Office and 
the Graduate Studies Office. 


Students who receive their baccalaureate degree at Cal State 
Fullerton and continuing graduate students who change their 
declared objective subsequent to admission must obtain whatever 
additional transcripts are needed to provide two complete sets 
of transcripts, but do not need to request Cal State Fullerton 
transcripts. 


118 Graduate Applications 


Postbaccalaureate applicants with no degree or credential objec- 
tive must submit a transcript from the college or university where 
the baccalaureate was earned. Further, one transcript from other 
institutions attended is required as necessary so that Cal State 
Fullerton has a complete record of the last 60 semester units 
attempted prior to enrollment at Fullerton. 

All transcripts must be received directly from the issuing institu- 
tions and become official records of the university; such tran- 
scripts therefore cannot be returned or reissued. Transcripts 
which include course work from other than the issuing institu- 
tion are not sufficient evidence of course work taken elsewhere. 
Foreign language transcripts must be accompanied by certified 
English translations. 

Tests 

The Graduate Record Examination (GRE), or another test, may 
be required for conditionally classified admission, or subsequent- 
ly for the granting of classified standing. Test requirements vary 
from department to department. Students should refer to mas- 
ter’s degree requirements outlined by each department in the 
“Curricula” section of this catalog. Applications and information 
on test dates for nationally administered tests (e.g. GRE, 
GMAT) are available in the Testing Center. 

TOEFL Requirement 

All graduate and postbaccalaureate applicants, regardless of citi- 
zenship, whose preparatory education was principally in a lan- 
guage other than English, must demonstrate competence in En- 
glish. Those who do not possess a bachelor’s degree from a post- 
secondary institution where English is the principal language of 
instruction must receive a minimum score of 550 on the Test of 
English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL). Students interested in 
the MBA program must present a minimum score of 570 on the 
TOEFL. Students interested in the M.M. and M.A. in Music 
must present a TOEFL of 560. 


International Students 

See procedures outlined in the international student portion of 
the “Admissions Policies” section of this catalog. 

Second Master’s Degree or 
Concentration 

Students may wish to pursue a second master’s degree or concen- 
tration. Approval for admission to graduate standing in the sec- 
ond degree program or concentration may be given only after the 
first degree has been awarded. Units used for the first degree or 
concentration may not be applied to the second. Students who 
have completed a master’s degree at Cal State Fullerton in one 
concentration and wish to complete another will not be awarded 
a second degree. 

Nonaccredited Schools 

An applicant who is a graduate of a nonaccredited school must 
apply for admission as an undergraduate to complete require- 
ments for a bachelor’s degree from this institution. However, 
once admitted, a student in this category who gives evidence of 
unusual promise and superior background may petition for gradu- 
ate standing as conditionally classified. If the petition is granted, 
the student may then proceed in the graduate program. If the 
petition is denied, the student may be requested to complete a 
specified number of undergraduate units in order to establish 
equivalency to the bachelor’s degree or to complete requirements 
for a bachelor’s degree at CSUE For further information, contact 
the Graduate Studies Office. 


Graduate Applications 119 


Graduate Admissions 


FollDwin^ completion of application procedures and subsequent 
review of the student’s eligibility by the Admissions Office and 
appropriate academic unit, the student will be notified by the 
Admissions Office concerning admission. Only a written notice 
from the AJmissums Office is valid prcx)f of admission. Academic 
advisement prior to admission is tentative and cannot be con- 
strued as granting official admission to a program or establishing 
requirements for the degree. 


Students may apply for a degree objective, a credential or certifi- 
cate objective, or no program objective. Four admission categor- 
ies are defined in terms of these academic objectives. 

Postbaccalaureate Standing: 
Unclassified 

qualify tor admission with no degree objective, students must 
( 1 ) hold an acceptable bachelor’s degree from a regionally accre- 
dited tour-year institution or have equivalent preparation as de- 
termined by the appropriate campus authority; (2) have a grade 
point average of at least 2. 5 (A = 4.0) in the last 60 semester (90 
quarter) units; and (3) have been in gtxxJ standing at the last 
college attended. In unusual circumstances, exceptions may be 
made to these criteria. 


Admission with postbaccalaureate-unclassified standing does not 
constitute admission to graduate degree or credential programs. If 
a student wishes to change academic objective after admission, 
an application for change of objective must be filed in the Admis- 
sions Office. 

Postbaccalaureate Standing: 
Classified 

To qualify for admission with a credential or certificate objective, 
students must ( 1 ) meet the requirements for postbaccalaureate- 
unclassified standing and (2) satisfy any additional professional, 
personal, scholastic, and other standards, including qualifying 
examinations. Refer to specific credential requirements under 
the departmental section of this catalog. 


Graduate Standing: Conditionally 
Classified 

To qualify for admission with a graduate degree objective, stu- 
dents must ( 1 ) meet the admission requirements for postbacca- 
laureate-unclassified standing and (2) meet any additional re- 
quirements of the particular program including a favorable rec- 
ommendation from the academic unit. 

An applicant who has deficiencies in prerequisite preparation or 
in grade-point average may be considered for admission in condi- 
tionally classified standing with the approval and recommenda- 
tion of the appropriate campus authority. A student admitted in 
conditionally classified standing may subsequently be granted 
classified standing in an authorized graduate degree curriculum if 
professional, personal, scholastic, or other standards including 
qualifying examinations are met. 

Graduate Standing: Classified 

Determination of the student’s prerequisites and assignment of 
courses, units, and grade points required to remove deficiencies is 
made by the academic unit. For specific information on prerequi- 
sites to classified standing, consult departmental program re- 
quirements. 

Classified standing is normally granted when all prerequisites 
have been satisfactorily completed, the official study plan formu- 
lated, and the recommendation made by the appropriate gradu- 
ate adviser and committee to the Dean of Graduate Studies who 
gives final approval. An eligible student may be granted classified 
standing prior to the first registration or during the first semester 
of registration. 

No more than nine units of postgraduate work taken at this institution 
prior to classified standing will be applied to a master s degree study 
pbn. Any acceptable transfer work is excluded from the nine units 
permitted. 

It is the students responsibility to initiate the request for classi- 
fied standing in the appropriate academic unit by making an 
appointment with the departmental graduate adviser. The stu- 
dent will be sent a copy of the approved study plan by the 
Graduate Studies Office. Copies will be filed in the academic 
unit, universit>' records, and the Graduate Studies Office. A 
student is not officially classified until an approved study plan is on file 
in the Graduate Studies Office. 


120 Graduate Admissions 


Requirements for the 
Master’s Degree 



To be granted the master’s degree, a student must have been 
classified, advanced to candidacy, and completed a satisfactory 
pattern of study in an approved field. Requirements which apply 
to all programs follow. For specific requirements of particular pro- 
grams, see the program descriptions in the departmental section of this 
catalog. 

Each student’s program for a master’s degree (including eligibility, 
classified standing, candidacy, and ^ward of the degree) must be 
approved by the graduate program adviser, the graduate commit- 
tee, and the Dean of Graduate Studies. 

University Writing Requirement 

Students working toward a master’s degree are required to dem- 
onstrate writing ability commensurate with the baccalaureate 
degree. This requirement should be met within the first nine 
units of graduate work by successfully completing one of the 
following: 

1 . An upper-division writing requirement at any CSU campus. 

2. An upper-division course at another university equivalent to a 
course which meets the Cal State Fullerton requirement. 
Such equivalence must be certified by the department or 
program responsible for the student’s academic work. 

3. Cal State Fullerton Examination in Writing Proficiency. 

4. An upper-division or graduate- level course that is certified as 
meeting the writing requirement and is approved by the de- 
partment or program responsible for the student’s academic 
work. The grade received must be a C or better. 


Any student who has not met the requirement within the first 
nine units of graduate work shall be required to enroll in a 
certified course at the earliest opportunity. 

Departments and programs may, at their discretion and with 
approval of the Graduate Education Committee, establish addi- 
tional writing requirements for their graduate students. For fur- 
ther information, students should consult their program adviser 
or the Graduate Studies Office. 


Requirements for the Master Degree 121 


Study Plan 

General requirements for the master’s degree study plan include: 

1. A minimum of 30 approved semester units, or more, as 
determined by the particular program. 

2. A minimum of 21 semester units in residence (transfer and 
Cal State Fullerton extension or intersession course work are 
not considered to be in residence). 

3. A unit of course work taken at a college or university on the 
quarter system will be considered as equivalent to two-thirds 
of a unit when such course work is considered acceptable as 
transfer work. See additional requirements for transfer credit 
under “Graduate Enrollment Policies.” 

4. Upper-division and graduate-level courses only. The inclu- 
sion of 3(X)- level course work is generally discouraged. The 
graduate program adviser must submit to the Dean of Gradu- 
ate Studies a written justification for any 300-level course 
work proposed for inclusion on the study plan unless it is an 
existing program requirement. 

5. Not less than one-half of the total units in graduate (5(X)- 
level) courses. 

6. Not more than six semester units for a thesis, if a thesis is 
required. 

7. A maximum of six units of independent study. 

8. No courses taken to satisfy prerequisite requirements includ- 
ed in the minimum of 30 units. 

9. None of the following: correspondence courses, credit by 
examination, or similar. 

10. No courses with nontraditional grades (e.g., CR, S, P) and 
no grade on the study plan beow a C. 

11. A minimum grade-point average of 3.0 (B) in all courses 
attempted to satisfy requirements for the degree. 

12. Completion or satisfactory validation of all study plan 
courses within five years starting with the earliest course on 
the study plan. 

13. All courses taken after the baccalaureate (or p)ostbaccalaur- 
eate credit granted) and not credited toward another degree. 

14. A final evaluation, which may be a thesis, a project, a 
comprehensive examination, or any combination of these. 


TTie approved study plan is valid as long as the student maintains 
continuous enrollment in regular semesters at the university; 
otherwise it is necessary to reapply and meet any changed or 
additional requirements approved in the interim. 


Election of Curriculum 

A Student remaining in continuous attendance in regular semes- 
ters and continuing in the same curriculum may elect to meet the 
degree requirements in effect either at the time of entering the 
curriculum or at the time of completion of degree requirements, 
except that substitution for discontinued courses may be ap- 
proved by the graduate program adviser. 


Advisers and Committees 

University px)licy provides that each student’s program for the 
master’s degree shall be under the guidance of an adviser and for 
some programs, a committee as well. A graduate program adviser 
is designated in each department or program to give overall 
supervision for the graduate program. In some departments, the 
graduate program adviser also serves as the individual student’s 
adviser. Policies and procedures related to graduate committees 
are available in the Graduate Studies Office. 


It is the responsibility of the student to arrange appointments for 
advisement and other information in the office of the academic 
unit offering the degree program. As a minimum, the student 
should obtain advisement ( 1 ) either prior to or during the first 
semester of attendance, (2) when requesting classified standing, 
and (3) when applying for a graduation check prior to the final 
semester. 


It is advisable for the student to maintain a personal file of 
transcripts and other evidences of grades and achievements, and 
to carry these whenever seeking advisement. 


Advancement to Candidacy 

A student who has been granted classified standing is normally 
advanced to candidacy after a request is filed for graduation by 
the student and an affirmative recommendation made by the 
graduate program adviser. A minimum grade-point average of 3.0 
(B) for all study plan course work is required; other scholastic, 
professional and personal standards, the passing of examinations, 
and other qualifications, may be prescribed. Only those students 
who continue to demonstrate a satisfactory level of scholastic 
competence and fitness, as determined by the appropriate au- 
thorities, shall be eligible to continue in graduate programs. 


122 Requirements for the Master’s Degree 


Completion of Requirements and 
Award of Degree 

The degree is awarded upon the satisfactory completion of all 
state and university requirements, the specific requirements for 
the particular program, the recommendation of the appropriate 
graduate adviser and committee (advancement to candidacy), 
and the approval of the faculty and the Dean of Graduate Stud- 
ies. It is highly recommended that all work for the degree, except 
final course examinations, be submitted by the last day of classes, 
in order to assure granting of the degree by the end of the semes- 
ter or session. 

If a thesis is required, it must be deposited in the Titan Bookstore 
in accordance with the instruction shown under “Theses and 
Projects,” no later than the last day of final examinations for the 
semester or session in which the degree is to be awarded. 

It is the student’s responsibility to file an application for a gradua- 
tion check and pay the graduation and diploma fee prior to the 
beginning of the final semester. Forms are available at the Admis- 
sions and Records information counter, the Graduate Studies 
Office, and the Registrar’s Office graduation unit. 

The application for graduation initiates review of degree requirements 
and formal approval by the faculty as well as serving as a diploma 
order. The last date to file the application is listed in the academic 
calendar of the class schedule for each regular semester. Candi- 
dates for August graduation must file their requests prior to regis- 
tration for the spring semester. 

Students who fail to complete requirements as planned must 
update the application for a graduation check and do so by the 
appropriate deadline. An additional fee may be required. 

Since Cal State Fullerton is on the semester basis, master’s degree 
programs are ordinarily completed in January and June. A stu- 
dent who wishes to complete requirements during the summer 
must obtain written approval prior to summer term on a form 
available in the Graduate Studies Office. The approved form 
must be returned to Graduate Studies during the spring semester. 

The effective date of graduation will be the last day of the specific 
term in which requirements are completed. 

Commencement ceremonies are held only at the end of the 
spring semester. Students completing requirements at the end of 
the fall and spring semesters and during the following summer 
may participate in those ceremonies. Information concerning 
commencement activities is sent to students by the Registrar 
during the final semester. Arrangements for cap, gown and hood 
rental are made in the Titan Bookstore. 


Time Limit for Completion 

All requirements for the master’s degree, including all course 
work on the student’s study plan, normally should be completed 
within five years. This time limit commences with the semester 
of the earliest course used on the student’s study plan and consists 
of a total of ten (10) consecutive semesters. When individual 
circumstances warrant, this time limit may be extended for up to 
two years (four additional consecutive semesters). 

A student may request an extension of the five-year time limit by 
filing a petition with the Graduate Studies Office. The petition 
must contain a full explanation of the circumstances which pre- 
vented completion of the degree requirements within the normal 
five-year limit and must be approved (signed) by the graduate 
program adviser, the chair of the appropriate graduate committee 
and the Dean of Graduate Studies. Approvals for extension must be 
obtained prior to the expiration of the five-year limit. 

Outdated course work (course work older than the student’s ap- 
proved time limit; i.e. , normally five years but with approval may 
be a maximum of seven years) must be repeated. A maximum of 
nine (9) units of course work may be exempt from this policy if it can be 
validated. Copies of the “Petition for Validating Outdated 
Coursework” may be obtained from the Graduate Studies Office. 
Validation is allowed at the discretion of the graduate program 
adviser, the academic unit offering the subject course and the 
Dean of Graduate Studies. Validation must be accomplished by 
passing a written comprehensive test of the materials covered by 
the course being validated or by some equivalent method with 
prior approval of both the graduate program adviser and the Dean 
of Graduate Studies. Any outdated course work which cannot be 
validated either because of a denial of the petition or because it is 
in excess of the nine units allowed for validation, must be repeat- 
ed or updated through the use of additional study plan course 
work. If course work is repeated or additional course work is 
required to update, the units and grades will be added to the study 
plan. 

NOTE: Outdated transfer course work cannot be validated. 

Changes in Study Plan 

If a classified graduate student wishes to make a change in the 
approved study plan, a request should be made to the appropriate 
graduate program adviser. Requests must be made prior to regis- 
tration for any course work to be substituted or added. No course 
may be removed from the study plan after a student has taken it. 
Forms which may be used to file a request are available in the 
Graduate Studies Office. 

Changes in study plan may also be warranted by outdated 
coursework or grade-point average (see “Time Limit for Comple- 
tion” and “Grade-point Average Standards”). 


Requirements for the Master Degree 123 


Graduate Enrollment Policies 

Qinsult previous sections of this catalog and the class schedule 
for other information and regulations relating to registration and 
enrollment. 

Residence Requirement 

A student is considered to be in residence when registered during 
regular semesters at this university. Of the minimum of 30 semes- 
ter units of approved course work required for the master’s degree, 
not less than 21 shall be completed in residence at this institu- 
tion. Approved units earned in summer sessions may be substitut- 
ed for regular semester unit requirements on a unit for unit basis. 

Extension or intersession course work may not be used to fulfill 
the minimum residence requirement. 

Continuous Enrollment 

A graduate student with a graduate degree objective should main- 
tain continuous enrollment during regular semesters (summer 
sessions and extension excluded) until award of the degree. This 
pc^licy is designed to eliminate the need for readmission to the 
university, provide opportunity for continuous use of facilities, 
including the Library, and assure the development of an integrat- 
ed program, adequately supervised, and effectively terminated 
within the time limitations allowed by regulations. 

Unless granted an approved leave of absence, a graduate student 
who fails to register each semester has discontinued enrollment in 
the graduate degree program. If the student wishes to resume 
studies, it will be necessary to reapply for admission to the univer- 
sity and to the degree program and meet any changed or addition- 
al requirements approved in the interim. 

Students who may have completed all course work, but who may 
not have satisfactorily completed a comprehensive examination 
or other requirement, are expected to maintain continuous en- 
rollment until award of the degree. 

A graduate student who finds it impossible to attend during a 
certain semester and is not eligible for a leave of absence, must 
register in Graduate Studies 700. Registration in this course is 
restricted to conditionally classified or classified graduate stu- 
dents. It carries no unit credit and does not require class atten- 
dance. Registration in this course in each semester when no 
other course work is taken will be necessary until aw’ard of the 
degree. 

Similarly, Credential Studies 701 is available for students with a 
credential-only objective who find it impossible to enroll in 
course work and are not eligible for a leave of absence. 



124 Graduate Enrollment Policies 




Leave of Absence 

Graduate degree or credential students may request a leave of 
absence for up to one year. Conditionally classified or classified 
graduate students qualify for a leave if they are in good academic 
standing and have completed at least six credit hours’ work to- 
ward the degree in residence at Cal State Fullerton. Students 
with a credential-only objective qualify if they have completed at 
least one semester of course work in good academic standing. 
Forms to request a leave of absence are available at the Admis- 
sions and Records information counter or in the Graduate Stud- 
ies Office. 

Any one of the following circumstances may be grounds for 
requesting a leave of absence: 

1. Illness or disability (permanent or temporary) or similar per- 
sonal exigencies including pregnancy which make it impossi- 
ble or inadvisable for a student to register for classes. 

2. Activities which enhance a student’s professional career ob- 
jectives. 

3. Active duty in the armed forces of the United States. 

4. Other reasons at the discretion of the Dean of Graduate Stud- 
ies. 

After review by the Graduate Studies Office, the academic unit 
(where applicable), and the Registrar’s Office, a response is 
mailed to the student. 

A first-time leave of absence of one semester only will normally 
be granted upon request for students who qualify and will not 
require an application for readmission to the university. Registra- 
tion materials for the semester following the leave will be sent to 
the student. 

Students requesting a subsequent leave or a leave longer than one 
semester are required to provide appropriate documentation 
(e.g., doctor’s recommendation, verification of employment). 
Such requests must also be endorsed by the program adviser. 

A leave granted to a degree objective student preserves the elec- 
tion of curriculum rights regarding catalog requirements. Howev- 
er, leaves of absence do not change the time limit for completion 
of the degree. For credential students, a leave granted by the 
University does not exempt them from new requirements im- 
posed by the State regardless of the catalog year and also does not 
extend time limitations imposed by the State for completing 
specific teaching credential requirements. 

Study Load 

Graduate students must carry a study load of 12 units of course 
work a semester or nine units of which six are in 5(X)-level courses 
for full-time enrollment certification by the university. A normal 


full-time load in summer session is one and one-third units per 
week of instruction. The maximum study load for students work- 
ing toward a master’s degree is 12 units per semester; in excep- 
tional cases, however, a student may take more with the approval 
of the graduate program adviser. 

Enrollment in Extended Education 
Programs 

In addition to its regular academic programs, the university offers 
a number of courses through its extended education program. 
These include the summer session, the extension program and 
adjunct enrollment (a program permitting those who are not 
formally enrolled to take regular university courses). 

The applicability of credit earned through courses taken in any of 
the programs sponsored by the Office of Extended Education is 
subject to approval by the graduate program adviser and Dean of 
Graduate Studies. 

Summer Sessions 

Appropriate courses taken during the summer session may be 
applied to a graduate degree program, providing the courses are 
approved in advance. 

Extension 

No more than nine units of credit earned in the university exten- 
sion program (including intersession course work) may be applied 
to a graduate degree. Consultation with a graduate adviser before 
taking an extension course is strongly recommended. 

It should be noted that enrollment in summer session or exten- 
sion courses does not constitute admission to the university or 
enrollment as a continuing student in the university. Any student 
desiring a master’s degree must be admitted to a regular semester 
(fall or spring). 

Enrollment in 500-Level Courses 
by Seniors 

Undergraduate students may enroll in graduate level courses 
(5(X)-level) if they: 

a. have reached senior status (i.e. , completed a minimum of 90 
semester units) 

b. have the academic preparation and prerequisites required for 
entry into the course 

c. gain the consent of the instructor. 

Students wishing to use 500-level course work taken during their 
undergraduate degree toward a master’s degree should read the 
following section on Postgraduate Credit. 


Graduate Enrollment Policies 125 


Postgraduate Credit 

A graduate student may petition for a maximum of nine units of 
postgraduate credit for course work (either 4(X)' or 5(X)devel) 
taken during the undergraduate degree at California State Uni- 
versity, Fullerton, if: 

a. the course work was not used to meet any of the university’s 
requirements for the baccalaureate degree (including major, 
minor or concentration) 

b. the course work was taken during the twelve months immedi- 
ately prior to the student’s graduation 

c. the coursework was completed with a grade of B or better. 

Petition forms are available at the Admissions and Records infor- 
mation counter. If approved, appropriate notations will be en- 
tered on the student’s permanent record. 

The use of postgraduate course work on a student’s graduate study 
plan is governed by the general regulations for all graduate de- 
grees and must be approved by the program adviser, the appropri- 
ate graduate committee and the Dean of Graduate Studies. 

Transfer Credit Policy 

Graduate students may be able to use a limited amount of transfer 
course work in meeting the requirements for a master’s degree. 
The use of transfer course work on a student’s study plan is subject 
to the following provisions: 

1. The course work being transferred must: 


c. have been completed with a grade of B or better. 

d. not have been used in meeting the requirements for an- 
other earned degree (either graduate or undergraduate). 

e. have been completed within the student’s five-year time 
period which is required for completion of the require- 
ments for the master’s degree at CSUF. 

2. An absolute minimum of 21 semester units toward any mas- 
ter’s degree at CSUF must be in residence units. For master’s 
degrees requiring more than 42 semester units, a minimum of 
half of the units used on the student’s study plan must be in 
residence units. Residence units include regular courses and 
extension courses offered as special sessions. 

3. Use of transfer work on a student’s study plan is subject to all 
other policies concerning study plan course work; e.g., fifty 
percent must be graduate level work, no correspondence 
course work, no credit by examination, no courses with non- 
traditional grades, no grade below a C. 

4. In all cases, the use of transfer course work on a student’s study 
plan is subject to the acceptance and approval of the academic 
unit’s graduate adviser and the Dean of Graduate Studies. 
Course work taken at another institution after admission to 
CSUF as a graduate student is rarely accepted for credit to- 
ward a master’s degree and can only be accepted if the student 
has received prior approval of both the graduate adviser and 
the Dean of Graduate Studies. 

5. All approved transfer units and grade points will be entered on 
the CSUF transcript at graduation. 


a. have been taken at an accredited college or university. 

b. be acceptable for credit toward a graduate degree at the 
institution where the course work was taken. 


126 Graduate Enrollment Policies 


Graduate Academic Standards 


Grade^Point Average Standards 

University 

A graduate degree student is expected to earn a 3.0 average in all 
units subsequent to admission to the program. In adddition, a 
graduate degree student must earn a 3.0 average in all 400- and 
500'level courses taken in the student’s department or program 
(including 400- and 5(X)'level program prerequisites). Any 400' 
and 5(X)'level course taken only to satisfy credential or certificate 
program requirements shall not be considered applicable. 

Study Plan 

The 30 or more semester units of approved study plan course 
work, including transfer work, required for the degree must be 
completed with a 3.0 (B) minimum grade-point average. Only 
grades of A, B, or C are considered satisfactory for study plan 
courses. If a student receives a grade less than a C on a study plan 
course, the course must be repeated and passed with a grade of C 
or better. A course may be repeated ony once. 

In extenuating circumstances, the student can petition the Of- 
fice of Graduate Studies to add another course to the approved 
program with unit value equivalent to that of the course in which 
the unsatisfactory grade was received. 

If a student approaches the completion of the degree require- 
ments with less than a 3.0 average, a request may be made for a 
change in the study plan to 

a. add no more than six units of course work in order to achieve 
at least a 3.0 grade point average, or 

b. repeat no more than six units of course work in which a C or 
lower was earned in order to achieve at least a 3.0 grade point 
average. 

c. A combination of a. and b. equal to six units. 

Requests for course work to be added to the study plan or repeated 
must be approved by the graduate program adviser and Dean of 
Graduate Studies prior to registration (see “Changes in Study 
Plan”). If the grade-point average at any time falls below such a 
level that it cannot be raised to a 3.0 within the prescribed limits 
of course work, this has the effect of disqualifying the student 
from the master’s degree program. 

If permission is given to repeat a course, both grades are consid- 
ered in computing grade-point averages. However, successful rep- 
etition of a course originally passed carries no additional unit 
credit toward a degree. 

When a course is added, the original course stays on the study 
plan and both grades received shall be used in the calculation of 
the student’s GPA. 

Academic Probation and 
Disqualification 

A graduate student enrolled in a graduate degree program in 
either conditionally classified or classified graduate standing is 
subject to academic probation if a cumulative grade-point of at 
least 3.0 (grade of B on a four-point scale) is not maintained. A 
listing of students subject to probation is reviewed each semester 
by the Office of Graduate Studies with the advice of the student’s 
graduate program adviser. 


The Office of Graduate Studies, with the advice of the student’s 
graduate program adviser, will disqualify a graduate student who 
is on academic probation if the student does not, or cannot, raise 
the study plan and applicable course work cumulative grade- 
point average to 3.0 by the completion of the second regular 
semester (exclusive of interim and summer sessions) following 
the session in which the cumulative grade-point average failed to 
meet the minimum 3.0 standard. 

A student who has been disqualified from a master’s degree pro- 
gram or from a postbaccalaureate credential or certificate pro- 
gram may apply for readmission to that program or to another 
program after one calendar year following disqualification. A 
readmitted student must file a new study plan which meets cur- 
rent requirements and policies. Any disqualified student who 
wishes to use previous course work must have it approved by the 
Office of Graduate Studies. 

Disqualification will prevent further registration in a particular 
program or further enrollment in the university, as determined by 
appropriate campus authority. 

A graduate student may also be placed on probation or may be 
disqualified for reasons other than cumulative grade-point aver- 
age. These reasons include repeated withdrawal, failure to pro- 
gress toward an educational objective, non-compliance with an 
academic requirement, and inappropriate behavior as defined in 
the Student Bill of Rights and Responsibilities, and in the Aca- 
demic Dishonesty sections of this catalog (see “University Regu- 
lations”). 

A postbaccalaureate student (credential, unclassified, or unde- 
clared status) shall be subject to academic probation if after 
completing 12 or more units, the cumulative grade-point average 
falls below a 2.5 average. A postbaccalaureate student on proba- 
tion shall be subject to disqualification if at least a 2.50 grade- 
point average is not earned each term after the completion of 1 2 
units in postbaccalaureate status. Disqualification may be either 
from further registration toward a postbaccalaureate credential or 
certificate program, or from further enrollment in the university 
as determined by the Dean of Graduate Studies. 

Declassification 

Graduate students in classified graduate standing shall be declas- 
sified upon the recommendation of the appropriate academic 
unit, with a change to postbaccalaureate standing, unclassified, 
when one or more of the following conditions exist: 

1. The student’s request for declassification has been recom- 
mended for approval by the graduate committee. 

2. The student fails to maintain the grade-point average required 
in the master’s degree program. 

3. The student has failed to demonstrate a satisfactory level of 
scholastic competence and fitness. 

4. The student fails to complete the degree within the prescribed 
time limit. 

A recommendation for declassification is sent to the Graduate 
Studies Office by the graduate program adviser for the particular 
degree. 


Graduate Academic Standards 127 


Theses and Projects 


Definition 

A thesis is defined as the written prcxluct of a systematic study of a 
significant problem. It identifies the problem, states the major 
assumptions, explains the significance of the undertaking, sets 
forth the sources for and methcxls of gathering information, ana- 
lyzes the data, and offers a conclusion or recommendation. The 
finished prtxiuct evidences originality, critical and independent 
thinking, appropriate organization and format, and thorough 
d(Kumentation. Normally, an oral defense of the thesis is re- 
quired. 

A project is a significant undertaking appropriate to the fine and 
applied arts or to professional fields. It also evidences originality 
and independent thinking, appropriate form and organization, 
and a rationale. It is described and summarized in a written 
abstract that includes the project’s significance, objectives, 
methtxiology and a conclusion or recommendation. An oral de- 
fense of the project may he required. 

Annual Thesis Award 

An award of $500 along with an engraved plaque will be given 
each year to the student whose thesis represents the highest 
standard of scholarly accomplishment as determined by a panel of 
judges chosen from emeriti professors. Interested students should 
contact the Graduate Studies Office or their program adviser for 
further information on eligibility and deadlines. Finalists from 
each school may alst> be recommended for Honorable Mention by 
the judges; these will receive a certificate of Honorable Mention 
and a cash award. 

General Regulations 

Of the minimum of 30 semester units of approved course work 
required for the master’s degree, no more than six are allowed for 
a thesis. 

When a thesis is required, the Library is to be provided with the 
approved original copy, or a fully acceptable duplicated copy, in 
the approved binding, and an acceptable microfilm of it. An 
abstract accompanies the thesis and will normally be published in 
the University Microfilms International journal. Masters Ab- 
stracts. Copies are thereby made available for order by interested 
scholars. 

An approved copy of the thesis or project may also be required by 
the student’s academic department. Students should check with 
their graduate program adviser as to whether a copy is needed by 
the department as part of the requirements for graduation. 



128 Theses and Projects 



When a project is required, it will be filed with the academic unit 
offering the degree program. Some record of the project, or the 
project itself, is preserved in the academic unit and, when apprO' 
priate, in the Library. When the appropriate authority recom* 
mends, a project or its written record may be treated as a thesis. 

Although a minimum of three faculty members supervise and 
approve the thesis, it is possible for a qualified person who is not a 
regular university faculty member to serve as a visiting examiner 
and join in the approval of the written record. This person serves 
as the fourth member of the committee. 

Title to theses (and projects when treated as theses, as above) 
passes to the university upon their acceptance by the evaluating 
faculty. 

Variations from procedures and regulations should be referred to 
the Office of Graduate Studies for approval. 

Format Guidelines and Style 
Manuals 

All'University format guidelines are included in a thesis manual 
which has been developed to assist the student in preparation of a 
thesis or a project which is to be treated as a thesis. Copies are 
available in the Office of Graduate Studies. It is the students 
responsibility to make certain that the requirements are met. The 
student is strongly advised to become familiar with the instructions in 
the manual. Theses from the library or departmental offices 
should not be used as examples of correct format. 

The academic unit, through the student’s adviser and/or commit- 
tee, is responsible for the academic content and English usage in 
the thesis and for the student’s correct use of forms of documenta- 
tion and bibliography. In addition to the university format guide- 
lines, each academic unit may select a supplementary style man- 
ual to be followed in matters of documentation and bibliography. 
Students should consult their academic program adviser or thesis 
committee chair concerning the style manual used. 

If the supplementary style manual presents regulations which 
conflict with the all-university format guidelines published in the 
thesis manual, the university regulations take precedence. 

Some graduate programs require style manuals or guides designed 
for journal articles. Although these are helpful for abbreviations, 
tables, figures and footnoting, as well as other purposes, students 
should be aware of the difference between a thesis and an article 
and make appropriate adaptations, approved by the graduate 
program adviser. 

If the academic unit does not recommend a specific style manual, 
the student should refer to A Manual for Writers of Term Papers, 
Theses, and Dissertations (Fifth Edition) by Kate L. Tlirabian. 


Thesis Typists 

The student makes all necessary arrangements for the typing of 
the thesis. A list of thesis typists is available in the Office of 
Graduate Studies. The university Career Development Center 
also maintains a listing of students and others who have indicated 
their availability for typing assignments. An experienced typist is 
strongly advised, although the university does not endorse or 
recommend individual typists. 

Deadlines 

Adequate time should be allowed for typing, reading and approv- 
al by the adviser, the committee members, and the university 
thesis reader. 

It is recommended that the academic area sponsoring the degree 
program require that the final version of the thesis be submitted 
for approval at least six weeks prior to the last day of classes of the 
appropriate semester. TTe deadline for submission to the univer- 
sity thesis reader is two weeks prior to the last day of classes. For 
summer completion, the student should check with the academic 
unit and the Office of Graduate Studies for appropriate deadlines. 
The Office of Graduate Studies must receive notification from 
the Titan Bookstore by the last day of final examinations for the 
appropriate semester or session that the thesis has been deposited 
there and the fees paid. Ample time should be allowed for any 
special arrangements, such as duplication of the thesis by the 
Titan Bookstore or elsewhere, prior to the deadline. 

Final Procedures 

1. Approval Signatures: When the final draft is completed, the 
student obtains signatures on the approval page of all of the 
members of the committee. The title/approval page may be 
photocopied onto the correct paper stock; however, the signa- 
tures must be original. Photocopied signatures are not accept- 
able for binding or microfilming. The signatures must be in 
black ink. If there is a disagreement within the committee 
concerning the acceptability of the thesis, the approving sig- 
natures of a majority of the committee will be sufficient. 
Nonavailability of one member of the committee is not an 
adequate reason for acceptance of signatures by less than the 
full committee. No changes or additions will be allowed after 
the final signatures have been obtained. The student should 
arrange for at least three original title pages to be signed by the 
committee members. (Two originals are submitted to the 
bookstore with the thesis or project; one may be the student’s 
personal copy or be used for the departmental copy. ) 

2. University Thesis Reader: The thesis is ready for review by the 
university thesis reader after the faculty have signed off and 
the thesis has been typed in its final form. One unbound copy 
of the thesis including the original approval page is taken to 
the Office of Graduate Studies for review by the thesis reader 
for conformity to all-university format guidelines. The copy 


Theses and Projects 129 


submitted to the Graduate Studies Office may be a photocopy 
provided it is copied on the correct paper stock. The student, 
graduate program adviser, and thesis committee chair will be 
notified of any revisions or corrections which need to be 
made. Final approval on format is given by the Office of 
Graduate Studies on the “Thesis Approval Form.” 

3. Binding and Microfilming: The student takes the approved copy 
of the thesis, two signed title and approval pages, and the 
signed Thesis Approval Form to the Titan Bookstore and pays 
the appropriate fees. The bookstore arranges for the binding 
of the thesis by a local bindery and other services by Universi- 
ty Microfilms International (UMl). Once submitted and re- 
ceipted, the thesis may not be withdrawn by the student from 
the Titan Bookstore. The Titan Bookstore sends the approved 
original or duplicated copy (including the original signed ap- 
proval page) to University Microfilms International for film- 
ing and publication of the abstract, and upon its return sends 
it to the bindery. 

An agreement is normally completed for UMI to publish the 


abstract in Masters Abstracts, prepare a negative microfilm, and 
sell microfilm or xerographic copies to interested scholars. The 
university will accept alternative methods of microfilming, dupli- 
cation of printed copies and binding, subject to the specifications 
on file in the Graduate Studies Office. Arrangements for copy- 
righting are also possible, if desired, through UMI. 

4. Notification for Award of the Degree: The grade for the thesis is 
reported in the usual manner to the Office of the Registrar by 
the appropriate faculty. The Titan Bookstore notifies the Of- 
fice of Graduate Studies that the approved thesis has been 
deposited, the fees paid, and the agreement for microfilming 
and publication of the abstract completed by the student. 

5. Depositing of Thesis in Library : When the thesis is returned by 
the bindery, the bound copy is deposited for circulation in the 
library. One set of the slides or separately mounted illustrative 
material is housed with the bound copy. The second set is 
placed in the university archives with the microfilm copy. 


130 Theses and Projects 


Steps in the Master’s Degree 


There may be additional steps for individual students in particu- 
lar programs; for these, consult the program description and the 
academic unit (school, department or program) offering the de- 
gree program. 

• Action initiated by student (as indicated below) 

1. Admission to Graduate Standing: Conditionally Classified 

• Apply for admission 

• Declare objective(s), using precise codes on the applica- 
tion form 

• Receive application acknowledgement from the Admis- 
sions Office 

• Request two sets of official transcripts of all previous col- 
lege-level course work attempted to be sent to Admissions 
Office 

• Take tests, if required by program, and order test scores 
sent to Cal State Fullerton, designating appropriate aca- 
demic unit on the test registration form 

• Consult appropriate academic unit for advisement 

• Provide appropriate academic unit with any other support- 
ing statements or materials, as required 

Recommendation for admission made by academic unit to 

Admissions Office 

Receive notification of admission from Admissions Office 

2. Graduate Standing: Classified 

• Complete any course prerequisites and/or remove deficien- 
cies 

• Apply for classified standing in the academic area offer- 
ing the particular program prior to completion of nine 
units of study plan course work 

• Consult appropriate academic unit for advisement, includ- 
ing development of official study plan 

• Provide appropriate academic unit with any other support- 
ing statements or materials, as shown in program descrip- 
tions in this catalog 

• Take tests if required by program, and order test scores sent 
to Cal State Fullerton, designating appropriate academic 
unit on the test registration form 

Recommendation made by academic unit to the Dean of 

Graduate Studies 


Receive notification of classified standing being granted from 
Graduate Studies when the study plan is sent, showing approval 
by the Dean of Graduate Studies. 

• If not received within a reasonable length of time, call the 
academic unit sponsoring the degree or Graduate Studies. 

3. Completion of Requirements 

• Apply for a graduation check and advancement to candi- 
dacy prior to the beginning of the final semester arul no 
later than the deadline initiating university review and 
formal approval by faculty. The form is available at the 
Admissions and Records information desk, the Gradua- 
tion Unit and the Graduate Studies Office. A graduation 
and diploma fee must be paid when filing the request with 
the university cashier. 

• Consult appropriate academic unit for advisement 

• Complete written and/or oral examination, if required 

• Complete thesis or project, if applicable 

• Obtain approval of committee 

• Obtain approval of university thesis reader (thesis 
only) 

• Deposit approved copy of thesis and make arrangements 
for binding, microfilming and publication of the abstract 
in the Titan Bookstore by the applicable deadline 

Final, approved study plan, with recommendation, sent by 
appropriate academic unit to Dean of Graduate Studies 

Preliminary approval, pending adequate grades, and com- 
pletion of any other requirements, granted by Dean of 
Graduate Studies. 

• Deposit approved copy of thesis or project in academic 
department (if required) 

• Complete all general and specific requirements, other 
than final course examinations, by the last day of classes, 
in order to assure granting of the degree by the end of the 
semester 

Final verification of completion of requirements sent by 
the Graduate Studies Office to the registrar 

Receive notification of award of degree from registrar ap- 
proximately eight weeks after the end of the semester 

4. Commencement 

• Make appropriate arrangements for cap, gown and hood 
rental in Titan Bookstore 

Commencement information sent by the Registrar’s Office 


Steps in the Master’s Degree 131 




i '/f,*ar • .;h -v-fl '«/■ ■ . ■'' 

' -k 


' '■ ” :; :'!liwL-»% i'' /O' ; r, W 

. ' , ■ • .’V:' ) . ' '.!' 

, ' ! •'is.'\y,k V' ’ >' ' 

' • 'jj i:j ^m . i ‘r h- ' (j;.*') *•■>' ( 4 .' 

•rr >. . 3 '. , : :. 

LjI;.. ; < » VW' ■ ■ • ’*‘ *a* '• >r- '^V vjTBkiV 

(/.fliii'.' -I .■i.,..\ M' ,. . . '. t.. - . 

— !.• : ■*.. '■ ' i r> »»'v' j 

> , ’-it.i-:}; i u,-. 

1 !.- ;v '3 * 

'.'-.ih : / •'.oi'U,fti. ■ ^’ 1*.K y ‘ 

-i’*' ' . ! :' K'? ■ :' iKtsli ■• * 

-.u •;; liv. .». mj. •l';r ’0 * 

.’ri"' yii.'i /ini* V* !t, t ; : 'TjK; • 

i ■'/'■ 

: ...jIkA 1 ili j;, ']■ . ’ I\ . . » 

-(i? K> i>n<? pvuin; t yi , ;■, r_" 

:.’'i ‘ Hj jif; ;»1 ! - I *i» 

yrl Ui::^ . .>:\ii<J <n y ,/ rb ,<7 . , ' • v I .« * y : , ■ r _ : -v:<H 

' i yp 'inM/hiil', ' ^->*'l'>.. VJ':*. i, 

V/i, V • , ,oq ^ 

*n fit- -‘P; r • lO/ilC 

C'MhiftS ) 

' r J,s.’jp (V 10 dff .t' 1 «> / { y.j L r/aiq*:;fc - /4 . * 

f ; /JM U ‘ ; .» 1 i r 1 1 :*)fn 1 ^ f . | .ih 

174 (*y' 7 7 .'f rriuity ,1 7:‘. . 7. Lilt; Ii7-y.iy- il4* 7 ■••' •rrir/.) • 

I’ • V r^} t,ii ; -riOtlK 4 Ti.^;.t :■ 7 ^' . '' it;-.:: 'Tjoih 

h iy -Pi -'H :.!■ :o;4n7n£;iji 0 rj 

W .'wn > 

};••' r. ‘'miiiysv* tcj rr'P/jJqrnrr, iv> ry>*:' - ;• ' 7 I 

4.r01‘=':34:'‘“ t»i ■ ) .!* 

4 i;« ir. jit i> tir/Ait io ni)M y/ ' .• / 

r; •" Jfl‘ I' . Hii VJ;;!-' luif mi'/ 

{ I.7:f ;;.v -M . y 7 nil rjnu'iXf^ a36nqt>iq’'|fc • 

>TOi''"''v<rf! f. i:T U>ri7i 

y7**lO -■ U7- ‘>7; jrj:-. y j * l i7 7y?'7:)^T";rx;f < vv 



r);^' .»v , --v;- ••-C'ni S tv i" •• •■ ' ■/: -r^' •v'^/CT 

,.' :--t- : ' .:■•» ' • : • -^r • tiii 

; fri >■ , P > ' )ffiu '"n-^beue 

371 , V, 

sf,-'..’ • ■ . »l " . ^ 'r<.r 7 fci.i 5 ^;^ : «:■: 

fl,:' • 


raaJ- w».' n- v ' • 

>- 7 C^ 

■^.^' >; 3 h;fV-iq li*fii .'K-' ' i ;■ 7 .i < ,, ;^ • 

oj i.i'?< '--c • .' V . ■ .••>l<v ;| 

■«*voa Jrtui nlv': : , , n:. >' !•;•: 7 ,/. *1 ■: >f.; *• 

rr . yiir’.: ■ <r:aj. -.nvi?!- » • P, .P j. ; j, 7 >> 

' > ' -f '* y ■: 7 :- '.U:U jjrrj'rb 

i’ ■ ' » ’iiJ .Hdiv'-n ' T- 7 1 < ( T'^ri jjiy ,><,0 ) • 

I'llr’ .*'»•'■ Tv./ ’iiii,n>*y* .s.'t ?4 *>'■! : j'-i, ; .f '. .'Ip IF * 

rr>i|>'p >>7 .ylK{^ vl.s/n .’ • 27 r ‘. ' s?, ;.;'j<-, v<T! 

? j.- /d f rKij> npniTbn .' > 7/1 

ilfWiiAimhA rr.y: fujin nh. to noju ,;ro. .- 

iPi’CyiiO . 7 iTr.,> 7 *:i' ^ 1 iijiri'. 5 yri> .j, 

OLft> 4 t- '. iv» .' . ;• •uo. ^’ 1/1 v-'^s ■> vnf> 737 iq::ivjlj • 

' 71 ? 

r ] » TTfe 7 ^- -be -> 7«i/ (i» b loli • 

■-'- : •* ' fi'M. .- ■ ■ j u: loHi^ ffi:: ••;■ '■• ji • •..rifciq 7 fj 5 ^ai 

JiW/ 7 ' tL'v:. 7 'Pq io teJUIi; 

y 7 5 ;';c ^troqi-iqqK • 

n.Fiq {buJn i&i'utV- :m 77 ’jubv 7 t; 

*'.’>/' • V i. roi V tio-j yawAmy ^^unqcfiq^qs sbivm^ • 

«j(b f’i /»n 4t 

UJ*'< « 7 ^> 7 € tF- ,r:TC! 7 C-q v 4 H * 

r r _ :-;i»tF! 7 u 77 Pi j,£? 

. V % f;/, 

V. iT:,-:- f y($ »•; ; .;j,.T;J .4 y- tK^iHln-rriyv^y'^fi 

e .tiou ci jtijjb/ 1 O 


r 

j 


^ i 












,..(i*^ ,>t‘= 

>r< 

, 1 ^^. G«^ Academic Prosrams , „,C<>*^,j,.a<2'* 



1 .e«^ 

tf® 


G<»* 






e«**“ 






M 


^ 0aJ>^'' i^G 
















eai>^ 


G>^ , 





QoP 


n 


/I 


uM 


, Co^ 



Degree Programs 


California State University, Fullerton offers the following bacca- 
laureate degree prc^rams which are described on the pages listed: 


B.A. American Studies 398 

B.A. Anthropology 403 

B.A. Art 178 

B. FA. Art 179 

B.S. Biochemistry 537 

B.A. Biological Science 528 

B.A. Business Administration 231 

B.A. Chemistry 538 

B.S. Chemistry 537 

B.S. Child Development 335 

B.S. Civil Engineering 309 

B.A. Communications 274 

B.A. Qimmunicative Disorders 284 

B.A. Comparative Literature 417 

B.S. Computer Science 299 

B.A. Criminal Justice 413 

B.A. Dance 209 

B.A. Economics 240 

B.S. Electrical Engineering 315 

B.S. Engineering (Engineering Science) 307 

B.A. English 418 

B.A. Ethnic Studies (option in Afro-Ethnic studies) . . . 393 

B.A. Ethnic Studies (option in Chicano studies) 410 

B.A. French 430 

B.A. Geography 450 

B.S. Geology 545 

B.A. German 431 

B.A. History 458 

B.S. Human Services 368 

B.A. International Business with a concentration in 
French, German, Japanese, Portuguese or Spanish ... 251 

B.A. Japanese 432 

B.A. Latin American Studies 467 

B.A. Liberal Studies 470 

B.A. Linguistics 473 

B.A. Mathematics 550 

B.S. Mechanical Engineering 323 

B.A. Music 193 

B.M. Music 195 

B.S. Nursing 374 

B.A. Philosophy 480 

B.S. Physical Education 358 

B.S. Physics 558 

B.A. Political Science (including concentration in public 

administration) 485 

B.A. Psychology’ 495 

B.A. Religious Studies 504 

B.A. Russian East European Area Studies 510 

B.A. Sociology 515 

B.A. Spanish 432 

B.A. Special Major 168 

B.A. Speech Communication 284 

B.A. Theatre Arts 207 


The following master’s degree programs are offered: 


M.S. Accountancy 225 

M.A. American Studies 398 

M.A. Anthropology 404 

M.A. Art 182 

M.F.A. Art 183 

M.A. Biology 529 

M.B.A. Business Administration 235 

M.S. Chemistry 539 

M.S. Civil Engineering 310 

M.A. Communications 276 

M.A. Communicative Disorders 285 

M.A. Comparative Literature 417 

M.S. Computer Science 3(X) 

M.S. Q^unseling 339 

M.A. Economics 241 


M.S. Education (with concentrations in bilingual/bi- 
cultural education [Spanish-English], elementary curricu- 
lum and instruction, reading, educational administration, 
special education and teaching English to speakers of other 


languages) 333 

M.S. Electrical Engineering 316 

M.S. Engineering (Engineering Science) 307 

M.A. English 419 

M.S. Environmental Studies 427 

M.A. French 434 

M.A. Geography 451 

M.A. German 435 

M.A. History 458 

M.A. Interdisciplinary Studies 168 

M.A. Linguistics 473 

M.S. Management Science 260 

M.A. Mathematics 551 

M.S. Mechanical Engineering 324 

M.A. Music 197 

M.M. Music 197 

M.S. Physical Education 361 

M.A. Political Science 486 

M.A. Psychology 495 

M.S. Psychology (Clinical) 497 

M.P.A. Public Administration 487 

M.A.T. Science 562 

M.A. Social Sciences 513 

M.A. Sociology 515 

M.A. Spanish (including emphasis in bilingual 

studies) 436 

M.A. Speech Communication 285 

M.S. Taxation 226 

M.A. Theatre Arts 209 

M.F.A. Theatre Arts (with concentrations in Acting, 

Directing, and Technical Theatre and Design) 210 


134 Degree Programs 


Graduation Requirements 
for the Bachelor’s Degree 



Unit Requirements 

A, Total Unit Requirements 

The minimum number of semester units necessary for a bache- 
lor’s degree, exclusive of remedial courses (i.e. course numbered 


0'99) is as follows: 

1. For the Bachelor of Arts degree 124 

2. For the Bachelor of Fine Arts degree 132 

3. For the Bachelor of Science degree 124' 132 

4. For the Bachelor of Nursing degree 128 

5. For the Bachelor of Science in Engineering 

degree 135 

6. For the Bachelor of Music degree 132 

B. Upper-Division Requirement 


A minimum of 40 semester units of upper division coursework is 
required for any CSUF bachelor’s degree. Courses offering upper 
division credit are those numbered at the 300' and 400- levels. 

All units from upper division courses are applicable to the upper 
division units requirement, including units from courses in the 
major, the minor, and general education. 

C. Special Unit Totals 

The maximum number of special semester units accepted for a 
bachelor’s degree is as follows: 


1. Transferable units from community or junior 

colleges 70 

2. Transferable units from a four-year university or college or 
from a combination of two and fouryear institutions ... 94 

3. From credit by examination 30 

4. From extension & correspondence courses 24 

5. From credit/no credit courses 36 

6. From Reading Skills courses numbered at the 100' and 

200'levels 4 


7. From Internship courses 


6 


8. From Independent Study courses 


9 


Graduate Requirements for the Bachelor’s Degree 135 



Residence Requirement 

A minimum of thirty' (30) semester units must be earned in courses 
taken at California State University, Fullerton. Twenty 'four (24) of 
these units must be earned in upper division courses. At least twelve 
(12) upper division semester units in the major must be taken at this 
institution. Courses taken in extension (except for summer session 
and intersession courses offered as part of the special sessions pro- 
gram) and units earned through credit by examination may not be 
used to fulfill these requirements. 

Grade Point Average 
Requirements 

Three grade point averages, each 2.0 or higher, are required for 
graduation: 

A. An average based on all units attempted, including those 
attempted at other institutions. 

B. An average based on all units attempted at C)SUF. 

C. An average based on ail units attempted in the major. 

Distribution of Requirements 

A. General Education 

A minimum of 51 semester units are needed to complete C^SUFs 
general education requirements. See the “General Education” 
section of this catalog. 

B. Major 

The unit requirements in a major varies substantially from major 
to major. Some majors require as little as 33 semester units while 
others require as much as 105 units. Refer to the Department 
listings for the specific requirements of any particular major. 

C. Upper-Division Baccalaureate Writing 
Requirement 

The university requires that every person completing bachelors 
degrees under 1980-81 and later catalog requirements, demonstrate 
wnting ability acceptable for graduation. The upper-division writing 
requirement has two parts; students must satisfy each: 

Upper-division course requirement: Each major requires that 
students pass a specially designated upper-division course or 
courses of at least three semester units. Examination require- 
ment: The university faculty requires that each student pass 
the University Examination in Writing Proficiency (EWP), 
which has been designed to measure writing ability. 

Courses. The University Board on Wiring FWiciency must certify 
the course or courses that each major department designates to 
fulfill the requirement. Departments and programs may specify ei- 


ther a single course of at least three units which involves inten- 
sive instruction in writing, or two or more courses (a total of at 
least six units) in which students are required to write one or more 
lengthy papers, or several shorter ones, which involve the organiza- 
tion and expression of complex ideas. In these courses students will 
be given careful and timely evaluations of their writing and sugges- 
tions for improvement. An assessment of writing competence will 
be included in determining the final course grade. 

Students must pass these courses with a grade of C or better. A list 
of courses designated for each major will appear in the class 
schedule each semester. 

Examination. After completing 60 units toward the baccalaure- 
ate, students must take the University Examination in Writing 
Proficiency (EWP). The EWP consists of two parts, a machine- 
scored test of Standard Written English, and a 90-minute essay 
which is evaluated by faculty readers. Students who fail the 
examination may retake it until they pass it. A limited number of 
students who have failed the EWP two or more times may enroll 
in English 199, Intensive Writing Review. Credit in English 199 
will be equivalent to passing the examination. This course will 
not count toward graduation requirements, nor will it satisfy the 
upper division writing course requirement described above. Infor- 
mation abtiut registration for the EWP and testing dates is pub- 
lished in the class schedule each semester. 

Petitions. In certain cases, students may petition the University 
Bt>ard on Writing Proficiency for exemption from or modification 
of the requirement. 

1 . Transfer students and candidates for a second baccalaureate 
may be certified as meeting the requirement after they have 
submitted to the Board acceptable evidence of having com- 
pleted the equivalent to C^UPs up|:>er division requirement. 

2. Students may petition for substitution of an alternative to the 
EWP when exceptional circumstances, e.g. a clinically iden- 
tified learning disability, make the examination inappropri- 
ate. Petitions must include documentation of the special cir- 
cumstances and propose specific alternative means of demon- 
strating writing proficiency. 

D. Minors 

A minor is a means by which students can enrich their academic 
preparation thrt^ugh concentrated study of a discipline related to, 
or different from, their declared major. Although students can 
pursue multiple majors, many decide that declaring a major and a 
minor is a more desirable choice. A minor provides a structured 
selection of courses to augment or complement the student’s 
major by broadening a student’s academic experience or serving 
as preparation for a specific career. A minor can extend the 
student’s knowledge in two related areas (e.g., English and 
Speech Communication, Anthropology and Foreign Unguages, 
Sociology and Women’s Studies) or in two disparate ones (e.g.. 


136 Graduate Requirements for the Bachelor’s Degree 


Business Administration and Computer Science, Economics and 
Foreign Languages, Mathematics and Psychology). A minor can 
also enable students to systematically explore fields of knowledge 
about which they are curious or enthusiastic. Students may wish 
to consult with an adviser in their major department for recom- 
mendations of suitable minor fields of study. 


selecting courses to satisfy the major requirement. The general 
education requirement encourages freedom of choice within the 
natural sciences, social sciences, arts and humanities, and basic 
subjects. Students at the university use their electives to broaden 
their general education, deepen some aspect of their specialties, 
pursue work in related fields, and satisfy curiosities and enthusi- 
asms for particular subjects or areas of interest. 


A minor is not required for the baccalaureate; however, students 
may elect to complete one or more minors from those available 
and have that noted on their records. In completing the require- 
ments for a minor, a minimum of twelve (12) units, of which at 
least six (6) must be upper division, must be distinct and different 
from the units used to complete the requirements of the major. 
Any units above this minimum requirement which can be used to 
satisfy both the requirements for the minor and for the major may 
be double counted. General education courses, however, may be 
used to meet minor requirements. 


Below is a list of currently approved minors: 


Afro- Ethnic Studies 
American Studies 
Anthropology 
Art 

Biotechnology 

Business Administration 

Chemistry 

Chicano Studies 

Child Development 

Christian Studies 

Computer Science 

Conservation 

Criminal Justice 

Economics 

English 

Foreign Language 
French 
German 
Portuguese 
Spanish 
Geography 
Geology 
Gerontology 
Health Promotion 
History 


Human Services 

International Politics 

Japanese 

Jewish Studies 

Latin American Studies 

Linguistics 

Management Information 
Systems 
Mathematics 
Mathematics for Teacher 
Education 
Military Science 
Music 

Pacific Rim Studies 
Peace Studies 
Philosophy 
Physical Education 
Physics 

Political Science 
Psychology 

Public Administration 
Religious Studies 
Sociology 

Speech Communication 
Women’s Studies 


Advisement on general education and electives is provided by 
the Academic Advisement Center. 


F. Multiple Majors and Second Baccalaureate 
Degrees 

Within the units required for the baccalaureate it is possible for a 
student to complete the requirements for more than one major 
within a degree program when the additional major is within the 
degree of the first major. At least 24 units, including 12 at the upper- 
division level, in each bachelor of arts major, or 36 units, including 
18 at the upper-division level, in each bachelor of science major, 
must be applied exclusively to the respective major and may not be 
used to meet requirements in other majors or in general education. 
The student shall declare the additional major with the appropriate 
department not later than the beginning of the student’s final year 
of study. The completion of additional majors will be noted at the 
time of graduation by appropriate entries on the academic record 
and in the commencement program. 

It is also possible for a student to complete a major in one degree 
program and an additional major from a different program, pro- 
vided the minimum units described in the preceding paragraph 
are applied exclusively to the respective major and are not used in 
other majors or in general education. In this instance, the stu- 
dent has the option of which degree he or she will receive with 
the major appropriate to that degree. The completion of the 
additional major will be noted on the student’s academic record. 
The university does not award two degrees to the individual who 
completes multiple majors in a four-year degree program. 

Second baccalaureate degrees: 

First degree completed elsewhere, second at Fullerton. Students seek- 
ing a bachelor’s degree from Fullerton after having received a 
baccalaureate from another institution may qualify for graduation 
with the approval and recommendation of the faculty upon com- 
pletion of the following: 


E. Electives 

After fulfilling the requirements in general education, and a specific 
major (and possibly a minor), each student is free to choose the rest 
of the courses needed to complete the semester units required for 
graduation. Different majors vary considerably in both the number 
of units they require in their own and related fields. They also vary 
considerably in the amount of latitude or choice they permit in 


( 1 ) General Education requirements: Students holding a baccalau- 
reate degree from an accredited institution will be held to (a) 
the breadth requirements of Executive Order 338, i.e. 12 units 
in each of the areas of arts and humanities, social sciences, and 
math and science, (b) the statutory requirements and (c) the 
English Writing Proficiency requirements. Students willnot be 
held to specific CSUF categories or courses. 


Graduate Requirements for the Bachelor’s Degree 137 


(2) all requirements in the major field of study 

(3) residence and scholarship requirements 

Two baccalaureates from Fuilertor}. With the approval and recom- 
mendation of the faculty, a student may qualify for a second 
baccalaureate under the following circumstances: 

(1) a minimum of 30 units beyond the awarding of the first 
degree have been earned 

(2) a minimum of 24 upper-division units are included among 
the 30 units mentioned above 

(3) a minimum of 12 units must he offered by the department in 
which the second degree is being sought 

(4) two or more degrees may not normally be awarded at the 
same time 

Units included in second baccalaureate programs may not apply 
to graduate degrees or credential programs. 

Graduation Requirement Check 

A candidate for graduation must file an application for a graduation 
requirements check before the first day of instruction of the semester 
prior to the semester in which the student expects to graduate. The 
graduation and diploma fee is required when the application is filed. 
Application forms are available at the Admissions and Records 
information counter and in the graduation unit. 


Candidates for the baccalaureate should refer to the semester class 
schedule for application filing dates. A senior should have complet- 
ed at least 100 units (including the current work in progress) and a 
substantial portion of the major requirements before requesting a 
graduation check. If the candidate does not complete the require- 
ments in the semester indicated, a change of graduation date must 
be filed in the Office of Admissions and Records. 

Faculty Approval and 
Recommendation 

Under provisions of the Academic Senate, the Office of Admissions 
and Records publishes a list of degree candidates twice a year: in the 
fall and in the spring (for both spring and summer graduates). After 
review and approval by the faculty, and upon verification of the 
completion of requirements, diplomas are issued with the last day of 
the respective term as the official date of graduation. 

Annual commencement exercises are held at the end of the 
spring semester for those who completed degree requirements 
mid-year and for those completing degree requirements in the 
spring semester or summer session. The president of the universi- 
ty, with the authority of the Board of Trustees, confers all degrees, 
subject to the completion of remaining requirements. 

Note: Students completing bachelor degree requirements who 
wish to continue their studies at the university for postbaccalaur- 
eate or graduate degree objectives must apply for admission de- 
claring their new objectives. 


138 Graduate Requirements for the Bachelor’s Degree 



General Education 

General Education Objectives 

The general education-breadth requirements are designed so 
that, taken with the major-depth program and electives present- 
ed by each baccalaureate candidate, they will assure that gradu- 
ates have made noteworthy progress toward becoming truly edu- 
cated persons. Particularly, the purpose of these requirements is 
to provide means whereby graduates: 

A. will have achieved the ability to think clearly and logically, 
to find and critically examine information, to communicate 
orally and in writing, and to perform quantitative functions; 

B. will have acquired appreciable knowledge about their own 
bodies and minds, about how human society has developed 
and how it now functions, about the physical world in which 
they live, about the other forms of life with which they share 
that world, and about the cultural endeavors and legacies of 
their civilization; 

C. will have come to an understanding and appreciation of the 
principles, methodologies, value systems, and thought pro- 
cesses employed in human inquiries. (Executive Order 338) 

General Education Requirements 

All students beginning studies fall 1987 or later must complete a 
minimum of 5 1 semester units of general education courses se- 
lected in accordance with the pattern designated on the follow- 
ing pages. General education courses must be selected from an ap- 
proved list and taken for a letter grade. Students should refer to the 
latest university Schedule of Classes for the most up-to-date list 
of approved classes. A student who has a break in enrollment for 
more than one semester in any calendar year may be liable for 
new catalog requirements. 

Students must complete at least nine units of upper-division (i.e. 
300' or 4(X)- level) general education course work taken after the 
student has achieved junior standing (i.e. 60 units). At least nine 
units of general education must be earned in residence at Califor- 
nia State University, Fullerton. 

A grade of C or better must be earned for each course in Basic 
Subjects: Oral Communication (I. A.), Written Communication 
(I.B.), Critical Thinking (I.C.), Reading (optional) (I.D.), and 
Mathematics (111. A. 4.). All general education courses must be 
taken on a grade option 1 basis (A, B, C, D, F). An option 2 
(credit/no credit) course may be used for general education if that 
is the only grade option for the course. Consult the course de- 
scription in the departmental sections of this catalog for grade 
option information on a specific course. 


General Education 139 


Courses offered by the department of the student’s major may not 
be used to fulfill the unit requirement of categories 111 or IV with 
the exception of categories offering choices from only one depart- 
ment. Courses which are cross-listed meet general education 
category requirements for all majors except those in the home 
department of the cross-listed course. The “home” department is 
the one under which the course description appears in the cata- 
log. For example, Anthropology is the “home” department for 
Anthropology/Religious Studies 305; hence, it may not be used 
by an Anthropology major to meet general education require- 
ments. Also, no more than nine units from any single depart- 
ment may be used in meeting the requirements of general educa- 
tion. Upper-division courses offered by the department of the 
student’s major may not be used for general education credit. 

At least three (3) semester units of Cultural Diversity course work 
must be taken from among the asterisked courses in Section lY 
At least one laboratory course must be taken from among the 
courses marked with a dagger (t) in Sections IIl.A.l., 111. A. 2., 
or I11.A.3. 

Among the following list of requirements a few courses appear in 
more than one category. These courses may be used to fulfill the 
requirements of only one, and not both, of the categories within 
which they appear. 

A score of T145 or higher on the English Placement Test (EPT), or 
completion of English 99 with a grade of C or better, is a prerequisite 
for enrollment in courses in category I. A. 2. >XVitten Communica- 
tion, for all students except those with an exemption. 

A score of 550 or higher on the Entry Level Mathematics (ELM) 
examination is a prerequisite for enrollment in courses in Cate- 
gory II. A. 4. Mathematics for all students except those with an 
exemption. 

Certification Policy 

Under provisions of Title 5 and Executive Order 342, accredited 
colleges and universities may certify the completion of part of the 
48-51 units required in general education. Within the policy of 
the Board of Trustees, Cal State Fullerton will accept such certifi- 
cation of general education up to a maximum of 39 semester 
units, but may accept no more in general education than the 
number of units required in each area. 

Transfer students who are certified in any category with fewer than 
the required units will be subject to additional units and will be 
permitted to take the additional units in upper-division categories. 

Intersegmental General Education 
Transfer Curriculum (IGETC) 

All lower division Cal State Fullerton general education require- 
ments may be satisfied by the completion in its entirety of this 
transfer curriculum at another CSU, UC, or communit>’ college 
campus. Information about IGETC is available at each campus. 


California Articulation Number 

California State University, Fullerton is authorized to cross- 
reference certain courses with California Articulation Number 
(CAN). This is a system of equating courses between campuses in 
California. It is used by an increasing number of community 
colleges and four-year universities and colleges to identify some 
of the transferable, introductory courses in several academic 
disciplines. 

The system assures students that CAN courses noted in the 
catalog of one campus will be accepted in lieu of the comparable 
CAN course on another participating campus. An example is our 
Anthropology 101 Introduction to Biological Anthropology; 
CAN ANTH 2 is accepted in lieu of courses similarly marked in 
other university or college catalogs. 

The California Articulation Numbers are listed in parentheses by 
the course descriptions in the catalog. A listing of courses cur- 
rently approved for CAN follows: 

California 

Articulation 


Number 

Cal State Fullerton Courses 

CAN ANTH 2 

Anthro 101 Introduction to Biological 
Anthropology 

CAN ANTH 4 

Anthro 102 Introduction to Cultural 
Anthropology 

CAN ANTH 6 

Anthro 103 Introduction to 

Archaeology 

CAN ART 2 

Art 201 A Art and Civilization 

CAN ART 4 

Art 20 IB Art and Civilization 

CAN ART 6 

Art 106 A Beginning Ceramics 

CAN ART 8 

Art 107 A Beginning Drawing 

CAN ART 12 

Art 216A Beginning Sculpture 

CAN ART 14 

Art 103 Two-dimensional Design 

CAN ART 16 

Art 104 Three-dimensional Design 

CAN BIOL 4 

Biology 261 Principles of Zoology 

CAN BIOL 6 

Biology 241 Principles of Botany 

CAN CHEM 2 

Chemistry 120A General Chemistry 

CAN CHEM 4 

Chemistry 120B General Chemistry 

CAN ECON 2 

Economics 202 Principles of 
Macroeconomics 

CAN ECON 4 

Economics 201 Principles of 
Microeconomics 

CAN ENGL 2 

English 101 Beginning College Writing 

CAN ENGL 20 

English 206 Introduction to Poetry 

CAN ENGR 2 

EG -ME 102 Graphical Communications 

CAN ENGR 4 

EG-ME 202 Material Science 

CAN ENGR 6 

EG-EE 203 -b 203L Electric Circuits and 
Laboratory 

CAN ENGR 8 

EG-CE 201 Statics 


140 General Education 


California 

Articulation 

Number 

CAN ENGR 12 

Cal State Fullerton Courses 

EG -EE 203 Electric Circuits 

CAN GEOG 2 

Geography 1 10 Principles of Physical 
Geography 

CAN GEOG 4 

Geography 160 Culture and 

Environment 

CAN GEOL 2 

Geological Sci 101 


Geological Sci 101 L Physical Geology 
and Lab 

CAN GEOL 4 

Geological Sci 201 Earth History 

CAN GOVT 2 

Poli Sci ICX) American Government 

CAN HIST 8 

History 170A United States to 1877 

CAN HIST 10 

History 170B United States Since 1877 

CAN JOUR 2 

Comm 101 Writing for the Mass Media 

CAN JOUR 4 

Comm 233 Mass Communication in 
Modern Society 

CAN MATH 16 

Mathematics 125 Precalculus 

CAN MATH 18 

Mathematics 150A Analytic Geometry 
and Calculus 

CAN MATH 20 

Mathematics 150B Analytic Geometry 
and Calculus 

CAN MATH 22 

Mathematics 250A Intermediate 
Calculus: Computer Laboratory 

CAN MATH 30 

Mathematics 130 A Short Course in 
Calculus 

CAN MATH 34 

Mathematics 135 Business Calculus 

CAN PHIL 2 

Philosophy 1(X) Introduction to 
Philosophy 

CAN PHIL 6 

Philosophy 210 Logic 

CAN PHYS 2 

Physics 2 1 1 A and 2 1 1 AL Elementary 
Physics 4- Lab 

CAN PHYS 4 

Physics 2 1 1 B and 2 1 1 BL Elementary 
Physics + Lab 

CAN PHYS 8 

Physics 225 A and 225 AL Fundamental 
Physics: Mechanics 4 - Lab 

CAN PHYS 12 

Physics 225 B 4 - 


Physics 225 BL Fundamental Physics: 
Electricity and Magnetism and Lab 

CAN PSY 2 

Psychology 101 Introductory Psychology 

CANSOC2 

Sociology 101 Introduction to Sociology 

CAN SOC 4 

Sociology 102 Social Problems 

CAN SPCH 4 

Speech Comm 102 Public Speaking 

CAN SPCH 6 

Speech Comm 235 Essentials of 
Argumentation 


General Education Honors 

The General Education Honors Program offers students many of 
the educational benefits of a small college in the midst of the rich 
resources of a large university. The program’s small class sizes 
(twenty students maximum) provide challenging learning exper- 
iences, individual attention from professors, and closer interac- 
tion with other students. 

In honors sections of general education courses, students are en- 
couraged to develop and discuss ideas in an active, imaginative and 
original way. Professors contribute by making creative use of curricu- 
lar materials and student assignments. They interact personally and 
intensively with each student and encourage students to interact 
with each other. These courses do not simply demand a greater 
quantity of work. They create a learning environment in which 
students are encouraged to realize their intellectual potential. 

The General Education Honors Program gives officially accepted 
students an opportunity to earn recognition for distinguished aca- 
demic performance in general education courses. Those partici- 
pants who successfully complete the requirements for honors in 
general education will have a notation placed on their transcripts. 

Entrance to the Program 

Academic achievement in high school or college serves as the 
prerequisite for admission to the honors program. Those eligible 
for entrance include (1) first-time freshmen with a high school 
g.p.a. (grade point average) of 3.5 or better and (2) continuing 
students with a collegiate g.p.a. of 3.0 or better. 

Students should declare their intent to pursue the General Edu- 
cation Honors Program by submitting a formal letter of applica- 
tion to the coordinator of the General Education Honors Pro- 
gram. The letter should include the student’s name, current 
address and phone number, high school or college g.p.a., and a 
paragraph stating the reasons for pursuing the program. 

Entrance to Courses 

Individual honors courses are also open to any student who meets 
the program’s g.p.a. standards. Exceptions to this policy may be 
made with the consent of the honors course instructor and the 
authorization of the honors program coordinator. First priority for 
class entrance, however, goes to students formally admitted to 
the program. 

Requirements for Completion 

Program students are normally expected to average one honors 
course a semester. These course sections are officially designated 
in the class schedule by an “H” after the course number. 


General Education 141 


To complete the honors program, a student must (1) complete 24 
units of general education honors courses with a grade of C or 
better in each course and (2) accomplish a g.p.a. of 3.25 or better 
for the 24 units of general education honors courses attempted. 
With approval of the honors program coordinator, up to six units 
of advanced placement credit with a score of 4 or higher may be 
substituted for general education honors credit. 

Students are responsible for requesting a review of their records to 
verify completion. Upon verification, a notation will be made on 
the student’s transcript indicating completion of the program. 


English 101 Beginning College Writing (3) 

C. Critical Thinking (3 units minimum) 

Courses in this area are designed to develop skills in critical 
thinking, including the ability to distinguish fact from judgment 
and belief from knowledge, to reason inductively and deduct! ve^ 
ly, and to understand the formal and informal fallacies of Ian- 
guage and thought. 

Choices: 


Transfer Course Work 

Students transferring into CSUF who have taken honors courses 
at another accredited institution may apply those courses to the 
General Education Honors Program. 

The following stipulations apply to the transfer of courses: 

1. The course is used in partial fullfillment of CSUF general 
education requirements. 

2. The course is designated and acknowledged as an honors 
course by the institution where the course was taken. 


English 103 
Philosophy 200 
Philosophy 210 
Psychology 110 

Reading 290 

Speech Comm 235 


Critical Reasoning and Writing (3) 
Argument and Reasoning (3) 

Logic (3) 

Reasoning and Problem 
Solving (3) 

Critical Reading as Critical 
Thinking (3) 

Essentials of Argumentation 


II. HISTORICAL AND CULTURAL 
FOUNDATIONS (12 units minimum) 

A. The Development of Civilization (6 units minimum) 


3. The course was completed with a grade of B or better. 

4. A maximum of nine units of transfer honors courses may be 
applied toward completion of the honors program. 

Any questions concerning the Honors Program should be direct- 
ed to the coordinator of the General Education Honors Pn^gram. 

I. BASIC SUBJECTS (9 units minimum) 

NOTE: A grade of “C” or better is required in sections I. A. , I. B. , 
and l.C. and 111. A. 4. 


A. Oral Communication (3 units minimum) 


Courses in this area are designed to impart skills in the use of 
human symbolic interaction, fiKusing on effective speaking. 

Choices: 


Chicano Studies 102 
Speech Comm 100 

Speech Comm 102 
Theatre 110 


Communication Skills (3) 
Intrcxluction to Human 
Communication (3) 

Public Speaking (3) 

Oral Communication of Literature (3) 


B. Written Communication (3 units minimum) 

The course in this area is designed to impart skills in organizing, 
analyzing, and expressing thoughts and concepts in standard 
written English. Students must satisfy the English Placement Test 
requirement prior to enrolling in the course. 


Courses in this area give a holistic view of the development of 
society — its values, traditions, and institutions. 


Anthropology 150A 

History IlOA 
History HOB 
History 150A 

Philosophy 150A 


Western Civilization to the 16th 
Century: A Comparative 
Approach (3) 

The West and the World to the 16th 
Century (3) 

The West and the World Since the 
16th Century (3) 

Western Civilization to the 16th 
Century: A Comparative 
Approach (3) 

Western Civilization to the 16th 


Century: A Comparative 
Approach (3) 

Religious Studies 150A Western Civilization to the 16th 
Century: A Comparative 
Approach (3) 


B. American History, Institutions and Values (6 units mini- 
mum) 


Courses in this section meet Title 5, section 40404, requirements 
by providing “comprehensive study of American history and 
American government including the historical development of 
American institutions and ideals, the Constitution of the United 
States and the operation of representative democratic govern- 
ment under the Constitution, and the process of state and local 
government.” 


142 General Education 


1. American History (3 units minimum) 
Choices: 


Physics 225A 
Physics 225ALt 


Fundamental Physics: 
Mechanics (3) 

Fundamental Physics: Lab (1) 


AfrO'Ethnic 190 

American Studies 201 

Chicano Studies 190 

History 170A 
History 170B 
History 180 
History 190 


Survey of American History with 
Emphasis on Ethnic Minorities (3) 
Introduction to American 
Studies (3) 

Survey of American History with 
Emphasis on Ethnic Minorities (3) 
United States to 1877 (3) 

United States Since 1877 (3) 
Survey of American History (3) 
Survey of American History with 
Emphasis on Ethnic Minorities (3) 


NOTE: Students who take History 170A must also take History 
170B and vice versa. 


2. Government (3 units minimum) 

Political Science 100 American Government (3) 

NOTE: Transfer students from outside the State of California 
who have ALREADY completed a basic course in American 
Government may substitute Political Science 300 Contemporary 
Issues in California Government and Politics (3) for Political 
Science 100. 


III. DISCIPLINARY CORE COURSES 
(21 units minimum) 

A. Mathematics and Natural Sciences (12 units) 

At least one laboratory course must be taken in Ill.A. 1., 
II I. A. 2., or III. A. 3. Approved laboratory courses are indicated 
with a dagger (t). 

1. Physical Science (3 units minimum) 


Courses in this area provide the content and methodology that 
form the bases for studies in the physical sciences. 

Choices: 


Chemistry 100 
Chemistry l(X)Lt 
Chemistry 115t 

Chemistry 120At 
Geological Sci 101 
Geological Sci 101 Lt 
Physics 101 
Physics 101 

Physics 211 A 
Physics 211ALt 


Survey of Chemistry (3) 

Survey of Chemistry Lab ( 1 ) 
Introductory General 
Chemistry (4) 

General Chemistry (5) 

Physical Geology (3) 

Physical Geology Lab ( 1 ) 

Survey of Astronomy and Physics (3) 
Survey of Astronomy and Physics Lab 
( 1 ) 

Elementary Physics (3) 

Elementary Physics Lab (1) 


2. Biological Science (3 units minimum) 

Courses in this area provide the content and methodology that 
form the bases for studies in the biological sciences. 

Choices: 

Biology 101 Elements of Biology (3) 

Biology 101 Lt Elements of Biology (1) 

Biology 131 Principals of Biology (3) 

3. Alternatives in Natural Sciences and Mathematics 

Courses in this area are topical and thematic specialized inquiries 
into the contributions of the sciences and mathematics. These 
courses have a substantial scientific and/ or mathematical con- 
tent. In addition, they are either introductory to the major sub- 
disciplines or they relate science and/or mathematics to signifi- 
cant social problems or other related disciplines. 

Choices: 


Anthropology 101 

Introduction to Biological 
Anthropology (3) 

Anthropology 375 

Science in Archaeology (3) 

Anthropology 440 

Human Evolution (3) 

Biology 305 

Human Heredity & 

Development (3) 

Biology 306 

Biology of Aging (3) 

Biology 310 

Human Physiology (3) 

Biology 3 1 1 

Nutrition &. Disease (3) 

Biology 313 

Human Genetics (3) 

Biology 314 

Human Issues in Genetics ( 1 ) 

Biology 318 

Wildlife Conservation (3) 

Biology 319 

Marine Biology (3) 

Biology 319Lt 

Marine Biology Lab ( 1 ) 

Biology 323 

Biology of Sexually Transmitted 
Diseases (STD) (2) 

Biology 330 

Ecology of American Indians (3) 

Biology 352 

Plants and Life (3) 

Biology 353 

Principles of Horticulture (2) 

Biology 353Lt 

Principles of Horticulture Lab ( 1 ) 

Biology 360 

Biology (Df Human Sexuality (2) 

Biology 367 

Insects &. The Human Ecosystem (3) 

Chemistry 111 

Nutrition & Drugs (3) 

Chemistry 3 1 1 

Nutrition Disease (3) 

Chemistry 321 

Molecules and Life (3) 

Computer Sci 313 

The Computer Impact (3) 

Computer Sci 381 

Knowledge Engineering (3) 

Geography 110 

Principles of Physical Geography (3) 

Geography 120 

Environment and Change (3) 

Geological Sci 120 

Introduction to Earth Science (3) 


General Education 143 


Geological Sci 120Lt 
Geological Sci 140 
Geological Sci 201 
Geological Sci 310 

Geological Sci 333 
Geological Sci 335 
Geological Sci 340 
Geological Sci 376 
History 230 
History 321 
History 430 

Mathematics 338 

Mathematics 368 
Philosophy 303 

Philosophy 368 
Philosophy 384 
Philosophy 386 
Physics 107 

Physics 200 
Physics 384 
Sociology 303 

Speech Comm 303 


Earth Science Lab ( 1 ) 

Earth’s Atmosphere (3) 

Earth History (4) 

Topics in California Related 
Geology (1-3) 

Oceanography (3) 

General Hydrology (3) 

General Meterology (3) 

Applied Geology (3) 

Ascent of Man (3) 

Molecules and Life (3) 

History of Science: Copernicus to the 
Present (3) 

Statistics Applied to Natural 
Sciences (3) 

First Course in Symbolic Logic (3) 
Intrcxiuction to Philosophy of 
Science (3) 

First Course in Symbolic Logic (3) 
Philosophy of the Physical Sci (3) 
Philosophy of Biology (3) 

Nuclear Energy and Its Impact on 
Society (1) 

Intrcxiuction to Astronomy (4) 
Philosophy of the Physical Sci (3) 
Statistics for the Social 
Sciences (3) 

Biology of Human 
Q^mmunication (3) 


4* Mathematics (3 units minimum) 

Q>urses in this area are designed to provide a basis for understanding 
mathematical concepts and methcxlologies and their applications. 
A grade of “C” or better is required in this section. Students must pass 
the Entry Level Mathematics (ELM) test before taking any course in 
this section. No more than four (4) units of lower-division course 
work may be counted in this section. 


B. Arts and Humanities (6 units minimum) 

1. Introduction to the Arts (3 units minimum) 

Courses in this area are designed to motivate students to cultivate 
and refine their affective, cognitive and physical faculties 
through studying great works of the human imagination. 


Choices: 

Art 101 
Art 201A 
Art 20 IB 
Art 311 
Art 312 
Dance 101 
Music ICX) 
Music 101 

Theatre KX) 


Introduction to Art (3) 

Art and Civilization (3) 

Art and Civilization (3) 

Foundations of Modern Art (3) 
Modern Art (3) 

Introduction to Dance (3) 
Introduction to Music (3) 

Music Theory for Non-Music Majors 
(3) 

Introduction to the Theatre (3) 


2. Introduction to the Humanities (3 units minimum) 

Courses in this area introduce students to reflective inquiry into 
the values and subjective responses of civilization in its language, 
philosophy, and literature. 


Choices: 

Anthropology 1(X) 
Comparative Lit 110 
Q^mparative Lit 111 


Q)mparative Lit 324 
Comparative Lit 325 
Comparative Lit 373 
English 110 


Choices: 


English 111 

Management Sci 361 

Probability and Statistical Methods in 

English 200 


Business Economics (4) 

English 3 1 1 

Mathematics 110 

Mathematics for Liberal Arts 



Students (3) 

English 312 

Mathematics 115 

College Algebra (4) 


Mathematics 120 

Introduction to Probability 

English 321 


Statistics (3) 

English 322 

Mathematics 125 

Precaculus (4) 


Mathematics 130 

A Short Course in Calculus (4) 

Foreign Lang 101 

Mathematics 135 

Business Calculus (3) 

Foreign Lang 102 

Mathematics 150A 

Analytic Geometry and 

Foreign Lang 203 


Calculus (4) 

Foreign Lang 204 


Non- Western Cultures & the Western 
Tradition (3) 

Literature of the Western World from 
Ancient through Medieval Times (3) 
Literature of the Western World from 
the Renaissance through the 19th 
Century (3) 

World Literature to 1650 (3) 

World Literature from 1650 (3) 

Masters of Russian Literature (3) 
Literature of the Western World from 
Ancient through Medieval Times (3) 
Literature of the Western World 
from Renaissance through the 19th 
Century (3) 

Introduction to Literature (3) 

Masters of British Literature to 
1760 (3) 

Masters of British Literature from 
1760 (3) 

American Literature to Whitman (3) 
American Literature from Twain to the 
Modems (3) 

Fundamental Foreign Languages (3-5) 
Fundamental Foreign Languages (3-5) 
Intermediate Foreign Languages (3-5) 
Intermediate Foreign Languages (3-5) 


144 General Education 


French 103 

French 213 

French 214 

German 213 
German 214 
Japanese 105 

Linguistics 106 
Linguistics 301 
Spanish 105 

Spanish 201 
Spanish 213 
Spanish 214 
Philosophy 100 
Philosophy 110 
Philosophy 115 
Philosophy 116 
Philosophy 290 

Philosophy 300 

Philosophy 310 
Religious Studies 101 
Religious Studies 102 
Religious Studies 110 
Religious Studies 200 
Religious Studies 210 
Religious Studies 301 


Intensive Review of Fundamental 
French (5) 

Intermediate Diction and 
Phonetics (2) 

Intermediate Conversation and 
Composition (2) 

Intermediate Reading (2) 
Intermediate Reading (2) 

Intensive Review of Fundamental 
Japanese (5) 

Language and Linguistics (3) 
Sanskrit (4) 

Intensive Review of Fundamental 
Spanish (5) 

Spanish for Spanish Speakers (3) 
Intermediate Conversation (2) 
Intermediate Composition (2) 
Introduction to Philosophy (3) 

The World’s Great Religions (3) 
Western Philosophy to 1600 (3) 
Western Philosophy since 1600 (3) 
History of Philosophy: Greek 
Philosophy (3) 

History of Philosophy: Rationalism 
and Empiricism (3) 

Ethics (3) 

Fundamental Hebrew-A (4) 
Fundamental Hebrew' B (4) 

The World’s Great Religions (3) 
Introduction to Christianity (3) 
Introduction to Judaism (3) 
Sanskrit (4) 


C. Social Sciences (3 units minimum) 


1. Introduction to the Social Sciences (3 units minimum) 

Courses in this area provide an introduction to the conceptual 
and methodological aspects of the social sciences to human, 
social, political, and economic institutions and behavior in their 
contemporary and historical settings. 


Choices: 


American Studies 101 

Anthropology 102 

Economics 100 
Economics 201 
Economics 210 
Geography 100 
Political Sci 200 

Psychology 101 
Sociology 101 


Introduction to American Culture 
Studies (3) 

Introduction to Cultural 
Anthropology (3) 

The Economic Environment (3) 
Principles of Microeconomics (3) 
Principles of Economics (5) 

World Geography (3) 

Introduction to the Study of 
Politics (3) 

Introductory Psychology (3) 
Introduction to Sociology (3) 


IV IMPLICATIONS, EXPLORATIONS 
AND LIFE-LONG LEARNING 
(9 units minimum) 

At least one asterisked ( * ) course in IV must be taken. Aster- 
isked courses fulfill the cultural diversity requirement. Cultural 
diversity courses are designed to enhance understanding of cul- 
tural differences within or between western and/or non-westem 
societies. 

A. Implications and Explorations (6 units minimum) 


1. Implications, Explorations and Participatory Experience in 
the Arts and Humanities (3 units minimum) 


Courses in this area deepen the appreciation of the content of 
III.B.l. and I1I.B.2. 


Choices: 

Afro- Ethnic 314 

Afro- Ethnic 320 

Afro-Ethnic 381 
Afro- Ethnic 403 

Afro-Ethnic 424 
Afro- Ethnic 437 

Afro- Ethnic 460 

Anthropology 104 
Anthropology 305 
Anthropology 306 

Art 100 
Art 103 
Art 104 
Art 106A 
Art 107A 
Art 107B 
Art 205A 
Art 216A 
Art 326A 
Art 338A 
Art 364A 

Chicano Studies 302 
Chicano Studies 304 
Chicano Studies 315 
Chicano Studies 316 
Chicano Studies 336 

Chicano Studies 337 
Chicano Studies 430 


Pan- African Dance and 
Movement (3)* 

Black American Intellectual 
Thought (3)* 

African Literature (3) 

Oral History of Ethnic 
America (3)* 

Afro-American Literature (3) 
American Indian Religions and 
Philosophy (3) 

Afro-American Music 
Appreciation (3)’ 

Ifaditional Cultures of the World (3)* 
Anthropology of Religion (3)* 
Comparative Aesthetics and 
Symbolism (3)* 

Exploratory Course in Art (3) 
Two-dimensional Design (3) 
Three-dimensional Design (3) 
Beginning Ceramics (3) 

Beginning Drawing (3) 

Beginning Painting (3) 

Beginning Crafts (3) 

Beginning Sculpture (3) 

Ceramic Sculpture (3) 

Creative Photography (3) 

Stained Glass (3) 

Ancient Mexican Culture (3)* 

Music of Mexico (3)* 

Chicano/Latino Theatre (3)* 

The Chicano Music Experience (3)* 
Main Trends in Spanish-American 
Literature (3) 

Contemporary Chicano Literature (3) 
The Evolution of Mexican 
Literature (3) 


General Education 145 


Chicano Studies 433 
Chicano Studies 440 
Communications 383 
Comparative Lit 312 
Comparative Lit 315 

Comparative Lit 374 
Comparative Lit 380 
Comparative Lit 381 
Comparative Lit 423T 
Dance 112 
Dance 122 A 
Dance 126 
Dance 132 
Dance 301 
Dance 325 
English 105 
English 204 
English 320 

English 323T 

English 381 
English 424 

English 433 
English 441 
French 315 
French 375 
German 315 

German 335 
Japanese 315 

Japanese 316 
Japanese 375 
Portuguese 320 

Spanish 315 

Spanish 316 

Spanish 375 
History 405 
History 465A 
History 483 
Library 200 

Linguistics 441 
Music 183 
Music 184 A 
Music 184B 
Music 185A 
Music 185B 
Music 301 


Mexican Literature Since 1940 (3) 
Mexican Intellectual Thought (3)* 
World Cinema (3) 

The Bible as Literature (3) 

Classical Mythology in World 
Literature (3) 

Soviet Literature (3) 

Introduction to Asian Literature (3)' 
African Literature (3) 

Topics In Asian Literature (3)’ 
Beginning Classical Ballet (2) 
Beginning Modern Dance (2) 

Dance Improvisation (2) 

Beginning Jazz Dance (2) 

Dance and Cultural Diversity (3)* 
Dance Theory and Criticism (3) 
Intrcxluction to Creative Writing (3) 
Intermediate Creative Writing (3) 
Literature of the American 
Indians (3)* . 

Cultural Pluralism in American 
Literature (3)* 

African Literature (3) 

Introduction to Afro-American 
Literature (3) 

Children’s Literature (3) 

Linguistics & Literature (3) 

Origins of Modern France (3)* 
Inmxluction to Literature (3) 
Intrcxluction to German 
Civilization (3)* 

Intrcxluction to Literature (3) 
Intrcxluction to Japanese 
Civilization (3)* 

Mcxlern Japan (3)’ 

Intrcxluction to Literary Forms (3) 
Intrcxluction to Luso-Brazilian Culture 
and Civilization (3)* 

Intrcxluction to Spanish 
Civilization (3)* 

Introduction to Spanish-American 
Civilization (3)* 

Intrcxluction to Literary Forms (3) 
History of The Jews (3) 

History of India (3)* 

American Religious History (3) 
Elements of Bibliographic 
Investigation (3) 

Linguistics and Literature (3) 

Voice Class for Non-Music Majors (1) 
Piano Class for Non-Music Majors (1) 
Piano Class for Non-Music Majors (1) 
Guitar class for Non-Music Majors (1) 
Guitar class for Non-Music Majors (1) 
Techniques of Song VC^iting (3) 


Music 302 

History of Jazz (3)* 

Music 303 

Ethnic Music (3)* 

Music 304 

Music of Mexico (3)* 

Music 352 

Symphonic Music in Western and 
Eastern Cultures (3)* 

Music 355 

Film Music (3) 

Music 361 A 

Symphony Orchestra ( 1 ) 

Music 36 IB 

University Choir ( 1 ) 

Music 36 1C 

Symphonic Band (1) 

Music 36 ID 

Opera Theatre ( 1 ) 

Music 36 IE 

University Singers ( 1 ) 

Music 36 IF 

University Wind Ensemble (1) 

Music 36 IW 

Women’s Choir (1) 

Music 362B 

Varsity Band (1) 

Music 362D 

Percussion Ensemble ( 1 ) 

Music 362E 

Brass Ensemble ( 1 ) 

Music 362L 

Jazz Ensemble (1) 

Music 362M 

Horn Ensemble ( 1 ) 

Music 362S 

Jazz Ensemble 11 (1) 

Music 362X 

Beginning Opera Techniques ( 1 ) 

Music 363B 

Chamber Ensemble Brass ( 1 ) 

Music 363G 

Chamber Ensemble Guitar ( 1 ) 

Music 363J 

Jazz Combo (1) 

Music 363K 

Chamber Ensemble Keyboard ( 1 ) 

Music 363S 

Chamber Ensemble Strings ( 1 ) 

Music 363W 

Chamber Ensemble Woodwind ( 1 ) 

Music 363X 

Chamber Ensemble Saxophone ( 1 ) 

Philosophy 312 

Business Professional Ethics (3) 

Philosophy 314 

Medical Ethics (3) 

Philosophy 323 

Existentialism (3) 

Philosophy 350 

Oriental Philosophy (3)* 

Political Sci 331 

Comparative Third World Politics 
Through Literature (3) 

Political Sci 340 

Political Philosophy (3) 


Religious Studies 250 The Religion of Islam (3)’ 

Religious Studies 270T Intrcxluction to the Oriental 
Religions (3)* 

Religious Studies 305 Anthropology of Religion (3)* 
Religious Studies 345A History and Development of Christian 
Thought: The Beginning to 1274 (3) 
Religious Studies 345 B History and Development of Christian 
Thought: 1275 to the Present (3) 
Religious Studies 346A History and Development of Jewish 
Thought: Biblical Origins to 
Maimonides (3)* 

Religious Studies 346B History and Development of Jewish 
Thought: 1204 to the Present (3)’ 
Religious Studies 347A History and Development of Hinduism 
to 1200 (3)- 

Religious Studies 347B History and Development of Hinduism 
from 12(X) (3)‘ 

Religious Studies 349A History and Development of Islamic 
Thought: The Beginning to 1258 (3) 
Religious Studies 349B History and Development of Islamic 
Thought: 1259 to Mcxiem Times (3) 


1 46 General Education 


Religious Studies 3 SOT 
Religious Studies 405 
Theatre 163 
Theatre 277 
Theatre 310 
Theatre 410A 

Theatre 41 OB 
Theatre 4 IOC 
Theatre 41 1 


Major Christian Traditions (3) 

History of the Jews (3) 

Acting for Non Majors (3) 

Costume Fundamentals (3) 

Oral Interpretation of Shakespeare (3) 
Oral Interpretation of Prose 
Literature (3) 

Oral Interpretation of Poetry (3) 

Oral Interpretation of Drama (3) 

Oral Interpretation of Children’s 
Literature (3) 


2. Implications and Explorations in the Social Sciences (3 units 
minimum) 


Courses in this area are topical and thematic, specialized inquir- 
ies into the contributions of the social sciences to the under' 
standing of human behavior, both within and across traditional 
disciplines. 

Choices: 


AfrO'Ethnic 101 
AfrO'Ethnic 107 

AfrO' Ethnic 220 

AfrO'Ethnic 280 
AfrO'Ethnic 301 
AfrO'Ethnic 309 
AfrO'Ethnic 310 
AfrO'Ethnic 311 

AfrO'Ethnic 312 
AfrO'Ethnic 317 
AfrO'Ethnic 325 
AfrO'Ethnic 335 
AfrO'Ethnic 346 
AfrO'Ethnic 385 
AfrO'Ethnic 422 
AfrO'Ethnic 430 

American Studies 300 

American Studies 301 
American Studies 345 
American Studies 411 
American Studies 450 
Anthropology 103 
Anthropology 300 
Anthropology 321 
Anthropology 325 
Anthropology 327 
Anthropology 328 
Anthropology 340 


Introduction to Ethnic Studies (3)* 
Introduction to AfrO' American 
Studies (3)* 

The Indian in American 
History (3)* 

AfrO' American History (3)* 

AfrO' American Culture (3)* 

The Black Family (3)* 

Black Women in America (3)* 
Intracultural Socialization 
Patterns (3)* 

American Indian Women (3)* 

Black Politics (3)* 

African American Religion (3)* 
History of Racism (3)’ 

TTie African Experience (3)* 

Schools and Minority Groups (3)* 
Psychology of the AfrO'American (3)* 
A Social Psychological Study in 
Ethnic Minority Behavior (3)* 
Introduction to American Popular 
Culture (3) 

The American Character (3)* 

TTie American Dream (3) 

The White Ethnic in America (3)* 
Women in American Society (3)’ 
Introduction to Archaeology (3) 
Language and Culture (3) 

The American Indian (3)* 

Peoples of South America (3)’ 

Origins of Civilizations (3) 

Peoples of Africa (3)* 

Peoples of Asia (3)* 


Anthropology 345 

Anthropology 347 
Anthropology 360 
Anthropology 409 
Anthropology 410 
Anthropology 413 

Anthropology 450 
Anthropology 460 
Chicano Studies 106 
Chicano Studies 220 
Chicano Studies 305 
Chicano Studies 403 

Chicano Studies 406 
Chicano Studies 431 
Chicano Studies 432 
Chicano Studies 445 
Chicano Studies 450 

Chicano Studies 453 
Chicano Studies 460 
Child Dev 312 
Communications 233 

Counseling 380 

Criminal justice 300 
Economics 201 
Economics 202 
Economics 330 
Economics 331 
Economics 332 
Economics 333 

Economics 334 

Economics 350 
Economics 361 
Economics 362 

Geography 160 
Geography 170 
Geography 332 
Geography 333 
Geography 340 
Geography 344 
Geography 346 
Geography 350 
Geography 366 
History 270 
History 330 

History 350 


Peoples of the Middle East & North 
Africa (3)* 

Peoples of the Pacific (3)* 
Contemporary American Culture (3)* 
Applied Anthropology (3) 

Urban Anthropology (3) 

Culture and Personality: Psychological 
Anthropology (3) 

Culture and Education (3) 

Public Archaeology in California (3) 
Introduction to Chicano Studies (3)* 
Mexican Heritage (3)* 

The Chicano Family (3)* 

Cultural Differences in Mexico <St the 
Southwest (3)* 

La Chicana (3)* 

The Chicano Child (3)* 

The Chicano Adolescent (3)* 

History of the Chicano (3)* 

The Chicano and Contemporary 
Issues (3)* 

Mexico Since 1906 (3)* 

The Chicano and Politics (3)* 

Human Growth & Development (3) 
Mass Communication in Modern 
Society (3) 

Theories and Techniques of 
Counseling (3) 

Introduction to Criminal justice (3) 
Principles of Microeconomics (3) 
Principles of Macroeconomics (3) 
Comparative Economic Systems (3) 
The Soviet Economy (3) 

Economics of the Pacific Rim (3) 
Economic Development: Analysis & 
Case Studies (3) 

Economics of Latin America & the 
Caribbean (3) 

American Economic History (3) 
Urban Economics (3) 

Environmental and Resource 
Economics (3) 

Culture and Environment (3) 

The City (3) 

United States and Canada (3)* 

Latin America (3)* 

Asia (3) 

Africa (3)’ 

The Pacific World (3) 

Conserv & Ecology in America (3) 
Geography of Religion (3) 

Women in American History (3)* 
History of Economic Development in 
the First and Third Worlds (3) 

History of Latin American 
Civilization (3)* 


General Education 147 


History 360 


History 452 
History 455 
History 477 
History 489 A 
History 489B 
Human Services 311 

Human Services 380 

Linguistics 108 
Linguistics 369 
Linguistics 412 
Music 305 
Philosophy 302 
Philosophy 341 
Philosophy 385 
Physical Ed 381 

Political Sci 300 

Political Sci 309 

Political Sci 310 
Political Sci 315 
Political Sci 317 
Political Sci 320 
Political Sci 330 
Political Sci 350 
Political Sci 352 
Political Sci 375 
Political Sci 445 

Political Sci 460 
Political Sci 481 

Psychology 3 1 1 
Psychology 312 

Psychology 331 
Psychology 341 
Psychology' 350 
Psychology 35 1 
Psychology 361 
Psychology 362 
Religious Studies 366 
Religious Studies 481 

Sociology 133 
Sociology 361 
Sociology 371 
Sociology’ 407 
Sociology' 431 
Sociology 436 
Sociology’ 450 
Sociology 451 
Sociology 455 
Sociology 456 
Sociology 465 
Speech Comm 320 


Modern Asia: Nationalism 
Revolutionary Change (3)’ 

20th Century Brazil (3)* 

Latin America Since 1945 (3) 
American Sex Reformers (3) 

Amer Social History, 1750'1860 (3) 
Amer Social History, 1865*1930 (3) 
Intracultural Socialization 
Patterns (3)* 

Theories and Techniques of 
Counseling (3) 

Linguistics and Minority Dialects (3)* 
Language, Sex Roles the Brain (3) 
Sociolinguistics (3) 

Women in Music (3)’ 

Introduction to Women’s Studies (3)* 
Assumptions of Psychotherapy (3) 
Philosophy of Social Sciences (3) 
Human Movement in Cultural 
Perspective (3) 

Contemporary Issues in California 
Government and Politics (3) 
Intrcxluction to Metropolitan 
Politics (3) 

American Political Behavior (3) 
American Policy-Making Process (3) 
Black Politics (3)’ 

Politics, Policy and Administration (3) 
Comparative Political Analysis (3) 
World Politics (3) 

American Foreign Policy (3) 

Public Law (3) 

Political Learning and 
Socialization (3) 

The Chicano and Politics (3)* 

Religion and Politics in the American 
Experience (3) 

Educational Psychology (3) 

The Psychology’ of Human Sexual 
Behavior (3) 

Psychology of Personality (3) 
Abnormal Psychology (3) 
Environmental Psychology (3) 

Social Psychology (3) 

Developmental Psychology (3) 
Psychology of Aging (3) 

Geography of Religion (3) 

Religion and Politics in the American 
Experience (3) 

Introduction to Gerontology’ (3) 
Population Problems (3) 

Urban Sociology’ (3) 

Women in Contemporary’ Society’ (3) 
Minority Group Relations (3)* 

Social Stratification (3)* 

Sociology of Sex Roles (3) 

Sociology of the Family (3) 

Medical Sociology’ (3) 

Mental Illness (3) 

Law and Society (3) 

Intercultural Communication (3)* 


B. Life-Long Learning (3 units minimum) 

Courses in this section facilitate understanding of the human 
being as an integrated physiological, social, and psychological 
organism. They may also integrate major areas of earlier portions 
of the general education program (Sections 11. through IV. A.2. ). 


Choices: 

American Studies 450 
Anthropology 415 
Anthropology 417 
Anthropology 432 

Anthropology 442 
Biology 306 
Biology 3 1 1 
Biology 360 
Chemistry 111 
Chemistry 3 1 1 
Child Dev 312 
Child Dev 330 
Chicano Studies 305 
Comparative Lit 355T 
Ed Sec 386 
English 355T 
English 356 
Geography 357 

Health Science 101 
Health Science 301 
Health Science 321 
Health Science 342 
Human Services 300 
Music 350 
Nursing 301 
Nursing 302 

Nursing 303 
Philosophy 312 
Philosophy 324 
Physical Ed. 342 
Physical Ed. 350 

Political Science 344 

Psychology 312 

Psychology 361 
Psychology 362 
Religous Studies 380 

Secondary Ed 386 
Sociology’ 341 
Sociology’ 450 
Sociology’ 451 
Sociology 460 
Speech Comm 345 


Women in American Society (3)* 
Culture and Nutrition (3) 

Life Quests (3) 

Women in Cross-Cultural 
Perspective (3) 

Medical Anthropology (3) 

Biology of Aging (3) 

Nutrition and Disease (3) 

Biology of Human Sexuality ( 1 ) 
Nutrition and Drugs (3) 

Nutrition and Disease (3) 

Human Growth and Development (3) 
Adolescence Early Adulthood (3) 
The Chicano Family (3)* 

Images of Women in Literature (3) 
Adolescence (3) 

Images of Women in Literature (3) 
The Literature of Aging (3) 

Social Geography: Perception & 
Behavior (3) 

Personal Flealth (3) 

Promotion of Optimal Health (3) 
Drugs and Society (3) 

Stress Management (3) 

Character and Conflict (3) 

Music in Our Society (3) 

Promotion of Optimal Health (3) 
Health Delivery System and the 
Consumer (3) 

WDmen’s Health and Healing (3)* 
Business & Professional Ethics (3) 
Existential Group (3) 

Stress Management (3) 

Physical Activity & Lifelong 
Well-being (3) 

Aids; Politics, Policy and 
Management (3) 

The Psychology of Human Sexual 
Behavior (3) 

Developmental Psychology (3) 
Psychology of Aging (3) 

The Religious Roots of 
Non-Violence (3) 

Adolescence (3) 

Social Interaction (3) 

Sociology of Sex Roles (3) 

Sociology of the Family (3) 

Sociology of Death and Dying (3) 
Communications and Aging (3) 


148 General Education 


Teaching Credential 



Programs 

California State University, Fullerton offers a full range of State' 
approved credential programs leading to careers in education. 
From its earliest days to the present, this has been one of the chief 
missions of the university. Pursuing a teaching credential in Cali' 
fornia is a complicated matter because of the number of specific 
requirements that must be met. Credential requirements are es' 
tablished by the Legislature and enforced by the Commission on 
Teacher Credentialing (CTC). This commission also reviews and 
approves all credential preparation programs, such as those at the 
university. An academic major in education is not permitted in 
California, thus students seeking teaching credentials must do so 
in conjunction with, or after the completion of, a baccalaureate 
degree program in an academic area outside of education. CSUF 
offers programs leading to basic teaching credentials, specialist cre^ 
dentials, and services credentials. The specialist and services ere' 
dentials, described briefly below, are more advanced programs 
designed to be taken in conjunction with graduate study. 

In this section of the catalog information is presented regarding: 

A. Basic Credential Programs 

B. The Multiple Subject Credential and Waiver Program 

C. The Single Subject Credential and Waiver Programs 

D. Supplementary Authorizations for the Basic Teaching 
Credentials 

E. Specialist and Services Credentials 

A. Basic Credential Programs 

In California there are two basic teaching credentials, the Multi' 
pie Subject Credential and the Single Subject Credential. The Multi' 
pie Subject Credential authorizes a person to teach in a classroom 
where many different subjects are taught by a single individual, 
such as in elementary schools. The Single Subject Credential au' 
thorizes a teacher to teach in a classroom where only one subject 
is taught, such as a classroom in departmentalized high schools 
and some junior high schools. Thus the person interested in 
elementary school teaching should pursue the program designed 
for the Multiple Subject Credential, and the person interested in 
teaching a specific subject at the junior high or high school level 
should pursue the program for the Single Subject Credential. 

In California a person can earn first a preliminary and then a 
professional clear basic teaching credential. The requirements for 
the professional clear credential are built on those for the prelimi' 
nary credential. The preliminary credential is the level that au' 
thorizes beginning teaching. 


Teaching Credential Programs 149 


Minimum Requirements for a Preliminary 
Multiple or Single Subject Credential 

Although it is possible to complete the minimum requirements 
for a preliminary basic teaching credential in four years, it genet' 
ally takes a gtxxJ student with accurate academic advising about 
four and a half years full time to complete all the requirements for 
a preliminary basic teaching credential and a baccalaureate de- 
gree. The minimum requirements for a preliminary basic creden- 
tial include: 

1 . A baccalaureate degree in a field other than professional edu- 
cation from a regionally accredited college or university. 

2. An approved program of professional preparation, including 
supervised student teaching. A two semester program may be 
taken during the fourth and/or fifth year of study. Cal State 
Fullerton offers State approved professional preparation pro' 
grams through the School of Human Development and Com- 
munity Service. An alternative plan is the three semester 
Intern Credential Program, which combines one semester of 
supervised student teaching and coursework. This alternative 
is offered in both Multiple Subject and Multiple Subject with 
a Bilingual Emphasis Credential Programs. Further informa- 
tion about these programs, including admission and prerequi- 
site requirements, is provided in this catalog under the De- 
partment of Elementary and Bilingual Education, and the Sec- 
ondary Teacher Education Program. 

3. Passage of the California Basic Education Skills Test 
(CBEST), a test of reading, writing, critical thinking and 
mathematics skills. CSUF is one of the State-approved test- 
ing centers for this examination as well as for other examina- 
tions used in the teacher credentialing process. 

4. Demonstration of subject matter knowledge appropriate to 
the specific credential being authorized. This can be achieved 
either by passing a State-approved subject matter examina- 
tion (for the Multiple Subjects Credential this test is the NTE 
Multiple Subjects Assessment for Teachers [MSAT]) or by 
completing a State-approved examination V^iver Program. 
Cal State Fullerton offers Waiver Programs for the Multiple 
Subject subject matter examination and for 14 Single Subject 
examination areas. These programs are described in more 
detail below. 

5. Satisfactory completion of at least two semester units of work 
on the provisions and principles of the U.S. (Constitution or 
passage of an examination on this area. 

6. Demonstration of a knowledge of the various methods of 
teaching reading. 

To help ensure that all credential requirements are met with a minimum 
of difficulty, it is essential that people seek sound academic advising as 
soon as possible. The Office of Admissions to Teacher Education, 


located in Education Classroom 207, provides information on 
waiver program advising and specific credential requirements, 
details on procedures for admission to the professional program in 
teacher preparation, information on preprofessional prerequi- 
sites, and advice on a number of other important matters of 
concern to students interested in the possibility of becoming a 
teacher. Students are encouraged to seek the information offered 
by this Office by attending an overview at their earliest conve- 
nience. Schedules for overviews may be obtained by dialing ex- 
tension 2111. 

B. The Multiple Subject 
Credential and Waiver Program 

In California Professional Teacher Preparation is a two- or three- 
semester program taken during the fourth and/or fifth year of 
college; there is no major in education. Since students will be 
devoting their first three years of work to completing general 
education, major and waiver program requirements, it is essential 
that students consider their selection of an academic major care- 
fully. Most perscms interested in earning a Multiple Subject Cre- 
dential at CSUF select child development, liberal studies or 
human services as an academic major. Persons interested in work- 
ing as bilingual teachers by earning a Multiple Subject Credential 
with a Bilingual Emphasis, might consider majoring in a foreign 
language. Majors in the social sciences, humanities or natural 
sciences can also be excellent backgrounds for careers in elemen- 
tary school teaching. According to California law, any major 
(other than education) can be selected. 

Transfer students and students interested in qualifying for a CSUF 
waiver program should seek a transcript evaluation from the 
Credential Preparation Center, Education Classroom 207. 

A person seeking a Multiple Subject Credential will also be 
required to demonstrate a broad general knowledge of the arts, 
humanities, social sciences, mathematics, language arts, and 
natural sciences. There are two ways to demonstrate that knowl- 
edge: one is by passing a State-approved examination, NTE 
(MSAT), the other is by completing the CSUF State-approved 
Multiple Subject Waiver Program. 

A student evaluated under an earlier waiver program retains the 
option of being evaluated under subsequent waiver programs. 

Multiple Subject Waiver 

The specific requirements of the CSUF waiver program are sub- 
ject to change by the California Commission on Teacher Creden- 
tialing. Students wishing to complete waiver requirements as 
stipulated below must receive an official waiver evaluation 
through procedures established by the Credential Preparation 
Center located in the Education Classroom Building, Room 207. 


150 Teaching Credential Programs 


All students who began a previously approved Multiple Subjects 
Waiver Program prior to September 1, 1991 and who have docu- 
mented advisement as of that date, may complete the waiver if 
they can do so by June 30, 1996. A grade of C or better is required 
in all classes used to meet waiver program requirements. The 
following coursework requirement is effective January, 1991. 

1. Language and Literature (21 units minimum) 

1 . 1 Composition (6 units minimum) 

1.11 Completion of the “Written Communication” 
requirement of the campus general education 
program 

1.12 Any course approved by the University Board on 
Writing Proficiency as meeting the upper divi- 
sion writing requirement 

1.2 Literature (6 units minimum) 

*1.21 Children’s literature (3 units minimum) — one 
of the following: English 433 or Theatre 411 

1.22 Literature (3 units minimum) — one of the fol- 
lowing: Chicano Studies 336, 337, 430 or 433; or 
Comparative Literature 111 or 325; or English 
200, 311, 312, 321, 322 or 352 

1.3 Speech (3 units minimum) — Completion of the “Oral 
Communication” requirement of the campus general 
education program 

1.4 Language acquisition (6 units minimum) 

*1.41 Grammar: English 303 

1.42 Language acquisition — one of the following: 
Anthropology 300; Linguistics 106; Speech 
Communication 403; or one semester college 
level study of a modern foreign language 

1.5 Interdisciplinary Studies (optional): Speech Communi- 
cation 305 (NOTE: Students completing this course 
may waive section 1.42) 

2. Mathematics (9 units minimum) 

2.1 Completion of the “Mathematics” requirement of the 
campus general education program 

*2.2 Math education: Mathematics 303A and 303B 

3. Science (15 units minimum) 

3. 1 Completion of the “Biological Science” requirement of 
the campus general education proram 

3.2 Completion of the “Physical Science” requirement of 
the campus general education program 

3.3 Completion of the laboratory requirement of the cam- 
pus general education program 

3.4 Other coursework to complete the GE mathematics and 
natural sciences requirement (2 units minimum) 

*3.5 Science Education (6 units minimum) 

Science Education 310 
Science Education 453 


4. Social Sciences and History (21 units minimum) 

4.1 U.S. government/political science (3 units minimum) 
— completion of the “Government” requirement of the 
campus general education program 

4.2 American History (3 units minimum) — completion of 
the “American History” requirement of the campus gen- 
eral education program 

4.3 World History and Culture (3 units minimum) — one of 
the following: Anthropology 100; or History IlOA, 
HOB, 303A, 303B, 400A or 400B 

4 4 Geography (3 units minimum) — one of the following: 
Geography 100 or 160 

4.5 Economics (3 units minimum) — one of the following: 
Economics 100, 201, 202 or 210; or Geography 360; or 
Political Science 457 

4.6 Anthropology/Psychology/Sociology (3 units mini- 
mum) — one of the following: Anthropology 102; or 
Psychology 101; or Sociology 101 

4.7 Cultural Diversity in the Social Sciences (3 units mini- 
mum) — one of the following GE cultural diversity 
classes: 

Afro-Ethnic Studies 309 or 311; or American Studies 
301; or Anthropology 432 or 450; or Chicano Studies 
305 or 43 1 ; or Sociology 43 1 ; or Speech Communica- 
tion 320 

4.8 Interdisciplinary Studies (optional): Liberal Studies 308 
(NOTE: Students completing this course may waive 
section 4.5 or 4.6) 

5. Humanities (9 units minimum) 

5. 1 Logic (3 units minimum) — completion of the “Critical 
Thinking” requirement of the campus general education 
program 

5 . 2 Philosophy/Ethics/Classics (3 units minimum) — one of 
the following: Latin 101; or Comparative Literature 
110, 315, 320 or 324; or History 415A, 415B, 417A or 
41 7B; or Philosophy 1(X), 115, 116, 290, 3(X) or 310 

5.3 Comparative Arts (3 units minimum) — one of the 
following: American Studies 395; or Anthropology 306; 
or Dance 301; or Liberal Studies 306; or Music 350 or 
352; or Theatre 402 A 

6. Visual and Performing Arts (12 units minimum) 

6. 1 Completion of the “Introduction to the Arts” require- 
ment of the campus general education program 
*6.2 Children’s art (3 units minimum) — must take Art 380 
*6.3 Children’s music (3 units minimum) — one of the fol- 
lowing: Music 333 or 433 

*6.4 Children’s theatre and dance — one of the following: 
Dance 471 or Theatre 402 A 


‘Assessment Portfolio Courses 


Teaching Credential Programs 151 


7. Health and Movement (6 units minimum) 

* 7. 1 Health (3 units minimum) — must take Health Science 
355 

*7.2 Movement for children (3 units minimum) — Physical 
Education 372 

8. Human Development (3 units minimum) 

*8.1 Child Development 325 

9. Field Experience (0-3 units) 

9.1 Elementary Education 315A and 315B (or equivalent 
experience) 

The above waiver program has been designed for maximal com- 
patibility with the campus general education program. Neverthe- 
less, gcxxl academic advising and careful course selection each 
semester are essential if a person is to complete major require- 
ments, waiver requirements and general education requirements 
with the least amount of difficulty. 


’Assessment f\)rtfolio courses. 

C. Single Subject Credentials and 
Waiver Programs 

Although a person seeking a Single Subject Credential may com- 
plete any academic major, most people decide to complete the 
degree major closest to the subject field in which they wish to be 
authorized to teach. CSUF offers a Single Subject Credential 
program in each of the following 14 State-authorized subject 
fields: 

Art 

Business Education 

English (English, Speech, Theater) 

French 

German 

Government (R^litical Science) 

History 

Life Science (Biology) 

Mathematics 

Music 

Physical Education 

Physical Sciences (Chemistry, Geology and Physics) 
Social Sciences (Anthropology, American Studies, 
Economics, Geography, Chicano Studies, History, Afro- 
Ethnic Studies, Psychology and Sociology) 

Spanish 

To demonstrate subject matter competence a person must either 
pass the appropriate State-approved examination, or complete a 
State-approved waiver program. These waiver programs generally 
coincide sufficiently w'ith the degree major to make it possible to 


complete major requirements and waiver requirements using 
many of the same courses. But degree programs and waiver pro- 
grams serve different purposes; taking one is not a guarantee that 
you will have satisfied the requirements of the other. Good advis- 
ing and careful planning are crucial. Transfer students seeking a 
CSUF waiver should seek a transcript evaluation from the Cre- 
dential Preparation Center, Education Classroom 207. The 
CSUF waiver programs for each of the Single Subject fields listed 
above are presented below: 

SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: ART 

Core Requirements in Subjects Commonly Taught (36 units) 


Art 103 

Two-dimensional Design (3) 

Art 104 

Three-dimensional Design (3) 

Art 106A 

Beginning Ceramics (3) 

Art 107A,B 

Beginning Drawing and Painting (6) 

Art 117 

Life Drawing (3) 

Art 201A,B 

Art and Civilization (6) 

Art 205A 

Beginning Crafts (3) 

Art 207A 

Drawing and Painting (3) 

Art310A 

Watercolor (3) 

Art 312 

Art of the 20th Century 19(X) to 
Present (3) 

Breadth and Perspective Requirements (15 units) 

Students select 

one of the following areas of emphasis 

Drawing, Painting and General Art 

Art 207B 

Drawing and Painting (3) 

Art 347 

Printmaking-Etching (3) 

Art 307A.B 

Advanced Drawing and Painting (6) 

Art 317 

Life Studies: Draw, Paint and 

Sculpting (3) 

Crerfts and Ceramics 

Art 205B 

Beginning Crafts: Wood (3) 

Art 305A 

Advanced Crafts (3) 

Art 306A,B 

Advanced Ceramics (6) 

Art315A 

jewelry (3) 


SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: BUSINESS 
EDUCATION 

Core Requirements in Subjects Commonly Taught (30-33 
units) 

(All students must meet the following core requirements. In 
addition, each student must meet the requirements of one of the 
four specializations which are: accounting, marketing, econom- 
ics, and office administration.) 


152 Teaching Credential Programs 


Demonstration of Typewriting Proficiency 

(Proficiency Exam: (1) five-minute timed writing; minimum 
score 40 words gross per minute with five errors maximum, and 
(2) demonstration of problem-solving ability: Setting up a busi- 
ness letter, tabulation problem and rough-draft material from 
unarranged copy and in mailable/usable form and (3) passing a 
written exam covering correct form and style (including punctua- 
tion, syllabication, and grammar) applicable to typewriting 
skill.) 

Computers and Related Technologies: 

Demonstration of Keyboarding Proficiency on Computer 
(Proficiency Exam: (1) Five-minute timed writing; minimum 
score 40 words gross per minute with 5 error maximum and 
written exam covering correct form and style (including punctua- 
tion, syllabication, and grammar) applicable to keyboarding 
skill.) 

Demonstration of Computer Proficiency 
(Proficiency Exam: Word Processing, Data Base, and Spread- 
sheet: (1) Complex business letter, containing tabulation on a 
microcomputer in mailable form, (2) data base generating reports 
and labels, and (3) business spreadsheet.) 


Marketing Specialization* * 

Marketing 352 Principles of Retailing (3) 

Marketing 370 Consumer Behavior (3) 

Economics Specialization* 

Economics 310 Intermediate Microeconomic Analysis 

(3) 

Economics 320 Intermediate Macroeconomic Analysis 

(3) 

Office Administration Specialization* 

Demonstration of Shorthand Proficiency 

(Proficiency Exam: Ability to take dictation at a minimum of 80 
words per minute for three minutes and transcribe the material 
into mailable/usable form.) 

Management 339 Managing Business Operations and 

Organizations (3) 

Breadth and Perspective Requirements (15 units) 


Students pursuing a single subject waiver must take all of the 
following: (15 units) 


Students must take 15 units selected from the following: 


Economics 201 
Economics 202 
Accounting 201 A, B 
Management 246 


Principles of Microeconomics (3)* * 
Principles of Macroeconomics (3)* * 
Elementary Accounting (6) 

Business Law (3) 


One of the following: (3 units) 


Manag Sci 263 

Manag Sci 264 
Manag Sci 265 

Computer Sci 112 


Intro to Information Systems and 
Micro-Computer Applications (2) and 
Intro to Computer Programming (2) or 
Introduction to Information Systems 
and Computer Programming (3) or 
Introduction to Computer 
Programming (3) 


All of the following: (9 units) 

Business Admin 301 Business Writing (3) 

Finance 310 Personal Financial 

Management (3) 

Marketing 351 Principles of Marketing (3) 


And one area of specialization: (3-6 units) 
Accounting Specialization* 

Accounting 301A,B Intermediate Accounting (6) 


Accounting 302 
Accounting 308 
Accounting 401 
Economics 310 
Economics 320 
Management 344 
Finance 320 
Management 340 
Marketing 352 
Philosophy 312 
Mathematics 135 
Computer Sci 223F 
Manage Sci 270 

Management 339 

Manage Sci 361 


Cost Accounting (3) 

Concepts of Federal Income Tax (3) 
Advanced Accounting (3) 
Intermediate Microeconomics (3)*** 
Intermediate Macroeconomics (3)* * * 
Intro to Systems Concepts (3) 
Business Finance (3) 

Organizational Behavior (3) 

Principles of Retailing (3) * * * 
Business/Professional Ethics (3) 
Business Calculus (3) 

Workshop in Fortran- 7 7 (2) 

File Concepts and Cobal 
Programming (3) 

Managing Business 
Operations/Organization (3)' * * 
Probability and Statistical Methods in 
Business and Economics (4) 


’The concentrations for the business administration major in accounting, eco- 
nomics and marketing require a total of 18-20 units of in-depth course work in those 
areas. 

* ’Economics 2t0 Principles of Economics (5) may be substituted for Econ 201 and 

202. Students who have already completed Econ 100 and 200 may substitute this 
combination for Econ 201 and 202. 

’These courses may not fulfill a portion of the breadth and perspective require- 
ments if they are used to meet part of the core (specialization) requirements. 


Teaching Credential Programs 153 


SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: ENGLISH 
(ENGLISH, THEATER, SPEECH) 

Core Requirements in Subjects Commonly Taught (30 units) 
Composition 

English 101 Beginning College Writing (3) 


Public Speaking: Five courses from the following: 


Speech Comm 102 
Speech (Domm 1 38 
Speech Comm 200 
Speech Cbmm 324 
Speech Comm 332 
Speech Comm 334 


Public Speaking (3) 

Forensics (3) 

Human Communication (3) 
Small Group (Communication (3) 
Processes of Social Influence (3) 
Persuasive Speaking (3) 


One of the following: 

English 301 

Advanced College Writing (3) 

Theatre 47 7 B 

Senior Seminar in Critical 
Techniques (3) 

Speech Comm 300 

Intro to Research in Speech 
Communications (3) 

Linguistics 

English 303 

Structure of Modern English (3) 

One of the following: 

Linguistics 106 

Linguistics and Minority 

Dialects (3) 

English 305 

English Language in 

America (3) 

English 490 

History of English Language (3) 


SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: FRENCH 

Upper^Di vision Requirements in Subjects Commonly Taught 
(30 units) 

Language (Select 6 units from the following) 

French 300 French Conversation (3) 

French 3 1 7 Advanced Composition and 

Grammar (3) 

French 318 Advanced (Composition and 

Grammar (3) 

Culture (Select 6 units from the following) 

French 315 Origins of Modern France (3) 

French 325 (Contemporary French 

Civilization (3) 

French 407 French Film (3) 


Literature 

All of the following: 


English 300 
English 3 1 1 

English 312 

English 32 1 

English 322 

English 334 


Analysis of Literary Forms (3) 

Masters of British Literature 
to 1760 (3) 

Masters of British Literature 
from 1760 (3) 

American Literature to 
Whitman (3) 

American Literature from Twain to the 
Moderns (3) 

Shakespeare (3) 


Breadth and Perspective Requirements (15 units) 


Students may select one of the following areas of emphasis: 


Theatre: All of the following: 


Theatre 2(X) 
Theatre 263 
Theatre 2 76 A 
Theatre 3 70 A 
Theatre 402 B 


Art of the Theatre (3) 

Acting (3) 

Stagecraft (3) 

Directing (3) 

Dramatic Activities for Children (3) 


English Literature: Fifteen semester units of adviser-approved 
literature courses. 


Linguistics (Select 6 units from the following) 

French 385 Translation (3) 

French 466 Introduction to French 

Linguistics (3) 

French 5(X) Stylistics (3) 

Literature (Select 6 units from the following) 

French 375 Introduction to Literature (3) 

French 415 French Classicism (3) 

French 425 French Romanticism (3) 

French 475ABCD Senior Seminar (3) 

French 485 French Literature (3) 

Electives: Six upper-division units of electives selected from 
courses listed above in consultation with an adviser based on 
candidate’s background, interest and teaching plans. 

SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: GERMAN 

Upper-Di vision Requirement in Subjects Commonly Taught 
(30 units) 


Language (Select 6 units from the following) 


German 3(X) 
German 317 

German 401 


German Conversation (3) 
Advanced Conversation and 
Composition (3) 

Advanced Conversation and 

vocabulary (3) 


154 Teaching Credential Programs 


Culture (Select 6 units from the following) 


Breadth and Perspective Requirements (15 Semester Units) 


German 315 

Introduction to German 

Civilization (3) 

German 325 

Current Trends in Culture of German- 
Speaking Peoples (3) 

German 482 

German Film (3) 

Linguistics (Select 6 units from the following) 

German 399 

German Phonetics (3) 

German 466 

Introduction to German 

Linguistics (3) 

German 500 

Advanced Structure and Style (3) 

Literature (Select 6 units from the following) 

German 375 

Introduction to Literary Forms (3) 

German 430 

German Literature and Culture to the 
Baroque (3) 

German 440 

18th Century German Literature and 
Culture (3) 

German 450 

19th Century German Literature and 
Culture (3) 

German 460 

20th Century German Literature and 
Culture (3) 

German 485 

Seminar in German 

Literature (3) 


Electives: Six uppendivision units of electives selected from 
courses listed above in consultation with an advisor based on 
candidate’s background, interest and teaching plans. 


U.S. Government (6 units) 
Two courses from the following: 


Political Sci. 311 

Research Proseminar in American 
Political Behavior (3) 

Political Sci. 347 

Political Theory and Political 

Practice (3) 

Political Sci. 407 

Quantitative Methods in Political 
Science (3) 

Political Sci. 410 

Political Parties (3) 

Political Sci. 413 

Pressure Groups and Public 

Opinions (3) 

Political Sci. 414 

The Legislative Process (3) 

Political Sci. 415 

Power and Participation in 

America (3) 

Political Sci. 416 

The American Presidency (3) 

Political Sci. 445 

Political Learning & 

Socialization (3) 

Chicano 460 

The Chicano and Politics (3) 

Afro 335 

History of Racism (3) 

Law (3 units) 

One of the following: 


Chicano 360 

Chicanos and the Law (3) 

Political Sci. 376 

Research Proseminar in Public 

Law (3) 

Political Sci. 470 

Judicial Process (3) 

Political Sci. 473 

Introduction to Constitutional 

Law (3) 

Political Sci. 474 

Seminar in Constitutional Law: Civil 
Rights and Civil Liberties (3) 

Political Sci. 475 

Administrative Law (3) 


SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: 
GOVERNMENT 

Core Requirements in Subjects Commonly Taught (30 Semes- 
ter Units) 


Political Sci. 1(X) 
Political Sci. 300 

Political Sci. 309 
Political Sci. 310 
Political Sci. 315 
Political Sci. 320 

Political Sci. 330 
Political Sci. 340 
Political Sci. 350 
Political Sci. 375 


American Government (3) 
Contemporary Issues in California 
Government and Politics (3) 

Intro to Metropolitan Politics (3) 
American Political Behavior (3) 
American Political Process (3) 
Politics, Policy & 

Administration (3) 

Comparative Political Analysis (3) 
Political Philosophy (3) 

World Politics (3) 

Public Law (3) 


Comparative Systems/ International Politics (3 units) 

One of the following: 

Political Sci. 335 

Comparative Political Change (3) 

Political Sci. 351 

Research Proseminar in International 
Politics (3) 

Political Sci. 425 

Comparative Public 

Administration (3) 

Political Sci. 430 

Government Politics of a Selected 
Nation-State (3) 

Political Sci. 431 

Government and Politics of a Selected 
Area (3) 

Political Sci. 446 

Corruption, Ethics and Public 

Policy (3) 

Political Sci. 452 

Foreign Policy of a Selected Country 
or Group of Countries (3) 

Political Sci. 455 

Comparative Analysis of Foreign 
Politics (3) 


Teaching Credential Programs 155 


Public Administration (3 units) 

One of the following: 

Political Sci. 321 

Research Proseminar in Politics, Policy 

Political Sci. 421 

and Administration (3) 

Public Finance Administration (3) 

Political Sci. 422 

Public Personnel 

Political Sci. 423 

Administration (3) 

Regional Planning and 

Political Sci. 424 

Development (3) 

Urban Planning and 

Political Sci. 425 

Development (3) 

Comparative Public 

Political Sci. 426 

Administration (3) 

Collective Bargaining in the Public 

Political Sci. 427 

Sector (3) 

Current Issues in Urban &. 

Political Sci. 429 

Metropolitan Policy (3) 

Public Personnel Training (3) 


Africa and the Middle East: take one pair (6 units) 


SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: HISTORY 

Core Requirements in Subjects Commonly Taught (30-33 
units) 


All of the following: 

History IlOA 

History 11 OB 

History 383 
History 426 
History 429 


Western Civilization to the 16th 
Century (3) 

Western Civilization Since the 16th 
Century (3) 

History of California (3) 

Rise of Modem Europe (3) 

Europe since 1914 (3) 


North America and U.S.: take one from the following: 


History 180 
History 170A,B 
Amer Studies 201 


Survey of American History (3) 
United States History (6) 

Intro to American Studies (3) 


Latin America: take one from the following: 

History 350 History of Latin American 

Civilization (3) 

History 453 Modern Mexico (3) 

Asia: take one of the following (3 to 6 units) 


History 466A,B 
History 467 


and History 468 
History 458 
and Afro 346 
Breadth and Depth Requirements (15 units) 
Historical Methodology: (at least 3 units) 


History of Islamic Civilizations (6) 
Middle East in the 19th 
Century (3) 

Middle East in the 20th 
Century (3) 

Southern Africa in the 20th 
Century (3) 

The African Experience (3) 


History 300 A 
Amer Studies 350 

History 490 
Amer Studies 401 


Historical Thinking (3) 

Seminar in Theory and Method of 
American Studies (3) 

Senior Research Seminar (3) 
Proseminar in American 
Studies (3) 


U.S. and North American History: (at least 6 units) 


History/ Amer Studies 
386A 

History 1750-1860 (3) 
History/ Amer Studies 
386B 

Amer Studies 301 
Amer Studies 345 
Amer Studies 395 

Amer Studies 416 


Amer Studies 450 
Chicano 453 
History 380 
History 350 


History 453 
History 470 
History 471 

History 472 


American Social 


American Social History 
1860-1930 (3) 

The American Character (3) 

The American Dream (3) 

American West in Symbol and 
Myth (3) 

Southern California Culture: 

A Study of American 
Regionalism (3) 

Women in U.S. History (3) 

Modern Mexico (3) 

Canada, 1534-1967 

History of Latin American Civilization 

(3) (If not used to satisfy core 

requirements) 

Modem Mexico (3) 

American Colonial Civilization (3) 
United States from Colony to 
Nation (3) 

Jeffersonian Themes in American 
Society, 18CX)-1861 (3) 


360 

Modern Asia (3) 

History 473 

Democracy on Trial 1845-1877 (3) 

462A,B 

History of China (6) 

History 474 

TTie United States 1876-1914 (3) 

463 A, B 

History of Japan (6) 

Histor>' 475 

America Comes of Age, 

464A,B 

History of Southeast Asia (6) 


1914-1945 (3) 

465 A, B 

History of India (6) 

History 476 

United States Since 1945 (3) 


156 Teaching Credential Programs 


History 479 


The Urbanization of American 
Life (3) 

History 485 U.S. Foreign Relations (3) 

History 486 United States Cultural History (3) 

History 487 History of American Parties & 

Politics (3) 


Western Civilization and Modern Europe: (at least 6 units) 


History 341 

Tudor-Stuart England (3) 

History 342 

Modern England and Great Britain (3) 

History 401 

European Intellectual History from 
1500 to the Present (3) 

History 415A 

Classical Greece (3) 

History 415B 

Hellenistic Civilization (3) 

History 417A 

Roman Republic (3) 

History 41 7B 

Roman Empire (3) 

History 425A 

The Renaissance (3) 

History 425B 

The Reformation (3) 

History 432 

Modern Germany from 18th 

Century (3) 

History 434A 

Russia to 1890 (3) 

History 434B 

The Russian Revolutions and the 
Soviet Regime (3) 

History 437 

East Europe (3) 

SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: LIFE 
SCIENCE 

Core Requirements in Subjects Commonly Taught (31 units) 

All of the following: 

Biological Sci 141 

Principles of Botany (2) 

Biological Sci 14 IL 

Principles of Botany Lab (2) 

Biological Sci 161 

Principles of Zoology (2) 

Biological Sci 16 IL 

Principles of Zoology Lab (2) 

Biological Sci 302 

General Microbiology (2) 

Biological Sci 302L 

General Microbiology Lab (2) 

Biological Sci 312 

Genetics (3) 

Biological Sci 315 

Cell and Molecular Biology (3) 

Biological Sci 316 

Principles of Ecology (3) 

One of the following: 

Biological Sci 315L 

Cell and Molecular Biology 

Ub (2) 

Biological Sci 316L 

Principles of Ecology Lab (2) 

One of the following: 

Biological Sci 362 

Mammalian Physiology (4) 

Biological Sci 410 

Cell Physiology (4) 

Biological Sci 468 

Comparative Animal 

Physiology (4) 

Biological Sci 444 

Plant Physiology (4) 


One of the following: 


Biological Sci 419 Marine Ecology (3) and 

Biological Sci 419L Marine Ecology Lab (1) 


Biological Sci 446 Phycology (4) 

Biological Sci 461 Invertebrate Zoology (4) 

Biological Sci 475 Ichthyology (4) 


Breadth and Perspective Requirements (27-30 units) 


Chemistry 120A,B General Chemistry (10) 

Physics 21 1A,B 

and 

Physics 211AL,BL Elementary Physics (8) 

One of the following: 


Chemistry 301 A, B Organic Chemistry (6) 

and 

Chemistry 302 Organic Chemistry Lab (2), 

or 

Chemistry 303 Survey of Organic Chemistry (5) 

One of the following: 


Math 130A A Short Course in Calculus (4) 

Math 150A Analytic Geometry and 

Calculus (4) 


SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: 
MATHEMATICS 

Unit Requirement (34 units) 


Math 150A,B 

Math 250A,B 
Math 335 
Math 380 
Math 401 


Math 402 


Analytic Geometry and 
Calculus (8) 

Intermediate Calculus (8) 
Mathematical Probability (3) 

History of Mathematics (3) 

Algebra and Probability for the 
Secondary Teacher (3) 

Logic and Geometry for the Secondary 
Teacher (3) 


(Dne of the following: 

Math 435 Mathematical Statistics (3) 

Math 438 Introduction to Stochastic Processes (3) 

One of the following: 


Computer Sci 112 Introduction to Computer 
Programming (3) 

Computer Sci 121 Programming Concepts (3) 

Engineering 205 Digital Computation (3) 


Teaching Credential Programs 157 


Closely Related Subjects Requirement (15) 

Mathematics 302 Modern Algebra (3) 

Mathematics 307 Applied Linear Algebra (3) 

One of the following: 

C^omputer Sci 131 Data Structures Concepts (3) 
Computer Sci 231 File Systems Concepts (3) 

Two of the following courses: 

Math 350A Advanced Calculus (3) 

Math 370 Mathematical Model Building (3) 

Philosophy 368 First Course in Symbolic Logic (3) 

Philosophy 369 Second Course in Symbolic Logic (3) 


Music 457B 
or 

Music 468A 
Music 381 

and 

Music 435 


Song Literature and 
Interpretation (2) 

Vocal Pedagogy (2) 

Survey of Recreational Instruments 

( 1 ) 

Music in the Modern 
Classroom (3) 


One of the following: (2 or 3 units) 


Music 333 
Music 354 

Music 444 


Music and Child Development (3) 
Survey of Public School Choral Music 
Materials (2) 

Survey of Marching Band Materials 

( 2 ) 


SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: MUSIC 

Core Requirements in Subjects Commonly Taught (30 units) 

Take at least five of the 

Music 361 A 

following: (5 units) 

Symphony Orchestra ( 1 ) 

Music lllA.B 

Diatonic Harmony (6) 

Music 36 IB 

University Choir (1) 

Music 2 1 1 

Chromatic Harmony (3) 

Music 36 1C 

University Concert Band ( 1 ) 

Music 251 

Survey of Musical Literature (3) 

Music 361 D 

Opera Theatre ( 1 ) 

Music 281B,P,S,W 

Orchestral Instruments (1) 

Music 36 IE 

University Singers ( 1 ) 

Music 319 

Form and Analysis (3) 

Music 36 IF 

University Wind Ensemble (1) 

Music 351 A 

History and Literature of Music 

Music 36 IM 

Men’s Choir ( 1 ) 

Music 35 IB 

(Greek through Renaissance) (3) 

History and Literature of Music 

Music 361W 

Women’s Choir ( 1 ) 

Music 35 1C 

(Baroque and Classics) (3) 

History and Literature of Music 

One of the following: (2 units) 


(Romantic to Present) (3) 

Music 39 IB 

Choral Conducting (2) 

Music 391 A 

Choral Conducting (2) 

Music 392A 

Instrumental Conducting (2) 


Breadth and Perspective Requirements (15+ units) 
One of the following: (2 units) 


Music 320A 
Music 320B 


20th Century Techniques (2) 
20th Century Techniques (2) 


One of the following: (4 units) 

Music 323 A Orchestration (2) 

and 

Music 324 Scoring for the Band (2) 

Music 453A 
or 

Music 453 B Choral Literature and Interpretation 

( 2 ) 
and 
one of: 


Performance Requirement: 

Perform at level sufficient to be admitted to Music 371 on princi- 
pal instrument (0-4) 

Piano Proficiency Requirement: 

Completion of Music 282 B or satisfactory passage of piano profi- 
ciency examination (0-4) 

SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: PHYSICAL 
EDUCATION 

Core Requirements in, or directly related to, Subjects Com- 
monly Taught (30 units) 

All of the following: (15 units) 


Music 457A 

Song Literature and 

Physical Ed 3(X) 
Physical Ed 349 

Principles of Movement (3) 
Measurement and Evaluation (3) 


Interpretation (2) 

Physical Ed 352 

Physiology of Exercise (3) 

or 


Physical Ed 364 

Motor Development (3) 



Physical Ed 371 

Principles of Human Motor 
Learning (3) 


158 Teaching Credential Programs 


Analysis of Sports: (4 units) 


Physical Ed 303 

Field Events (2) 

Physical Ed 304 

Swimming (2) 

Physical Ed 305 

Golf (2) 

Physical Ed 306 

Gymnastics (2) 

Physical Ed 308 

Soccer (2) 

Physical Ed 309 

Badminton/Racquetball (2) 

Physical Ed 312 

Tennis (2) 

Physical Ed 316 

Volleyball (2) 

Physical Ed 319 

Softball (2) 


Techniques of Coaching: (2 units ) 


Physical Ed 328 

Gymnastics (2) 

Physical Ed 330 

Softball (2) 

Physical Ed 332 

Tennis (2) 

Physical Ed 334 

Baseball (2) 

Physical Ed 335 

Football (2) 

Physical Ed 337 

Basketball (2) 

Physical Ed 338 

Volleyball (2) 

Activities (9 units: at least one course in each of the five com- 

monly taught areas; 

at least six of the nine units at the intermedi- 

ate, advanced or intercollegiate level) 

Dance 

Dance 101 

Introduction to Dance (3) 

Dance 112 

Beginning Classical Ballet (2) 

Dance 212 

Intermediate Ballet (2) 

Dance 312 

Advanced Classical Ballet (3) 

Dance 122 A 

Beginning Modern Dance (2) 

Dance 222 

Intermediate Modem Dance (3) 

Dance 323A 

Dance Composition (3) 

Dance 132 

Beginning jazz Dance (2) 

Dance 232 

Intermediate Jazz Dance (3) 

Dance 332 

Advanced Jazz Dance (3) 

Dance 142 

Beginning Tap Dance (2) 

Dance 242 

Intermediate Tap Dance (2) 

Basic Movement 

Physical Ed 100 

Physical Conditioning ( 1 ) 

Physical Ed 101 

Athletic Conditioning ( 1 ) 

Physical Ed 102 A 

Beginning Jogging (1) 

Physical Ed 102B 

Intermediate/ Advanced 

Physical Ed 104 

Jogging (1) 

Horseback Riding ( 1 ) 

Physical Ed 105 

Cycling (1) 

Physical Ed 108 

Roller Skating { 1 ) 

Physical Ed 125 

Rock Climbing ( 1 ) 

Physical Ed 144 

Exercise Weight Control (1) 

Physical Ed 146 

Body Building (1) 

Physical Ed 151 A 

Beginning Aikido ( 1 ) 


Physical Ed 15 IB 
Physical Ed 152 A 
Physical Ed 152 B 
Physical Ed 154 
Physical Ed 246A 
Physical Ed 246B 

Sports and Games 


Physica 

Ed 

117A 

Physica 

Ed 

117B 

Physica 

Ed 

117C 

Physica 

Ed 

118A 

Physica 

Ed 

118B 

Physica 

Ed 

118C 

Physica 

Ed 

119A 

Physica 

Ed 

119B 

Physica 

Ed 

119C 

Physica 

Ed 

130A 

Physica 

Ed 

130B 

Physica 

Ed 

131A 

Physica 

Ed 

131B 

Physica 

Ed 

131C 

Physica 

Ed 

131D 

Physica 

Ed 

132A 

Physica 

Ed 

132B 

Physica 

Ed 

132C 

Physica 

Ed 

133 

Physica 

Ed 

142 

Physica 

Ed 

147 

Physica 

Ed 

150 A 

Physica 

Ed 

150B 

Physica 

Ed 

155A 

Physica 

Ed 

155B 

Physica 

Ed 

160 

Physica 

Ed 

161A 

Physica 

Ed 

161B 

Physica 

Ed 

162 

Physica 

Ed 

164 A 

Physica 

Ed 

164B 

Physica 

Ed 

164C 

Physica 

Ed 

165A 

Physica 

Ed 

165B 

Physica 

Ed 

166 

Physica 

Ed 

167A 

Physica 

Ed 

167B 

Physica 

Ed 

167C 

Physica 

Ed 

171 

Physica 

Ed 

172 

Physica 

Ed 

174 

Physica 

Ed 

175 

Physica 

Ed 

176 

Physica 

Ed 

177 

Physica 

Ed 

178 

Physica 

Ed 

179 


Intermediate Aikido ( 1 ) 
Beginning Karate (1) 
Intermediate Karate (1) 
Self-Defense (1) 

Basic Hatha Yoga (2) 
Intermediate Hatha Yoga (2) 


Beginning Bowling (1) 
Intermediate Bowling (1) 
Advanced Bowling (1) 

Beginning Archery ( 1 ) 
Intermediate Archery ( 1 ) 
Advanced Archery ( 1 ) 

Beginning Golf ( 1 ) 

Intermediate Golf ( 1 ) 

Advanced Golf ( 1 ) 

Beginning Badminton (1) 
Intermediate Badminton (1) 
Beginning Tennis (1) 
Advanced/Beginning Tennis ( 1 ) 
Intermediate Tennis (1) 

Advanced Tennis ( 1 ) 

Beginning Racquetball (1) 
Intermediate Racquetball (1) 
Advanced Racquetball (1) 
Handball (1) 

Children’s Games (1) 

Olympic Power Lifting ( 1 ) 
Beginning Wrestling (1) 
Intermediate Wrestling (!)• 
Beginning Fencing (1) 
Intermediate Fencing (1) 

Baseball (1) 

Beginning Slow Pitch ( 1 ) 
Intermediate Slow Pitch ( 1 ) 

Fast Pitch Softball ( 1 ) 

Beginning Volleyball ( 1 ) 
Intermediate Volleyball (1) 
Advanced Volleyball ( 1 ) 
Beginning Soccer (1) 
Intermediate Soccer (1) 

Team Handball ( 1 ) 

Beginning Basketball (1) 
Intermediate Basketball (1) 
Advanced Basketball ( 1 ) 
Intercollegiate Golf (2) 
Intercollegiate Cross Country (2) 
Intercollegiate Track-Field (2) 
Intercollegiate Tennis (2) 
Intercollegiate Wrestling (2) 
Intercollegiate Fencing (2) 
Intercollegiate Basketball (2) 
Intercollegiate Baseball (2) 


Teaching Credential Programs 159 


Physical Ed 180 
Physical Ed 184 
Physical Ed 185 
Physical Ed 186 

Aquatics 


Intercollegiate Soccer (2) 
Intercollegiate Football (2) 
Intercollegiate Volleyball (2) 
Intercollegiate Softball (2) 


Physical 

Physical 

Physical 

Physical 

Physical 

Physical 

Physical 

Physical 

Physical 

Physical 

Physical 

Physical 

Physical 


Ed IlOA 

Beginning Swimming (1) 

Ed HOB 

Intermediate Swimming ( 1 ) 

Ed HOC 

Advanced Swimming (1) 

Ed HI 

Life Saving ( 1 ) 

Ed 112 

Water Polo ( 1 ) 

Ed 114 

Skin Diving (1) 

Ed 116 

Springboard Diving ( 1 ) 

Ed 122A 

Beginning Sailing (1) 

Ed 122B 

Intermediate Sailing (1) 

Ed 173 

Intercollegiate Water Polo (2) 

Ed 210 

Water Safety Instructor (2) 

Ed 214 

Basic Scuba (2) 

Ed 343 

Intermediate Scuba (2) 


Gymnastics 


Physical Ed 120A 
Physical Ed 120B 
Physical Ed 120C 
Physical Ed 170 
Physical Ed 306 


Beginning Gymnastics ( 1 ) 
Intermediate Gymnastics ( 1 ) 
Advanced Gymnastics ( 1 ) 
Intercollegiate Gymnastics (2) 
Gymnastics (2) 


Depth and Perspective Requirements (15 units) 


SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: PHYSICAL 
SCIENCE 

Core Requirements in Subjects Commonly Taught (39''42 
units) 


Chemistry 120 A, B General Chemistry (10) 


One of the following: (5-8 units) 

Chemistry 301A,B Organic Chemistry (6) 

and 

Chemistry 302 Organic Chemistry Lab (2), 

or 

Chemistry 303 Survey of Organic Chemistry (5) 


All of the following: (24 units) 


Physics 2 25 A 

Physics 225B 

Physics 225C 

Physics 225AL,BL,CL 
Geological Sci 101 
Geological Sci 10 IL 
Geological Sci 201 
Physics 2(X) 


Fundamental Physics: 

Mechanics (3) 

Fundamental Physics: Electricity and 
Magnetism (3) 

Fundamental Physics: Modem Physics 
(3) 

Fundamental Physics Lab (1,1,1) 
Physical Geology (3) 

Physical Geology Lab ( 1 ) 

Earth History (4) 

Introduction to Astronomy (41 


One of the following courses: 


Breadth and Perspective Requirements (19 units) 


Physical Ed 380 History of Physical Education (3) 

Physical Ed 382 Philosophical Perspectives (3) 


Math 150A,B Analytic Geometry and 

Calculus (8) 


One of the following courses: 

Physical Ed 381 Human Movement in Cultural 

Perspective (3) 

Physical Ed 384 Sport Sociology (3) 

Three of the following courses: 


One of the following: 


Geological Sci 340 
Chemistry 361 A 
Chemistry 371 A 
Physics 310 


General Meteorology (3) 

Intro to Physical Chemistry (3) 
Physical Chemistry (3) 
Thermodynamics, Kinetic Tlieory, and 
Statistical Physics (3) 


Physical Ed 340 

(Contemporary Movement 



Environments (3) 

Two of the following: 

Physical Ed 363 

Developmental Adaptations of the 
Atypical (3) 

Physical Ed 365 

Prevention and (Care of Athletic 

Biological Sci 101 (and Elements of Biology and Lab (4) 


Injuries (3) 

lOlL) 

Physical Ed 372 

Movement and the Child (3) 

Biological Sci 141 (and Principles of Botany and Lab (4) 

Physical Ed 373 

Movement (Concepts (3) 

141L) 

Physical Ed 383 

Sport Psychology (3) 

Biological Sci 161 (and Principles of Zoology and Lab (4) 
161L) 


160 Teaching Credential Programs 


SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: SOCIAL 
SCIENCES 

Core Requirements in Subjects Commonly Taught (33‘'36 
units) 

One of the following courses: (3-6 units) 

History 180 Survey of American History (3) 

Amer Studies 201 Introduction to American Studies (3) 
History 170A,B United States History (6) 

All of the following; (24 units) 

Three units of History of California or California Government 
(3) 


Six units from any combination of the following: 

Affo'Ethnic Studies 

American Studies 

Anthropology 

Chicano Studies 

Economics 

Geography 

History 

Political Science 

Psychology 

Sociology 

SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: SPANISH 

Upper-Division Requirement in Subjects Commonly Taught 
(30 units) 


Six units of American Government (6) 


Three units in Economics (3) 


History IlOA 
History HOB 
Anthropology 1(X) 
Geography 100 


Western Civilization to 16th 
Century (3) 

Western Civilization Since the 16th 
Century (3) 

Non- Western Cultures and the 
Western Tradition (3) 

World Geography (3) 


One of the following: (3 units) 


Language (Select 6 units from the following) 


Spanish 3(X) 
Spanish 317 

Spanish 4(X) 


Spanish Conversation (3) 
Advanced Conversation and 
Composition (3) 

Spanish for Advanced Students (3) 


Culture (Select 6 units from the following:) .i 


Spanish 315 
Spanish 316 

Spanish 415 
Spanish 416 


Intro to Spanish Civilization (3) 
Introduction to Spanish-American 
Civilization (3) 

Contemporary Spanish Culture (3) 
Contemporary Spanish-American 
Culture (3) 


Hum Ser/Afro 311 Intracultural Social Patterns (3) 
Chicano 445 History of the Chicano (3) 

One of the following: (3 units) 

Amer Studies 301 The American Character (3) 
Amer Studies 450 Women in American Society (3) 


Linguistics (Select 6 units from the following:) 

Spanish 466 Introduction to Spanish 

Linguistics (3) 

Spanish 467 Dialectology (3) 

Spanish 468 Spanish-English Contrastive 

Analysis (3) 


Breadth and Perspective Requirements (18 units) 

One of the following courses: 

Geography 330 California Landscape (3) 

Geography 332 United States and Canada (3) 

All of the following: 

Three units of Sociology 


Literature (Select 6 units from the following:) 


Spanish 375 
Spanish 430 

Spanish 441 
Spanish 461 

Spanish 475 

Spanish 485 


Introduction to Literary Forms (3) 
Spanish Literature to 
Neoclassicism (3) 

Spanish American Literature (3) 
Spanish Literature since Neo- 
classicism (3) 

Topics in Spanish Peninsula 
Literature (3) 

Topics in Spanish American 
Literature (3) 


Three units of Political Science 
Three units of Psychology 


Electives: Six upper-division units of electives selected from 
courses listed above in consultation with an adviser based on 
candidate’s background, interest and teaching plans. 


Teaching Credential Programs 161 


D. Supplementary Authorizations 
for the Basic Teaching Credentials 

It is possible to expand the subject matter authorization a teach- 
ing credential initially carries to other subject fields. The State 
recognizes several subject areas that can be added to a Multiple 
Subject Credential; thereby qualifying person to teach in depart- 
mentalized junior high classrooms (grades 6-9). CSUF offers 16 
Supplementary Authorizations for the Multiple Subject Credential in: 


Art 

French 

Health Science 
Music 
Spanish 
Business 

General Science 
English 


German 

Life Science 

Physical Education 

Social Science 

Mathematics 

Physical Science 

English as a Second Language 

Computer Concepts 6i Applications 


Supplementary Authorizations for the Single Subject Credential per- 
mit a person who holds a credential in one broad subject field to 
be also authorized to teach in another more specific subject area, 
one that might be quite different from the field of broader au- 
thorization. CSUF offers 37 supplementary authorizations for the 
single Subject Credential in: 


Accounting/Computer Literacy 
Animal Science (Zoology) 

Anthropology 

Biology 

Ceramics 

Chemistry 

Comparative Political Systems/International 
Relations 

Composition/Critical Thinking 
Computer Concepts and Applications 
Crafts (Arts) 

Dance 

Drama 

Drug Use and Abuse 
Earth Science (Geology) 

Economics 

Economic and Consumer Education 

Electronics 

Family Health 

Geography 

Graphic Arts 

Instrumental Music 

Jewelry 

Journalism 

Literature 

Marketing and Distribution 
Painting and Drawing 
Personal Health 
Photography 


Physics 
Plant Science 
Psychology 
Sociology 
Speech 

U.S. Government/Civics 
U.S. History/Califomia History 
Vocal Music 
World History 

Also, to permit the holder of a single subjects credential to teach 
certain subjects in grades 9 and below, CSUF offers eight supple- 
mentary authorizations in: 

General Science 
Introductory English 
Introductory French 
Introductory German 
Introductory Health Sciences 
Introductory Mathematics 
Introductory Social Science 
Introductory Spanish 

Contact the Credential Preparation Center, Education Class- 
room 207, for details concerning course requirements for specific 
supplementary authorizations. 

E. Specialist and Services 
Credentials 

CSUF offers several State approved programs leading to more 
specialized credentials. Most of these programs build on the 
teaching experience that holders of a basic credential have 
achieved. Often these specialist or services credentials are orient- 
ed toward postbaccalaureate course work and coincide with Mas- 
ter’s degree programs. Further information about specific require- 
ments for each can be obtained under the appropriate depart- 
mental listing in this catalogue. 

CSUF offers the following Specialist Credential programs: 

1 . Learning Handicapped, to teach the learning handicapped in- 
cluding the behaviorally disordered and educationally retard- 
ed. See Department of Special Education, School of Human 
Development and Community Service. 

2. Reading Specialist, to teach reading to students of diversified 
grade and ability levels and to assist all teachers in being better 
reading teachers. See Department of Reading, School of Hu- 
man Development and Community Service. 

3. Resource Specialist (Certificate of Competency), to serve as a 
resource specialist in programs serving special education stu- 
dents, their parents and their regular teachers. See Depart- 
ment of Special Education, School of Human Development 
and Community Service. 


162 Teaching Credential Programs 


4. Severely Handicapped, to teach the severely-multiply-handi- 
capped, severely emotionally disturbed and autistic. See De- 
partment of Special Education, School of Human Develop- 
ment and Community Service. 

In addition CSUF is currently seeking approval for a newly au- 
thorized credential. Language Development Specialist, to teach 
limited or non-English proficient students. See Department of 
Foreign Language and Literature, School of Humanities and So- 
cial Science. 

CSUF offers the following Services Credential programs: 

1. Administrative Internship, a field based internship program 
leading to a preliminary level administrative services creden- 
tial. See Department of Educational Administration, School 
of Human Development and Community Service. 

2. Administrative Services (Preliminary Level), the first step of the 
new two-step administrative services credential structure, au- 
thorizing service as a school site administrator, principal or 
other administrative officer of a school district. See Depart- 
ment of Educational Administration, School of Human De- 
velopment and Community Service. 


3. Administrative Services (Professional Level), the second step of 
the new two-step administrative services credential structure. 
See Department of Educational Administration, School of 
Human Development and Community Service. 

4. Clinical Rehabilitation (Language, Speech and Hearing), to pro- 
vide services to students with exceptional needs and/or neuro- 
physical disorders in language, speech, and hearing. See De- 
partment of Speech Communication, Schcx)l of Humanities 
and Social Sciences. 

5. Clinical Rehabilitation (Special Class Authorization), to provide 
services to students with severe disorders of language. See 
Department of Speech Communication, School of Human- 
ities and Social Sciences. 

6. Pupil Personnel Services, to provide counseling and testing ser- 
vices to students. See Department of Counseling, School of 
Human Development and Community Services. 


Teaching Credential Programs 163 


University Extended Education 

Extended Education/Personnel Services Building 
(714) 773^2611 

Extension 

Extension brings the resources of the university to the communi' 
ty through credit and non^credit programs designed primarily for 
individuals not currently working toward completion of a univer- 
sity degree. Seminars, workshops, and certificate programs serve 
needs associated with professional continuing education, certifi' 
cation, career advancement, and career change. Other programs 
are designed for personal development and intellectual growth. 

Extension programs can be designed to meet the specific needs of 
particular groups or agencies, can be initiated any time during the 
year and offered at a variety of locations including the workplace. 

Telecommunications technologies can deliver extension pro- 
grams to off-campus sites. 

The amount of extension credit which will be accepted toward a 
baccalaureate degree is 24 semester units. Nine semester units of 
extension credit may be applied toward a master’s degree with 
appropriate approval. Extension credit may not be used to fulfill 
the minimum residence requirement for graduation. 

Adjunct Enrollment 

Many of the university credit courses listed in the fall and spring 
class schedules are open on a space-available basis to extension 
students through Adjunct Enrollment. Matriculated students 
may not enroll through this program. 

Summer Session 

Summer session course offerings are selected primarily to serve 
the needs of students working toward the completion of degree 
programs; prospective students who wish to begin coursework 
while admission to the university is in progress; and members of 
the community who wish professional advancement, professional 
continuing education, or personal enrichment. Summer session 
is open admission although students are expected to satisfy all 
prerequisites for the courses in which they enroll. Courses offered 
as a part of summer session apply toward residence and graduation 
requirements. Summer enrollment does not constitute admission 
to the university. 

A summer session class schedule listing courses to be offered in 
the coming summer with descriptions of special course offerings, 
a registration form and instructions, is available in March. Regis- 
tration may be completed in person, by fax, telephone, or mail. 



164 University Extended Education 



Televised Instruction 

Mcxlem telecommunications technologies make it possible to re- 
ceive educational programs from distant locations and to deliver 
courses to ofif-campus sites. Resources available to faculty and stu- 
dents include satellite teleconferences, Interactive Televised In- 
struction, optical fiber and cable delivery systems. Residence credit, 
extension credit and non-credit courses are delivered to the Mission 
Viejo Campus, public schools, business, industry, and the home via 
Interactive Televised Instruction. Informational programs about 
CSUF, its faculty, students, staff, and the surrounding community 
are delivered via The Titan Cable Network. 

For more information on Interactive Televised Instruction, con- 
tact University Extended Education Distance Learning office. 

Intersession 

Intersession is scheduled between the fall and spring semesters 
during the month of January. One to three unit courses are 
offered which primarily serve the needs of degree seeking stu- 
dents. These courses allow students to enrich their educational 
experience by taking courses in topics not offered during other 
academic terms and to accelerate progress toward a degree. In- 
tersession courses are open enrollment and apply toward resi- 
dence and graduate requirements. 

Certificate Programs 

Certificate programs are designed for those who want formal 
recognition for completing a structured and rigorous course of 
study in a specific field but who may not be interested in pursuing 
a university degree program. Certificates are awarded when par- 
ticipants complete the course requirements. University Extended 
Education offers credit certificate programs in the following 
areas: 

Gerontology Production and Inventory Control 

T^hnical Writing School Business Management 

Manufacturing Operations Management 


Non-credit certificate programs are available in several areas 
including: 

ADA Programming 

Commercial Bank Credit Analysis and Loan Extension 

C Programming Language 

Crime and Intelligence Analysis 

Effective Employee Management 

Entrepreneurship 

Excellence in Manufacturing Management 

Industrial Controls Technology 

Industrial Distribution 

International Marketing 

Magic: The Performance Art 

Managing Multicultural Work Environments 

Mortgage Banking 

Microcomputer System Design 

Object Oriented Programming 

Operations and Administration of Microcomputers in Libraries 

Perioperative Nursing Care 

Perioperative and Post-anesthesia Nursing Care 

Real Estate Appraisal 

Systems Engineering 

Transportation Demand Management 

New credit and non-credit programs are always being developed. 
For current titles, contact University Extended Education. 

Community Service Programs 

University Extended Education is committed to public service 
and community development programs serving the multicultural 
population of Orange County. For example, Continuing Learn- 
ing Experience (CLE) is a program for retired and semi-retired 
persons. The CLE office is located in the Charles L. and Rachael 
E. Ruby Gerontology Center. Other examples of community 
service programs include La Universidad de la Familia and the 
Center for Socioeconomic Development. 


University Extended Education 165 


International Programs 


Developing intercultural communication skills and international 
understanding among its students is a vital mission of The Cali' 
fornia State University (CSU). Since its inception in 1963, the 
CSU International Programs has contributed to this effort by 
providing qualified students an affordable opportunity to contin- 
ue their studies abroad for a full academic year. Close to 11,000 
CSU students have taken advantage of this unique study option. 


International Programs participants earn resident academic cred- 
it at their CSU campuses while they pursue full-time study at a 
host university or special study center abroad. The International 
Programs serves the needs of students in over 100 designated 
academic majors. Affiliated with 36 recognized universities and 
institutions of higher education in 16 countries, the Internation- 
al Programs also offers a wide selection of study locales and 
learning environments. 


Australia 

Brazil 

Canada 


Denmark 


France 


Germany 

Israel 

Italy 


Japan 
Mexico 
New Zealand 

Spain 

Sweden 

Taiwan 

United Kingdom 


Zimbabwe 


The University of Queensland (Brisbane) 
Universidade de Sao Paulo 
The universities of the Province of Quebec 
(13 institutions, including University de 
Montreal, Concordia University, University 
Laval, McGill University, University du 
Quebec system. Bishop’s University, i.a.) 
Denmark’s International Study Program (the 
international education affiliate of the Uni- 
versity of Copenhagen) 

Institut des Etudes Fran^aises pour fetudiants 
fetrangers. University de Droit, d’Economie 
et des Sciences d’Aix-Marseille ( Aix-en-Pro- 
vence) 

Ruprecht-Karls-Universitat (Heidelberg) 
and Eberhard-Karls-Universitat (Tubingen) 
The Hebrew University of Jerusalem 
CSU Study Center (Florence), University 
degli Studi di Firenze, and La Academia di 
Belle Arti Firenze 
Waseda University (Tokyo) 

Universidad Iberoamericana (Mexico City) 
Lincoln University (Christchurch) and Mas- 
sey University (Palmerston North) 
Universidad Complutense de Madrid and 
Universidad de Granada 
Uppsala Universitet 
National Chengchi University (Taipei) 
Bradford University, Bristol University, 
Kingston University, Sheffield University, 
and University of Wales, Swansea 
University of Zimbabwe (Harare) 



166 International Programs 




The International Programs pays all tuition and administrative 
costs for participating California resident students to the same 
extent that such funds would be expended to support similar costs 
in California. Participants are responsible for all personal costs, 
such as transportation, room and board, living expenses, and 
home campus fees. Participants remain eligible to receive any 
form of financial aid (except work-study) for which they can 
individually qualify. 

To qualify for admission to the International Programs, students 
must have upper division or graduate standing at a CSU campus 
by the time of departure. California Community Colleges trans- 
fer students are eligible to apply directly from their community 
college if they can meet this requirement. Students must also 
possess a current cumulative grade point average of 2.75 or 3.0, 
depending on the program for which they apply. Some programs 
also have language study and/or other coursework prerequisites. 

Additional information and application materials may be ob- 
tained on campus from the Office of International Education and 
Exchange or by writing to The California State University Inter- 
national Programs, 400 Golden Shore, Suite 300, Long Beach, 
California 90802-4275. 

International Exchange Programs 

California State University, Fullerton has direct institutional 
exchange programs with universities throughout the world. Such 
agreements allow for the exchange of faculty and students for 
purposes of teaching, study, research and for the promotion of 
cultural understanding and interaction. 

Current programs link California State University, Fullerton with 
Fudan University, Shanghai; Zhejiang University, Hangzhou; Peo- 
ple’s Republic of China; eight campuses of the University of Paris, 
France; the Autonomous University of Guadalajara; the Mexicali 
and Ensenada campuses of the Autonomous University of Baja 
California, Mexico; the Moscow Institute of Steel and Alloys, 
Republic of Russia; and Nanzan University, Nagoya, Japan. 

CSUF students pay home campus fees plus their living, transporta- 
tion and related expenses. They must maintain home campus full- 
time enrollment status in the exchange program. They thereby may 
qualify for any financial aid for which they normally would be 
eligible. Credit received while studying abroad is subject to CSUF 
departmental approval for determination of equivalency. 

Information and application forms are available in the Office of 
Academic Programs, McCarthy Hall- 129, and in the Office of 
International Education and Exchange, McCarthy Hall-79. 

American Language Program 

California State University, Fullerton welcomes international 
students who wish to perfect their English language skills. The 
American Language Program (ALP) course of study provides 
intensive practice in listening, speaking, reading, writing and 
study skills while promoting an understanding of U.S. culture 
and society. Classes are small, so students will receive individual 
attention which will help them achieve rapid fluency in English. 


All entering ALP students must take a placement test. On the 
basis of the test results, students are placed in one of six academic 
levels. At the beginning and intermediate levels, students attend 
multi-skills classes for 24 hours per week. Additional hours are 
required for homework and practice in the Language Laboratory. 
Advanced level students are in a semi-intensive program. In 
addition to multi-skills classes, they may take specialized classes 
such as English for Business, English for Science and Technology, 
or Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL) preparation. 

No university credit is given for ALP classes; however, qualified 
advanced students may take one or two classes for university 
credit through Extended Education with the consent of the pro- 
gram director. Students should expect regular homework assign- 
ments in all their classes. For further information, contact the 
Director of the American Language Program (714) 773-2909. 

AIESEC 

AIESEC, the French acronym for International Association of 
Students in Business and Economics, is an international student 
organization which works in cooperation with local corporations 
to bring business trainees from all parts of the world to Orange 
County and, therefore, earns credits for placement of CSUF 
students in the 61 other participating countries. Students can be 
engaged for periods from six weeks to eighteen months and gain 
invaluable business experiences in another culture. For further 
information call (714) 773-2266. 

International Study Courses 

Cal State Fullerton students under The California State University 
International Study Programs register concurrently at Cal State 
Fullerton and at the host institution abroad, with credits assigned to 
the student which are equivalent to courses offered at Cal State 
Fullerton. Undergraduate students who discover appropriate study 
opportunities at the host Institution but no equivalent course at Cal 
State Fullerton may use Independent Study 499 and International 
Study 292 or 492. Graduate students may use Independent Gradu- 
ate Research 599 and International Study 592. 

292 Projects in Study Abroad (Subject): (1-6 lower-division 
units) 

Open to students enrolled in California State University Interna- 
tional Programs. Study undertaken in a university abroad under 
the auspices of The California State University. 

492 Projects in Study Abroad (Subject): (1-3 upper-division 
units) 

Open to students enrolled in California State University Interna- 
tional Programs. Study undertaken in a university abroad under 
the auspices of The California State University. 

592 Projects in Study Abroad (Subject): (1-3 graduate units) 
Open to students enrolled in California State University Interna- 
tional Programs. Study undertaken in a university abroad under 
the auspices of The California State University. 


International Programs 167 


special Programs 


From the total curriculum of the university, students may wish to 
plan a specially designed program of study that does not duplicate 
significantly any existing major or concentration. The under- 
graduate special major and the graduate interdisciplinary studies 
program provide opportunities for selected students to pursue 
individualized programs of study leading to a degree when legiti- 
mate academic and professional goals can be satisfied by a judi- 
cious selection of courses from two or more fields, and when these 
aims cannot be satisfied by the authorized standard degree majors 
or double majors that are available on the campus (e.g., liberal 
studies, social sciences). The special major and interdisciplinary 
studies program are designed for exceptional cases of individual 
students only and provide an opportunity to develop a concentra- 
tion or specialization outside the framework of existing majors. 
These programs are not intended as a means of bypassing normal 
graduation requirements or as a means by which students may gradu- 
ate who fail to complete the degree major in which they are enrolled. 


B.A. Special Major 

Students desiring to work for a bachelor’s degree with a special 

major should consult with the Office of Academic Advisement. 

1. Entrance to the special major program is normally at the 
beginning of the junior year (60 units remaining for gradua- 
tion). 

2. The minimum requirement for the major is 48 units. A mini- 
mum of 36 upper-division units must be included in the major. 

3. Although students may include on their study plans, course 
work in progress and a maximum of 1 2 units of course work 
completed prior to the time of filing, approval of these courses 
is not automatic. 

4. No more than six units of 499 (Independent Study) and/or 
internship course work may be included in the major. 

5. Neither lower- nor upper-division courses applied to general 
education breadth requirements will be applicable toward the 
major. 

6. At least three units of appropriate course work in methodolo- 
gy shall be included in the student’s study plan. Where appro- 
priate this requirement may be waived by the University’ Cur- 
riculum Committee. 

7. All courses in the major must be taken for a letter grade 
(Grade Option 1). A GPA of 3.0 in the major is required for 
graduation. 


8. Prior to taking any substitute course work a petition for 
change of the study plan must be approved by the student’s 
adviser and the University Curriculum Committee. 

9. A senior thesis shall be written by the student in this program 
during the semester preceding graduation. This thesis should 
show scholarly evidence of the merit in the student’s choice of 
an interdisciplinary program. This paper shall be written un- 
der the direction of the student’s special major adviser and 
approved by the faculty designated by the departments repre- 
sented on the student’s study plan. 

M.A. Interdisciplinary Studies 

A graduate student desiring to work for a master’s degree in 

interdisciplinary studies should consult with the Office of Gradu- 
ate Studies and fill out an initial request form available at that 

office. 

1. Entrance to the program requires a grade-point average 
(GPA) of 3.0 in the undergraduate major and a GPA of 3.0 in 
the last 60 units of course work. 

2. The minimum requirement of units for an M.A. in Interdisci- 
plinary Studies is 30 units of which at least half must be 
graduate courses (500-level). 

3. Although students may include on their propc^sed study plan 
course work in progress or completed prior to the time of 
filing, approval of these courses is not automatic. No more 
than nine units of course work taken prior to classified stand- 
ing can be approved on the program. 

4. The program may contain no more than six units of Indepen- 
dent Study, Project or Thesis. 

5. All courses on the study plan must be taken for a letter grade 
(Grade Option 1 ) and no grade below a C is acceptable on the 
study plan. Please see the section in this catalog titled “Study 
Plan” for additional requirements. 

6. Prior to taking any substitute course work, a petition for 
change of the study plan must be approved by the student’s 
graduate adviser and graduate committee. 

7. AThesis or Project shall be required for the completion of the 
program. TTie completed thesis will be filed with the Library; 
whereas the project shall be filed with the Office of Graduate 
Studies. 


1 68 Special Programs 


Curricula Information 

Course Descriptions 

Course descriptions briefly describe the content or subject matter 
to be covered and provide additional information on units of 
credit, the level of instruction (see course numbering code), 
prerequisites and the type of course (lecture, laboratory, activity, 
seminar and individually supervised work). 

Course Numbering Code 

The first number in each course designation is intended to indi' 
cate the level of complexity of the course. In addition, the first 
number also is a rough index of the student’s year of study at the 
university. The following are guidelines for course numbering. 

001 '099 Courses which carry no credit toward a degree or ere' 
dential. Generally, developmental, remedial, or pre- 
college in content. 

100' 199 Lower division courses designed primarily for freshman 
level, but also open to other students. These courses are 
generally introductory in nature and are usually de- 
signed without prerequisites. 

200-299 Lower division courses designed primarily for sopho- 
more level, but also open to other students. Although 
there is no clear distinction between lower division 
courses listed at the 1(X) or 2(X) level, there is an inher- 
ent assumption that students in these courses have ac- 
quired skills appropriate to the second year of university 
level work. 

3(X)-399 Upper division courses designed primarily for juniors, 
but also open to other students. TTiird year or junior 
level course work is likely to emphasize specialization in 
the disciplines. It is expected that specific prerequisites 
are used to indicate the necessary competencies re- 
quired for study at this level. TTese courses do not give 
graduate credit unless included on an approved gradu- 
ate study plan for a specific graduate student. Such a 
study plan shall include an explicit rationale for the 
inclusion of said 3(X)-level course(s). 

4(X)-499 Upper division courses designed primarily for seniors, 
but also open to other students. Prerequisite work is 
required. C^ourse work is intended to provide depth of 
understanding or additional focus appropriate to the 
disciplines. Courses at the 400 level are sufficiently 
sophisticated for inclusion on graduate study plans. 



Curricula Information 169 


500'599 Courses designed primarily for graduate students who 
are enrolled in advanced degree programs. The courses 
of study are advanced and specialized in nature and 
require substantial undergraduate preparation. Under- 
graduate students may enroll if they have reached sen- 
ior status, have the prerequisites required for entry into 
the course, and have gained consent of the instructor. 

700-701 Course numbers for graduate and postbaccalaureate stu- 
dents (including those seeking a credential) to main- 
tain continuous enrollment during a particular semes- 
ter, and who are not enrolled in regular courses. These 
numbers do not represent courses and do not therefore 
grant credit. 

900-999 Courses are specifically designed for professional groups 
seeking vocational improvement or career advance- 
ment. Credit for these courses does not apply to under- 
graduate or graduate degrees or credentials at the uni- 
versity. 

An honors course shall use the letter H. A laboratory course 
which accompanies another course should use the letter L. A 
variable topics course shall use the letter T. 

A controlled entry course is one which has enrollment require- 
ments in addition to any prerequisite courses. Additional require- 
ments include prior approval of the instructor, special academic 
advisement, a qualifying exam, a placement test, an audition, a 
teaching credential, or similar special qualifications. 

Special Course Numbers 

For uniformity, certain types of courses have been listed by all 
departments and schools with the same numbers: 499 and 599 are 
used respectively for undergraduate and graduate “independent 
study”; 196 or 496 for “student- to-student tutorials”; 597 for a 
graduate “project”; and 598 for a graduate “thesis.” 

Explanation of Course Notations 

Certain notations are uniformly used in the course descriptions in 
this catalog. 

1 . The figure in parentheses following the course title indicates 
the number of semester units for the course. Courses offered 
for varying units are indicated as (1-3) or (3-6). 

2. A course listing such as Afro-Ethnic Studies 108 (3) (Same as 
Linguistics 108) indicates that a student taking the course 
may choose to count it in either of those two disciplines. 

3. A notation such as (Formerly 433) following the course title 
and the number of units indicates the same course previously 
was numbered 433. 


Student-to-Student Tutorials 

The “student-to-student tutorial” provides a formal way to en- 
courage students to learn through teaching. It also provides tutor- 
ing to all students who need and want tutorial assistance. 

In those departments which choose to offer such courses, the 
courses are numbered 196 or 496 and carry one to three units of 
credit. The prerequisites include a grade-point average of at least 3.0 
and/or consent of the instructor. TTie tutor and his/her tutee or 
tutees will work in mutually advantageous ways by allowing all 
involved to delve more carefully and thoroughly into the materials 
presented in this specific course. One to three students may be 
tutored by the tutor unless the instructor decides that special cir- 
cumstances warrant increasing the usual maximum of three tutees. 
Three hours of work per week are expected for each semester unit of 
credit, and this work may include, apart from contact hours with 
tutees, such other activities as: tutorial preparations; cor\sulting 
with instructors; reporting, analysis and evaluation of the tutorial 
experiences; and participation in an all-university orientation and 
evaluation program for tutors. A maximum of three units may be 
taken each semester. No more than three units of any combination 
of tutorial courses ( 196 or 496) may count toward an undergraduate 
degree program. The course must be taken as an elective and not 
counted toward general education, major or minor requirements. 
The course can be taken on a credit/no credit basis by the tutor. 
Requests for tutors must be initiated by tutees and can be initiated 
up until the official university census date. Tutors electing to re- 
spond to such requests will receive credits at the end of the semester 
and can register in the course until the official university census 
date. Both tutors and tutees must submit written reports, analyses 
and evaluations of their shared tutorial experience to the instructor, 
and both must participate in an all-university orientation program 
as well as in any conference or critique that the instructor of the 
course may require. 

Further information can be obtained from the department in 
which the student is interested in a “student-to-student tutorial.” 

Independent Study 

Under the independent study program, the student may pursue 
topics or problems of special interest beyond the scope of a regular 
course under the supervision of a faculty adviser. The work is of a 
research or creative nature, and normally culminates in a paper, 
project, comprehensive examination, or performance. Before 
registering, the student must get his topic approved by the in- 
structor who will be supervising independent study and by the 
department chair. 

A student may take no more than six units of independent study 
at the undergraduate level (299 and 499 numbered courses) in a 
given semester. No more than nine units of independent study 
may be applied toward completion of the baccalaureate degree. A 
graduate student may apply no more than six units of indepen- 
dent study (499 or 599 numbered courses) toward completion of 
masters degree, unless written approval is obtained from the 
appropriate school dean. 


170 Curricula Information 


CrosS'Disciplinary University 
Programs 

A joint degree program is an endeavor involving two or more 
existing academic departments which need not be within the 
same school. Such programs are administered by program coun- 
cils composed of representatives elected by participating depart- 
ments. The joint degree programs are housed in administration 
units as follows: 

School of Human Development and Community Service 

Child Development, B.S. 

Human Services, B.S. 

School of Humanities and Social Sciences 

Environmental Studies, M.S. 

Latin American Studies, B.A. 

Liberal Studies, B.A. 

Russian and East European Area Studies, B.A. 

Social Sciences, M.A. 

The degree descriptions are located within the appropriate school 
section of this catalog. 

Bilingual/Cross-Cultural Studies 

Students may pursue a course of study with a bilingual/ cross- 
cultural emphasis. 

Complete course listings and details are available from the De- 
partment of Foreign Languages and Literatures, the Department 
of Chicano Studies, Division of Teacher Education and Educa- 
tional Opportunity Program advisers. 


Library Courses 

201 Introduction to Library Resources (1) 

A practical introduction to library materials and methods en- 
abling undergraduate students to locate information for course- 
related, as well as independent study and research. 

200 Elements of Bibliographic Investigation (3) 

A survey of important information sources in various subject 
fields and the application of research methods which will enable 
students to become effective library users. Particular attention is 
given to the assembling of material for term papers and reports, 
including the preparation of bibliographies. 

302T Library Research Methods for Specific Majors ( 1 ) 
Library research methodology and introduction to library re- 
sources in special subject areas such as business, education and 
science. 


University Studies Course 

100 Introduction to University Studies (1) 

Designed for first-time freshmen. Introduction to higher educa- 
tion structure and expectations. Study skills development. Ad- 
visement towards academic and personal development and suc- 
cess. Organization and purpose of curricular and administrative 
requirements. Offered credit/no credit only. 


Curricula Information 171 



School of the Arts 



Dean: Jerry Samuelson 

Associate Dean: Frank Cummings 111 

Assistant Dean, Student Affairs: Nancee Benson 

The learning opportunities within the School of the Arts are 
based on a commitment to artistic and academic excellence. We 
provide an environment which encourages individual achieve^ 
ment for performers, artists and scholars. 

Within the broader university liberal arts environment, the 
School of the Arts offers intensive programs in Art, Music, 
Theatre and Dance. We are also committed to the enhancement 
of artistic awareness of all students. 

We extend a warm welcome to you and we promise that with your 
perseverance, we will do everything possible to further your goals 
and objectives in whatever field of the arts you choose. 

Academic advisement is available through the departments. Fac- 
ulty advisors are available to assist students with career decisions 
and degree requirements. 

Several scholarships are available to students in the School of the 
Arts. Inquiries should be made to the respective department 
offices. 


School of the Arts 175 




Programs Offered 
Art, Bachelor of Arts 

Art History 
General Studio Art 
Teaching 

Art, Bachelor of Fine Arts 

Drawing and Painting 

Printmaking 

Sculpture 

Crafts 

Ceramics 

Graphic Design 

Illustration 

Environmental Design 
Creative Photography 

Minor in Art 
Art, Master of Arts 

Drawing and Painting (including Printmaking) 

Sculpture 

Crafts (including Ceramics, Glass, Fibers, Wood, 
Jewelry/Metalsmithing) . 

Design (including Environmental Design, Graphic Design, 
Illustration, Exhibition Design, Creative Photography). 
Art History 

Art, Master of Fine Arts 

Drawing, Painting and Printmaking 
Sculpture 

Ceramics (including Glass) 

Crafts (including Fibers, Jewelry/Metalsmithing, and 
Woodworking/Fumiture) 

Design (including Graphic Design, Illustration, 
Environmental Design, and Exhibition Design) 

Creative Photography 

Certificate in Museum Studies 


Music, Bachelor of Music 

Commercial Music 

Composition 

Instrumental 

Keyboard 

Voice 

Accompanying 
Minor in Music 

Music, Master of Arts 

Music History and Literature 
Music Education 

Music, Master of Music 

Performance 

Theory^Composition 

Theatre Arts, Bachelor of Arts 

History and Theory 
Production/Performance 
Acting 
Directing 
Musical Theatre 
Oral Interpretation 
Playwriting 

Technical Production/Design 
Television 
Teaching 

Theatre Arts, Master of Arts 

Theatre Arts, Master of Fine Arts 

Acting 

Directing 

Technical Theatre and Design 


Dance, Bachelor of Arts 

Music, Bachelor of Arts 

Liberal Arts 

Music Education 

Music History and Theory 


176 School of Arts 


Department of Art 



Department Chair: Darryl J. Curran 
Department Office: Visual Arts 102 


Programs Offered 
Bachelor of Arts in Art 

Art History 
General Studio Art 
Teaching 

Bachelor of Fine Arts in Art 

Drawing and Painting 

Printmaking 

Sculpture 

Crafts 

Ceramics 

Minor in Art 


Graphic Design 
Illustration 

Environmental Design 
Creative Photography 


Master of Arts in Art 


Drawing and Painting (including Printmaking) 

Sculpture 

Crafts (including Ceramics, Glass, Fibers, Wood, 
Jewelry/Metalsmithing) 

Design (including Environmental Design, Graphic Design, 
Illustration, Exhibition Design, Creative Photography) 
Art History 

Master of Fine Arts in Art 

Drawing, Painting, and Printmaking 
Sculpture 

Ceramics (including Glass) 

Crafts (including Fibers, Jewelry/Metalsmithing, and 
Woodworking/Furn i ture ) 

Design (including Graphic Design, Illustration, 
Environmental Design, and Exhibition Design) 
Creative Photography 

Certificate in Museum Studies 


Faculty 

Bryan Cantley, Ruth Capelle, John Carter, Al Ching, Kyung 
Sun Cho, Dorte Christjansen, Eileen Cowin, Frank E. 
Cummings III, Darryl Curran, Robert Ewing, Maurice Gray, 
Thomas Holste, George James, Jim Jenkins, Jade Jewett, 
Lawrence Johnson, G. Ray Kerciu, Garland Kirkpatrick, 
Cbnald Lagerberg, Dana Lamb, Sergio Lizarraga, Clinton 
MacKenzie, Mike McGee, Jerry Rothman, Jerry Samuelson, 
Jon Stokesbary, Vincent Suez 


Advisers 

Undergraduate: Contact department office. 
Graduate: Al Ching 


Art 177 



INTRODUCTION 

The Department of Art offers programs which include the schoh 
arly fields of art history, theory, analysis and criticism; the studio 
fields of drawing and painting, printmaking, sculpture, crafts 
(including fibers, jewelry, wood and metal), ceramics (including 
glass), graphic design, creative photography, illustration, envi- 
ronmental design, and exhibition design; and the single subject 
teaching field of art education. 

Curricular plans for the Bachelor of Arts and the Bachelor of Fine 
Arts have been developed to meet the individual needs and 
interests of students in art. 

Tlie general objectives of the programs are to provide a compre- 
hensive learning environment which contributes technically and 
conceptually to the development of the art historian, the visual 
artist and the art teacher. Specifically, the programs provide 
opportunities for students to: ( 1 ) develop a knowledge and under- 
standing of fundamental visual experience and concepts basic to 
many forms and fields of art; (2) develop a critical appreciation of 
historical and contemporary art forms as they relate to individual 
and social needs and values; (3) express creatively one’s personal 
experience and thought with skill and clarity in visual terms; and 

(4) to develop this knowledge and skills necessary to pursue 
graduate studies in visual arts, or to teach art in the schools, and 

(5) develop the understanding and advanced specialized skills 
applicable to professional practice. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN ART 

The 124'Unit Bachelor of Arts degree offers concentrations in 
Art History, General Studio Art, and Teaching. The program 
objectives are to provide correlative experiences, information 
and theory. 

The Art History concentration provides for an emphasis in the 
area of art history, theory, and appreciation and is particularly 
recommended for those students who wish to pursue graduate 
studies in art history or museum studies. 

The General Studio Art concentration is a general curriculum 
that provides a broad education in the visual arts. 

The Teaching concentration is for students who wish to meet the 
requirements for single subject instruction (Ryan Act) for teach- 
ing art in grades K-12. 

In addition to the requirements listed below for the major, stu- 
dents must meet the other university requirements for a bachelor 
of arts degree. Students in the Teaching concentration must also 
meet specific requirements for the desired teaching credential. 

All art majors must take Art 300, Writing in the Visual Arts, and 
pass the university’s Examination in Writing Proficiency (EWP) 
after achieving junior standing (60 units). Testing dates for the 
EWP are available from the Testing Center or the Academic 
Advisement Center. 


To earn a Bachelor of Arts in Art students must achieve grades of 
C or better in all art courses required for the degree. 


Art History Concentration 

Preparation for the major (lower division — 21 units) 

Art 201A,B Art and Civilization 6 

Lower division studio courses 6 

Approved electives in art, American studies, anthro- 
pology, history, literature, music, philosophy or 
theatre 9 

The major (upper division — 33 units) 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts 3 

480 Selected Topics in Art Hist 3 

481 Seminar in Art History 3 

Approved upper div. elec 3 

Upper division art history 21 

General Studio Art Concentration 
Lower Division (27 units) 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 3 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 3 

107A,B Beginning Drawing and Painting 6 

117 Life Drawing 3 

201 A, B Art and Civilization 6 


Art Electives — Select at least two courses from two of 
the following areas: design; printmaking; creative 
photography; sculpture; ceramics; crafts; drawing 


and painting 6 

Upper Division (27 units) 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts 3 

Art History 6 

Studio area — include one course from each of the 
following: (1) drawing and painting; (2) sculpture, 
creative photography, printmaking; (3) crafts and 
ceramics; (4) design 12 


Electives — Choose two courses from at least two dif- 
ferent categories of the following: drawing and 
painting; printmaking; creative photography; sculp- 
ture; crafts (fibers and glass); ceramics; graphic de- 
sign; illustration; environmental design; exhibition 


design; art education 6 

Teaching Concentration 

Single Subject Instruction — Ryan Act 

(Qualifies for Teaching Art in Grades K-12) 

Preparation for the major (lower division — 30 units) 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 3 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 3 

106 A Beginning Ceramics 3 

107A,B Beginning Drawing and Painting 6 

117 Life Drawing 3 

201A,B Art and Civilization 6 

205A Beginning Crafts 3 

207A Drawing/Painting 3 


178 Art 


Major requirements (upper division — 24 units) 
Select either Drawing/Painting or Crafts Emphasis: 


Drawing and Painting Emphasis: 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts 3 

307 A, B Drawing and Painting 6 

310A Watercolor 3 

317A Life Studies, Drawing and Painting 3 

347A Printmaking'Etching 3 

312 Mcxlem Art 3 

441 A Media Exploration for Teaching Art 3 

Crafts Emphasis: 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts 3 

305 A Advanced Crafts 3 

306A,B Advanced Ceramics 6 

310A Watercolor 3 

312 Modern Art 3 

31 5A Jewelry 3 

441 A Media Exploration for Teaching Art 3 

Professumal Preparation (24-27 units) 

Art Ed 442 Teaching Art in the Secondary 

School 3 

Education course work 9-12 

Student teaching (one semester full-time) 12 


Program Requirements: 

1 . Be advised by a faculty adviser in art education assigned by the 
art department chair. 

2. Fulfill credential requirements listed in the catalog within the 
School of Human Development and Community Service for 
the Ryan Act curriculum. 

3. Meet the requirements listed under the Teaching concentra- 
tion. 

4. Complete the major requirements prior to enrolling in the 
teacher education program. 

5. Be admitted to teacher education through the School of Hu- 
man Development and Community Service prior to enroll- 
ment in Art Ed 442, professional education courses and stu- 
dent teaching. 

6. Be accepted for teacher education and student teaching based 
on candidate quotas, portfolio review, and evidence of success 
in completed university course work. 

7. Be recommended by the faculty adviser in art education. 

8. Complete Secondary Education 310 and 386 or equivalents. 

9. Pass C- BEST exam prior to admission to Teacher Education. 

10. Have a G.PA. of 2.89 overall, 3.0 in major. 


Credential Information 

Upon completion of the above program and the bachelor of arts 
degree, the student is eligible for a partial credential, which 
meets state requirements for teaching art in grades K-12. Within 
the specified period of time from the beginning of a teaching 
assignment, 30 units of course work must be completed at an 
accredited college or university to qualify for a clear credential. 
Credentials are issued from the institution where this require- 
ment has been completed. 

Multiple Subject Instruction — Ryan Act 

The following three courses are recommended for all students 
intending to teach in the elementary schools in multiple subject 
classrooms. 

Art 380 Art and Child Development (3) 

Music 333 Music and Child Development (3) 

Theatre 402 Dramatic Activities for Children (3) 

The following additional list of courses would be strongly recom- 
mended for students who wish to expand their knowledge in any 
or all of the arts: 

Art 100, 101, 103, 104, 106A, 107A, 201A,B, 310A,B, 330, 
380, 441A,B 

Dance 101, 112, 122, 132, 142, 323A,B, 422 
Music 111A,B, 184A,B, 251, 281B,P,S,W, 283 
Theatre 100, 263, 276A, 277, 370A,B, 402A,B, 403A,B 

BACHELOR OF FINE ARTS IN ART 

The Bachelor of Fine Arts degree is a professional program pro- 
viding directed studies in nine studio concentrations within the 
visual arts. The program is designed for students seeking in-depth 
preparation for specialized goals selected from one of the follow- 
ing areas: drawing and painting; printmaking; sculpture; crafts; 
ceramics; graphic design; illustration; environmental design; or 
creative photography. 

The program develops the understanding and advanced special- 
ized skills applicable to professional practice, and to meet en- 
trance requirements to graduate school. 

Admission Requirements 

All freshman students must apply to the B. A. (Bachelor of Arts) 
in Art program for their first semester of residence. After com- 
pleting a minimum of 12 lower-division preparation units with B 
or better grades, students may contact the Art Department to 
change their objective to the B.F.A. in Art program. 

Students who transfer from community colleges or other univer- 
sities may apply to the BFA, providing they qualify. To qualify, 
they must have completed 12 units of studio art courses with B or 
better grades. 


Art 179 


Program Requirements 

The 132'unit Bachelor of Fine Arts degree program requires a 
minimum of 70 units in art, with 28 lower-division units of 
preparation and 42 upper-division units, including 24 units in an 
area of concentration, six units of art history, three units of 
writing in art, and nine units of art electives. In addition to the 
minimum 70 unit requirement for the B.F.A. degree, students 
must meet the other university requirements for a bachelor’s 
degree (see the university Catalog and Class Schedule). 

To earn a Bachelor of Fine Arts in Art, students must achieve 
grades of C or better in all art courses required for the degree. 


Drawing and Painting Concentration 

Preparation (lower division — 28 units) Units 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 3 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 3 

107A,B Beginning Drawing and Painting 6 

117 Life Drawing 4 

201A,B Art and Civilization 6 

207 A, B Drawing and Painting 6 

Concentration (upper division — 42 units) Units 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts* 3 

307A,B Drawing and Painting 6 

317A,B Life Studies, Drawing and Painting 6 

487A Special Studies, Painting 3 

487B Life Studies, Drawing 3 

Upper division drawing and painting options from 

487A,B and/or C 6 

Upper-division art history 6 

Upper-division art electives 9 

Printmaking Concentration 

Preparation (lower division — 28 units) Units 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 3 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 3 

107A,B Beginning Drawing and Painting 6 

117 Life Drawing 4 

201A,B Art and Civilization 6 

207A Drawing and Painting 3 

247 Beginning Printmaking 3 

Concentration (upper division — 42 units) Units 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts* 3 

307A Drawing and Painting 3 

317A,BorC Life Studies 6 

338A Creative Photography 3 

347A, B Printmaking-Etching, Lithography 6 

487D Special Studies, Printmaking 6 

Upper-division art history 6 

Upper-division art electives 9 


Sculpture Concentration 

Preparation (lower division — 28 units) Units 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 3 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 3 

107A,B Beginning Drawing and Painting 6 

117 Life Drawing 4 

201A,B Art and Civilization 6 

216A,B Beginning Sculpture 6 

Concentration (upper division — 42 units) Units 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts* 3 

316A,B Sculpture 6 

317A,B Life Studies, Drawing and Painting 6 

326A Ceramic Sculpture 3 

336A Techniques and Theories, Cast Sculpture 3 

486A Special Studies, Sculpture 6 

Upper-division art history 6 

Upper-division art electives 9 

Crafts Concentration 

Preparation (lower division — 28 units) Units 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 3 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 3 

107 A, B Beginning Drawing and Painting 6 

117 Life Drawing 1 

123B Descriptive Drawing 3 

201 A, B Art and Civilization 6 

205 A, B Beginning Crafts 6 

Concentration (upper division — 42 units) Units 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts* 3 

305 A, B Advanced Crafts 6 

Select 9 units from: 9 


306 A, B Advanced Ceramics 

315A,B Jewelry 

330 Fibers and Papers 

355A,B Fibers, Fabric Printing & Dyeing 

364A,B Stained Glass 

365 A, B Weaving 


485A,B,C,D,E, or F Special Studies in Crafts 6 

495 Internship in Art 3 

Upper-division art history 6 

Upper-division art electives 9 

Ceramics Concentration 

Preparation (lower division — 28 units) Units 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 3 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 3 

106A,B Beginning Ceramics 6 

107A,B Beginning Drawing and Painting 6 

117 Life Drawing 4 

201A,B Art and Civilization 6 


180 Art 


Concentration (upper division — 42 units) Units 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts' 3 

306 A, B Advanced Ceramics 6 

326A,B Ceramic Sculpture 6 

424A,B Glass Forming 6 

484A or 484B Special Studies 6 

Uppet'division art history 6 

Upper'division art electives 9 

Graphic Design Concentration 

Preparation (lower division — 28 units) Units 

103 TwO' Dimensional Design 3 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 3 

107A,B Beginning Drawing and Painting 6 

117 Life Drawing 4 

201 A, B Art and Civilization 6 

223 A, B Lettering, Typography & Rendering 6 

Concentration (upper division — 42 units) Units 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts’ 3 

323 A, B Graphic Design 6 

3 38 A Creative Photography 3 

363 A, B Illustration 6 

483A Special Studies, Graphic Design 6 

495 Internship 3 

Upper-division art history 6 

Upper-division art electives 9 

Illustration Concentration 

Preparation (lower division — 28 units) Uruts 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 3 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 3 

107A,B Beginning Drawing and Painting 6 

117 Life Drawing 4 

123 A Descriptive Drawing 3 

201 A, B Art and Civilization 6 

223 B Lettering, Typography & Rendering 3 

Concentration (upper division — 42 units) Units 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts’ 3 

317A,B Life Studies, Drawing and Painting 6 

323A Graphic Design 3 

363 A, B Illustration 6 

483C Special Studies, Illustration 6 

495 Interriship 3 

Upper-division art history 6 

Upper-division art electives 9 

Environmental Design Concentration 

Preparation (lower division — 28 units) Units 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 3 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 3 

107A,B Beginning Drawing and Painting 6 

117 Life Drawing 1 


123B Descriptive Drawing 3 

201 A, B Art and Civilization 6 

213A,B Beginning Environmental Design 6 

Concentration ( upper division — 42 units) Units 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts’ 3 

313A,B Environmental Design 6 

333A,B Environmental Design 6 

453A Exhibition Design 3 

483B Special Studies, Environmental Design 6 

495 Internship in Art 3 

Upper-division art history 6 

Upper-division art electives 9 

Creative Photography Concentration 

Preparation (lower division — 28 units) Units 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 3 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 3 

107A,B Beginning Drawing and Painting 6 

117 Life Drawing 4 

238 Photo Visual Concepts 3 

201 A, B Art and Civilization 6 

Art Elective: Select from 123A, 247 or 216A 3 

Concentration (upper division — 42 units) Units 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts’ 3 

317A Life Studies, Drawing and Painting 3 

338A,B Creative Photography 6 

339A Photo Illustration or 348 Artists’ Books 3 

438A,B Creative Color Photography 6 

489 Special Studies, Creative Photo 6 

Upper-division art history 6 

Upper-division art electives ’ 9 


MINOR IN ART 

Twenty-four units with a grade of C or better are required for a 
minor in art; a minimum of 12 units are to be in upper division 
courses and in residence. A basic course in each of the following 
areas is required: (1) art history, theory, analysis and criticism; 
(2) design; (3) drawing and painting; and (4) crafts. Recom- 
mended courses to meet the “basic courses” requirement are: ( 1 ) 
Art 201A or B; (2) Art 103 or 104; (3) Art 107A or B; (4) Art 
106A or 205 A. Completion of these courses will provide a rea- 
sonable foundation for entry into upper division courses. Those 
students planning to qualify for a standard teaching credential 
with specialization in elementary or secondary teaching and art 
for a minor must obtain approval from the Art Department for 
the courses selected to meet the upper division requirements for a 
minor in art. 


‘Students must also take and pass the Examination in Writing Proficiency (EWP). 


Art 181 


MASTER OF ARTS IN ART 

This program provides a balance of study and practice for those 
who wish a career in the visual arts, or who want to prepare for 
further graduate work in the field. The program offers the follow- 
ing areas of concentration: (1) drawing and painting (including 
printmaking); (2) sculpture; (3) crafts (including ceramics, 
wood, glass, fibers, jewelry/metalsmithing); (4) design (includ- 
ing environmental design, graphic design, illustration, exhibi- 
tion design, or creative photography); and (5) art history. 

Admission Requirements 

1. Conditionally classified standing: 

a. A baccalaureate degree in art with the same concentra- 
tion as the graduate degree objective from an accredited 
institution, or 24 upper division units in art of which 12 
units must be in a concentration completed with grades of 
B or better. Applicants are advised that most upper-divi- 
sion courses require lower-division prerequisites. A facul- 
ty adviser should be consulted with regard to recommend- 
ed courses. 

b. GPA minimum of 2.5 in the last 60 semester units at- 
tempted. 

c. (1) Studio program: satisfactory review of preliminary 
portfolio by a faculty member in the area of studio con- 
centration. 

(2) Art history program: satisfactory preliminary inter- 
view by a faculty member in art history. 

d. Enrollment is allowed in graduate-level courses with the 
exception of Art 500A,B; 511; 512; 597; and 598. 

e. Passing the comprehensive review will be required for 
classified standing. 

2. Classified standing: 

The same requirements as conditionally classified plus: 

a. Pass comprehensive review: held semi-annually, the com- 
prehensive review is an evaluation of the candidate by a 
committee comprised of faculty teaching in the area of 
concentration. The committee reviews the student’s cre- 
ative work, statement of purpose, academic and other 
relevant qualifications; assigned research papers are re- 
quired of art history applicants in lieu of a portfolio. 
Procedures, dates, and appointment times are available 
through the art department graduate office. 

b. Form a graduate committee. 

c. Development of an approved study plan. 

d. Art history program: reading knowledge of a foreign lan- 
guage may be required before advancement to candidacy. 


Study Plan 

The degree program requires 30 units of graduate study approved 
by the student’s graduate committee of which 15 must be 500- 
level courses. The 30 units are distributed as follows: 

Units 

1. Core courses in art history, philosophy, analysis and 

criticism 9 

a. Studio program: 

Art 500A Graduate Seminar in Major Field 
(3 units) 

Art history program: 

Art 5 1 1 Seminar on the Content and Meth- 
od of Art History (3 units) (ADMISSION 
WITH CLASSIFIED STANDING ONLY) 

b. Studio Program: 

Art 5CX)B Graduate Seminar in Major Field 
(3 units) 

Art history program: 

Art 512 Seminar on Selected Topics in Art 
History (3 units) (ADMISSION WITH 
CLASSIFIED STANDING ONLY) 

c. Art 481 Seminar in Art History (3 units), or 
substitute of a 4(X)-level course in art history, 
theory, analysis or criticism on the recommenda- 
tion of the major adviser. 

2. 500-and/or 400- level courses in the area of concentra- 
tion selected from one of the following (minimum of 

six units at 5(X)-level) 12 

a. Drawing and painting (including printmaking) 

b. Sculpture 

c. Crafts (including ceramics, glass, fibers, wood, 
jewelry/metalsmithing) 

d. Design (including environmental design, graphic 
design, illustration, exhibition design, or cre- 
ative photography) 

e. Art history 

3. Additional course work in the area of concentration or 


approved electives 3 or 6 

4. Art 597 Project (for studio); or Art 598 

Thesis (for art history) 3 or 6 

Total 30 


182 Art 


The M. A. study plan must be completed with a B average, and all 
courses in the area of concentration be completed with grades of 
B or better. Every graduate student is required to demonstrate 
writing ability commensurate with the baccalaureate degree. 
Please refer to the section on Graduate Regulations for further 
clarification. The Department of Art requires the studio candi- 
date for the Master of Arts in Art to exhibit the project in one of 
the department’s graduate galleries prior to graduation. The art 
history candidate is required to submit a written thesis based on a 
specific topic of research. 

For further information consult the graduate program adviser and 
read the University Graduate Regulations section of this catalog. 

MASTER OF FINE ARTS IN ART 

The Master of Fine Arts in Art features a rigorous studio program 
for the seriously committed, responsible and talented student. 
The curriculum and faculty challenge the students to focus on the 
goal of becoming professional artists. 

The M.F.A. program provides in-depth study within a 60-unit 
approved study plan in the following areas of concentration: ( I ) 
design (including graphic design, illustration, environmental de- 
sign, and exhibition design); (2) ceramics (including glass); (3) 
crafts (including fibers, jewelry/metalsmithing, and woodwork- 
ing/furniture); (4) sculpture; (5) drawing, painting, and print- 
making; and (6) creative photography. 

Admission Requirements 
1. Conditionally classified standing: 

a. a baccalaureate degree in art with the same concentration 
as the graduate degree objective from an accredited insti- 
tution, or 24 upper division units in art, 18 of which must 
be in the concentration completed with grades of B or 
better. Applicants are advised that most upper-division 
courses require lower-division prerequisites. 

b. a minimum grade-point average of 2. 5 in the last 60 units 
attempted and have been in good standing at the last 
college attended. 

c. participate in comprehensive portfolio review: held semi- 
annually, the comprehensive portfolio review is an evalu- 
ation of the candidate by a committee comprised of facul- 
ty teaching in the area of concentration. The committee 
reviews the student’s creative work, statement of purpose, 
academic and other relevant qualifications. Procedures, 
dates, and appointment times are available through the 
art department graduate office. 

If the student’s portfolio is not adequate, the applicant 
could still be recommended for conditionally classified 
standing by the faculty comprehensive review commit- 
tee. However, the comprehensive portfolio review must 
be repeated. 


d. Conditionally classified students may enroll in graduate 
courses with the exception of Art 5(X)A, B; 5 1 1 , 5 1 2, 597 ; 
and 598. 

2. Classified standing: 

The same requirements as a. and b. for conditionally classified 
standing plus: 

a. pass comprehensive portfolio review. 

b. form a graduate committee. 

c. develop an approved study plan. 

Study Plan 

The M.F.A. degree program requires 60 units of graduate study 
approved by the student’s graduate committee and the dean of 
graduate studies. The study plan must be completed with a grade- 
point average of 3.0 or better. The courses in the concentration 
must be completed with a grade of “B” or better. The 60 unit 
study plan is distributed as follows: 


Areas Units 

Theory, criticism: Art 500A, 5(X)B 6 

History 9 

Area of concentration 24 

Electives in art 12 

Independent study: research 3 

Project 6 

Total 60 


Master of Fine Arts Project 

The M.F.A. project exhibition constitutes a professional one- 
person art exhibit. It is installed in one of the department’s 
graduate galleries and announced for public view by the student 
as the final phase of the M.F.A. program requirements. 

The Department of Art is nationally accredited at the highest 
level of quality and professionalism (Division 1) by the National 
Association of Schools of Art and Design. For further details on 
the comprehensive portfolio review, communicate with the grad- 
uate coordinator or graduate secretary in the art department. 
Visual Arts 102 (714/773-3471). 

POSTBACCALAUREATE UNCLASSIFIED 
Students who do not have the prerequisites to qualify for the 
graduate program may apply to the university as a postbaccalaur- 
eate-unclassified student. Typically, students in this category 
have a bachelor’s degree in art but need to work on the prerequi- 
sites for a different concentration or did not major in art and must 
work on courses for the 24 upper division art units requirement. 
To qualify for admission an applicant must hold a baccalaureate 
degree from an accredited institution, have attained a grade- 


Art 1 83 


p)oint average of at least 2.5 in the last 60 units attempted and 
have been in good standing at the last college attended. AdmiS' 
sion with postbacca laureate standing does not constitute admis' 
sion to the art graduate program or graduate degree curricula. 

CERTIFICATE IN MUSEUM STUDIES 

Courses leading to the certificate are designed to educate stu- 
dents in museum practices in preparation for entry into the muse- 
um profession. The curriculum includes instruction in the his- 
torical development and philosophical basis of collections, exhi- 
bitions and their design, and curatorship. A museum internship 
is required. The certificate in museum studies may be undertaken 
as a self-contained program or may be taken in conjunction with 
the Master of Arts in Art degree or the Master of Fine Arts in Art 
degree or, by special permission, with other graduate degrees in 
the university. (For an M.A. or M.F.A. in Art degree with an 
exhibition design emphasis see M.A. and M.F.A. emphases un- 
der the design concentration.) 

Prerequisites 

1. B.A. in Art or other major by special permission 

2. Specific course prerequisites: 

a. 12 units in upper-division art history 

b. 6 units in graphic design and exhibition design 

c. 3 units of advanced writing (Communications 435 Edito- 
rial and Critical Writing; or Communications 362 Public 
Relations Writing; or English 301 Advanced College 
Writing) 

d. 3 units of beginning accounting 
Study Plan 

The certificate program requires 24 units. The 24 units are dis- 
tributed as follows: 

Units 


Art 464 Museum Conservation 3 

Art 481 Seminar in Art History 3 

Art 483D Exhibition Design 3 

Art 495 Internship in Art 3 

Art 501 Curatorship 3 

Art 503D Exhibition Design 6 

Course in museum education 3 

Total 24 


For further information, consult the Department of Art. 


Art Courses 

100 Exploratory Course in Art (3) 

Use of a variety of art materials, processes and concepts. Field 
trips required. Not open to art majors for credit except by permis- 
sion of Art Department. (6 hours activity) 

101 Introduction to Art (3) 

Historical and contemporary art forms of painting, sculpture, 
architecture and design. Field trips required. Not open to art 
majors for credit except by permission of Art Department. 

103 Two-dimensional Design (3) 

Materials, concepts and elements of two-dimensional visual or- 
ganization. (6 hours activity) (CAN ART 14) 

104 Three-dimensional Design (3) 

Materials, concepts and elements of three-dimensional visual 
organization. (6 hours activity) (CAN ART 16) 

106 A Beginning Ceramics (3) 

Form as related to ceramic materials, tools, processes. Kiln load- 
ing and firing, hand building, wheel throwing and raku. Instruc- 
tional fee. (9 hours laboratory) (CAN ART 6) 

106B Beginning Ceramics (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 106A. Form as related to ceramics. Glaze 
batching and its application, and the presentation of ceramic 
technique. Instructional fee. (9 hours laboratory) 

107 A Beginning Drawing (3) 

The traditional and contemporary use of drawing materials inte- 
grated with visual experiences and concepts. (6 hours activity) 
(CAN ART 8) 

107B Beginning Painting (3) 

The traditional and contempc^rary use of painting materials inte- 
grated with visual experiences and concepts. (6 hours activity) 

117 Life Drawing ( 1 ) 

The live model. May be repeated to a maximum of 4 units. 
Duplicate enrollment of this coures within the same semester is 
permissible. (3 hours activity for each unit) 

123 A Descriptive Drawing (3) 

Descriptive drawing, rendering techniques and theories repre- 
senting forms of nature. (6 hours activity) 

123B Descriptive Drawing (3) 

The use of linear perspective with lights and shadows to correctly 
describe fabricated and mechanical forms. (6 hours activity) 

201A,B Art and Civilization (3,3) 

The ideas, forms and styles of the visual arts as they developed in 
various cultures from prehistoric time to the present. (201 A = 
CAN ART 2. 201B = CAN ART 4) 


184 Art 


205 A Beginning Crafts (3) 

Traditional and contemporary concepts and processes with em- 
phasis on design principles in the development of esthetic forms 
based on function. (9 hours laboratory) 

205B Beginning Crafts (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104 and 205 A. Art 104 may be taken 
concurrently. The development of esthetic forms based on func- 
tion, with emphasis on design principles and the creative use of 
hand tools and power equipment. (9 hours labc^ratory) 

207 A, B Drawing and Painting (Experimental Methods and 
Materials) (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 117, 107A,B or equivalents. Traditional and 
contemporary methods and materials. (6 hours activity) 

213A Beginning Environmental Design (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 104. Design methodology and com- 
munication skills in the environmental design field. (6 hours 
activity) 

213B Beginning Environmental Design (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104; 2 13A or equivalent. Design method- 
ology and communication skills in the environmental design 
field. (6 hours activity) 

216A,B Beginning Sculpture (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Art 104. The creative use of wood and metal, power 
equipment and hand tools. Instructional fee. (9 hours laboratory) 
(216A = CAN ART 12) 

223 A Lettering and Typography (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 103. The history, design and use of letter forms; 
the rendering and use of hand- lettered forms. Instruction fee. (6 
hours activity) 

223B Lettering, Typography and Rendering (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 22 3 A. The history, design and use of letter 
forms; techniques for rough and comprehensive layouts and in- 
troduction to computer graphics. Instruction fee. (6 hours activ- 
ity) 

238 Photo Visual Concepts (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 103. An Introductory photography course for 
art majors. Course content includes the study of photographic 
vision and design, visual conceptualization and examination of 
the qualities of light through the use of instant and automatic 
cameras. 

247 Beginning Printmaking (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 107A,B. An exploration of woodcut, linocut 
and monoprint as a medium of personal expression. Instructional 
fee. (9 hours laboratory) 


300 Writing in the Visual Arts (3) 

Principles, practices and objectives of writing in the visual arts. 
Includes descriptive, analytical and expressive essays; project and 
grant proposals; artist’s statements; resumes; and professional cor- 
respondence. Satisfies the classroom portion of the upper-divi- 
sion writing requirements for art majors. 

301 Ancient Art (3) 

The developments in art from the Paleolithic to late antiquity. 

302 Medieval Art (3) 

The developments in art from the late antiquity through the 
Gothic. 

303 Architectural and Interior Rendering (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 123B or consent of instructor. Rendering of 
architectural, interior and landscape environments, utilizing me- 
chanical perspective and contemporary design drawing delinea- 
tion techniques. Mixed media. (6 hour activity) 

305A,B Advanced Crafts (3,3) 

Prerequisites: 205A and 205B. Advanced concepts and processes 
in the development of esthetic forms based on function, empha- 
sizing individual growth and personal expression. (9 hours labo- 
ratory) 

306 A, B Advanced Ceramics (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Art 103, 104 and 106A,B or consent of instructor. 
Forms and the creative use of ceramic concepts and materials; 
design, forming, glazing and firing. Instructional fee. (9 hours 
laboratory) • 

307 A,B Drawing and Painting (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 107A,B, 117, 207A,B or equivalents. The 
concepts, materials and activities of drawing and painting, em- 
phasizing individual growth, plan and craft. (6 hours activity) 

310A,B Watercolor (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Art 107A,B or equivalents. An exploration of wa- 
tercolor media related to varied subject matter and design appli- 
cations. Includes field trip activity. Provides skills and concepts 
useful for school art programs. (6 hours activity) 

311 Foundations of Modem Art (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. The history of painting and 
sculpture from the French Revolution to the end of the 1 9th 
century. 

312 Modem Art (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. The history of painting, 
graphic arts and sculpture from late 19th century to World War ll. 

313A Environmental Design: Unit Concepts (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104 and 213A,B. Environmental design 
projects and the study of unit concepts. (6 hours activity) 


Art 185 


313B Environmental Design: Systems Concepts (3) 
Prerequisite: Art 313A. Environmental design projects and sys- 
terns concepts. (6 hours activity) 

315A.B Jewelry (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 205A and 305A. Art 305A may be taken 
concurrently. Design and creation of jewelry. (9 hours lab) 

316A,B Sculpture (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 104 and 216A. Sculptural materials and prO' 
cesses. Instructional fee. (9 hours laboratory) 

317 Life Studies (3) 

Prerequisites: three units lower division life drawing. Drawing, 
painting and sculpture from the live model. (9 hours lab) 
317A Drawing and Painting 
317B Drawing and Painting 
317C Sculpting 

318A Drawing and Pointing the Head and Hands (3) 
Prerequisites: Art 107A,B and Art 117. Specialized problems in 
construction and anatomy of the human head and hands, and 
their principal use in drawing, painting and illustration. (9 hours 
laboratory) 

318B Portraiture (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 107A, 107B, 3 units of Art 117. Comprehen' 
sive problems in composition, concept, content and execution of 
portraits. 

319 Landscape Painting (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 107 A and B. Contemporary concepts and 
techniques of painting the landscape. 

320 History of Architecture Before the Modem Era (3) 

A study of selected monuments from Stonehenge through the 
late Baroque. Interrelationship between patronage, style, func- 
tion, structural principles and technological developments. 

323 A,B Graphic Design (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 223 A and 223 B or consent of instructor. 
Development and projection of ideas in relation to the technical, 
esthetic and psychological aspects of advertising art. Instruc- 
tional fee. (6 hours activity) 

324 Glass Casting (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 104 or consent of instructor. Hot glass 
laboratory equipment and casting techniques. Designing molds 
and handling hot glass. Instructional fee. (9 hours laboratory) 

326A,B Ceramic Sculpture (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104, 117 or consent of instructor. Devel- 
opment of ceramic technology into individual sculptural forms 
and techniques. Instructional fee. (9 hours laboratory) 


327 Mural Piiinting ( 1 ) 

Prerequsites: Art 107 A and Art 107B or equivalents. A brief 
history of important muralists, their contributions and methods. 
Topics include: narrative murals; symbolic murals, ephemeral 
murals, contemporary graffiti, billboard art, drawing systems and 
technical information. Repeatable once for credit. (9 hours lab) 

330 Fibers and Papers (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 104, or consent of instructor. The use 
of fibers and papers as an art form. (9 hours laboratory) 

333 A Environmental Design (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 213 A, B. Aesthetics of space and form concepts 
as design determinants. (6 hours laboratory) 

333B Environmental Design (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 333A. Aesthetics of space and form as design 
determinants; experimental design concepts and methods. (6 
hours activity) 

336A,B Casting Techniques and Theories of Cast 
Sculpture (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Art 316A. Waxing, molding and metal casting 
techniques. Aluminum and bronze and the lost wax process. (9 
hours laboratory) 

338A Creative Photography (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 103 or its equivalent. The photographic media 
in personal expression. Historical attitudes and processes; new 
materials and contemporary esthetic trends. Field trips required. 
Instructional fee. (9 hours laboratory) 

338B Creative Photography (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 338A. The photographic medium in personal 
expression. Historical and new processes. Field trips required. 
Instructional fee. (9 hours laboratory) 

339A Photo- Illustration (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 338A. The use of specialized photo- 
graphic techniques such as lighting, camera position, color and 
motion for solutions to illustration problems of narration, visual 
description, juxtaposition and imagery. Iristructional fee. (9 
hours laboratory) 

339B Photo Illustration (3) 

Prerequisites: 338A and 339A, or consent of instructor. Con- 
cepts and attitudes in the field of photo illustration. Illustration 
problems using narrative, visual description, juxtaposition and 
imager>’. Instructional fee. 

347 A Printmaking Etching (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 107A,B, 117, and 247. Concept development, 
exploration and materials involved in printmaking techniques. 
Includes etching, aquatint. Instructional fee. (9 hours labora- 
tory) 


1 86 Art 


347B Printmaking Lithography (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 107 A, B, 117, and 247. Concept development, 
exploration and materials involved in lithography. Instructional 
fee. (9 hours laboratory) 

348 Artists* Books (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 107A or 247, or consent of instructor. 
Personal vision and concepts applied to the book form as art; the 
history and aesthetics of artists’ books. 

355 A, B Fibers: Fabric Printing and Dyeing (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 107 A or B or consent of instructor. De- 
sign concepts and printing and dyeing processes as applied to 
fabrics. (9 hours laboratory) 

357 Woodcuts and Monotypes (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 107 A and Art 107B or equivalents. The explo- 
ration of the woodcut and monotype as a means of personal 
expression. Emphasis on traditional as well as contemporary ma- 
terials and trends. Course may be repeated once for credit. (9 
hours lab) 

363A,B Illustration (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 107A,Band 117. Story, book, magazine, 
and film illustration. (6 hours activity) 

364A,B Stained Glass (3,3) 

Leaded and stained glass; individual exploration, growth, plan- 
ning and craftsmanship. (6 hours activity) 

365 A,B Fibers: Weaving (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 104 or 205A,B or consent of instruc- 
tor. The use of the loom and weaving processes to design and 
create fiber and fabric art forms. (9 hours laboratory) 

371 History and Theory of Design (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 201 A and B. The chronology of design in 
relation to the philosophical and theoretical ideologies which 
have, along with related socio-political and economic condi- 
tions, influenced its implementation and development. 

380 Art and Child Development (3) 

Art concepts, materials and processes as they relate to child 
development. (6 hours activity) 

413 History of Contemporary Art (3) 

Prerequisites: 312 and 46 IB or consent of instructor. A historical 
perspective of contemporary art beginning with major develop- 
ments in Europe and the United States in the 1950’s. Emphasis 
on new materials, new exhibition methods, and in particular the 
major conceptual issues raised by individual artists and groups. 


420 History of Modern Architecture (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 201 B (art majors) or Art 101 (non-art majors). 
Development of modern architecture. The interrelationship 
among architecture, technology and society, from the industrial 
and political revolutions of the 18th century to the present. 
Exploration of national differences and various approaches to city 
planning. 

423 Computer Animation (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 313A or 323 A or 363 or equivalent. The 
exploration of advanced computer application in the creation of 
visual images and concepts through three-dimensional modeling 
and animation. Field trips required. Instructional fee. 

424A,B Glass Forming (3,3) 

Prerequisitesf Art 103, 104, 324 or consent of instructor. The 
chemistry, handling and manipulation of glass and its tools and 
equipment for the ceramic artist. Instructional fee. (9 hours 
laboratory) 

431 Renaissance Art (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 20 IB (art majors) or Art 101 (non-art majors). 
Painting, sculpture and architecture from the late 13th to 16th 
century in Italy. 

432 Baroque Art (3) 

Painting, sculpture and architecture of the 17th century in Eu- 
rope. 

438A,B Creative Color Photography (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 338A,B. Concepts and techniques in creative 
color photography. Historical attitudes and contemporary trends. 
Personal involvement with the medium. Instructional fee re- 
quired. Instructional fee. (9 hours laboratory) 

441A,B Media Exploration for Teaching Art (3,3) 
Prerequisites: Art 103, 104, 107A,B, 205 A or consent of instruc- 
tor. Exploring the art media used in secondary school art pro- 
grams today. Materials for secondary art curriculum. Two and 
three dimensional media in subject matter applications. (6 hours 
activity) 

443 Studio Graphics (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 223 A, B and 323 A, B. Admission by interview 
and portfolio review. Studio production of graphics for the 
School of the Arts, including printed mailers, posters, booklets, 
catalogs, advertisements. Students experience designer/client re- 
lationships and translate concepts into production. (9 hours ac- 
tivity) May be repeated once for credit. 

448 Special Studies: Artists* Books and Art (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 102, 107 A, or 347 A/348 or consent of instruc- 
tor. A studio art course for advanced students who want to con- 
tinue to explore the book form as it relates to their personal 
aesthetic goals. 


Art 187 


453 A, B Exhibition Design (3»3) 

Technical and esthetic experience in problem-solving exhibition 
design concepts, evaluation and design analysis. The production 
of exhibitions in the University Art Gallery, their selection, 
design, installation, lighting and supportive interpretive materi- 
al. (More than 9 hours laboratory) 

460B Pre-Columbian Art (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 201 A, B or consent of instructor. An introduc- 
tion to the art and architecture of Meso and South America from 
the early formative stage to the Spanish Conquest. Emphasis on 
esthetic achievement with varying contexts of pre-Columbian 
culture. 

461 American Art: 20th Century (3) 

Painting and sculpture in America during the 20th century. The 
role of the visual arts in helping to define, reflect and challenge 
American values and institutions. 

464 Museum Conservation (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 453A, six units of art history or anthropology. 
The examination of the preservation of objects; the history, role 
and principles of conservation within a museum context. Three 
combined sessions at Conservation Center, LACMA; Hunting- 
ton Library; J. Paul Getty Museum; and Museum of Cultural 
History, UCLA. 

466 Museum Education (3) 

Prerequisite: six units 3(X)-4C)0 Art History or equivalent. History 
of museum education, its philosophy and issues. Relationship 
with other museum departments, outreach programs, new tech- 
nology. Events organization, writing interpertive materials, bud- 
gets and grants, conducting tours. Lectures, field trips and guest 
speakers. 

470 History and Esthetics of Photography (3) 

Prerequisites: 201 A, B. Photography from ancient optical obser- 
vations through 19th-century invention to 20th-century accep- 
tance as an art form. Esthetic movement and influential innova- 
tors. Lectures, slides and class discussion. 

475 Professional Practices in the Arts (3) 

Prerequisite: Art major with junior or above standing. Practices 
unique to the visual arts, including an overview of changing 
concepts in the art market, traditional roles in cultural context, 
portfolio development, strategies for protecting ideas and avoid- 
ing abuses, and long term professional development. 

480T Selected Topics in Art History (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 201 A or B and consent of instructor. Detailed 
study of the work of individual artists, patronage in particular 
places, specific pictorial, sculptural and architectural programs or 
art history periods. Topics will be listed in the class schedule. 
Repeatable if topic is different. 

481 Seminar in Art History (3) 

Prerequisite: six units upper-division art history or equivalent. 
Study and evaluation in one area of art history and appreciation. 
May be repeated up to a maximum of 6 units. 


483 Special Studies in Design (3) 

Prerequisite: a minimum of six upper-division units in area em- 
phasis or equivalent. Maximum of 12 units, but no more than 3 
units in any one area in a single semester. 

483A Graphic Design Instructional fee. (6 hours activity) 
483B Environmental Design (6 hours activity) 

483C Illustrations (6 hours activity) 

483D Exhibition Design (More than 9 hours laboratory) 

483E Computer Assisted Graphics (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 313A or Art 323 A or Art 363 A and consent of 
instructor. Theory and practice of design using the computer. 
Students will explore the numerous applications of the computer 
through lecture demonstration, studio/laboratory experience, 
guest speakers and field trips. Maximum of 12 units. Instructional 
fee. 

484 Special Studies in Ceramics (3) 

Prerequisite: a minimum of six upper-division units in ceramics. 
Maximum of 12 units, but no more than three units in any one 
area in a single semester. Instructional fee. (9 hours laboratory) 
484A Ceramics 
484B Glass Forming 
484C Glass Casting 

485 Special Studies in Crafts (3) 

Prerequisite: a minimum of six upper-division units in designated 
area or consent of instructor. Maximum of 12 units, but no more 
than three units in any one area in a single semester. (9 hours 
laboratory) 

485A Jewelry 

485B General Crafts 

485C Metalsmithing 

48 5 D Fibers — Weaving 

485E Fibers — Fabric Printing and Dyeing 

485F Fibers and Fabrics 

486 Special Studies in Sculpture (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 316A,B and consent of instructor. Maximum 
of 12 units but no more than three units in a single semester. (9 
hours laboratory) 

486 A Modeling and Fabrication Instructional fee. 

486B Casting 

487 Special Studies in Drawing and Painting and 
Printmaking (3) 

Prerequisites: a minimum of six upper-division units in drawing 
and painting, or consent of instructor. Maximum of 12 units, but 
no more than three units in any one area in a single semester. 
487 A Painting (6 hours activity) 

487B Life Studies: Drawing and/or Painting (9 hours labora- 
tory) 

487C Drawing (6 hours activity) 

487D Printmaking Instructional fee. (9 hours laboratory) 


1 88 Art 


489 Special Studies in Creative Photography (3) 

Prerequisite: a minimum of six upper'division units in photogra' 
phy courses or equivalent. Photography as personal expression. 
Maximum of 12 units but no more than three units in a single 
semester. Instructional fee. (9 hours laboratory) 

491 Professional Seminar (3) 

Guest speakers from professions in the visual arts. A lecture/ 
discussion seminar relevant to current issues and concepts in 
making and experiencing art. Topics will differ each semester. For 
the senior and graduate art major. May be repeated up to a 
maximum of 6 units. 

495 Internship in Art (3) 

Prerequisite: senior standing as a declared BFA in Art major. 
Work in a specific art field in business or industry. 

499 Independent Research (1-3) 

Open to advanced students in art with consent of department 
chair and written consent of instructor. May be repeated for 
credit. 

500A Graduate Seminar in Major Field (3) 

Prerequisite: classified standing. Problems and issues in art. Intel- 
lectual clarification and verbal articulation of individual intent as 
an artist. Oral and written material in support of the master’s 
project, (with 5(X)B meets graduate level writing requirement). 

500B Graduate Seminar in Major Field (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 500A. Directed research in the area of major 
emphasis. Oral and written material on historical backgrounds 
and developments in art as they relate to individual intent as an 
artist (stated in Art 5(X)A) and in support of the master’s project, 
(with 500A meets graduate level writing requirement) 

501 Curatorship (3) 

Prerequisites: B. A. in art, anthropology or other major by special 
permission, and Art 481 and 466. The curator collects, cares for 
and studies objects. 

503 Graduate Problems in Design (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Planning, development and 
evaluation of individual projects listed below. Maximum of 12 
units in each area, but no more than three units in any one area 
in a single semester. 

503A Graphic Design (6 hours activity) 

503B Environmental Design (6 hours activity) 

503C Illustrations (6 hours activity) 

503D Exhibition Design (More than 9 hours laboratory) 

504 Graduate Problems in Ceramics (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Planning, development and 
evaluation of individual projects in ceramics, glass forming and 
glass casting. Maximum of 12 units in each area but no more than 
three units in a single semester. Instructional fee. (9 hours labora- 
tory) 


504A Ceramics 
504B Glass Forming 
504C Glass Casting 

505 Graduate Problems in Crafts (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Planning, development and 
evaluation of individual projects listed below. Maximum of 12 
units in each area but no more than three units in a single 
semester. (9 hours laboratory) 

505A Jewelry 

505B General Crafts 

505D Fibers Weaving, Fibers and Fabrics 

506 A, B Graduate Problems in Sculpture (3,3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Planning, development and 
evaluation of individual projects in sculpture. Maximum of 12 
units in each area but no more than three units in a single 
semester. Instructional fee. (9 hours laboratory) 

507 Graduate Problems in Drawing, Painting and 
Printmaking (3) 

Prerequisite: 12 units of upper-division drawing and painting. 
Planning, development and evaluation of individual projects list- 
ed below. Maximum of 12 units in each area but no more than 
three units in a single semester. 

507A Painting (6 hours activity) 

507B Life Drawing (9 hours laboratory) 

507C Drawing (6 hours activity) 

507D Printmaking Instructional fee. (9 hours laboratory) 

508A,B Graduate Problems in Creative Photography (3,3) 
Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. Planning, development and 
evaluation of individual projects in photography. Maximum of 12 
units in each area, but no more than three units in a single 
semester. (9 hours laboratory) 

511 Seminar on the Content & Method of Art History (3) 
Prerequisite: Art 481 and/or consent of instructor. Methods of 
research, analysis and theories of art historical scholarship. May 
be repeated up to a maximum of 6 units. 

512 Seminar on Selected Topics in Art History (3) 
Prerequisite: appropriate upper-division Art course approved by 
instructor and Art 511. Analysis and evaluation of specific works 
and their historical significance including cultural, social and 
economic circumstances. May be repeated up to a maximum of 6 
units. 

597 Project (3 or 6) 

Prerequisites: Art 500A,B, written consent of instructor and 
recommendation of the student’s graduate committee. Art 500B 
may be taken concurrently with Art 597 on approval of instruc- 
tor. Development and presentation of a creative project in the 
concentration beyond regularly offered coursework. 


Art 189 


598 Thesis (3 or 6) 

Prerequisites: Art 511, 512, written consent of instructor and 
recommendation of the student’s graduate committee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1'3) 

Open to graduate students in art with consent of department chair 
and written consent of instructor. May be repeated for credit. 


Art Education Courses 

442 Teaching Art in the Secondary School (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. Objectives, meth' 
ods and practices for teaching art in secondary schools. Required 
before student teaching of majors in art for the single subject 
teaching credential. 


449E Externship in Secondary Teaching (3) 

For candidates who have declared for the Ryan Act credential. 
See description and prerequisites under Division of Teacher Edu' 
cation. Offered every fall semester. 


4491 Internship in Secondary Teaching (10) 

For candidates who have declared for the Ryan Act credential. 
See description and prerequisites under Division of Teacher Edu' 
cation. Cbncurrent enrollment in Art Education 449S required. 
Offered every spring semester. 


449S Seminar in Secondary Teaching (2) 

Seminar for student teachers in art. The practical aspects of art 
instruction in secondary schools. Concurrent enrollment in Art 
Education 4491 required. Offered every spring semester. 





190 Art 


Department of Music 



Department Chair: Benton Minor 
Vice Chair: Gordon Paine 
Department Office: Performing Arts 262 

Programs Offered 
Bachelor of Arts in Music 

Liberal Arts 

Music Education 

Music History and Theory 

Bachelor of Music 

Commercial Music 

Composition 

Instrumental 

Keyboard 

Voice 

Accompanying 
Minor in Music 
Master of Arts in Music 

Music History and Literature 
Music Education 

Master of Music 

Performance 

Theory'Composition 

Single Subject (Secondary) Credential 
Faculty 

Martha Baker, Marc Dickey, Mitchell Fennell, Mark 
Goodrich, David Grimes, Su Harmon, Carole Harrison, 
Burton Karson, Leo Kreter, Gary Maas, Todd Miller, Benton 
Minor, Gordon Paine, Lloyd Rodgers, Ernest Salem, Preston 
Stedman, Robert Stewart, Laurance Timm, Rodger Vaughan, 
Robert Watson, Vance Wolverton 


Music 191 


INTRODUCTION 

Music is one of the most rewarding of all human endeavors, and 
the faculty and students in the Department of Music share a deep 
love for their art and a common desire to achieve excellence in it. 
The department offers a wide spectrum of degree programs and 
options with an overall emphasis in the area of performance. The 
curriculum provides basic preparation for careers in music or 
further graduate study, and is designed to provide a balanced 
education in the many facets of musical experience. Artist'teach- 
ers offer instruction in all areas of performance, while practicing 
composers and theorists teach courses in theory, and active musi- 
cologists provide instruction in history and literature. It is the 
goal of the department to develop each student’s musical and 
intellectual potential to the highest level of individual capability. 
The Department of Music is fully accredited by the National 
AsscKiation of Schcx^ls of Music, in addition to the overall uni- 
versity accreditation by the Western Association of Schools and 
Qilleges. 

Credential Information 

TTie Department of Music offers course work leading to a CSUF 
Waiver Program in Music for the Ryan Single Subject Teaching 
Credential. For details, contact the Admission to Teacher Educa- 
tion Office and the ctwrdinator of music education. 

The Department of Music offers supplementary authorizations for 
the Ryan Single Subject Teaching Credential in Instrumental 
Music and in VtKal Music. A supplementary authorization in 
music is offered for the Ryan Multiple Subject Teaching Creden- 
tial. For details contact the Office of Admission to Teacher 
Education. 

Advisement 

All music majors are required to obtain advisement each semes- 
ter. Area coordinators serve as advisers, and students are assigned 
according to their area of concentration. 

Requirements of the Music Department 

1 . All entering music majors are enrolled in the Bachelor of Arts 
degree program for at least the first semester of residence. 
Students may request a change in their degree objective to the 
Bachelor of Music upc^n completion of at least one semester of 
course work at the university, successful completion of a jury 
examination, and recommendation of the faculty in the ap- 
propriate area of concentration. Enrollment in the Bachelor 
of Music program is limited. 

2. Upon entering the university as a new music major or upon 
officially changing to a major in music, each student will present 
an audition in the appropriate principal performance area (in- 
strument or voice) and a placement audition for class piano. 

3. All students must pass proficiency examinations in traditional 
harmony (sight-singing, dictation, keyboard, and paperwork) 
and piano before being approved for graduation. Transfer stu- 
dents will fulfill the theory requirement by passing the en- 


trance examination in theory; first-time students and transfers 
with insufficient preparation at entrance will normally take 
the examination in Music 211. The piano-proficiency re- 
quirement may be met by completion of Music 282 B with a 
passing grade. Students whose principal p)erformance area is 
piano satisfy the piano proficiency requirement upon reaching 
3(X) level in performance. 

4. Each music major must declare a single principal performance 
area, which must be approved by the faculty of that area upon 
completion of the entrance audition. In order to be approved 
for graduation, each student must achieve at least the 300 
level of proficiency in the principal performance area. B.A. 
Liberal Arts-option students who elect project alternative 2 
(Music 497: Project) need reach only the 200 level. 

5. Each music major is required to present one or more recitals or a 
project appropriate to the degree program before being approved 
for graduation. The project option is available only in the Liber- 
al Arts and Music History and Theory options of the Bachelor of 
Arts degree. Recitals at the 300 level of performance are desig- 
nated Music 398; recitals at the 400 level of performance are 
designated Music 498. See the sections below on the Liberal 
Arts and Music History and Theory options for recital/project 
information applicable to those degrees. 

6. Undergraduate music majors are required to participate in a 
major performance ensemble (Music 361) and complete it 
with a passing grade each semester of residence as follows: 

a. Students who declare wind or percussion as the principal 
performance area must register for band; students who 
declare a string instrument as the principal performance 
area must register for orchestra; students who declare 
voice as the principal performance area must register for 
chorus. (Bachelor of Music students in voice who have 
reached the 4(X) level may elect to substitute 361 D, Opera 
Theatre.) A student whose principal |:>erformance area is 
keyboard or classical guitar must register for one of the 
abxne major performance ensembles, according to the 
student’s qualifications and subject to audition. 

b. A music major admitted into the Bachelor of Music pro- 
gram, whose senior recital instrument is keyboard or clas- 
sical guitar and who has participated in a major perfor- 
mance ensemble for at least five semesters (a minimum of 
two semesters at California State University Fullerton), 
may thereafter substitute chamber music and/or small per- 
formance ensembles (Mu 362, 363, 386) to satisfy the 
departmental major performance ensemble (Mu 361) 
requirement. 

c. The educational purpose of the requirement that all music 

majors participate in an appropriate major performance 
ensemble during each semester of residence is to 


192 Music 


permit each student to experience the highest level of 
ensemble music-making commensurate with the student’s 
skill. To this end, the CSUF band/orchestra and choir 
programs are of the traditional graded structure. Universi- 
ty Singers (36 IE), Wind Ensemble (36 IF) and Symphony 
Orchestra (361 A) are for the more advanced students; 
University Choir (361 B), Symphonic Band (361C) and 
Women’s Choir (36 IW) are for students of less skill or 
experience. Placement in bands, orchestra and choirs 
will be based on student ability as determined by the 
directors of those ensembles. Music majors will be as- 
signed to the ensemble for which they are best qualified. 
A student does not have the option of satisfying the 
requirements for participation in a major performance 
ensemble by enrolling in an ensemble intended for those 
of less ability or experience. 

7. Applied-music study in the principal performance area is re- 
quired as stipulated under the requirements for each degree 

program. The following conditions apply: 

a. If a student pursuing the Bachelor of Arts degree (Music 
History and Theory) or the Bachelor of Music degree 
(Composition) reaches the 300 level in the principal per- 
formance area before the required units in applied music 
are completed. Music Department electives may be sub- 
stituted for the remaining applied music units. 

b. In addition to the four units of applied music required in 
the principal performance area. Bachelor of Music stu- 
dents in the Composition option must complete six units 
of applied composition (including the 498 recital) after 
taking Music 422. The 498 recital will consist of a presen- 
tation of the student’s own compositions. 

c. Students pursuing the Bachelor of Music degree in any 
option except composition must achieve the 300 level in 
performance before giving the 398 recital and 400 level in 
performance before giving the 498 recital. Specific infor- 
mation on jury-level criteria is available from the Music 
Department office. 

d. In order to qualify for state-funded applied music, an 
undergraduate student (with the exception of a student 
who is within six units of completing all degree require- 
ments) must be currently enrolled for a minimum of six 
units of music classes (including applied music), at least 
two units of which must be in an academic area of music 
(any course other than performing ensembles and applied 
music). In addition, the student must earn a passing grade 
in all music courses, be making satisfactory progress to- 
ward a degree, and be currently enrolled in the appropri- 
ate major performance ensemble, as stipulated in section 
6 above. If the student fails to complete with a passing 
grade either the required six units of music classes or the 
major performance ensemble, applied lessons will be 


withheld in the subsequent semester. Students are eligible 
for a maximum of three semesters of lessons at a given 
level of performance. 

e. Students in the B. A. program are eligible for a maximum 
of eight units of applied music (398 and 497 included). 
B.M. students are eligible for a maximum of 14 units (398 
and 498 included.) 

8. Senior transfer students or graduate students in music enter- 
ing to satisfy the legal waiver for teaching credentials, are 
expected to complete a minimum of one semester of upper- 
division course work in music with a GPA of at least 3.0 before 
they may be approved for admittance to teacher education. 
Required courses and competencies must be satisfied before 
the faculty committee will consider endorsing the student’s 
acceptance into the credential program. 

9. To be approved for graduation, a music major must maintain a 
2.5 GPA in all music coursework that is to be used to meet 
degree requirements. In addition a student must earn a grade 
of C or better in all music courses required for the Bachelor of 
Arts in Music or Bachelor of Music degree. 

10. All requests for exceptions to departmental or curricular 
requirements must be directed by petition to the department 
chair. 

MUSIC DEGREE PROGRAMS 

The Department of Music offers a variety of courses that lead to 
baccalaureate and graduate degrees in teaching and the profes- 
sions. The baccalaureate degree may be earned in either of two 
degree programs ( Bachelor of Arts and Bachelor of Music) . With- 
in these programs, a student will pursue a concentration in liberal 
arts, music history and theory, music education, performance, 
composition or accompanying. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN MUSIC 

The Bachelor of Arts in Music shall consist of no fewer than 50 
units of music, of which at least 29 shall be upper division (3(X) level 
and above). All Bachelor of Arts students must complete the basic 
requirements listed immediately below and must select and com- 
plete the requirements listed in one of three concentrations: Liberal 
Arts, Music History and TTieory or Music Education. 

Core Requirements 

Units 

Music theory (Music 111A,B; 211; 319; 320A 


or B) 14 

Music history and literature (Music 251; 

351A,B,C) 12 

Principal performance area (Applied Music) 4 

Major performance ensemble* 

(Music 361A,B,C,E,F,W) 4 

Total 34 


’Required for all music majors every semester of residence (see “Introduction," item 
6.a.) 


Music 193 


Liberal Arts Concentration 

This concentration allows a student to take an academic major in 
music without being involved in a program of professional prep- 
aration. The degree emphasis is historically the oldest such study 
plan in music in higher education and represents a liberal-arts 
response to the highly professional program of the Bachelor of 
Music degree. 

Units 


Core requirements for BA degree 34 

Music theory (Music 316 or 318, 323 or 422) 4 

Conducting (Music 382A or 383A) 2 

Senior project (Music 398 or 497) 1 

Music literature (Music 453A through 459A) 2 

Electives (minimum of 6 upper division; no more than 2 
units of Music 193-493) 7 

Total 50 


Senior Project 

Two alternatives are available to the student, each with a differ- 
ent focus and prerequisite: 

Alterruitwe I (Music 398: Recital): Prerequisite is achievement 
of 300 applied music level in the area of principal performance 
one semester before the semester in which the student plans to 
present the recital. The student will present a brief recital in a 
regular recital time or in the appropriate workshop (at faculty 
discretion). 

Alternative 2 (Music 497: Project): Prerequisite is achievement of 
2(X) applied music level tu>o semesters before the semester in which 
the student plans to present the project. The student will prepare a 
special project in the senior year which will culminate in a lecture, 
lecture-recital or other form of public presentation. To the greatest 
extent possible, this project should be an independent investigation 
into an area of special interest and should involve minimal faculty 
guidance. The public presentation will be evaluated by a faculty 
committee, as is the case with senior recitals, and must be approved 
by that committee prior to graduation. 

In the case of both alternatives, the recital or project will be 
included when calculating the student’s quota of state-funded 
private lessons. 

Music History and Theory Concentration 

This concentration is designed as a balanced program in music 
history and theory and provides suitable preparation for advanced 
degrees in theory, literature, or musicology. It also provides basic 
preparation for advanced study in other fields, such as musical 
acoustics, music therapy, ethnomusicology, library science in 
music, and music in industry and recreation. 


Students seeking the concentration in Music History and Theory 
must submit a paper to the music history or theory coordinator 
not later than the beginning of their junior year. Acceptance into 
the degree program is contingent on the submission of a satisfac- 
tory paper. 

Allied requirements for the Music History and Theory concen- 
tration: 

1. Twenty units in a secondary academic area (not music, but 
related to the student’s project or useful to prepare the student 
for future graduate work in music). The choice of a secondary 
academic area must be approved in writing by the coordina- 
tors of music history and theory. Suggested areas: art, English, 
theatre, history, physics (acoustics), anthropology, languages 
or computer science. 

2. Foreign language proficiency, preferably German, to be satis- 
fied by one of the following: 

a. Four years of study at the secondary school level, 

b. Passing an examination given by the Department of For- 
eign Languages and Literatures, or 

c. (Completing with a passing grade the second semester of 
the beginning university sequence of a foreign language. 

Units 


Core requirements for the Bachelor of Arts 34 

Music theory (Music 316, 419) 5 

Conducting or composition (Music 382A or 383A or 

422) 2 

Project-proposal preparation (Music 499) 1 

Music history or theory project (Music 497) 1 

Electives in music 7 

Total 50 


Music Education Concentration 
Piano Pedagogy Emphasis: 

The emphasis in piano pedagogy is designed to provide in-depth 
preparation for individual and group piano instruction and will 
not lead to teaching in the California public schools. 

Units 


Core requirements for Bachelor of Arts 34 

Keyboard Ensemble (363K) 1 

Applied Piano (393) 1 

Conducting (382A or 383A) 2 

Recital (398) 1 

Piano Literature and Interpretation (454A, B) 4 

Piano Pedagogy (467A,B,C)' 6 

Elective 1 

Total 50 


* Co-enrollment in Music 466 strongly advised. 


1 94 Music 


Instrumental, Vocal-Choral, General Music Emphases: 

The emphases in instrumental, vocal-choral and general music 
are designed to provide in-depth preparation for teaching in the 
California public schools under the provisions of the Teacher 
Preparation and Licensing Law of 1970 (Ryan Act). 


Instrumental Emphasis: Units 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Arts 34 

Orchestral instruments (Music 281B,P,S,W 4 

Music theory (Music 323) 2 

Conducting (Music 382A,B) 4 

Chamber Music (363) 4 

Recital (Music 398) 1 

Electives 1 

Total 50 

Vocal-Choral Emphasis: Units 

Core requirement for the Bachelor of Arts 34 

Orchestral Instruments (Music 281B,P,S,W) 4 

Conducting (Music 383 A, B) 4 

Literature and Pedagogy' (Music 453A or B and 468A) .... 4 

Chamber Music (Music 363) 2 

Recital (Music 398) 1 

Electives 1 

Total 50 

General Music Emphasis: Units 

Core requirements for Bachelor of Arts 34 

Orchestral Instruments (Music 281B,P,S,W) 4 

Conducting (Music 383A,B) 4 

Music and Child Development (Music 333) 3 

Public School Choral Materials (Music 354) 2 

Vocal Chamber Music (Music 363V) 1 

Recital (Music 398) 1 

Electives in music . 1 

Total 50 


Credential Information 

Students desiring a California teaching credential in music must 
complete the following courses prior to enrolling in the profes- 
sional education program as required by the Department of Sec- 
ondary Education. 


Instrumental Emphasis: Units 

Music Education 295 (1), 394A,B (2,2) 395A (1); 

Music 283 (l), 353 (2), 383A (2), 444 (2) 13 

Choral-Vocal Emphasis: 

Music Education 295 (1). 394B (2), 395B (1), 404 (3); 

Music 290 (1), 354 (2), 382A (2) 12 


General Music Emphasis: 

Music Education 295 (1), 394B (2), 395B (1), 404 (3); 

Music 290 (l), 468A(2) 10 

Students who wish to earn a single subject credential in Music in 
addition to a Bachelor of Arts with a Music Education concentra- 
tion must complete the following: 

Units 

Music Education 442 (3) Music Education 449E (3) and 
professional education courses Secondary Education 440F 


and 440S 12 

Music Education 4491 (Student teaching) and Music Educa- 
tion 449S 12 

Total 24 


Prior to admission to teacher education, the student must reach 
3(X) level in the principal performance area and pass functional 
examinations in keyboard and voice. The functional examina- 
tion requirements may also be met by completing Music 282B 
(piano) and Music 283B (voice) with minimum grade of B. 

BACHELOR OF MUSIC 

This degree program is designed to provide training for highly 
gifted students who show promise and capability of becoming 
professional performers and composers. 

The degree consists of 132 semester units. A minimum of 70 
semester units in music are required, at least 32 of which must be 
upper division. 

Core Requirements for the Bachelor of Music 

Units 


Music Theory (Music 111A,B; 211; 319; 320A 

or320B-) 14 

Music History and Literature (Music 251; 351A,B,C) .... 12 

Principal Performance Area (Applied Music) 6 

Major Performance Ensemble (Music 361)’ 4 

Recital (Music 498) 1 

Total 37 

Composition Concentration Units 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Music 37 

Music theory (Music 316; 318; 320A or Bt; 323; 419; 

422) 12 

Conducting (Music 382A or 383A) 2 

Applied composition 5 

Electives in music 14 

Total 70 


■Required of all music majors every semester of residence (see “Introduction,” item 
6.a.) 

tMusic 320A and 320B required in Concentration in Composition 


Music 195 


Instrumental Concentration 

Orchestral Instruments Emphasis: Units 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Music 37 

Music theory (Music 316, 323, 422) 6 

Principal performance area (Applied Music) 6 

Recital (Music 398) 1 

Conducting (Music 382 A, B) 4 

Chamber music (Music 362 and 363) 6 

Electives in music 10 

Total 70 

Classical Guitar Emphasis: Units 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Music 37 

Music theory (Music 316, 323, 422) 6 

Principal performance area (Applied Music) 6 

Recital (Music 398) 1 

Conducting (Music 382 A) 2 

Chamber music (Music 363G) 6 

Fingerboard skills (Music 385G) 2 

Guitar history and literature (Music 459A) 2 

Guitar pedagogy (Music 459B) 2 

Electives in music 6 

Total 70 

Keyboard Concentration Units 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Music 37 

Music theory (Music 316, 320A or B, 422) 4 

Music literature (Music 454A,B) 4 

Conducting (Music 382A or 383A) 2 

Recital (Music 398) 1 

Principal performance area (Applied Music) 6 

Chamber music (Music 362 or 363) 3 

Accompanying (Music 386) 1 

Pedagogy (Music 467A,B,C) 6 

Harpsichord or Organ class (Music 372 or 373) 1 

Electives in music 5 

Total 70 

Voice Concentration Units 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Music 37 

Music theory (Music 316, 422) 4 

Music literature (Music 456; 457A,B) 7 

Recital (Music 398) 1 

Principal performance area (Applied Music) 6 

Opera Theatre (Music 36 ID) 2 

Diction (Music 380A,B,C) 3 

Conducting (Music 383A) 2 

Pedagogy (Music 468 A, B) 4 

Electives in music 4 

Total 70 


Allied requirement for voice concentration: 

Proficiency in two foreign languages (to be chosen from French, 
German, and Italian), each to be satisfied by one of the follow* 
ing: 


a. Four years’ study of foreign language at the secondary school 
level, or 

b. Passing an examination given by the Department of Foreign 
Languages and Literatures, or 

c. Completing the second semester of the beginning university 
sequence of a foreign language. 


Accompanying Concentration Units 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Music 37 

Music theory (Music 316, 318, 422) 6 

Music literature (Music 457A) 2 

Principal performance area (Applied Music) 5 

Chamber music (Music 363) 2 

Harpsichord class (Music 372) 1 

Organ class (Music 373) 1 

Functional Skills (Music 385) 2 

Accompanying (Music 386) 2 

Conducting (Music 383 A) 2 

Diction (Music 380A,B,C) 3 

Recitals (Music 398, 498*) 2 

Electives in music 5 

Total 70 


*A total of two 498 recitals is required. The other is listed under “Core Require- 
ments." 


Commercial Music Concentration: 

Instrumental Emphasis Units 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Music 37 

Music Theory (Music 312A,B) 4 

History of American Commercial Music (Music 356) 3 

Principal Performance Area (Applied Music) 6 

Improvisation (Music 265A,B,C) 3 

Major Performance Ensemble (Music 361) 4 

Recital (398) 1 

Lab Band or Stage Band (Music 362L or 362S) 4 

Electives in Music 8 

Total 70 

Commercial Music Concentration: 

Composition*Arranging Emphasis Units 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Music 37 

Music Theory (Music 312A,B; Music 314A,B; 

Music 323) 10 * 

History of American Commercial Music (Music 356) 3 

Applied Composition/ Arranging 5 

Improvisation (Music 265 A) 1 

Major Performance Ensemble (Music 361) 4 

Lab Band or Stage Band (Music 362L or 362S) 4 

Recital (Music 398) 1 

Electives in Music 5 

Total 70 


196 Music 


MINOR IN MUSIC 

The minor in music may be used by persons whose majors are in 
other fields. A maximum of 14 lower-division units may be in- 
cluded in work counted toward the music minor. The minor 
requires a minimum preparation of 20 units as follows: 

Units 


Theory of music (selected from Music 101; 111A,B; 211; 
or any 300- or 400-level theory classes for which the 

student is qualified) 6 

Music history and literature (Music 1(X); 251; 350 or 
35 1 A, B,C; or courses at the 4(X)- or 500- level for which 

the student is qualified) 5-6 

Applied techniques (selected from Music 183, 184A,B; 
281B,P,S,W; 283A,B or any course in ensemble, con- 
ducting, piano, voice or orchestral instruments at the 
300- or 400-level for which the student is qualified) . 8-9 

Total 20 


MASTER OF MUSIC AND 
MASTER OF ARTS IN MUSIC 

Two graduate degrees in music are offered in the Department of 
Music: the Master of Music and the Master of Arts. Each degree 
seeks to serve a special group of graduate students. For those who 
intend to pursue advanced degrees beyond the master’s level, the 
Master of Music normally leads to the D.M.A. degree, and the 
Master of Arts to the Ph.D. or the Ed.D. 

Admission to Graduate Standing: Conditionally Classified 

All applicants admitted into the music program enter in condi- 
tionally classified graduate standing. University requirements in- 
clude: a baccalaureate from an accredited institution; a grade- 
point average of at least 2.5 in the last 60 semester units attempt- 
ed; and good standing at the last college attended and for foreign 
students, a minimum TOEFL score of 560. Each applicant must 
also present a satisfactory audition, submit an acceptable written 
essay in the area of specialization, and pass entrance exams in 
music theory, music history and writing. A student whose audi- 
tion is unsatisfactory or who fails to meet satisfactorily the en- 
trance exam requirements shall be removed from “conditionally 
classified” status. 

Graduate Standing: Classified 

A graduate student may apply for classified graduate standing 
upon attainment of the following prerequisites: (a) completion of 
all requirements for conditionally classified standing as described 
above; (b) a major in music (or the equivalent of a major; i.e., 29 
upper-division units in music) with a minimum grade-point aver- 
age of 3.0 in the major; and (c) satisfactory completion of Music 
5(X), Introduction to Graduate Study in Music. One objective of 
Music 5(X) is the preparation of a study plan listing all courses 
required for completion of the degree. This study plan must 
receive the approval of the coordinator of the student’s area of 
specialization, the Music Department graduate program adviser 


and the dean of graduate studies. Opportunity is given the stu- 
dent to remove any deficiencies in undergraduate-level prepara- 
tion. Courses taken to satisfy deficiencies usually will not be 
included on the student’s study plan and thus will not count 
toward the master’s degree. 

Students who do not pass one or more of the entrance examina- 
tions shall take and complete specified coursework with a grade of 
A or B. Music 450 satisfies the entrance examination require- 
ment in music history, and Music 411 meets the requirement in 
music theory. Students may elect to bypass the history and theory 
entrance exams and take the appropriate class(es) instead. Those 
who do not meet required writing proficiency at entrance shall 
take Music 451 or another appropriate course specified by the 
Music Department. The writing proficiency requirement must be 
met before a student may take Music 500, and the music history 
requirement must be satisfied before a student may take any 500- 
level music history seminar. 

MASTER OF MUSIC 

The Master of Music provides an avenue of graduate study for the 
highly creative composer or for the superior performer in a pro- 
gram tailored to each student’s demonstrated talent and to each 
student’s professional development. Applicants must have com- 
pleted either a Bachelor of Music degree in performance or com- 
position or show evidence of equivalent rigorous training. For the 
entrance audition, applicants in performance must demonstrate 
proficiency equivalent to the 400 level, the level expected of a 
performance major in the Bachelor of Music program at the time 
of the senior recital, while composition applicants must submit a 
portfolio of scores for examination by the composition faculty. 
For admission to the programs in choral or instrumental conducting, 
applicants must show evidence of substantial conducting course 
work at the undergraduate level plus practical experience. Fur- 
ther, to audition for entrance into the program, each choral 
applicant must demonstrate conducting proficiency with a mixed 
chorus and each instrumental applicant must demonstrate con- 
ducting proficiency with a band or orchestra. Under exceptional 
circumstances, a tape may be substituted for the live audition. 

Study Plan 

The Master of Music degree program requires a minimum of 30 
units of graduate study in music, at least half of which must be in 
500-level courses. Music 500, Introduction to Graduate Study in 
Music, must be taken within the first nine units. At least one 
recital is required, in addition to a corollary written essay. Under 
certain circumstances, and with departmental approval, a thesis 
may be substituted for the recital and written project. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN MUSIC 

Two options are offered in this degree program: Option 1 in music 
history and literature, and Option II in music education. Both 
options provide for breadth of advanced study as well as an area of 
specialization. The degree is for teachers and supervisors of music 
and for college teaching careers in music history or music educa- 


Music 197 


tion. For the entrance audition in history and literature, applicants 
must submit an example of a previously written research paper on 
a musical subject* while applicants to the program in music educa^ 
turn must submit a dO-minute tape demonstrating their teaching 
technique in a classroi^m situation. 

Study Plan 

The Master of Arts degree program requires a minimum of 30 
units of graduate study, no more than nine of which may be 
outside the field of music and at least half of which must be in 
500' level courses in the major. 

Option I in history and literature requires reading ability in a 
foreign language, preferably German or French, prior to ad- 
vancement to candidacy, a thesis, and at least six units of study in 
a non-music field suppc^rtive of the major. Students in Option 11, 
music edtication, shall complete a thesis, project, or comprehen- 
sive examination. Students selecting the comprehensive exami- 
nation (0 units) shall complete three additional units in the 
concentration. Eight semester units are common to both options 
(Music 500, 3 units; Music 361-363, 2 units; and Music 552-555, 
3 units). Music 500, Intrtxluction to Graduate Study in Music, 
must be included within the first nine units taken as a graduate 
student under both options. 

For further details or advisement, consult the Department of 
Music. 


Music Courses 

100 Introduction to Music (3) 

Musical enjoyment and understanding through a general survey 
of musical literature representative of a variety of styles and 
performance media. Music will be related to other arts through 
lectures, recordings and concerts. For non-music majors. 

101 Music Theory for Non-Music Majors (3) 

Basic theory and practical applications to improve music perfor- 
mance and listening skills. Includes sightsinging and relationship 
to keyboard and simple melodic instruments. For non-music 
majors. 

103 History of Rock (3) 

Rock music around the world; its origins and the development of 
national styles. Emphasis on listening. For non-music majors. 

110 Foundation of Music (3) 

Prerequisite: ability to read music. Intensive study of the ele- 
ments of music: notation, rhythm, meter, melody, scales, key 
signatures, intervals, and chord structure. Exercises in writing 
music, technical analysis, and ear training. Open to all qualified 
students, though directed toward the music major or minor. 


1 1 1 A,B Diatonic Harmony (2,2) 

Includes scales and intervals, triads and their inversions, harmo- 
nizations, non-harmonic tones, modulation and seventh chords. 
Co-enrollment in the corresponding section of Music 1 UAL or 
lllBL is required for music majors and is recommended for 
others. 

1 1 lAL, 1 1 IBL Diatonic Harmony Laboratory (1,1) 
Application of materials in Music lllA and 11 IB. Activity to 
include sightsinging, dictation and keyboard exercises. (2 hours 
activity) 

182 Piano Class for Music Majors (2) 

Keyboard skills for students whose major performance instrument 
is not piano. (3 hours activity) 

183 Voice Class for Non-Music Majors (1) 

Beginning and elementary techniques in singing for the non- 
music major. May be repeated for credit. (2 hours activity) 

184 A Piano Class for Non-Music Majors (1) 

Beginning and elementary piano skills for the non-music major. 
(2 hours activity) 

184B Piano Class for Non-Music Majors (1) 

Prerequisite: Music 184A or consent of instructor. Continuation 
of 184A. 

185 A Guitar Class for Non-Music Majors (1) 

Beginning and elementary classical guitar techniques for the 
non-music major. May be repeated for credit. (2 hours activity) 

185B Guitar Class for Non-Music Majors (1) 

Prerequisite: Music 185 A or consent of the instructor. Elemen- 
tary classical guitar techniques for the non-music major. Con- 
tinuation of Music 185 A. May be repeated for credit. (2 hours 
activity) 

193, 293, 393, 493 Individual Instruction (1-2) 

Prerequisite: jury recommendation. Individual study with ap- 
proved instructor. Emphasis on technique and repertoire. Music 
majors must register for a minimum of one unit per semester. 
Performance majors approved by jury recommendation should 
register for two units per semester, jury examination required. 
Instructional fee required. May be repeated for credit. 

196 Student-to-Student Tutorials (1-3) 

Prerequisites: a 3.0 or higher grade-point average and/or consent 
of instructor and simultaneous enrollment in the course or pre- 
vious enrollment in a similar course or its equivalent. Consult 
“University Curricula” in this catalog for more complete course 
description. 


1 98 Music 


211 Chromatic Harmony (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 11 IB. Continuation of Music 111A,B- The 
chromatic practice of the 19th century. Secondary dominants; 
ninth, eleventh and thirteenth chords; sequence; Neapolitan 
and augmented sixth chords. Co'enrollment in Music 21 IL is 
required for music majors and is recommended for others. 

21 IL Chromatic Harmony Laboratory (1) 

Application of materials in Music 211. Activity to include sight- 
singing, dictation and keyboard exercises. (2 hours activity) 

251 Survey of Musical Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Literature of music in Western 
civilization. Students should be able to read music in order to 
analyze form and style. (3 hours lecture) 

265 A Jazz Improvisation 1(1) 

Prerequisite: Music 1 1 1 A,B, ability on a standard jazz instrument 
or consent of instructor. Application of scales and their relation- 
ship to chords. Includes modes, jazz rhythmic phrasing, blues 
progressions, and cycle of dominant seventh chords. Basic jazz 
keyboard drills and ear training involved. 

265B Jazz Improvisation II (1) 

Prerequisites: Music 265 A and 211, or consent of instructor. 
Continuation of modal patterns and jazz rhythms for improvisa- 
tion. Explores melodic construction in improvisation. Emphasis 
on playing Il-V-I progressions in major and minor keys. Includes 
jazz keyboard drills and ear training. 

265C Jazz Improvisation 111 (1) 

Prerequisite: jazz Improvisation I and II or consent of instructor. 
Continuation of Jazz improvisational pedagogy and techniques 
with an emphasis on performance application. Includes form and 
stylistic analysis, and ear training. 

281B,P,S,W Orchestral Instruments (LL1,1) 

Techniques and materials for teaching orchestral instruments. 
Required for music education emphasis. May be repeated for 
credit. Instructional fee. (3 hours activity) 

28 IB Brass Instruments (1) 

28 IP Percussion Instruments (1) 

28 IS String Instruments (1) 

28 IW W3odwind Instruments (1) 

282 A, B Piano Class for Music Majors (2,2) 

Keyboard skills for students whose major performance field is not 
piano. A — Prerequisite: Music 182 or placement by instructor. 
B — Prerequisite: Music 282A or placement by instructor. Meets 
minimum piano proficiency requirements for degree. (3 hours 
activity) 


283 A, B Voice Class for Instrumentalists (1,1) 

A — Prerequisite: teaching credential candidate or consent of 
instructor. Vocal skills for students whose major performance 
field is not voice. Prepares music education students to work with 
young singers in group settings by understanding their own vocal 
problems and the solutions in a variety of vocal styles. B — 
Prerequisite: Music 283A. Continuation of Music 283A at more 
advanced level. Completion of Music 283B satisfies voice profi- 
ciency requirement for music credential candidates. 

290 English Diction ( 1 ) 

Prerequisite: Sophomore standing or consent of instructor. Stan- 
dard English for singers. Examples from American and British 
vocal literature explained through the use of the International 
Phonetic Alphabet. Individual performance of examples plus 
assigned repertoire. 

301 Techniques of Song Writing (3) 

Prerequisites: Music 101 or consent of instructor. Melody writing 
and setting of text to music. Includes consideration of melodic 
construction, harmonic progression, and metrical values of text. 
For non-music majors. 

302 History of Jazz (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 100 or 101 or consent of instructor. Historical 
study of jazz music in America; chronological development and 
stylistic evolution with consideration of peripheral trends. Em- 
phasis on listening. Intended primarily for non-music majors; 
may be used as a music major elective. 

303 Ethnic Music (3) 

Prerequisite: Music \00 or consent of instructor. Survey of music 
from Europe, Asia, Africa, Australia, Oceania, the Caribbean 
and indigenous Indian music from North and South America. 
Emphasis on musical styles and forms, and religious and ritualis- 
tic functions of music in various cultural frameworks. Intended 
primarily for non-music majors; may be used as a music major 
elective. 

304 Music of Mexico (3) 

Survey of the art, folk and traditional music of Mexico from pre- 
Cortesian aboriginal music to 20th-century style, including neo- 
Hispanic, folk (corrico, etc.), mestizo, mariachi, nationalistic, 
jazz, and modern art music. Interrelationship between traditional 
(folk) and serious (art) music; effects of Mexico’s history on its 
music. No credit toward the music major. 

305 Women in Music (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 1(X) or consent of instructor. A study of the 
contributions women have made as composers and performers as 
well as the historical limitations to which women musicians have 
been subject. Recitals by guest lecturers and presentation of a 
culminating study on selected topics by students. No credit to- 
ward the music major. 


Music 1 99 


306 Business of Music (3) 

Prerequisites: Music 100 or consent of instructor. This course is 
designed as a comprehensive survey of the business aspects of 
songwriting, publishing, copyright, legal affairs, the record in- 
dustry, music in broadcast and film, and career planning and 
development. Intended primarily for non^music majors; may be 
used as a music major elective. 

312 Commercial Arranging (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 211. Harmonic practices in commercial mu- 
sic; stage band and jazz writing techniques. (May be repeated 
once for credit. ) 

314A Special Projects in Commercial Music (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 312B or consent of instructor. Three' and 
founpart voice accompaniment; planning and executing the 
multi-chorus small group arrangement. 

314B Special Projects in Commercial Music (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 314A or consent of instructor. Introduction 
to harmonic substitutions; planning and executing arrangements 
for larger groups of instruments. 

316 16th-Century Counterpoint (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 21 1 or consent of instructor. Sixteenth-cen- 
tury counterpoint in two, three and four parts, covering motet, 
canon, double counterpoint. 

318 1 8th-Century Counterpoint ( 2 ) 

Prerequisite: Music 316 or consent of instructor. Eighteenth- 
century counterpoint in two, three, and four parts, covering 
invention, canon, double and triple counterpoint, and fugue. 

319 Form and Analysis (3) (Formerly 319A) 

Prerequisite: Music 211 or consent of instructor. Analysis of 
structural elements of music such as motive phrase and period: 
binary, tenary, rondo, sonato allegro, and larger musical forms in 
representative musical works. 

320A,B 20th-Century Techniques (2,2) 

Prerequisite: Music 211. Compositional practices of the 20th 
century; emphasis on written examples in the various styles, 
includes sightsinging, keyboard practice and dictation. A — 
Compositional techniques from 1890 to 1945. B — Comp- 
ositional techniques since 1945, to include the synthesis of 
sound. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

323 Orchestration (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 319, 320 or consent of instructor. Writing 
and analysis of orchestral music. 

324 Scoring for the Band (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 323 or consent of instructor. Devices, tech- 
niques, and skills required to produce complete transcriptions for 
the contemporary public school wind band. 


326 Introduction to Midi (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 211. Introduction to the theory and use of 
Midi instruments, including synthesizers, sequencers, computer 
software, drum machines, and effects units. Demonstrations and 
assignments dealing with techniques of creating music for live 
performance recording and film scoring. 

327 Application of Midi ( 1 ) 

Prerequisite: Music 326. Continuing supervised laboratory ex- 
perimentation with equipment, concepts, and techniques en- 
countered in Music 326. Students pursue individual assignments 
based on experience, ability, and interest. Topics are unique to 
each student. They may range from the production of original 
compositions to reorchestrating a symphonic movement of Midi 
instruments. May be repeated for credit. 

333 Music and Child Development (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 101 or equivalent; junior or senior standing. 
The relationship of music to child growth and development for 
the child from 5 to 12. Survey of age-appropriate music materials. 

350 Music in Our Society (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 1(X) or consent of instructor. Music in its 
relationship to general culture. A sociological approach: musical 
criticism and journalism, concert life, audience psychology, and 
the political/religious/business aspects of the American musical 
scene. No credit toward the music major. 

351 A History and Literature of Music (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 2 1 1 and 25 1 or consent of instructor. A study 
of the history and literature of music from early Greek beginnings 
through the Renaissance area. 

35 IB History and Literature of Music (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 351 A. A study of the history and literature of 
music of the Baroque and Classic eras. A grade of “C” or higher 
fulfills the course requirement of the university upper division 
baccalaureate writing requirement for music majors. 

35 IC History and Literature of Music (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 35 IB. A study of the history and literature of 
music from the Romantic era to the present. 

352 Symphonic Music in Western and Eastern Cultures (3) 
Prerequisite: Music 1(X) or 101 or consent of instructor. Survey of 
symphonic music in Western and Eastern cultures from Baroque 
through Modem periods. Intended primarily for non-music ma- 
jors; may be used as a music major elective. 

353 Public-School Instrumental-Music Materials (2) 
Prerequisite: Music 382 A or concurrent enrollment. The study of 
instrumental- music materials, repertoire, programming, and cur- 
riculum for public-school instrumental-music ensembles. Topics 
will include solo, chamber, and large -ensemble repertoire. 


200 Music 


354 Survey of Public School Choral Music Materials (2) 
Prerequisite: Music 383 A. Examination and analysis of choral 
repertoire suitable for junior and senior high choruses. 

355 Film Music (3) 

Prerequisites: Music 100 and an ability to read music or Music 
101 . An historical survey of motion picture musical scores. Anal- 
ysis, listening and examination of motion picture scores. Intend- 
ed primarily for non-music majors; may be used as a music major 
elective. 

361A-W Major Performance Ensemble (1) 

Study and performance of standard and contemporary music lit- 
erature. Public concerts on campus and in the community each 
semester. A concert tour may be included by some groups. Re- 
quired of music majors every semester of residence. (More than 3 
hours major production) May be repeated for credit. 

361 A Symphony Orchestra (1) 

Prerequisite: audition or consent of instructor. Instructional fee. 
36 IB University Choir (1) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. 

36 IC Symphonic Band (1) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Instructional fee. 

36 ID Opera Theatre (1) 

Roles and representative excerpts from standard and contempo- 
rary operas and the musical, dramatic and language techniques of 
the musical theatre. Performance of operatic excerpts and com- 
plete operas. Also open to non-vocal majors. 

36 IE University Singers (1) 

Prerequisite: advanced voice students or those accepted by 
audition. 

36 IF University Wind Ensemble (1) 

Prerequisite: advanced wind and percussion students accepted by 
audition. Instructional fee. 

36 IW Women’s Choir (1) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Performance of choral 
literature. 

362B Varsity Band ( 1 ) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The Varsity Band provides 
music for Titan football and basketball games, and other related 
activities. May be repeated for credit. Instructional fee. 

362D Percussion Ensemble ( 1 ) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Study and performance of 
music written for the percussion ensemble. May be repeated for 
credit. (2 hours activity) 

362E Brass Ensemble (1) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Study and performance of 
music written for large brass choir/ensemble. May be repeated for 
credit. Instructional fee. (2 hours activity) 

362L Jazz Ensemble 1(1) 

Open by audition and consent of instructor. Numerous public 
performances on campus and in the community. Open to non- 
music majors. May be repeated for credit. Instructional fee. 


362M Horn Ensemble ( 1 ) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Study and performance of 
music written for French horn ensemble with emphasis on the 
solution of various problems relating to multiple horn literature. 

362S Jazz Ensemble 11(1) 

Prerequisite: Open by audition and consent of instructor. (For 
those who do not qualify by audition for 362L. ) Jazz and jazz-rock 
ensemble; public performance each semester. Open to non-music 
majors by audition. May be repeated for credit. Instructional fee. 

362X Beginning Opera Techniques ( 1 ) 

Prerequisite: recommendation of voice faculty. Arias for the be- 
ginning opera student, and fundamentals of stage movement. 
May be repeated for credit. 

363B-X Chamber Music Ensembles ( 1 ) 

Open to all qualified wind, string or keyboard students. Ensem- 
bles will study, read and perform representative chamber litera- 
ture of all periods. May be repeated for credit. Instructional fee 
(except in 363K and optional in 363J). (2 hours activity) 
363B Brass 
363G Guitar 
363 J Jazz Combo 
363 K Keyboard 
363S Strings 
363W Woodwind 
363X Saxophone 

363V Vocal Chamber Ensemble ( 1 ) 

Prerequisites: Music 36 IB, E, or W, and consent of instructor. 
Singers and student directors will study, read, and perform repre- 
sentative choral chamber literature of all periods. May be repeat- 
ed for credit. (2 hours activity) 

365G Guitar Performance Workshop ( 1 ) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Weekly workshop perfor- 
mances by students, faculty, and guests. Recommended for guitar 
majors each semester. May be repeated for credit. 

365K Keyboard Workshop (1) 

Weekly workshop performances by students, faculty, and guests. 
Recommended for keyboard major each semester. May be repeat- 
ed for credit. 

365V Vocal Workshop ( 1 ) 

Application of vocal technique to performance practices through 
lecture-demonstration, master classes, and ancillary recitals. 
Recommended for vocal major each semester. May be repeated 
for credit. 

372 Harpsichord Class for Music Majors (1) 

Prerequisite: 300-jury level in piano or organ or consent of in- 
structor. The harpsichord as an instrument, the application of 
baroque stylistic characteristics, and training in the rudiments of 
continuo playing in ensemble with voices and instruments. (2 
hours activity) 


Music 201 


373 Organ Class for Music Majors (1) 

Prerequisite: 300'jury level in piano or consent of instructor. The 
organ as an instrument, the playing techniques, and repertoire. 
The differences between piano and organ techniques. (2 hours 
activity) 

380A,B,C Diction for Singers (1,1,1) 

Prerequisite: sophomore standing or consent of instructor. Proper 
singing diction; may not be considered a substitute for formal 
language study. Examples from standard vocal literature ex- 
plained through the use of the International Phonetic Alphabet. 
A — Italian B — German C — French 

382A,B Instrumental Conducting (2,2) 

Prerequisite: two courses from 281B,P,S,Wor consent of instruc- 
tor. A — Principles, techniques, and methods of conducting 
orchestral and band groups. Required of all music education 
majors. Instructional fee. (4 hours activity) B — Continuation of 
382A, including laboratory experience in conducting instrumen- 
tal groups, using standard instrumental literature. Instructional 
fee. (4 hours activity) 

383 A, B Choral Conducting (2,2) 

Prerequisite: one semester of voice class or consent of instructor. 
A — Principles, techniques, and methods of conducting choral 
groups. Required of all music education majors. (4 hours activity) 
B — Continuation of 383A including laboratory work with class 
and vocal ensembles, using standard choral repertoire. (4 hours 
activity) 

385K Functional Skills for Keyboard Majors (2) 

Development of the ability to sight-read, harmonize, transpose, 
and improvise. (4 hours activity) 

385G Guitar Fingerboard Skills (2) 

Prerequisite: upper-division guitar standing or consent of the 
instructor. Development of comprehensive understanding of the 
guitar fingerboard, with emphasis on scales, intervals, chord 
formation, harmonic progressions and sight-reading. 

386 Piano Accompanying ( 1 ) 

Prerequisite: by audition only. Piano accompaniments for instru- 
mentalists, vocalists, and ensembles. Participation in rehearsals, 
recitals and concerts required. May be repeated for credit. (2 
hours activity) 

395 Internship: Professional Experience (1-3) 

Fieldwork in music under supervision of resident faculty and 
professionals in the field. Requires minimum six hours fieldwork 
per week for each unit credit. May be repeated for credit to a 
maximum of six units. Open to all music students by consent of 
instructor. 


398 Recital (1) 

Prerequisites: 300 jury level in the principal performance area 
and consent of instructor. Corequisite: Enrollment in Music 
365K or V. Preparation and presentation of representative works 
in the principal performance area. In the semester of recital 
presentation. Music 398 will substitute for one unit of 393. In- 
structional fee. 

404 Microcomputers and MIDI for School Music 
Classrooms (3) 

Prerequisite: Music Education 295 or equivalent. Pre-service and 
in-service music teachers will learn how to use microcomputers 
and musical instrument digital interface (MIDI) for classroom 
management and pedagogical purposes. Students will gain expe- 
rience with software for word processing, database, spreadsheet, 
music notation, music pedagogy, and MIDI. 

411 Survey of Music Theory (3) 

Prerequisites: Completion of all lower-division theory require- 
ments, and at least senior standing or equivalent. An examina- 
tion of the theoretical basis of music from 1500 to the present 
through analysis, readings, and discussion. Intended primarily for 
graduate and postbaccalaureate students. Fulfills graduate en- 
trance examination requirement in music theory. May not be 
applied to a graduate study plan. 

419 Advanced Form and Analysis (2) (Formerly 319B) 
continuation of Music 319; larger musical works. 

422 Composition (2) 

Prerequisites: Music 316, 319 and 320A or B or consent of in- 
structor. Composition of smaller forms in various contemporary 
styles. 

424 Practicum: Electronic Music Laboratory (1) 

Prerequisites: Music 320B, 493 level in applied music composi- 
tion and consent of instructor. Individual and group instruction 
in electronic music composition. May be repeated for credit. (3 
hours laboratory) 

433 Music in Early Childhood (3) 

Prerequisite: junior or senior standing. Songs, creative activities, 
and materials for teaching music in early childhood education. 
Teaching-learning strategies. 

444 Survey of Marching Bands (2) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Techniques, materials, ad- 
ministration for marching band. Charting for field shows and 
parade activities. 

450 History of Musical Style (3) 

Prerequisites: Music 351A,B,C, or equivalent, or consent of 
instructor. Intensive review of the principal musical styles in 
Western music. Intended primarily for graduate and postbacca- 
laureate students. Fulfills graduate entrance examination require- 
ment in music history. May not be applied to a graduate study 
plan. 


202 Music 


451 Writing About Music (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 35 IB or equivalent. Writing about music and 
related topics. Students will write and revise numerous brief 
papers and will analyze and critique the work of fellow students. 
Emphasis will also be placed on improving organizational, lan- 
guage, and research skills. 

453A,B Choral Literature and Interpretation (2,2) 

A — Prerequisites: Music 383 A or equivalent and 351 A, B. Cho- 
ral literature from Medieval, Renaissance, and Baroque eras ana- 
lyzed in historical perspective. Appropriate performance prac- 
tices. B — Prerequisites: Music 383 A or equivalent and 35 1C. 
Continuation of A with examples from the Classic, Romantic, 
and Contemporary eras. 

454 A, B Piano Literature and Interpretation (2,2) 
Prerequisites: Music 351A,B and junior- level piano standing, or 
consent of instructor. Performance of representative styles and 
schools of piano literature; solo and ensemble repertoire. A — 
contrapuntal forms, sonatas, and variations. B — Character 
pieces, fantasies, suites, and etudes. 

456 Opera Literature and Interpretation (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 351A,B,C or consent of instructor. All per- 
iods and nationalities, including stylistic and historical consider- 
ations. 

45 7 A Song Literature and Interpretation (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 319, 380B, or consent of instructor. Study 
and performance of German Ueder with representative examples 
of periods and styles. 

45 7B Song Literature and Interpretation (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 38(XD or consent of instructor. Study and 
performance of French art songs with representative examples of 
periods and styles. 

459 A Guitar History and Literature (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 251, 21 1 or equivalent. Upper-division guitar 
standing or consent of the instructor. Historical survey of the 
literature for classical guitar. Important works for lute, vihuela, 
and Baroque guitar, plus the compositions and transcriptions for 
modern guitar. 

459B Guitar Pedagogy (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 251, 211, or equivalent. Upper-division gui- 
tar standing or consent of the instructor. Fundamentals of teach- 
ing and coaching classical guitar. Materials and methods for 
individual and group instruction. 

463 Seminar in Black Music (3) 

(Same as Afro-Ethnic Studies 463) 


466 Pedagogy Observation and Internship ( 1 ) 

Prerequisite: junior-level piano standing or consent of instructor. 
Coenrollment in 467 A, B or C required. Observation of and 
supervised internship in piano teaching. Teaching techniques, 
and development of lesson plans and materials will be included. 

467A,B,C Piano Pedagogy (2,2,2) 

Prerequisite: junior piano standing or consent of instructor. A — 
Materials and methods for beginning and elementary students. 
Coenrollment in Music 466 recommended. B — Materials and 
methods for intermediate and early advanced students. Coenroll- 
ment in Music 466 recommended. C — Materials and methods 
for class piano. Coenrollment in Music 466 recommended. 

468 A, B Vocal Pedagogy (2,2) 

Prerequisite: senior standing or consent of instructor. A — Fun- 
damentals of vocal pedagogy for studio and public school teach- 
ing; physiology and acoustics as they apply to singing. B — 
Application of the fundamentals discussed in A. Seminar discus- 
sions and actual studio teaching. The diagnosis and cure of spe- 
cific vocal problems. 

477 Piano Pedagogy Practicum (3) 

Prerequisites: Music 467A, B, and C. Supervised piano teaching 
in individual and group learning environments. The following 
elements will be emphasized: keyboard technique, literature, 
communication skills, lesson plans and piano curriculum. 

496 Student-to-Student Tutorials (1-3) 

Prerequisites: a 3.0 or more grade-point average and/or consent of 
instructor and simultaneous enrollment in the course or previous 
enrollment in a similar course or its equivalent. Consult “Stu- 
dent-to-Student Tutorials” in this catalog for more complete 
course description. 

497 Senior Project ( 1 ) 

Independent investigation of an area of special interest in music 
culminating in a research paper, public performance, lecture, or 
lecture-recital. ‘Instructional fee. 

498 Recital (1) 

Prerequisites: 400 jury level in the principal performance area 
(4(X) jury level in composition for composition majors) and con- 
sent of instructor. Corequisite: Coenrollment in Music 3651, K, 
or V. Preparation and presentation of representative works in the 
principal performance area. In the semester of recital presenta- 
tion, Music 498 will substitute for one unit of Music 493. Instruc- 
tional fee. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

A special topic in music selected in consultation with and super- 
vised by the instructor. May be repeated for credit. 

5(X) Introduction to Graduate Study in Music (3) 

Required of all music graduate students within the first nine 
study-plan units. Basic bibliography, literature, and research 
techniques, and materials useful in graduate study. 


Music 203 


524 Seminar in Music Theory (3) 

Theoretical subjects (form/style analysis, history of music theory, 
etc.) to be chosen by instructor. May be repeated for credit. 

552 Seminar in Music of the Renaissance (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 351A,B,C; Music 500 or equivalent. The 
forms, styles, and characteristics of music between 1400 and 
1600. Analysis of works by representative composers and theo^ 
retical writers. 

553 Seminar in Music of the Baroque Period (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 351A,B,C; Music 500 or equivalent. Musical 
forms, styles, and performance practices of the Baroque period. 
Analysis of representative works. 

554 Seminar in Music of the Classic Period (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 351A,B,C; Music 500 or equivalent. The 
history and literature of music from approximately 1730 to 1826. 
Analysis of representative works. 

555 Seminar in Music of the Romantic Period (3) 
Prerequisite: Music 352A,B,C; Music 500 or equivalent. The 
structure and development of music in the 19th century. Analysis 
of representative works. 

567 Seminar in Piano Pedagogy (3) 

Graduate-level study of advanced learning theories, musical is- 
sues, and pedagogical methods involved in teaching piano 
through lectures, discussions, and student presentations. Practice 
teaching required. 

569 Seminar In Piano Concerti (3) 

Advanced study of piano concerti with performance and analysis 
by class members and lectures by the instructor. Requirements 
can be met by performance and/or analysis. 

570G Seminar in Guitar Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 500 or consent of the instructor. Advanced 
study of guitar literature, with performances and analysis by class 
members and lectures by the instructor. Requirements can be met 
by performance and/or analysis. Topics include guitar sonatas, 
guitar concertos, and solo guitar works of Heitor Villa-Lobos. 
May be repeated for credit. 

570P Seminar in Piano Literature (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 500 or consent of instructor. Advanced study 
of piano literature, with performances and analyses by class mem- 
bers and lectures by the instructor. Requirements can be met by 
performance and/or analysis. May be repeated for credit. 

582 Seminar in Advanced Instrumental Conducting and 
Interpretation (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 382B, keyboard facility for score reading, and 
consent of instructor. Conducting techniques. Interpretive prob- 
lems of each period covered in lectures. May be repeated for 
credit. 


583 Seminar in Advanced Choral Conducting and 
Interpretation (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 383B, conducting experience, or consent of 
instructor. Choral conducting techniques. Lab work with student 
groups and concert conducting. May be rep>eated for credit. 

593 Individual Instruction (1) 

Prerequisite: jury recommendation. Individual instruction with 
approved instructor. Emphasis on performance techniques and 
repertoire. May be repeated for credit. Instructional fee. 

597 Project (3) 

The culminating experience of M.M. students as well as M.A. 
students in Music education who do not elect to write a thesis or 
take a comprehensive exam. M.M. Project: A public recital 
(sometimes 2) accompanied by written program notes and a 
related paper. M.A. (Music Education) Project: A significant, 
written research study. Students must submit an enrollment re- 
quest form by week one of the preceding semester. Instructional 
fee. 

598 Thesis (3) 

Individual investigations of specific problems in the area of con- 
centration by candidates for the M.A. degree. Students must 
submit an enrollment request form by week one of the preceding 
semester. Instructional fee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisite: Graduate standing in music and consent of instruc- 
tor. Research and study projects in areas of specialization beyond 
regularly offered coursework. Oral and written reports required. 
Students must submit an enrollment request form by w'eek one of 
the preceding semester. 


Music Education Courses 

295 Clinical Practice in Instrumental/Choral Techniques ( 1 ) 
Clinical practice and field applications of instrumental/choral 
techniques classes, as in public and private schools. Coenroll- 
ment in Music 383 B or 382 B recommended. (3 hours weekly to 
be arranged in nearby school) 

394 A Practicum in School Materials and Techniques (2) 
Prerequisite: Music Education 295. For music education majors. 
Experience in sequential pedagogy, classroom delivery skills, and 
concurrent development of management skills, aural discrimina- 
tion skills, and aural and visual diagnostic skills. 


204 Music 


394B Practicum in Skills for Teaching Music (2) 

Prerequisite: Music Education 394A. Corequisite: Music Educa- 
tion 395 A or 395 B. For music education majors. Observation 
and application of musical concepts and materials, sequential 
pedagogy, nonverbal teaching strategies, and classroom delivery 
and management skills. Continued development of aural and 
visual diagnostic skills and aural discrimination skills. 

395 A Clinical Practice in Instrumental Conducting (1) 
Prerequisite: Music Education 295. Clinical practice and field 
applications of concepts, materials and procedures as applied to 
field situations, as in public and private schools. Co-enrollment 
in Music Education 394B. 

395B Clinical Practice in Choral Conducting (1) 

Prerequisite: Music Education 295. Clinical practice and field 
applications of concepts, materials and procedures as applied to 
field situations, as in public and private schools. Co-enrollment 
in Music Education 394B. 

442 Principles and Methods of Teaching Music in the Public 
Schools (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. History, principles 
of public education, grades K-12, with emphasis on music. Phi- 
losophy, methods, materials and procedures for organizing and 
teaching music in elementary and secondary schools. Must take 
concurrently with Secondary Education 440F and 440S. 

449E Externship in Secondary Teaching (3) 

Must be taken concurrently with Music Education 442. For can- 
didates who have declared for the single subject credential in 
music. See description and prerequisite under Department of 
Secondary Education. 

4491 Internship in Secondary Teaching (10) 

For candidates who have declared for the single subject credential 
in music. See description and prerequisite under Department of 
Secondary Education. 


449S Seminar in Secondary Teaching (2) 

Must be taken concurrently with Music Education 4491. For 
candidates who have declared for the single subject credential in 
music. See description and prerequisites under Department of 
Secondary Education. 

501 Contemporary Music Education (3) 

Recent innovations and overview of the history, philosophy, and 
methodology of the art of teaching music. Trends and applica- 
tions of educational theory in relation to the teaching of music. 

529 Advanced Pedagogy in Music Education (3) 

Advanced pedagogical strategies for music teaching and learn- 
ing, including world approaches to music education (e.g., Ko- 
daly, Suzuki, Orff), current music learning theory, and applica- 
tions from cognitive and developmental psychology. Implications 
and applications for school music classes and curriculum develop- 
ment. 

531 Foundations of Music Education (3) 

Philosophical, historical, psychological, and aesthetic bases of 
music education. Contemporary trends and future directions of 
music education. 

533 Psychology of Music (3) 

(Contemporary topics merging research and practice in the fields 
of music teaching and learning theory. Topics include: musical 
behavior, psychoacoustical parameters of music, perception, af- 
fective response, musical memory, learning theory, musical cog- 
nition. 


Music 205 


Department of Theatre 
and Dance 


Department Chair: Sallie Mitchell 
Department Office: Performing Arts 157 
Production Office: Performing Arts 126 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Theatre Arts 

History and Theory 

Production/Performance 

Teaching 

Bachelor of Arts in Dance 
Master of Arts in Theatre Arts 

Master of Fine Arts in Theatre Arts 
Acting 
Directing 

Technical Theatre and Design 
Secondary Teaching Credential 

Faculty 

Barbara Arms, Joseph Arnold, Don Finn, John Fisher, Susan 
Hallman, Dean Hess, Lawrence Jasper, Robin Johnson, 
Gretchen Kanne, Gladys Kares, Dan Kern, Arthur Lessac 
(Distinguished Visiting Professor), Juan Lopez, Alex 
MacKenzie, William Meyer, Sallie Mitchell, S. Todd Muffatti, 
Jose Quintero (Distinguished Visiting Professor), Lara Teeter, 
James Volz, Ron Wood, Abel Zeballos 

INTRODUCTION 

The Department of Theatre and Dance undergraduate and gradu- 
ate programs include the fields of acting, dance, directing, musi- 
cal theatre, oral interpretation, playwriting, technical produc- 
tion and design, television, theatre for young audiences, theatre 
history and theory. Specifically, the course work and theatrical 
and dance pnxluction activities are arranged to provide opportu- 
nities for students ( 1 ) to develop an appreciation for theatre arts 
and dance; (2) to become aware, as audience or participants, of 
the shaping force of theatre arts and dance in society; (3) to 
improve the knowledge and skills necessary for work in the theat- 
rical arts and dance as a profession; (4) to pursue graduate studies; 
and (5) to prepare for teaching theatre. 



206 Theatre and Dance 


Public performance is at the center of the department’s programs. 
Therefore, continuing stage, dance and television production 
activities are essential for all students at California State Univer- 
sity, Fullerton, including the undergraduate and graduate theo- 
retical student as well as the undergraduate pre-professional and 
graduate conservatory student. In conjunction with on-campus 
dance productions the Department of Theatre and Dance offers 
dancers and choreographers additional experience in its adjunct 
company: Dance Repertory Theatre. The company is made up of 
carefully selected California State University, Fullerton gradu- 
ates and advanced students, chosen on the basis of demonstrated 
excellence in their work at the University. Dance Repertory 
Theatre presents lecture/ demonstrations and performs locally, as 
well as scheduled tours throughout the year. 

General Major Requirements 

The concentration in History and Theory in theatre is for those 
who wish to study theatre as a cultural contribution or who wish 
to pursue graduate degrees in theatre with emphasis in theatre 
history and theory. It is strongly recommended that students 
electing this plan support the major with approved electives from 
art, music, foreign languages, literature, philosophy or speech. 

The concentration in Production/Performance in theatre is de- 
signed to develop competency for pursuing the theatrical arts as a 
profession, or for pursuing graduate degrees in theatre with an 
emphasis in an area of concentration other than history of the 
theatre. Areas of emphasis are: acting, directing, musical the- 
atre, oral interpretation, playwriting, technical design and tele- 
vision. 

The concentration in Teaching in theatre meets the requirements 
of the teaching credential with specialization in secondary teach- 
ing. 

The Bachelor of Arts in Dance is designed to develop competen- 
cy for pursuing dance as a profession or for pursuing a graduate 
degree in dance. 

In addition to the requirements listed below for the major, stu- 
dents must meet the other university requirements for a bachelor 
of arts degree. Students pursuing a concentration in Teaching 
must meet all specific requirements for the desired teaching cre- 
dential. See description of secondary school teaching credential 
program under Department of Secondary Education. In addition, 
students pursuing the teaching concentration should see the de- 
partment’s secondary education adviser regarding course se- 
quence required for the single subject waiver in English. 

To qualify for a baccalaureate degree with a major in theatre or 
dance, students must have a C or better in all theatre or dance 
courses required for the degree. In addition to course require- 
ments, all theatre and dance majors will enroll for two units of 
Theatre 478B each semester of residency up to a maximum of 
eight semesters. 


Theatre 477B with a grade of C or better fulfills the upper- 
division writing requirement for theatre majors. Dance 325 with 
a grade of C or better fulfills the upper-division writing require- 
ment for dance majors. 

Theatre 200, or its equivalent, is a [prerequisite for all upper-division 
theatre courses with the exception of Theatre 478A, B. Transfer stu- 
dents may take Theatre 200 concurrently with their first semester of 
upper-division courses. Prior to entering their junior year, or upon 
transferring to Cal State Fullerton, all students electing an Acting 
emphasis under the Production/Performance concentration or the 
major in Dance will be evaluated and advised as to potential for 
advancement in the emphasis or major. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN THEATRE ARTS 
Theatre History and Theory Concentration 
Lower Division (15 units required) 

Theatre 110 Oral Communication of Literature (3)* 
Theatre 200 Art of the Theatre (3) 

Theatre 263 A Beginning Acting — Majors (3) 

Theatre 276A Beginning Stagecraft (3) 

Theatre 277 Costume Fundamentals (3) 

Upper Division (42 units required) 

Theatre 310 Oral Interpretation of Shakespeare (3) 
Theatre 364 Seminar in Playwriting (3) 

Theatre 370A Fundamentals of Directing (3) 

Theatre 377 Stage Costuming (3) 

Theatre 386 Beginning Lighting (3) 

Theatre 388 Historical Styles for Scene Design (3) 
Theatre 475A,B,C,D, or E World Theatre (15) 

Theatre 477A,B Seminar in Critical Techniques (6) 
Electives in Theatre (3) 

Production/Performance Concentration 
Acting Emphasis 

Lower Division (24 units required) 

Theatre 110 Oral Communication of Literature (3)* 
Theatre 141A,B Voice/Movement for Stage (6) 

Theatre 200 Art of the Theatre (3) 

Theatre 263 A, B Beginning Acting — Majors (6) 

Six units selected from: 

Theatre 2 76 A Beginning Stagecraft (3) 

Theatre 277 Costume Fundamentals (3) 

Theatre 285 Theatrical Makeup (3) 

Theatre 288 Design for the Theatre (3) 


Theatre and Dance 207 


Upper Division (36 units required) 

Theatre 310 Oral Interpretation of Shakespeare (3) 
Theatre 363 A, B Intermediate Acting (6) 

Theatre 370A Fundamentals of Directing (3) 
Theatre 463 A, B Advanced Acting (6) 

Theatre 475A,BfC,D, or E World Theatre (12) 
Theatre 477B Seminar in Critical Techniques (3) 
Theatre 482 Acting for Television (3) 

Directing Emphasis 

Lower Division (24 units required) 

Theatre 141A,B Voice/Movement for Stage (6) 
Theatre 200 Art of the Theatre (3) 

Theatre 263A,B Beginning Acting — Majors (6) 
Theatre 276A Beginning Stagecraft (3) 

Theatre 277 Costume Fundamentals (3) or 
Theatre 285 Theatrical Makeup (3) 

Theatre 288 Design for the Theatre (3) 

Upper Division (35 units required) 

Theatre 350 Stage Management (2) 

Theatre 370A,B Fundamentals of Directing (6) 
Theatre 386 Beginning Lighting (3) 

Theatre 450 Theatre Management (3) 

Theatre 470A,B Advanced Directing (6) 

Theatre 475A,B*C,D, or E World Theatre (12) 
Theatre 477B Seminar in Critical Techniques (3) 


All theatre majors with an emphasis in directing must assistant stage 
manage a rrmnstage production either prior to or concurrently with 
Theatre 470A, Advanced Directing, and must stage rmnage a main- 
stage production prior to graduation. 

Musical Theatre Emphasis 
Lower Division (25 units required) 


Theatre 477B Seminar in Critical Techniques (3) 

Dance 336 Dance for Musical Theatre (3) 

All theatre majors with an emphasis in Musical Theatre must prove 
competency in piano. 

Oral Interpretation Emphasis 
Lower Division (21 units required) 

Theatre 110 Oral Communication of Literature (3)* 
Theatre 141A,B Voice/Movement for the Stage (6) 
Theatre 200 Art of the Theatre (3) 

Theatre 263 A Beginning Acting — Majors (3) 

Theatre 2 76 A Beginning Stagecraft (3) 

Theatre 277 Costume Fundamentals (3) or 
Theatre 285 Theatrical Makeup (3) 

Upper Division (36 units required) 

Theatre 310 Oral Interpretation of Shakespeare (3) 
Theatre 370A,B Fundamentals of Directing (6) 

Theatre 410A,B,C Oral Interpretation of Prose, Poetry 
and Drama (9) 

Theatre 41 1 Oral Interpretation of Children’s 
Literature (3) 

Theatre 475A,B,C,D, or E World Theatre (12) 

Theatre 477B Seminar in Critical Techniques (3) 


Playwriting Emphasis 

Lower Division (15 units required) 

Theatre 110 Oral Communication of Literature (3)* 
Theatre 200 Art of the Theatre (3) 

Theatre 263 A Beginning Acting — Majors (3) 
Theatre 276A Beginning Stagecraft (3) or 
Theatre 277 Costume Fundamentals (3) 

Theatre 288 Design for the Theatre (3) 


Upper Division (41 units required) 


Theatre 141A,B Voice/Movement for Stage (6) 
Theatre 200 Art of the Theatre (3) 

Theatre 263 A, B Beginning Acting — Majors (6) 
Dance 142 Beginning Tap Dance (2) 

Dance 212 Intermediate Classical Ballet (2) 
Dance 232 Intermediate Jazz Dance (2) 

Music lllA Diatonic Harmony (2) 

Music lllAL Diatonic Harmony Lab (1) 

Music 184 A Piano Class (1) or equivalent 

Upper Division (33 units required) 

Theatre 363 A, B Intermediate Acting (3,3) 
Theatre 370A Fundamentals of Directing (3) 
Theatre 436A,B Musical Theatre Workshop (6) 
Theatre 475 World Theatre (A,B,C, or D) (9) 
Theatre 475E World Theatre (3) 


Theatre 350 Stage Management (2) 

Theatre 364 Seminar in Playwriting (3,3) 

Theatre 370A,B Fundamentals of Directing (6) 
Theatre 386 Beginning Lighting (3) 

Theatre 470A,B Advanced Directing (6) 

Theatre 475A,B,C,D, or E World Theatre (12) 
Theatre 477A,B Seminar in Critical Techniques (6) 

Technical ProductioivDesign Emphasis 
Lower Division (21 units required) 

Theatre 200 Art of the Theatre (3) 

Theatre 263 A Beginning Acting — Majors (3) 
Theatre 276A,B Beginning Stagecraft/Drafting (6) 
Theatre 277 Costume Fundamentals (3) 

Theatre 285 Theatrical Makeup (3) 

Theatre 288 Design for the Theatre (3) 


208 Theatre and Dance 


Upper Division (35 units required) 


Upper Division (29 units required) 


Theatre 350 Stage Management (2) 

Theatre 370A Fundamentals of Directing (3) 
Theatre 377 Stage Costuming (3) or 

Theatre 476 Design of Stage Mechanics and 
Rigging (3) 

Theatre 379 Rendering for the Theatre (3) 
Theatre 386 Beginning Lighting (3) 

Theatre 388 Historical Styles for Scene Design (3) 
Theatre 475A,B.C,D, or E World Theatre (9) 
Theatre 477B Seminar in Critical Techniques (3) 
Theatre 486 Advanced Lighting (3) 

Theatre 488 Advanced Design and Technology (3) 


Television Emphasis 

Lower Division (18 units required) 

Theatre 110 Oral Communication of Literature (3)* 
Theatre 184 Introduction to Radio and Television (3) 
Theatre 200 Art of the Theatre (3) 

Theatre 263 A Beginning Acting — Majors (3) 
Theatre 276A Beginning Stagecraft (3) 

Theatre 284 Introduction to Television Production (3) 

Upper Division (39 units required) 


Theatre 365 Television Writing (3) 

Theatre 370A,B Fundamentals of Directing (6) 

Theatre 384 Television Production and Direction (3) 
Theatre 386 Beginning Lighting (3) 

Theatre 475A,B,C,D, or E World Theatre (6) 

Theatre 477B Seminar in Critical Techniques (3) 
Theatre 484 Television Dramatic Techniques (3) 

Theatre 480 Television/Film Aesthetics and 
Criticism (3) 

Theatre 489 Cable Television Production Workshop (3) 
and 6 units electives selected from: 

Theatre 277 Costume Fundamentals (3) 

Theatre 285 Theatrical Makeup (3) 

Theatre 288 Design for the Theatre (3) 

Theatre 387 Audio Techniques (3) 

Theatre 486 Advanced Lighting (3) 

Theatre 489 Cable Television Production Workshop (3) 
Theatre 495 Internship (3) 


Teaching Concentration (Single Subject) 
Lower Division (27 units required) 


Theatre 350 Stage Management (2) 

Theatre 370A,B Fundamentals of Directing (6) 
Theatre 386 Beginning Lighting (3) 

Theatre 402B Dramatic Activities for Children (3) 
Theatre 470A Advanced Directing (3) 

Theatre 475A,D,E World Theatre (9) 

Theatre 477B Seminar in Critical Techniques (3) 
or English 301 Advanced College Writing (3) 


Theatre Education majors are required to complete the Waiver 
Program in English. 


'Meets General Education requirement in oral communication for theatre and 
dance majors. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN DANCE 
Lower Division (16 Units Required) 


Dance 112 Beginning Classical Ballet (2) 
Dance 122 Beginning Modern Dance (2) 
Dance 126 Dance Improvization (2) 

Dance 132 Beginning Jazz Dance (2) or 
Dance 142 Beginning Tap Dance (2) 
Dance 212 Intermediate Classical Ballet (2) 
Dance 222 Intermediate Modern Dance (3) 
Dance 226 Rhythmic Analysis (3) 


Upper Division (31 Units Required) 

Dance 312 Advanced Classical Ballet (3) 

Dance 323A,B Dance Composition (3, 3) 

Dance 324 Forces and Figures in Dance (3) 

Dance 325 Dance Theory and Criticism (3) 

Dance 372 Dance Kinesiology (3) 

Dance 422 Advanced Modern Dance (3) 

Dance 423 Advanced Dance Composition (3) 

Dance 424 Fundamentals of Dance Instruction (3) or 
Dance 471 Creative Dance for Children (3) 

Dance 425 Dance Repertory (3) 

Dance 497 Senior Projects in Dance (1) 

Electives (10 Units Required) 

Minimum of two units from: Dance 232, 242 
Minimum of thre units from: Dance 301, 332, 336, 412, 
424, or 471 

Minimum of three units from: Theatre 277, 284, 285, 384, 
386, or 387 


Theatre 

Theatre 

Theatre 

Theatre 

Theatre 

Theatre 

Theatre 


141A,B Voice/Movement for the Stage (6) 
200 Art of the Theatre (3) 

263 A, B Beginning Acting — Majors (6) 
276A Beginning Stagecraft (3) 

277 Costume Fundamentals (3) 

285 Theatrical Makeup (3) 

288 Design for the Theatre (3) 


MASTER OF ARTS IN THEATRE ARTS 
The Master of Arts in Theatre Arts provides a program of coord i' 
nated graduate studies built on undergraduate preparation; in- 
centive for intellectual growth reflected in teaching and profes' 
sional recognition; and a sound basis for continued graduate study 
in theatre. The student is expected to demonstrate a high degree 
of intellectual and creative competence. 


Theatre and Dance 209 


Admission to Graduate Standing: 

Conditionally Classified 

University requirements include a baccalaureate from an accre- 
dited institution and a grade^point average of at least 2.5 in the 
last 60 semester units attempted (see section of this catalog on 
admission of graduates for complete statement and procedures). 

Graduate Standing: Classified 

A student who meets the admission requirements and the follow^ 
ing requirements may be granted classified graduate standing 
upon the development of an approved study plan: an appropriate 
undergraduate major in theatre, with a grade-point average of 3.0 
in all upper-division work in the major, or at least 24 units of 
appropriate upper-division work in theatre, with a G PA of 3.0; 
satisfactory completion of the Graduate Writing Requirement; 
and, an oral interview. Upon recommendation of the student’s 
graduate committee, additional prerequisites may be required 
prior to classification and the approval of the area of emphasis. 

Study Plan 

The study plan will include at least 30 units of adviser-approved 
graduate studies, 15 units of which must be 5(X)-level courses. 
Study plan course work must be completed with an overall mini- 
mum 3.0 grade-point 

Each program will consist of 24 units in theatre including a 
thesis. Projects in playwriting may be considered in lieu of a 
thesis. All students must also pass oral and written examinations. 
Written comprehensive examinations will be given during the 
seventh and eighth weeks of the spring semester. Students must 
apply to the graduate coordinator prior to the beginning of the 
semester in which they intend to take the written examination. 
Students will be permitted to take the written examination 
twice. 

Required Courses (18 units) 

Theatre 477A Seminar in Critical Techniques (3) 
Theatre 500 Introduction to Graduate Studies (3) 
Theatre 501 Graduate Seminar: Advanced Theatre 
Theory (3) 

Theatre 573T Seminar in Dramatic Literature (3) 
Theatre 575T Seminar in Theatre History (3) 

Theatre 583 Graduate Seminar: Acting (3) 

Electives (9 units) 

As part of their electives, students may select a maximum of 
six units of adviser-approved supporting courses in related 
fields from courses outside the Department of Theatre and 
Dance. 


Thesis/Project (3 units) 

Theatre 597 Project (3) or 
Theatre 598 Thesis (3) 

For further information, consult the Department of Theatre and 
Dance. 

MASTER OF FINE ARTS IN THEATRE ARTS 
(TECHNICAL THEATRE/DESIGN, ACTING 
AND DIRECTING) 

This degree is for students who wish professionally oriented edu- 
cation and training in design/technical theatre, acting, and di- 
recting. It is the objective of the department to educate and train 
highly skilled, motivated individuals for careers in professional 
theatre (including television and film) or for careers as artist- 
teachers in college or university theatre. Only those who demon- 
strate an exceptional talent, a high degree of motivation, and a 
deep commitment to their education and training will be admit- 
ted into the program. The highest academic and creative stan- 
dards will be demanded throughout the program. A positive 
attitude and a rigid sense of theatre discipline are essential for 
success in the program. 

The degree requires 60 units of approved course work. Average 
length of time to complete the program is three years. 

Admission to Graduate Standing: Classified 

Prerequisites for admission to the program and granting of classi- 
fied standing are: 

1 . B. A. , B. F. A. or M. A. from an accredited college or university 
with a major in theatre; or a degree in a related field and 
extensive work in technical theatre, acting, or directing. 

2. Completion of an oral interview and satisfactory review of the 
student’s portfolio or audition. 

3. Acceptance by the faculty. 

4. Minimum GPA of 3.0 in all upper-division undergraduate 
work in theatre. A minimum GPA of 2.75 for the last half of 
the undergraduate program is also required. 

5. Completion of any additional prerequisites which may be 
required by the student’s individual committee prior to classi- 
fication. 

6. Selection of a graduate adviser and committee. Total commit- 
tee membership should be three or four faculty members, 
including the adviser. 

7. Submission of a formal M. F. A. study program approved by the 
individual committee, the department graduate adviser and 
the dean of graduate studies. 

8. Must meet the Graduate Writing Requirement. 


210 Theatre and Dance 


Admission to Graduate Standing: 

Conditionally Classified 

Students who do not meet certain prerequisites may be consid- 
ered for admission in conditionally classified graduate standing. 
Consult the graduate program adviser. 


Study Plan — Acting 

Course Requirements * Units 

Take all of the following: 31 


Theatre 563 Acting Studio (6) 

Theatre 570A,B Styles of Directing/Performance (12) 
Theatre 573T Seminar in Dramatic Literature (3) 
Theatre 575T Seminar: Theatre History (3) 

Theatre 597 Graduate Project (6) 

Theatre 599 Independent Research (3) 

Take 12 units adviser-approved electives (includes 6 units 


technical coursework) 12 

Total 60 


Theatre 443 Audition and Rehearsal Processes (3) 
Theatre 500 Intro to Graduate Studies (3) 

Theatre 563 Acting Studio (16) 

Theatre 570A,B Styles of Directing Performance (6) 
Theatre 583 Graduate Seminar: Acting (3) 

Take one of the following: 3 

Theatre 436A,B Musical Theatre Workshop (6) 

Theatre 573T Seminar in Dramatic Literature (3) 
Theatre 575T Seminar in Theatre History (3) 

Additional advisor approved courses required in Dramatic 


Analysis, Television, Voice and Movement, Showcase ... 20 

Complete two creative projects: 

Theatre 597 Project (6) 6 

Total 60 

M.F.A. Projects in Acting 


The M.F.A. in Acting requires the completion of two creative 
projects which, by their nature, are of sufficient challenge and 
complexity to be accepted as worthy completion of the period of 
study. These projects, which shall be performances in major 
departmental productions, shall be approved by the individuaPs 
committee. In addition, the program will culminate in a project 
book submitted by the M.F.A. candidate to the individual’s com- 
mittee. The project book will clearly and objectively articulate 
the development of the candidate’s process as an actor based on 
the various experiences in and materials discovered through both 
classroom and performance. Before the degree is granted, each 
student will pass an oral examination over the project book. 


Study Plan — Directing 

Course Requirements ’ Units 

Take all of the following: 48 


Theatre 470A Advanced Directing (3) 

Theatre 470B Advanced Directing (3) 

Theatre 477A Seminar in Critical Tech (3) 
Theatre 484 Television Dramatic Tech (3) 

Theatre 500 Introduction to Graduate Studies (3) 


M.FA. Projects in Directing 

The M.F.A. in Directing Program requires the completion of 
three creative projects, which have been approved by the indi- 
vidual’s committee and which by their nature, are of sufficient 
challenge and complexity to be accepted as worthy completion of 
the period of study. These projects shall be mounted and present- 
ed by the Department of Theatre and Dance as a portion of its 
production program. The program shall culminate in a project 
book submitted by the M.F.A. candidate to the individual’s com- 
mittee. The project book will clearly and objectively articulate 
the process of formulating the final mainstage project from initial 
concept to critical reaction, utilizing experiences and material 
discovered through both classroom participation and the devel- 
opment of the production. Before the degree is granted, each 
student will pass an oral examination over the project book. 


Study Plan — Technical Theatre/Design 
Students should concentrate their activities in two of the follow- 
ing four technical theatre areas during their two year course of 
study: scene design, costume design-makeup, lighting-sound, 
and technical production. 


Course Requirements * Units 

Take all of the following: 9 


Theatre 477A Seminar in Critical Techniques (3) 
Theatre 5(X) Introduction to Graduate Study (3) 
Theatre 575T Seminar in Theatre History (3) 

Take nine units from the following: 9 


Theatre 566 
Theatre 577 
Theatre 578 
Theatre 586 


Graduate Seminar: Stagecraft (3) 
Graduate Seminar: Costuming (3) 
Graduate Seminar: Scene Design (3) 
Graduate Seminar: Lighting (3) 


Take the following four times: 24 

Theatre 588 Design and Tech Theatre (6) 

Choose 12 adviser-approved units from technical courses in 
theatre, art or engineering 12 


Complete a creative project in two of the four technical 


areas: Theatre 597 Project (3) 6 

Total 60 


Theatre and Dance 211 


M.F.A. Projects in Design 

Tlie M. F. A. Program in Technical Theatre/Design shall be culmi- 
nated by two creative projects which, by their nature, are of 
sufficient challenge and complexity to be accepted as worthy 
completion of the pericxJ of study. These projects are determined 
by the individual committee and shall be design assignments for 
major productions. Each project shall be reviewed by the individ- 
ual committee within two weeks after completion. If accepted, 
the student shall submit a project book within a specified time. 
Before the degree is granted, each student will pass an oral exami- 
nation over the project book. 


* Based on a student's previous undergraduate or professional experierKe, substitu- 
tions or revisions in the study plan might be appropriate. 


Dance Courses 

101 Introduction to Dance (3) 

Historical and contemporary dance forms. Experiences in various 
dance forms such as ballet, modern, jazz, folk, Afro, mime. 
Recommended for non^majors. 

112 Beginning Classical Ballet (2) 

The fundamental structure and technique of classical ballet. May 
be repeated once for credit. (4 hours activity) 

122 Beginning Modem Dance (2) 

Exploration and manipulation of the instrument and materials of 
dance; development of aesthetic judgment. May be repeated 
once for credit. (4 hours activity) 

126 Dance Improvisation (2) 

Theory and practice of improvisation in movement. Practical use 
of improvisation in expressing imagery, developing choreograph- 
ic concepts, and enhancing performance. (4 hours activity) 

132 Beginning Jazz Dance (2) 

Modern jazz dance techniques and basic jazz choreography. 
(4 hours activity) 

142 Beginning Tap Dance (2) 

Structure and technique of tap dance and tap choreography. 
(4 hours activity) 

212 Intermediate Classical Ballet (2) 

Prerequisites: Dance 112 and audition. Intermediate level tech- 
nique of classical ballet. May be repeated once for credit. (4 hours 
activity) 


222 Intermediate Modem Dance (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 122 and audition. Intermediate modem 
dance and movement vocabulary in terms of composition and 
communication. May be repeated for credit. (6 hours activity) 

226 Rhythmic Analysis (3) 

Musical form and structure; musically notating dance rhythms 
and percussion accompaniment. 

232 Intermediate Jazz Dance (2) 

Prerequisites: Dance 132 and consent of instructor. Intermediate 
level skills in jazz technique and choreography. (4 hours activity) 

242 Intermediate Tap Dance (2) 

Prerequisite: Dance 142 or consent of instructor. Intermediate 
skills in tap technique and choreography. (4 hours activity) 

301 Dance and Cultural Diversity (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 101 or consent of instructor. Impact of var- 
ious dance forms, from primitive time to modem, on diverse 
cultures. Contributions of immigrants, minorities and women to 
dance as a personal, social and cultural expression. 

312 Advanced Classical Ballet (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 212 and audition. Stylization and perfor- 
mance of classical ballet. May be repeated once for credit. 
(6 hours activity) 

323A,B Dance Composition (3,3) 

A — Prerequisites: Dance 122, 126, or equivalents. Study of 
basic elements and forms of dance composition. B — Prerequi- 
site: Dance 323A or consent of instructor. Problem solving stud- 
ies in space, time, and energy, using choreographic devices 
in solo and group situations. Final project required. (6 hours 
activity) 

324 Forces and Figures in Dance (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. A history of dance from 
primitive times to the present. 

325 Dance Theory and Criticism (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 101, 122 A or consent of instructor. Theory 
and criticism of dance. Comparison and relationship of dance 
principles and criticism among major dance genres, in addition to 
other art forms. Fulfills the course requirement for the university 
upper-division baccalaureate writing requirement for dance 
majors. 

332 Advanced Jazz Dance (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 232 and consent of instructor. Advanced 
jazz techniques and choreography through grade three of profes- 
sional jazz dance. The relation of jazz to other forms of dance. 
(6 hours activity) 


212 Theatre and Dance 


336 Dance for Musical Theatre (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 112, 132, and audition, or consent of in- 
structor. Dance utilized in musical theatre. Ensemble and indi- 
vidual approaches to the style. (6 hours activity) 

372 Dance Kinesiology (3) 

Structural aspects of the human body and factors that affect 
movement in dance. 

412 Classical Pointe (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 312 and consent of instructor. Techniques 
for performance of classical pointe. May be repeated once for 
credit. (6 hours activity) 

422 Advanced Modem Dance (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 222 and audition. Advanced level skills in 
modern dance. Emphasis on individual techniques. May be re- 
peated for credit. (6 hours activity) 

423 Advanced Dance Composition (3) 

Prerequisite: Dance 323A,B or equivalent. Elements and forms 
in dance composition. The choreographing of dances of concert 
quality. (6 hours activity) 

424 Fundamentals of Dance Instruction (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 112, 222, 226, 323A, 372, and consent of 
instructor. Philosophies, techniques and methods for developing 
progressions in dance instruction. 

425 Dance Repertory and Performance (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 212. Learning and rehearsing choreography 
of established and/or new dance works with performance intent. 
May be repeated for credit. (6 hours activity) 

471 Creative Dance for Children (3) 

Prerequisite: Upper division standing. Methods and materials for 
teaching creative dance to children. (6 hours activity) 

497 Production and Performance Projects in Dance (1-3) 
Prerequisites: upper division standing and consent of instructor; 
application form with appropriate signatures must be on file in depart' 
merit office prior to registration. Projects which culminate in pro- 
duction or performance. May be repeated for credit. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: upper division standing and consent of instructor; 
application form with appropriate signatures must be on file in depart' 
ment office prior to registration. Undergraduate research projects. 
May be repeated for credit. 


Theatre Courses 

100 Introduction to the Theatre (3) 

For the general student leading to an appreciation and under- 
standing of the theatre as an entertainment medium and as an art 
form. Recommended for non'majors. 

110 Oral Communication of Literature (3) 

The analysis and performance of literary works through the medi- 
um of oral interpretation. An emphasis upon understanding the 
content of communication in literature as well as the form. An 
exploration of the techniques involved in the discovery, critical 
evaluation and performance of various literary speakers. Meets 
the General Education requirement in Oral Communication for 
Theatre/Dance majors. 

141A,B Voice/Movement for Stage (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 141 is prerequisite to 14 IB. Intensive 
training in the integral use of the voice and body for the actor; 
developing skills for vocal and physical relaxation, flexibility, 
and strength. May be repeated once for credit. 

163 Acting for Non-Majors (3) 

The form and content of acting: improvisation, action, moti- 
vation, and behavior. Recommended for non'majors. (6 hours 
activity) 

184 Introduction to Radio and Television (3) 

The broadcasting industry and its impact and influence on our 
society. Broadcasting practices, audiences, production and 
programming. 

200 Art of the Theatre (3) 

Theatre as an art form, involving the interrelated processes of 
playwriting, directing, acting, design and theatre management. 
Study of plays, films and television with emphasis on dramatic 
analysis and cultural significance. Required of all theatre majors. 

263 A, B Beginning Acting — Majors (3,3) 

Prerequisite for 263B: Theatre 200, 141 A, B and 263 A. Improvi- 
sations, exercises, and techniques of acting for the stage. Motiva- 
tion and behavior in characterization. (6 hours activity) 

276A Beginning Stagecraft (3) 

Planning and construction of stage and television scenery. Use of 
tools and stage equipment. Work in the scene shop for department 
productions is required. May be repeated for credit. (6 hours activ- 
ity) 

276B Drafting (3) 

Prerequisite: 276A. Drafting and reading of technical drawings. 
VCbrk in the scene shop for department productions is required. May be 
repeated for credit. (6 hours activity) 


Theatre and Dance 213 


277 Costume Fundamentals (3) 

Costuming theatrical and television productions. Construction 
techniques, organization and duties of the costume crew. (6 hours 
activity) 

284 Introduction to Television Production (3) 

The fundamentals of production for television. (6 hours activity) 

285 Theatrical Makeup (3) 

Makeup for stage and television. Individual skill in character 
analysis, application in pigment, plastic, hair, makeup, and se^ 
lection and use of makeup equipment. (6 hours activity) 

288 Design for the Theatre (3) 

Scene design, including script analysis, formation of visual con^ 
cepts, floor plan development and model building for stage and 
television. (6 hours activity) 

310 Oral Interpretation of Shakespeare (3) 

Prerequisite: Upper division standing; Theatre 1 10 or consent of 
instructor. Development of techniques for oral interpretation of 
Shakespeare with special emphasis on the problems of verse. 

315 Chicano/Latino Theatre (3) 

(Same as Chicano Studies 315) 

350 Stage Management (2) 

Corerequisite: Theatre 370A. Backstage management, including 
interrelationships of pixxluction personnel for stage and television. 

363 A,B Intermediate Acting (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 200, H1A,B, 263 A, B and audition. 
Characterization; roles, special problems, and application of act- 
ing techniques through exercises and two-character scenes from 
the contemporary theatre. (6 hours activity) 

364 Seminar in Play writing (3) 

Prerequisites: evidence of interest in creative writing and consent 
of instructor. Study of superior mcxlels, development of style, and 
group criticism and evaluation of independent work, as it relates 
to playwriting. May be repeated for credit. 

365 Television Writing (3) 

Prerequisite: English 101. The writing of scripts and other forms 
of continuity for television. May be repeated for credit. 

370A,B Fundamentals of Directing (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 263 A, or consent of instructor. 3 70 A is 
prerequisite to B. Prerehearsal problems and procedures, struc- 
tural analysis of plays, composition, picturization, pantomimic 
dramatization, movement and rhythm on stage and in television. 
Practice in directing scenes. (6 hours activity) 

377 Stage Costuming (3) 

Fashions and textiles of major historical periods, methods of 
research; interpretation and communication of historical dress 
for theatrical statement. 


379 Rendering for the Theatre (3) 

Scenic and costume sketching and rendering for communication 
between production director and designers. Full scale costume 
and scenic painting required. Theoretical and actual production 
idea presentation and execution. (6 hours activity) 

381 Radio and Television Announcing (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 1 10. Control room operation, including prac- 
tice in microphone and camera techniques. (6 hours activity) 

384 Television Production and Direction (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 284. Theory and practice in the production 
of television programs and announcements: the planning, organiz- 
ing, directing, rehearsing, performing, recording and editing of 
television programs and announcements. (6 hours activity) 

385 Advanced Theatre Makeup (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 285. Problems in makeup including special 
techniques and materials: prosthetics, hairpieces, and masks for 
stage and television productions. (6 hours activity) 

386 Beginning Lighting (3) 

Theories of lighting for stage and television productions. (6 hours 
activity) 

387 Audio Techniques (3) 

Practice necessary to integrate live and recorded sound into per- 
forming arts productions. Recording, reproduction and studio 
techniques. (6 hours activity) 

388 Historical Styles for Scene Design (3) 

Visual survey through lecture and slides of architecture, interior 
design and furniture from ancient to modern times. Provides 
necessary basis for advanced design course. 

402A,B Dramatic Activities for Children (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Upper division standing. Creative dramatics as a 
tool for buiding and developing creative and socialized processes 
in children. A — Sense memory, movement/mime, dialogue, 
characterization, dramatization. B — Teaching techniques in- 
cluding concentration, imagination, dramatization, and impro- 
visation for adolescents. (6 hours activity) 

403 A,B Theatre for Young Audiences (3,3) 

Prerequisite: 403 A prerequisite for 403 B or consent of instructor. 
Theatrical production for an audience of children. A — Philos- 
ophy, theory and practice; B — Application of production prin- 
ciples. (6 hours activity) 

410A Oral Interpretation of Prose Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. Criticism and performance 
in the oral interpretation of prose literature. 

41 OB Oral Interpretation of Poetry (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. Criticism and performance 
in the oral interpretation of poetry. 


214 Theatre and Dance 


4 IOC Oral Interpretation of Drama (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. Criticism and performance 
in the oral interpretation of drama. 

411 Oral Interpretation of Children’s Literature (3) 
Prerequisite: upper division standing. Oral presentation of chil- 
dren’s literature in classroom, recreation and home situations 
including individual and group performance of fiction, non- 
fiction, fantasy and poetry. 

436 A, B Musical Theatre Workshop (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 363B, Dance 336, and audition. Theatre 
436A prerequisite to B. Roles and excerpts from musical theatre: 
the musical, dramatic, language and dance techniques. Scenes 
and musical numbers in workshop. A — Large group and solo 
work. B — Small group and audition material preparation. 
(6 hours activity) 

443 Audition and Rehearsal Processes (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 363 A, B. Auditioning and rehearsal pro- 
cesses for professional work in theatre, television and film. In- 
cludes techniques for selecting material and performance prep- 
aration. (6 hours activity) 

450 Theatre Management (3) 

Oranizational principles of front-of-house and box office oper- 
ation. Participation in School of the Arts public presentations. 
(3 hours lecture, 6 hours activity) 

463 A, B Advanced Acting (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 310, Theatre 363 A, B and audition. His- 
torical theories and techniques of styles of acting. A — Greek 
through renaissance periods. B — The neoclassic periods to 
contemporary styles. (6 hours activity) 

470A,B Advanced Directing (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 288, 350, and 370A,B, or consent of in- 
structor. Readir\gs in theory, analysis of scripts and practice in 
directing plays for their oral and visual value as theatre. A — 
Each student directs a one-act play. B — Each student directs two 
one-act plays or equivalent. (6 hours activity) 

475A,B,C,D,E World Theatre (3,3,3,3,3) 

Prerequisite: upper-division standing. The historical and dramat- 
ic evolution of world theatre. A — Ancient Greece and Rome, 
Middle Ages; Italian renaissance; B — England from 1558-1790; 
16th- and 17th-century Spain and France; C — 18th- and 19th- 
century Europe and Russia; 19th-century England; D — 18th- 
and 19th-century America; the Orient; the modem world; E — 
Historical background and contemporary view of the musical 
theatre. 

476 Design of Stage Mechanics and Rigging (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 276A,B, Tlieatre 288 and consent of in- 
structor. Evolution, theory and implementation of mechanics 
and rigging for the stage. Emphasis on current practices and 
future implications. 


47 7 A Seminar in Critical Techniques (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 2(X). Major critical theories in theatre. 

47 7 B Seminar in Writing Critical Techniques (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 200. Practical criticism as applied to local 
dramatic productions. Fulfills the university upper-division bac- 
calaureate writing requirement for theatre arts majors. 

478A,B Production and Performance (2,2) 

A — Performing in stage or television productions. B — Techni- 
cal crew work on stage or television performances. One section of 
478B per semester required of all theatre majors as well as non- 
majors cast in theatre department productions. (More than 6 
hours activity) 

480 Television/Film Aesthetics and Criticism (3) 
Prerequisites: Theatre 384 or consent of instructor. The nature of 
film and television; aesthetic and theoretical and critical bases for 
film and television evaluation and understanding. 

482 Acting for Television (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 363 A, B. The adaptation of stage tech- 
niques for the camera; audition, rehearsal, and final per- 
formance, utilizing videotape and studio equipment. (6 hours 
activity) 

483 Advanced Acting Workshop (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 463A,B and audition. Extensive scene 
study, based on particular needs and problem areas of the ad- 
vanced acting student. (6 hours activity) 

484 Television Dramatic Techniques (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 384 and consent of instructor. Techniques 
of production for the director, actor and designer in televised 
drama. (6 hours activity) 

486 Advanced Lighting (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 386 or consent of instructor. Design and 
technology of lighting for the stage and television. (6 hours 
activity) May be repeated for credit. 

487 Advanced Audio Techniques (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 387 or consent of instructor, advanced 
problems in the design and technology of live and recorded sound 
used in the performing arts. (6 hours activity) 

488 Advanced Design and Technology (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 276A,B, 277, 288 and consent of instruc- 
tor. Advanced design, coordination of scenery and/or costume 
design projects for various types of theatres and television. May 
be repeated for credit. 

489 Cable Television Production Workshop (3) 

Prerequisites: six units of television production and consent of 
instructor. Practical experience in the creation of full-length 
television dramatic productions for cable broadcasting. May be 
repeated for credit. (6 hours activity) 


Theatre and Dance 215 


495 Theatre Internship (3) 

Consent of appropriate faculty supervisor. Supervised work expe- 
rience in all areas of theatre to expand the dimensions of the 
classroom by integrating the formal academic training with direct 
application. Perkxlic seminar meetings to discuss work. 

497 Production and Performance Projects in Theatre (1-3) 
Prerequisites: upper division standing and consent of instructor; 
application form with appropriate signatures must be on file in depart' 
ment office prior to registration. Projects which culminate in pro- 
duction or performance. May be repeated for credit. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: upper division standing and consent of instructor; 
application form with appropriate signatures must be on file in depart' 
ment office prior to registration. Undergraduate research projects. 
May be repeated for credit. 

500 Introduction to Graduate Study in Theatre (3) 
Methodological problems in graduate research. Location of 
source materials, including library and original data; interpreta- 
tion of research and practice in scholarly writing. Must be taken 
the first semester after admission to graduate study. 

501 Graduate Seminar: Advanced Theatre Theory (3) 
Prerequisite: Theatre 500. Directed research; the relationship 
between historical backgrounds and developments in the theatre 
and the student’s area of concentration. 

563 Acting Studio (4) 

Prerequisite: audition. Re-creation and interpretation of roles 
utilizing period and contemporary dramatic literature, interrelat- 
ing voice, movement, characterization and pericxl style acting. 
Enrollment limited to M.F.A. students. May be repeated for credit. 

566 Graduate Seminar: Stagecraft (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Advanced theories in the 
preparation and installation of scener>' for theatrical prtxluction; 
engineering drawings, exploration of materials, and research into 
new methtxis of theatre technology. May be repeated for credit up 
to six units. 

570A,B Styles of Directing/Performance (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 470A,B or consent of instructor. Research 
in the theories of directing and acting styles and practice in 
directing and performance of period plays. A — Staging and 
acting problems from Greek tragedy through the Restoration. B 
— Staging and acting problems from recent classical work (Ibsen, 
Strinberg, Chekhov) to present. May be repeated once for credit. 

573T Seminar in Dramatic Literature (3) 

Directed research and criticism in the examination of contribu- 
tions of major dramatists or dramatic genres. Emphasis on dra- 
matic analysis. May be repeated for credit. 


575T Seminar in Theatre History (3) 

Directed research and criticism in the examination of a signifi- 
cant historical pericxls or movements in theatre history. May be 
repeated for credit. 

577 Graduate Seminar: Costuming (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Costume production prob- 
lems and their solutions. Examination of specific designers, past 
and present. Research in pratical methods of interpreting the 
deisgner’s sketch. May be repeated for credit up to six units. 

578 Graduate Seminar: Scene Design (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Scenic design projects involv- 
ing in-depth production style and scheme development. May be 
repeated for credit up to six units. 

583 Graduate Seminar: Acting (3) 

Prerequisites: TTieatre 463 A, B. Investigation and delineation of 
current acting methods as techniques for solving problems pre- 
sented by popular dramatic literature. Development of a personal 
acting philosophy and methodology. May be repeated once for 
credit. 

586 Graduate Seminar: Lighting Design (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Advance theoretical lighting 
design projects. Production problems and their solutior\s. Exami- 
nation of specific designers, past and present. May be repeated for 
credit up to six units. 

588 Graduate Projects in Design and Technical Theatre (6) 
Theoretical projects and designs for productions prior to final 
projects. Faculty and student critiques. Tailored to individual 
student needs. Enrollment limited to M.F.A. students. 

597 Project (1-3) 

Prerequisites: consent of instructor, student’s graduate committee 
and department executive committee. Development and presen- 
tation of a creative project beyond regularly offered coursework. 
May be repeated for credit up to six units. Student must complete 
course application form by the end of the seventh week of the semester 
preceding that in which the work is to be done. 

598 Thesis (3) 

Prerequisites: consent of student’s graduate committee; applica- 
tion form with apropriate signatures must be on file in department 
office prior to registration. Development and presentation of a 
thesis in the student’s area of concentration. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: consent of student’s graduate committee and in- 
structor; application form with appropriate signatures must be on file 
in department office prior to registration. Research in theatre. May 
be repeated for credit. 


216 Theatre and Dance 


Theatre Education Courses 

442 Teaching Theatre in the Secondary School (3) 
Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. Objectives, meth- 
ods and materials for teaching in the secondary school. 

449E Externship in Secondary Teaching (3) 

See description under Department of Secondary Education. 


4491 Internship in Secondary Teaching (10) 

See description under Department of Secondary Education. 

449S Seminar in Secondary Teaching (2) 

See description under Department of Secondary Education. 












Theatre and Dance 217 



gai<M eJ^ 1^ 
>aiM ,..eo^ 









e 

Qa 


School of 




Business Administration 
40 ^ 6 *“®; and Economics -> 




gaixM"', 


M 

er' 






4*^ eat>^ , 


[^OrW' gcii^ 


e* 










Qo^ i^0<^ 







School of Business 
Administration and 

Economics 



Dean: Ephraim R Smith 
Associate Deans: 

Dorothy Heide, Undergraduate Programs 
Richard Stolz, Graduate Studies 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Business Administration 
Concentrations in; 

Accounting 
Business Economics 
Finance 
Management 

Management Information Systems 
Management Science 
Marketing 

Bachelor of Arts in Economics 

Bachelor of Arts in International Business 
Concentrations in: 

French 

German 

Japanese 

Portuguese 

Spanish 

Minor in Business Administration 
Minor in Economics 

Minor in Management Information Systems 
Master of Science in Accountancy 
Master of Business Administration 
Concentrations in: 

Accounting 
Business Economics 
Finance 

International Business 
Management 
Management Science 
Marketing 

Master of Arts in Economics 

Master of Science in Management Science 
Concentrations in: 

Management Information Systems 

Operations Research 

Statistics 

Master of Science in Taxation 


School of Business Administration and Economics 22 1 



INTRODUCTION 

Programs of study in the School of Business Administration and 
Economics equip men and women with the intellectual and prO' 
fessional tools needed to assume responsible positions in business, 
industry, education, government, and social service. The school 
offers a broad exposure to business administration and econom- 
ics. Behavioral and quantitative sciences are studied in both 
theoretical and applied contexts. Mathematics is used as a key 
tool in the analysis of complex problems and in the interpretation 
of data. Emphasis is placed on effective oral and written commu- 
nication. Students are made aware of the need for imaginative, 
innovative solutions to business problems that encompass human 
needs and ethical objectives. 

The school provides the opportunity to develop technical expet' 
tise in a chosen discipline at a beginning professional level ac- 
ceptable to prospective employers. Seven concentrations are of- 
fered within the business administration major as well as an 
economics major, an international business major and a business 
education credential program. 

The Schot^l of Business Administration and Economics offers the 
only programs in Orange County accredited by the American 
Assembly of Collegiate Schot)ls of Business. Accreditation as- 
sures a rigorous course of study covering the full spectrum of 
business administration. It also indicates a well-qualified faculty, 
high standards for students, access to computing and an extensive 
library system. 

Mission Statement 

The University’s Mission has three major elements: (1) excel- 
lence in instruction, (2) actively involved faculty, and (3) sup- 
p)ort for the instructional mission (see “Philosophy and Objec- 
tives” section of this catalog). 

In support of the University’s Mission, the School of Business 
Administration and Economics has built its Mission around its 
students and faculty as well as university service and community 
outreach. In each of these areas, the School will pursue specific 
goals: 

• Students: Provide students with oppc^rtunity to obtain an edu- 
cation that will enable them to grow intellectually, personally 
and professionally throughout life. 

• Faculty: Foster an intellectual climate that supports faculty in 
their efforts to advance and convey knowledge and learning 
through their teaching and research, recognizes differing 
viewpoints, respects academic and personal freedom and pro- 
motes teaching innovation. 

• Students and Faculty: Attract and retain a diverse student body 
and faculty through a collegial environment that endorses 
social responsibility and accountability, honest>’ and equity, 
and supports activities that enhance the learning opportunity. 


• Outreach: Encourage outreach activities that address commu- 
nity, regional and world needs. 

• Service: Support faculty involvement in collegial governance 
and shared decision-making processes. 

Preparation for Undergraduate Degree Programs 

Algebra and geometry are necessary for many required business 
courses. The equivalent of three years of high school mathemat- 
ics, including a second course in algebra, is the prerequisite for 
the required Math 135 Business Calculus. Students without 
the necessary background should enroll in Math 115 College 
Algebra. 

Proficiency in written English is essential to all college courses. 
Students should plan to take the written English component of 
General Eduation as soon as possible and take the English Writ- 
ing Proficiency (EWP) examination while juniors. 

Business students are encouraged to take courses in sociology, 
psychology, anthropology, speech communication, political sci- 
ence, history, philosophy, geography and foreign languages. 
Many courses in these fields may be used to meet general educa- 
tion requirements. For the international business degree, inter- 
mediate level competency in a foreign language, equivalent to 
Foreign Language 204 courses, is prerequisite to the required 
concentration courses. It is strongly recommended that students 
planning to major in international business complete a minimum 
of three years of foreign language study while in high school. 

Business Advising Center 
Langsdorf Hall, Room 700 

Undergraduate Program Advising 

The Business Advising Center serves business administration, 
economics and international business majors. Information is 
available on admissions, curriculum and graduation require- 
ments, as well as on registration and grading procedures, resi- 
dence and similar academic matters. Transfer students shoidd see an 
adviser immediately regarding transfer credit. For information on 
general education, consult the Academic Advisement Center. 

Graduate Program Advising 

The graduate adviser (in the Business Advising (Center) provides 
academic advising for the graduate programs in accountancy, 
business administration, management science and taxation. In- 
formation is available on admissions, curriculum and graduation 
requirements, as well as on registration procedures, residence and 
similar academic matters. For information on admission, curricu- 
lum and graduation requirements for the M. A. in Economics, see 
the graduate program coordinator in the Economics Department. 
Students also should consult the faculty coordinators for the 
programs in accountancy, management science and taxation. 


222 School of Business Administration and Economics 


Transfer Credit for Business and Economics Courses 

Students should see an adviser immediately regarding transfer cred- 
it. College level courses successfully completed at another college or 
university may be applied towards the requirements of the SBAE 
subject to the approval of the appropriate department chair. Lower 
division courses completed at an appropriately accredited institu- 
tion with a grade of “C” or better that are equivalent in content and 
level may be considered. Upper division transfer courses will be 
considered if the course is (a) equivalent in content and level, (b) 
completed with a grade of “C” or better, and (c) taught in an 
American Assembly of Collegiate Schools of Business accredited 
program. Exceptions require thorough documentation evidencing 
the above standards. Lists of approved equivalent courses from local 
community colleges are available in the Business Advising Center. 
All other courses are subject to approval by the department chair 
concerned. In these cases, the student must supply catalog descrip- 
tions, course outlines and textbook titles. Courses taken in the 
extension division of another university, or by correspondence, are 
generally not acceptable. 

Internships and Cooperative Education 

Students may earn academic credit, first-hand work experience 
and financial remuneration as well. Opportunities exist in ac- 
counting and auditing; cost-benefit analysis and econometrics; 
finance and real estate; insurance and banking; management and 
industrial relations; marketing, sales and advertising; and busi- 
ness data systems. For more information, consult the internship 
adviser in your department or in the Center for Internships and 
Cooperative Education. 

Student Organizations 

Chapters of the following national honor societies have been 
established on campus with membership open to qualified stu- 
dents: Beta Alpha Psi (accounting). Beta Gamma Sigma (busi- 
ness), Delta Sigma Pi (business), Financial Management Associ- 
ation Honor Society (finance), Omicron Delta Epsilon (eco- 
nomics), Phi Kappa Phi (all-campus). Pi Sigma Epsilon 
(marketing). In addition there are the following clubs which 
students are encouraged to join: Accounting Society, AIESEC, 
APICS (American Production and Inventory Control Society), 
Black Business Students, Data Processing Management Associ- 
ation, Economics Association, Finance Association, Inter-Club 
Council, American Marketing Association, Personnel and In- 
dustrial Relations Association, Personnel Management Associ- 
ation of Aztlan, Rho Epsilon, Securities and Investment Associ- 
ation, and The Institute of Management Science. 


Prizes in Business Administration and Economics 

Stephen ]. Barres Leadership Award 

Theodore H. Smith Outstanding Graduate Student Award 

Executive Council Outstanding Student Award 

Executive Council Outstanding Faculty Award 

See also awards listed under each department. 

For additional information on awards and scholarships available 
to business students, contact the office of the Dean, Langsdorf 
Hall 700. 

Computer Facilities 

The CSUF Computer Center in McCarthy Hall and the SBAE 
Satellite Computer Laboratory in Langsdorf Hall are available for 
student use. Facilities include terminals (which access the cam- 
pus’ main computers), microcomputers, and printers. Computer 
facilities are generally available evenings and weekends during 
the school year. 

Information on the Degree Requirements 

Accountancy, Master of Science 
See ^'Department of Accounting ' 

Business Administration, Bachelor of Arts 
Business Administration, Master of Business Administration 
Business Administration, Minor 
See “Business Administration Degrees’ 

Economics, Bachelor of Arts 
Economics, Master of Arts 
Economics, Minor 
See "Department of Economics" 

International Business, Bachelor of Arts 
See "International Business Program" 

Management Information Systems, Minor 
See "Management Information Systems" 

Management Science, Master of Science 
See "Department of Management Science" 

Taxation, Master of Science 
See "Department of Accounting" 


School of Business Administration and Economics 223 


Department of 
Accounting 


Administrator: Gerald B. Hoth 
Department Office: Langsdorf Hall 630 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Business Administration 
Concentration in Accounting 

Master of Science in Accountancy 

Master of Business Administration 
Concentration in Accounting 

Master of Science in Taxation 
Faculty 

Mary Fleming, Paul Ftx^te, Clyde Hardman, Mahamood 
Hassan, A. Jay Hirsch, Gerald Hoth, K.j. Kim, Keith W. 
Lantz, Andrew Luzi, Don Marshall, Robert McCabe, Robert 
Miller, Jacob Paperman, Christopher Petruzzi, Sbirisb Seth, 
Ephraim Smith, Randy Swad 

Advisers 

The Business Advising Center, Langsdorf Hall 700, provides 
information on admissions, curriculum and graduation require^ 
ments; registration and grading prcKedures; residence and similar 
academic matters. In addition, the Accounting Department Ad- 
ministrator provides advising on curriculum content and career 
opportunities in Accounting, the CPA Examination, and Tax- 
ation. 

INTRODUCTION 

Accounting is often referred to as “the language of business.” Very 
generally, the accounting prtKess is concerned with recording, 
classifying, refx^rting and interpreting the economic data of an 
organization. These data are important to users, who may include 
managers, investors and other interested groups. Accounting 
helps in decision-making prcKesses by showing how money has 
been spent and where commitments have been made, by judging 
performance and by showing the implications of following differ- 
ent courses of action. Reliable information in a dynamic business 
environment is necessary for sound decisions concerning the 
allocation of scarce resources. Thus accounting plays a very sig- 
nificant part in our social and economic systems. 



Programs in accounting are designed for students who are inter- 
ested in careers in public accounting, industry, government, or 
service organizations, and for students who intend to work for 
advanced degrees in accounting in preparation for teaching and 
research. 


224 Accounting 


Credential Information 

TTie Department of Accounting offers courses which may be includ- 
ed in the Single Subject Waiver Program in Business. Further infor- 
mation on the requirements for teaching credentials is contained in 
the Teacher Credential Programs section of this catalog. 

Awards in Accounting 

American Society of Women Accountants, Orange County 
Chapter 

Amy Vanasse Memorial Award 
Arthur Anderson (Si Company 
BDO Seidman 
Becker CPA Review 
California Society of CPAs 
Conviser Duffy CPA Review 
Coopers &. Lybrand 
Dauberman CPA Review 
Deloitte & Touche 
Ernst & Young 
Grant Thornton Company 
Haynie Company 
KPMG Peat Marwick 
McGladrey 6i Pullen 
Moss Adams 

Outstanding Senior Award 
Scott Bankhead 6i Company 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration Degrees, Accounting Concentra- 
tion.” 

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN ACCOUNTANCY 
The Master of Science in Accountancy program provides the 
conceptual understanding and technical competence for a career 
in professional accounting. Employment opportunities include 
public accounting, industrial accounting and government. The 
program encompasses both a theoretical foundation and techni- 
cal skills. Emphasis is placed on the development of a professional 
attitude and the capacity to deal with issues of accounting policy 
and ethics. Graduates should be prepared for entry-level posi- 
tions, and for potential advancement in the profession. 

The M.S. in Accountancy program is scheduled especially for 
students who are employed full time. Courses are offered during 
the late afternoon and evening. Most students enroll on a part- 
time basis, taking two courses (6 units) per semester. 

The curriculum is designed for students with an undergraduate 
degree in business administration with a concentration in ac- 
counting. In addition to seven required accounting courses, there 
are two electives and a terminal, research-project course. Stu- 
dents not holding an undergraduate degree in accounting or 
business may apply; qualified candidates will be admitted to post 
baccalaureate unclassified standing or conditionally classified 
standing as explained in the Admissions section below. 


Cal State Fullerton is the only university in Orange County 
accredited by the American Assembly of Collegiate Schools of Business 
at both the undergraduate and graduate level. This assures a 
rigorous program, a well qualified faculty, high standards for 
students, and access to an extensive library system. The qualifica- 
tions of the M.S. in Accountancy faculty include advanced de- 
grees in accounting, taxation, and law; practical experience; and 
professional standing as CPAs, CM As, and attorneys. 

Most graduate courses in the School of Business Administration 
and Economics require ^‘classified SBAE status” and are open only 
to students with classified standing in the M.B.A., M.S. in 
Accountancy, M.S. in Taxation, M.S. in Management Science, 
or M.A. in Economics programs. 

Admission 

Students meeting the following requirements will be admitted to 
postbaccalaureate unclassified standing. 

1. Acceptable bachelor’s degree from an institution accredited 
by a regional accrediting association, or equivalent. 

2. Grade-point average of at least 2.5 in the last 60 semester 
units attempted and in good standing at the last college at- 
tended. 

Note: Postbaccalaureate unclassified students may enroll in un- 
dergraduate courses (100 through 400 level) but generally are 
ineligible for graduate business courses (500 level). Such students 
may wish to take undergraduate courses which are necessary to 
meet the requirements for classified standing (see below). Upon 
completing the requirements, the student may file an “Applica- 
tion for Change of Academic Objective — Graduate” requesting 
admission to the M.S. in Accountancy program. Admission to 
the university as a postbaccalaureate unclassified student does 
not constitute admission to the M.S. in Accountancy program, 
does not confer priority, nor does it guarantee future admission. 
Students planning to apply for admission to the M.S. in Accoun- 
tancy program should confer with the graduate adviser in the 
School of Business Administration and Economics. 

Students meeting the following additional requirements may be 
admitted to the M.S. in Accountancy program with conditional- 
ly classified standing: 

3. Combination of GPA and score on the Graduate Manage- 
ment Admission Test (GMAT) sufficient to yield a score of at 
least 950 according to one of the following formulas. Due to 
limited facilities and resources in the School of Business Adminis' 
tration and Economics, a higher score is usually required of all 
applicants. 

A. If overall undergraduate GPA is at least 2.5 and GMAT is 
at least 450, then score = (GPA x 2(30) + GMAT. 


Accounting 225 


B. If overall undergraduate GPA is below 2.5 or GMAT is 
below 450, then score = (GPA x 200) + GMAT — 50. 

C. If GPA is based on the last 60 semester units of course 
work* then score = (GPA x 2(X)) + GMAT — 1(X). 

'All work within any given quarter or semester must be included even 
though that will result in more than 60 semester units. The units to be 
included in the last 60 semester units may come only from the follow^ 
ing: ( I ) work taken in postbaccalaureate status during the last seven 
years to be used to fulfill M. S. in Accountancy course work require^ 
ments; (2) units taken under a prescribed remedial program agreed to 
by the Associate Dean of Graduate Studies, School of Business Ad' 
ministration and Economics; (3) units earned prior to the bachelor's 
degree. 

Conditionally classified students may take a limited number of 
graduate courses (500 level) subject to the approval of the gradu- 
ate adviser of the School of Business Administration and Eco- 
nomics. Students may take whatever courses are necessary to 
fulfill requirement 4 (below) while enrolled as conditionally clas- 
sified students. In addition, a maximum of 9 units (three courses) 
from the M.S. in Accountancy curriculum may be taken while in 
conditionally classified standing. 

Students meeting the following additional requirements will be 
advanced to classified standing. Such students are eligible to take 
graduate courses for which they qualify. 

4. A bachelor’s degree with a major in business administration 
and a concentration in accounting which meets the require- 
ments stated in this catalog for such degrees. The degree must 
include calculus and computer information systems equiv- 
alent to passing Mathematics 135, Business Calculus (3 units) 
and Management Science 265, Intrcxluction to Information 
Systems and Computer Programming (3 units), with grades of 
at least C. Courses in the major are to be no more than seven 
years old, and courses in the accounting concentration no 
more than five years old. Courses in the major (including the 
accounting concentration) must have at least a 3.0 (B) GPA; 
courses with grades lower than C must be repeated with at 
least a C grade. Applicants with a bachelor's degree in a field other 
than Business Administration may meet this requirement by 
completing the courses in calculus and computer information 
systems (above) with grades of at least C, courses in the 
accounting concentration, and also the Foundation Courses 
within the curriculum of the Master of Business Administra- 
tion (27 units, including Accounting 510; Business Admin 
590; Economics 515; Finance 517; Management 516, 518; 
Management Science 513, 515 and Marketing 519). Both the 
accounting concentration courses and the MBA Foundation 
Courses must have at least a 3.0 (B) GPA; accounting con- 
centration courses and Foundation Courses w'ith grades low’er 
than C must be repeated with at least a C grade. 

5. Approval of study plan. 


Curriculum 

The curriculum requires 30 semester units of course work beyond 
the baccalaureate degree. At least 24 of the 30 units required for 
the degree must be at the graduate level. A GPA of 3.0 (B) is 
required. Any study plan course in which a D is received must be 
repeated with at least a C grade regardless of the overall GPA of 
the student. 

Required Courses 

Accounting 502 Seminar in Accounting Theory (3) 
Accounting 503 Seminar in Contemporary Accounting 
Problems (3) 

Accounting 505 Seminar in Auditing (3) 

Accounting 506 Seminar in Professional Accounting 
Communications (3) 

Accounting 507 Seminar in Acctg. Information 
Systems (3) 

Accounting 521 Seminar in Admin. Accounting (3) 
Accounting 572 Seminar in Taxation of Corporations and 
Shareholders (3) 

Electives in Accounting or Related Business Fields 

Two courses (6 units) at the 400 or 5(X) level, to be selected in 
consultation with, and approved by, the program coordinator. 

Terminal Evaluation 
Accounting 597 Project (3) 

MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration Degrees, Accounting Concentra- 
tion.” 

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN TAXATION 

The Master of Science in Taxation program provides the concep- 
tual understanding and technical competence for a career in 
taxation. Employment opportunities include the tax depart- 
ments of CPA and law' firms, as well as corporations and govern- 
ment tax agencies. For those already employed in this field, the 
M.S. in Taxation program should meet the continuing education 
requirements of professional associations and licensing boards. 

The M.S. in Taxation program is scheduled especially for stu- 
dents who are employed full time. Courses are offered during the 
late afternoon and evening. Most students enroll on a part-time 
basis, taking two courses (6 units) per semester. 

The curriculum is designed for students with an undergraduate 
degree in business administration or accounting. In addition to 
six required courses in the field of taxation, there are three 
electives and a terminal, research-project course. Students not 
holding an undergraduate degree in accounting or business may 
apply; qualified candidates will be admitted to postbaccalaureate 
unclassified standing or conditionally classified standing as ex- 
plained in the Admissions section, below. 


226 Accounting 


Cal State Fullerton is the only university in Orange County 
accredited by the American Assembly of Collegiate Schools of Business 
at both the undergraduate and graduate level. This assures a 
rigorous program, a well qualified faculty, high standards for 
students, and access to an extensive library system. The qualifica- 
tions of the M.S. in Taxation faculty include advanced degrees in 
taxation, accounting, and law; practical tax experience; and 
professional standing as CPAs and attorneys. 

Most graduate courses in the School of Business Administration 
and Economics require “classified SBAE status” and are open 
only to students with classified standing in the M.B.A., M.S. in 
Accountancy, M.S. in Taxation, M.S. in Management Science, 
or M.A. in Economics programs. 

Admission 

Students meeting the following requirements will be admitted to 
postbaccalaureate unclassified standing: 

1 . Acceptable bachelor’s degree from an institution accredited 
by a regional accrediting association, or equivalent. 

2. Grade-point average of at least 2.5 in the last 60 semester 
units attempted and in good standing at the last college at' 
tended. 

Note: Postbaccalaureate unclassified students may enroll in un^ 
dergraduate courses ( 100 thru 400 level) but are generally ineligi' 
ble for graduate business courses (500 level). Such students may 
wish to take undergraduate courses which are necessary to meet 
the requirements for classified standing (see below). Upon com' 
pleting the requirements, the student may file an “Application for 
Change of Academic Objective Graduate” requesting admission 
to the M.S. in Taxation program. Admission to the university as 
a postbaccalaureate unclassified student does not constitute ad' 
mission to the M.S. in Taxation program, does not confer prior' 
ity, nor does it guarantee future admission. Students planning to 
apply for admission to the M.S. in Taxation program should 
confer with the graduate adviser in the School of Business Ad' 
ministration and Economics. 

Students meeting the following additional requirements will be 
admitted to the M.S. in Taxation program with conditionally 
classified standing: 

3. Combination of GPA and score on the Graduate Manage' 
ment Admission Test (GMAT) sufficient to yield a score of at 
least 950 according to one of the following formulas. Due to 
limited facilities and resources in the School of Business Ad' 
ministration and Economics, a higher score may be required 
of all applicants. 

A. If overall undergraduate GPA is at least 2.5 and GMAT is at 
least 450, then score = (GPA x 2CX)) -I- GMAT. 


B. If overall undergraduate GPA is below 2.5 or GMAT is 
below 450, then score = (GPA x 200) -I- GMAT — 50. 

C. If GPA is based on the last 60 semester units of course 
work* then score = (GPA x 2(X)) + GMAT — 100. 

* All work within any given quarter or semester must be included even 
though that will result in more than 60 semester units. The units to be 
included in the last 60 semester units may come only from the follow^ 
ing: ( I ) work taken in postbaccalaureate status during the last seven 
years to be used to fulfill M. S. in Taxation course work requirements: 
(2) units taken under a prescribed remedial program agreed to by the 
Associate Dean of Graduate Studies, School of Business Administra^ 
tion and Economics; (3) units earned prior to the bachelor's degree. 

Conditionally classified students may take a limited number of 
graduate courses (500 level) subject to the approval of the gradii' 
ate adviser of the School of Business Administration and Eco' 
nomics. Students may take whatever courses are necessary to 
fulfill requirement 4 (below) while enrolled as conditionally clas' 
sified students. In addition, a maximum of 9 units (three courses) 
from the M.S. in Taxation curriculum may be taken while in 
conditionally classified standing. 

Students meeting the following additional requirements will be 
advanced to classified standing. Such students are eligible to take 
graduate courses for which they qualify. 

4. A bachelor’s degree with a major in business administration 
which meets the requirements stated in this catalog for such 
degrees, and Accounting 308, Concepts of Federal Income 
Tax Accounting (or an equivalent course or work experi' 
ence). The degree must include calculus and computer pro' 
gramming equivalent to passing Mathematics 135, Business 
Calculus (3 units) and Management Science 265, IntroduC' 
tion to Information Systems and Computer Programming (3 
units), with grades of at least C. Courses in the major are to be 
no more than seven years old and must have at least a 3.0 (B) 
GPA; courses with grades lower than C must be repeated with 
at least a C grade. Applicants with a bachelor’s degree in a field 
other than Business Administration may meet this requirement 
by completing the courses in calculus and computer program' 
ming (above) with grades of at least C, Accounting 308 with a 
grade of at least C, and also the Foundation Courses within 
the curriculum of the Master of Business Administration (27 
units, including Accounting 510; Business Admin 590; EcO' 
nomics 515; Finance 517; Management 516, 518; Manage' 
ment Science 513, 515 and Marketing 519). The MBA Foun' 
dation Courses must have at least a 3.0 (B) GPA; Foundation 
Courses with grades lower than C must be repeated with at 
least a C grade. 

5. Approval of study plan. 


Accounting 227 


Curriculum 

The curriculum requires 30 semester units of course work beyond 
the baccalaureate degree. At least 21 of the 30 units required for 
the degree must be at the graduate level. A GPA of 3.0 (B) is 
required. Any study plan course in which a D is received must be 
repeated with a C grade regardless of the overall GPA of the 
student. 

Required Tax Course 

Accounting 470 Tax Research, Practice and Procedures (3) 

Electives in Taxation and Related Fields 

Five courses (15 units) to be selected in consultation with, and 

approved by, the student’s adviser. 

Available courses include but are not limited to: 

Accounting 408 Problems in Taxation (3) 

Accounting 508 Seminar in Tax Planning (3) 

Accounting 572 Seminar in Taxation of Corporations and 
Shareholders (3) 

Accounting 573 Seminar in Taxation of Property 
Transactions (3) 

Accounting 574 Seminar in Taxation of International 
Business Operations (3) 

Accounting 575 Seminar in Estate, Gift and Inheritance 
Taxes and Estate Planning (3) 

Accounting 576 Seminar in State Local Taxation (3) 
Accounting 577 Seminar in Taxation of Employee 
Q^mpensation (3) 

Accounting 578 Seminar in Taxation of 
Partnerships (3) 

Other Electives 

Courses are to be selected in consultation with, and approved by, 
the student’s adviser. 

One course (3 units) in either economics or political science and 
two courses (6 units) in either business or non-business fields. 

Note: recommended courses in economics and political science 
include Econ 517, Poli Sci 421, 519, 528. 

Terminal Evaluation 
Accounting 597 Project (3) 


Accounting Courses 

201 A Financial Accounting (3) 

Prerequisite: None. Accounting concepts and techniques essen- 
tial to the administration of a business enterprise: analyzing and 
recording financial transactions; accounting valuation and allo- 
cation practices; preparation, analysis and interpretation of fi- 
nancial statements; international accounting issues. (Not open 
to freshmen) 


20 IB Managerial Accounting (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 201 A. Introduction to managerial ac- 
counting; product costing; budgetary control and responsibility 
accounting; analysis and techniques for aiding management 
planning and control decisions; basic income tax concepts for 
planning business transactions. (Not open to freshmen) 

301A,B Intermediate Accounting (3,3) 

Prerequisites for 301 A: Accounting 201 B, a passing score on the 
accounting qualifying examination, and completion of all lower 
division business administration core courses with grades of at 
least C in each course. Prerequisite for 301 B: A grade of C or 
better in Accounting 301 A. Accounting theory; preparation of 
income statements, balance sheets and statements of changes in 
financial position; present value and amount concepts; assets, 
liabilities and stockholders equity; price-level accounting; pen- 
sions; leases; earnings per share; financial statement analysis; 
accounting changes and error analysis. 

302 Cost Accounting (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 201 B, a passing score on the account- 
ing qualifying examination, and completion of all lower division 
business administration core courses with grades of at least C in 
each course, or a grade of C or better in 301 A. Accounting 
information for management of manufacturing enterprises; cost 
records; cost behavior and allocation; product costing and inven- 
tory valuation; flexible budgeting; standard costs; responsibility 
accounting; cost planning and control; and operating decision 
analysis. 

303 Accounting for Governmental &. Nonprofit Entities (3) 
Prerequisite: Accounting 20 IB or equivalent with a grade of C or 
better. Fund accounting as applied to governmental and nonprof- 
it entities; state and federal governments, municipalities, hospi- 
tals and universities. Budgets, tax levies, revenues and appropri- 
ations, expenditures and encumbrances, various types of funds, 
and accounting statements. 

308 Concepts of Federal Income Tax Accounting (3) 
Prerequisites: Accounting 20 IB, a passing score on the account- 
ing qualifying examination, and completion of all lower division 
business administration core courses with grades of at least C in 
each course, or a grade of C or better in 301 A. Provisions, 
legislative history and implications of the federal income tax. 

358 Principles of Taxation (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 201 A or instructor permission. The 
federal tax system, federal income taxation relating to federal tax 
system, federal income taxation relating to individuals, corpora- 
tions, partnerships, and fiduciaries. Federal estate and gift taxes. 
Not open to accounting majors. 


228 Accounting 


401 Advanced Accounting (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 301 B with a grade of C or better. Busi- 
ness combinations; meaning, usefulness and methodology of con- 
solidated financial statements; investments in non-subsidiary af- 
filiates and corporate joint ventures; consolidated financial state- 
ments for overseas units of U.S. -based multinational companies; 
translations of foreign currencies. 

402 Auditing (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 30 IB and 302 with a grade of C or 
better. The auditing standards and procedures used by financial 
and operational auditors. Management information and comput- 
er systems, internal control, audit evidence, professional respon- 
sibilities and legal liabilities, standards of reporting financial 
information. 

407 Accounting Information Systems (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 301 A and 302 with a grade of C or 
better and Management Science 265 or equivalent. Alternative 
accounting systems used for the collection, organization and pre- 
sentation of information. Theory and practice of information 
processing: organizational, behavioral and mechanical. 

408 Problems in Taxation (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 308 with a grade of C or better. Federal 
income tax as it applies to corporations, partnerships, fiduciaries, 
and federal estate and gift taxes as they apply to taxable transfers. 

470 Tax Research, Practice and Procedures (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 308 with a grade of C or better. The 
methodology of tax research including case studies; the manage- 
ment of a tax practice; administration procedures governing tax 
controversies; rights and obligations of taxpayers and tax practi- 
tioners. 

495 Internship ( 1-3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 301 B (may be taken concurrently), 
Accounting 302, a major in accounting, consent of the depart- 
ment internship adviser, and at least junior standing, 2.5 GPA 
and one semester in residence at the university. Planned and 
supervised work experience. May be repeated for credit up to a 
total of six units. Credit/No Credit only. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: senior standing and approval of department chair. 
Open to qualified undergraduate students desiring to pursue di- 
rected independent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. Not open 
to students on academic probation. 

502 Seminar in Accounting Theory (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 301 B, classified SBAE status and con- 
sent of instructor. The effects of professional, governmental, 
business, and social forces on the evolution of accounting theory. 


503 Seminar in Contemporary Accounting Problems (3) 
Prerequisite: classified M.S. in Accounting status or consent of 
instructor. Current issues in financial reporting including pro- 
nouncements by the Financial Accounting Standards Board and 
the Securities and Exchange Commission. Coverage of topics 
will change as new issues in accounting emerge. 

505 Seminar in Auditing (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 402 and classified SBAE status. Audit- 
ing theory and practices; professional ethics; auditing standards; 
Securities and Exchange Commission and stock exchange regula- 
tions; auditor’s legal liability; statement trends and techniques. 

506 Seminar; Professional Accounting Communications (3) 
Prerequisite: classified M.S. in Accounting status or consent of 
instructor. Compilation and composition of accounting repeats 
and client presentations relating to accountants’ working papers, 
client engagement letters, management advisory reports and pro- 
spectuses. 

507 Seminar in Accounting Information Systems (3) 
Prerequisite: Accounting 407, or equivalent with consent of in- 
structor. Case studies of computer based accounting systems used 
by organizations such as universities, banks, industrial corpora- 
tions and CPA firms. Emphasis on accounting information, re- 
ports and internal controls. 

508 Seminar in Tax Planning (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, or 
consent of instructor. Substantive provisions of federal law; tax 
planning from a corporate viewpoint; case studies of the effect of 
federal tax law on business decisions. 

510 Financial Accounting (3) 

Prerequisite: classified SBAE status. Accumulation, organiza- 
tion, and interpretation of financial and quantitative data rel- 
evant to the activities of corporate business enterprise. 

511 Seminar in Managerial Accounting (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 201 B or 5 10, consent of instructor and 
classified SBAE status. Accounting information for management 
decisions; elements of manufacturing, distribution and service 
costs; cost systems; standard costs; cost reports; cost analysis. 

518 Seminar in International Accounting (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 201 B or 51 1 and classified SBAE sta- 
tus. Comparative analysis of accounting principles and practices 
outside the United States; international financial accounting 
standards; current problems of international financial reporting, 
accounting planning and control for international operations; 
multinational companies. 


Accounting 229 


521 Seminar in Administrative Accounting (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 302 or 511; classified SBAE status and 
consent of instructor. Integrative aspects of accounting, finarKial, 
and quantitative data for managerial decision-making; long-term, 
short-term profit planning; budgetary control; cost analysis; finan- 
cial analysis and planning; taxation; and transfer pricing. 

572 Seminar in Taxation of Corporations & Shareholders (3) 
Prerequisites: Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, or 
consent of instructor. Federal taxation relating to corporations; 
organizing, distributions, liquidations and reorganizations. 

573 Seminar in Taxation of Property Transactions (3) 
Prerequisites: Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, or 
consent of instructor. Federal taxation relating to sales, ex- 
changes and other transfers. 

574 Seminar in Taxation of International Business 
Operations (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, or 
consent of instructor. Federal taxation relating to U.S. citizens 
and corporations with foreign source income and of foreign per- 
sons with U.S. source income; planning for foreign operations. 

575 Seminar in Estate, Gift, Inheritance Taxes and Estate 
Planning (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, or 
consent of instructor. Federal and California death taxes and the 
planning of personal estates. 


576 Seminar in State and Local Taxation (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, or 
consent of instructor. Application of interstate income alloca- 
tions; multi-state tax compact; separate v. apportionment ac- 
counting; foreign country sourced income. Also, California taxes 
as applied to businesses and individuals. 

577 Seminar in Taxation of Employee Compensation (3) 
Prerequisites: Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, or 
consent of instructor. Federal taxation relating to employee com- 
pensation including pensions and profit sharing, stock options, 
ESOP’s, IRA’s, Keogh’s, maximum tax 5-year averaging, death 
benefits, group term life, etc. 

578 Seminar in Taxation of Partnerships (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, or 
consent of instructor. Federal taxation relating to partnerships, 
estates, trusts and other special entities. 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: classified SBAE status. Directed independent inqui- 
ry. Not open to students on academic probation. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status, consent of instructor and 
approval of department chair and Associate Dean of Graduate 
Studies. May be repeated for credit. Not open to students on 
academic probation. 


230 Accounting 


Business Administration 

Degrees 



INTRODUCTION 

This major prepares students for entry level positions in business 
and administration in both the private and public sectors. Career 
opportunities range from accounting, cost analysis, marketing 
research and statistical forecasting to real estate, personnel, sales 
and information systems. This curriculum also provides a founda- 
tion for advanced study. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION 

Admission to the Business Administration Major 

Admission to the Business Administration major involves two 
steps. Students who apply to the major are initially classified as 
Pre-business. After completing the lower-division core require- 
ments with grades of at least “C”, students may apply to the 
Business Administration major. Pre-business students may take 
lower-division business courses, but most upper-division courses 
are not open to Pre-business students. 

All of the following requirements must be met for the degree. 
Students must earn a grade of at least C in each course listed 
below. A C average is acceptable in some concentrations. For 
assistance in interpreting these requirements contact the Busi- 
ness Advising Center. 

Required Lower-Division Core Courses 

Business Admin 201 Business Writing (3) 
or Business Admin 20 IW Business Writing Workshop (3) 
Economics 201 Principles of Microeconomics (3) 

Economics 202 Principles of Macroeconomics (3) 


(Note: Economics 210, Principles of Economics (5), may be 
substituted for Economics 201 and Economics 202.) 


Business Administration 231 


Math 135 Business Calculus (3) 
or Math 130 A Short Course in Calculus (4) 
or Math 1 50A Analytic Geometry and Calculus (4) 
Accounting 201 A Financial Accounting (3) 

Accounting 201 B Managerial Accounting (3) 

Management 246 Business and Its Legal Environment (3) 
Manag Sci 265 Introduction to Information Systems and 
Q)mputer Programming (3) 

Collateral Requirement 

3-unit intrcxluctory stKial science course other than Economics, 
chosen from General Education section III.C. 1. 

English Proficiency Requirement 

Cal State Fullerton Examination in Writing Proficiency (EWP) 

Required Upper-Division Core Courses 

Business administration majors shall not enroll in any required 
upper-division core course until they have completed all of the 
required lower-division core courses with a grade of at least C in 
each course. Students desiring to enroll in required upper-divi- 
sion core courses while concurrently completing the last of their 
required lower-division core courses may select only Economics 
315, Intermediate Business Microeconomics (or Economics 310, 
Intermediate Microeconomics), and/or Management Science 
361, Probability and Statistical Methods in Business and Eco- 
nomics. 

The following are required: 

Econ 310 Intermediate Microeconomic Analysis (3) 
or Econ 315 Intermediate Business Microeconomics (3) 
or Econ 320 Intermediate Macroeconomic 
Analysis (3) 

Finance 320 Business Finance (3) 

Management 339 Principals of Management &. Operations (4) 
Management 340 Organizational Behavior (3) 

Manag Sci 361 Probability and Statistical Methcxls in 
Business and Economics (4) 

Manag Sci 362 Management Science Methods in Business 
and Economics (3) 

Marketing 351 Principles of Marketing (3) 

Required Concentration Courses 

A minimum of 18 units of course work is required in one concen- 
tration. See listing of concentration requirements below. 

Required Capstone Core Course 

After completing all lower and upper-division core courses, take: 
Management 449 Seminar in Strategic Management (3) 


Other Requirements, Grades and Residence 

Global Awareness Requirement. Complete one course, of at least 3 
units, in the area of Global Awareness. The course must be 
selected from the list of Approved Global Awareness Courses, 
which is available from the Business Advising Center. 


Other subjects. Complete at least 50 percent of the coursework for 
the degree in subjects other than business administration or eco- 
nomics. Complete all university requirements for the bachelor’s 
degree. 

Grade-Point Average (GPA). Maintain at least a 2.0 GPA (C 
average) in all university courses and in the concentration 
courses. Earn at least a C grade in each core course and the 
concentration courses in Accounting and Marketing. A 2.0 GPA 
is acceptable in the other concentrations. 


Grade option. Take all required core courses and all required 
concentration courses in the School of Business Administration 
and Economics for a letter grade (A,B,C,D,F). The Credit/No 
Credit grading option may not be used for these courses, and a 
grade of CR (credit) will not satisfy the requirements for the 
degree. Exception: Courses in calculus may be taken under the 
Credit/No Credit grading option, although courses taken to meet 
general education requirements must be taken for a letter grade. 


Residence. At least nine units of courses in the area of concentra- 
tion and at least 1 5 of the last 24 units of courses must be taken in 
residence at the School of Business Administration and Econom- 
ics. Students also must fulfill university residence requirements. 


Concentrations for the B.A. in Business Administration 

Business administration majors must complete the requirements 
of one concentration in addition to the degree requirements 
shown above. 

Accounting Concentration (21 units) 

All students with an accounting concentration are required to 
take the courses shown below. Before taking these courses, stu- 
dents must first complete all of the required lower division core 
courses with a grade of at least C in each course and must receive a 
passing score on the Accounting Qualifying Exam. The examina- 
tion must be passed during the two semesters prior to the semester 
of class enrollment. 


Accounting 

Accounting 

Accounting 

(3) 

Accounting 

Accounting 


301 A, B Intermediate Accounting (3,3) 

302 Cost Accounting (3) 

308 Concepts of Federal Income Tax Accounting 

402 Auditing (3) 

407 Accounting Info Systems (3) 


232 Business Administration 


and one of the following courses: 

Accounting 401 Advanced Accounting (3) 

Accounting 408 Problems in Taxation (3) 

Accounting 470 Tax Research, Practice and Procedures (3) 

Business Economics Concentration (18 units) 

All students with an economics concentration are required to 
take Econ 310 Intermediate Microeconomic Analysis (3) or 
Econ 315 Intermediate Business Microeconomics (3) as part of 
their business administration core requirements. In addition, the 
concentration requires Econ 320 Intermediate Macroeconomic 
Analysis (3) and Econ 410 Government and Business (3) and 12 
units of upper-division economics electives, 3 units of which 
must be at the 400'level. 

Students interested in economics also should consider the Bache- 
lor of Arts in Economics. 

Finance Concentration (18 units) 

All students with a finance concentration must choose one of the 
following emphases: 


Finance 442 
Finance 444 
Finance 455 


Advanced Investment Analysis (3) 
Options and Futures (3) 

Real Estate Investment Analysis (3) 


Note: To be eligible to sit for the Certified Financial Planner 
Examination, students must take all of the following: Finance 
340, 360, 410, 411, 455, and Accounting 358. 


Real Estate Emphasis (18 units) 

Finance 331 Financial Management and Computer 
Applications (3)* 

Finance 332 Theory of Corporate Finance (3) 

Finance 351 Real Estate and Urban Land Analysis (3) 
Finance 452 Real Estate Finance (3) 

Finance 453 Real Estate Valuation (3) 
and one of the following courses: 

Finance 451 Real Estate/Land Use Law — Case Studies (3) 
Finance 454 Real Estate and Urban Development (3) 
Finance 455 Real Estate Investment Analysis (3) 

Finance 456 Property Development and Real Estate Policy 
Analysis (3) 


Financial Institutions Emphasis (18 units) 

Finance 331 Financial Management and Computer 
Applications (3)' 

Finance 332 Theory of Corporate Finance (3) 

Finance 340 Introduction to Investments (3) 

Finance 425 Commercial Bank and Financial Institution 
Management (3) 

Finance 440 Money and Capital Markets (3) 
and 3 units of upper division finance electives (other than Fi- 
nance 310) 

Financial Management Emphasis (18 units) 

Finance 33 1 Financial Management and Computer 
Applications (3)* 

Finance 332 Theory of Corporate Finance (3) 

Finance 340 Introduction to Investments (3) 
and two of the following courses: 

Finance 370 International Business Finance (3) 

Finance 432 Financial Forecasting and Budgeting (3) 

Finance 433 Problems in Business Finance (3) 

and 3 units of upper division finance electives (other than 

Finance 310) 


Management Concentration (18 units) 

Students in the management concentration must choose one of 
the following emphases: 

Entrepreneurial Management (18 units) 

Management 343 Personnel Management 3) 
or Management 443 Group Dynamics (3) 

Management 345 Small Business Management (3) 
or Management 448 Seminar in Small Business Consulting 

(3) 

Management 347 Current Legal Issues in Management (3) 
Management 425 Productivity and Quality Management (3) 
and 6 units of elective course work from the following to be 
chosen in consultation with a departmental advisor: 


Management 349 
Management 435 
Management 440 
Management 441 
Management 443 
Management 444 


Law for Small Business (3) 

Servive Organizations and Operations (3) 
Emerging Issues in Management (3) 
Labor-Management Relations (3) 

Group Dynamics (3) 

Project Management (3) 


Investments and Financial Planning Emphasis (18 units) 

Finance 33 1 Financial Management and Computer 
Applications (3)’ 

Finance 332 Theory of Corporate Finance (3) 

Finance 340 Introduction to Investments (3) 
and three of the following courses: 

Finance 360 Principles of Insurance (3) 

Finance 410 Theory and Practice of Personal Financial 
Planning (3) 


General Management (18 units) 

Management 343 Personnel Management (3) 
or Management 443 Group Dynamics (3) 

Management 347 Current Legal Issues in Management (3) 
Management 425 Productivity and Quality Management (3) 
Management 440 Emerging Issues in Management (3) 

'Finance 33 IL Financial Management Lab (1) is optional and is highly recom' 
mended for students enrolled in Finance 331 


Business Administration 233 


and 6 units of elective course work from the following to be 
chosen in consultation with a departmental advisor; 


Management 344 Introduction to Management Information 
Systems (3) 

Management 345 Small Business Management (3) 
or Management 448 Seminar in Small Business Consulting 

(3) 

Management 348 Business Law (3) 

Management 349 Law for Small Business (3) 

Management 421 Operations Systems Design (3) 
Management 431 Wt^men in Management (3) 

Management 433 Advanced Tc^pics in Human Resources 
Management (3) 

Management 435 Service Organizations and Operations (3) 
Management 441 Labor Management Relations (3) 
Management 444 Project Management (3) 


Human Resources Management (18 units) 


Management 343 
Management 347 
Management 425 
Management 433 
Management (3) 
Management 441 
Management 443 


Personnel Management (3) 

Current Legal Issues in Management (3) 
Prt)ductivity and Quality Management (3) 
Advanced Ti)pics in Human Resources 

Labor Management Relations (3) 

Group Dynamics (3) 


Operations Management (18 units) 


Management 343 Personnel Management (3) 
or Management 443 Group Dynamics (3) 

Management 347 Current Legal Issues in Management (3) 
Management 421 Operations Systems Design (3) 
Management 422 Production and Inventory Control (3) 
Management 425 Prcxiuctivity and Quality Managment (3) 
and one elective from the following chosen in consultation with a 
departmental advisor: 


Management 345 Small Business Management (3) 
or Management 448 Seminar in Small Business Consulting 
(3) 

Management 410 Information Resources Management (3) 
Management 435 Service Organizations and Operations (3) 
Management 436 Government Contracts (3) 

Management 440 Emerging Issues in Management (3) 
Management 444 Project Management (3) 


Management Information Systems Concentration (24 units) 

All students with a Management Information Systems concen- 
tration are required to take; 

Management 344 Introduction to Management Information 
Systems (3) 

Management 454 MIS Analysis and Design (3) 

Manag Sci 270 File Concepts and COBOL Programming (3) 


Manag Sci 309 Elements of Information Systems Design (3) 
Manag Sci 365 Advanced BASIC Programming (3) or 
Manag Sci 370 Advanced COBOL Programming (3) 
Manag Sci 408 Database Management Systems (3) 

Manag Sci 409 Telecommunications and Business 
Applications (3) 


One course selected from the following: 

Management 410 Information Resources Management (3) 
Manag Sci 365 Advanced BASIC Programming (3) or 
Manag Sci 370 Avanced COBOL Programming (3) 
Manag Sci 41 1 Advanced Microcomputer Concepts and 
Applications (3) 

Manag Sci 415 Decision Support and Expert Systems (3) 
Manag Sci 418 Privacy and Security (3) 


Management Science Concentration (18 units) 

All students with a management science concentration are re- 
quired to take: 


Manag Sci 440 Intermediate Management Science Models 
(3) 

Manag Sci 441 Intermediate Statistical Methods (3) 
and at least 12 units of upper-division management science elec- 
tives chosen from the following: 


Manag Sci 422 Surveys and Sampling Design and 
Applications (3) 

Manag Sci 448 Computer Simulation in Business and 
Economics (3) 

Manag Sci 461 Statistical Theory for Management Science 
(4) 


Manag Sci 465 
(3) 

Manag Sci 467 
Manag Sci 472 
Manag Sci 473 
Manag Sci 475 


Linear Programming in Management Science 


Statistical Quality Qmtrol (3) 

Design of Experiments (3) 

Applied Statistical Forecasting (3) 
Multivariate Analysis (3) 

Manag Sci 490 Queuing and Stochastic Models in Business 
and Economics (3) 


Marketing Concentration (18 units) 

Required Courses (9 units) 

Marketing 353 Marketing Analysis (3) 
Marketing 370 Buyer Behavior (3) 
Marketing 379 Marketing Research (3) 


234 Business Administration 


Electives (6 units) 

Choose two from the following: 

Marketing 401 Professional Selling (3) 

Marketing 405 Managing Advertising (3) 

Marketing 415 Managing the Sales Force (3) 

Marketing 425 Retail Marketing Strategy (3) 

Marketing 435 Business Marketing Management (3) 
Marketing 445 Multinational Marketing Strategies (3) 
Marketing 465 Managing Services Marketing (3) 

Marketing 475 Export Marketing Strategies (3) 

Capstone Course (3 units) 

Marketing 489 Developing Marketing Strategies (3) 

MINOR IN BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

The minor provides a basic understanding of the role of business 
in society and the methods used by business. This curriculum also 
provides a basis for advanced study. A working knowledge of 
algebra is necessary for several of the required courses. 

Business administration minors shall not enroll in any required 
upper-division course (in the minor) until they have completed 
all of the required lower-division courses (in the minor) with a 
grade of at least C in each course. Students must earn a grade of at 
least C in each course required for the minor. 

Required Lower-Division Courses 

Accounting 201 A, B Accounting (3,3) 

Economics 201 Principles of Microeconomics (3) 

Economics 202 Principles of Macroeconomics (3) 
or Economics 210 Principles of Economics (5) instead of 
Econ 201 and Econ 202 

Management 246 Business and Its Legal Environment (3) 
Management Science 265 Introduction to Information 
Systems and Computer Programing (3) 

Required Upper-Division Courses 

Special Notice: Enrollment in these courses requires the comple- 
tion of all lower-division minor requirements with a grade of C or 
better in each course. 

Finance 320 Business Finance (3) 

Marragement 339 Principles of Management 6i Operations (4) 
or Management 340 Organizational Behavior (3) 

Marketing 351 Principles of Marketing (3) 

Economics Majors Minoring in Business Administration: Economics 
Majors can complete a minor in business administration by tak- 
ing Accounting 201 B, Management 246, Finance 320, Manage- 
ment 339 or 340 and Marketing 351. All other required courses 
for the minor aie required for the major in Economics. 


MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION DEGREE 

The M.B.A. degree program is accredited by the American Assem- 
bly of Collegiate Schools of Business. This assures a rigorous, in- 
depth program, covering the full spectrum of business administra- 
tion. Accreditation also indicates a well-qualified faculty, high 
standards for students, and access to computing and an extensive 
library system. 

Programs of Study 

The School of Business Administration and Economics offers two 
plans for the M.B.A. degree. 

The M.B.A. Generalist Plan is designed for students with little 
or no course work in business administration. The curriculum 
surveys the entire field of business administration, preparing stu- 
dents for general management responsibilities. 

The M.B.A. Specialist Plan is designed for students with recent 
course work (or an undergraduate degree) in business administra- 
tion; or for those who wish to include a specialized area of con- 
centration in their curriculum; and/or for those unable to follow 
the structure of the M.B.A. Generalist Plan. Some courses may 
be waived on the basis of equivalent undergraduate course work. 
The areas of concentration are accounting, business economics, 
finance, international business, management, management sci- 
ence and marketing. 

The M. B. A. program is scheduled especially for students who are 
employed full time. Courses are offered during the late afternoon 
and evening. Most students enroll on a part-time basis, taking 
two courses (6 units) per semester. 

Most graduate courses in the School of Business Administration 
and Economics require “classified SBAE status” and are open 
only to students with classified standing in the M.B.A., M.S. in 
Accountancy, M.S. in Management Science, M.S. in Taxation 
or M.A. in Economics programs. 

Admission 

Students meeting the following requirements will be admitted to 
postbaccalaureate-unclassified standing: 

1 . Acceptable bachelor’s degree from an appropriately accredit- 
ed institution, or equivalent. 

2. Grade-point average of at least 2.5 in the last 60 semester 
units attempted and in good standing at last college attended. 

Note: Postbaccalaureate-unclassified students may enroll in un- 
dergraduate courses ( 100 thru 400 level) but are generally ineligi- 
ble for graduate business courses (500 level). Such students may 
wish to take undergraduate courses which are necessary to meet 
the requirements for classified standing (see below). Upon com- 
pleting the requirements, the student may file an “Application for 
Change of Academic Objective-Graduate” requesting admission 


Business Administration 235 


to the M.B. A. program. Admission to the university as a post' 
baccalaureate'Unclassified student does not constitute admis' 
sion to the M.B. A. program, does not confer priority, nor does it 
guarantee future admission. Students planning to apply for ad- 
mission to the M.B. A. program should confer with the graduate 
adviser in the Sch(K)l of Business Administration and Economics. 

Students meeting the following additional requirements will be 
admitted to the M.B. A. program with conditionally classified 
standing: 

3. Admission into the MBA program is based upon an analysis of 
the following quantitative and qualitative considerations: 

A. A combination of GPA and Graduate Management Ad- 
mission Test (GMAT) score, sufficient to yield a mini- 
mum score of 1000 according to one of the following 
formulas. Due to limited space, a higher minimum score 
is usually required of all applicants. 

1. If overall undergraduate GPA is at least 2.5 and 
GMAT is at least 450, then score = (GPA x 200) -f 
GMAT. 

2. If overall undergraduate GPA is below 2. 5 or GMAT is 
below 450, then score = (GPA x 2(X)) -K GMAT 
-50. 

B. A score in the top three-fourth’s of both the Verbal and 
Quantitative areas of the GMAT. 

C. A minimum TOEFL score of 570 (international students 
only). 

D. Review by the MBA admissions committee of the follow- 
ing: 

1 . Academic preparation for graduate study 

2. Any prior work experience 

3. Two letters of reference 

4. A “Statement of Purpose” in pursuing the MBA, to be 
submitted by applicant 

Note: Conditionally classified students may take a limited num- 
ber of graduate courses (5(X) level), subject to the approval of the 
graduate adviser of the School of Business Administration and 
Economics. Students are expected to advance promptly to classi- 
fied standing. In particular, any deficiencies in calculus or com- 
puter programming must be removed during the first 12 months 
of study. Students w'ho do not do so will not be allowed to 
continue in the program. 

Students meeting the following additional requirements will be 
advanced to classified standing. Such students are eligible to take 
graduate courses for which they are qualified. 


4. Proficiency in calculus and computer programming equiv- 
alent to passing Mathematics 135, Business Calculus (3 
units), and Management Science 265, Introduction to Infor- 
mation Systems and Computer Programming (3 units), with 
grades of at least C. Students with work experience in these 
fields may demonstrate proficiency by passing a challenge 
examination and should consult the chair of the Management 
Science Department for details. 

5. Approval of study plan. • 

Curriculum — M.B.A./Generalist Plan 

The M.B.A./Generalist curriculum includes 14' 17 courses (42- 

51 units). 

Any deficiencies in calculus or computer programming must be 
removed within one year. Any study plan course with a grade 
lower than C must be repeated with at least a C grade, regardless 
of the overall GPA of the student. A 3.0 GPA (B) is required in 
study plan courses and over all applicable course work. 

Up to nine units of foundation courses may be waived on the basis 
of equivalent undergraduate course work providing the proposed 
courses are no more than seven years old and have at least a C 
grade with an overall 3.0 GPA (B). Courses waived beyond nine 
units must be replaced by an advanced course in the same disci- 
pline. 

Foundation Courses 

Accounting 510 Financial Accounting (3) 

Business Admin 590 Strategic Management (3) 

Economics 515 The Price System and Resource 
AlltKation (3) 

Finance 517 Managerial Finance (3) 

Management 516 Organizational Theory and Management of 
Operations (3) 

Management 518 Legal Environment of Business (3) 

Manag Sci 513 Statistical Analysis (3) 

Manag Sci 515 Management of Information in the Corporate 
Environment (3) 

Marketing 519 Marketing Management (3) 

Adtanced Courses 

All advanced courses must be at the graduate level. 

Accounting 511 Seminar in Managerial Accounting (3) 
Economics 521 Macroeconomic Theory and Policy (3) 
Finance 523 Seminar in Corporate Financial Management 
(3) 

Management 524 Seminar in Organizational Behavior and 
Administration (3) 

Manag Sci 514 Decision Models for Business and Economics 
(3) 

Marketing 525 Seminar in Marketing Problems (3) 

500-level elective chosen from any of the six SBAE 
departments 


236 Business Administration 


Terminal Evaluation 

Business Admin 591 Comprehensive Business (3) 

Complete the individual written project in Business Admin 591 
with grade of “B” or better. 

A comprehensive examination may serve as an option to the 
individual written project. 

Curriculum M.B.A./Specialist Plan 

The M.B. A. /Specialist curriculum includes a concentration in a 
specialized area and requires from 33 to 60 units of graduate 
course work. Students with a bachelor’s degree in business ad- 
ministration may be able to complete the program with the mini- 
mum of 33 units. Students with little or no recent course work in 
business administration may require 60 units. Any deficiencies in 
calculus or computer programming must be removed within one 
year. Any study plan course with a grade lower than C must be 
repeated with at least a C grade, regardless of the overall GPA of 
the student. A 3.0 GPA (B) is required in study plan courses and 
over all applicable course work. 

Foundation Courses 

Foundation courses may be waived on the basis of equivalent 
undergraduate course work, providing that the equivalent courses 
are no more than seven years old and have grades of at least C 
with a GPA of at least B. 

Accounting 510 Financial Accounting (3) 

Business Admin 590 Strategic Management (3) 

Economics 515 Price System & Resource Allocation (3) 
Finance 517 Managerial Finance (3) 

Management 516 Organizational Theory and Management of 
Operations (3) 

Management 518 Legal Environment of Business (3) 

Manag Sci 513 Statistical Analysis (3) 

Manag Sci 514 Decision Models for Business and Economics 
(3) 

Manag Sci 5 1 5 Management of Information in the Corporate 
Environment (3) 

Marketing 519 Marketing Management (3) 

A list of equivalent undergraduate courses is available from the 
graduate adviser. In many cases, students with a recent bachelor’s 
degree in business administration from an accredited university 
will be able to waive all foundation courses. 

Advanced Courses 

All courses in this group must be taken at the graduate level. The 
Management Science seminar will be waived for students who 
have successfully completed both Management Science 513 and 
514 (but not for students who have taken Management Science 
361 and/or 362). Students with a concentration in international 
business are required to take only five of the following courses: 

Accounting 511 Sem in Managerial Accounting (3) 


Note: Students who have satisfactorily completed a course in 
cost accounting must substitute Accounting 521 Sem in Ad- 
ministrative Accounting (3). 

Econ 521 Macroeconomic Theory and Policy (3) 

Note: Economics 521 is not open to students with credit in 
intermediate macroeconomics. 

Finance 523 Seminar in Corporate Financial Mgmt (3) 
Management 524 Seminar in Organizational Behavior and 
Administration (3) 

Manag Sci 526 Forecasting, Decision Analysis, and 
Experimental Design (3) 

or Manag Sci 550 Special Topics on Information Systems 
Design and Data Communication (3) 
or Manag Sci 560 Advanced Deterministic Models (3) 
or Manag Sci 561 Advanced Probabilistic Models (3) 
Marketing 525 Seminar in Marketing Problems (3) 

Concentration Courses (except international business) 

12 units in one of the following areas of concentration or if no 
concentration is desired, 12 units in a combination of courses 
from the following: 

Accounting Management 

Business Economics Management Science 

Finance Marketing 

At least 6 units of the concentration courses must be taken at the 
5(X)- level. Concentration courses are to be approved by the de- 
partment chair concerned, or designee within the department, 
and the Associate Dean, Graduate Studies, School of Business 
Administration and Economics. If no concentration is desired, 
the combination must be approved by the Associate Dean, Grad- 
uate Studies. 

Note: The accounting concentration electives must cover the 
following areas: Financial Accounting and Theory, Accounting 
Information Systems, Auditing, and Taxation. At least nine 
units must be at the graduate level. 

Concentration Courses International Business 
Five of the following courses (15 units) are required, including at 
least 9 units at the graduate (5(X)) level. (Note: students with an 
international business concentration take only five of the courses 
listed above under Advanced Courses. ) 

Accounting 518 Seminar in International 
Accounting (3) 

Economics 531 International Economics (3) 

Finance 570 Seminar in International Financial 
Management (3) 

Management 547 Comparative Management (3) 

Marketing 445 Multinational Marketing Strategies (3) 

Elective (3 units) to be approved by the international business 
advisor. Recommended electives include selected courses in His- 
tory, Political Science, Communications, Geography and Chi- 
cano Studies. 


Business Administration 237 


Termincd Requirements 

Business Admin 591 Comprehensive Business Management 
(3) 

Complete the individual project in Business Admin 591 with a 
grade of “B” or better. A comprehensive examination may serve 
as an option to the individual written project. 

In exceptional cases, a thesis (Business Administration 598, 
Thesis) may also serve as an option for the comprehensive exami- 
nation. See the graduate adviser for details. 


Business Administration 
Courses 

201 Business Writing (3) (Formerly 301) 

Prerequisite: English 101 or equivalent (with a grade of C or 
better). Principles of effective writing in business. Extensive 
practices in various forms of business writing. Case studies. In- 
structional fee. Students may not receive credit for both Bus Ad 
201 and Bus Ad 201W. 

20 IW Business Writing Workshop (3) (Formerly 30 IW) 
Prerequisite: English 101 or equivalent (with a grade of C or 
better). Principles of effective writing in business. Extensive 
practice in various forms of business writing. Case studies. Uses 
word prcKessing facilities in computer lab. (2 hours lecture: 2 
hours activity. ) Students may not receive credit for both Bus Ad 
201 and Bus Ad 20 IW. 


499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Open to qualified students 
desiring to pursue directed independent inquiry. May be repeated 
for credit. Not open to students on academic probation. 

590 Strategic Management (3) 

Prerequisites: classified M. B. A. status, within nine units of com- 
pleting study plan. Focuses on importance of monitoring changes 
in environment(s) facing business and incorporating social, eco- 
nomic, and technological change into corporate decision-mak- 
ing process. Emphasizes use of analysis tools from other MBA 
classes with focus on data sources and methods for effective envi- 
ronmental scanning and emphasis on business ethics and social 
responsibility, international competitiveness, and changes in le- 
gal environment. 

591 Comprehensive Business Management (3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status, within six units of comple- 
tion of study plan and in final semester of program. Studies 
complex business problems and solutions. Builds skills in inte- 
grating knowledge from functional areas and applying them in an 
original and organized form to a range of business problems aris- 
ing from changing technology, competitive market conditions, 
social changes, government actions. Includes article analysis, 
case analysis, a research project, individual and group reports and 
oral and written presentations. The individual project or an 
optional comprehensive exam will fulfill the terminal degree 
requirement. 

598 Thesis (3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status and consent of associate 
dean. Individual research under supervision. See “Theses and 
Projects" in this catalog for university requirements. 


238 Business Administration 


Department of 
Economics 



Department Chair: Anil Puri 
Director, Center for Economic Education: 

Morteza Rahmatian 

Department Office: Langsdqrf Hall 702 
Center for Economic Education: 

Langsdorf Hall 530 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Business Administration 
Concentration in Business Economics 

Bachelor of Arts in Economics 
Minor in Economics 
Master of Business Administration 
Concentration in Business Economics 

Master of Arts in Economics 
Faculty 

Robert Ayanian, Victor Brajer, Kwang'wen Chu, James Dietz, 
Vincent Dropsy, Andrew Gill, jane Hall, Walter Hettich, 
Stewart Long, Robert Michaels, Radha Murthy, Howard 
Naish, Anil Puri, Dipankar Purkayastha, Morteza Rahmatian, 
Eric Solberg, Murray Wolfson, David Wong 

Advisers 

The Business Advising Center, Langsdorf Hall 700, provides 
information on admission, curriculum and graduation require- 
ments; registration and grading procedures; residence and similar 
academic matters. In addition, all economics majors should see a 
faculty adviser in the Department of Economics for information 
on career opportunities and advanced study. Undergraduates 
should consult the department office for the name of their faculty 
adviser. Graduate students should consult the graduate coordina- 
tor, Walter Hettich. 


INTRODUCTION 

As a scholarly discipline, economics is over two centuries old, 
dating back to the French physiocrats and Adam Smith in the 
18th century. The nature of economic analysis has been de- 
scribed by John Maynard Keynes as “ . . .a method rather than a 
doctrine, an apparatus of the mind, a technique of thinking 
which helps its possessors to draw correct conclusions.” 


Economics 239 


Economic methods are used to study a basic question which faces 
all societies: how should limited resources be used to produce 
gocxls and how should that production be distributed? Not all 
wants can be satisfied because resources and knowledge are limit' 
ed. Therefore, societies are faced with choices. These choices are 
made in different ways: by custom; by command and centralized 
control; or by a system of markets and prices as in our mixed 
economy. Economists examine alternative solutions to the basic 
economic problem by analyzing costs and benefits of changing 
existing patterns of resource use. 

Economists work in many specialties including money and bank- 
ing, international trade and finance, labt^r, public finance, indus' 
trial policy, business cycles and forecasting. Social issues and 
problems such as ptwerty, crime, discrimination, immigration, 
aging, energy, pollution and education are typical subjects of 
faculty research. 

The faculty of the Economics l")epartment participate in pro- 
grams leading to both undergraduate and graduate degrees. One 
undergraduate program leads to a bachelor of arts degree with a 
major in economics, which fcKuses on economics as a social 
science. Another undergraduate program leads to a bachelor of 
arts degree with a major in business administration and a concen- 
tration in business economics and requires a larger number of 
business courses. B<.)th programs prepare the student for a variety 
of career oppK^rtunities in business and government as well as 
advanced studies in economics, business, public administration 
and law. Graduate study is offered in economics, leading to a 
master of arts degree. Alternatively, students may follow the 
Master of Business Administration curriculum, with a concentra- 
tion in business economics. 

Credential Information 

For students interested in a teaching credential, the Department 
of Economics offers courses which may be included in the Multi- 
ple Subjects ^X4liver Program; the Single Subject Waiver Program 
in Business; and in the Supplementary Authorization Programs 
in Economics and in Economics and Consumer Education. 

Further information on the requirements for teaching credentials 
is found in the Teaching Credential Programs section of this 
catalog and also is available from the Department Office for 
Elementary and Bilingual Education and for Secondary Educa- 
tion. Students interested in exploring careers in teaching at the 
elementary or secondary school levels should contact the Office 
of Admission to Teacher Education, Education Classroom 207. 

Awards in Economics 

The Norman Tmnshend-Zellner Award 
Wall Street Journal Student Achievement Award 
Outstanding Senior in Economics 
Outstanding Graduate Student in Economics 
Ford Foundation Baccalaureate Incentive Award 


BACHELOR OF ARTS IN ECONOMICS 

Admission to the Economics major involves two steps. Students 
who apply to the major are initially classified as Pre-economics. 
After completing the lower-division core requirements with 
grades of at least “C”, students may apply to the Economics major. 
Pre-economics students may take lower-division business and 
economics courses, but most upper-division courses are not open 
to Pre-economics students. 

All of the following requirements must be met for the degree. Students 
must earn a grade of at least C in each course listed below. 
However, a C average will be acceptable in the upper division 
economics electives. For assistance in interpreting these require- 
ments contact the Business Advising Center, Langsdorf Hall 
700. Students should also contact their faculty adviser in the 
Economics Department prior to or during their first semester. 

Required Lower- Division Courses 

Economics 201 Principles of Microeconomics (3) 

Economics 202 Principles of Macroeconomics (3) 

Note: Economics 210, Principles of Economics (5), may be sub- 
stituted for Economics 201 and 202. 


Accounting 201 A Financial Accounting (3) 

Bus Administration 201 Business Writing (3) 
or Bus Administration 201 W Business Writing Workshop (3) 

Math 135 Business Calculus (3) 
or Math 130 A Short Course in Calculus (4) 
or Math 150A Analytic Geometry and Calculus (4) 
Economics 440 Introduction to Econometrics (3) 
or Math 150B Analytic Geometry and Calculus (4) 
or Accounting 20 IB Managerial Accounting (3) 

Manag Sci 265 Introduction to Information Systems and 
Computer Programming (3) 

English Proficiency Requirement 

Cal State Fullerton Examination in Writing Proficiency (EWP). 

Required Upper- Division Courses 

Economics 310 Intermed Microeconomic Analysis (3) 
Economics 320 Intermed Macroeconomic Analysis (3) 

Manag Sci 361 Probability and Statistical Methods in 
Business and Economics (4) 

and 18 units of upper-division economics electives, 6 units of 
which must be 400 level. No more than 3 units of independent 
study may be used to meet the 400 level electives requirement. 


240 Economics 


Other Requirements, Grades and Residence 

Other Subjects. Complete at least 50 percent of the coursework for 
the degree outside the School of Business Administration and 
Economics. The department recommends that these courses be 
from the social sciences and mathematics. Students planning to 
do graduate work in economics are advised to take Math 150A,B; 
Economics 440 and Economics 441. Complete all university re- 
quirements for the bachelor’s degree. 

Grade^Point Average (GPA). Attain at least a 2.0 GPA (C aver- 
age) in all university courses and in the upper division economics 
electives. Earn at least a C grade in each course required for the 
major (other than the upper division economics electives). 

Grade Option. Take all required courses in economics, accounting 
and management science for a letter grade (A,B,C,D,F). The 
credit/no credit grading option may not be used for these courses, 
and a grade of CR (credit) will not satisfy the requirements for 
the degree. Exception: courses in calculus may be taken under the 
credit/no credit grading option, although courses taken to meet 
general education requirements must be taken for a letter grade. 

Residence. At least 1 5 units of courses must be taken in residence 
at the School of Business Administration and Economics at Cal 
State Fullerton. Also fulfill university residence requirements. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration, Business Economics Concentra- 
tion.” 

MINOR IN ECONOMICS 

The economics minor covers the basics in the discipline of eco- 
nomics and gives students the opportunity to explore personal 
interests through electives. Note that a course in calculus (Math 
135 or equivalent) is prerequisite to Economics 310 and 320. 
Students must earn a grade of at least C in each course listed 
below. 

Required Lower-Division Courses 

Economics 201 Principles of Microeconomics (3) 

Economics 202 Principles of Macroeconomics (3) 

Note: Economics 210, Principles of Economics (5), may be sub- 
stituted for Economics 201 and Economics 202. 

Required Upper-Division Courses 
Economics 310 Inter Microeconomics Analysis (3) 
or Economics 315 Intermediate Business Microeconomics 

(3) 

Economics 320 Intermediate Macroeconomics Analysis (3) 
and 9 units of upper division economics electives 

Note: Students with a major in business administration and a 
concentration other than economics, who wish to minor in eco- 
nomics, must take Economics 201 and 202 (or 210) and 310 as 


part of their major. For such students, these requirements in the 
minor will be waived and the minor will consist of Economics 320 
and nine units of upper-division economics electives. Students 
with a major in business administration and a concentration in 
business economics may not also minor in economics. 

MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration, Business Economics Qmcentration.” 

MASTER OF ARTS IN ECONOMICS 
This program provides preparation for professional careers in 
private industry and government and provides a foundation for 
further graduate work at the doctoral level. Full-time and part- 
time students can be accommodated. Most of the courses are 
scheduled in the evening. 

The curriculum is designed for students with an undergraduate 
degree in business administration or economics, and consists of 
10 courses (30 units). Provided that all prerequisites have been 
satisfied, the program may be completed in one year (full time) or 
V/i years (part time). 

The required courses progress from economic theory through 
economic model building and forecasting to the seminar in which 
the student prepares a thesis applying economic theory and econ- 
ometric methods to a specific area of investigation. The curricu- 
lum also includes five courses (15 units) of electives. 

Most graduate courses in the School of Business Administration 
and Economics require classified “SBAE status” and are open 
only to students with classified standing in the M. A. in Econom- 
ics, M.B.A., M.S. in Management Science, orM.S. in Taxation 
programs. 

Admission 

Students meeting the following requirements will be admitted to 
postbaccalaureate-unclassified standing: 

1. Acceptable bachelor’s degree from appropriately accredited 
institution, or equivalent. 

2. Grade-point average of at least 2.5 in the last 60 semester units 
attempted, and in good standing at last college attended. 

Postbaccalaureate-unclassified students may enroll in undergrad- 
uate courses (100 thru 4(X) level) but are generally ineligible for 
graduate economics courses (5(X) level). Such students may wish 
to take undergraduate courses which are necessary to meet the 
requirements for classified standing (see below). Upon complet- 
ing the requirements, the student may file an Application for 
Change of Academic Objective — Graduate requesting admis- 
sion to the M.A. in Economics program. Admission tothe uni- 
versity as a postbaccalaureate — unclassified student Joes not 
constitute admission to the program, does not confer priority, 
nor does it guarantee future admission. Students planning to 
apply for admission to the program should confer with the gradu- 
ate adviser in the Department of Economics. 


Economics 241 


Students meeting the following additional requirements will be 
admitted with conditionally classified standing: 

3. Overall undergraduate GPA of at least 2.5. 

4. An average score of 500 on the Graduate Record Examination 
(G.R.E.). 

Conditionally classified students may take a limited number of 
courses at the graduate level, subject to the approval of the 
graduate adviser of the Department of Economics. Students are 
expected to advance promptly to classified standing. 

Students meeting the following additional requirements will be 
advanced to classified standing. Such students are eligible to take 
graduate courses for which they are qualified. 

5. Completion of the following courses at Cal State Fullerton (or 
equivalent courses at other institutions) with a grade-point 
average of at least 3.0 (B average). The course in calculus 
must have a grade of at least C. 


Principles of Microeconomics (3) 
Principles of Macroeconomics (3) 
Intermediate Microeconomic 

Intermediate Macroeconomic 


Economics 201 
Economics 202 
Economics 310 
Analysis (3) 

Economics 320 
Analysis (3) 

Economics 420 Money and Banking (3) 
or three units of upper-division electives 
Manag Sci 361 Probability and Statistical Methods in 
Business and Economics (4) 

Mathematics 135 Business Calculus (3) 


6. Approval of study plan. 

Curriculum 

Students are urged to meet as soon as possible with the graduate 
adviser in the Department of Economics to file a study plan and 
advance to classified standing. 

Any study plan course in which a D grade is received must be 
repeated with at least a C grade, regardless of the overall grade- 
point average of the student. 


Required Core Courses ( 12 units) 


Economics 440 
Economics 441 
Economics 502 
Economics 503 


Introduction to Econometrics (3) 
Introduction to Mathematical Economics (3) 
Advanced Microeconomic Analysis (3) 
Advanced Macroeconomic Analysis (3) 


Area & Elective Courses (15 units) 

Area courses require nine units chosen from the student’s field of 
interest. Coursework may focus on the following areas: (1) envi- 
ronmental and natural resource economics (Economics 416, 462, 


590), (2) international economics and finance (Economics 411, 
590), and (3) applied economic analysis involving course work 
related to industrial organization and labor (Economics 505, 410, 
412, 413, 446) or the public sector (Economics 505, 416, 417, 
420, 421). 

Among field and elective courses, six units must be taken at the 
500 level and at least six units must be in economics. The re- 
maining units in the student’s program can be chosen from course 
offerings in Economics or related areas of study. 

Terminal Evaluation (3 units) 

Economics 598 Thesis Research (3) 


Economics Courses 

100 The Economic Environment (3) 

The application of economics to the problems of unemployment 
and inflation, the distribution of income, competition and mo- 
nopoly, the role of government in the economy, and other policy 
issues. Not open to prebusiness, business administration majors 
or minors, economics majors or minors, or international business 
majors. 

201 Principles of Microeconomics (3) 

Principles of individual consumer and producer decision-making 
in various market structures; the price system; market perfor- 
mance and government policy. (CAN ECON 4) 


202 Principles of Macroeconomics (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 201. Principles of macroeconomic anal- 
ysis and policy; unemployment and inflation; financial institu- 
tions; international trade; economic growth; comparative sys- 
tems. (CAN ECON 2) 

210 Principles of Economics (5) 

Prerequisite: Open only to junior transfers. (Duplicates 201 and 
202.) Economic analysis and policy. The central problem of 
scarcity, economic institutions of the United States, resource 
allocation and income distribution, economic stability and 
growth, the role of public policy, and international applications. 


310 Intermediate Microeconomic Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 202 or 210 and Mathematics 135; core- 
quisite Management Science 361 or equivalent. Rational deci- 
sion-making behavior of consumers and firms and price and out- 
put determination in markets. Primarily for Economics majors, 
but open to all students who qualify. 


242 Economics 


315 Intermediate Business Microeconomics (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 202 or Economics 210 and Mathemat' 
ics 135. Corequisite: Management Science 361 or equivalent. 
Analysis of business decisions in alternative market structures 
with special emphasis on problem solving in a business context 
using economic concepts and methods. Not open to Economics 
majors. Students may not receive credit for both Economics 310 
and 315. 

320 Intermediate Macroeconomic Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 202 or 210 and Math 135; Corequisite: 
Management Science 361 or equivalent. The determinants of 
the level of national income, employment and prices, and mone- 
tary and fiscal policies. 

330 Comparative Economic Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210. Alternative econom- 
ic systems; their theoretical foundations, actual economic insti- 
tutions, and achievements and failures. Contrast between social- 
ist and capitalist systems. 

331 The Soviet Economy (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210. The structure and 
performance of the Soviet economy; the problems of allocating 
scarce resources and sustaining economic growth in a planned 
economy. 

332 Economies of the Pacific Rim (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210. Dimensions of indus- 
trialization, agriculture, investment, human resources, and trade 
in economies of the Far East (including Japan and China), India, 
and related nations of the Pacific Rim. 

333 Economic Development: Analysis and Case Studies (3) 
Prerequisite: Economics 1(X) or 201 or 210. The processes of 
economic growth with references to developing areas. Capital 
formation, resource allocation, relation to the world economy, 
economic planning and institutional factors, with case studies. 

334 Economics of Latin America and the Caribbean (3) 
Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210. Examines regional 
economic problems within an international context: depen- 
dence, industrialization and the international corporation; agri- 
culture; regional cooperation; inflation; trade and debt problems. 
Major economic thinkers will be discussed. 

335 The International Economy (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 1(X) or 201 or 210. The theory, practice 
and institutions of the international economy. International 
trade and investment, balance of payments, foreign exchange 
rates, multi-national enterprise, international economic policy. 
Current trade issues: European Community, trade with develop- 
ing countries. Eastern Europe, and the states of the former Soviet 
Union; General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT) and 
other major trade agreements. 


350 American Economic History (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210. The development of 
American economic institutions; economic problems, economic 
growth and economic welfare. 

351 European Economic History (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 1(X) or 201 or 210. The evolution of 
European economic institutions and their relation to the devel- 
opment of industry, commerce, transportation and finance in the 
principal European countries. 

361 Urban Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210. Theory and analysis 
of the urban economy, urban economic problems and policy. 

362 Environmental Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210, or consent of instruc- 
tor. Economic analysis of environmental problems and related 
issues: externalities, property rights, social costs and benefits, 
user cost, rent and decision making under uncertainty. 

363 The Economics of Energy (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210. Economic theory 
applied to energy problems, the impact of energy development on 
economic structure, and the role of government in allocating 
energy resources and influencing their use. 

410 Government and Business (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 310 or equivalent. Business organiza- 
tion, conduct and performance; the rationale and impact of pub- 
lic policy on business and business activities, including the regu- 
lated industries, sick industries and antitrust policy. 

411 International Trade (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 310 or 315 or equivalent. The theory of 
international gains from free trade, effects of tariff and non-tariff 
barriers, and conduct of commercial policy. The balance of pay- 
ments, the theories of exchange rate determination, and other 
international economic issues. 

412 Labor Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 310 or equivalent. Labor supply and 
demand, labor force participation, employment, unemployment, 
human capital, wage differentials, disadvantaged labor market 
groups, discrimination and wage-related income transfers. 

413 Law and Economics (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 310 or 315. An economic analysis of 
the common law — property, contract, and tort — focusing on 
the use of microeconomic theory to study the economic efficien- 
cy characteristics and effects of these laws. An emphasis will be 
placed on the analysis of specific legal cases. 


Economics 243 


416 Benefit Cost and Microeconomic Policy Analysis (3) 
Prerequisites: Economics 310 or equivalent. Application of mi- 
croeconomic models and welfare economics to public policy. 
Concepts of economic efficiency, economic surplus and equity. 
Measurement of policy effects, including benefit-cost analysis, 
with applications to selected policy areas such as education and 
environmental programs. 

417 Public Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 310 or equivalent. Government finance 
at the federal, state and local levels; the impact of taxation and 
spending on resource allocation, income distribution, stabiliza- 
tion and growth. 

420 Money and Banking (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 320 or equivalent. The money supply 
process and the impact of monetary policy on economic activity. 

421 Monetary and Fiscal Policy (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 320 or equivalent. The techniques of 
monetary and fiscal pcdicy; of their relative roles in promoting 
economic stability and growth. 

431 International Macroeconomics and Growth (3) 
Prerequisites: Economics 320. Macroeconomic analysis of the 
open economy: the impact of stabilization policies in a global 
economy, the role of the balance of payments, the international 
monetary system and growth in less developed countries. 

440 Introduction to Econometrics (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 202 (or 210), Manag Sci 361 or equiv- 
alent. Economic measurement: specification and estimation of 
econometric models; statistical methods in economic research. 

441 Introduction to Mathematical Economics (3) 
Prerequisites: Economics 202 (or 210) and Math 135 or equiv- 
alent. Economic theory, from microeconomics and macroecono- 
mics. Content varies; constrained optimization problems and 
rational decision-making. 

442 Economics of Conflict and Defense (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 310 and 320 or equivalent. Economic 
and strategic approaches to domestic and international conflict, 
public goods, defense, arms competition, and arms control. The 
effects of U.S. defense spending on the U.S. and international 
economy. Game theory and other theories of strategic behavior. 

446 Managerial Economics (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 310 or 315, and Management Science 
361. An application of microeconomic analysis and economic 
measurement to decision making at the individual firm level. 
The influence of the macroeconomic environment and market 
structure on the decisions of the firm. Applications and case 
studies. 


450 History of Economic Thought (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 310 or 320. Major schools of thought 
and of leading individual economists as they influenced econom- 
ic thought and policy. 

462 Natural Resource Economics (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 3 10 or 3 1 5 or equivalent. Concepts and 
principles in the application of economics to issues in natural 
resource economics. Issues will include uncertainty and risk in 
investment, depletion over time, cartelization, the role of tech- 
nological innovation and government intervention related to 
fuels, water, land, etc. 

495 Internship ( 1-3) 

Prerequisites: economics major with Manag Sci 361, Economics 
310 (or 320) (or the equivalents) or international business major 
with Economics 202 and 335, Manag Sci 361 (or the equiv- 
alents); and consent of the department internship adviser, at 
least junior standing, 2.5 GPA and one semester in residence at 
the university. Planned and supervised work experience. May be 
repeated for a total of six units credit. Credit/No Credit grading 
only. 

496 Student-to-Student Tutorial (1-3) 

Prerequisites: economics major or concentration. Economics 310 
and 320, senior standing, 3.0 GPA and consent of department 
chair. Student learns through teaching (tutoring) other students 
enrolled in principles and intermediate economics courses. Con- 
sult “Student-to-Student Tutorials” in this catalog for more infor- 
mation. May not be used to satisfy the elective requirements for 
the major or concentration in economics. Credit/No Credit grad- 
ing only. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: economics major or concentration, Economics 310 
and 320 (or the equivalents), senior or graduate standing, and 
consent of instructor and department chair. Directed indepen- 
dent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. Not open to students on 
academic probation. 

502 Advanced Microeconomic Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 310 and classified SBAE status or consent 
of instructor. An advanced treatment of rational decision-making 
behavior of consumers and firms, the price system, and resource 
allocation in partial and general equilibrium settings. Topics include 
preference theory, welfare economics, gains from trade, monopoly 
pow'er, external costs and benefits, public goods, factor markets, 
intertemporal decisions, risk and uncertaint>'. 

503 Advanced Macroeconomic Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 320 and classified SBAE status or con- 
sent of instructor. The determination of employment,, fluctu- 
ations of real and money income, and the forces underlying 
economic growth. 


244 Economics 


505 Economic Models and Forecasting (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 440 and classified SBAE status or con- 
sent of the instructor. Statistical methods of econometric estima^ 
tion and forecasting. Practical solutions to problems in model 
specification, estimation by regression, time series analysis and 
forecasting. 

515 The Price System and Resource Allocation (3) 
Prerequisites: classified SBAE status and Math 135 or the equiv- 
alent. Microeconomic analysis and policy under mixed capital- 
ism. The economic environment and institutions, markets, con- 
sumer choice, production and resource allocation. Monopoly 
power and government intervention. (Not open to M.A. Eco- 
nomic candidates.) 

516 Economics and Benefit-Cost Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 201 (or 210) and classified graduate 
status in environmental studies or public administration. Eco- 
nomics and benefit-cost analysis of public projects. Consumer 
demand and the estimation of benefits; the nature of cost in a 
market economy; price controls, unemployment and inflation; 
and criteria for choice, for multi-year projects. For elective credit 
in the M.S. Environmental Studies or M.PA. 

517 Economics of Public Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 515 (or 516) and classified graduate sta- 
tus in environmental studies, public administration, business ad- 
ministration, or taxation. Economics of federal, state and local 
governmental spending, taxation and borrowing. Major taxes, 
their effects on market prices, income distribution, employment 
and inflation, and evaluation of reform proposals. (For elective 
credit in the M.S. Environmental Studies, M.PA., M.B.A., or 
M.S. Taxation.) 

521 Macroeconomic Theory and Policy (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 310 or 515 and classified SBAE status. 
National income determination and macroeconomic models. In- 
flation and unemployment. Monetary and fiscal policies. Inter- 
national trade and foreign exchange (Not open to M.A. Eco- 
nomics candidates or students with credit for Economics 320.) 

522 Comparative Economics Seminar (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 515 or 310 and classified SBAE status. 
Analytical and prescriptive approaches to economic problems of 
scarcity, development, fiscal and monetary policy, planning and 
poverty. (Not open to M.A. Economics candidates.) 


531 International Economics (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 310 or 315 or 515; Economics 320 or 
521. An introductory analysis of theories and current issues in 
international trade, finance, macroeconomics and growth, with 
an emphasis on business applications. 

590 Topics in Economic Analysis and Policy (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 310 and 320; classified SBAE status or 
consent of instructor. Contemporary research in areas such as: 
resource economics; history of economic thought; international 
monetary systems; forecasting; economics of planning; human 
resource economics. May be repeated for credit. 

595 Current Research in Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: classified graduate status in Economics or Econom- 
ics 440, a 3.25 or better grade-point average and permission of 
the instructor. Students attend the departmental research semi- 
nar where faculty and outside speakers present papers dealing 
with recent and ongoing research. Students read material rel- 
evant to presentations and write analytical reports covering five 
seminar meetings. May be repeated once for credit. 

597 Project (3) 

Open to qualified graduate students. Directed independent in- 
quiry. Not open to students on academic probation. 

598 Thesis Research (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 502, 503 and classified SBAE status. 
Corequisite: Economics 505. Selection and approval of topic; 
outline; methodology; literature survey; data collection and anal- 
ysis; presentation of results. Award of the grade is contingent 
upon the completion and acceptance of the thesis. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 440, 502 and 503; classified graduate 
status; and consent of instructor and department chair (or desig- 
nee). Directed advanced independent inquiry. May be repeated 
for credit. Not open to students on academic probation. 


Economics 245 


Department of Finance 


Department Chair: John Emery 
Department Office: Langsdorf Hall 556 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Business Administration 
Concentration in Finance 
Master of Business Administration 
Q)ncentration in Finance 

Faculty 

Albert Bueso, Su Chan» Carolyn Chang, Donald Crane, John 
Emery, John Erickson, Albert J. Fredman, Tk)ng Lai, Daniel 
Lee, Yuming Li, Dennis O’Connor, Robert Plattner, P James 
Stickels, Richard Stolz, Marco Tbnietti, Ko Wang 

Advisers 

The Business Advising Center, Langsdorf Hall 700, provides 
information on admissions, curriculum and graduation require- 
ments, registration and grading procedures, residence and similar 
academic matters. In addition, advising on curriculum content 
and career opportunities may be obtained from the chair of the 
Finance Department or from: 

Financial Management 
Perstmal Financial Planning 
Real Estate 

Securities and Investments 
Financial Institutions 

INTRODUCTION 

Finance is the study of the methods by which a firm provides itself 
with cash to run its daily operations and its long-range expan- 
sion. 


Marco Tbnietti 
Donald Crane 
Robert Plattner 
Albert Fredman 
John Emery 



In choosing their course work students may elect one of four areas 
of emphasis within the finance concentration of the major in 
business administration: financial management; financial institu- 
tions; investments and financial planning; and real estate. A 
financial management emphasis may lead to employment in a 
bank or savings and loan association. An investment and finan- 
cial planning emphasis may lead to employment in a brokerage 
firm or a financial planning firm. A real estate emphasis may lead 
to employment in the real estate industry. 


Credential Information 

For students interested in a teaching credential, the Department 
of Finance offers courses which may be included in the Single 
Subject Waiver Program in Business and in the Supplemental^’ 
Authorization Program in Economics and Consumer Education. 


246 Finance 


Further information on the requirements for teaching credentials 
is found in the Teaching Credential Programs section of this 
catalog and is also available from the Department Office for 
Secondary Education. Students interested in exploring careers in 
teaching at the elementary or secondary school levels should 
contact the Office of Admission to Teacher Education. 

Awards in Finance 

The Wall Street journal Award 

Edward D’Cunha Finance Award 

Financial Management Association Award 

Investment Trust Award 

jack Nichols Scholarship Award 

Outstanding Finance Student Award 

Outstanding Service Award 

Peter M. Mlynaryk Outstanding Real Estate Award 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration, Finance Concentration.” 

MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 
See “Business Administration, Finance Concentration.” 


Finance Courses 

310 Personal Financial Management (3) 

Financial problems of the household in allocating resources and 
planning expenditures. Housing, insurance, installment buying, 
medical care, savings and investments. (May not be used to fulfill 
the concentration requirement in finance. ) 

320 Business Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 20 IB; corequisite: Management Sci' 
ence 361. Financing business enterprises; financial planning and 
control; analysis of alternative sources and uses of combinations 
of short-, intermediate- and long-term debt and equity. Cost of 
capital. Study of capital investment decisions; capital budget 
analysis and valuation; working capital and capital structure 
management; relative impact on the international environment 
of financial decisions. 

331 Financial Management and Computer Applications (3) 
Prerequisite: Finance 320. Analysis of working capital manage- 
ment and policy. Use of available software programs and financial 
models in computer-aided analysis of working capital manage- 
ment, financial forecasting, financial planning, capital budget- 
ing, leasing problems, investments and other financial issues. 


33 IL Financial Management Lab (1) 

Corequisite: Finance 331 . Laboratory in computer assisted finan- 
cial analysis. 

332 Theory of Corporate Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 331 (may be taken concurrently). Risk and 
return analysis. An introduction to the capital asset and arbitrage 
pricing models. Analysis of capital budgeting, capital structure, 
dividend policy, leasing, mergers and divestitures. 

340 Introduction to Investments (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 331 (may be taken concurrently). Institu- 
tional characteristics of securities markets, security valuation and 
trading methods, fundamental and technical analysis, selection 
and management of securities, introduction to the capital asset 
pricing model, role of options and futures markets, portfolio 
analysis and mutual funds. 

351 Real Estate and Urban Land Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 320 or consent of instructor. Real estate 
principles, practices and investment decisions. Equity invest- 
ment, finance, legal aspects, practices, principles, property de- 
velopment, real estate administration in the public sector, real 
estate market analysis, valuation. 

360 Principles of Insurance (3) 

Prerequisite: junior or senior status. Life, casualty and liability 
insurance, individual and group insurance programs; methods of 
establishing risks and rates. 

370 International Business Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 320 or consent of instructor. Financing 
problems of international business. The international financial 
environment, taxation of foreign income, international capital 
and money markets, problems of risk in foreign investments, and 
financial techniques for the operation of a multinational firm. 

410 Theory & Practice of Personal Financial Planning (3) 
Prerequisite: Finance 320. Developing, implementing and moni- 
toring comprehensive personal financial plans. Includes risk 
management, investments, taxation, retirement and estate plan- 
ning, as well as professional practices. 

411 Retirement and Estate Planning (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 320. Development of retirement objec- 
tives, needs and financial condition. Forecasting retirement in- 
come from employer based retirement plans, IRAs, insurance 
policies, social security, investment programs. Medicare, medi- 
cal, group life and health benefits after retirement. Property 
titling, wills and transfers in contemplation of death. 

425 Commercial Bank and Financial Institution 
Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 320. The solution of financial institution 
problems. Major financial intermediaries and the decision-mak- 
ing problems they face. Regulation and its effect on management 
operations. Group problems and case studies. 


Finance 247 


432 Financial Forecasting and Budgeting (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 331. Forecasting in financial management; 
construction and interpretation of economic forecasts for the 
economy, industry and the firm; construction and interpretation 
of financial plans; evaluation of capital acquisition decisions un- 
der certainty and uncertainty conditions. 

433 Problems in Business Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 332. Case studies. Group problems of esti- 
mating funds requirements, long-term financial planning, con- 
trolling and evaluating cash flows, and financing acquisitions and 
mergers, capital budgeting, and cost of capital. Group problems 
and case studies. 

440 Capital and Money Markets (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 320. Capital and money markets in the 
American economy; markets for new corporate and government 
issues; secondary markets; interrelation of financial institutions; 
factors influencing yields and security prices. 

442 Advanced Investment Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 340 and Management Science 361. Secu- 
rities markets and company analysis, security valuation models 
the CAPM and the APT option pricing, and pc^rtfolio models. 
Practical application of investment theory and recent literature 
will he emphasized. 

444 Options and Futures (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 340. Put and call options, option pricing 
theory and mcxiels. Financial futures pricing, hedging strategies 
and mcxiels. Institutional characteristics of futures trading. Op- 
tions and futures cm stcxk indices. Options on futures, theoretical 
relatic')nship between options and futures. 

451 Real Estate/Land Use Law — Case Studies (3) 
Prerequisite: Finance 351. Real estate law. Cases provide illustra- 
tions of specific legal situations; financial institutions, property 
rights, zoning, land use law and environmental impact require- 
ments. 

452 Real Estate Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 351. Financial institutions and real estate 
credit. Sources and uses of capital (funds) in financing real estate 
transactions. Money and capital markets and their effect on 
credit availability. Instruments in real estate finance. Investment 
methods and decisions. Group problems and case studies. 

453 Real Estate Valuation (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 351. Real property value, historical evolu- 
tion of valuation principles, approaches in urban and real proper- 
ty appraisals, alternative methods and techniques for property* 
valuation. 


454 Real Estate and Urban Development (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 351. Factors and influences of urban 
growth and development. Economic factors and real estate supply 
and demand. Location theory and urban growth patterns. Public 
policy as a factor in real estate development. Analysis of real 
estate markets. 

455 Real Estate Investment Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 351. Alternative analytical techniques in 
evaluating real estate investments. Tax aspects, measurement of 
investment returns, application of computer models to invest- 
ment decisions. Lecture, discussion and case analysis of major 
investment types — raw land, apartment houses, commercial and 
industrial uses. 

456 Property Development and 
Real Estate Policy Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 351. Decision making process in the prop- 
erty development process — from raw land to retail marketing of 
completed product. Policy formulation and implementation, 
project feasibility analysis, financial analysis, computer assisted 
analysis; case studies. 

495 Internship ( 1-3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 331 or 332, a concentration in finance, 
consent of department internship adviser, junior standing, 2.5 
GPA and one semester in residence at the university. Also open 
to international business majors. Planned and supervised work 
experience. May be repeated for credit up to a total of six units. 
Credit/No Credit only. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: senior standing and approval by department chair. 
C)pen to undergraduate students desiring to pursue directed inde- 
pendent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. Not open to stu- 
dents on academic probation. 

517 Managerial Finance (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 510 and classified SBAE status. The 
methodology of financial management. The primary tools for 
financial analysis, long-term investment decisions, valuation and 
working capital management. International applications. 

523 Seminar in Corporate Financial Management (3) 
Prerequisites: Finance 5 1 7 and classified SBAE status. The analy- 
sis of the financial decision-making process through case studies 
and seminar presentations. Current financial theory and models. 
International applications. 

533 Seminar in Financial Administration (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 523 and classified SBAE status. Optimal 
financing and asset administration; advanced techniques of cap- 
ital budgeting; application of analytical methods to the adminis- 
tration of the finance function of the business firm. 


248 Finance 


540 Seminar in Financial Markets (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 517 or equivalent and classified SBAE 
status. Structure and operation of major financial institutions; 
portfolio composition, price-cost problems, and market behav- 
ior; analysis of financial intermediation and interrelation of fi- 
nancial institutions and markets. 

541 Seminar in Investment Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 517 or equivalent and classified SBAE 
status. Problems of investment and portfolio management; con- 
cepts of risk evaluation and investment criteria; analysis of inter- 
est rate movements; investment valuation and timing; regulation 
and administrative problems of the industry. 

551 Seminar in Real Estate Investment (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 517 or equivalent and classified SBAE 
status. Problems of real estate investment; concepts of evaluation 
and investment criteria; analysis of real property values; real 
estate development and financing. Case studies. 


570 Seminar in International Financial Management (3) 
Prerequisites: Finance 517 or consent of instructor and classified 
SBAE status. The financial problems of the multinational firm. 
International financing instruments, capital investment decisions, 
and constraints on the profitability of multinational businesses. 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: classified SBAE status. Directed independent inqui- 
ry. Not open to students on academic probation. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status, consent of instructor and 
approval of department chair and Associate Dean of Graduate 
Studies. May be repeated for credit. Not open to students on 
academic probation. 


Finance 249 


International Business 
Program 

Program Coordinator: Irene Lange 
Program Office: Langsdorf Hall 626 

Program Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in International Business 

Program Council 

Peng Chan (Management) 

Linda Andersen (French) 

Dennis O’Conner (Finance) 

Irene Lange (Marketing) 

Curtis Swanson (German) 

Vincent Dropsy (Economics) 

Marcial Prado (Spanish) 

Advisers 

The Business Advising Center, Langsdorf Hall 700, provides 
information on admissions, curriculum and graduation require- 
ments, registration and grading prtKedures, residence and similar 
academic matters. Additional advising on curriculum content 
and career opportunities is available from the International Busi- 
ness Program: 

International Business 
French: 

German: 

Japanese: 

Portuguese: 

Spanish: 

INTRODUCTION 

The international business curriculum covers the fundamentals 
of business administration, with an emphasis on international 
business. Foreign language courses are required and stress the use 
of the language in international business. The program also in- 
cludes an internship with an international business. This curricu- 
lum prepares students for entry level positions in international 
business. Opportunities exist in contracts, distribution and sales 
and may lead to general management positions. Since Southern 
California is a major international business center, there are 
career opportunities with internationally oriented firms in this 
area. Other career opportunities may involve international travel 
or overseas assignments. 

Language concentrations are offered in French, German, Japa- 
nese, Portuguese, and Spanish. Other concentrations may be 
developed in the future. The program is offered jointly by the 
School of Business Administration and Economics and the De- 
partment of Foreign Languages and Literatures. 


Irene Lange 
Linda Andersen 
Curtis Swanson 
Nobuko Sugamoto 
Ronald Harmon 
Marcial Prado 



250 International Business 



Scholarship In International Business 

The Dennis Rippin-International Marketing Association 
Scholarship 

Preparation For The Major 

Students who expect to complete this program in the usual four- 
year period should realize that the total requirements, including 
general education courses and prerequisites, can exceed 124 se- 
mester units. Intermediate level competency in a foreign lan- 
guage, equivalent to courses numbered 204 in the Department of 
Foreign Languages and Literatures, is prerequisite to the required 
concentration courses. It is therefore strongly recommended that 
students complete a minimum of three years of foreign language 
study while in high school. Similarly, algebra and geometry are 
necessary for many required business courses. The equivalent of 
three years of high school mathematics, including a second 
course in algebra, is the prerequisite for the required Mathemat- 
ics 135, Business Calculus. Students without the necessary back- 
ground will need to enroll in Mathematics 115, College Algebra. 


Intermediate competency in the appropriate foreign language is 
prerequisite to the required concentration courses. If necessary, 
students should enroll in French, German, Japanese or Spanish 
101 , 102, 203 and/or 204, or, for students with previous study of a 
romance language, Portuguese 101 and/or 102. Students may 
enroll at any point in this sequence of courses for which their 
previous study and/or experience have prepared them. Normally, 
two or three years of high school language study are counted as 
the equivalent of 10 units of college language study. Students 
should consult an adviser in the Department of Foreign Lan- 
guages and Literatures before enrolling in their first foreign lan- 
guage course. 

English Proficiency Requirement 

Cal State Fullerton Examination in Writing Proficiency (EWP) 

Business Administration 201 Business Writing (3) 
or Business Administration 20 IW Business Writing 
Workshop (3) 


BACHELOR OF ARTS IN INTERNATIONAL 
BUSINESS 

Admission to the International Business major involves two 
steps. Students who apply to the major are initially classified as 
Pre- international business. After completing the lower-division 
core requirements with grades of at least “C”, and demonstrating 
satisfactory progress toward intermediate competency in a foreign 
language, students may apply to the International Business major. 
Pre-international business students may take lower-division busi- 
ness courses, but most upper-division courses are not open to Pre- 
international business students. 

All of the following requirements must be met for the degree. 
Students must earn a grade of at least “C” in each course listed 
below. However, a “C” average will be acceptable in the required 
concentration courses. For assistance in interpreting these re- 
quirements, contact the Business Advising Center, Langsdorf 
Hall 700. 

Required Lower-Division Core Courses 

Business Admin 201 Business Writing (3) 
or Business Admin 20 IW Business Writing Workshop (3) 
Economics 201 Principles of Microeconomics (3) 

Economics 202 Principles of Macroeconomics (3) 


Required Upper-Division Core Courses 

International business majors shall not enroll in any required 
upper-division core course until they have completed all of the 
required lower-division core courses with a grade of at least “C” in 
each course. Students desiring to enroll in required upper-divi- 
sion core courses while concurrently completing the last of their 
required lower-division core courses may select only Economics 
335 and/or Manag Sci 361. 

Economics 335 International Economy (3) 

Finance 320 Business Finance (3) 

Finance 370 International Business Finance (3) 

Management 339 Principles of Management Operations (4) 
Management 340 Organizational Behavior (3) 

Manag Sci 361 Probability and Statistical Methods in 
Business and Economics (4) 

Marketing 351 Principles of Marketing (3) 

Marketing 445 Multinational Marketing Strategies (3) 

And a minimum of three units chosen from among the following 
electives. It is recommended that students take up to 12 units of 
electives, if possible. 


Note: Economics 210, Principles of Economics (5), may be sub- 
stituted for Economics 201 and 202. 

Math 135 Business Calculus (3) 
or Math 130 A Short Course in Calculus (4) 
or Math 150A Analytic Geometry and Calculus (4) 
Accounting 201A,B Accounting (3,3) 

Management 246 Business and Its Legal Environment (3) 
Manag Sci 265 Introduction to Information Systems and 
Computer Programming (3) 


Anthropology 412 Culture Change (3) 

Anthropology 414 Economic Anthropology (3) 

Comp Lit 465 The Novel in France and Germany (3) 
Geography 333 Latin America (3) 

Geography 336 Europe (3) 

Geography 344 Africa (3) 

Geography 360 Economic Geography (3) 

History 350 History of Latin America Civilization (3) 
History 429 A Europe From 1890-1945 (3) 

History 429B Europe Since 1945 (3) 


International Business 251 


History 453 Modern Mexico (3) 

Philosophy 312 Business and Professional Ethics (3) 

Poli Sci 430T Government and Politics of a Selected 
Nation-State (3)‘ 

Poli Sci 43 IT Government and Politics of a Selected 
Area (3)* 

Poli Sci 457 Politics of International Economics (3) 

Speech Comm 320 Intercultural Communication (3) 

Required Concentration 

(ch(X)se one of the following concentrations) 

Concentration in French: 

French 310 French in the Business World (3) 

French 31 1 French for International Business (3) 

French 315 Origins of Modern France (3) 

French 325 Contemporary French Civilization (3) 

Concentration in German: 

German 310 German in the Business World (3) 

German 31 1 German for International Business (3) 

German 315 Introduction to German Civilization (3) 
German 325 Current Trends in Culture of German Speaking 
Peoples (3) 

Concentration in Japanese: 

Japanese 310 Japanese for Business (3) 

Japanese 31 1 Japanese for International Business (3) 

Japanese 315 Introduction to Japanese Civilization (3) 
Japanese 316 Modern Japan (3) 

Concentration in Rmuguese: 

Portuguese 310 Portuguese in the Business World (3) 
Portuguese 317 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) 
Portuguese 320 Introduction to Luso-Brazilian Culture and 
Civilization (3) 

Portuguese 325 Contemporary Brazilian Civilization (3) 

One of the following courses may be substituted for Portuguese 
320 or 325: 

Spanish 310 Spanish in the Business World (3) 

Spanish 31 1 Spanish for International Business (3) 

Concentration in Spanish: 

Spanish 310 Spanish in the Business World (3) 

Spanish 31 1 Spanish for International Business (3) 

Spanish 315 Introduction to Spanish Civilization (3) 

Spanish 316 Intro to Spanish- American Civilization (3) 

Note: Students may substitute one of the following for Spanish 
315 or 316: 

Spanish 415 Contemporary Spanish Culture (3) 

Spanish 416 Contemp Spanish- American Culture (3) 


*When topic is appropriate. 


Internship Requirement 

Out-of-Country Internships: Students who successfully arrange an 
internship in a country where the language of their concentra- 
tion is used, will enroll for three units in a language internship 
and for three units in a business internship. During this experi- 
ence, students are expected to spend a minimum of four months 
in full-time employment with a faculty-approved firm. The firm 
should engage in international dealings where daily use of a 
foreign language is normal practice. Simultaneous enrollment in 
the two internships is expected and students normally will not 
engage in any other academic activity. 

In-Country Internships: Students who complete internships local- 
ly, must arrange a business internship that involves international 
operations. In addition, these students must complete an addi- 
tional pre-approved three-unit upper-division foreign language 
course. The course must increase students’ understanding of the 
language and culture of their concentration. If students are ex- 
pected to use their foreign language on a daily basis as part of their 
business internship work activity, students may complete a for- 
eign language internship rather than the course. Approval for 
this option must be obtained prior to enrollment in the business 
internship and written evidence of language use must be provided 
at the completion of the language internship. 

Internship Courses 

Foreign Languages 495 Internship (3) 

Economics 495 Internship (3) 

Finance 495 Internship (3) 

Management 495 Internship (3) 

Management Science 495 Internship (3) 

Marketing 495 Internship (3) 

Required Capstone Core Course 

After completing all lower- and upper-division core courses, take 
Management 480 Global Strategic Management (3) 

Other Requirements 

Other Subjects: Complete at least 50 percent of the coursework for 
the degree in subjects other than business administration or eco- 
nomics. Complete all university requirements for the bachelor’s 
degree. 

Grade Fbint Average (GPA): Attain at least a 2.0 GPA (C aver- 
age) in all university courses and in the concentration courses. 
Earn at least a C grade in each course required for the major 
(other than concentration courses). 

Grade Options: Take all required core and concentration courses for 
a letter grade (A,B,C,D,F). The credit/no credit grading option 
may not be used for these courses, and a grade of CR (credit) will 
not satisfy the requirements of the degree. Exceptions: Calculus 
(Math 130, 135 or 150A) and Internship may be taken under the 
credit/no credit option, although courses taken to meet general 
education requirements must be taken for a letter grade. 

Residence: At least 12 units of upper-division core courses, 6 units 
of upper-division concentration courses and 6 units of internships 
must be taken in residence at CSUF. 


252 International Business 


Department of 
Management 



Department Chair: Farouk H. Abdelwahed (Acting) 
Department Office: Langsdorf Hall 640 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Business Administration 
Concentration in Management 
Master of Business Administration 
Concentration in Management 

Faculty 

Farouk Abdelwahed, Michael Ames, Thomas Apke, Mei 
Liang Bickner, Peng Chan, Ellen Dumond, Carolyn Erdener, 
Gamini Gunawardane, Ghasem Haj-Manoochehri, Dorothy 
Heide, Richard Houston, Thomas Johnson, Brian Kleiner, 
Elliot Kushell, Thomas Mayes, Tai Oh, Goli Sadri, Hamid 
Tavakolian, Gustavo Vargas 

Advisers 

The Business Advising Center, Langsdorf Hall 700, provides 
information on admissions, curriculum and graduation require^ 
ments; registration and grading procedures; residence and similar 
academic matters. In addition, the Management Department 
provides advising on career opportunities and on the emphases 
within the Management Concentration: 


Entrepreneurial Manag. 
General Manag. 

Human Resource Manag. 
Operations Manag. 


Michael Ames 
Peng Chan 
Thomas Johnson 
Ellen Dumond 


INTRODUCTION 

Managers are needed in a wide variety of different types of organic 
zations — business and nonbusiness, large and small, foreign and 
domestic. In all of these organizations, managers need technical, 
human and conceptual skills to help achieve organizational goals. 


Management courses are designed to teach the fundamental prin- 
ciples underlying organizations, to emphasize education which 
will improve students’ thought processes, to provide familiarity 
with the analytical tools of management, and to develop in the 
student an ability to use the techniques involved in analyzing and 
evaluating managerial problems and making sound decisions. 


Students may pursue a wide variety of academic and career inter- 
ests through four different emphases. These emphases include: 
(1) entrepreneurial management, (2) general management, (3) 
human resources management, and (4) operations management. 


Management 253 



Credential Information 

For students interested in a teaching credential, the Management 
Department offers courses which may he included in the Single 
Subject Waiver Program in Business and in the Supplementary 
Authorization Program in Economics and Consumer Education. 

Further information on the requirements for teaching credentials 
is found in the Teaching Credential Programs section of this 
catalog and is also available from the Department of Secondary 
Education. Students interested in exploring careers in teaching 
at the elementary or secondary school levels should contact the 
Office of Admission to Teacher Education. 

Awards in Management 

The Gus Berger Award/Operations Management 
The H. Peter Guertin/APlCS Orange County Chapter 
Scholarship 

The Orange County Industrial Relations Research AsscKiation 
(OCIRRA) 

The PERMA Scholarship 


BACHELOR OF ARTS IN BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration, Management Concentration." 

MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration, Management Concentration". 


Management Courses 

246 Business and Its Legal Environment (3) 

Examines laws and regulations affecting the business environ- 
ment and managerial decisions including the legal system and 
methods of dispute resolution. Topics include torts, crimes, con- 
tracts, product liability, business organization, employment, an- 
titrust, environmental protection; incorporates ethical consider- 
ations and international perspectives. Uses case studies. 

339 Principles of Management and Operations (4) 
Prerequisites: all lower division business core courses or instruc- 
tor s consent; corequisite Management Science 361. Administra- 
tive processes in utility-creating business operations: decision- 
making; planning; controlling; organizing; staffing; supporting 
business information systems; measuring and improving effec- 
tiveness; production processes, production operations and insti- 
tutions in American and worldwide business. Uses the Produc- 
tion Lab. 


340 Organizational Behavior (3) 

Prerequisites: general education in social sciences. Social and 
cultural environments of business; corequisite: Management Sci- 
ence 361. Business ethics. Communication, leadership, motiva- 
tion, perception, personality development, group dynamics and 
group growth. Human behavior and organizational design and 
management practice in American and world wide business. Uses 
the Behavioral Lab. 

343 Personnel Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 340 or equivalent. The personnel 
function, its activities, and its opportunities. Management’s re- 
sponsibilities for selection, development and effective utilization 
of personnel. Open to non-business majors. 

344 Introduction to Management Information Systems (3) 
Prerequisite: Manag Sci 265, Management 339, Management 340. 
Organizational foundations of information systems, systems con- 
cepts, contempt^rary approaches to building information systems, 
managing information resources, issues in information technology 
management. 

345 Small Business Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 20 IB, Management 339, Marketing 
35 1 . Practical applications of business administration techniques 
to the planning and operation of small businesses. Casework, 
research, and field work with selected local small businesses. 

347 Current Legal Issues (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 246 or equivalent. Work and law; the 
development of employment law; agency; responsibilities of man- 
aging officers; the hiring process; discrimination; wages; hours 
and benefits; termination. The work environment, OSHA, 
worker’s compensation. International and ethical implications of 
employment law. Patents, copyrights and trademarks. Product/ 
service liability; environmental law. 

348 Business Law' (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 246 or equivalent. The philosophy, 
institutions and role of law in commercial and personal transac- 
tions: case studies in personal property, bailments, commercial 
paper, secured transactions, real property, mortgages, trusts, 
community property, wills, estate administration and insurance. 

349 Law for Small Business (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 246. The philosophy, institutions, 
and role of law and their practical applications in the areas of 
interest to the small businessperson. Product liability, consumer 
rights, worker’s compensation and other topics. 

410 Information Resources Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 344. This course recognizes the ex- 
panding role of information systems in the overall strategy and 
management of organizations. The management of the organiza- 
tion information resources includes personnel, planning and 
control, technological trends, management implications, man- 
aging the MIS department. 


254 Management 


421 Operations Systems Design (3) 

Prerequisites: Manag Sci 362. Managerial problems associated 
with designing an operations system, including product and pro- 
cess design, facilities planning, capacity choice, job design, auto- 
mation, quality management and maintenance. 

422 Production and Inventory Control (3) 

Prerequisites: Manag Sci 362. Planning and controlling of prO' 
duction activities and inventory levels. Identification of key 
problem areas. Presentation of applicable techniques and sys' 
terns, and organizational and managerial concepts. Utilization of 
computer decision models. 

425 Productivity and Quality Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 339 and Manag Sci 361 or equiv- 
alent. Definition, discussion and measurement of productivity 
and quality and their strategic role. Development of a compre- 
hensive approach to managing and improving productivity and 
quality, including strategic, organizational, operational and tech- 
nological aspects. Case studies on productivity and quality in 
service and manufacturing operations. 

431 Women in Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 340. (For men and women. ) Increas- 
ing participation in the management of organizations. Employ- 
ment and earnings, affirmative action, understanding male-fe- 
male and female-female work relationships, dual careers, and 
learning how to increase ones effectiveness in organizations. 

433 Advanced Topics in Human Resource Management (3) 
Prerequisite: Management 343. Contemporary concepts and pro- 
cedures in compensation and staffing. Current topics and contro- 
versial issues in human resource management are also covered. 

435 Service Organizations and Operations (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 339. Analysis and applications of gen- 
eral management and operations management concepts to ser- 
vice organizations, and interactions among various functional 
areas. Case analyses of banks, airlines, health care, food service 
and others. Includes field trips and use of computer labs and 
models. 

436 Government Contracts (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 246. Advertised and negotiated pro- 
curement and the role of contract manager. Fiscal and regulatory 
limitations. The nature of changes, disputes and termination. 
Contract terms and conditions and administration. 

440 Emerging Issues in Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 339 and 340 or consent of instructor. 
For upper-division and graduate students. Business and manage- 
ment in America. The interrelationships of technological, eco- 
nomic, political and social forces with the business enterprises 
and their ethical obligations to owners, employees, consumers 
and society at large. Open to nonbusiness majors. 


441 Labor-Management Relations (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 340. Impact of labor-management re- 
lations upon labor, management, and the public. Proper griev- 
ance procedure, collective bargaining and settlement of disputes. 
Uses the Behavioral Lab. 

442 Grievance Handling and Arbitration (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 441 or equivalent. In-depth study of 
the grievance procedures and the arbitration process and proce- 
dure in the private sector. Topics include discipline, contract 
interpretation, arbitrable issues, management right issues, such 
as subcontracting and employee rights. Uses cases and simula- 
tions. 

443 Group Dynamics (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 339 and 340 or equivalent. Manage- 
rial skills in Group dynamics as they relate to team performance. 
Cultural diversity including value differences and perception. 
Leadership: problem solving, idea generation, communications 
and conflict management. Organization change and designs that 
enhance team effectiveness. 

444 Project Management (3) 

Prerequisites: management and management science core and 
other 3(X) level management courses in student’s concentration. 
Technology for managing business and other enterprises as cyber- 
netic systems. The design and control of systems appropriate for 
product, project and program levels of analysis. (2 hours lecture, 
2 hours activity) Uses Production Lab. 

448 Seminar in Small Business Consulting (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 339, Marketing 351 and senior 
standing. A seminar. Planning and working in a consulting rela- 
tionship with small local businesses. Lectures, research and field 
work. (1 hour lecture, 6 hours field work) 

449 Seminar in Strategic Management (3) 

Prerequisites: all other School of Business Administration and 
Economics core courses and departmental approval. Integrative 
cases from top management viewpoint. Administrative pro- 
cesses, ethical-legal-economic implications of business decisions, 
international applications; organization theory and policy formu- 
lation. Individual and team efforts. Uses the Behavioral Lab. 

454 MIS Analysis and Design (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 344, Manag Sci 408 and Manag Sci 
409. Case-oriented seminar focusing on tools and techniques for 
systems analysis and design including communications structure 
and techniques, computer aided software, models and modelling, 
and project management; systems development life cycle and 
other types of systems development; strategic and administrative 
concepts and techniques. 


Management 255 


480 Global Strategic Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Completion of all other International Business 
core courses and departmental approval. This course deals pri' 
marily with the conceptualization, formulation, and implemen- 
tation of successful global business strategies. Other topics in- 
clude managing cultural differences, strategic alliances, and 
strategies for the Pacific Rim and Europe. (Uses the Behavioral 
Lab) 

490 Seminar in Management Information Systems (3) 
Prerequisites: 300-level business core courses. Management 344, 
444 (or 454), and Manag Sci 309. Senior seminar and applica- 
tions in the design, implementation and use of management 
decision/information systems. 

495 Internship ( 1-3) 

Prerequisites: six units of upper division management courses, 
including Management 339, major in management or interna- 
tional business, consent of department internship adviser and at 
least junior standing, 2.5 GPA and one semester in residence at 
the university. Planned and supervised work experience. May be 
repeated for credit up to a total of six units. Credit/No Credit 
only. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: management concentration, senior standing, and 
approval by faculty sponsor and department chair of pn^posed 
statement of work. Open to qualified students desiring to pursue 
directed independent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. Not 
open to students on academic probation. 

516 Organizational Theory and Management of 
Operations (3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status, Manag Sci 514 (may be 
taken concurrently), Accounting 510, Economics 515. Modern 
organization theory and application in utility-creating oper- 
ations. Interperscmal behavior, planning, control, organizing, 
directing, communication, prcxluction and information systems, 
and measures of effectiveness. International applications. Busi- 
ness ethics and relationships to society and politics. Graduate 
discussion and research reports. 

518 Legal Environment of Business (3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status. Law applicable to business 
institutions and inherent in business decisions with consider- 
ation of the ethical, social and political influences as they affect 
business organizations and operations both here and abroad; na- 
ture and sources of law, the judicial system and case studies in 
areas of enforceable agreements, prcxlucts liability, employment, 
business organizations and trade regulation. 


524 Seminar in Organizational Behavior & Administration (3) 
Prerequisites: classified SBAE status. Management 516 and 518 
or equivalent. Human behavior in organizations, studies in orga- 
nizational theories, and administrative action. 

535 Production/Operations Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 516 and Management Science 514. 
An in-depth study of selected POM topics. Discussions of the 
operations function role and its importance, identification of the 
problem areas, and reviewing of the related concepts and tech- 
niques, including computer applications. Emphasizing the cur- 
rent POM topics of interest to top management. 

537 Management of Technology (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 516. This course focuses on the role of 
technology in the competitive position of the organization. Cov- 
ers technology forecasting, evaluation, selection and implemen- 
tation as well as issues in technological risk management, tech- 
nology transfer and research and development management. 

542 Seminar in Labor-Management Relations (3) 
Prerequisites: classified SBAE status. Management 516 and 518. 
A seminar that focuses on various aspects of the labt)r- manage- 
ment relationship, issues in collective bargaining, the laws gov- 
erning the relationship, contract administration, grievance han- 
dling, dispute settlement and arbitration. Negotiation simulation 
and case analyses. 

543 Seminar in Personnel Administration (3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status. Management 516 and 518, or 
equivalent. Cases, problems and significant personnel administra- 
tion literature in personnel administration and human relations. 

547 Comparative Management (3) 

Management practices and processes in five geographical areas; 
market-structures and management characteristics different from 
those in the United States. Constraints which vary between 
countries because of cultural, legal, economic and/or political 
differences. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status, consent of instructor, con- 
sent of department chair and Associate Dean Graduate Studies. 
May be repeated for credit. Not open to students on academic 
probation. 


256 Management 


Management Information 

Systems 

Coordinators: Department Chairs in Management and 
Management Science 

Coordinator’s Office: Langsdorf Hall 640 and 540 
Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Business Administration 

Concentration in Management Information Systems 
Minor in Management Information Systems 

Advisers 

TTke Business Advising Center, Langsdorf Hall 700, provides 
information on admissions, curriculum and graduation require- 
ments; registration and grading procedures; residence and similar 
academic matters. In addition, advising about curriculum con- 
tent and career opportunities is available from the coordinators 
listed above. 

INTRODUCTION 

Management information systems are computer based informa- 
tion systems. These systems aid management in making decisions 
and assist in implementing and controlling management policies. 
Management information systems are used in business, industry 
and government operations. Applications include airline reser- 
vations, banking transactions, crime prevention networks, elec- 
tion returns, real estate assessment, tax records, newspaper data- 
bases, sports statistics and computer assisted learning. 

Management information systems incorporate the use of data 
processing equipment, such as computers and their peripherals. 
Computer software is used to create, maintain and retrieve infor- 
mation. Techniques include mathematical modeling and statis- 
tics, integrated with modern computer technology. These meth- 
ods are applied to systems management, programming design, 
analysis of information flow, decision support, database organiza- 
tion, small business problems, data communication networking 
and distributed processing. 

Awards in Management Information Systems 

Outstanding Management Information Systems Undergraduate 
Award 



Management Information Systems 257 



BACHELOR OF ARTS IN BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration, Management Information Sys- 
terns Concentration.” 

MINOR IN MANAGEMENT INFORMATION 
SYSTEMS* 

This minor surveys modern computer methods and the develop- 
ment of information-systems. Emphasis is placed on systems 
which aid management decision-making. Students must earn a 
grade of at least C in each course listed below. 

Accounting 201 A Financial Accounting (3) 

Management 344 Introduction to Management Information 
Systems (3) 

Management Science 265 Introduction to Information 
Systems 6i Computer Programming (3) 


Management Science 270 File Concepts and COBOL 
Programming (3) 

Management Science 309 Elements of Information System 
Design (3) 

Management Science 408 Data Base Management 
Systems (3) 

Note: Manag Sci 265, 270 and/or 408 may be waived for students 
who have taken these courses, or their equivalents, as part of 
their major. However, students must complete a minimum of 12 
units for the minor, so that if all three courses are waived, 3 units 
of approved electives must be added. Recommended electives 
include Management Science 365, 370, 409, 411, 415 and 418. 


‘Students with a major in business administration may not minor in management 
information systems. Such students should consult the Business Administration 
curriculum for concentration in management information systems. 


258 Management Information Systems 


Department of 
Management Science 



Department Chair: Zvi Drezner 
Department Office: Langsdorf Hall 540 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Business Administration 
Concentration in Management Science 
Master of Business Administration 
Concentration in Management Science 
Master of Science in Management Science 

Concentration in Management Information Systems 
Concentration in Operations Research 
Concentration in Statistics 

Faculty 

Shu'Jen Chen, Roger Dear, Zvi Drezner, Ben Edmondson, 
Nicholas Farnum, Zvi Goldstein, S. Hanizavareh, William 
Heitzman, Bhushan Kapoor, Mabel Kung, Bharat Lakhanpal, 
William Lau, John Lawrence, George Marcoulides, Do Le 
Minh, Barry Pasternack, Sorel Reisman, Herbert Rutemiller, 
Joseph Sherif, Sohan Sihota, Ram Singhania, La Verne 
Stanton, Ronald Suich 

Advisers 

The Business Advising Center, Langsdorf Hall 700, provides 
information on admissions, curriculum and graduation require- 
ments; registration and grading procedures; residence and similar 
academic matters. In addition, the Management Science Depart- 
ment provides advising about curriculum content and career op- 
portunities: 

Graduate Program: Zvi Drezner, John Lawrence 

Statistics: George Marcoulides, Sohan Sihota, La Verne Stanton, 

Ronald Suich 

Information Systems: Mabel Kung, Bharat Lakhanpal, William 
Lau, Sorel Reisman, Ram Singhania 

Operations Research: Roger Dear, Zvi Drezner, John Lawrence, 
Barry Pasternack 


Management Science 259 


INTRODUCTION 

Management Science is the application of the scientific method 
to decision-making in business and government. In practice, 
nearly all management science problems involve solutions using 
computers. Three of the major disciplines in management sci- 
ence are operations research, statistics and information systems. 
Operations research uses mathematical and simulation mcxiels to 
provide decision-makers with quantitative information pertain- 
ing to complex business situations. Statistics assists decision-mak- 
ers by using techniques designed to draw inferences from experi- 
mental and sampling data. Information systems focus on the appli- 
cation of rntniern computer technology to provide accurate and 
relevant data to aid decision making. 

Situations that require operations research techniques arise in all 
areas of business: accounting, finance, production, marketing, 
and research and development. Among the problems addressed 
by operations research techniques are the determination of in- 
ventory strategies, the allocation of scarce resources and the 
design of service systems. Others include bidding in competitive 
environments, selection of equipment replacement strategies and 
scheduling the completion of large projects. 

The statistician is often involved in activities such as sales fore- 
casting, quality control and financial analysis. Statistics is also 
concerned with model building and the design of experiments 
dealing with pnxiuct testing, surveys and sampling. 

Information systems is concerned with the management of large 
databases and the efficient reptming of timely information to 
decision makers. It relates to both the data prcKessing hardware 
and the computer software. The hardware includes the computer 
and its peripheral equipment. The software is used to create, 
maintain and retrieve information. Information systems methixls 
integrate mathematical modeling and statistics with modem in- 
formation and computer technology. These methods are applied 
to systems management, analysis of information flow, and pro- 
gramming design. 

Credential Information 

For students interested in a teaching credential, the Department 
of Management Science offers courses which may be included in 
the Single Subject Waiver Program in Business. 

Further information on the requirements for teaching credentials 
is found in the Teaching Credential Programs section of this 
catalog and is also available from the Department of Secondary* 
Education. Students interested in exploring careers in teaching 
at the elementary or secondary school levels should contact the 
Office of Admission to Teacher Education, Education Classroom 
207. 

Awards in Management Science 

David S. Stoller Outstanding Management Science Undergrad- 
uate Award 

Outstanding Management Science Graduate Student Award 


BACHELOR OF ARTS IN BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration, Management Science Concentra- 
tion.” 

MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration, Management Science Concentra- 
tion.” 

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN MANAGEMENT SCIENCE 

The Master of Science in Management Science program provides 
the conceptual understanding and technical competence for a 
career in management science. Emphasis is placed on the use of 
scientific method to allocate resources so as to maximize profit or 
minimize cost. Specializations include operations research, man- 
agement information systems and statistics. These techniques are 
widely used in both private business and public enterprise. Em- 
ployment opportunities include positions such as management 
analyst, data prcKessing manager, statistician and forecaster. 

The M.S. in Management Science program is scheduled espe- 
cially for students who are employed full time. Courses are offered 
during the late afternoon and evening. 

The curriculum should appeal to students with undergraduate 
degrees in business administration, computer science, mathemat- 
ics, engineering or science. For students with an undergraduate 
degree in business administration, the 10-course (30-unit) cur- 
riculum may be completed in V/i years (part time). In addition to 
a three-course survey of management science methods, the cur- 
riculum includes management science applications, electives, 
and a terminal research project. Students with a bachelor’s de- 
gree in a field other than business administration must first com- 
plete the nine M.B.A. Foundation Courses (27 units) or equiv- 
alent undergraduate courses. 

Cal State Fullerton is the only university in Orange County 
accredited by the American Assembly of Collegiate Schools of Busi- 
ness. This assures a rigorous program, a well-qualified faculty, 
high standards for students, and access to an extensive library 
system. The qualifications of the M.S. in Management Science 
faculty include advanced degrees in operations research, statistics 
and applied mathematics; extensive computer experience; and 
practical experience in business, industry and government. Cal 
State Fullerton is the only campus within The California State 
University offering an M.S. in Management Science. 

Most graduate courses in the School of Business Administration 
and Economics require “classified SBAE status” and are open 
only to students with classified standing in the M.S. in Manage- 
ment Science, M.S. in Taxation, M.A. in Economics, M.B.A. 
or M.S. in Accountancy programs. 


260 Management Science 


Students meeting the following requirements will be admitted to 
postbaccalaureate unclassified standing: 

1. Acceptable bachelor’s degree from an institution accredited 
by a regional accrediting association, or equivalent. 

2. Grade-point average of at least 2.5 in the last 60 semester 
units attempted and in good standing at last college attended. 

Postbaccalaureate unclassified students may enroll in undergrad- 
uate courses (100 through 400 level) but are generally ineligible 
for graduate business courses (5(X) level). Such students may wish 
to take undergraduate courses which are necessary to meet the 
requirements for classified standing (see below). UpxDn complet- 
ing the requirements, the student may file an “Application for 
Change of Academic Objective Graduate” requesting admission 
to the M.S. in Management Science program. Admission to the 
university as a postbaccalaureate unclassified student does not 
constitute admission to the M.S. in Management Science pro- 
gram, does not confer priority, nor does it guarantee future 
admission. Students planning to apply for admission to the M.S. 
in Management Science program should confer with the graduate 
adviser in the School of Business Administration and Economics. 

Students meeting the following additional requirements will be 
admitted to the M.S. in Management Science program with 
conditionally classified standing: 

3. Combination of grade-point average and score on the Gradu- 
ate Management Admission Test (GMAT) sufficient to yield a 
score of at least 950 according to one of the following formu- 
las. Due to limited facilities and resources in the School of 
Business Administration and Economics, a higher score may be 
required of all applicants. 

A. If overall undergraduate GPA is at least 2.5 and GMAT is 
at least 450, then score = (GPA x 200) + GMAT. 

B. If overall undergraduate GPA is below 2.5 or GMAT is 
below 450, then score = (GPA x 2(X)) + GMAT — 50. 

C. If GPA is based on the last 60 semester units of course 
work,* then score = (GPA x 200) ■+■ GMAT - 100. 

Conditionally classified students may take a limited number of 
graduate courses (5(X) level) subject to the approval of the gradu- 
ate adviser of the School of Business Administration and Eco- 
nomics. Students may take whatever courses are necessary to 

‘All work within any given quarter or semester must be included even though that 
will result in more than 60 semester units. The units to be included in the last 60 
semester units may come only from the following: (1) work taken in postbaccalaut' 
eate status during the last seven years to be used to fulfill M.S. in Management 
Science course work requirements; (2) units taken under a prescribed remedial 
program agreed to by the Associate Dean, School of Business Administration and 
Economics;(3) units earned prior to the bachelor's degree. 


fulfill requirement 4 (below) while enrolled as conditionally clas- 
sified students. In addition, a maximum of 9 units (three courses) 
from the M.S. in Management Science curriculum may be taken 
while in conditionally classified standing. 

Students meeting the following additional requirements will be 
advanced to classified standing. Such students are eligible to take 
graduate courses for which they are qualified. 

4. A bachelor’s degree with a major in business administration 
which meets the requirements stated in this catalog for such 
degrees. The degree must include calculus and computer pro- 
gramming equivalent to passing Mathematics 135, Business 
Calculus (3 units), and Management Science 265 Intrcxluc- 
tion to Information Systems and Computer Programming (3 
units), with grades of at least C. Courses in the major are to be 
no more than seven years old, and must have at least a 3.0 
GPA. Courses with grades lower than C must be repeated 
with at least a C grade. Applicants with a bachelors degree in a 
field other than Business Administration may meet this require- 
ment by passing the courses in calculus and computer pro- 
gramming (above) with grades of at least C, and also the 
Foundation Courses within the curriculum of the Master of 
Business Administration (27 units, including Accounting 
510; Business Admin 590; Economics 515; Finance 517; 
Management 516, 518; Management Science 513, 515 and 
Marketing 519). The MBA Foundation Courses must have at 
least a 3.0 GPA; Foundation Courses with grades lower than a 
C must be repeated with at least a C grade. 

5. Approval of study plan. 

Curriculum 

The curriculum requires 30 semester units of course work beyond 
the baccalaureate degree. At least 18 of the 30 units required for 
the degree must be at the graduate level. A grade-point average of 
3.0 (B) is required. Any study plan course in which a D is 
received must be repeated and must receive at least a C grade 
regardless of the overall GPA of the student. 

The requirement for a concentration is to satisfactorily complete 
at least 15 units of courses (required and/or elective) in a specified 
field: Management Information Systems, Operations Research or 
Statistics. A concentration is not required for the degree. 

Required Courses (9 units) 

Manag Sci 526 Forecasting, Decision Analysis and 
Experimental Design (3) 

Manag Sci 550 Special Topics on Information Systems 
Design and Data Communication (3) 

Manag Sci 560 Advanced Deterministic Models (3) 
or Manag Sci 561 Advanced Probabilistic Models (3) 


Management Science 261 


Management Science Applications and Electives (18 units) 
Courses to be selected in consultation with, and approved by, the 
student’s adviser from the following: 

Applications in Business and Economics (3 units) 

Accounting 511 Seminar in Managerial Accounting (3) 

Note: Students with credit for cost accounting may substitute 
Accounting 521, Seminar in Administrative Accounting (3) 

Economics 502 Adv. Microeconomic Analysis (3) 

Finance 523 Seminar in Corpx^rate Financial Management 
(3) 

Management 444 Project Management (3) 
or Marketing 525 Seminar in Marketing Problems (3) 

Electives (15 units) 

Courses may be chosen from one or more of the following fields: 
Operations Research: 

A general approach to decision-making based on scientific method. 

Manag Sci 465 Linear Programming in Management 
Science (3) 

Manag Sci 490 Queueing and StcKhastic Models in 
Management Science (3) 

Manag Sci 560 Advanced Deterministic Models (3) 

Manag Sci 561 Advanced Probabilistic Mcxlels (3) 

Management Information Systems: 

Q^mputer methcxls for collecting, analyzing and reporting data 
to aid in management decision making. 


Manag Sci 408 Data Base Management Systems (3) 
or Manag Sci 555 Data Structures and Data Base 
Management (3) 

Manag Sci 409 Telecommunications and Business 
Applications (3) 

Manag Sci 41 1 Advanced Microcomputer Concepts and 
Applications (3) 

Manag Sci 415 Decision Support and Expert Systems (3) 
Manag Sci 416 Computer Performance Evaluation (3) 
Manag Sci 418 Privacy and Security (3) 

Statistics: 

Collecting, analyzing, and interpreting data. 


Manag Sci 422 
Applications 
Manag Sci 461 
(4) 

Manag Sci 467 
Manag Sci 472 
Manag Sci 473 
Manag Sci 475 


Surveys and Sampling Design and 
(3) 

Statistical Theory for Management Science 

Statistical Quality Control (3) 

Design of Experiments (3) 

Applied Statistical Forecasting (3) 
Multivariate Analysis (3) 


Variable Topic: 

Manag Sci 590 Seminar in Management Science (3) 
Terminal Evaluation 

Manag Sci 576 Business Modeling and Simulation (3) 
Comprehensive Exam 


Management Science Courses 

263 Introduction to Information Systems and Micro- 
Computer Applications (2) 

Concepts of micro and mainframe computers and peripheral 
equipment; hardware and software concepts; representation of 
data; auxiliary storage and file organization; data communica- 
tions. Hands-on examples of business applications in micro-com- 
puter classroom. Students may not receive credit for both Man- 
agement Science 263 and 265. 

265 Introduction to Information Systems and Computer 
Programming (3) 

Introduction to information systems; computer organization and 
problem-solving concepts; computer programming in the BASIC 
language, including file processing; applications to business data 
processing. Micro computer applications and hands-on examples 
in a microcomputer classroom. 

265L Computer Programming Lab ( 1 ) 

Corequisite: Management Science 265. Hands-on computer pro- 
gramming experience for common business problems using 
spread sheets, word processing, BASIC, data base management 
and graphics software. 

270 File Concepts and COBOL Programming (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 264 or 265 or Computer Sci- 
ence 1 12 or equivalent. Structured COBOL; multiple-level table 
handling, subscripting and indexing; file organization documen- 
tation; report generation; sequential file updating. 

309 Elements of Information System Design (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 270. Passing grade on MIS 
qualifying exam. Data management, operating systems, sorting 
and searching techniques, use of storage devices, interface equip- 
ment, random access and sequential titles, data structures; CO- 
BOL project required. 

361 Probability and Statistical Methods in Business and 
Economics (4) 

Prerequisites: Math 135 and Management Science 265 or equiv- 
alents. Probability concepts; expectations; descriptive statistics; dis- 
crete and continuous random variables; sampling; estimation; hy- 
pothesis testing; simple and multiple regression; time series; fore- 
casting; nonparametric statistics. 


262 Management Science 


362 Management Science Methods in Business and 
Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 361 (may be taken concur- 
rently). Mathematical methods and their application to business 
and economic problems, e.g., production control, scheduling, 
inventory control, PERT, decision and network analyses, simula- 
tion and queueing. Elementary mathematical optimization and 
production models. 

365 Advanced BASIC Programming (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 265. Advanced BASIC fea- 
tures: sequential and relative files, sorting and searching, error 
checking and business system design. 

370 Advanced COBOL Programming (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 270 or equivalent. Advanced 
COBOL features: Indexed and direct file processing, report writ- 
er, sort feature, declarative and linkage sections, segmentation. 
Overlay structure, survey of job control language, libraries. Di- 
rect access. Hardware devices. 

408 Data Base Management Systems (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 309. Integrated data base 
systems; logical organization; data description language (DDL); 
data manipulation language (DML); data independence; rela- 
tional data bases; selected data base management systems 
(DBMS). 

409 Telecommunications & Business Applications (3) 
Prerequisite: Management Science 309. Communications de- 
sign, concepts and hardware, telecommunications protocol, net- 
work architectures and configurations, LANs security and con- 
trol, communication services, voice and electronic mail. 

411 Advanced Microcomputer Concepts & Applications (3) 
Prerequisite: Management Science 365 or 370. This course focus- 
es on contemporary issues in end user computing characterized by 
microcomputer work statistics. Current hardware/software trends 
will be analyzed within an industry and systems perspective. 

415 Decision Support and Expert Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 309. Principles and proce- 
dures related to the design and use of expert systems and decision 
support systems principles in management decision making; de- 
velopment of expert systems using shells. 

416 Computer Performance Evaluation (3) 

(Same as Computer Science 416) 

418 Privacy and Security (3) 

Corequisite: Management Science 309. Security and privacy 
problems associated with the use of computer systems; ways to 
minimize risks and losses. 


422 Surveys and Sampling Design and Applications (3) 
Prerequisite: Management Science 361. Principles for designing 
business and economic surveys. Applications in accounting, 
marketing research, economic statistics and the social sciences. 
Sampling; simple random, stratified and multistage design; con- 
struction of sampling frames; detecting and controlling non-sam- 
pling errors. 

440 Intermediate Management Science Models (3) 
Prerequisite: Management Science 362. Intermediate manage- 
ment science modeling and solution techniques, including topics 
in linear and non-linear programming, integer programming, 
dynamic programming, Markov processes, queueing theory, and 
inventory models. 

441 Intermediate Statistical Methods (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 362. Intermediate linear re- 
gression and topics in experimental design, quality control, time 
series analysis, forecasting, and statistical decision theory. 

448 Computer Simulation in Business and Economics (3) 
Prerequisites: Management Science 264 and 361 (or equivalents) 
and Management Science 362. Computer generation of discrete 
and continuous random variables, their use in computer simula- 
tion. Applications include queueing, communications, comput- 
er systems, economics, gaming, inventory, scheduling and other 
management science topics. 

461 Statistical Theory for Management Science (4) 
Prerequisite: Management Science 361. Review of mathematical 
topics needed for statistical theory. Distribution, theory, moment 
generating functions, central limit theorem. Estimation theory, 
maximum likelihood, least squares estimation. Hypothesis test- 
ing, Neyman- Pearson Lemma. Likelihood ratio tests. Use of sta- 
tistical software packages. 

465 Linear Programming in Management Science (3) 
(Formerly 580) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 362 or Mathematics 250B 
and Computer Science 112. Mathematical and theoretical foun- 
dations for linear programming; geometric and linear algebraic 
approaches and proofs; simplex method, duality, sensitivity and 
parametric analyses, extensions to specialized algorithms, and 
large scale models; practical and computer based applications will 
be discussed. 

467 Statistical Quality Control (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 361. Control charts for varia- 
bles, percent defective and defects. Tolerances, process capacity; 
special control charts, acceptance sampling and batch processing 
problems. Bayesian aspects of process control. 

472 Design of Experiments (3) (Formerly 572) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 441 or equivalent. Experi- 
mental design. Analysis of variance, factorial experiments, nest- 
ed designs, confounding and factorial replications. 


Management Science 263 


473 Applied Statistical Forecasting (3) (Formerly 420) 
Prerequisite: Management Science 441 or equivalent. Statistical 
methods applied to problems in business and industry; practical 
multiple regression mtxlels with computer solutions; basic tecb- 
niques in time-series analysis of trend, cyclical and seasonal compo- 
nents; correlation of time-series and forecasting with the computer. 

475 Multivariate Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 441 or equivalent. The least 
squares principle; estimation and bypc)tbesis testing in linear 
regression; multiple and curvilinear regression models; discrimi- 
nant analysis; principle components analysis; application of mul- 
tivariate analysis in business and industry. 

490 Queueing and Stochastic Models in Management 
Science (3) (Formerly 585) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 362 or Mathematics 335. 
Probabilistic mcxlels in management science; theoretical founda- 
tion and model development for Poisson priKess models, birth- 
death nuxlels, Markovian and general queuing situations, and 
Markov chains; renewal theory and/or reliability mcxlels; practi- 
cal business applications. 

495 Internship ( 1-3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 361 and 362, and major in 
management science, or Management Science 309 and major in 
management information systems or a major in international 
business, consent of department internship adviser, and at least 
junic^r standing, 2.5 GPA and one semester in residence at the 
university. Planned and supervised wcxk experience. May be 
repeated for credit up to a total of six units. Credit/No Credit 
grading cmly. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 361 and 362, senior stand- 
ing, and approval by the department chair. Open to qualified 
students desiring to pursue directed independent inquiry. May be 
repeated for credit. Ncx c^pen to students on academic probation. 

513 Statistical Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 135, Management Science 265 (or equiv- 
alents) and classified SBAE status. Basic probability and descrip- 
tive statistics; sampling techniques; estimation and hypothesis 
testing; simple and multiple regression, correlation analysis; 
computer packages and other optional topics. 

514 Decision Models for Business and Economics (3) 
Prerequisites: Management Science 513 and classified SBAE sta- 
tus. Linear programming; inventory; PERT-CPM; queueing; sim- 
ulation, computer application, forecasting; time series, and other 
optional topics. 

515 Management of Information in the Corporate 
Environment (3) 

Prerequisite: Classified SBAE status. Review and application of 
management information systems in business. System planning, 
system design and analysis, use of files, decision support systems, 
expert systems, and implementation of management information 
systems. 


526 Forecasting, Decision Analysis, and Experimental 
Design (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 514 and classified SBAE sta- 
tus. Time series analysis. Trend, cyclical and seasonal compo- 
nents. Statistical decision theory. Fundamental principles of ex- 
perimental design; interaction. Software packages. 

550 Special Topics on Information Systems Design and Data 
Communication (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 514 and classified SBAE stand- 
ing. Information storage requirements; disk timing considerations; 
file organization and processing characteristics; data structures; 
modem data communication systems; computer networks. 

555 Data Structures and Data Base Management (3) 
Prerequisites: Management Science 550 and classified SBAE 
standing. File structures. Multiple-key retrieval file organiza- 
tions; Data Description Language (DDL) and Data Manipulation 
Language (DML); data independence; hierarchial, network and 
relational data bases. Students may not receive credit for both 
Management Science 408 and 555. 

560 Advanced Deterministic Models (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 514 and classified SBAE 
standing. Advanced linear programming, dynamic program- 
ming, integer programming, non-linear programming, business 
applications. SiTtware packages and computer utilization. 

561 Advanced Probabilistic Models (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 514 and classified SBAE 
standing. Stochastic processes, Markov processes, advanced 
queueing and inventory mcxlels. Reliability. Software packages 
and computer utilization. 

576 Business Mcxleling and Simulation (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 513 or equivalent. Theory 
and application of mcxleling and simulation methcxlology. Proba- 
bilistic concepts in simulation; arrival pattern and service times; 
simulation languages and programming techniques; analysis of 
output; business applications. 

590 Seminar in Management Science (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 526 and 560 and classified 
SBAE status. Selected advanced topics and/or case studies in 
operations research, statistics, and/or management information 
systems, varying from semester to semester. May be repeated for 
credit with consent of instructor. 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: classified SBAE status. Directed independent inqui- 
ry. Not open to students on academic probation. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status, consent of department 
chair and Associate Dean, Graduate Studies. May be repeated for 
credit. Not open to students on academic probation. 


264 Management Science 


Department of Marketing 



Department Chair: Irene Lange 
Department Office: Langsdorf Hall 626 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Business Administration 
Concentration in Marketing 
Master of Business Administration 
Concentration in Marketing 

Faculty 

Catherine Atwong, Robert Barath, Grady Bruce, Scott 
Greene, Katrin Harich, Paul Hugstad, Robert Jones, 

Chiranjeev Kohli, Douglas LaBahn, Irene Lange, Lance 
Leuthesser, James Taylor, Robert Zimmer 

Advisers 

The Business Advising Center, Langsdorf Hall 700, provides 
information on admissions, curriculum and graduation require^ 
ments, registration and grading procedures, residence and similar 
academic matters. In addition, the Marketing Department prO' 
vides advising on curriculum content and career opportunities. 

INTRODUCTION 

Marketing is a basic business function covering a wide range of 
activities. It includes studying markets, planning products, pric- 
ing them, promoting them, selling them, and then delivering 
these products to customers. People in wholesaling, retailing, 
advertising agencies, research firms and transportation compan- 
ies are all working in the marketing area. Any firm which is 
reviewing its product pK)licies needs marketers to identify the 
market, choose the products, find where they can be sold and 
decide on a price for them. 


Credential Information 

For students interested in a teaching credential, the Department 
of Marketing offers courses which may be included in the Single 
Subject Waiver Program in Business. 

Further information on the requirements for teaching credentials 
is found in the Teaching Programs section of the catalog and is 
also available from the Department of Secondary Education. 
Students interested in exploring careers in teaching at the ele- 
mentary or secondary school levels should contact the Office of 
Admission to Teacher Education. 


Marketing 265 


Prizes in Marketing 

The Michael T. Ashton Memorial Scholarship for Outstanding 
Leadership 

The Gordon S. Fyfe Memorial Award for Outstanding 
Academic Achievement 
Outstanding Marketing Student Award 
International Marketing AsscKiation Award 
The Robert M. Olsen Scholarship Fund Award 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration, Marketing Concentration.” 

MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION DEGREE 
See “Business Administration, Marketing Concentration.” 


Marketing Courses 

35 1 Principles of Marketing (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 202 or 210; corequisite: Management 
Science 361 . Analyzes how managers of business enterprises can 
effectively market gcHxls and services domestically and interna- 
tionally to target customers. Covers marketing research, new 
prtxluct development, brand management, pricing, promotion, 
and distribution channels. The role of marketing is critically 
examined from the consumer, economics, legal, political and 
ethical/scKial resptmsibility perspectives. 

353 Marketing Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 361; corequisite: Marketing 
35 1 with a grade of “C” or better. Examination of information 
sources and applications for the marketer. Emphasis on trans- 
forming data into business plans. Topics include use of computer- 
ized data bases, sales forecasting, interpretation of survey data 
and the creation of marketing presentations. Extensive computer 
applications. 

370 Buyer Behavior (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351 and 353 with a grade of “C” or 
better. Consumer buying patterns, motivation and search behav- 
ior. The consumer decision-making process. Interdisciplinary 
concepts from economics, sociology, psychology, cultural anthro- 
pology and mass communications. Case analyses and research 
projects. 

379 Marketing Research Methods (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 351, 353 with a grade of “C” or better 
and Management Science 361. Marketing research process: 
problem formulation, identifying sources, selecting data collec- 
tion, analysis techniques, preparing research reports. Selecting 
marketing problems for research. 


401 Professional Selling (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351, 353, 370 and 379 with a grade of 
“C” or better. Salesmanship as an interpersonal influence pro- 
cess. Selling using principles of human behavior. Selling skills 
and techniques. 

405 Managing Advertising (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351, 353, 370 and 379 with a grade of 
“C” or better. Examines the management of the advertising func- 
tion within the overall marketing task. Emphasis is given to 
managing distribution, managing the budget and managing cre- 
ativity. Advertiser, advertising agency and media relationships 
are considered. International advertising is reviewed. 

415 Managing the Sales Force (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351, 353, 370 and 379 with a grade of 
“C” or better. The sales manager’s role in the organization; re- 
cruiting and selecting sales people; sales training; formulating 
compensation and expense plans; supervising and stimulating 
sales activities; morale; sales planning; evaluating sales people; 
and distribution cost analysis. 

425 Retail Marketing Strategy (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351, 353, 370 and 379 with a grade of 
“C” or better. Examines the retailer’s role in the marketing sys- 
tem from a management p)erspective; developing integrated mar- 
keting and financial strategies; positioning the retail offer to 
convey meaning to target customers; merchandise management 
and control; and addressing changing market conditions — do- 
mestic and international. 

435 Business Marketing Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 351, 353, 370 and 379 with a grade of 
“C” or better. Examines the decision making implications in the 
business and organizational market as they apply to market seg- 
mentation, marketing planning and overall strategy formulation. 
The substrategies of product, price, promotion and distribution 
are discussed. International implications are considered. 

445 Multinational Marketing Strategies (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing Majors: Marketing 351, 353, 370 and 
379 with a grade of “C” or better. International Business Majors: 
Marketing 351 with a grade of “C” or better. Economics 335 and 
Finance 370. Theories of international trade and role of market- 
ing decisions across national boundaries and markets. Focuses on 
concepts and principles of marketing strategies in multinational 
organizations from market assessments, entry alternatives, posi- 
tions of global interdependence, marketing problems and ethical 
implications. Integrative cases, individual and team efforts em- 
phasized. 

465 Managing Services Marketing (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351, 353, 370 and 379 with a grade of 
“C” or better. Explores the differences between marketing ser- 
vices and marketing products. Also examines organizational re- 
quirements of firms that market services in contrast with market- 
ing products. Considers the implications of marketing services 
internationally. 


266 Marketing 


475 Export Marketing Strategies (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351, 353, 370 and 379 with a grade of 
“C” or better. Increases the student’s awareness of international 
trading trends, the importance of trade worldwide. Emphasis is 
on entrepreneurial aspects and organizational structure to ap' 
praise markets, evaluate alternative export strategies and under- 
stand planning process. Includes documentation, financial con- 
siderations, government regulations. 

489 Developing Marketing Strategies (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 351, 353, 370, 379 and one 400-level 
marketing course, all with “C” grade or better and senior stand- 
ing. Focuses on analysis of a wide variety of business situations. 
Analysis is followed by the development of a variety of possible 
marketing strategies. Extensive international orientation. Relies 
heavily on case studies and group interaction. 

495 Internship (1-3) 

Prerequisites: six units of upper division marketing courses, includ- 
ing Marketing 351, major in marketing or international business, 
consent of department internship adviser, and at least junior stand- 
ing, 2.5 GPA and one semester in residence at Cal State Fullerton. 
Planned and supervised work experience. May be repeated for credit 
up to a total of six units. Credit/No Credit only. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: marketing concentration, senior standing and ap- 
proval by the department chair. Open to undergraduate students 
desiring to pursue directed independent inquiry. May be repeated 
for credit. Not open to students on academic probation. 

519 Marketing Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 510, Economics 515, Manag Sci 513, 
514, Management 516, 518 (may be taken concurrently) and 
classified SBAE status. Concepts, principles and techniques used 
in the administration of the marketing variables. The role of 
marketing within the context of society and the business firm, 
social responsibility of business and international marketing. 


525 Seminar in Marketing Problems (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 519 and classified SBAE status. Utilizes 
major marketing concepts: product development, market analy- 
sis, demand determination, pricing decisions, promotion activi- 
ties, distribution channels and organizational requirements. Stu- 
dents develop analytical skills by working with marketing and 
business problems from domestic and global perspectives. Lecture 
and case method. 

555 Marketing Strategy and Planning (3) 

Prerequisite: Classified SBAE status. Analysis of business situations 
and development of marketing strategy to gain competitive advan- 
tage. Uses strategy development tools such as experience curves, 
PLC, BCG grid, GE business policy directional matrix among oth- 
ers. Extensive use of case analysis and decision making. 


596 Contemporary Topics in Marketing (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 519 or equivalent; classified SBAE sta- 
tus. Topics in areas such as marketing of services, public policy 
and consumer issues and strategic planning. May be repeated for 
credit. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status, consent of instructor and 
approval by department chair and Associate Dean, Graduate 
Studies. May be repeated for credit. Not open to students on 
academic probation. 


Marketing 267 


■ . :r.- : 





'•f 


•] •' 





,ai>^ ,...e<*^ 







,*4^0^ 


Qa 


I .ea^, i»<i^ School of M (io-- I r 

Ga Communications ..6a^ « 


'>J>: 


}(f 


e>H 


Gat^ 


l(M® , ,Gaf^, 




jU^*' 


-«“'‘*ti»'C.ea> 


G«f^ tjacr 

ea>’Sa«.^< 


G< 




Wi 




G< 




G< 






"lOO' 

>^>fi 





School of 
Communications 

Dean: Elizabeth W. Mechling 
Associate Dean: Rick D. Pullen 

Programs offered 
Bachelor of Arts In Communications 

Concentrations in: Advertising 
Journalism 

Photocommun ications 
Public Relations 
RadiO'Television'Film 

Bachelor of Arts in Communicative Disorders 
Bachelor of Arts in Speech Communication 
Master of Arts in Communications 

Concentrations in: Advertising 
Journalism 
Public Relations 
Radio-Television'Film 

Master of Arts in Communicative Disorders 

Clinical Rehabilitative Services Credential (CRSC) with Spe- 
cial Class Authorization (SCA) 

Master of Arts in Speech Communication 
Minor in Speech Communication 
Waiver Program for the Single Subject Credential 

The School of Communications is committed to advancing a 
democratic society by preparing students to function in a wide 
variety of communication professions. With a strong tradition in 
the liberal arts and social sciences, the academic programs of the 
School share a common theoretical base which identifies the 
elements of human communication and the principles governing 
their use in all communicative processes essential to contempo- 
rary society, namely, the spoken and written word and visual 
images. Specialized programs in advertising, communication the- 
ory and process, intercultural, interpersonal, organizational com- 
munication, communication studies, communicative disorders, 
news-editorial, photocommunications, public relations, and ra- 
dio-television-film make up the basic curricula of the School. 
These programs of study lead to traditional academic degrees for 
undergraduates and graduates, to state credentials and licenses, 
to professional certification, and to entry into graduate and pro- 
fessional degree programs. 



School of Communications 271 


Academic programs in the School of Communications prepare 
students to function as communication professionals in the fields 
of business, education, government, and the health^related prO' 
fessions. Undergraduate and graduate degrees are offered in Com- 
munications, Communicative Disorders, and Sp)eech Communi- 
cation. Ancillary education experiences are available through 
the campus daily newspaper, television facilities, forensics pro- 
gram (debate), speech and hearing clinic, and internships in 
professional settings. 

The SchcK)l also serves as a locus for the surrounding professional 
community in which leaders in the communication professions 
provide and receive advice and counsel on matters related to 
public interest, curricular development, career interests, and op- 
portunities for service to the greater good of the community as a 
whole. 

The Schcxil is dedicated to the principles of academic excellence 
and sees its fundamental mission as preparing citizens to function 
as effective communicators who practice their disciplines in ac- 
cordance with the highest ethical codes of professional and per- 
sonal conduct. 

Advisement 

Undergraduate students may call their department office for the 
name of their adviser, who will assist in developing a program of 
study. University policy requires students to see an adviser each of 
their first two semesters and every year thereafter. Three critical 
times for advising are before registering for the first semester, 
when selecting electives for the study plan, and two semesters 
before graduation for a graduation check. 

Graduate students should make contact with their department 
graduate adviser to arrange for advisement prior to entry into the 
master’s degree programs. 

Student Organizations 

The Schtx>l of Communications supports a large number of stu- 
dent organizations and activities which provide a wide variety of 
pre-professional opportunities for academic advancement. They 
include; the Advertising Club: National Student Speech- 


Language-Hearing Association; Association of Speech Commu- 
nication Students; Broadcast Production Association; Communis 
cations Week; Daily Titan; Debate (forensics); International Asso- 
ciation of Business Communicators; Latino Communications So- 
ciety; National Press Photographers Association; Photography 
Club; Public Relations Student Society of America; Society of 
Professional Journalists; and Women in Communication, Inc. 

Accreditation 

TTie Department of Communications is accredited by the Ac- 
crediting Council on Education in journalism and Mass Commu- 
nications. TEie Communicative Disorders program in the Depart- 
ment of Speech Communication is accredited by the American 
Speech-Language-Hearing Association. 

Internships 

A wide variety of student internships are available throughout 
Southern California. In the Department of Communications, 
students are required to complete an internship, unless specifical- 
ly waived from doing so, normally as the culminating undergrad- 
uate experience. The Speech Communications internship is nor- 
mally taken sometime in the junior or senior year. 

Scholarships and Awards 

Some $30,0(X) in scholarships and awards is presented annually 
to students in the School of Communications. Among the spon- 
sors of scholarships are the Advertising Club of Orange County, 
the Business/Professional Advertising Association of Orange 
County, the Hearst Foundation, the Orange County chapter of 
the Public Relations Society of America. Awards annually are 
presented to students who excel in academic and pre-professional 
activities in the two departments. 

Facilities 

The School of Communications is equipped with mcxlern labora- 
tory facilities including a sophisticated speech and hearing clinic; 
large and comprehensive photography darkroom and studio fa- 
cility; two 20-station computerized writing laboratories; a Mac- 
intosh-based graphics laboratory; a television studio, control 
room, and video editing bays; a film editing labcuatory; and a 
daily newspaper newsroom and production area. 


272 School of Communications 


Department of 
Communications 



Department Chair: Terry Hynes 
Department Office: Humanities 230 
Daily Titan Newsroom: Humanities 213 
Daily Titan Business Manager: Humanities 211 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Communications 

Concentrations: Advertising 

Journalism 

Photocommunications 
Public Relations 
Radio-TelevisionTilm 

Master of Arts in Communications 

Concentrations: Advertising 

Journalism 
Public Relations 
Radio-TelevisionTilm 


Faculty 

Carl Burrowes, Wendell Crow, David DeVries, Ronald Dyas, 
Tony Fellow, Edward Fink, Joanne Gula, Terry Hynes, Carolyn 
Johnson, Paul Lester, Sirish Mani, George Manross, George 
Mastroianni, Norman Nager, Coral Ohl, Wayne Overbeck, 
Robert Picard, David Pincus, Rick Pullen, Tony Rimmer, 
Marvin Rosen, Shay Sayre, Don Sunoo, Edgar Trotter, Larry 
Ward, Fred Zandpour 

Advisers 

Undergraduate: All faculty serve as undergraduate advisers. StU' 
dents may find their assigned concentration adviser posted on the 
bulletin board outside Humanities 230. 

Graduate: Tony Rimmer 


Additional advising services are available in the School of Com- 
munications Advising Center, Humanities 328. 

INTRODUCTION 

Effective ethical communications are essential for the well-being 
of a democratic society. Thus, there is a need for persons trained 
in the theory and practice of informing, instructing, and persuad- 
ing through communications media. The educational objectives 
of the programs leading to the Bachelor of Arts in Communica- 
tions are: (1) to ensure that all majors receive a broad liberal 
education; (2) to provide majors with a clear understanding of 
the role of communications media in society ;and (3) to prepare 
majors desiring communications-related careers in the mass me- 
dia, business, government and education by educating them in- 
depth in one of the specialized sequences within the department. 


Communications 273 


BACHELOR OF ARTS IN COMMUNICATIONS 

A communications major is required to take 1 1 units of core 
requirements in addition to 23 units in a chosen concentration. 
The department offers five concentrations: advertising, journal- 
ism, photcKommunications, public relations, and radio-televi- 
sion-film. Students may substitute a broadcast journalism pro- 
gram shared between the journalism and radio-television-film 
concentrations. The major totals 36 units. 

Q)llateral requirements: Twelve units of upper-division course 
work in other departments approved by the student’s concentra- 
tion adviser are also required. Collateral courses are listed on 
advising materials available in Humanities 230. 

Every major must take a minimum of 84 units outside communi- 
cations out of the 124 units required for graduation. Of this 84 
units, 65 must be in the traditional liberal arts, humanities & 
sciences. Students should consult their concentration adviser 
and the School of Qimmunications Advisement Center early in 
their course work to be sure they meet these requirements. 

Communications Core 

The communications core provides background and perspective 
appropriate to all the departmental concentrations and an under- 
standing of the role of communicators and their contributions to 
the development of high standards of professionalism. 

Nine units of required course work: 

Comm 233 Mass Comm in Mcxlern Society (3) 

Comm 407 Communications Law (3) 

Comm 425 History and Philos^^phy of American 
Mass Communication (3) 

Plus three units selected from the following: 

Comm 300 Visual Communication (3) 

Comm 410 Principles of Comm Research (3) 

Comm 426 World Communication Systems (3) 

Comm 427 Current Issues in Mass Comm (3) 

Comm 428 Communications and Social Change (3) 
Comm 476 Children’s Television (3) 

Comm 480 Persuasive Q)mmunications (3) 

Communications Concentrations 

Every communications major must select and complete 24 units 
of course work in a major concentration. 

Advertising 

The objective of the advertising concentration is to prepare stu- 
dents for entry-level positions in one or more of the four basic 
advertising activities: creative (copy, layout design), media, re- 
search, and management. Students are provided with knowledge 
and skills needed for work with an advertiser, advertising agency, 
the print and broadcast media, or support service industry. 


Comm 350 Principles of Advertising (3) 

Comm 351 Writing for the Advertising Industry (3) 
Comm 352 Advertising Media (3) 

Comm 353 Advertising Copy and Layout (3) 

Comm 439 Mass Media Internship (3) 

Comm 451 National Advertising Campaigns (3) 

Plus six Communications units in Creative Emphasis or Media 
Planning and Account Management Emphasis: 

And twelve collateral units of upper-division courses beyond gen- 
eral education. Six of these units must be in general studio art for 
the creative advertising emphasis. Six of these units must be in 
management/marketing in the School of Business and Economics 
for the media planning and account management emphasis. The 
remaining six units must be selected from the following list of 
approved courses: American Studies 301, 318, 345; Art 300, 
307A,B; 317A,B; 323A,B; 338A, 339A, 347A,B; 363A,B; 
438A,B; Economics 310; English 301; Managment 340; Market- 
ing 351, 401, 379, 425, 435, 445; Philosophy 312; Political 
Science 310; Psychology 351, 361; Sociology 345, 372, 436; 
Speech Communication 320, 333. Courses not listed must be 
approved in advance by a concentration adviser. 

Journalism 

The principal objective of the journalism concentration is to pro- 
vide the skills and practice necessary for careers in the print media. 
Specifically, the concentration objectives are: ( 1 ) to provide experi- 
ence in writing various types of news stories, and to develop skills in 
reporting and news gathering techniques; (2) to develop critical 
acumen necessary to check news stories for accuracy and correct- 
ness; (3) to develop skills in graphics or photography that comple- 
ment the journalistic writing skills; (4) to provide actual on-the-job 
experience by working on the campus newspaper and through an 
internship, and (5) to add breadth and depth to the professional’s 
specialized skills through collateral courses. 

Comm 101 Writing for the Mass Media (3) 

Comm 201 Reporting for the Mass Media (3) 

Comm 332 Copy Editing and Makeup (3) 

Comm 335 Public Affairs Reporting (3) 

Comm 338 Newspaper Production (3) 

Comm 439 Mass Media Internship (3) 

Plus three units from: Communications 217 or 
Comm 358 (with adviser’s consent). 

And three units from: Communications 334, 430, 435, 436. 

Students who want to pursue broadcast journalism may substitute 
the above concentration requirements with the following courses: 
Communications 101, 279, 302, 335, 371, 372, 382, and 439. 

And twelve collateral units of upper-division courses in four dif- 
ferent departments which must be selected from the following list 
of approved courses: American Studies 412; Economics 330, 335, 
350, 361; English 3(X), 303, 305, 423, 462, 463, 464; History 


274 Communications 


475, 476, 479, 484, 485B, 486, 487; Philosophy 300, 301, 304, 
345; Political Science 315, 340, 350, 375, 413, 440, 442, 443, 
451, 457, 461, 473; Religious Studies 390; Sociology 301, 341, 
345, 348. Courses not listed must be approved in advance by 
adviser. Students may substitute a University-approved minor 
with concentration adviser’s consent. 

Photocommunications 

The photocommunications concentration provides a compre- 
hensive study of the aesthetics, theories, and practices of con- 
temporary photography for professional careers in magazine and 
newspaper photojournalism, and advertising/commercial 
photography. 

Comm 101 Writing for the Mass Media (3) 

Comm 217 Introduction to Black and White 
Photography (3) 

Comm 319 Photojournalism (3) 

Comm 321 Advanced Color Photography (3) 

Comm 439 Mass Media Internship (3) 

Plus six units selected from the following: 

Comm 311, 326, 338, 340, 358, 409, 460. 

Plus one of the following classes: 

Comm 301, 334, 362. 

And twelve collateral units of upper-division courses beyond gen- 
eral education which must be selected from the following list of 
approved courses: American Studies 433; Anthropology 306; Art 
312, 470; Biology 41 1; Chemistry 301 A, B; Finance 310; Philos- 
ophy 311; Physics 411; Political Science 300, 310; Psychology 
303, 351; Sociology 345. Courses not listed must be approved in 
advance by a concentration adviser. 

Public Relations 

This concentration provides preparation in both theory and prac- 
tice of two-way communication and management counsel for 
prospective professional public relations careers in business, in- 
dustry, agency, government, and nonprofit sectors of society. 

Comm 101 Writing for Mass Media (3) 

Comm 361 Principles of Public Relations (3) 

Comm 362 Public Relations Writing (3) 

Comm 439 Mass Media Internship (3) 

Comm 464 Public Relations Management (3) 

Plus one writing course from among the following: 

Comm 301, 334, or 338 

Plus six units selected frxjm the following: 

Comm 217, 350, 358, 363, 410, 467, 468, 497 


And twelve collateral units of upper division courses beyond 
general education which must be selected from the following: Art 
323A,B; Economics 310, 320, 410; Finance 320, 340; Manage- 
ment 339, 340, 343; Marketing 351; Management Science 422; 
English 301, 360; Geography 370; Physical Ed 408; Political 
Science 309, 405, 448; Psychology 351, 391, 413, 472; Sociology 
341, 345, 348, 473; Speech Communication 300, 320, 324, 326, 
333, 334, 420. Courses not listed must be approved in advance by 
a concentration adviser. 

Radio-Television-Film 

Courses in this concentration are designed for an understanding 
of the history, theory and practice of radio-television and film. 
Students are prepared for entry level positions in business, educa- 
tion, and the broadcasting, cable and film industries. 

Comm 279 Introduction to Video Production (3) 

Comm 301 Writing for Broadcasting and Film (3) 
Comm 382 Broadcasting in America (3) 

Comm 402 Advanced Writing for Radio, TV and 
Film (3) 

Comm 439 Mass Media Internship (3) 

Plus nine units selected from the following: 

Comm 278, 311, 345, 375, 379, 383, 411, 476, 477, 478, 
484, 488 

And twelve collateral units of upper-division courses beyond gen- 
eral education which must be selected from the following list of 
approved courses: Art 312; Economics 320, 340, 350; English 
322, 463, 465; History 476, 485; Management 339, 340, 343, 
441; Marketing 351; Political Science 410, 414; Psychology 350, 
351; Sociology 348, 371, 436; Speech Communication 320, 324, 
325, 333; Theatre 364, 370A. Courses not listed must be ap- 
proved in advance by a concentration adviser. 

Students who want to pursue broadcast journalism may substitute 
the above concentration requirements with the following 
courses: Communications 101, 279, 302, 335, 371, 372, 382, 
and 439 as well as the collateral course requirements listed under 
the journalism concentration. 

Writing Requirements 

A communications major must satisfy both departmental and 
university writing requirements. A grade of C or better in English 
101 or an equivalent course is a prerequisite for all Communica- 
tions writing courses. Students who complete an equivalent to 
CSUFs English 101 at a community college or another four-year 
college/university must bring a copy of the relevant transcript to 
the department office. Humanities 230. 

University Writing Requirement: The course work portion of the 
university’s upper-division baccalaureate writing requirement for 
communications majors may be met by satisfactory completion of 
anyone of Communications 301, 334, 335, 338, 351, 362, 371, 
402, and 435. Students must earn a “C” or better in the course 
which is used to fulfill the university’s upper-division writing 
requirement. 


Communications 275 


MASTER OF ARTS IN COMMUNICATIONS 

The degree is designed to provide advanced study in communica' 
tions theory and research plus some concentration in one of the 
department’s sequences: advertising, journalism, public rela- 
tions, or radiO'televisionTilm. 

The program prepares the graduate to apply advanced communi- 
cations concepts, research and development skills, and theories 
relevant to the use of communications media for a wide variety of 
purposes. Such study may serve those whose careers involve the 
use of print, broadcast and film media of communications to 
inform, instruct and persuade. Communications skills are highly 
applicable to a wide range of careers in business, industry, govern- 
ment, education and the mass media. 

Students completing the Master of Arts in Communications are 
eligible for journalism teaching positions in community colleges. 

Admission to Graduate Standing: 

Conditionally Classified 

Normally, an applicant must meet grade-point average require- 
ments of 3.0 in the undergraduate major and 2.75 in the last 60 
semester units of undergraduate course work, meet the university 
requirements, and satisfactorily complete the Graduate Record 
Examination General Test prior to admission. Students must also 
submit three letters of recommendation and an essay (approxi- 
mately KXX) words) outlining reasons for pursuing the master’s 
degree. Consult department graduate program adviser for details 
regarding additional admission requirements. 

Graduate Standing: Classified 

A student admitted in conditionally classified standing may be 
granted classified standing upon the development of an approved 
study plan and satisfactory completion of prerequisite course 
work. Satisfactory coursework or its equivalent in the following 
may be taken concurrently with degree requirements if not com- 
pleted prior to classification: 

(a) communications writing (Comm 201, 301, 351, 

or 362) 

(b) an introductory course in the area of specialization 

(Comm 332, 350, 361 or 382) 

(c) Comm 410 Principles of Communication 

Research 

Study Plan 

The student is required to complete 30 units of approved studies 
with a minimum grade-point average of 3.0 including 15 units in 
5(X)-level communications courses. Six of the 15 units of 5(X)- 
level courses may be in thesis, three units may be in a project. 
The remaining units will be comprised of upper division or 500- 
level courses appropriate to the communications sequence. 


The carwdidate shall develop a program of study in consultation with 
a concentration adviser and the graduate adviser of the Department 
of Communications. The candidate shall plan the thesis or project 
topic with a committee. The committee will include at least two 
faculty members from the Department of Communications. 

Study plan requirements include the following: 

Core Courses (6 units) 

Comm 500 Theory and Literature of 
Communications 

Comm 508 Humanistic Research in 
Communications 

or Comm 509 Social Science Research in 
Communications 

Sequence^Related Courses (18 units) 

Comm 515T Professional Problems in Related Fields 
or approved 500-level alternate 
Comm 520A, B or C Communications Practicum 
or approved alternate 

Consult the Communications Department Master’s Pro- 
gram bulletin for additional sequence requirements. 

Electives (0-6 units) 

Project/Thesis/ Exam (0-6 units) 

Comm 597 Project (3) 
or Comm 598 Thesis (6) 
or Comprehensive Exam 

For further information and advisement, please consult the grad- 
uate program adviser. 


Communications Courses 

101 Writing for the Mass Media (3) 

Prerequisite: English 101 or equivalent with a grade of C or 
better; typing ability. Principles and practices of writing for major 
types of mass communications media. Content, organization, 
conciseness and clarity. (CAN JOUR 2) 

201 Reporting for the Mass Media (3) 

Prerequisites: English 101 or equivalent with a grade of C or 
better; Communications 101 or equivalent; typing ability. Devel- 
opment of expertise in the use of news reporting techniques 
combined with development of ability to compose complex jour- 
nalistic writing forms for possible publication. 


276 Communications 


217 Introduction to Black and White Photography (3) 
Cameras, accessories, materials, exposure, image, processing, 
printing, finishing, composition, filters, flash, studio techniques, 
and special subject treatments and applications. (2 hours lecture, 
2 hours activity) 

233 Mass Communication in Modem Society (3) 
Newspapers, magazines, films, radio and television; their signifi- 
cance as social instruments and economic entities in modern 
society. (CAN JOUR 4) 

278 Introduction to Audio Production (3) (Formerly 378) 
Prerequisite: Communications majors only. Audio production as 
it pertains to radio broadcasting, commercial production, and 
recording, television and film audio. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours 
laboratory) 

279 Introduction to Video Production (3) (Formerly 390) 
Production of programs for broadcast stations and other video 
materials for cable, business, industrial, and instructional appli- 
cations. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

300 Visual Communication (3) 

Prerequisite: Comm 233. A social and cultural analysis of the 
meaning, production and consumption of visual information in a 
modem media society. Still, moving, television, graphic design, 
cartoon, and computer images will be analyzed in terms of tech- 
nical, commercial, and cultural considerations. 

301 Writing for Broadcasting and Film (3) 

Prerequisite: English 101 or equivalent with a grade of C or 
better; typing ability. Theory and principles of writing in the 
broadcast and film media. 

302 Writing Broadcast News (3) 

Prerequisites: English 101 or equivalent with a grade of C or 
better; Comm 101 or equivalent; typing ability. Intensive jour- 
nalistic writing and reporting for radio and television. Emphasis 
on writing assignments for both audio and video tape. Lecture/ 
discussion of issues and responsibilities facing broadcast journal- 
ists. 

311 Introduction to Motion Picture Production (3) 

Theory and practice of motion picture photography and film 
production. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

319 Photojournalism (3) 

Prerequisite: Comm 217 or equivalent. Photography for publica- 
tion in print media. News, advertising, feature, sports, lifestyle, 
photo essay and documentary applications. (2 hours lecture, 3 
hours laboratory) 

321 Advanced Color Photography (3) 

Prerequisites: junior standing and Comm 319 or consent of in- 
structor. Positive and negative color film processing sensitometry, 
and color printing. Creative and effective use of color in publica- 
tions photography. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 


326 Communications Photography (3) 

Prerequisites: junior standing and Comm 321, or consent of 
instructor. Photographs and photographic communications pro- 
duced with the large format camera for the mass media, business, 
education, government, industry and science. (2 hours lecture, 3 
hours laboratory) 

332 Copy Editing and Makeup (3) 

Prerequisites: English 101 or equivalent with a grade of C or 
better; and Comm 201 or equivalent. Principles and practice of 
newspaper editing: copy improvement, headline writing, news 
photos and cutlines, wire services, typography, copy schedules 
and control, page design and layout, law and ethics. (2 hours 
lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

334 Feature Article Writing (3) 

Prerequisites: English 101 or equivalent with a grade of C or 
better; and Comm 101 or equivalent. Nonfiction writing for 
newspapers and magazines; sources, methods and markets. 

335 Public Affairs Reporting (3) 

Prerequisites: E